JP2021159536A - Game machine - Google Patents

Abstract

To provide a game machine capable of enhancing amusement of a game by improving control for shifting a state.SOLUTION: Performance execution means can execute a read-ahead performance on the basis of determination result information when receiving the determination result information, and restricts execution of a read-ahead performance based on determination result information when receiving the determination result information after receiving special information. By designing a second display period progressed by allowing characters to appear one after another so as to be longer than a first display period until character display is completed first after the character display is started first, a suitable group notice performance can be provided. In the group notice performance, a doubt regarding whether a performance is the group notice performance or a misunderstanding that only one person appears can be prevented since there is no situation in which only one person is displayed.SELECTED DRAWING: Figure 11-22

Description

The present invention relates to a gaming machine such as a pachinko gaming machine.

As a gaming machine, when a gaming medium such as a gaming ball is launched into the gaming area by a launching device, the gaming medium wins a prize in a winning area such as a winning opening provided in the gaming area, and an execution condition (starting condition) is satisfied. Pachinko that enhances the interest of the game by a so-called variable display game in which a plurality of types of identification information (hereinafter referred to as display symbols) are variably displayed on a variable display device and whether or not to give a predetermined game value is determined based on the display result. There is a game machine. In such a pachinko gaming machine, when the stop symbol mode when the variable display of the display symbol in the variable display game is completely stopped becomes a specific display mode, the pachinko gaming machine becomes an advantageous state (big hit game state) that is advantageous to the player. Then, after the end of the jackpot gaming state, there is a gaming machine that controls the variable display to a special state in which the variable display is more likely to be executed than in the normal state.

As such a gaming machine, a gaming machine that controls a special state without going through a jackpot gaming state has been proposed (see, for example, Patent Document 1).

Japanese Unexamined Patent Publication No. 2015-80649

However, in the gaming machine described in Patent Document 1, there is room for improvement in the control at the time of state transition.

The present invention has been made in view of the above circumstances, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine capable of improving control of state transition and improving gaming interest.

In order to achieve the above object, the gaming machine according to the present invention
It is a gaming machine (for example, pachinko gaming machine 1) that can perform variable display and control to an advantageous state that is advantageous to the player when a specific display result is displayed as the variable display result.
A game control means (for example, CPU 103) that controls the progress of the game,
It is provided with an effect executing means (for example, an effect control CPU 120 that executes an effect based on an effect control command) capable of executing an effect based on information from the game control means.
The game control means
Determining means for determining the advantageous state (for example, CPU 103 that executes the process of step S110) and
A determination means (for example, CPU 103 that executes the process of step S213) for determining that the advantageous state is obtained before the determination of the determination means, and
A state control means that can control a special state in which variable display is more likely to be executed than in a normal state (for example, CPU 103 that executes the process of step 059AKS025) and
Information transmitting means (for example, effect control) capable of transmitting a plurality of types of information including determination result information that can identify that the determination means is controlled to the advantageous state when the determination means is determined to be in the advantageous state. CPU 103 that sends commands, etc.), including
When a special display result different from the specific display result is displayed as the variable display result in the normal state, the state control means controls from the normal state to the special state based on the special display result ( For example, the process of step 059AKS025 is executed),
The determination means can determine that the state control means will be in the special state before the state control means controls the special state (for example, the process of step 059AKS001 is executed).
The information transmitting means can transmit special information that can be specified to be controlled to the special state when the determination means determines to be in the special state (for example, designating a display result of "loss (time reduction)"). Commands can be sent, etc.),
The effect executing means is
When the determination result information is received, the look-ahead effect can be executed based on the determination result information (for example, the process of step S161 can be executed).
When the determination result information is received after receiving the special information, the execution of the look-ahead effect based on the determination result information is restricted (for example, when it is determined Yes in step 059AKS082, the processing of step 059AKS084 and step S1304). Etc.),
The effect executing means does not execute the specific type of the look-ahead effect during the restriction of the look-ahead effect (for example, as shown in FIG. 11-23 (B), when the hold display change effect is restricted, “green” or Do not execute the type of hold display change effect that changes to the display mode such as "red"),
Moreover,
A group effect execution means (for example, a group advance notice execution process shown in FIG. 51, 6 shown in FIGS. 98 to 104) for executing a group effect (for example, a group advance notice effect) for displaying an image in which a plurality of characters progress as a group. With crowd notice production)
The display period of the image in the group effect includes the first display period, the second display period, and the third display period (for example, the period shown in FIG. 63).
The first display period is a period from the start of the display of the first character in the group effect until the new display of the character is performed and the display of any of the characters ends first (for example, the figure). 98 (a23) to the period shown in FIG. 100 (a30)),
The second display period is a period longer than the first display period, and is a period in which a new display of the character is performed and the display of the displayed character is terminated (for example, FIG. 101 (a31) to the period shown in FIG. 102 (a36)),
The third display period is a period in which the display of the displayed character continues without displaying a new character (for example, FIGS. 103 (a37) to 104 (a42)). Period shown),
In the first display period, from the first situation in which a part of the first displayed character is displayed, a part of the first displayed character is displayed more than in the first situation and second. In the second situation where a part of the displayed character is displayed (for example, the example shown in FIGS. 61 and 98).
It is characterized by that.

According to such a configuration, it is possible to perform control according to the game state when the special display result is displayed, and it is possible to improve the game interest. Further, the group effect can be more preferably performed.

In addition, the embodiment for carrying out the invention described later includes the invention according to the following means A. Conventionally, there has been known a gaming machine that executes a group effect of displaying an image in which a plurality of characters progress as a group, as shown in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2019-050851. For example, a gaming machine capable of performing a group effect in which images of a plurality of curactors and objects appear is disclosed.

According to the above-mentioned gaming machine, it is possible to enjoy the game by executing the group production, but there is still room for improvement in such a group production.

The present invention has been conceived in view of such circumstances, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine capable of more preferably performing group production.

(Means A)

A group effect execution means (for example, a group advance notice execution process shown in FIG. 51, 6 shown in FIGS. 98 to 104) for executing a group effect (for example, a group advance notice effect) for displaying an image in which a plurality of characters progress as a group. With crowd notice production)
The display period of the image in the group effect includes the first display period, the second display period, and the third display period (for example, the period shown in FIG. 63).
The first display period is a period from the start of the display of the first character in the group effect until the new display of the character is performed and the display of any of the characters ends first (for example, the figure). 98 (a23) to the period shown in FIG. 100 (a30)),
The second display period is a period longer than the first display period, and is a period in which a new display of the character is performed and the display of the displayed character is terminated (for example, FIG. 101 (a31) to the period shown in FIG. 102 (a36)),
The third display period is a period in which the display of the displayed character continues without displaying a new character (for example, FIGS. 103 (a37) to 104 (a42)). Period shown),
In the first display period, from the first situation in which a part of the first displayed character is displayed, a part of the first displayed character is displayed more than in the first situation and second. In the second situation where a part of the displayed character is displayed (for example, the example shown in FIGS. 61 and 98).
According to such a configuration, the group effect can be more preferably executed.

It is a front view of the pachinko gaming machine in this embodiment. It is a rear perspective view of the pachinko gaming machine in this embodiment. It is a block diagram which shows various control boards mounted on a pachinko gaming machine. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the game control main processing. It is a flowchart which shows an example of timer interrupt processing for game control. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a special symbol process process. It is explanatory drawing which shows the display result determination table. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the effect control main processing. It is a flowchart which shows an example of an effect control process process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the variable display start setting process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of stop symbol determination processing. It is a figure which shows the setting example about the setting suggestion effect execution decision table. It is a figure which shows the configuration example and setting example about a setting suggestion pattern. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the effect processing during variable display. It is a figure which shows the execution example of the setting suggestion effect. It is a front view of the pachinko gaming machine in this embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the start winning prize determination processing. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the random value value determination processing at the time of winning. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the special symbol normal processing. It is a figure which shows the structural example of the special figure display result determination table. It is a figure which shows the configuration example of the jackpot type determination table. It is a figure which shows the configuration example of the time saving type determination table. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the variation pattern setting process. It is a figure which shows an example of the time saving fanning production period. It is a figure which shows an example of the fluctuation pattern. It is a figure which shows an example of the fluctuation pattern determination table. It is a figure which shows an example of the fluctuation pattern determination table. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the special symbol stop processing. It is a figure which shows an example of the main production control command. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a decorative symbol stop command transmission setting process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the time saving start time processing. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the processing at the end of working hours. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the remaining hold period end determination processing. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the jackpot end processing. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a command analysis process. It is a figure which shows the configuration example of the command buffer at the time of a start winning. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the read-ahead notice setting process. It is a figure which shows the configuration example of the hold change determination table. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the variable display start setting process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the processing at the time of a miss. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the stop symbol setting process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the time saving fanning effect setting processing. It is a figure which shows the determination example of the time saving fanning production pattern. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a return effect setting process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the effect processing during variable display. This is a timing chart showing each timing during variable display when the time saving symbol is stopped and displayed and when it is not displayed. It is a figure which shows the example of the effect operation when the time saving symbol is stopped display, and the time saving fanning effect is executed. It is a figure which shows the example of the effect operation when the time saving symbol is stopped display, and the time saving fanning effect is executed. It is a figure which shows the example of the effect operation when the time saving symbol is stopped display, and the time saving fanning effect is executed. It is a figure which shows the example of the effect operation when the time saving symbol is stopped display, and the time saving fanning effect is executed. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the processing in the information output processing. It is a timing chart which shows the output timing of various signals output by the external information output processing. It is a figure which shows the structural example of the special figure display result determination table. It is a figure which shows an example of the special figure display result. It is a figure which shows the example of the effect operation when the time saving symbol is stopped display. It is a front view of the pachinko gaming machine which concerns on the feature part 063AK. It is a figure which shows the structure of the special variable winning ball device which concerns on the feature part 063AK in the state which the big winning opening is controlled in the closed state. (A)-(c) is a figure for demonstrating the flow of the game ball which won a prize in the big prize opening which concerns on the characteristic part 063AK. (A) is a figure which shows the structure of the distribution part which concerns on the feature part 063AK. (B) is a figure which shows the structure of the distribution member which concerns on the characteristic part 063AK. (A)-(c) is a figure for demonstrating the flow of the game ball which entered the distribution part which concerns on the characteristic part 063AK. It is a figure for demonstrating the operation of the distribution member which concerns on a feature part 063AK. It is a figure for demonstrating the relationship between the small hit start effect time which concerns on a feature part 063AK, and the timing when a game ball enters a distribution part. (A) is a timing chart of the effect corresponding to the small hit fluctuation related to the feature unit 063AK. FIG. (B) is a diagram for explaining whether or not an effect is executed and an effect mode corresponding to the small hit variation related to the feature unit 063AK. (A) is a timing chart of the time saving suggestion effect related to the feature unit 063AK. (B) is a figure which shows the time saving suggestion symbol which concerns on the characteristic part 063AK. (A) is a figure for demonstrating the normal passage fanning effect corresponding to the 1st special figure game which concerns on the feature part 063AK. FIG. (B) is a diagram for explaining a normal passage fanning effect corresponding to the second special figure game according to the feature unit 063AK. (C) is a diagram for explaining the time-saving time-passing fanning effect related to the feature unit 063AK. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the special symbol normal processing which concerns on a feature part 063AK. (A) is a figure which shows the structural example of the 1st special figure display result determination table which concerns on the feature part 063AK. (B) is a figure which shows the structural example of the 2nd special figure display result determination table which concerns on the feature part 063AK. (A) is a figure which shows the list of the jackpot type which concerns on the feature part 063AK. FIG. (B) is a diagram showing a configuration example of a jackpot type determination table according to the feature unit 063AK. (A) is a figure which shows the list of the small hit type which concerns on the feature part 063AK. FIG. (B) is a diagram showing a configuration example of a small hit type determination table according to the feature unit 063AK. It is a figure which shows the list of the fluctuation pattern which concerns on the feature part 063AK. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the variation pattern setting process which concerns on a feature part 063AK. It is a figure which shows the structural example of the big hit variation pattern determination table which concerns on a feature part 063AK. It is a figure which shows the structural example of the loss variation pattern determination table which concerns on the feature part 063AK. (A) is a figure which shows the structural example of the time saving variation pattern determination table for a normal state which concerns on a feature part 063AK. FIG. (B) is a diagram showing a configuration example of a time saving fluctuation pattern determination table for a time saving state according to the feature unit 063AK. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the special symbol stop processing which concerns on a feature part 063AK. It is a figure which shows the configuration example of the small hit start effect waiting time determination table which concerns on the feature part 063AK. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the small hit opening preprocessing which concerns on a feature part 063AK. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the small hit opening processing which concerns on a feature part 063AK. It is a figure which shows the configuration example of the hit end designation command determination table which concerns on the feature part 063AK. It is a figure which shows the configuration example of the passage notification effect waiting time determination table which concerns on a feature part 063AK. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the small hit end processing which concerns on a feature part 063AK. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the variable display start setting process which concerns on a feature part 063AK. (A) is a figure which shows the decorative symbol which becomes the small hit combination which concerns on the feature part 063AK. FIG. (B) is a diagram showing a configuration example of a decoration symbol determination table for a small hit for a normal state according to the feature unit 063AK. (C) is a diagram showing a configuration example of a small hit time determination decoration symbol determination table for a time saving state according to the feature unit 063AK. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the effect processing during variable display which concerns on a feature part 063AK. (A) is a flowchart showing an example of the waiting process for hitting a special figure according to the feature unit 063AK. FIG. (B) is a diagram showing a configuration example of a small hit start effect time determination table related to the feature unit 063AK. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the small hit middle production process which concerns on a feature part 063AK. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the small hit end effect processing which concerns on a feature part 063AK. (A) to (i) are diagrams showing an example of an effect operation in a normal state relating to the feature unit 063AK. (A) to (g) are diagrams showing an example of an effect operation in a normal state relating to the feature unit 063AK. (A) to (e) are diagrams showing an example of an effect operation in a time-saving state according to the feature unit 063AK. (A) to (e) are diagrams showing an example of an effect operation in a time-saving state according to the feature unit 063AK. (A) is a figure which shows the structural example of the normal hold change determination table which concerns on the modification of the characteristic part 063AK. FIG. (B) is a diagram showing a configuration example of a limited time pending change determination table according to a modified example of the feature unit 063AK. (A) to (c) are diagrams showing an example of an effect operation according to a modified example of the feature unit 063AK. It is a front view of the pachinko gaming machine of the feature part 065AK. It is a flowchart which shows an example of ordinary symbol process processing. It is a figure which shows an example of the ordinary symbol determination table. It is a figure which shows the normal figure display result and the number of time reductions. It is a figure which shows the special figure display result and the number of time reductions. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the processing at the time of normal symbol stop. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the effect control process process of a feature part 065AK. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the normal figure interlocking effect control processing. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the special figure interlocking effect determination process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the time saving notification setting processing. It is a timing chart which shows the production content at the time of time saving transition of the feature part 065AK. It is a figure which shows the production operation example of the feature part 065AK. It is a figure which shows the production operation example of the feature part 065AK. It is a figure which shows the production operation example of the feature part 065AK. It is a block diagram which shows various control boards mounted on a pachinko gaming machine. (A) is a diagram showing an image display device, (B) is a diagram showing a rotation display of a hold display in each hold display area, and (C) is a diagram showing a movement display of a telop in a telop display area. , (D) is a diagram showing a blinking mode of the fourth symbol. It is explanatory drawing of the image data which constitutes the display in an image display apparatus. (A) and (B) are diagrams illustrating production control commands. It is explanatory drawing which shows each random number. (A) is an explanatory diagram showing the display result determination table 1, and (B) is an explanatory diagram showing the display result determination table 2. (A) is a diagram showing a configuration example of a jackpot type determination table, and (B) is a diagram showing the contents of various jackpots. It is a figure which illustrates the fluctuation pattern. It is explanatory drawing which shows the relationship between a variable display result and a variation pattern. It is a block diagram which shows the structural example of the data holding area for game control. (A) is a block diagram showing a configuration example of an effect control data holding area, and (B) is a diagram showing a configuration example of a reception command buffer at the time of starting winning. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the start winning prize determination processing. This is a part of the flowchart showing an example of the effect control process process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the variable display start setting process. It is a figure which shows the execution decision ratio of the chance up effect. (A) is a diagram showing the determination ratio of the effect pattern of the still image display effect, and (B) is a diagram showing the effect content of each effect pattern. (A) is a diagram showing the determination ratio of the effect pattern of the operation promotion effect, and (B) is a diagram showing the effect content of each effect pattern. It is a timing chart which shows the variable display of super reach α1. It is a timing chart which shows the variable display of super reach α2. It is a timing chart which shows the variable display of super reach α3. It is a timing chart which shows the variable display of super reach α3. It is a timing chart which shows the variable display of super reach β1. It is a timing chart which shows the variable display of super reach β2. It is a timing chart which shows the variable display of super reach β3. It is a timing chart which shows the variable display of super reach β3. It is a figure which shows the production mode of the 1st reach effect. It is a figure which shows the production mode of the 1st reach effect. It is a figure which shows the production mode of the 2nd reach effect. It is a figure which shows the production mode of the 2nd reach effect. It is a figure which shows the production mode of the 2nd reach effect. It is a figure which shows the production mode of the 3rd reach effect. It is a figure which shows the production mode of the 3rd reach effect. It is a figure which shows the production mode of the 4th reach effect. It is a figure which shows the production mode of the 4th reach effect. It is a figure which shows the production mode of the 4th reach effect. It is a figure which shows the production mode of the 2nd reach effect in the modification. It is a figure which shows the production mode of the 4th reach effect in the modification. It is a figure which shows the production mode of the 4th reach effect in the modification. It is a front view of the pachinko gaming machine which concerns on this embodiment. It is a front view of the pachinko gaming machine which concerns on this embodiment. It is a rear perspective view of the pachinko gaming machine which concerns on this embodiment. It is a figure for demonstrating the frame lamp. It is a figure for demonstrating the special figure LED board and the 4th symbol unit. It is the figure which looked into between the game board and an image display device. It is a figure for demonstrating the display mode of a screen in an image display apparatus. It is a figure for demonstrating various boards mounted on a pachinko gaming machine. It is a figure for demonstrating the hit type. It is a figure for demonstrating each random number. It is a figure for demonstrating the jackpot determination table and the jackpot type determination table. It is a figure for demonstrating an example of an effect control command. It is a figure for demonstrating an example of the pre-variation pattern on the main side. It is a figure for demonstrating an example of the post-variation pattern on the main side. It is a figure for demonstrating the post-variation pattern determination table at the time of loss. It is a figure for demonstrating the post-variation pattern determination table at the time of a big hit. It is a figure for demonstrating the prevariation pattern determination table. It is a figure for demonstrating an example of the total variation pattern on the main side. It is a figure for demonstrating an example of the total variation pattern on the sub side. It is a figure for demonstrating the lottery table in each notice production. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the game control main processing. It is a flowchart which shows an example of timer interrupt processing for game control. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a special symbol process process. It is a flowchart which shows the start winning prize determination processing. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the special symbol normal processing. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the variation pattern setting process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the special symbol variation processing. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the special symbol stop processing. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the big hit opening preprocessing. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the processing during jackpot opening. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the process after opening a big hit. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the jackpot end processing. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the effect control main processing. It is a flowchart which shows an example of an effect control process process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the variable display start setting process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of group notice setting processing. It is a flowchart which shows an example of group notice execution processing. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a group notice work process. It is a figure for demonstrating an example of this video production process. It is a figure for demonstrating an example of this video production process. It is a figure for demonstrating an example of this video production process. It is a figure for demonstrating an example of this video production process. It is a figure which shows the whole picture of the 6-person group notice. It is a figure for demonstrating the auxiliary display used in group notice production. It is a figure for demonstrating the motion blur processing used in a group notice production. It is a figure for demonstrating the mode of the contour when characters overlap in a group notice effect. It is the figure which looked in between the game board and an image display device during execution of a group notice production. It is a figure which shows the whole picture of the Baku Chu Mondai notice. It is a figure for demonstrating the change of volume and the luminance data table in a group notice production. It is a figure for demonstrating the occurrence timing of the 6-person group notice in stage A. It is a figure for demonstrating the occurrence timing of the Baku Chu Mondai notice in stage B. It is a figure for demonstrating an example of a parent table in a group notice luminance data table. It is a figure for demonstrating an example of a child table in a group notice luminance data table. It is a figure for demonstrating an example of the grandchild table for a frame lamp in a group notice brightness data table. It is a figure for demonstrating an example of the grandchild table for an accessory lamp in a group notice brightness data table. It is a figure for demonstrating an example of the grandchild table for a panel left lamp in a group notice brightness data table. It is a figure for demonstrating an example of the grandchild table for a board lamp in a group notice brightness data table. It is a figure for demonstrating an example of the grandchild table for an attacker lamp in a group notice brightness data table. It is a figure for demonstrating an example of the parent table in the reach line luminance data table. It is a figure for demonstrating an example of a child table in a reach line luminance data table. It is a figure for demonstrating an example of the grandchild table for a frame lamp in a reach line luminance data table. It is a figure for demonstrating an example of the grandchild table for an accessory lamp in a reach line luminance data table. It is a figure for demonstrating an example of the grandchild table for a panel left lamp in a reach line luminance data table. It is a figure for demonstrating an example of the grandchild table for a board lamp in a reach line luminance data table. It is a figure for demonstrating an example of the grandchild table for an attacker lamp in a reach line luminance data table. It is a figure for demonstrating an example of the parent table in the background notice luminance data table. It is a figure for demonstrating an example of a child table in a background notice luminance data table. It is a figure for demonstrating an example of the grandchild table for a frame lamp in a background notice brightness data table. It is a figure for demonstrating an example of the grandchild table for an accessory lamp in a background notice brightness data table. It is a figure for demonstrating an example of the grandchild table for a panel left lamp in a background notice brightness data table. It is a figure for demonstrating an example of the grandchild table for a board lamp in a background notice brightness data table. It is a figure for demonstrating an example of the grandchild table for an attacker lamp in a background notice brightness data table. It is a figure for demonstrating an example of the luminance data table at the time of all lighting. It is a figure for demonstrating an example of the luminance data table at the time of PUSH effect. It is a figure for demonstrating an example of the child table in the group notice luminance data table which concerns on a modification. It is a figure for demonstrating an example of the grandchild table for a frame lamp in the group notice brightness data table which concerns on a modification. It is a figure for demonstrating the effect mode in stage A. It is a figure for demonstrating the effect mode in stage A. It is a figure for demonstrating the effect mode in stage A. It is a figure for demonstrating the effect mode in stage A. It is a figure for demonstrating the effect mode in stage A. It is a figure for demonstrating the effect mode in stage A. It is a figure for demonstrating the effect mode in stage A. It is a figure for demonstrating the production mode when the 6-person group notice is executed in stage A. It is a figure for demonstrating the production mode when the 6-person group notice is executed in stage A. It is a figure for demonstrating the production mode when the 6-person group notice is executed in stage A. It is a figure for demonstrating the production mode when the 6-person group notice is executed in stage A. It is a figure for demonstrating the production mode when the 6-person group notice is executed in stage A. It is a figure for demonstrating the production mode when the 6-person group notice is executed in stage A. It is a figure for demonstrating the production mode when the 6-person group notice is executed in stage A. It is a figure for demonstrating the production mode of the comparative example when the 6-person group notice is executed in stage A. It is a figure for demonstrating the effect mode when the background notice is executed in stage A. It is a figure for demonstrating the effect mode when a lamp notice is executed in a stage A. It is a figure for demonstrating the effect mode in stage A. It is a figure for demonstrating the effect mode in stage A. It is a figure for demonstrating the effect mode in stage A. It is a figure for demonstrating the effect mode in stage A. It is a figure for demonstrating the effect mode in stage A. It is a figure for demonstrating the effect mode in stage A. It is a figure for demonstrating the production mode in the first half of SP reach. It is a figure for demonstrating the production mode in the first half of SP reach. It is a figure for demonstrating the production mode in the first half of SP reach. It is a figure for demonstrating the production mode in the first half of SP reach. It is a figure for demonstrating the production mode in the first half of SP reach. It is a figure for demonstrating the production mode in the first half of SP reach. It is a figure for demonstrating the production mode in the first half of SP reach. It is a figure for demonstrating the production mode in the first half of SP reach. It is a figure for demonstrating the production mode in the first half of SP reach. It is a figure for demonstrating the production mode in the latter half of SP reach. It is a figure for demonstrating the production mode in the latter half of SP reach. It is a figure for demonstrating the production mode in the latter half of SP reach. It is a figure for demonstrating the production mode in the latter half of SP reach. It is a figure for demonstrating the production mode in the latter half of SP reach. It is a figure for demonstrating the production mode in the latter half of SP reach. It is a figure for demonstrating the production mode in the latter half of SP reach. It is a figure for demonstrating the production mode in a final reach. It is a figure for demonstrating the production mode in a final reach. It is a figure for demonstrating the production mode in a final reach. It is a figure for demonstrating the production mode in a final reach. It is a figure for demonstrating the production mode in a final reach. It is a figure for demonstrating the production mode in a final reach. It is a figure for demonstrating the production mode in a final reach. It is a figure for demonstrating the production mode in a final reach. It is a figure for demonstrating the production mode in a final reach. It is a figure for demonstrating the production mode in a final reach. It is a figure for demonstrating the production mode in a final reach. It is a figure for demonstrating the effect mode in stage B. It is a figure for demonstrating the effect mode in stage B. It is a figure for demonstrating the effect mode in stage B. It is a figure for demonstrating the effect mode in stage B. It is a figure for demonstrating the effect mode in stage B. It is a figure for demonstrating the effect mode in stage B. It is a figure for demonstrating the effect mode in stage B. It is a figure for demonstrating the effect mode in stage B. It is a figure for demonstrating the effect mode in stage B. It is a figure for demonstrating the effect mode in stage B. It is a figure for demonstrating the effect mode in stage B. It is a figure for demonstrating the effect mode in stage B. It is a figure for demonstrating the effect mode in stage B. It is a figure for demonstrating the effect mode in stage B. It is a figure for demonstrating the effect mode when the Baku Chu Mondai notice is executed in stage B. It is a figure for demonstrating the effect mode when the Baku Chu Mondai notice is executed in stage B. 3 is for explaining the production mode when the Baku Chu Mondai notice is executed in the stage B. It is a figure for demonstrating the effect mode when the Baku Chu Mondai notice is executed in stage B. It is a figure for demonstrating the effect mode when the Baku Chu Mondai notice is executed in stage B. It is a figure for demonstrating the effect mode when the Baku Chu Mondai notice is executed in stage B. It is a figure for demonstrating the effect mode when the Baku Chu Mondai notice is executed in stage B. It is a figure for demonstrating the effect mode when the Boingo group notice is executed in stage A. It is a figure for demonstrating the effect mode when the Boingo group notice is executed in stage A. It is a figure for demonstrating the effect mode when the Boingo group notice is executed in stage A. It is a figure for demonstrating the effect mode when the Boingo group notice is executed in stage A. It is a figure for demonstrating the effect mode when the Boingo group notice is executed in stage A. It is a figure for demonstrating the effect mode when the Boingo group notice is executed in stage A. It is a figure for demonstrating the detail of the Boingo group notice. It is a figure for demonstrating the production mode of the comparative example when the Boingo group notice is executed in stage A. It is a figure for demonstrating the production mode of the comparative example when the Boingo group notice is executed in stage A. It is a figure for demonstrating the effect mode when the Boingo group notice which concerns on a modification is executed. It is a figure for demonstrating the effect mode when the dog group notice which concerns on a modification is executed. It is a figure for demonstrating the effect mode when the dog group notice which concerns on a modification is executed. It is a figure for demonstrating the comparison of the 6-person group notice and the dog group notice. It is a figure for demonstrating the effect mode when the group notice effect is executed in the reach line. It is a figure for demonstrating the effect mode when the group notice effect is executed in the reach line.

(Basic explanation)
First, the basic configuration and control of the pachinko gaming machine 1 (also the configuration and control of a general pachinko gaming machine) will be described.

(Configuration of pachinko machine 1 etc.)
FIG. 1 is a front view of the pachinko gaming machine 1, showing an arrangement layout of main members. The pachinko gaming machine (gaming machine) 1 is roughly classified into a gaming board (gauge board) 2 constituting the game board surface and a game machine frame (underframe) 3 for supporting and fixing the game board 2. A game area is formed on the game board 2, and a game ball as a game medium is launched from a predetermined ball launching device and is driven into the game area.

The "variable display" of the special symbol is, for example, to display a plurality of types of special symbols in a variable manner (the same applies to other symbols described later). Fluctuations include update display of a plurality of symbols, scroll display of a plurality of symbols, deformation of one or more symbols, enlargement / reduction of one or more symbols, and the like. When the special symbol or the ordinary symbol described later is changed, a plurality of types of special symbols or ordinary symbols are updated and displayed. In the variation of the decorative symbol described later, a plurality of types of decorative symbols are scrolled or updated, and one or more decorative symbols are deformed or enlarged / reduced. The variation also includes a mode in which a certain symbol is blinked and displayed. At the end of the variable display, a predetermined special symbol is stopped and displayed (also referred to as derivation or derivation display) as a display result (the same applies to the variable display of other symbols described later). The variable display may be expressed as a variable display or a variable display.

The special symbol variably displayed on the first special symbol display device 4A is also referred to as a "first special symbol", and the special symbol variably displayed on the second special symbol display device 4B is also referred to as a "second special symbol". Each of these consists of a 7-segment LED or the like. The special symbol is represented by a number indicating "0" to "9" or a lighting pattern such as "-". The special symbol may include a pattern in which all the LEDs are turned off. Further, the special figure game using the first special figure is also referred to as a "first special figure game", and the special figure game using the second special figure is also referred to as a "second special figure game". It should be noted that there may be one type of special symbol display device that performs variable display of the special symbol.

An image display device 5 is provided near the center of the game area on the game board 2. The image display device 5 is composed of, for example, an LCD (liquid crystal display), an organic EL (Electro Luminescence), or the like, and displays various effects images. The image display device 5 may be composed of a projector and a screen. Various effects images are displayed on the image display device 5.

For example, on the screen of the image display device 5, a decorative symbol (a symbol indicating a number or the like) as a plurality of types of decorative identification information different from the special symbol is synchronized with the first special figure game or the second special figure game. Is variable display. Here, in synchronization with the first special figure game or the second special figure game, the decorative symbols are variably displayed (for example, up and down) in the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of "left", "middle", and "right". Direction scroll display and update display). It should be noted that the special figure game and the variable display of the decorative pattern that are executed in synchronization are also collectively referred to as simply variable display.

On the screen of the image display device 5, a display area for displaying a hold display corresponding to the variable display in which execution is suspended or an active display corresponding to the variable display being executed may be provided. Hold display and active display are also collectively referred to as variable display compatible display corresponding to variable display.

The number of variable displays on hold is also called the number of stored items on hold. The number of reserved storage corresponding to the first special figure game is also referred to as the first reserved storage number, and the number of reserved storage corresponding to the second special figure game is also referred to as the second reserved storage number. The total of the first reserved storage number and the second reserved storage number is also referred to as the total reserved storage number.

At a predetermined position of the game board 2, a first hold indicator 25A and a second hold indicator 25B configured to include a plurality of LEDs are provided. The first hold indicator 25A displays the first hold storage number according to the number of LEDs lit. The second hold indicator 25B displays the second hold storage number according to the number of LEDs lit.

Below the image display device 5, a winning ball device 6A and a variable winning ball device 6B are provided.

The winning ball device 6A forms, for example, a first starting winning opening that is always maintained in a constant open state in which a game ball can enter by a predetermined ball receiving member. When a game ball enters the first start winning opening, a predetermined number (for example, three) of prize balls may be paid out and the first special figure game may be started.

The variable winning ball device 6B (ordinary electric accessory) forms a second starting winning opening that is changed between a closed state and an open state by a solenoid 81 (see FIG. 3). The variable winning ball device 6B includes, for example, an electric tulip-shaped accessory having a pair of movable wing pieces, and the movable wing pieces are in a vertical position when the solenoid 81 is in the off state, so that the tip of the movable wing pieces is in a vertical position. Is close to the winning ball device 6A and is in a closed state in which the game ball does not enter the second starting winning opening (also referred to as the second starting winning opening is closed). On the other hand, the variable-sweep wing device 6B is in an open state in which the game ball can enter the second start winning opening because the movable wing piece is in the tilted position when the solenoid 81 is on (second start). It is also said that the winning opening is open.) When a game ball enters the second start winning opening, a predetermined number (for example, three) of prize balls can be paid out and the second special figure game can be started. The variable winning ball device 6B may be any as long as it changes between the closed state and the open state, and is not limited to the one provided with the electric tulip type accessory.

At predetermined positions of the game board 2 (in the example shown in FIG. 1, four locations on the lower left and right sides of the game area), general winning openings 10 are provided, which are always kept in a constant open state by a predetermined ball receiving member. In this case, when entering any of the general winning openings 10, a predetermined number (for example, 10) of game balls are paid out as prize balls.

Below the winning ball device 6A and the variable winning ball device 6B, a special variable winning ball device 7 having a large winning opening is provided. The special variable winning ball device 7 includes a large winning opening door that is opened and closed by a solenoid 82 (see FIG. 3), and has a large winning opening as a specific area that changes between an open state and a closed state depending on the large winning opening door. Form.

As an example, in the special variable winning ball device 7, when the solenoid 82 for the big winning door (for special electric accessory) is off, the big winning door closes the big winning door and the game ball is large. You will not be able to enter (pass) the winning opening. On the other hand, in the special variable winning ball device 7, when the solenoid 82 for the large winning opening door is on, the large winning opening door opens the large winning opening, and the game ball can easily enter the large winning opening. Become.

When a game ball enters the large prize opening, a predetermined number (for example, 14) of game balls are paid out as a prize ball. When a game ball enters the large winning opening, more prize balls are paid out than when the game ball enters, for example, the first starting winning opening, the second starting winning opening, and the general winning opening 10.

The entry of a game ball into each winning opening including the general winning opening 10 is also referred to as "winning". In particular, winning a prize at the starting opening (first starting winning opening, second starting winning opening) is also referred to as a starting winning.

A normal symbol display 20 is provided at a predetermined position of the game board 2 (in the example shown in FIG. 1, the left side of the game area). As an example, the ordinary symbol display 20 is composed of a 7-segment LED or the like, and performs variable display of the ordinary symbol as a plurality of types of ordinary identification information different from the special symbol. Ordinary symbols are represented by numbers indicating "0" to "9" and lighting patterns such as "-". The normal symbol may include a pattern in which all the LEDs are turned off. Such a variable display of a normal pattern is also called a normal figure game.

A passing gate 41 through which a game ball can pass is provided on the left side of the image display device 5. Based on the fact that the game ball has passed through the passing gate 41, the normal drawing game is executed.

Above the normal symbol display 20, a normal symbol hold display 25C is provided. The normal figure hold display 25C is configured to include, for example, four LEDs, and displays the number of normal figure hold storages, which is the number of normal figure games whose execution is held, by the number of LEDs lit.

In addition to the above configuration, the surface of the game board 2 is provided with a windmill for changing the flow direction and speed of the game ball and a large number of obstacle nails. At the bottom of the game area, there is an out opening for taking in a game ball that has not entered any of the winning openings.

Speakers 8L and 8R for reproducing and outputting sound effects and the like are provided at the upper left and right positions of the game machine frame 3, and game effect lamps 9 for game effects are further provided around the game area. ing. The game effect lamp 9 is configured to include an LED.

At a predetermined position of the game board 2 (not shown in FIG. 1), a movable body 32 that operates according to the effect is provided.

At the lower right position of the gaming machine frame 3, a hitting ball operation handle (operation knob) operated by a player or the like is provided to launch the game ball toward the game area by the hitting ball launching device.

At a predetermined position of the gaming machine frame 3 below the gaming area, the gaming balls paid out as prize balls and the gaming balls rented by the predetermined ball lending machine are held (stored) so as to be able to be supplied to the hitting ball launching device. ) A hitting ball supply plate (upper plate) is provided. Below the upper plate, a hit ball supply plate (lower plate) is provided, in which prize balls are paid out when the upper plate is full.

A stick controller 31A that can be gripped and tilted by the player is attached to a predetermined position of the gaming machine frame 3 below the gaming area. The stick controller 31A is provided with a trigger button that can be pressed and operated by the player. The operation on the stick controller 31A is detected by the controller sensor unit 35A (see FIG. 3).

A push button 31B is provided at a predetermined position of the gaming machine frame 3 below the gaming area so that the player can perform a predetermined instruction operation by a pressing operation or the like. The operation on the push button 31B is detected by the push sensor 35B (see FIG. 3).

In the pachinko gaming machine 1, stick controller 31A and push button 31B are provided as detection means for detecting the movement (operation, etc.) of the player, but detection means other than these may be provided.

FIG. 2 is a rear perspective view of the pachinko gaming machine 1. On the back surface of the pachinko gaming machine 1, a main board 11 housed in a board case 201 is mounted. The main board 11 is provided with a setting key 51 and a setting changeover switch 52. The setting key 51 functions as a lock switch for switching to a setting change state or a setting confirmation state. The setting changeover switch 52 functions as a setting switch for changing set values such as a jackpot winning probability and a ball output rate in a setting change state. The setting key 51 and the setting changeover switch 52 may be attached to the outside of the main board 11 such as a predetermined position of the power supply board 17.

A display monitor 29 is arranged in the center of the back surface of the main board 11, and a display changeover switch 30 is arranged on the side of the display monitor 29. The display monitor 29 may be configured by using, for example, a 7-segment LED display device. The display monitor 29 and the display changeover switch 30 are arranged in front of the main board 11 when the back side of the game board 2 is visually recognized with the gaming machine frame 3 open.

The display monitor 29 can display winning information such as a continuous ratio, a combination ratio, and a base. The ream ratio is the ratio of the number of prize balls by winning the first prize opening and the second prize opening (attacker) to the total number of prize balls. Of the total number of prize balls, the number of prize balls by winning the second starting prize opening (Denchu) and the number of prize balls by winning the first and second major winning openings (attackers) occupy. It is a ratio. The base is the ratio of the total number of prize balls to the number of game balls launched. The display monitor 29 can display the set value in the pachinko gaming machine 1 when the setting is changed or the setting is confirmed. The display monitor 29 may be capable of displaying a setting value or the like to be changed or confirmed when the setting is changed or the setting is confirmed.

The setting key 51 and the setting changeover switch 52 cannot be operated from the front side of the pachinko gaming machine 1 when the gaming machine frame 3 is closed. A glass door frame 3a having a glass window is rotatably provided in the game machine frame 3, and the game area can be opened and closed by the glass door frame 3a. When the glass door frame 3a is closed, the game area can be seen through the glass window.

In the pachinko gaming machine 1, a security cover 500A is attached to the right end of an outer frame 1a formed in a vertically long square frame shape. When the gaming machine frame 3 is closed, the security cover 500A covers the right side portion of the board case 201 including the setting key 51 and the setting changeover switch 52 from the back surface side. The security cover 500A is a substantially L-shaped member including a short piece 500Aa and a long piece 500Ab, and may be made of a transparent synthetic resin.

(Outline of the progress of the game)
The game ball is launched toward the game area by the rotation operation of the pachinko game machine 1 by the player on the ball striking operation handle. When the game ball passes through the passing gate 41, the normal symbol game by the normal symbol display 20 is started. In addition, when the game ball passes through the passing gate 41 during the period during which the previous normal drawing game is being executed (when the game ball has passed through the passing gate 41 but the normal drawing game based on the passage cannot be executed immediately). , The normal map game based on the passage is suspended up to a predetermined upper limit (for example, 4).

In this normal symbol game, if a specific normal symbol (design per normal symbol) is stopped and displayed, the display result of the normal symbol becomes "per normal symbol". On the other hand, if a normal symbol other than a normal symbol (a common symbol lost symbol) is stopped and displayed as a confirmed normal symbol, the display result of the normal symbol becomes "normal symbol lost". When it becomes "per normal drawing", the opening control is performed so that the variable winning ball device 6B is opened for a predetermined period (the second starting winning opening is opened).

When the game ball enters the first starting winning opening formed in the winning ball device 6A, the first special symbol game by the first special symbol display device 4A is started.

When the game ball enters the second starting winning opening formed in the variable winning ball device 6B, the second special symbol game by the second special symbol display device 4B is started.

In addition, when the game ball enters (wins) the start winning opening during the period during which the special figure game is being executed or during the period controlled by the big hit game state or the small hit game state described later (although the start prize has occurred). If the special figure game based on the start winning cannot be executed immediately), the execution of the special figure game based on the approach is suspended up to a predetermined upper limit (for example, 4).

In the special symbol game, if a specific special symbol (big hit symbol, for example, "7", the actual symbol differs depending on the jackpot type described later) is stopped and displayed as a confirmed special symbol, it becomes a "big hit" and a jackpot symbol. If a predetermined special symbol (small hit symbol, for example, "2") different from the above is stopped and displayed, it becomes "small hit". Further, if a special symbol (missing symbol, for example, "-") different from the big hit symbol or the small hit symbol is stopped and displayed, it becomes "missing".

After the display result in the special figure game becomes "big hit", it is controlled to the big hit game state as an advantageous state advantageous for the player. After the display result in the special figure game becomes "small hit", it is controlled to the small hit game state.

In the big hit game state, the big winning opening formed by the special variable winning ball device 7 is opened in a predetermined mode. The open state includes the elapsed timing of a predetermined period (for example, 29 seconds or 1.8 seconds) and the timing until the number of game balls that have entered the large winning opening reaches a predetermined number (for example, 9). It will continue until the earlier timing. The predetermined period is an upper limit period during which the large winning opening can be opened in one round, and is also hereinafter referred to as an open upper limit period. One cycle in which the big winning opening is open in this way is called a round (round game). In the jackpot game state, the round can be repeatedly executed until the maximum number of times (15 times or 2 times) is reached.

In the big hit game state, the player can obtain the prize ball by letting the game ball enter the big prize opening. Therefore, the jackpot gaming state is an advantageous state for the player. The larger the number of rounds in the jackpot game state and the longer the open upper limit period, the more advantageous it is for the player.

A jackpot type is set for "big hit". For example, multiple types of opening modes (number of rounds and opening upper limit period) of the big winning opening and game states after the big hit game state (normal state, time saving state, probability change state, etc.) are prepared, and the big hit type is set according to these. Has been done. As the jackpot type, a jackpot type in which many prize balls can be obtained, a jackpot type in which few prize balls are obtained, or a jackpot type in which almost no prize balls can be obtained may be provided.

In the small hit game state, the large winning opening formed by the special variable winning ball device 7 is opened in a predetermined opening mode. For example, in the small hit game state, the same opening mode as the big hit game state in some big hit types (the number of times the big winning opening is opened is the same as the number of rounds, and the closing timing of the big winning opening is also the same. Etc.), the big winning opening is opened. As with the big hit type, the small hit type may be provided for the "small hit".

After the jackpot game state is completed, it may be controlled to a time saving state or a probability change state according to the jackpot type.

In the time saving state, control (time saving control) is executed in which the average special figure fluctuation time (period in which the special figure is changed) is shortened as compared with the normal state. In the time saving state, the average fluctuation time of the normal map (the period during which the normal map is changed) is shortened from the normal state, and the probability of becoming a "normal map hit" in the normal map game is improved from the normal state. Controls (high opening control, high base control) that make it easier for the game ball to enter the second starting winning opening are also executed. The time saving state is a state in which the fluctuation efficiency of the special symbol (particularly the second special symbol) is improved, which is advantageous for the player.

In the probability variation state (probability fluctuation state), in addition to the time saving control, the probability variation control in which the probability that the display result becomes a "big hit" is higher than in the normal state is executed. The probabilistic state is a state that is more advantageous for the player because it is a state in which a “big hit” is likely to occur in addition to improving the fluctuation efficiency of the special symbol.

The time saving state and the probability change state continue until any one of the end conditions such as the execution of the special figure game a predetermined number of times and the start of the next big hit game state are satisfied first. A game whose end condition is that the special figure game has been executed a predetermined number of times is also referred to as a number-cutting (time-cutting time reduction, number-cutting probability change, etc.).

The normal state is a gaming state other than a special state such as an advantageous state such as a big hit gaming state, a time saving state, or a probability change state, which is advantageous for the player, and the display result in the normal drawing game is "normal drawing hit". The pachinko game machine 1 such as the probability and the probability that the display result in the special figure game becomes a "big hit" returns to a predetermined state after the power is turned on, such as the initial setting state of the pachinko game machine 1 (for example, when a system reset is performed). It is in the same controlled state as (when the process is not executed).

The state in which the probability change control is executed is also called a high probability state, and the state in which the probability change control is not executed is also called a low probability state. The state in which the time saving control is executed is also called a high base state, and the state in which the time saving control is not executed is also called a low base state. By combining these, it is also called a low-accuracy high-base state in the time-saving state, a high-accuracy high-base state in the probabilistic state, and a low-accuracy low-base state in the normal state. The high-accuracy state and low-base state are also called the high-accuracy low-base state.

After the small hit game state ends, the game state is not changed, and the game state is continuously controlled to the game state before the display result of the special figure game becomes "small hit" (however, "small hit" occurs. If the special figure game at the time is the special figure game of the predetermined number of times in the above number of times cut, the game state is naturally changed). It should be noted that there may be no "small hit" as the display result of the special figure game.

The game state may change based on the fact that the game ball has passed through a specific area (for example, a specific area in the big winning opening) during the big hit game state. For example, when the game ball passes through a specific area, it may be controlled to a probabilistic state after the big hit game state.

(Progress of production, etc.)
In the pachinko gaming machine 1, various effects (effects of notifying the progress of the game and enlivening the game) are executed according to the progress of the game. The production will be described below. The effect is performed by displaying various effect images on the image display device 5, but in addition to or in place of the display, audio output from the speakers 8L and 8R, and a game effect lamp 9 It may be turned on or off, the operation of the movable body 32, or an effect using an arbitrary effect device including a part or all of them.

As an effect executed according to the progress of the game, in the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of the "left", "middle", and "right" provided in the image display device 5, the first special figure game or the first special figure game or the first 2 In response to the start of the special figure game, the variable display of the decorative pattern is started. At the timing when the display result (also referred to as the finalized special symbol) is stopped and displayed in the first special symbol game or the second special symbol game, the final decorative symbol (combination of three decorative symbols) that is the display result of the variable display of the decorative symbol is displayed. ) Is also displayed (derived) as a stop.

In the period from the start to the end of the variable display of the decorative symbol, the variable display mode of the decorative symbol may be a predetermined reach mode (reach is established). Here, the reach mode is a variable display of a decorative symbol that has not yet been stopped and displayed when the decorative symbol that has been stopped and displayed on the screen of the image display device 5 constitutes a part of the jackpot combination described later. It is a mode in which is continuing.

In addition, the reach effect is executed in response to the above-mentioned reach mode during the variable display of the decorative symbol. In the pachinko gaming machine 1, the ratio of the display result (display result of the special figure game or variable display of the decorative symbol) to be "big hit" (also called big hit reliability or big hit expectation) is determined according to the production mode. Multiple different types of reach effects are performed. Reach production includes, for example, normal reach and super reach, which has a higher hit reliability than normal reach.

When the display result of the special figure game is "big hit", a fixed decorative symbol that is a predetermined jackpot combination is derived as a display result of variable display of the decorative symbol on the screen of the image display device 5 (decoration). The display result of the variable display of the symbol is "big hit"). As an example, the same decorative symbols (for example, "7") are aligned and stopped and displayed on predetermined effective lines in the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of "left", "middle", and "right". ..

In the case of a "probability change jackpot" that is controlled to a probability change state after the end of the jackpot game state, an odd number of decorative symbols (for example, "7") are aligned and displayed as a stop, and the probability change state is entered after the end of the jackpot game state. In the case of an uncontrolled "non-probability variable jackpot (normal jackpot)", an even number of decorative symbols (for example, "6") may be aligned and displayed as a stop. In this case, the odd-numbered decorative symbol is also referred to as a probabilistic symbol, and the even-numbered decorative symbol is also referred to as a non-probable variable symbol (normal symbol). After the non-probability pattern becomes the reach mode, the promotion effect that finally becomes the "probability big hit" may be executed.

When the display result of the special figure game is "small hit", a fixed decorative symbol (for example, "for example," 1 3 5 ”etc.) Is derived (the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern is a“ small hit ”). As an example, the decorative symbols constituting the chance eyes are stopped and displayed on the predetermined effective lines in the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of "left", "middle", and "right". In addition, when the display result of the special figure game becomes "big hit" of some big hit types (big hit type of the big hit game state in the same mode as the small hit game state), and when it becomes "small hit". , A common fixed decorative symbol may be derived and displayed.

When the display result of the special figure game is "missing", the variable display mode of the decorative symbol is not the reach mode, and the variable display result of the decorative symbol is a fixed decorative symbol of a non-reach combination ("" (Also referred to as "non-reach loss") may be stopped and displayed (the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern may be "non-reach loss"). If the display result is "missing", after the variable display mode of the decorative symbol becomes the reach mode, the display result of the variable display of the decorative symbol is a predetermined reach combination ("reach loss") that is not a jackpot combination. The fixed decorative symbol (also referred to as) may be stopped and displayed (the display result of the variable display of the decorative symbol may be "reach loss").

The effect that the pachinko gaming machine 1 can execute includes displaying the above-mentioned variable display compatible display (hold display or active display). Further, as another effect, for example, a notice effect for notifying the reliability of the jackpot is executed during the variable display of the decorative symbol. The notice effect includes a notice effect that announces the jackpot reliability in the variable display during execution, and a pre-reading advance notice effect that announces the jackpot reliability in the variable display (variable display in which execution is suspended) before execution. As the pre-reading notice effect, an effect of changing the display mode of the variable display compatible display (hold display or active display) to a mode different from the usual mode may be executed.

Further, in the image display device 5, one variable display is simulated as a plurality of variable displays by temporarily stopping the decorative symbol during the variable display of the decorative symbol and then restarting the variable display. The pseudo-continuous production may be executed.

Even during the big hit game state, the big hit middle effect that notifies the big hit game state is executed. As the big hit middle effect, an effect of notifying the number of rounds and a promotion effect indicating that the value of the big hit gaming state is improved may be executed. Further, even during the small hit game state, the small hit medium effect for notifying the small hit game state is executed. It should be noted that the big hit game during the small hit game state and in some big hit types (the big hit type in the big hit game state in the same mode as the small hit game state, for example, the big hit type in which the subsequent game state is a highly accurate state). By executing a common effect depending on the state, the player may not know whether the player is currently in the small hit game state or the big hit game state. In such a case, by executing a common effect after the end of the small hit game state and after the end of the big hit game state, it is not possible to distinguish between the high accuracy state and the low accuracy state. You may.

Further, for example, when a special figure game or the like is not executed, a demo (demonstration) image is displayed on the image display device 5 (a customer waiting demo effect is executed).

(Board configuration)
For example, the pachinko gaming machine 1 is equipped with a main board 11, an effect control board 12, a voice control board 13, a lamp control board 14, a relay board 15, and the like as shown in FIG. In addition, various boards such as a payout control board, an information terminal board, and a launch control board are arranged on the back surface of the pachinko gaming machine 1. Further, a power supply board 17 is also mounted. Various control boards are configured so that not only electronic circuit boards such as printed wiring boards on which a conductor pattern is formed and electric components can be mounted, but also electric components are mounted on the electronic circuit boards to realize specific electrical functions. It is a concept including the electronic circuit mounting board.

In the pachinko gaming machine 1, electric power from an AC power source such as AC100V in an external power source such as a commercial power source can be supplied to electrical components including various control boards such as a main board 11 and an effect control board 12 by a power supply board 17. The power supply board 17 includes, for example, a rectifying circuit for converting alternating current (AC) to direct current (DC), a power supply circuit for converting a predetermined direct current voltage to a specific direct current voltage (for example, direct current 12V, direct current 5V, etc.), and the like. I have.

The main board 11 is a control board on the main side, and the progress of the above-mentioned game in the pachinko game machine 1 (execution of a special figure game (including management of hold), execution of a normal figure game (including management of hold), and a big hit. It has a function to control a gaming state, a small hit gaming state, a gaming state, etc.). The main board 11 includes a game control microcomputer 100, a switch circuit 110, a solenoid circuit 111, and the like.

The game control microcomputer 100 mounted on the main board 11 is, for example, a one-chip microcomputer, which includes a ROM (Read Only Memory) 101, a RAM (Random Access Memory) 102, and a CPU (Central Processing Unit) 103. , A random number circuit 104 and an I / O (Input / Output port) 105 are provided.

The CPU 103 performs a process of controlling the progress of the game (a process of realizing the function of the main board 11) by executing the program stored in the ROM 101. At this time, various data stored in the ROM 101 (data such as a fluctuation pattern described later, an effect control command described later, and various tables referred to when making various decisions described later) are used, and the RAM 102 is used as the main memory. .. The RAM 102 is a backup RAM in which the stored contents are stored for a predetermined period even if a part or all of the RAM 102 is stopped from supplying power to the pachinko gaming machine 1. Note that all or part of the program stored in the ROM 101 may be expanded into the RAM 102 and executed on the RAM 102.

The random number circuit 104 updatablely counts numerical data indicating various random number values (game random numbers) used when controlling the progress of the game. The game random number may be one that is updated by the CPU 103 executing a predetermined computer program (one that is updated by software).

The I / O 105 includes, for example, an input port into which various signals (detection signals described later) are input, various signals (first special symbol display device 4A, second special symbol display device 4B, ordinary symbol display 20, first hold). It is configured to include an output port for transmitting (a signal for controlling (driving) the display 25A, the second hold display 25B, the normal figure hold display 25C, etc., and a solenoid drive signal).

The switch circuit 110 is a detection signal (a game ball passes or is passed) from various switches for detecting a game ball (gate switch 21, start port switch (first start port switch 22A and second start port switch 22B), count switch 23). It takes in a detection signal indicating that the switch has been turned on by entering and transmits it to the game control microcomputer 100. By transmitting the detection signal, the passage or approach of the game ball is detected.

The reset signal, power cutoff signal, and clear signal from the power supply board 17 are taken into the switch circuit 110 and transmitted to the game control microcomputer 100. The reset signal is an operation stop signal for putting a control circuit such as a game control microcomputer 100 into an operation stop state, and can be output by using any of a power supply monitoring circuit, an IC with a built-in watchdog timer, and a system reset IC. All you need is. The power cutoff signal turns off when the predetermined power supply voltage used in the pachinko gaming machine 1 exceeds a predetermined value, and turns on when the period during which the predetermined power supply voltage falls below the predetermined value continues for more than the power cutoff reference time. Become. The clear signal is turned on in response to, for example, a pressing operation on the clear switch provided on the power supply board 17.

The solenoid circuit 111 transmits a solenoid drive signal (for example, a signal for turning on the solenoid 81 or the solenoid 82) from the game control microcomputer 100 to the solenoid 81 for an ordinary electric accessory or the solenoid 82 for a prize-winning door. To transmit.

A display monitor 29, a display changeover switch 30, a setting key 51, a setting changeover switch 52, and a door opening sensor 90 are connected to the main board 11. The door opening sensor 90 detects the opening of the gaming machine frame 3 including the glass door frame 3a.

The main board 11 (microcomputer 100 for game control) issues an effect control command (command for designating (notifying) the progress of the game) according to the progress of the game as a part of controlling the progress of the game. Supply to 12. The effect control command output from the main board 11 is relayed by the relay board 15 and supplied to the effect control board 12. The effect control command includes, for example, various determination results on the main board 11 (for example, a display result of a special figure game (including a jackpot type)) and a variation pattern used when executing a special figure game (details will be described later). )), The game status (for example, the start and end of the variable display, the opening status of the large winning opening, the occurrence of the winning, the number of stored memories, the game status), the command for specifying the occurrence of an error, and the like are included.

The effect control board 12 is a control board on the sub side independent of the main board 11, receives an effect control command, and produces an effect (various effects according to the progress of the game) based on the received effect control command. It has a function of executing various notifications such as driving of the movable body 32, error notification, and notification of power failure recovery).

The effect control board 12 is equipped with an effect control CPU 120, a ROM 121, a RAM 122, a display control unit 123, a random number circuit 124, and an I / O 125.

The effect control CPU 120 is a process for executing an effect together with the display control unit 123 by executing a program stored in the ROM 121 (a process for realizing the above-mentioned function of the effect control board 12, and the effect to be executed). (Including the decision, etc.). At this time, various data (data such as various tables) stored in the ROM 121 are used, and the RAM 122 is used as the main memory.

The effect control CPU 120 displays the execution of the effect based on the detection signal from the controller sensor unit 35A or the push sensor 35B (a signal output when an operation by the player is detected and an appropriate signal indicating the operation content). It may also instruct the control unit 123.

The display control unit 123 includes a VDP (Video Display Processor), a CGROM (Character Generator ROM), a VRAM (Video RAM), and the like, and executes the effect based on the effect execution instruction from the effect control CPU 120.

The display control unit 123 supplies the image display device 5 with a video signal corresponding to the effect to be executed based on the effect execution instruction from the effect control CPU 120, so that the effect image is displayed on the image display device 5. The display control unit 123 further supplies a sound designation signal (a signal for designating the output sound) to the sound control board 13 in order to output sound synchronized with the display of the effect image and turn on / off the game effect lamp 9. Or, a lamp signal (a signal for designating a lamp lighting / extinguishing mode) is supplied to the lamp control board 14. Further, the display control unit 123 supplies a signal for operating the movable body 32 to the movable body 32 or a drive circuit for driving the movable body 32.

The voice control board 13 is equipped with various circuits for driving the speakers 8L and 8R, drives the speakers 8L and 8R based on the sound designation signal, and outputs the sound designated by the sound designation signal from the speakers 8L and 8R. Let me.

The lamp control board 14 is equipped with various circuits for driving the game effect lamp 9, drives the game effect lamp 9 based on the lamp signal, and turns on / off the game effect lamp 9 in a mode designated by the lamp signal. do. In this way, the display control unit 123 controls the audio output and the lighting / extinguishing of the lamp.

The effect control CPU 120 executes audio output, lamp lighting / extinguishing control (sound designation signal, lamp signal supply, etc.), and movable body 32 control (signal supply for operating the movable body 32, etc.). You may do so.

The random number circuit 124 counts updatable numerical data indicating various random number values (random numbers for effect) used to execute various effects. The effect random number may be one that is updated (updated by software) when the effect control CPU 120 executes a predetermined computer program.

The I / O 125 mounted on the effect control board 12 is for transmitting various signals (video signal, sound designation signal, lamp signal) and an input port for taking in the effect control command transmitted from, for example, the main board 11. It is configured to include the output port of.

Boards other than the main board 11, such as the effect control board 12, the sound control board 13, and the lamp control board 14, are also referred to as sub-boards. A plurality of sub-boards may be provided for each function as in the pachinko gaming machine 1, or one sub-board may be configured to have a plurality of functions.

(motion)
Next, the operation (action) of the pachinko gaming machine 1 will be described.

(Main operation of main board 11)
First, the main operations on the main board 11 will be described. When the power supply to the pachinko game machine 1 is started, the game control microcomputer 100 is started, and the game control main process is executed by the CPU 103. FIG. 4 is a flowchart showing a game control main process executed by the CPU 103 on the main board 11.

In the game control main process shown in FIG. 4, the CPU 103 first sets interrupt prohibition (step S1). Subsequently, necessary initial settings are made (step S2). The initial settings include stack pointer settings, register settings for built-in devices (CTC (counter / timer circuit), parallel input / output ports, etc.), settings for making the RAM 102 accessible, and the like.

Next, it is determined whether or not the recovery condition is satisfied (step S3). The recovery condition can be satisfied when the clear signal is off, there is backup data, and the backup RAM is normal. When the power supply of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started, for example, if the clear switch provided on the power supply board 17 is pressed, a clear signal in the ON state is input to the game control microcomputer 100. When such a clear signal in the ON state is input, it may be determined in step S3 that the recovery condition is not satisfied. The backup data may be stored in RAM 102, which is a backup RAM for game control. In step S3, the presence or absence of backup data, the presence or absence of data errors, and the like may be confirmed or inspected to determine whether or not the recovery conditions can be satisfied.

If the recovery condition is satisfied (step S3; Yes), the recovery process (step S4) is executed, and then the setting confirmation process (step S5) is executed. By the recovery process in step S4, the work area is set based on the stored contents of the RAM 102. By setting the work area using the backup data stored in the RAM 102, the game state is restored when the power supply is stopped. For example, when the special symbol is changing, the state before the stop is special. It suffices if the fluctuation of the symbol can be resumed.

If the recovery condition is not satisfied (step S3; No), the setting change process (step S7) is executed after the initialization process (step S6) is executed. The initialization process of step S6 includes a clear process for clearing the flags, counters, and buffers stored in the RAM 102, and the initial value is set in the work area by executing the clear process.

In the setting confirmation process of step S5, it is determined whether or not the predetermined setting confirmation condition is satisfied. The setting confirmation condition is satisfied, for example, when the detection signal from the door opening sensor 90 is on and the setting key 51 is turned on when the power supply is started. The setting confirmation process in step S5 is executed when the recovery conditions including the fact that the clear signal is in the off state are satisfied in step S3. Therefore, since the setting confirmation condition can be satisfied only when the clear signal is in the off state, the fact that the clear signal is in the off state can also be included in the setting confirmation condition.

When the setting confirmation condition is satisfied in the setting confirmation process in step S5, the setting confirmation state in which the setting value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 can be confirmed is set, and the setting is set from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12. A confirmation start command is sent. In the setting confirmation state, the setting value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 can be confirmed by the display on the display monitor 29. When the setting confirmation state is terminated, the setting confirmation end command is transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12.

When the pachinko gaming machine 1 is in the setting confirmation state, it may be in the gaming stop state in which the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is stopped. When the game is stopped, the launch of the game ball by the operation of the hitting ball operation handle, the detection of the game ball by various switches, etc. are stopped, and the first special symbol display device 4A, the second special symbol display device 4B, and the normal symbol are stopped. The display 20 may be controlled so that the lost symbol or the like is stopped and displayed, or the display corresponding to the game stopped state different from the lost symbol is displayed. When the setting confirmation state ends, the game stop state that accompanies this may also end.

In the setting change process of step S7, it is determined whether or not the predetermined setting change condition is satisfied. The setting change condition is satisfied, for example, when the detection signal from the door opening sensor 90 is on and the setting key 51 is turned on when the power supply is started. The setting change condition may include that the clear signal is in the ON state.

When the setting change condition is satisfied in the setting change process of step S7, the setting value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is changed to the setting change state, and the setting is set from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12. A change start command is sent. In the setting change state, the set value is displayed on the display monitor 29, and each time the operation of the setting changeover switch 52 is detected, the numerical value displayed on the display monitor 29 is sequentially updated and displayed. After that, based on the fact that the setting key 51 is turned off by an operation by a staff member of the amusement park or the like, the setting value displayed on the display monitor 29 is stored (updated and stored) in the backup area of the RAM 102, and the display monitor 29 is stored. Turns off. When the setting change state is terminated, the setting change end command is transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12.

When the pachinko game machine 1 is in the setting change state, the pachinko game machine 1 may be in the game stop state as in the case of the setting confirmation state. When the setting change state ends, the game stop state that accompanies this may also end.

When the effect control board 12 side receives the setting confirmation start command or the setting change start command, the control may be performed to notify that the setting is being confirmed or the setting is being changed. For example, a predetermined image may be displayed on the image display device 5, a predetermined sound may be output from the speakers 8L and 8R, or a light emitting member such as a game effect lamp 9 may be made to emit light in a predetermined manner.

The clear signal is turned on by, for example, pressing the clear switch provided on the power supply board 17. Therefore, when the detection signal from the door opening sensor 90 is on and the setting key 51 is on when the power supply is started, if the clear switch is on, the step is performed together with the initialization process in step S6. The setting change process of S7 is executed and the setting change state can be controlled. If the clear switch is off, the setting confirmation process of step S5 is executed together with the recovery process of step S4 and the setting confirmation state can be controlled. If the detection signal from the door open sensor 90 is off or the setting key 51 is off when the power supply is started, the initialization process of step S6 is executed if the clear switch is on. On the other hand, it is not controlled to the setting change state, and if the clear switch is off, the recovery process of step S4 is executed, but it is not controlled to the setting confirmation state.

After executing the setting confirmation process or the setting change process, the CPU 103 executes the random number circuit setting process for initializing the random number circuit 104 (step S8). Then, the CTC register built in the game control microcomputer 100 is set so that the timer is interrupted periodically every predetermined time (for example, 2 ms) (step S9), and interrupts are permitted (step S10). ). After that, the loop processing is started. After that, an interrupt request signal is sent from the CTC to the CPU 103 every predetermined time (for example, 2 ms), and the CPU 103 can periodically execute the timer interrupt process.

When the CPU 103 that has executed the game control main process receives the interrupt request signal from the CTC and receives the interrupt request, it executes the game control timer interrupt process shown in the flowchart of FIG. When the game control timer interrupt process shown in FIG. 5 is started, the CPU 103 first executes a predetermined switch process to perform the gate switch 21, the first start port switch 22A, and the second start port via the switch circuit 110. It is determined whether or not detection signals are received from various switches such as the switch 22B and the count switch 23 (step S21). Subsequently, by executing a predetermined main-side error process, an abnormality diagnosis of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is performed, and a warning can be generated if necessary according to the diagnosis result (step S22). After that, by executing a predetermined information output process, for example, the jackpot information (information indicating the number of times the jackpot has occurred) and the start information (starting) supplied to the hall management computer installed outside the pachinko gaming machine 1. Data such as information indicating the number of times of winning (information indicating the number of times of winning, etc.) and probability fluctuation information (information indicating the number of times of probability change state, etc.) are output (step S23).

Following the information output process, a game random number update process for updating at least a part of the game random numbers used on the main board 11 side by software is executed (step S24). After that, the CPU 103 executes the special symbol process process (step S25). By executing the special symbol process process for each timer interrupt by the CPU 103, it is possible to manage the execution and hold of the special symbol game, control the big hit game state and the small hit game state, control the game state, and the like.

Following the special symbol process processing, the normal symbol process processing is executed (step S26). By executing the normal symbol process processing for each timer interrupt, the CPU 103 manages the execution and hold of the normal figure game based on the detection signal from the gate switch 21 (based on the passing of the game ball through the passing gate 41). It enables opening control of the variable winning ball device 6B based on "per-figure hit". The execution of the normal figure game is performed by driving the normal symbol display 20, and the number of normal figure reservations is displayed by turning on the normal figure hold display 25C.

After executing the normal symbol process process, as a part of the game control timer interrupt process, a process when a power failure occurs, a process for paying out a prize ball, and the like may be performed. After that, the CPU 103 executes the command control process (step S27). The CPU 103 may send and set an effect control command in each of the above processes. In the command control process of step S27, a process of transmitting the effect control command set for transmission to a control board on the sub side such as the effect control board 12 is performed. After executing the command control process, the interrupt is permitted and then the game control timer interrupt process is terminated.

FIG. 6 is a flowchart showing an example of the process executed in step S25 shown in FIG. 5 as the special symbol process process. In this special symbol process process, the CPU 103 first executes a start winning determination process (step S101).

In the start winning determination process, a process of detecting the occurrence of a start winning, storing the hold information in a predetermined area of the RAM 102, and updating the hold storage number is executed. When the start winning is generated, the display result (including the jackpot type) and the random number value for determining the fluctuation pattern are extracted and stored as hold information. Further, a process of pre-reading and determining a display result or a fluctuation pattern may be executed based on the extracted random number value. After storing the hold information and the number of hold memories, the transmission setting for transmitting the effect control command for specifying the judgment result such as the occurrence of the start winning prize, the number of hold memories, the read-ahead judgment, etc. is set on the effect control board 12. Be told. The effect control command at the time of starting winning, which is set to be transmitted in this way, is executed from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 by, for example, executing the command control process in step S27 shown in FIG. 5 after the special symbol process process is completed. Is transmitted to.

After executing the start winning determination process in step S101, the CPU 103 selects and executes any of the processes of steps S110 to S120 according to the value of the special figure process flag provided in the RAM 102. In each process (steps S110 to S120) of the special symbol process process, a transmission setting for transmitting an effect control command corresponding to each process to the effect control board 12 is performed.

The special symbol normal processing in step S110 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is “0” (initial value). In this special symbol normal processing, it is determined whether or not to start the first special figure game or the second special figure game based on the presence or absence of the pending information. In addition, in the special symbol normal processing, whether or not the display result of the special symbol or decorative symbol is set to "big hit" or "small hit" based on the random value for determining the display result, and the big hit type when the display result is set to "big hit". Is determined (predetermined) before the display result is derived and displayed. Further, in the special symbol normal processing, a definite special symbol (either a big hit symbol, a small hit symbol, or a lost symbol) to be stopped and displayed in the special symbol game is set according to the determined display result. After that, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to "1", and the special symbol normal processing ends. The special figure game using the second special figure may be executed with priority over the special figure game using the first special figure (also referred to as special figure 2 priority digestion). Further, the winning order of the game balls to the first starting winning opening and the second starting winning opening may be memorized, and the starting condition of the special figure game may be satisfied in the winning order (also referred to as winning order digestion).

When making various determinations based on the random number values, various tables stored in the ROM 101 (tables in which the determination values to be compared with the random number values are assigned to the determination results) are referred to. The same applies to other decisions on the main board 11 and various decisions on the effect control board 12. In the effect control board 12, various tables are stored in the ROM 121.

The variation pattern setting process in step S111 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “1”. In this fluctuation pattern setting process, one of a plurality of types of fluctuation patterns is set using a random value for determining the fluctuation pattern based on a preliminary determination result of whether or not the display result is a "big hit" or a "small hit". The process of deciding on is included. In the variation pattern setting process, when the variation pattern is determined, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "2", and the variation pattern setting process ends.

The fluctuation pattern includes the execution time of the special symbol game (special symbol fluctuation time) (which is also the execution time of the variable display of the decorative symbol), the mode of the variable display of the decorative symbol (presence or absence of reach, etc.), and the variable display of the decorative symbol. It specifies the content of the effect (type of reach effect, etc.), and is also called a variable display pattern.

The special symbol variation process in step S112 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is “2”. In this special symbol change processing, the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B are set to change the special symbol, and the elapsed time from the start of the change of the special symbol. It includes processing to measure. In addition, it is also determined whether or not the measured elapsed time has reached the special figure fluctuation time corresponding to the fluctuation pattern. Then, when the elapsed time from the start of the special symbol variation reaches the special symbol variation time, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to "3", and the special symbol variation process ends.

The special symbol stop process in step S113 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is “3”. In this special symbol stop process, the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B stop the fluctuation of the special symbol, and stop display (derive) the confirmed special symbol that is the display result of the special symbol. Contains the process of making settings for. Then, when the display result is "big hit", the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "4". On the other hand, when the big hit flag is off and the display result is "small hit", the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "8". If the display result is "missing", the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "0". When the display result is "small hit" or "loss", the game state is also updated when the time saving state or the probability change state is controlled and the end of the number of cuts is established. When the value of the special symbol process flag is updated, the special symbol stop processing ends.

The jackpot release preprocessing in step S114 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “4”. This big hit pre-opening process includes a process of setting to open the big winning opening by starting the execution of the round in the big hit game state based on the display result being "big hit". It has been. When the large winning opening is opened, a process of supplying a solenoid drive signal to the solenoid 82 for the large winning opening door is executed. At this time, for example, the upper limit period for opening the big winning opening and the upper limit number of executions for the round are set according to which type of jackpot is used. When these settings are completed, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "5", and the jackpot release preprocessing ends.

The process of opening the jackpot in step S115 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “5”. In this big hit opening process, the big winning opening is based on the process of measuring the elapsed time since the big winning opening is opened, the measured elapsed time, the number of game balls detected by the count switch 23, and the like. It includes a process of determining whether or not it is time to return the device from the open state to the closed state. Then, when the large winning opening is returned to the closed state, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "6" after executing a process of stopping the supply of the solenoid drive signal to the solenoid 82 for the large winning opening door. End the processing while the jackpot is open.

The post-processing after opening the jackpot in step S116 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “6”. In this post-opening process of the jackpot, a process of determining whether or not the number of executions of the round that opens the jackpot has reached the set maximum number of executions, and a jackpot game state when the maximum number of executions is reached. It includes processing to make settings to terminate. Then, when the number of round executions has not reached the upper limit, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "5", while when the number of round executions reaches the upper limit, the special figure process flag is set. The value is updated to "7". When the value of the special figure process flag is updated, the post-launch processing is completed.

The jackpot end processing of step S117 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “7”. In this jackpot end process, there is a process of waiting until the waiting time corresponding to the period in which the ending effect as an effect action for notifying the end of the jackpot game state is executed, and a probability change corresponding to the end of the jackpot game state. It includes processing to make various settings to start control and time reduction control. When such a setting is made, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "0", and the jackpot end processing ends.

The small hit release preprocessing in step S118 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “8”. This pre-opening process for small hits includes a process for setting the large winning opening to be open in the small hit game state based on the display result being "small hit". At this time, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "9", and the small hit release preprocessing ends.

The small hit opening process in step S119 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “9”. In this small hit opening process, it is the timing to measure the elapsed time from the opening state of the big winning opening and to return the big winning opening from the open state to the closed state based on the measured elapsed time. It includes processing to determine whether or not it is. When the big winning opening is returned to the closed state and the end timing of the small hit game state is reached, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "10", and the processing during the small hit opening process ends.

The small hit end process in step S120 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “10”. The small hit end process includes a process of waiting until a waiting time corresponding to a period in which the effect operation for notifying the end of the small hit game state is executed has elapsed. Here, when the small hit gaming state ends, the gaming state in the pachinko gaming machine 1 before the small hit gaming state is continued. When the waiting time at the end of the small hit game state has elapsed, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "0", and the small hit end process ends.

The pachinko gaming machine 1 has a configuration in which the winning probability of a big hit and the payout rate change according to a set value. For example, in the special symbol normal processing of the special symbol process processing, the jackpot winning probability and the ball output rate are changed by using the display result determination table (winning probability) according to the set value. For example, the set value consists of 6 stages from 1 to 6, with 6 having the highest probability of winning a big hit, and the smaller the value in the order of 6, 5, 4, 3, 2, 1 the lower the probability of winning a big hit. In this example, when 6 is set as the set value, the advantage is highest for the player, and the smaller the value in the order of 6, 5, 4, 3, 2, 1 is, the lower the advantage is. .. If the jackpot winning probability changes according to the set value, the ball output rate may also change according to the set value. While the jackpot winning probability is constant regardless of the set value, the number of rounds in the jackpot gaming state may change according to the set value. The pachinko gaming machine 1 may be configured so that any one of a plurality of setting values having different advantages for the player can be set. The set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is notified by transmitting a set value designation command from the side of the main board 11 to the side of the effect control board 12.

FIG. 7 shows a configuration example of the display result determination table. FIG. 7A shows a configuration example of the display result determination table for the first special figure used when the variable special figure is the first special figure, and FIG. 7B shows the second special figure of the variable special figure. A configuration example of the display result determination table for the second special figure used in the case of the figure is shown. The display result determination table is a collection of data stored in the ROM 101. In the display result determination table, the hit determination value to be compared with the random number value MR1 is assigned to the special figure display result which is the variable display result of the special symbol according to the set value. The random number value MR1 is a random number value for determining the display result, and the value is randomly updated in the range of 0 to 65535. As the display result determination table, a display result determination table common to the first special figure and the second special figure may be used.

In the display result judgment table, when the game state is in the probability change state (high probability state), more judgment values than in the normal state or the time saving state (low probability state) are displayed as a special figure of "big hit". Assigned to the result. As a result, when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is in a high-probability state such as a probabilistic state in which the probabilistic change control is performed, there is a probability that the pachinko gaming machine 1 is determined to be controlled to the jackpot gaming state as compared with the low-probability state such as the normal state or the time-saving state. It gets higher.

In the display result determination table for the first special figure, it is determined that the probability of being determined to control the special figure display result as a "small hit" to the small hit game state is the same regardless of the game state or the set value. A value has been assigned. In the display result determination table for the second special figure, the probability that the special figure display result is determined to be controlled to the small hit game state as a "small hit" is the probability of being determined to be controlled to the small hit game state regardless of the game state or the set value. Judgment values are assigned so that they have the same value as the judgment table. It should be noted that the probability of being determined to control the small hit game state with the special figure display result as "small hit" may be different according to the set value. Regardless of the variable special figure, the probability that the special figure display result is determined to be controlled to the small hit gaming state as "small hit" may be the same probability.

In the display result judgment table for the first special figure and the display result judgment table for the second special figure, when the game state is the normal state or the time saving state, the range from 1020 to 1237 of the hit judgment values is irrespective of the set value. It is set in the common numerical range of the big hit judgment value for judging the big hit. When the set value is 1, 1020 to 1237 are assigned to "big hit", and while only the common numerical range of the big hit judgment value for judging the big hit is set, the set value 2 to the set value 6 In this case, the numerical range corresponding to each set value is set to the non-common numerical range of the jackpot determination value so as to be continuous from the common numerical range of the jackpot determination value.

In the display result judgment table for the first special figure and the display result judgment table for the second special figure, when the game state is the probability change state, the range from 1020 to 1346 of the hit judgment values is a big hit regardless of the set value. It is set in the common numerical range of the jackpot judgment value for judgment. When the set value is 1, 1020 to 1346 are assigned to the "big hit", so that only the common numerical range of the big hit judgment value for judging the big hit is set, while the set value 2 to the set value In the case of 6, the numerical range corresponding to each set value is set to the non-common numerical range of the jackpot determination value so as to be continuous from the common numerical range of the jackpot determination value.

In the display result determination table for the first special figure, when the game state is the normal state or the time saving state, the range from 32767 to 33094 of the hit judgment values is small for judging the small hit regardless of the set value. It is set in the common numerical range of the hit judgment value. The small hit determination value is set to a numerical range different from the common numerical range and the non-common numerical range of the big hit determination value regardless of the set value of 1 to 6. This prevents the numerical range of the small hit determination value from overlapping with the range of the large hit determination value that changes according to each set value.

In the display result determination table for the first special figure, when the gaming state is in the probabilistic state, the range from 32767 to 33094 of the hit determination values is the set value as in the case where the gaming state is the normal state or the time saving state. Regardless of, it is set in the common numerical range of the small hit judgment value for judging the small hit. The small hit determination value is set to a numerical range different from the common numerical range and the non-common numerical range of the big hit determination value regardless of the set value of 1 to 6. This prevents the numerical range of the small hit determination value from overlapping with the range of the large hit determination value that changes according to each set value.

In the display result determination table for the second special figure, when the game state is the normal state or the time saving state, the range from 32767 to 33421 of the hit judgment values is small for judging the small hit regardless of the set value. It is set in the common numerical range of the hit judgment value. The small hit determination value is set to a numerical range different from the common numerical range and the non-common numerical range of the big hit determination value regardless of the set value of 1 to 6. This prevents the numerical range of the small hit determination value from overlapping with the range of the large hit determination value that changes according to each set value.

In the display result determination table for the second special figure, when the gaming state is the probabilistic state, the range from 32767 to 33421 of the hit determination values is the set value as in the case where the gaming state is the normal state or the time saving state. Regardless of, it is set in the common numerical range of the small hit judgment value for judging the small hit. The small hit determination value is set to a numerical range different from the common numerical range and the non-common numerical range of the big hit determination value regardless of the set value of 1 to 6. This prevents the numerical range of the small hit determination value from overlapping with the range of the large hit determination value that changes according to each set value.

The set value that can be set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 may be 5 or less or 7 or more. The smaller the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1, the more advantageous the player may be. The playability may be changed according to the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1. For example, when the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is 1, the jackpot probability in the normal state is 1/320, and the probability variation state is 65%. When the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is 2, the jackpot probability in the normal state is 1/200, and the gaming ball is provided inside the special variable winning ball device 7 during the jackpot game. While controlling the game state after the end of the big hit game to a probabilistic state based on passing through the switch, the game property (so-called V) in which the ratio of the game ball passing through the predetermined switch during the big hit game is different according to the fluctuation special figure. Probability variation type), and when the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is 3, the jackpot probability is 1/320 and the small hit probability is 1/50, and the game is played during high base (during time reduction control). It may be a game property (so-called 1 type 2 type mixed type) in which a ball is controlled to a big hit gaming state based on passing through a predetermined switch provided inside the special variable winning ball device 7. When the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is any of 1 to 3, the game playability is the same, but the jackpot probability and the small hit are higher than when these set values are any of 1 to 3. A setting may be provided in which the number of prize balls that can be obtained during the jackpot game is small while the probability is high (for example, when the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is any of 4 to 6). When the playability is changed according to the set value, a common switch may be used for different purposes. Specifically, when the set value is 1 to 3, the predetermined switch provided in the special variable winning ball device 7 is used as an effect switch (in order to execute a predetermined effect each time the game ball passes through the predetermined area). When the set value is 4 to 6, the predetermined switch is used as a game switch (for controlling the game state to the probability change state or the jackpot game state based on the fact that the game ball has passed the predetermined switch). It may be used as a switch).

The jackpot type may be determined at a different ratio depending on the set value based on the allocation of the determination value in the jackpot type determination table. Alternatively, the jackpot type may be determined at a common ratio regardless of the set value. The variation pattern may be determined at a different ratio depending on the set value based on the allocation of the determination values in the variation pattern determination table. Alternatively, the fluctuation pattern may be determined at a common ratio regardless of the set value. Since the execution rate of normal reach or super reach differs depending on the set value, the set value may be suggested by the frequency of execution of normal reach or super reach. Alternatively, the execution ratios of normal reach and super reach may be the same regardless of the set value. In addition, it may be possible to execute an arbitrary setting suggestion effect at different ratios according to the set value.

(Main operation of production control board 12)
Next, the main operation of the effect control board 12 will be described. When the effect control board 12 receives the power supply voltage from the power source board or the like, the effect control CPU 120 is activated to execute the effect control main process as shown in the flowchart of FIG. When the effect control main process shown in FIG. 8 is started, the effect control CPU 120 first executes a predetermined initialization process (step S71) to clear the RAM 122, set various initial values, and press the effect control board 12. Set the registers of the mounted CTC (counter / timer circuit). Further, the initial operation control process is executed (step S72). In the initial operation control process, control for performing the initial operation of the movable body 32, such as control for driving the movable body 32 to return to the initial position and control for confirming a predetermined operation, is executed.

After that, it is determined whether or not the timer interrupt flag is turned on (step S73). The timer interrupt flag is set to the ON state every time a predetermined time (for example, 2 milliseconds) elapses, based on the register setting of the CTC, for example. At this time, if the timer interrupt flag is off (step S73; No), the process of step S73 is repeatedly executed and waits.

Further, on the effect control board 12, an interrupt for receiving the effect control command from the main board 11 is generated in addition to the timer interrupt that is generated every time a predetermined time elapses. This interrupt is, for example, an interrupt generated when the effect control INT signal from the main board 11 is turned on. When an interrupt occurs due to the effect control INT signal being turned on, the effect control CPU 120 automatically sets interrupt disabled, but if a CPU that is not automatically interrupt disabled is used, an interrupt occurs. It is desirable to issue a prohibition order (DI instruction). The effect control CPU 120 executes, for example, a predetermined command reception interrupt process in response to an interrupt caused by the effect control INT signal being turned on. In this command reception interrupt process, among the input ports included in the I / O 125, the effect control command is taken in from a predetermined input port that receives the control signal transmitted from the main board 11 via the relay board 15. The effect control command captured at this time is stored in, for example, the effect control command reception buffer provided in the RAM 122. After that, the effect control CPU 120 sets the interrupt enable, and then ends the command reception interrupt process.

If the timer interrupt flag is on in step S73 (step S73; Yes), the timer interrupt flag is cleared and turned off (step S74), and the command analysis process is executed (step S75). In the command analysis process, for example, after reading various effect control commands transmitted from the game control microcomputer 100 of the main board 11 and stored in the effect control command reception buffer, the read effect control commands are used. Corresponding settings and controls are performed. For example, the read effect control command may be stored in a predetermined area of the RAM 122 or stored in the RAM 122 so that which effect control command is received and the content specified by the effect control command can be confirmed by the effect control process process or the like. Turn on the provided reception flag. Further, when the effect control command specifies the game state, the display control unit 123 may be instructed to display the background according to the game state.

After executing the command analysis process in step S75, the effect control process process is executed (step S76). In the effect control process processing, for example, an effect image display operation in the display area of the image display device 5, an audio output operation from the speakers 8L and 8R, a lighting operation in a decorative light emitting body such as a game effect lamp 9 and a decorative LED, and a movable body 32. Controls are performed to operate various production devices such as the driving operation of the LED. Further, regarding the control content of the effect operation using various effect devices, determination, determination, setting, etc. are performed according to the effect control command or the like transmitted from the main board 11.

Following the effect control process process in step S76, the effect random number update process is executed (step S77), and at least a part of the effect random numbers used on the effect control board 12 side is updated by the software. After that, the process returns to the process of step S73. Other processes may be executed before returning to the process of step S73.

FIG. 9 is a flowchart showing an example of the process executed in step S76 of FIG. 8 as the effect control process process. In the effect control process process shown in FIG. 9, the effect control CPU 120 first executes the read-ahead notice setting process (step S161). In the pre-reading notice setting process, for example, a determination, determination, and setting for executing the pre-reading notice effect are performed based on the effect control command at the time of starting winning, which is transmitted from the main board 11. In addition, a process for displaying the hold display is executed based on the number of hold storages specified from the effect control command.

After executing the process of step S161, the effect control CPU 120 selects and executes any of the following processes of steps S170 to S177 according to the value of the effect process flag provided in the RAM 122, for example.

The variable display start waiting process in step S170 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “0” (initial value). This variable display start waiting process is a process of determining whether or not to start the variable display of the decorative symbol on the image display device 5 based on whether or not a command or the like for designating the start of the variable display is received from the main board 11. Etc. are included. When it is determined that the variable display of the decorative symbol on the image display device 5 is to be started, the value of the effect process flag is updated to "1", and the variable display start waiting process is terminated.

The variable display start setting process in step S171 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “1”. In this variable display start setting process, the display result of the variable display of the decorative symbol (fixed decorative symbol), the mode of the variable display of the decorative symbol, the reach effect, and various types are based on the display result and the variation pattern specified by the effect control command. It is determined whether or not various effects such as a notice effect are executed, their modes, and the execution start timing. Then, an effect control pattern (a collection of control data for instructing the display control unit 123 to execute the effect) that reflects the determination result and the like is set. After that, based on the set effect control pattern, the display control unit 123 is instructed to start executing the variable display of the decorative symbol, the value of the effect process flag is updated to "2", and the variable display start setting process is completed. The display control unit 123 starts the variable display of the decorative symbol on the image display device 5 in response to the instruction to start the execution of the variable display of the decorative symbol.

The variable display effect process in step S172 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “2”. In this variable display effect processing, the effect control CPU 120 instructs the display control unit 123 to display the effect image based on the effect control pattern set in step S171 on the display screen of the image display device 5. , Driving the movable body 32, outputting voice and sound effect from the speakers 8L and 8R by outputting the command (sound effect signal) to the voice control board 13, and commanding the lamp control board 14 (illumination signal). Various effect controls are executed during the variable display of the decorative pattern, such as turning on / off / blinking the game effect lamp 9 and the decorative LED according to the output. After performing such effect control, for example, an end code indicating the end of variable display of the decorative symbol is read from the effect control pattern, or a command is received from the main board 11 to specify that the fixed decorative symbol is to be stopped and displayed. In response to what has been done, the final decorative symbol, which is the display result of the decorative symbol, is stopped and displayed. When the fixed decorative symbol is stopped and displayed, the value of the effect process flag is updated to "3", and the effect process during variable display ends.

The special figure hit waiting process in step S173 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “3”. In this special figure hit waiting process, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not an effect control command that specifies to start the big hit game state or the small hit game state has been received from the main board 11. Then, when receiving an effect control command that specifies to start the big hit game state or the small hit game state, if the command specifies the start of the big hit game state, the value of the effect process flag is set to "6". Update to. On the other hand, if the command specifies the start of the small hit game state, the value of the effect process flag is updated to "4", which is a value corresponding to the small hit medium effect process. In addition, when the reception waiting time of the command elapses without receiving the command specifying to start the big hit game state or the small hit game state, it is determined that the display result in the special figure game is "missing". Then, the value of the effect process flag is updated to the initial value "0". When the value of the effect process flag is updated, the waiting process for hitting the special figure ends.

The small hit medium effect process in step S174 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “4”. In this small hit medium effect process, the effect control CPU 120 sets, for example, an effect control pattern or the like corresponding to the effect content in the small hit game state, and executes various effect controls in the small hit game state based on the set content. .. Further, in the small hit middle effect processing, for example, in response to receiving a command from the main board 11 to specify that the small hit game state is terminated, the value of the effect process flag is set to a value corresponding to the small hit end effect. Update to a certain "5" and end the small hit medium production process.

The small hit end effect process in step S175 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “5”. In this small hit end effect process, the effect control CPU 120 sets an effect control pattern or the like corresponding to, for example, the end of the small hit game state, and various effect controls at the end of the small hit game state based on the setting contents. To execute. After that, the value of the effect process flag is updated to the initial value "0", and the small hit end effect process is terminated.

The jackpot effect process in step S176 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “6”. In this big hit middle effect processing, the effect control CPU 120 sets, for example, an effect control pattern corresponding to the effect content in the big hit game state, and executes various effect controls in the big hit game state based on the set content. Further, in the jackpot effect processing, for example, the value of the effect process flag is set to a value corresponding to the ending effect process "7" in response to receiving a command from the main board 11 to specify the end of the jackpot game state. Update to "" and end the production process during the big hit.

The ending effect process of step S177 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “7”. In this ending effect processing, the effect control CPU 120 sets, for example, an effect control pattern or the like corresponding to the end of the jackpot game state, and controls various effects of the ending effect at the end of the jackpot game state based on the setting contents. Run. After that, the value of the effect process flag is updated to the initial value "0", and the ending effect process ends.

(Modified example of basic explanation)
The present invention is not limited to the pachinko gaming machine 1 described in the above basic description, and various modifications and applications are possible without departing from the gist of the present invention.

The pachinko gaming machine 1 of the above basic explanation is a pay-out type gaming machine that pays out a predetermined number of gaming media as prizes based on the occurrence of winning, but the gaming media are enclosed and points are given based on the occurrence of winning. It may be an enclosed gaming machine.

Only one type of symbol (for example, a symbol indicating "-") is displayed during the variable display of the special symbol, and the variable display may be performed by repeating the display and extinguishing of the symbol. Further, even if the symbol is displayed during the variable display, the symbol may not be displayed when the variable display is stopped (the symbol indicating "-" may not be displayed as the display result).

In the above basic explanation, the pachinko gaming machine 1 is shown as the gaming machine, but a medal is inserted and a predetermined number of bets is set, and a plurality of types of symbols are rotated according to the operation of the operation lever by the player, and the player When a symbol is stopped in response to the operation of the stop button by, if the combination of stop symbols becomes a specific combination of symbols, a slot machine capable of executing a game in which a predetermined number of medals are paid out to the player (for example, a big bonus) The present invention can also be applied to a slot machine equipped with one or more of regular bonus, RT, AT, ART, and CZ (hereinafter, bonus, etc.).

The program and data for realizing the present invention are not limited to the form of being distributed and provided by the detachable recording medium to the computer device included in the pachinko gaming machine 1, and the computer device and the like in advance. It may take the form of being distributed by installing it in the storage device of the. Further, the program and data for realizing the present invention are distributed by downloading from another device on the network connected via the communication line or the like by providing the communication processing unit. It doesn't matter.

The execution mode of the game is not limited to the one executed by attaching a detachable recording medium, but can be executed by temporarily storing the program and data downloaded via the communication line or the like in the internal memory or the like. It may be executed directly using the hardware resources of other devices on the network connected via a communication line or the like. Further, the game can be executed by exchanging data with another computer device or the like via a network.

In this specification, one of the expressions for comparison of various ratios such as the execution ratio of the production (expressions such as "high", "low", and "differentiate") is "0%". It may be included. For example, one may have a percentage of "0%" and the other may have a percentage of "100%" or less than "100%".

(Explanation of the feature part related to the setting suggestion effect)
Hereinafter, the feature portion related to the setting suggestion effect in the pachinko gaming machine 1 will be described. In this feature unit, it is possible to execute a setting suggestion effect that suggests a set value in the pachinko gaming machine 1 at a predetermined ratio during execution of the variable display.

FIG. 10-1 is a flowchart showing an example of the process executed in step S171 of the effect control process process as the variable display start setting process. In the variable display start setting process, the stop symbol determination process is executed (step S201). In the stop symbol determination process, a combination of decorative symbols to be stopped and displayed in the variable display of the decorative symbol, such as the final stop symbol in the variable display of the decorative symbol, is determined. Following the stop symbol determination process, the advance notice effect determination process is executed (step S202). The advance notice effect determination process makes it possible to determine the advance notice effect included in the advantageous suggestion effect.

After the advance notice effect determination process is executed, the effect control pattern is determined to be one of a plurality of prepared patterns (step S203). The effect control pattern may include an effect control pattern when the special figure fluctuates, a notice effect control pattern, and other control patterns for controlling various effect executions. For example, in response to the fluctuation pattern indicated by the fluctuation pattern specification command, one of a plurality of prepared special figure fluctuation effect control patterns is selected and set as the usage pattern. Further, one of a plurality of prepared advance notice effect control patterns may be selected and set as a use pattern in accordance with the determination result by the advance notice effect determination process in step S202. It should be noted that the effect control pattern when the special figure fluctuates and the advance notice effect control pattern are not limited to those in which separate effect control patterns are set, but one effect control pattern corresponding to the combination of execution settings of each effect is set. There may be.

When the effect control pattern is determined in step S203, for example, the initial stage of the effect control process timer provided in the predetermined area (effect control timer setting unit, etc.) of the RAM 122 corresponding to the variation pattern specified by the variation pattern designation command. Set the value (step S204). In addition, a setting is made on the screen of the image display device 5 to start the fluctuation of the decorative pattern or the like (step S205). At this time, the display control command specified by the display control data included in the effect control pattern (effect control pattern when the special figure fluctuates) determined in step S203 is transmitted to the VDP of the display control unit 123. The variation of the decorative symbols may be started in the "left", "middle", and "right" decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R provided on the screen of the image display device 5.

Subsequently, the hold display update setting at the start of the variable display is performed (step S206). For example, in the hold display area provided on the screen of the image display device 5, the display part (display part at the left end) corresponding to the hold number "1" is erased (digested), and the other hold numbers "2" to "2" are deleted. The hold display in the display area corresponding to "4" or the like is moved (shifted) one by one to the left. As a result, the hold display is shifted. In the active display unit provided on the screen of the image display device 5, the active display corresponding to the erased (digested) hold display may be performed in the hold display area. If the variable display is immediately started based on the occurrence of the first start prize or the second start prize when the number of pending memories is "0", the active display area is not updated without updating the hold display. Settings may be made to update the active display in. After that, the value of the effect process flag is updated to "2", which is a value corresponding to the effect process during variable display (step S207), and then the variable display start setting process ends.

FIG. 10-2 is a flowchart showing an example of the process executed in step S201 of the variable display start setting process as the stop symbol determination process. In the stop symbol determination process, it is determined whether or not the reach effect of the super reach is executed (step S221). Whether or not the reach effect of the super reach is executed can be determined based on, for example, the variation pattern indicated by the variation pattern designation command transmitted from the main board 11.

If the reach effect of the super reach is not executed (step S221; No), the final stop symbol at the time of non-reach or normal reach is determined (step S222), and the stop symbol determination process is ended. At the time of non-reach, the variable display result becomes "missing". At the time of normal reach, there are cases where the variable display result is "big hit" and cases where the variable display result is "missing". When the variable display mode of the decorative symbol is not the reach mode, the fixed decorative symbol of the non-reach combination is stopped and displayed as the final stop symbol. The final stop symbol at the time of non-reach is determined to be a different (mismatched) decorative symbol in the "left" and "right" decorative symbol display areas 5L and 5R. At the time of normal reach when the variable display result becomes "missing", the final stop symbol of the reach loss combination is stopped and displayed as the final stop symbol at the time of reach loss. The final stop symbol at the time of reach loss is determined so that the same (matching) decorative symbol is used in the "left" and "right" decorative symbol display areas 5L and 5R. At the time of normal reach when the variable display result becomes "big hit", the fixed decorative symbol of the big hit combination is stopped and displayed as the final stop symbol at the time of big hit. The final stop symbol at the time of a big hit is determined to be the same (matching) decorative symbol in the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of "left", "middle", and "right".

When the reach effect of the super reach is executed (step S221; Yes), the final stop symbol at the time of super reach is determined (step S223). At the time of super reach, there are cases where the variable display result is "big hit" and cases where the variable display result is "missing". At the time of super reach when the variable display result becomes "missing", the final stop symbol of the reach loss combination is stopped and displayed as the final stop symbol at the time of reach loss. At the time of a big hit where the variable display result is a "big hit", the final stop symbol of the big hit combination is stopped and displayed as the final stop symbol at the time of the big hit.

At the time of super reach, the same (matching) decorative symbols in the "left" and "right" decorative symbol display areas 5L and 5R are displayed regardless of whether the variable display result is "big hit" or "missing". It is stopped and displayed as a fixed decorative pattern. The left and right decorative symbols that make up such a reach loss combination and a jackpot combination are also called reach symbols. The decorative symbol that can be determined as the reach symbol may include a plurality of types of decorative symbols, for example, seven types of decorative symbols corresponding to the numbers 1 to 7. The decorative pattern corresponding to the numbers may be only an effect image showing the numbers, or may be an effect image showing various characters in addition to the numbers. The reach symbol is determined to be one of a plurality of decorative symbols by referring to the reach symbol determination table stored and prepared in advance in the ROM 121 based on the numerical data indicating the random value for determining the reach symbol. You can do it like this. The numerical data indicating the random number value for determining the reach symbol may be updatable by using one or both of the random counter and the random number circuit 124 provided in the RAM 122.

In the reach symbol determination table, the number of determination values assigned to the decorative symbol to be the reach symbol may be different depending on whether the variable display result is "miss" or "big hit". For example, when the variable display result is "missing", the determination ratio of the decorative pattern corresponding to the number 1 is the highest, and the number 2, the number 3, the number 4, the number 5, the number 6 are the highest. As a result, the determination rate of the decorative pattern becomes lower, and the determination rate of the decorative pattern corresponding to the number 7 becomes the lowest. On the other hand, when the variable display result is "big hit", the determination ratio of the decorative symbol corresponding to the number 1 is the lowest, and the number 2, the number 3, the number 4, the number 5, the number 6 As the number becomes, the determination ratio of the decorative symbol becomes higher, and the determination ratio of the decorative symbol corresponding to the number 7 becomes the highest. In such a setting of the determination ratio, when the decorative symbol corresponding to the number 7 is stopped and displayed as the reach symbol, the variable display result becomes "big hit" and the ratio of being controlled to the big hit gaming state is the highest, and 6 As the number becomes the number of, 5 number, 4 number, 3 number, and 2 number, the variable display result when stopped and displayed as a reach symbol becomes "big hit", and the ratio of being controlled to the big hit game state is low. Therefore, when the decorative symbol corresponding to the number 1 is stopped and displayed as the reach symbol, the variable display result becomes "big hit", and the ratio of being controlled to the big hit game state is the lowest. In the reach symbol determination table, the number of determination values assigned to the decorative symbol to be the reach symbol may be the same regardless of whether the variable display result is "miss" or "big hit". The number of determination values assigned to each decorative symbol to be a reach symbol may be different, or the number of assigned determination values may be the same regardless of the decorative symbol to be a reach symbol. Depending on the jackpot type, the determination ratio of the decorative symbol to be the reach symbol may be different.

Following step S223, it is determined whether or not the determined reach symbol is a decorative symbol corresponding to the number 7 (step S224). At this time, if the reach symbol is a decorative symbol corresponding to a number other than 7 (step S224; No), the stop symbol determination process is terminated. When the reach symbol is a decorative symbol corresponding to the number 7 (step S224; Yes), the presence or absence of the setting suggestion effect is determined according to whether or not the setting suggestion effect is executed (step S225). Whether or not the setting suggestion effect is executed is determined by referring to the setting suggestion effect execution decision table stored in advance in the ROM 121 based on the numerical data indicating the random value for determining the execution of the setting suggestion effect. You can do it. The numerical data indicating the random number value for determining the setting suggestion effect execution may be updatable by using one or both of the random counter and the random number circuit 124 provided in the RAM 122. The presence or absence of the setting suggestion effect is determined to be either "no effect" that does not execute the setting suggestion effect or "with effect" that executes the setting suggestion effect.

Based on the determination result in step S225, it is determined whether or not it is determined that "with effect" for executing the setting suggestion effect is determined (step S226). When it is determined that "no effect" is not executed (step S226; No), the stop symbol determination process is terminated. When it is determined that "with effect" (step S226; Yes), the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is specified (step S227). When the power of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is turned on, the effect control CPU 120 may receive a set value notification command transmitted from the main board 11 side and store the notified set value in a predetermined area of the RAM 122. As a result, in step S227, the set value stored in the RAM 122 may be specified.

Following step S227, the setting suggestion pattern is determined (step S228), and then the stop symbol determination process is terminated. The setting suggestion pattern can be selected from a plurality of setting suggestion patterns by referring to a setting suggestion pattern determination table stored in advance in ROM 121 based on numerical data indicating a random value for determining the setting suggestion pattern. It should be decided. The numerical data indicating the random number value for determining the setting suggestion pattern may be updated by using one or both of the random counter and the random number circuit 124 provided in the RAM 122.

FIG. 10-3 shows a setting example relating to the setting suggestion effect execution decision table. For example, the ROM 121 stores in advance the table data constituting the determination table TA01 shown in FIG. 10-3 as the setting suggestion effect execution determination table. In step S225 of the stop symbol determination process, the presence or absence of the setting suggestion effect is determined by referring to the determination table TA01 or the like. In the determination table TA01, the number of determination values assigned to the presence / absence of the setting suggestion effect differs depending on whether the variable display result is “miss” or “big hit”. For example, when the variable display result is "big hit", the determination rate of "with effect" for executing the setting suggestion effect is higher than when the variable display result is "miss". In such a setting of the determination ratio, when the setting suggestion effect is executed, the variable display result becomes a "big hit" and the ratio of being controlled to the big hit game state is higher than when the setting suggestion effect is not executed. In the setting suggestion effect execution decision table, the number of judgment values assigned to the presence or absence of the setting suggestion effect may be the same regardless of whether the variable display result is "miss" or "big hit". ..

FIG. 10-4 (A) shows a configuration example of the setting suggestion pattern. In this embodiment, four patterns RE-0 to RE3 are provided as a plurality of setting suggestion patterns. The suggestion contents of these setting suggestion patterns differ depending on whether or not the symbol display color is changed and the display color when the symbol display color is changed. The symbol display color is a display color of a decorative symbol that is stopped and displayed as a reach symbol, and can be changed to a suggestion display color including copper, silver, and gold in addition to red, which is a normal display color. The pattern RE-0 does not change the symbol display color, and suggests that the degree of expectation, which is an advantageous setting value for the player, is low. The pattern RE-1 changes the symbol display color to copper color, and suggests confirmation that the set value is 2 or more. The pattern RE-2 changes the symbol display color to silver, suggesting that the player has a high degree of expectation, which is an advantageous setting value. The pattern RE-3 changes the symbol display color to gold, and suggests confirmation that it is 6, which is the highest set value. As described above, in the setting suggestion effect using the reach symbol, it is possible to suggest the set value in the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to whether or not the symbol display color has changed and the symbol display color after the change.

FIG. 10-4 (B) shows a setting example relating to the setting suggestion pattern determination table. For example, the ROM 121 stores in advance the table data constituting the determination table TA11 shown in FIG. 10-4 (B) as the setting suggestion pattern determination table. In step S228 of the stop symbol determination process, the setting suggestion pattern is determined by referring to the determination table TA11 or the like. In the determination table TA11, there is a portion in which the number of determination values assigned to the determination result of the setting suggestion pattern differs depending on the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1.

When the setting suggestion effect using the reach symbol is executed, the reach symbol becomes a decorative symbol corresponding to the number 7, so that the ratio of being controlled to the jackpot game state is high. When the setting suggestion effect is executed in the pattern RE-0, the expectation level which is an advantageous setting value for the player is low, and when the setting suggestion effect is executed in the pattern RE-1, the set value is 2 or more. It is confirmed that there is. Further, when the setting suggestion effect is executed in the pattern RE-2, the expectation is high, which is an advantageous setting value for the player, and when the setting suggestion effect is executed in the pattern RE-3, the setting value is the highest. It is confirmed that it is 6. As described above, when the variable display mode of the decorative symbol is the reach mode, the reach symbol includes a symbol display mode that suggests control of the jackpot gaming state such as a decorative symbol corresponding to a number other than 7, and a symbol display mode of 7. It includes a symbol display mode that suggests control of a jackpot game state such as a decorative symbol corresponding to a number and suggests a set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1. When the reach symbol is a decorative symbol corresponding to the number 7, the reach symbol is displayed in the normal display color to give a suggestion regarding the control of the jackpot game state, and then the symbol display color is changed. The suggestions regarding the control of the jackpot game state will be continuously provided, and the suggestions regarding the set value will be provided.

The setting suggestion effect can be executed so that the effect mode differs depending on the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1. For example, when the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is 1, the setting suggestion pattern is not determined in the pattern RE-1, so that the symbol display color is not changed to copper. In this way, as a symbol display mode when the reach symbol is a decorative symbol corresponding to the number 7, depending on whether or not the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is other than 1, the symbol display color Is different whether or not is changed to copper color. When the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is other than 6, the setting suggestion pattern is not determined in the pattern RE-3, so that the symbol display color is not changed to gold. In this way, the symbol display color is gold as a symbol display mode when the reach symbol is a decorative symbol corresponding to the number 7 depending on whether or not the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine is 6. Whether or not it is changed to is different.

The setting suggestion effect was stopped and displayed as a reach symbol in place of the one that changes the symbol display color, which is the display color of the decorative symbol that was stopped and displayed as the reach symbol, or in addition to the one that changes the symbol display color. Any aspect of the reach aspect, such as the shape or pattern of the decorative pattern, may be changed. Alternatively, display of a background image, an outer frame image, or any other effect image, output of sound by the speakers 8L and 8R, lighting of a decorative light emitter such as a game effect lamp 9 and a decorative LED, operation of a movable member for effect, and the like. The production mode by any production device, such as a combination of a part or all of them, may be changed. For the setting suggestion effect and other arbitrary effects in the pachinko gaming machine 1, arbitrary data related to the effect control, arbitrary data not related to the effect control, or data obtained by combining these are predetermined for executing the effect. It may be feasible if it satisfies one or more conditional expressions. The effect of changing the pattern display color is also called a change effect.

The plurality of setting suggestion patterns may include a pattern that can be determined only when the jackpot gaming state is controlled, and a pattern that can be determined even when the jackpot gaming state is not controlled. For example, pattern RE-0 and pattern RE-1 can be determined at a predetermined ratio even when the variable display result is "missing", whereas pattern RE-2 and pattern RE-3 are variable display. It may be possible to determine at a predetermined ratio only when the result is "big hit", and it may not be possible to determine when the variable display result is "missing". In this case, the pattern RE-2 is determined at a common ratio regardless of the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1, whereas the pattern RE-3 is set in the pachinko gaming machine 1. It may be determined at different ratios depending on the set value.

FIG. 10-5 is a flowchart showing an example of the process executed in step S172 of the effect control process process as the effect process during variable display. In the variable display during effect processing, it is determined whether or not the special figure variation time, which is the variable display time corresponding to the variation pattern, has elapsed, based on, for example, the timer value of the effect control process timer (step S241). When it is determined that the variable display time has not elapsed (step S241; No), control is performed to execute various effects as the variable display progresses. The effect control CPU 120 creates various commands based on the control data read from the effect control pattern determined in step S203 of the variable display start setting process. This command is transmitted to the display control unit 123, the voice control board 13, the lamp control board 14, and the like. As a result, a predetermined effect image is displayed on the screen of the image display device 5, a predetermined sound effect is output from the speakers 8L and 8R, and the game effect lamp 9 and the decorative LED are turned on, off, and blinked. It suffices that various effects can be performed by a predetermined effect device by operating a movable member for effect such as the movable body 32, or by combining a part or all of them.

In the variable display during effect processing, it is determined whether or not it is the advance notice effect period (step S242). In the case of the advance notice effect period (step S242; Yes), the control for executing the advance notice effect is performed (step S243). When it is not the advance notice effect period (step S242; No), or after the control of step S243 is performed, it is determined whether or not it is the reach effect period (step S244). In the case of the reach effect period (step S244; Yes), the control to execute the reach effect is performed (step S245). When the decorative symbol to be the reach symbol is stopped and displayed by the control of step S245 and then the reach effect after the symbol display color is changed is executed, a suggestion regarding the control of the jackpot game state is given, and the pachinko gaming machine 1 is used. Can make suggestions regarding set values.

When it is not the reach effect period (step S244; No), or after the control of step S245 is performed, it is determined whether or not it is the change effect period (step S246). The change effect period may be predetermined as an execution period of the effect of changing the symbol display color when the setting suggestion effect using the reach symbol is executed. In the case of the change effect period (step S246; Yes), the control to execute the change effect is performed (step S247). When it is not the change effect period (step S246; No), or after the control in step S247 is performed, the decorative pattern is otherwise variable based on, for example, the setting in the effect control pattern determined in response to the variation pattern. After performing control for executing the effect during the variable display including the display operation (step S248), the effect process during the variable display is terminated.

The change effect period may be set to a different time length depending on the effect mode of the change effect. For example, in the case of pattern RE-0, the change effect period is set to the shortest first period, and in the case of pattern RE-1, the change effect period is set to the second period longer than the first period, and the pattern RE- In the case of 2, the change effect period may be set to the third period, which is longer than the second period, and in the case of pattern RE-3, the change effect period may be set to the longest fourth period. Generally, when an effect (advantageous effect) for notifying an advantage is executed, a player takes an image or a video of the effect with a mobile terminal owned by the player and shoots it on an SNS (Social). There is a tendency to post on websites that require membership registration such as Networking Service) and Internet video supply sites. However, if the execution period of such an advantageous effect is short, there arises a problem that an appropriate shooting time cannot be secured. On the other hand, for productions that are often performed even in disadvantageous cases (disadvantageous productions), since the motivation for shooting is not motivated, if the execution period of the disadvantageous productions is long, the player will rather feel uncomfortable. There is a problem. Therefore, the execution period of the advantageous effect is lengthened to secure the shooting time, and the execution period of the unfavorable effect is shorter than that of the advantageous effect to reduce discomfort. As a result, when an effect that is advantageous to the player is executed, it is possible to prevent the player from overlooking it, and it is possible to secure a shooting time. In addition, by securing the shooting time, the shot images and moving images can be published by the player on the Internet, and the public interest in the pachinko gaming machine 1 can be increased. In addition, in many cases, by disclosing the images taken by which pachinko game machine 1 in which game field, the game field was advertised by the players from the game field side. become. In this way, by securing the shooting time when the setting value of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is suggested, a synergistic effect is brought about not only to the player but also to the game hall side.

When the variable display time has elapsed (step S241; Yes), it is determined whether or not the symbol confirmation command transmitted from the main board 11 has been received (step S249). If the symbol confirmation command is not received (step S249; No), the effect processing during variable display is terminated and the process waits. If the predetermined time elapses without receiving the symbol confirmation command after the variable display time has elapsed, the predetermined error processing is executed in response to the failure to normally receive the symbol confirmation command. You may do so. When a symbol confirmation command is received (step S249; Yes), control is performed to derive and display the final stop symbol (confirmed decorative symbol) that is the display result in the variable display of the decorative symbol (step S250). Subsequently, a predetermined fixed time is set as the waiting time for receiving the jackpot start designation command (step S251). Further, after updating the value of the effect process flag to "3", which is a value corresponding to the special figure hit waiting process (step S252), the variable display effect process is terminated.

FIG. 10-6 shows an execution example of the setting suggestion effect. FIG. 10-6 (A) shows an effect execution example HD101 in which the variable display mode of the decorative symbol is the reach mode and the reach is established. When the decorative symbols corresponding to the numbers 7 are stopped and displayed in the decorative symbol display areas 5L and 5R of the "left" and "right", the reach is established and the reach effect of the normal reach is executed. FIG. 10-6 (B) shows an effect execution example HD102, which is a reach development in which the reach effect of the normal reach shifts to the reach effect of the super reach. On the display screen of the image display device 5, the decorative pattern is reduced and displayed, and the effect image in the reach effect of the super reach is displayed. FIG. 10-6 (C) shows an effect execution example HD103 in which a change effect that is a setting suggestion effect is executed. The effect display corresponding to the change effect is displayed by superimposing it on the reach symbol that is displayed as stopped. In addition, by displaying an effect image for notifying a message such as "change the symbol display color !!", it is suggested to change the symbol display color.

FIG. 10-6 (D1) shows an effect execution example HD111 in which the symbol display color does not change due to the pattern RE-0. FIG. 10-6 (D2) shows an effect execution example HD112 in which the pattern display color is changed to copper color by the pattern RE-1. FIG. 10-6 (D3) shows an effect execution example HD113 in which the symbol display color is changed to silver by the pattern RE-2. FIG. 10-6 (D4) shows an effect execution example HD113 in which the symbol display color is changed to gold by the pattern RE-3. In the effect execution example HD111, the display color of the reach pattern is not changed by the pattern RE-0, and is not changed as the normal display color of red. In this way, the failure effect (gase effect) in which the symbol display color is not changed is executed, suggesting that the expectation level, which is an advantageous setting value for the player, is low. In the effect execution example HD112, the display color of the reach pattern is changed to copper by the pattern RE-1, which suggests that the set value is 2 or more. In the effect execution example HD113, the display color of the reach pattern is changed to silver by the pattern RE-2, which suggests that the expectation is high, which is an advantageous setting value for the player. In the effect execution example HD114, the display color of the reach pattern is changed to gold by the pattern RE-3, which suggests the determination of 6, which is the highest set value.

In addition to the change effect that can change the display color of the reach pattern, the setting suggestion effect suggests the jackpot expectation by any effect such as a pseudo-continuous effect or a look-ahead notice effect, and the setting value of the pachinko gaming machine 1. May be able to make suggestions about. During the execution of the variable display, it may be possible to give a suggestion regarding the setting value of the pachinko gaming machine 1 after giving a suggestion regarding the control of the jackpot gaming state. When executing an arbitrary effect, after making a suggestion regarding the control of the jackpot gaming state, the suggestion regarding the control of the jackpot gaming state is continuously performed, and the suggestion regarding the control of the jackpot gaming state is continuously performed and pachinko. It may include the case of giving a suggestion regarding the set value of the gaming machine 1. When performing an arbitrary effect, after making a suggestion regarding the control of the jackpot gaming state, the suggestion ends, and the suggestion regarding the control of the jackpot gaming state is continuously performed, and the setting value of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is related. It may include the case of making a suggestion.

The suggestion regarding the set value of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is not limited to the suggestion of the set value of the pachinko gaming machine 1, and may suggest, for example, whether or not the set value of the pachinko gaming machine 1 has been changed. .. For example, the plurality of setting suggestion patterns may include patterns having different determination ratios depending on whether or not the set value in the pachinko gaming machine 1 has been changed. When the set value in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is changed, the suggestion is made by the effect mode of the pattern determined at a high rate so that the player can recognize that the set value has been changed. Can be diversified to improve the enjoyment of pachinko.

While the variable display is being executed, the suggestion regarding the control of the jackpot gaming state may be given, while the suggestion regarding the set value of the pachinko gaming machine 1 may not be given. After that, when the display result of the variable display becomes "big hit", the pachinko gaming machine is accompanied by the execution of the big hit start effect (fanfare effect) and the big hit medium effect (such as the effect corresponding to the first round and the second round). You may make a suggestion about the setting value of 1. In some cases, the setting value of the pachinko gaming machine 1 may be suggested without suggesting the control of the jackpot gaming state.

Instead of some or all of the suggestions for controlling the jackpot gaming state, or with some or all of the suggestions for controlling the jackpot gaming state, make suggestions for controlling a state that is different from the jackpot gaming state for the player. It may be a thing. For example, it may give a suggestion regarding a probabilistic state that is controlled after the end of the jackpot game state. In addition, as an advantageous state, a state in which an arbitrary game value advantageous to the player is given may be suggested according to whether or not it is controlled.

(Explanation of feature 059AK)
Next, the gaming machine in the feature unit 059AK of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 11-1 to 11-35. The pachinko gaming machine 1 in the feature unit 059AK of the present embodiment is not limited to after the big hit game state, and the time saving control is performed (the time saving state is set) even when the time saving symbol is stopped and displayed as a variable display result. As for the display result of the special figure game, the time saving symbol is stopped and displayed in both the normal state and the time saving state, but in the time saving state, even if the time saving symbol is stopped and displayed, the time saving control is not newly performed. On the other hand, as for the decorative symbol, different symbols are stopped and displayed in the normal state and the time saving state. Hereinafter, the pachinko gaming machine 1 in the feature unit 059AK having such features will be described. The same parts as those described in the above basic explanation will be omitted.

FIG. 11-1 is a front view of the pachinko gaming machine 1 in the feature unit 059AK of the present embodiment, and shows the layout of the main members. The pachinko gaming machine (gaming machine) 1 is roughly classified into a gaming board (gauge board) 2 constituting the game board surface and a game machine frame (underframe) 3 for supporting and fixing the game board 2. A game area is formed on the game board 2, and a game ball as a game medium is launched from a predetermined ball launching device and is driven into the game area.

The "variable display" of the special symbol is, for example, to display a plurality of types of special symbols in a variable manner (the same applies to other symbols described later). Fluctuations include update display of a plurality of symbols, scroll display of a plurality of symbols, deformation of one or more symbols, enlargement / reduction of one or more symbols, and the like. When the special symbol or the ordinary symbol changes, a plurality of types of special symbols or ordinary symbols are updated and displayed. In the variation of the decorative symbol, a plurality of types of decorative symbols are scrolled or updated, and one or more decorative symbols are deformed or enlarged / reduced. The variation also includes a mode in which a certain symbol is blinked and displayed. At the end of the variable display, a predetermined special symbol is stopped and displayed (also referred to as derivation or derivation display) as a display result (the same applies to the variable display of other symbols described later). The variable display may be expressed as a variable display or a variable display. In addition, the "variable display" of the special symbol includes one in which a plurality of LEDs are sequentially lit or blinked, and as a display result, a predetermined LED lighting combination may be displayed (also referred to as derivation or derivation display). included.

The special symbol variably displayed on the first special symbol display device 4A is also referred to as a "first special symbol", and the special symbol variably displayed on the second special symbol display device 4B is also referred to as a "second special symbol". Further, the special figure game using the first special figure is also referred to as a "first special figure game", and the special figure game using the second special figure is also referred to as a "second special figure game". It should be noted that there may be one type of special symbol display device that performs variable display of the special symbol.

An image display device 5 is provided near the center of the game area on the game board 2. The image display device 5 is composed of, for example, an LCD (liquid crystal display), an organic EL (Electro Luminescence), or the like, and displays various effects images. The image display device 5 may be composed of a projector and a screen. Various effects images are displayed on the image display device 5.

For example, on the screen of the image display device 5, a decorative symbol (a symbol indicating a number or the like) as a plurality of types of decorative identification information different from the special symbol is synchronized with the first special figure game or the second special figure game. Is variable display. Here, in synchronization with the first special figure game or the second special figure game, the decorative symbols are variably displayed (for example, up and down) in the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of "left", "middle", and "right". Direction scroll display and update display). It should be noted that the special figure game and the variable display of the decorative pattern that are executed in synchronization are also collectively referred to as simply variable display.

On the screen of the image display device 5, a display area for displaying a hold display corresponding to the variable display in which execution is suspended or an active display corresponding to the variable display being executed may be provided. Hold display and active display are also collectively referred to as variable display compatible display corresponding to variable display.

The number of variable displays on hold is also called the number of stored items on hold. The number of reserved storage corresponding to the first special figure game is also referred to as the first reserved storage number, and the number of reserved storage corresponding to the second special figure game is also referred to as the second reserved storage number. The total of the first reserved storage number and the second reserved storage number is also referred to as the total reserved storage number.

At a predetermined position of the game board 2, a first hold indicator 25A and a second hold indicator 25B configured to include a plurality of LEDs are provided. The first hold indicator 25A displays the first hold storage number according to the number of LEDs lit. The second hold indicator 25B displays the second hold storage number according to the number of LEDs lit.

A winning ball device 6A is provided below the image display device 5, and a variable winning ball device 6B is provided on the right side of the winning ball device 6A.

The winning ball device 6A forms, for example, a first starting winning opening that is always maintained in a constant open state in which a game ball can enter by a predetermined ball receiving member. When a game ball enters the first start winning opening, a predetermined number (for example, three) of prize balls may be paid out and the first special figure game may be started.

The variable winning ball device 6B (ordinary electric accessory) forms a second starting winning opening that is changed between a closed state and an open state by a solenoid 81. The variable winning ball device 6B includes, for example, an electric tulip-shaped accessory having a pair of movable wing pieces, and the movable wing pieces are in a vertical position when the solenoid 81 is in the off state, so that the tip of the movable wing pieces is in a vertical position. Is close to the winning ball device 6A and is in a closed state in which the game ball does not enter the second starting winning opening (also referred to as the second starting winning opening is closed). On the other hand, the variable-sweep wing device 6B is in an open state in which the game ball can enter the second start winning opening because the movable wing piece is in the tilted position when the solenoid 81 is on (second start). It is also said that the winning opening is open.) When a game ball enters the second start winning opening, a predetermined number (for example, three) of prize balls can be paid out and the second special figure game can be started. The variable winning ball device 6B may be any as long as it changes between the closed state and the open state, and is not limited to the one provided with the electric tulip type accessory. Further, in the time saving state, the control (high opening control, high base control) that makes it easier for the game ball to enter the second starting winning opening is executed, and the fluctuation efficiency of the special symbol (particularly the second special symbol) is improved. Then, in the time-saving state, if a so-called right-handed hit is performed to launch the game ball into the game area on the right side of the player so that the game ball is won in the second starting winning opening formed by the variable winning ball device 6B. good.

A predetermined ball receiving member always keeps a constant open state at a predetermined position of the game board 2 (in the example shown in FIG. 1, three places on the lower left of the game area and one place on the upper side of the variable winning ball device 6B). A general winning opening 10 is provided. In this case, when entering any of the general winning openings 10, a predetermined number (for example, 10) of game balls are paid out as prize balls.

A special variable winning ball device 7 having a large winning opening is provided between the winning ball device 6A and the variable winning ball device 6B. The special variable winning ball device 7 includes a large winning opening door that is opened and closed by a solenoid 82, and forms a large winning opening as a specific area that changes between an open state and a closed state depending on the large winning opening door. In the big hit game state, the player can obtain the prize ball by letting the game ball enter the big prize opening. Therefore, the jackpot gaming state is an advantageous state for the player. The larger the number of rounds in the jackpot game state and the longer the open upper limit period, the more advantageous it is for the player. In the big hit game state, a so-called right-handed hit that launches the game ball into the game area on the right side may be performed so that the game ball is won in the big prize opening formed by the special variable winning ball device 7.

As an example, in the special variable winning ball device 7, when the solenoid 82 for the big winning door (for special electric accessory) is off, the big winning door closes the big winning door and the game ball is large. You will not be able to enter (pass) the winning opening. On the other hand, in the special variable winning ball device 7, when the solenoid 82 for the large winning opening door is on, the large winning opening door opens the large winning opening, and the game ball can easily enter the large winning opening. Become.

When a game ball enters the large prize opening, a predetermined number (for example, 14) of game balls are paid out as a prize ball. When a game ball enters the large winning opening, more prize balls are paid out than when the game ball enters, for example, the first starting winning opening, the second starting winning opening, and the general winning opening 10.

The entry of a game ball into each winning opening including the general winning opening 10 is also referred to as "winning". In particular, winning a prize at the starting opening (first starting winning opening, second starting winning opening) is also referred to as a starting winning.

A normal symbol display 20 is provided at a predetermined position of the game board 2 (in the example shown in FIG. 11-1, the lower left of the game area). As an example, the ordinary symbol display 20 is composed of a 7-segment LED or the like, and performs variable display of the ordinary symbol as a plurality of types of ordinary identification information different from the special symbol. Ordinary symbols are represented by numbers indicating "0" to "9" and lighting patterns such as "-". The normal symbol may include a pattern in which all the LEDs are turned off. Such a variable display of a normal pattern is also called a normal figure game.

A passing gate 41 through which a game ball can pass is provided on the right side of the image display device 5. Based on the fact that the game ball has passed through the passing gate 41, the normal drawing game is executed.

A normal symbol display 25C is provided below the normal symbol display 20. The normal figure hold display 25C is configured to include, for example, four LEDs, and displays the number of normal figure hold storages, which is the number of normal figure games whose execution is held, by the number of LEDs lit.

In addition to the above configuration, the surface of the game board 2 is provided with a windmill for changing the flow direction and speed of the game ball and a large number of obstacle nails. At the bottom of the game area, there is an out opening for taking in a game ball that has not entered any of the winning openings.

Speakers 8L and 8R for reproducing and outputting sound effects and the like are provided at the upper left and right positions of the gaming machine frame 3. A main lamp 9a is provided above the image display device 5 in the gaming machine frame 3, and frame lamps 9b are provided on the left and right sides of the main lamp 9a so as to surround the game area. Further, an attacker lamp 9c is provided in the vicinity of the special variable winning ball device 7 on the game board 2.

At a predetermined position of the game board 2 (upper position of the image display device 5 in FIG. 11-1), a movable body 32 that operates according to the effect is provided. Further, the movable body 32 is provided with a movable body lamp 9d. The movable body lamp 9d, the main lamp 9a, the frame lamp 9b, and the attacker lamp 9c described above may be collectively referred to as a game effect lamp 9. The main lamp 9a, the frame lamp 9b, the attacker lamp 9c, and the movable body lamp 9d are configured to include an LED.

At the lower right position of the gaming machine frame 3, a ball striking operation handle (operation knob) 30 operated by a player or the like to launch the game ball toward the game area by the striking ball launching device is provided.

At a predetermined position of the gaming machine frame 3 below the gaming area, the gaming balls paid out as prize balls and the gaming balls rented by the predetermined ball lending machine are held (stored) so as to be able to be supplied to the hitting ball launching device. ) A hitting ball supply plate (upper plate) is provided. In addition to the upper plate, the gaming machine frame 3 may be provided with a payout portion (ball hitting plate) on which prize balls are paid out when the upper plate is full.

A stick controller 31A that can be gripped and tilted by the player is attached to a predetermined position of the gaming machine frame 3 below the gaming area. The stick controller 31A is provided with a trigger button that can be pressed and operated by the player. The operation on the stick controller 31A is detected by the controller sensor unit 35A.

A push button 31B is provided at a predetermined position of the gaming machine frame 3 below the gaming area so that the player can perform a predetermined instruction operation by a pressing operation or the like. The operation on the push button 31B is detected by the push sensor 35B.

In the pachinko gaming machine 1, stick controller 31A and push button 31B are provided as detection means for detecting the movement (operation, etc.) of the player, but detection means other than these may be provided.

FIG. 11-2 is a flowchart showing an example of the start winning determination process executed in step S101 of FIG. When the start winning prize determination process is started, the CPU 103 first determines whether or not the first start opening switch 22A provided corresponding to the first start winning opening formed by the normal winning ball device 6A is on (). Step S1201). When it is determined that the first start port switch 22A is on in the switch processing, for example, the first start port switch 22A is determined to be on (step S2101; Yes), the CPU 103 sets the first special drawing. It is determined whether or not the first special figure reserved storage number, which is the reserved stored number of the special figure game used, is a predetermined upper limit value (for example, “4”) (step S1202). At this time, the CPU 103 is the first stored value of the first special figure reserved storage number counter (counter for counting the first special figure reserved storage number) provided in a predetermined area of the RAM 102 (game control counter setting unit, etc.). It suffices if the first special figure reserved storage number can be specified by reading the special figure reserved storage number count value. When it is determined in step S1202 that the number of reserved first special figure is not the upper limit value (step S1202; No), the CPU 103 stores the start port buffer provided in the predetermined area of the RAM 102 (game control buffer setting unit, etc.). The starting port buffer value, which is a value, is set to "1" (step S1203).

When it is determined in step S1201 that the first start port switch 22A is off (step S1201; No), or when it is determined in step S1202 that the number of reserved first special figures has reached the upper limit value (step S1202; Yes), the CPU 103 determines whether or not the second start opening switch 22B provided corresponding to the second start winning opening formed by the normally variable winning ball device 6B is on (step S1204). When it is determined that the second start port switch 22B is on in the switch processing, for example, the second start port switch 22B is determined to be on (step S1204; Yes), the CPU 103 sets the second special figure. It is determined whether or not the second special figure reserved storage number, which is the reserved stored number of the special figure game used, is a predetermined upper limit value (for example, “4”) (step S1205). At this time, the CPU 103 is a second stored value of a second special figure reserved storage number counter (counter for counting the second special figure reserved storage number) provided in a predetermined area of the RAM 102 (game control counter setting unit, etc.). It suffices if the second special figure reserved storage number can be specified by reading the special figure reserved storage number count value. When it is determined in step S1205 that the number of reserved second special figure is not the upper limit value (step S1205; No), the CPU 103 sets the start port buffer value to "2" (step S1206). When it is determined that the second start port switch 22B is not on (step S1204; No), or when it is determined that the second special figure reserved storage number is the upper limit value (step S1205; Yes), the CPU 103 determines. Start The winning prize determination process ends.

After executing either the process of step S1203 or S1206, the CPU 103 updates so as to add 1 to the special figure hold storage count value according to the start port buffer value (step S207). For example, when the start port buffer value is "1", the 1st special figure hold storage count value is added by 1, while when the start port buffer value is "2", the 2nd special figure hold memory count value is added. Add 1 In this way, the 1st special figure reserved memory count value is incremented by 1 when the game ball enters the 1st start winning opening and the 1st start condition corresponding to the special figure game using the 1st special figure is satisfied. Updated to (increment). In addition, the count value of the number of reserved memory of the second special figure increases by 1 when the game ball enters the second start winning opening and the second start condition corresponding to the special figure game using the second special figure is satisfied. Updated to (increment). At this time, the total hold storage count value, which is the stored value of the total hold storage counter provided in the predetermined area of the RAM 102 (game control counter setting unit, etc.), is updated so as to be added by 1 (step S1208).

After executing the process of step S1208, the CPU 103 extracts a predetermined game random number corresponding to the occurrence of the start winning prize (step S1209). As an example, in the process of step S1209, among the numerical data updated by the random number counter or the like provided in the predetermined area (game control counter setting unit or the like) of the random number circuit 104 or the RAM 102, the random number for determining the special figure display result is determined. Numerical data indicating the numerical value MR1, the random number value MR2 for determining the jackpot type, and the random number value MR3 for determining the fluctuation pattern are extracted. Numerical data indicating each random number value extracted in this way is stored as hold data by being set at the beginning of an empty entry in the special figure hold storage unit corresponding to the start port buffer value (step S1210). For example, when the start port buffer value is "1", the hold data is set in the first special figure hold storage unit. On the other hand, when the start port buffer value is "2", the hold data is set in the second special figure hold storage unit. At this time, when the hold data is set in the first special figure hold storage unit, the CPU 103 can control the first hold indicator 25A to specify the number of the first special figure hold storage added by one. The first hold indicator 25A may be made to perform such a display (for example, increase the number of LEDs lit by one). When the hold data is set in the second special figure hold storage unit, the CPU 103 controls the second hold indicator 25B to display a display capable of specifying the number of the second special figure hold storage added by one. The second hold indicator 25B may be made to perform (for example, increase the number of LEDs lit by one).

The first special figure reservation storage unit is a special figure game (first special figure game) in which the game ball enters the first start winning opening formed by the normal winning ball device 6A and the first starting winning is generated, but the game has not been started yet. The hold data of the special figure game) using the first special figure in the symbol display device 4A is stored. As an example, the first special figure reservation storage unit associates the winning order with the first starting winning opening (the order of detecting the game ball) with the holding number, and based on the establishment of the first starting condition by the entry of the game ball. The number of stored data such as the random number value MR1 for determining the special figure display result extracted from the random number circuit 104 by the CPU 103, the random number value MR2 for determining the jackpot type, and the numerical data indicating the random number value MR3 for determining the fluctuation pattern are reserved data. Is stored until a predetermined upper limit value (for example, "4") is reached. In this way, the hold data stored in the first special figure hold storage unit indicates that the execution (variable display) of the special figure game using the first special figure is held, and the variable display result in this special figure game. Hold that makes it possible to determine whether or not it is determined to control the jackpot game state based on (special figure display result), and whether or not the variable display mode of the decorative symbol is a specific mode (for example, reach effect). It becomes stored information.

It should be noted that the hold number of the first special figure hold storage unit and the display position of the hold display symbol (controlled by the effect control board 12 side) basically correspond to each other. Therefore, when the hold data is stored in the first special figure hold storage unit, the hold display symbol is displayed at the display position corresponding to the hold number associated with the hold data. For example, when the hold data is newly stored in association with the hold number "1", the hold display symbol is displayed at the first display position on the leftmost side of the first hold display unit 5HL. For example, when the hold data is newly stored in association with the hold number "2", the hold display symbol is displayed at the second display position located on the right side of the first display position of the first hold display unit 5HL. do.

The second special figure holding storage unit is a special figure game (second) that has not been started yet, although the game ball enters the second start winning opening formed by the normally variable winning ball device 6B and the second starting winning is generated. The reserved data of the special figure game) using the second special figure in the special symbol display device 4B is stored. As an example, the second special figure reservation storage unit associates the winning order with the second starting winning opening (the order of detecting the game ball) with the holding number, and based on the establishment of the second starting condition by the entry of the game ball. Numerical data indicating the random number value MR1 for determining the special figure display result, the random number value MR2 for determining the jackpot type, and the random number value MR3 for determining the fluctuation pattern extracted by the CPU 103 from the random number circuit 104 or the like are set as pending data, and the number of them is Store until a predetermined upper limit value (for example, "4") is reached. In this way, the hold data stored in the second special figure hold storage unit indicates that the execution (variable display) of the special figure game using the second special figure is held, and the variable display result in this special figure game. Hold that makes it possible to determine whether or not it is determined to control the jackpot game state based on (special figure display result), and whether or not the variable display mode of the decorative symbol is a specific mode (for example, reach effect). It becomes stored information.

The hold number of the second special figure hold storage unit and the display position of the hold display symbol (controlled by the effect control board 12 side) basically correspond to each other. Therefore, when the hold data is stored in the second special figure hold storage unit, the hold display symbol is displayed at the display position corresponding to the hold number associated with the hold data. For example, when the hold data is newly stored in association with the hold number "1", the hold display symbol is displayed at the first display position on the leftmost side of the second hold display unit 5HR. For example, when the hold data is newly stored in association with the hold number "2", the hold display symbol is displayed at the second display position located on the right side of the first display position of the second hold display unit 5HR. do.

After executing the process of step S1210, the CPU 103 makes a setting for transmitting the start port winning designation command prepared in advance to the effect control board 12 (step S1211). After that, the CPU 103 makes a setting for transmitting the hold storage number notification command prepared in advance to the effect control board 12 (step S1212).

Subsequently, the CPU 103 executes a winning random number value determination process (step S1213). As described above, the winning random number value determination process is a process of determining the starting winning value, and the random number value is based on the random number values MR1 and MR3 of the random number values MR1 to 3 extracted in step S1209. This is a process for determining whether or not the variable display result of the variable display of the execution target is a “big hit” or a “small hit” and the fluctuation pattern of the variable display (see FIG. 10-5). After that, the CPU 103 determines whether the start port buffer value is "1" or "2" (step S1214). At this time, if it is determined that the start port buffer value is "2" (step S1214; "2"), the CPU 103 clears the start port buffer and initializes the stored value to "0" (). Step S1215), the start winning determination process is completed. On the other hand, when it is determined that the start port buffer value is "1" (step S1214; "1"), the CPU 103 clears the start port buffer and initializes the stored value to "0". (Step S1216), the process proceeds to step S1204. As a result, even when both the first start port switch 22A and the second start port switch 22B simultaneously detect a valid start prize for the game ball, the process based on the detection of both valid start prizes can be reliably completed.

FIG. 11-3 is a flowchart showing an example of the process executed in step S1213 of FIG. 11-2 as the winning random number value determination process. In the present embodiment, when the variable display of the special symbol or the decorative symbol is started, the special symbol display result (variable display result of the special symbol) is set as a "big hit" or a "small hit" by the special symbol normal processing, and the big hit game. A decision is made as to whether or not to control the state or the small hit game state. Further, in the variation pattern setting process, the variation pattern corresponding to the variable display mode of the decorative pattern is determined. On the other hand, apart from these determinations, in the winning random number value determination process, the game ball is extracted at the starting winning timing detected at the starting winning opening (the first starting winning opening or the second starting winning opening) at this timing. Judgment as to whether or not the variable display result of the variable display of the execution target of the randomized value (random value extracted in the process of step S1209) is "big hit" or "small hit", and variable display of the decorative symbol. It determines which fluctuation pattern will be (so-called "look-ahead"). As a result, before the variable display of the special symbol or decorative symbol based on the detection of the game ball that has entered the start winning opening is started (before the start condition of the special symbol game is satisfied), the special symbol display result is "big hit" or It is pre-read that it will be a "small hit" and that the variable display mode of the decorative symbol will be the predetermined display mode, and based on this pre-reading result, the effect control board 12 will hold the display by the effect control CPU 120 or the like. The display mode and the like can be determined.

In the winning random number value determination process shown in FIG. 11-3, the CPU 103 first, for example, a time saving flag (a flag that turns on when the time saving state is set) provided in a predetermined area (game control flag setting unit or the like) of the RAM 102. ) And the state of the probability change flag (the flag that turns on when the probability change state is reached), and the like, the current gaming state of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is specified (step S351). The CPU 103 checks whether or not the current gaming state of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is the jackpot gaming state by checking the value of the special figure process flag provided in the predetermined area of the RAM 102 (game control flag control unit, etc.). To identify. For example, when the value of the special figure process flag is "4" to "7", it may be specified that the current gaming state of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is the jackpot gaming state.

Following the process of step S351, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the specified gaming state is in the jackpot gaming state (step S352). When it is determined that the jackpot is not in progress (step S352; No), the CPU 103 further determines whether or not the high base is in the high open control accompanying the time reduction control in the probability variation state or the time reduction state (step S353). ). When it is determined that the base is high (step S353; Yes), or when it is determined that the big hit is in the process of step S352 (step S352; Yes), the CPU 103 has a start port buffer value of "2". It is determined whether or not there is (step S354). When it is determined that the start port buffer value is not "2" (step S354; No), the CPU 103 makes a setting for limiting the determination at the time of winning (step S356).

On the other hand, when it is determined that the start port buffer value is "2" (step S354; Yes), or when it is determined that the high base is not in the process of step S353 (step S353; No), the CPU 103 is the third. The special figure display result is determined from the 1 special figure display result determination table or the 2nd special figure display result determination table according to the start port buffer value ("1" or "2") and the current gaming state. A table for determining the figure display result is selected (step S355).

Following the process of step S355, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the random number value MR1 is within the jackpot determination range (step S357). The CPU 103 compares, for example, the individual determined values included in the jackpot determination range with the random number value MR1 for determining the special figure display result extracted by the process of step S1209 shown in FIG. 11-2 one by one. It may be determined whether or not there is a determined value that matches the random number value MR1. Alternatively, a numerical value indicating a minimum value (lower limit value) and a maximum value (upper limit value) of the determination value included in the jackpot determination range is set, and the CPU 103 sets the random number value MR1 and the minimum value or maximum value of the jackpot determination range. By comparing, it may be determined whether or not the random number value MR1 is within the range of the jackpot determination range. At this time, if it is determined that the random number value MR1 is within the range of the jackpot determination range, it is determined that the variable display result based on the reserved data including the random number value MR1 is determined as "big hit" (big hit start determination). can.

In the process of step S357, for example, the CPU 103 may read the random number value MR1 stored in the special figure reservation storage unit in step S1210, and perform the above determination using the read random number value MR1. Further, the CPU 103 holds the random number value MR1 in a predetermined area of the RAM 102 (an area other than the special figure reservation storage unit) or a storage area of the CPU 103 separately from the step S1210, and makes the above determination based on the held random number value. May be done. This also applies to the random number value MR3 described later. As described above, the random number value used in the winning random number value determination process does not have to be the random number value stored in the special figure holding storage unit.

When it is determined in the process of step S357 that it is within the jackpot determination range (step S357; Yes), the CPU 103 determines the jackpot type based on the random number value MR2 for determining the jackpot type (step S358). At this time, the CPU 103 responds to the fluctuation special figure (“first special figure” corresponding to “1” or “second special figure” corresponding to “2”) specified corresponding to the start port buffer value. , Select the jackpot type determination table data from the jackpot type determination table. The CPU 103 determines which of the plurality of types the jackpot type is determined by referring to the selected jackpot type determination table data.

Following the process of step S358, the CPU 103 selects a jackpot variation pattern determination table (see FIG. 11-11) prepared in advance by storing it in a predetermined area of the ROM 101 and sets it in the table to be used (step 11-11). S359). The jackpot fluctuation pattern determination table is a table for determining a variable display fluctuation pattern in which the variable display result becomes a “big hit”, and a determination value to be compared with the random number value MR3 is assigned to each fluctuation pattern.

When it is determined in the process of step S357 that it is not within the big hit determination range (step S357; No), the CPU 103 determines whether or not the numerical data indicating the random number value MR1 is within the predetermined small hit determination range (step). S360). The CPU 103 executes the same processing as in the case of the big hit determination range for the determination value assigned to the special figure display result of "small hit" in the special figure display result determination table selected by the process of step S305. , It suffices if it can be determined whether or not the random number value MR1 is within the range of the small hit determination range.

When it is determined that the small hit is within the small hit determination range (step S360; Yes), the small hit fluctuation pattern determination table prepared by storing in a predetermined area of the ROM 101 in advance (see FIG. 11-11 (B)). Is selected and set in the usage table (step S362). The small hit fluctuation pattern determination table is a table for determining the variable display fluctuation pattern in which the variable display result is "small hit", and a determination value to be compared with the random number value MR3 is assigned to each fluctuation pattern. ..

On the other hand, when it is determined that the small hit is not within the small hit determination range (step S360; No), the CPU 103 determines whether or not the numerical data indicating the random number value MR1 is within the predetermined time saving determination range (step). 059AKS001). The CPU 103 executes the same process as in the case of the jackpot determination range for the determination value assigned to the special figure display result of "loss (time reduction)" in the special figure display result determination table selected by the process of step S355. Therefore, it suffices if it can be determined whether or not the random number value MR1 is within the time saving determination range. Although the special figure display result of "loss (time reduction)" is "loss", it is a variable display result in which the time reduction symbol is stopped and displayed, and the time reduction control is performed from the variable display performed after the stop display is performed. show.

When it is determined that the time saving is within the range of the time saving determination range (step 059AKS001; Yes), the CPU 103 determines the time saving type based on the random number value MR2 (step 059AKS002). At this time, the CPU 103 responds to the fluctuation special figure (“first special figure” corresponding to “1” or “second special figure” corresponding to “2”) specified corresponding to the start port buffer value. , Select the time saving type determination table data from the time saving type determination table shown in FIG. 11-7. The CPU 103 determines which of the plurality of types the time saving type is determined by referring to the selected time saving type determination table data.

Following the process of step 059AKS002, the CPU 103 prepares a table for determining the loss variation pattern at the time of turning on the time saving start flag, which will be described later, prepared by storing in a predetermined area of the ROM 101 in advance (see FIGS. 11-12 (A) and 11-12 (D)). Is selected and set in the usage table (step 059AKS002A). The time saving start flag on time loss fluctuation pattern determination table is a table for determining the variation pattern of the variable display in which the time saving symbol is stopped and displayed although the variable display result is "missing", and the random number value MR3 is used for each fluctuation pattern. The decision value to be compared with is assigned. In step 059AKS002A, one of the time saving start flag on time loss fluctuation pattern determination table shown in FIG. 11-12 (A) and the time saving start flag on time loss fluctuation pattern determination table shown in FIG. 11-12 (D) is selected according to the time saving type. do it.

On the other hand, when it is determined that the table is not within the time saving determination range (step 059AKS001; No), a loss fluctuation pattern determination table at the time of turning off the time saving start flag prepared by storing in a predetermined area of the ROM 101 in advance (FIG. 11-12 (FIG. 11-12). B)) is selected and set in the usage table (step 059AKS002B).

After executing any of step S309, step S312, step 059AKS002A, and step 059AKS002B, the CPU 103 is set in the use table based on the numerical data indicating the random number value MR3 for determining the fluctuation pattern extracted in step S1209. Refer to any of the big hit fluctuation pattern determination table, small hit fluctuation pattern determination table, loss fluctuation pattern determination table when the time reduction start flag is on, and loss fluctuation pattern determination table when the time reduction start flag is off, and set the determination value to match the random number MR3. The assigned fluctuation pattern is determined (step S363). The CPU 103 determines the variation pattern by, for example, comparing the individual determination values assigned to each variation pattern with the random number value MR3 one by one to determine whether or not there is a determination value that matches the random number value MR3. Alternatively, the CPU 103 sets a numerical value indicating the minimum value (lower limit value) and the maximum value (upper limit value) of the determination value assigned to each fluctuation pattern, and the CPU 103 sets the random value MR3 and the minimum value of the determination value. Or the fluctuation pattern may be determined by comparing with the maximum value.

After executing any of the processes of steps S356 and S363, the CPU 103 sets the transmission setting of the start winning command according to the determination results of step S358, step 059AKS002, and step S363 (step S364), and the winning time disorder. The numerical judgment process is terminated. The start winning command is composed of a starting opening winning designation command, a special figure hold storage number designation command, a symbol judgment result designation command, and a variation pattern judgment result designation command. When the start port buffer value is "1", the first start port prize designation command, the first special figure hold storage number designation command, the symbol judgment result specification command, and the variation pattern judgment result designation are used as start win commands. Set the command and send. When the start port buffer value is "2", the second start opening prize designation command, the second special figure hold storage number designation command, the symbol judgment result designation command, and the variation pattern judgment result designation are used as the start win prize command. Set the command and send. The command set for transmission is transmitted in the command control process.

The 1st special figure hold storage number specification command and the 2nd special figure hold storage number specification command to be set for transmission are commands for specifying the current 1st special figure hold storage number and 2nd special figure hold storage number (to the storage number). The command including the corresponding EXT data) may be specified, and the number of special figure reserved storage to be specified may be specified by the count value of the first special figure reserved storage number counter or the second special figure reserved storage number counter. When the determination result in step S357 is within the jackpot determination range (step S357; Yes), the symbol specification command to be set for transmission is a command that specifies that the determination result of the variable display result is "big hit" (to "big hit"). A command that includes the corresponding EXT data), and when the determination result in step S357 is within the small hit determination range (step S360; Yes), a command that specifies that the determination result of the variable display result is "small hit" ("small hit"). A command including EXT data corresponding to "small hit"), and when the judgment result of step 059AKS001 is within the time saving determination range (step 059AKS001; Yes), the judgment result of the variable display result is "missing (time saving)". When the command is specified (a command that includes EXT data corresponding to "loss (time reduction)") and the determination result of step 059AKS001 is not within the time reduction determination range (step S360; No), the determination result of the variable display result is "loss". It is a command to specify that there is (a command including EXT data corresponding to "loss"), and when the determination result in step S354 is the start port buffer value = 1 (step S354; No), the determination at the start winning is performed. It may be a command that specifies that it is "no judgment" (a command that includes EXT data corresponding to "no judgment"). The variation pattern determination result specification command to be set for transmission is a command for specifying a variation pattern that is the determination result determined in step S363 (a command including EXT data corresponding to the variation pattern that is the determination result), and the determination result in step S354 is When the start port buffer value = 1 (step S354; No), a command (a command including EXT data corresponding to "no judgment") that specifies that "no judgment" is not made at the time of starting winning is not performed. do it.

In the winning random number value determination process, as described above, regarding the variable display corresponding to the random number values MR1 to 3 extracted in step S1209 this time, the variable display result of the variable display (special figure game) is "big hit" or "small". Whether or not there is a "hit" or "loss (time reduction)" and the fluctuation pattern of the variable display (see FIG. 11-10) are determined, and so-called look-ahead is performed. In this process, the determination is made based on the current gaming state, and the determination is not made based on the gaming state when the variable display is actually executed. Therefore, the determination is not always accurate, but to some extent. Variable display results and fluctuation patterns can be predicted with accuracy. Further, in the winning random number value determination process, the start is started by the process of step S354 based on the case where it is determined that the big hit is being made in the process of step S352 or the time reduction control is being performed in the process of step S353. It is determined whether or not the mouth buffer value is "2". At this time, if the start port buffer value is "1" and not "2", the process proceeds to step S364 without executing the process such as step S355, and the determination at the time of starting winning is not performed. In this way, when the high opening control accompanying the time saving control is performed or when the big hit game state is performed, each of the above is based on the occurrence of the start prize (first start prize) due to the game ball entering the first start prize opening. Limit the judgment so that it is not made. As a result, when the special figure game using the second special figure is executed with priority over the special figure game using the first special figure, and the time reduction control is in progress or the jackpot game state is in effect, the first start prize is won. It is possible to ensure the soundness of the game by limiting the pre-reading based on the above.

FIG. 11-4 is a flowchart showing an example of the process executed in step S110 of FIG. 6 as the special symbol normal process. In the special symbol normal processing shown in FIG. 11-4, the CPU 103 first determines whether or not the second special figure hold storage number is “0” (step S1231). The second special figure hold storage number is the hold storage number of the special figure game using the second special figure by the second special symbol display device 4B. For example, in the process of step S1231, the second reserved storage number count value stored in the RAM 102 may be read, and it may be determined whether or not the read value is “0”.

When the number of the second special figure hold storage is other than "0" in step S1231 (step S1231; No), the hold stored in the second special figure hold storage unit 151B corresponding to the hold number "1". As the data, numerical data indicating the random number value MR1 for determining the special figure display result and the random number value MR2 for determining the jackpot type are read out (step S1232). The numerical data read at this time may be stored in, for example, a random number buffer for fluctuation and temporarily stored.

Following the process of step S1232, for example, by subtracting 1 from the second reserved storage number count value and updating, the second special figure holding storage number is updated so as to be subtracted by 1, and the second special figure holding storage is updated. The hold data indicating the random number values MR1 to MR3 stored in the entries lower than the hold number "1" (for example, the entries corresponding to the hold numbers "2" to "4") in the part 151B is shifted upward one entry at a time. (Step S1233). Further, in the process of step S1233, the RAM 102 may be updated so as to subtract 1 from the total hold storage count value stored in the total hold storage counter. At this time, the variable special figure designation buffer value, which is the stored value of the variable special figure designation buffer, is updated to "2" (step S1234).

When the second special figure reserved storage number is "0" in step S1231 (step S1231; Yes), it is determined whether or not the first special figure reserved storage number is "0" (step S1235). The first special figure hold storage number is the hold storage number of the special figure game using the first special figure by the first special symbol display device 4A. For example, in the process of step S1235, the RAM 102 may read the first hold storage count value stored by the first hold storage counter, and determine whether or not the read value is “0”. As described above, the process of step S1235 is executed when the second special figure reserved storage number is determined to be "0" in step S1231, and the first special figure reserved storage number is "0". Judge whether or not. As a result, the special figure game using the second special figure is started to be executed with priority over the special figure game using the first special figure.

It should be noted that the special figure game using the second special figure is not limited to the one that is executed with priority over the special figure game using the first special figure, for example, the first start winning opening and the second starting winning opening. The execution of the special figure game may be started in the order in which the game balls enter (pass) and the start prize is generated. In this case, a table for storing data that can specify the order in which the start winnings are generated is provided, and the execution of the special figure game using either the first special figure or the second special figure is started from the stored data. It is only necessary to be able to determine.

When the number of first special figure hold storage is other than "0" in step S1235 (step S235; No), the hold stored in the first special figure hold storage unit 151A corresponding to the hold number "1". As the data, numerical data indicating the random number value MR1 for determining the special figure display result and the random number value MR2 for determining the jackpot type are read out (step S1236). The numerical data read at this time may be stored in, for example, a random number buffer for fluctuation and temporarily stored.

Following the process of step S1236, for example, by subtracting 1 from the first reserved storage number count value and updating, the first special figure reserved storage number is updated so as to be subtracted by 1, and the first special figure reserved storage is updated. The hold data indicated by the random number values MR1 and MR2 stored in the entries lower than the hold number "1" (for example, the entries corresponding to the hold numbers "2" to "4") in the unit 151A is shifted upward one entry at a time. (Step S1237). Further, in the process of step S1237, the RAM 102 may be updated so as to subtract 1 from the total hold storage count value stored in the total hold storage counter. At this time, the variable special figure designation buffer value is updated to "1" (step S1238).

After executing either of the processes of steps S1234 and S1238, the table used for determining whether the special symbol display result, which is the variable display result of the special symbol, is "big hit" or "missing" is changed. The special figure display result determination table corresponding to the special figure designation buffer value is selected and set (step S1239). For example, when the variable special figure designation buffer value is "1", the first special figure display result determination table shown in FIG. 11-5 (A) is set in the used table. On the other hand, when the variable special figure designation buffer value is "2", the second special figure display result determination table shown in FIG. 11-5 (B) is set in the used table. Further, the CPU 103 may select the table data for determining the special figure display result corresponding to the current gaming state.

The first special symbol display result determination table displays the variable display result before the definite special symbol, which is the variable display result, is derived and displayed in the special symbol game using the first special symbol by the first special symbol display device 4A. Whether or not to control the big hit game state as "big hit", whether or not to control the variable display result to the small hit game state as "small hit", and the variable display result as "loss (time reduction)" and then variable It is a table referred to for determining whether or not to control from the display to the time saving state based on the random number value MR1 for determining the special figure display result. The second special symbol display result determination table displays the variable display result before the definite special symbol, which is the variable display result, is derived and displayed in the special symbol game using the second special symbol by the second special symbol display device 4B. Whether or not to control the big hit game state as "big hit", whether or not to control the variable display result to the small hit game state as "small hit", and the variable display result as "loss (time reduction)" and then variable It is a table referred to for determining whether or not to control from the display to the time saving state based on the random number value MR1 for determining the special figure display result.

In the first special figure display result determination table, the special figure display result is determined according to whether the gaming state in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is a normal state, a time saving state (low probability state), or a probability variation state (high probability state). A numerical value (decision value) to be compared with the random value MR1 for determination is assigned to the special figure display results of "big hit", "small hit", "loss (time reduction)", and "loss". In the second special figure display result determination table, a random number value for determining the special figure display result is determined according to whether the game state is a normal state, a time saving state (low probability state), or a probability variation state (high probability state). Numerical values (decision values) to be compared with MR1 are assigned to the special figure display results of "big hit", "loss (time reduction)", and "loss".

In the first special figure display result determination table and the second special figure display result determination table, the table data indicating the determination value to be compared with the random number value MR1 for determining the special figure display result has the special figure display result as a "big hit". It is the decision data assigned to the decision result of whether or not to control the jackpot game state and whether or not to control the special figure display result to the time saving state from the next variable display as "loss (time saving)". In each of the first special figure display result determination table and the second special figure display result determination table, when the gaming state is in the probability change state (high probability state), it is higher than when it is in the normal state or the time saving state (low probability state). Many decision values are assigned to the special figure display result of "big hit". As a result, in the probabilistic state (high probability state) in which the probability change control is performed in the pachinko gaming machine 1, the special figure display result is set as a "big hit" as compared with the case of the normal state or the time saving state (low probability state). Controlling to a state increases the probability of being determined. That is, in each of the first special figure display result determination table and the second special figure display result determination table, when the gaming state in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is in the probabilistic state, it is a big hit as compared with the normal state or the time saving state. The determination data is assigned to the determination result of whether or not to control the jackpot gaming state so that the probability of being determined to control the gaming state is high. In addition, in the first special figure display result determination table and the second special figure display result determination table, the second special figure display result determination table sets the special figure display result as "loss (time reduction)" from the next variable display. The decision data is assigned so that the probability of being decided to control the time saving state is high. Therefore, in the variable display corresponding to the hold of the second special figure stored at the end of the time saving state, the ratio of the special figure display result being "missing (time saving)" is high.

In the setting example of the first special figure display result determination table, the determination value in a predetermined range (value in the range of "30000" to "30350") is assigned to the special figure display result of "small hit". On the other hand, in the setting example of the second special figure display result determination table 130B, the determination value is not assigned to the special figure display result of "small hit". With such a setting, the variable display result is determined based on the fact that the first start condition for starting the special figure game using the first special figure by the first special symbol display device 4A is satisfied. In the case where the variable display result is determined based on the establishment of the second start condition for starting the special figure game using the second special figure by the second special symbol display device 4B, the special figure display result is displayed. The ratio determined to be controlled to the small hit game state as "small hit" can be made different.

In particular, in the special figure game using the second special figure, it is not determined to control the special figure display result as a "small hit" to the small hit game state, so for example, a time saving state (low accuracy high base state) or a probability change Frequent small hit game states in which it is difficult to obtain a prize ball in a game state where the game ball easily enters the second start winning opening formed by the normally variable winning ball device 6B, such as a state (high accuracy and high base state). By avoiding this, it is possible to prevent a decrease in the interest of the game due to the extension of the game. In the second special figure display result determination table, a determination value in a predetermined range different from the setting in the first special figure display result determination table may be assigned to the special figure display result of "small hit". .. For example, in the second special figure display result determination table, a smaller determination value than in the first special figure display result determination table may be assigned to the special figure display result of "small hit". In this way, even if the ratio determined to control the small hit game state is lower in the high base state such as the time saving state or the probability change state than in the low base state such as the normal state or the probability change state without time reduction. good. Alternatively, regardless of whether the first start condition or the second start condition is satisfied, the special figure display result may be determined by referring to the common special figure display result determination table.

Following the process of step S1239 shown in FIG. 11-4, the numerical data indicating the random number value MR1 for determining the special figure display result stored in the random number buffer for fluctuation is subjected to "big hit", "small hit", and "loss (loss). Compared with the decision value assigned to each special figure display result of "time reduction)" and "loss", the special figure display result is either "big hit", "small hit", "loss (time reduction)" or "loss". (Step S1240).

Since the table data for determining the special figure display result corresponding to the current game state is selected in step S1239, in the process of step S1240, the game state when the variable display of the special figure game or the like is started is in a probable change state. Whether or not the special figure display result is set as a "big hit" is determined by using different determination data. For example, when the game state when the variable display of the special figure game is started is the normal state or the time saving state, the game state is the normal state in the first special figure display result determination table and the second special figure display result determination table. Alternatively, the table data corresponding to the case of the time saving state is usually selected as the determination data, and the special figure display result corresponding to the random number value MR1 is determined with reference to this. On the other hand, when the game state when the variable display of the special figure game or the like is started is the probability change state, the game state is the probability change state in the first special figure display result determination table or the second special figure display result determination table. The table data corresponding to the case of is selected as the special determination data, and the special figure display result corresponding to the random number value MR1 is determined with reference to this.

After determining the special figure display result in step S1240, it is determined whether or not the special figure display result is a "big hit" (step S1241). Then, when it is determined to be a "big hit" (step S1241; Yes), the big hit flag provided in the RAM 102 is set to the on state (step S1242). At this time, the jackpot type determination table shown in FIG. 11-6 is selected and set as a table to be used for determining the jackpot type to one of a plurality of types (step S1243).

The jackpot type determination table determines the jackpot type to one of a plurality of types based on the random number value MR2 for determining the jackpot type when it is determined to control the jackpot game state with the special figure display result as "big hit". It is a table referenced by. In the jackpot type determination table, whether the special symbol whose variable display (variation) is performed in the special symbol game is the first special symbol (special symbol game by the first special symbol display device 4A) or the second special symbol (second special symbol). There are multiple types of numerical values (decision values) to be compared with the random value MR2 for determining the jackpot type, such as "non-probability", "probability", and "probability", depending on whether the game is a special figure game using the symbol display device 4B. It is assigned to the jackpot type of.

In the setting example of the jackpot type determination table, the assignment of the determination value for the jackpot type of "probability" is different depending on whether the variable special figure is the first special figure or the second special figure. That is, when the variable special figure is the first special figure, the determined value in a predetermined range (the value in the range of "82" to "99") is assigned to the jackpot type of "probability", while the variable special figure. When is the second special figure, the determined value is not assigned to the jackpot type of "probability". With such a setting, the jackpot type is determined to be one of a plurality of types based on the fact that the first start condition for starting the special figure game using the first special figure by the first special symbol display device 4A is satisfied. When the jackpot type is determined to be one of a plurality of types based on the establishment of the second start condition for starting the special figure game using the second special figure by the second special symbol display device 4B Therefore, the rate at which the jackpot type is determined to be "probable" can be made different. In particular, in a special figure game using the second special figure, it is not determined that the jackpot type is set to "probability" and controlled to the short-term open jackpot state. In a game state in which a game ball easily enters the second start winning opening formed by 6B, it is possible to avoid the frequent occurrence of a short-term open jackpot state in which it is difficult to obtain a prize ball, and it is possible to prevent a decrease in the game interest due to the extension of the game. ..

Even when the variable special figure is the second special figure, a determination value in a predetermined range different from the case where the variable special figure is the first special figure is assigned to the jackpot type of "probability". good. For example, when the variable special figure is the second special figure, a smaller decision value may be assigned to the jackpot type of "probability" as compared with the case where the variable special figure is the first special figure. Alternatively, regardless of whether the variable special figure is the first special figure or the second special figure, the jackpot type may be determined by referring to the common table data.

By referring to the jackpot type determination table set in step S1243 shown in FIG. 11-4, the numerical data indicating the jackpot type determination random number value MR2 stored in the variable random number buffer can be changed to “non-probability”. It is determined which of the plurality of types the jackpot type should be, depending on which of the determination values assigned to each jackpot type of "probability change" and "probability" is matched (step S1244).

By determining the jackpot type in the process of step S1244, the gaming state after the end of the jackpot gaming state can be set to either a time-saving state or a probabilistic state in which the player has a higher advantage than the time-saving state. It will be decided before the definite special symbol as a variable display result is derived. Corresponding to the jackpot type determined in this way, for example, by setting the jackpot type buffer value which is the storage value of the jackpot type buffer provided in the RAM 102 (step S1245), the determined jackpot type is stored. As an example, if the jackpot type is "non-probability", the jackpot type buffer value may be set to "0", if it is "probability variation", it may be set to "1", and if it is "probability", it may be set to "2".

If it is determined in step S1241 that it is not a "big hit" (step S1241; No), it is determined whether or not the special figure display result is a "small hit" (step S1246). Then, when it is determined to be a "small hit" (step S1246; Yes), the small hit flag provided in the RAM 102 is set to the on state (step S1247).

If it is determined in step S1246 that it is not a "small hit" (step S1246; No), the special figure display result is "loss (time reduction)" (hereinafter, it may be simply referred to as "time reduction"). It is determined whether or not there is (step 059AKS003). Then, when it is determined to be "time saving" (step 059AKS003; Yes), the CPU 103 determines the time saving type shown in FIG. 11-7 as a table to be used for determining the time saving type to any one of a plurality of types. The table is selected and set, and the time saving type is determined based on the random number value MR2 in the same manner as in the case of determining the jackpot type (step 059AKS004).

The time saving type determination table shown in FIG. 11-7 is based on MR2, which is common with the random number value for determining the jackpot type when it is determined that the special figure display result is controlled to the time saving state as "loss (time saving)". It is a table referred to for determining the time saving type to one of a plurality of types. In the time saving type determination table, whether the special symbol whose variable display (variation) is performed in the special symbol game is the first special symbol (special symbol game by the first special symbol display device 4A) or the second special symbol (second special symbol). Depending on whether it is a special figure game by the symbol display device 4B), the numerical value (decision value) to be compared with the random number value MR2 for determining the time saving type is a plurality of types of big hit types such as "time saving A" to "time saving D". Is assigned to. As shown in the figure, in the feature unit 059AK of this embodiment, when the special symbol in which the variable display (variation) is performed in the special figure game is the first special figure, "time saving A" or "time saving B" When the special symbol whose variable display (variation) is performed in the special figure game is the second special figure, it is determined to be the time saving type of "time saving C" or "time saving D". "Time saving A" and "time saving C" are time saving types that are controlled to the time saving state while the special figure game is played 100 times. "Time saving B" is a time saving type that is controlled to a time saving state while the special figure game is played 50 times. "Time saving D" is a time saving type that is controlled to a time saving state while the special figure game is played 20 times.

After executing the process of step 059AKS004 of FIG. 11-4, the CPU 103 corresponds to the time saving type determined in the step 059AKS004, for example, the time saving type buffer value which is the storage value of the time saving type buffer provided in the RAM 102. (Step 059AKS005), the determined time saving type is stored. As an example, if the time saving type is "time saving A", the time saving type buffer value is set to "0", if it is "time saving B", it is set to "1", if it is "time saving C", it is set to "2", and "time saving D". If it is, it may be set to "3".

After executing the process of step 059AKS005, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the time saving / medium flag provided in the RAM 102 is set to the ON state (step 059AKS006). The time saving medium flag is a flag indicating that the time saving control is currently in progress (sometimes simply referred to as a time saving flag). If the time saving middle flag is in the off state (step 059AKS006; No), the time saving start flag provided in the RAM 102 is set to the on state (step 059AKS006A). The time saving start flag is a flag indicating that the time saving control is started from the next special figure game.

When it is determined in step 059AKS003 that it is not "missing (time reduction)" (step 059AKS003; No), or when it is determined in step 059AKS006 that the time reduction medium flag is on (step 059AKS006; Yes), step After executing any of the processes of S1245, S1247, and step 059AKS006A, the result of pre-determination of whether or not to control the big hit game state or the small hit game state, and whether or not to control the next time reduction state, and further, the big hit. A definite special symbol is set according to the determination result of the jackpot type in the game state and the determination result of the time saving type in the time saving state (step S1248). As an example, if it is determined in step 059AKS003 that the special figure display result is not "missing (time reduction)", the lost symbol corresponds to the pre-determined result that the special figure display result is "missing". The special symbol indicating the "-" symbol that becomes is set as the finalized special symbol. On the other hand, when it is determined in step 059AKS003 that the special figure display result is "missing (time saving)", the time saving symbols are "1" and "1" according to the determination result of the time saving type in step 059AKS004. Any one of the special symbols indicating the numbers 4 ”,“ 6 ”, and“ 8 ”is set as the finalized special symbol. That is, the special symbol indicating the number "1" is set as the finalized special symbol according to the determination result that the time saving type is "time saving A". Further, according to the determination result that the time saving type is "time saving B", the special symbol indicating the number "4" is set as the confirmed special symbol. Depending on the determination result that the time saving type is "time saving C", the special symbol indicating the number "6" is set as the confirmed special symbol. Depending on the determination result that the time saving type is "time saving D", the special symbol indicating the number "8" is set as the confirmed special symbol.

When it is determined in step S1246 that the special figure display result is "small hit", the small hit symbol is set in response to the pre-determined result that the special figure display result is "small hit". The special symbol indicating the number 2 ”is set as the finalized special symbol. Further, when it is determined in step S1241 that the special figure display result is "big hit", the big hit symbols are "3", "5", and "7" according to the determination result of the big hit type in step S1244. Any of the special symbols indicating the numbers of "" is set as the finalized special symbol. That is, according to the determination result that the jackpot type is "non-probability variation", the special symbol indicating the number "3", which is the normal jackpot symbol, among the normally open round jackpot symbols is set as the finalized special symbol. Further, according to the determination result that the jackpot type is "probability variation", the special symbol indicating the number "7", which is the probability variation jackpot symbol, among the normally open round jackpot symbols is set as the finalized special symbol. A special symbol indicating the number "5", which is a short-term open jackpot symbol, is set as a confirmed special symbol according to the decision result of setting the jackpot type to "probability".

After the finalized special symbol is set in step S1248, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to "1" which is a value corresponding to the fluctuation pattern setting process (step S1249), and then the special symbol normal process is terminated. .. If the number of reserved memory of the special figure game using the first special figure is "0" in step S1235 (step S1235; Yes), after performing the predetermined demo display setting (step S1250), the special symbol Ends normal processing. In this demo display setting, for example, an effect control command (customer waiting demo specification command) for designating a demonstration display (demo screen display) by displaying a predetermined effect image on the image display device 5 is produced from the main board 11. It is determined whether or not the transmission has been completed to the board 12. At this time, if it has already been sent, the demo display setting is terminated as it is. On the other hand, if it has not been transmitted, the setting for transmitting the customer waiting demo specification command is made, and then the demo display setting is terminated.

FIG. 11-8 is a flowchart showing an example of the fluctuation pattern setting process executed in step S111 shown in FIG. When the variation pattern setting process is started, the CPU 103 first determines whether or not the jackpot flag is on (step S261). When it is determined that the jackpot flag is on (step S261; Yes), the CPU 103 refers to the jackpot fluctuation pattern determination table shown in FIG. 11-11 (A), and the jackpot display result is "big hit". The variation pattern corresponding to the time is determined (step S262).

FIG. 11-10 shows an example of the fluctuation pattern in the feature portion 059AK of this embodiment. In this embodiment, among the cases where the variable display result is "loss (time reduction)" and "loss", the variable display mode of the decorative pattern is "non-reach" and "reach", respectively. Correspondingly, a plurality of fluctuation patterns are prepared in advance in response to a case where the variable display result is a "big hit". The variation pattern corresponding to the case where the variable display result is "loss" and the variable display mode of the decorative symbol is "non-reach" is called a non-reach variation pattern (also referred to as "non-reach loss variation pattern") and is variable. The variation pattern corresponding to the case where the display result is "loss (time reduction)" or "loss" and the variable display mode of the decorative symbol is "reach" is called a reach variation pattern (also referred to as "reach loss variation pattern"). .. Further, the non-reach fluctuation pattern and the reach fluctuation pattern are included in the loss fluctuation pattern corresponding to the case where the variable display result is “loss”. The fluctuation pattern corresponding to the case where the variable display result is "big hit" is called a big hit fluctuation pattern. In the feature unit 059AK, a dedicated variation pattern (the variation pattern of PB2-4 shown in the figure) or a variable display, which is selected only when the variable display result is "loss (time reduction)", is selected. Although it encourages the result to be "missing (time saving)", there is a variation pattern of time saving that is "missing". Regarding the fluctuation pattern dedicated to the time of loss (time reduction), which is selected only when the variable display result is "loss (time reduction)", the variable display result is "loss (time reduction)", for example, the fluctuation pattern of Super Reach D. There may be a variation pattern of the type of super reach effect that is executed only when.

The jackpot fluctuation pattern and the reach fluctuation pattern include a normal reach fluctuation pattern in which the reach effect of the normal reach is executed and a super reach fluctuation pattern in which the reach effect of the super reach is executed. The fluctuation pattern corresponding to the case where the variable display result is "small hit" is called a small hit fluctuation pattern. The big hit fluctuation pattern and the small hit fluctuation pattern are included in the hit fluctuation pattern corresponding to the case where the variable display result is "big hit" or "small hit". The super reach variation pattern includes reach effects such as super reach A, super reach B, and super reach C, regardless of whether the variable display result is "big hit" or "miss".

The jackpot fluctuation pattern determination table shown in FIG. 11-11 (A) changes the fluctuation pattern according to the determination result of the jackpot type when it is determined (predetermined) that the special figure display result is set to "big hit". It is a table referred to for determining one of a plurality of types based on the random number value MR3 for pattern determination. In the jackpot fluctuation pattern determination table shown in FIG. 11-11 (A), a random number value for determining the fluctuation pattern is determined according to whether the determination result of the jackpot type is “non-probability”, “probability”, or “probability”. The numerical value (determined value) to be compared with MR3 is any of the fluctuation pattern PA4-1, the fluctuation pattern PB4-1, the fluctuation pattern PB4-2, the fluctuation pattern PB4-3, and the fluctuation pattern PC1-1 to the fluctuation pattern PC1-3. Is assigned to a crab.

In the jackpot fluctuation pattern determination table 132A shown in FIG. 11-11 (A), the determination value varies depending on which of the plurality of types the jackpot type is determined, so that the ratio determined for each variation pattern is different. There is a part assigned to the pattern. For example, depending on whether the jackpot type is "non-probability" or "probability", the determination values for the fluctuation pattern PA4-1, the fluctuation pattern PB4-1, the fluctuation pattern PB4-2, and the fluctuation pattern PB4-3 The allocation is different. As a result, it is possible to make the ratio determined for the same fluctuation pattern different depending on the determination result of which of the plurality of types of jackpot types is used.

Further, in the jackpot fluctuation pattern determination table, there is a part in which determination values are assigned to different fluctuation patterns depending on which of the plurality of types the jackpot type is determined. For example, when the jackpot type is "non-probable change" or "probable change", a determined value is assigned to the fluctuation pattern PA4-1, the fluctuation pattern PB4-1, the fluctuation pattern PB4-2, and the fluctuation pattern PB4-3. On the other hand, no determined value is assigned to the fluctuation pattern PC1-1 to the fluctuation pattern PC1-3. On the other hand, when the jackpot type is "probability", the determination value is assigned to the fluctuation pattern PC1-1 to the fluctuation pattern PC1-3, while the fluctuation pattern PA4-1 and the fluctuation pattern PB4. No decision value is assigned to -1, fluctuation pattern PB4-2, and fluctuation pattern PB4-3. As a result, when the special figure display result is "big hit" and the big hit type is controlled to the short-term open big hit state according to "probability", the fluctuation pattern is determined to be different from the case where the normal open big hit state is controlled. be able to.

When the jackpot type is determined to be "non-probability", "probability", or "probability", it depends on whether the gaming state of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is the normal state, the probabilistic state, or the time saving state. Therefore, the assignment of the determined value for each fluctuation pattern may be different. As a result, the ratio determined for the same variation pattern can be different depending on which of the plurality of types of game states is used. Further, when the jackpot type is determined to be "non-probability", "probability", or "probability", it depends on whether the gaming state of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is the normal state, the probable change state, or the time saving state. Therefore, the determined value may be assigned to different fluctuation patterns. As a result, different fluctuation patterns can be determined depending on which of the plurality of types of game states is used. In this embodiment, when the jackpot type is "non-probability variation", more determined values are assigned to the variation pattern PA4-1 indicating the variation pattern of normal reach than in the case of "probability variation". .. Therefore, when the reach effect of Super Reach is executed, there is a higher possibility that the jackpot type will be "probable change" rather than "non-probable change", so that the player can have expectations and the game. You can improve your interest. Further, in the jackpot variation pattern determination table shown in FIG. 11-11 (A), the variation pattern PB4-2 that performs the reach effect of the super reach B is more than the variation pattern PB4-1 that performs the reach effect of the super reach C. , The fluctuation pattern PB4-3 that produces the reach of Super Reach A is more assigned than the fluctuation pattern PB4-2, that is, as the fluctuation time becomes longer (see the fluctuation time in FIG. 11-10). Has been done.

Returning to FIG. 11-8, when it is determined in the process of step S261 that the big hit flag is in the off state (step S261; No), the CPU 103 determines whether or not the small hit flag is in the on state (step S263). ). When it is determined that the small hit flag is on (step S263; Yes), the CPU 103 refers to the small hit fluctuation pattern determination table shown in FIGS. 11-11 (B), and the special figure display result is "small hit". The fluctuation pattern corresponding to the small hit is determined (step S264).

On the other hand, when it is determined that the small hit flag is in the off state (step S263; No), the CPU 103 determines whether or not the time saving start flag is in the on state (step 059AKS007). When it is determined that the time saving start flag is on (step 059AKS007; Yes), the CPU 103 selects the variation pattern table when the time saving start flag is turned on as shown in FIGS. 11-12 (A), (C) and (D). (Step 059AKS008). On the other hand, when it is determined that the time saving start flag is off (step 059AKS007; No), the CPU 103 selects the variation pattern table at the time of turning off the time saving start flag shown in FIGS. 11-12 (B) and 11-12 (E) (step). 059AKS009).

After executing the process of step 059AKS008 or step 059AKS009, the CPU 103 determines whether the variable special figure is the first special figure or the second special figure, depending on the type of the special figure and whether or not the time is shortened. The fluctuation pattern corresponding to the loss when the special figure display result is “loss (time reduction)” or “loss” is determined (step 059AKS010). Specifically, in step 059AKS010, when the special figure display result is "loss (time reduction)" and the variable special figure is the first special figure, regardless of whether or not the time reduction control is performed, FIG. 11- Refer to the time saving start flag on time loss fluctuation pattern determination table shown in 12 (A), and use it as numerical data indicating the random number value MR3 for determining the fluctuation pattern stored in, for example, the random number buffer for fluctuation, depending on the time saving type. Based on this, the fluctuation pattern is determined to be one of a plurality of types. On the other hand, when the special figure display result is "loss (time reduction)" and the variable special figure is the second special figure, FIG. 11-12 (C) or (D) depending on whether or not the time reduction control is performed. ) Refers to the time saving start flag on time loss fluctuation pattern determination table, and determines the fluctuation pattern to one of a plurality of types based on the numerical data indicating the random number value MR3 for determining the fluctuation pattern. Further, when the special figure display result is "missing" and the fluctuation special figure is the first special figure, the time saving control can be performed by referring to the time saving start flag off time loss fluctuation pattern determination table shown in FIG. 11-12 (B). The fluctuation pattern is determined to be one of a plurality of types based on numerical data indicating a random number value MR3 or the like depending on whether or not the time saving state is being performed. Further, when the special figure display result is "missing" and the fluctuation special figure is the second special figure, if the time saving is in progress, the loss fluctuation pattern determination table at the time of turning off the time saving start flag shown in FIG. 11-12 (B) is displayed. With reference to it, the fluctuation pattern is determined to be one of a plurality of types based on the numerical data indicating the random value MR3 or the like. On the other hand, in the normal state, the variation pattern can be selected from a plurality of types based on the numerical data indicating the random value MR3 by referring to the loss variation pattern determination table when the time reduction start flag is off shown in FIG. 11-12 (E). decide. As shown in the figure, in the feature unit 059AK of this embodiment, when the variable display result is "loss (time reduction)" (when the time reduction start flag is on, the loss fluctuation pattern determination table is selected), the type of super reach is selected. Decision values are assigned so that the time saving types are determined at different rates. Specifically, the decision value is assigned so that the person who executes the super reach with a high expectation of big hit is the time reduction type with a large number of time reductions (B is "time reduction A" rather than super reach C). It is assigned so that the ratio of time saving types is high). In addition, as shown in the figure, when the variable display result is "loss (time reduction)" (when the loss fluctuation pattern determination table when the time reduction start flag is on is selected), the determination value is set to Super Reach A, which has the highest expectation of big hit. Not assigned. That is, in the feature unit 059AK, the determination value is assigned so that the ratio of “loss (time reduction)” differs depending on the type of super reach. Further, in the feature unit 059AK, for example, as shown in FIGS. 11-11 and 11-12, when the reach effects of Super Reach B and Super Reach C are executed, when a big hit occurs, or when a loss (time reduction) occurs. Determining values are assigned so that a plurality of variable display results are obtained, such as when the result is simply lost. Therefore, the variation of the production result can be increased and the game entertainment can be improved. Further, as described above, the variable winning ball device 6B forming the second starting winning opening is provided in the game area on the right side for the player, and the game ball wins only when the so-called right-handed hit is made. ing. Therefore, in the feature unit 059AK, the second special figure fluctuates in the time saving state due to the player hitting the right in the time saving state. On the other hand, when the time saving control is completed and the reserved memory corresponding to the second special figure remains, the second special figure changes in the normal state. That is, in the normal state, the second special figure fluctuates only when the time saving control is completed and the reserved memory corresponding to the second special figure remains. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 11-12 (E), the feature unit 059AK corresponds to four times, which is the maximum number of variable displays performed after the end of the time reduction (maximum value of the number of reserved storages corresponding to the second special figure). It is a variable display (variable) fluctuation pattern determination table (corresponding to "4").

After returning to FIG. 11-8 and executing the process of step 059AKS010, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the time saving start flag is set to the ON state (step 059AKS011). When the time saving start flag is on (step 059AKS011; Yes), the CPU 103 indicates that the determined fluctuation pattern is a time saving fixed fluctuation pattern (that is, a dedicated fluctuation pattern at the time of loss (time saving)) PB2-4. (Step 059AKS012). When the determined fluctuation pattern is not PB2-4, the time saving fanning effect period as a period for executing the time saving fanning effect described later is added to the special figure fluctuation time indicated by the determined fluctuation pattern (step 059AKS013). .. Specifically, in step 059AKS013, as shown in FIG. 11-9, a time saving fanning effect period may be added according to the time saving type. In addition, PB2-4, which is a dedicated fluctuation pattern at the time of loss (time reduction), and PB2-5, which is a fluctuation pattern of time reduction, are shown in the special figure fluctuation time shown in FIG. )It is included. The time-saving fanning effect is an effect of fanning whether or not the time-saving symbol, which is a decorative symbol indicating that the decorative symbol is controlled to the time-saving state from the next variable display, is stopped and displayed as the final stop symbol of the decorative symbol.

After executing any of the processes of steps S262, S264, and 059AKS013 in FIG. 11-8, the CPU 103 sets the special figure fluctuation time (also referred to as fluctuation time), which is the variable display time of the special symbol (step S266). The special symbol fluctuation time, which is the variable display time of the special symbol, is the time required from the start of the fluctuation of the special symbol in the special symbol game until the definite special symbol, which is the variable display result (special symbol display result), is derived and displayed. Is. As shown in FIG. 11-10, the special figure fluctuation time is predetermined in response to a plurality of fluctuation patterns prepared in advance, but when the process of step 059AKS013 is executed, the time saving fanning production period Is the added period. The CPU 103 sets the special figure fluctuation time corresponding to the fluctuation pattern selected in each process of steps S262, S264, and 059AKS013 (when the process of step 059AKS013 is executed, the period in which the time saving fanning effect period is added). Therefore, it is possible to set the timing at which the variable display result of the special symbol or the decorative symbol is derived. The special figure fluctuation time is set, for example, by setting a timer value according to the special figure fluctuation time in a game control process timer provided in a predetermined area of the RAM 102. In the feature unit 059AK of this embodiment, when the time saving start flag is on and the determined fluctuation pattern is not PB2-4, the time saving fanning effect period is set as the period for executing the time saving fanning effect. , An example of adding to the special figure fluctuation time indicated by the fluctuation pattern is shown, but in addition to this, for example, when the variable display result is a "big hit" or a "small hit", a predetermined period is set. It may be added to the special figure fluctuation time. In this case, as in the case of the time saving type, a period corresponding to the jackpot type may be added, and the processing may be common to step 059AKS013. Specifically, the respective periods corresponding to "time saving A", "time saving B", and "time saving C" shown in FIG. 11-9 are added as periods corresponding to "non-probability", "probability", and "probability". do it.

Following the process of step S266, the special figure game using the first special figure in the first special symbol display device 4A and the special figure game using the second special figure in the second special symbol display device 4B are started. A setting for starting the fluctuation of the special symbol is made so as to start any of the special symbol games for which the conditions are satisfied (step S267). As an example, if the variable special figure designation buffer value is "1", a setting is made to transmit a drive signal for updating the display of the first special figure in the first special symbol display device 4A. On the other hand, if the variable special figure designation buffer value is "2", a setting is made to transmit a drive signal for updating the display of the second special figure in the second special symbol display device 4B. As a result, the special figure game is started. When the CPU 103 starts the variable display using the first special figure, the CPU 103 controls the first hold indicator 25A to display a display capable of specifying the subtracted 1st special figure hold storage number. The hold indicator 25A may be made to perform (for example, reduce the number of LEDs lit by one). When the CPU 103 starts the variable display using the second special figure, the CPU 103 controls the second hold display 25B to display a display capable of specifying the subtracted second special figure hold storage number. The hold indicator 25B may be made to perform (for example, reduce the number of LEDs lit by one).

After executing the process of step S267, the CPU 103 issues a command at the start of fluctuation of the special symbol (command at the start of fluctuation) in order to notify the effect control board 12 of the special symbol display result, the determination result of the fluctuation pattern, and the like. Transmission settings are made (step S268). For example, when the fluctuation special figure designation buffer value is "1", the CPU 103 sends the first fluctuation start designation command and the fluctuation pattern designation command as the fluctuation start command from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 ( A command including EXT data indicating the fluctuation pattern determined in steps S262, S264, or S265), a display result specification command (a command including EXT data indicating the determined variable display result), and a first special figure hold storage number specification command (command containing EXT data indicating the determined variable display result). The 1-decreased 1st special figure reserved memory count value, that is, the command including the EXT data indicating the 1st special figure reserved memory when one reserved memory is exhausted by the start of execution of the special figure game) is sequentially transmitted. Set the transmission settings for this. On the other hand, when the fluctuation special figure designation buffer value is "2", the CPU 103 sends the second fluctuation start designation command and the fluctuation pattern designation command as the fluctuation start command from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 ( A command including EXT data indicating the fluctuation pattern determined in steps S262, S264 or S265), a display result specification command (a command including EXT data indicating the determined variable display result), and a second special figure hold storage number specification command (1). The decremented second special figure reserved memory count value, that is, the command including the EXT data indicating the second special figure reserved memory when one reserved memory is exhausted by the start of execution of the special figure game) is sequentially transmitted. Set the transmission settings for.

After executing the process of step S268, the CPU 103 updates the value of the special figure process flag to "2" (step S267), and then ends the variation pattern setting process.

FIG. 11-13 is a flowchart showing an example of the process executed in step S113 of FIG. 6 as the special symbol stop process. In the special symbol stop processing shown in FIG. 11-13, the CPU 103 first determines whether or not the special symbol confirmation display flag provided in the predetermined area (game control flag setting unit, etc.) of the RAM 102 is on. (Step S291). Here, the flag for confirming the special figure is set to the ON state by the process of step S295, which will be described later, in response to the derivation and display of the confirmed special symbol that is the variable display result in the special figure game.

When the flag for confirming the special symbol is off in step S291 (step S291; No), a setting for deriving and displaying the confirmed special symbol is performed (step S292). At this time, the decorative symbol stop command transmission setting process for transmitting the decorative symbol stop command to the effect control board 12 is performed (step 059AKS021). The decorative symbol stop command is also called a symbol confirmation command, and is a command that specifies that the variable display (variation) of the decorative symbol is terminated and the display result (stop symbol) is derived and displayed. This command specifies the period (fixed period) for displaying the symbol.

Here, the main effect control commands transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 by the command control process will be described with reference to FIGS. 11-14. In addition, "(H)" indicates that it is a hexadecimal number.

The command 80XX (H) is an effect control command (variation pattern designation command) for designating a variation pattern of the decorative symbol that is variably displayed on the image display device 5 in response to the variable display of the special symbol. In the present embodiment, a variation pattern designation command corresponding to each variation pattern is set. For example, a unique number (variation pattern number) is assigned to each variation pattern, and the number is set to "XX" in the command (for example, "01" for variation pattern PA1-1). The variation pattern specification command is also a command for designating the variation start of the decorative pattern.

The command 8A01 (H) is an effect control command (first start opening prize designation command) for designating that the first start winning is generated due to the game medium entering the first start winning opening. The command 8A02 (H) is an effect control command (second start opening prize designation command) for designating that the second start winning is generated due to the game medium entering the second starting winning opening. The first starting port winning designation command and the second starting opening winning designation command may be collectively referred to as a starting opening winning designation command.

The command 8CXX (H) specifies whether or not to make a big hit, whether to make a loss (time saving), and the big hit type and the time saving type, that is, an effect control command (display result) that specifies a variable display result. Specified command). In the present embodiment, display result specification commands corresponding to each display result are set. For example, a unique number is assigned to each display result, and the number is set to "XX" in the command (for example, "00" for "loss" and "loss (time reduction A") for the time reduction type. "01" for "time saving)", "05" for "big hit" with "probability change" as the jackpot type).

The command 8D01 (H) is an effect control command (first variation start designation command) that specifies to start variable display (variation) of the first special symbol. The command 8D02 (H) is an effect control command (second variation start designation command) that specifies to start variable display (variation) of the second special symbol. The first fluctuation start designation command and the second fluctuation start designation command may be collectively referred to as a fluctuation start designation command. Information indicating whether to start the variable display of the first special symbol or the variable display of the second special symbol may be included in the variation pattern determination result designation command described later.

The command 8FXX (H) is an effect control command (design confirmation specification command) that specifies that the variable display (variation) of the decorative symbol is terminated and the display result (stop symbol) is derived and displayed, and the derived display is displayed. This command specifies the period (fixed period) for displaying the decorative pattern. In the feature unit 059AK of this embodiment, whether or not the variable display result is "loss (time reduction)" and the display result corresponding to each time reduction type when the variable display result is "loss (time reduction)". The specified command is set. For example, if the variable display result is not "loss (time reduction)", "00" is set for "XX" in the command, and if the variable display result is "loss (time reduction)", the time reduction type is selected. A unique number is assigned accordingly, and that number is set to "XX" in the command (for example, "01" if the time saving type is "time saving A", "02" if the time saving type is "time saving B", time saving. If the type is "time saving C", "03", if the time saving type is "time saving D", "04", etc.).

The command 95XX (H) is an effect control command (game state designation command) for designating the game state. In the present embodiment, game state designation commands corresponding to each game state are set. For example, if the gaming state is a normal state (low probability low base), "XX" is set to "00". For example, if the gaming state is a high-accuracy low-base state, "XX" is set to "01". For example, if the gaming state is a high-accuracy high-base state, "XX" is set to "02". For example, if the gaming state is a low accuracy high base state, "XX" is set to "03".

The command A000 (H) is an effect control command (big hit start designation command) for designating the start of the jackpot game state (start of fanfare). The fanfare is an effect that is executed at the start of the big hit game state to notify that the big hit game state has been reached. The command A100 (H) is an effect control command (small hit start designation command) for designating the start of the small hit game state.

The command A2XX (H) is an effect control command (command for designating the opening of the large winning opening) for designating the opening of the special variable winning ball device 7 for the number of times (round) indicated by XX. A3XX (H) is an effect control command (a command designated after opening the large winning opening) for designating the closure of the special variable winning ball device 7 for the number of times (round) indicated by XX.

The command A601 (H) is an effect control command (big hit end designation command) for designating the end of the jackpot game state (start of the ending). The ending is an effect of notifying the end of the big hit game state, which is executed at the end of the big hit game state. The command A602 (H) is an effect control command (small hit end designation command) for designating the end of the small hit game state.

The command C1XX (H) is an effect control command (first special figure hold storage number designation command) for designating the first special figure hold storage number. “XX” indicates the number of stored first special figure reservations. The command C2XX (H) is an effect control command (second special figure holding storage number designation command) for designating the second special figure holding storage number. “XX” indicates the second special figure reserved storage number. The first special figure holding storage number designation command and the second special figure holding storage number designation command are collectively referred to as a special figure holding storage number designation command.

The command C4XX (H) is an effect control command (symbol determination result designation command) for designating a display result among the determination results at the time of starting winning. The command C5XX (H) is an effect control command (variation pattern determination result designation command) for designating a variation pattern among the determination results at the time of starting winning. In the present embodiment, in the process of step S101 described later, when the first start winning or the second starting winning occurs, the random numbers MR1 to 3 are extracted. Regarding the variable display corresponding to the extracted random number values MR1 to 3, the variable display is variable based on the random number values MR1 and MR3 of the extracted random number values MR1 to 3 before the start condition of the variable display is satisfied. Whether or not the display result is a "big hit" and the fluctuation pattern of the variable display are determined. The determination at the time of starting winning refers to these determinations, and is executed in the winning random value determination process (see FIG. 11-3) in step S1213. In a predetermined case, this determination may not be performed. A unique number is assigned to the judgment result (including the case where there is no judgment) about the display result, and the number is set to "XX" in the symbol specification command (for example, if "no judgment", " If it is "00" or "miss", "01" is set, if it is "loss (time reduction)", a unique number is assigned according to the time reduction type, and if it is "big hit", it is unique according to the big hit type. Number is assigned). A unique number is assigned to the judgment result (including the case without judgment) for the fluctuation pattern, and the number is set to "XX" in the fluctuation pattern specification command (for example, if "no judgment" is used. "00", "11" for "PA1-1", "12" for "PA1-2", etc.).

FIG. 11-15 (A) is a flowchart showing an example of the process executed in step 059AKS021 of FIG. 11-13 as the decorative symbol stop command transmission setting process. The decorative symbol stop command transmission setting process is a process for setting to transmit a variable display result and a decorative symbol stop command according to the time saving type. In the decorative symbol stop command transmission setting process, the CPU 103 first determines whether or not the time saving / medium flag is set to the ON state (step 059AKS041). If the time saving middle flag is in the off state (step 059AKS041; No), it is determined whether or not the time saving start flag is set in the on state (step 059AKS042). If the time saving start flag is on (step 059AKS042; Yes), since the variable display result this time is "missing (time saving)", the CPU 103 sets the transmission of the decorative symbol stop command according to the time saving type. (Step 059AKS043), the decorative symbol stop command transmission setting process is terminated.

Specifically, in step 059AKS043, as shown in FIG. 11-15 (B), a predetermined decorative symbol stop command (symbol confirmation command) is set according to the time saving type. As shown in the figure, the fixed time is 10 seconds for "time saving A" and "time saving B", while the fixing time is 5 seconds for "time saving C" and 2 seconds for "time saving D". The time saving types of "time saving A" and "time saving B" are the time saving types determined only when the variable display result of the first special figure is "missing (time saving)", and are "time saving C" and "time saving". Since the time saving type of "D" is a time saving type that is determined only when the variable display result of the second special figure is "missing (time saving)", the variable display result of the first special figure is "missing (time saving)". Since the fixed time differs depending on whether the variable display result of the second special figure is "miss (time reduction)", the variation of the variable display increases and the game interest can be improved. Further, when the variable display result of the second special figure is "loss (time reduction)", the confirmation period differs depending on the time reduction type, so that the player's attention can be drawn to the confirmation period. Further, in the feature unit 059AK, since the processing of step 059AKS043 is performed only when the time reduction state is not obtained, the variable display result of the variable display corresponding to the hold (remaining hold) of the second special figure remaining after the time reduction ends is obtained. By performing the process of step 059AKS043 only in the case of "loss (time reduction)", the fixed time according to the time reduction type of "time reduction C" and "time reduction D" shown in the figure is obtained. That is, in the case where the time reduction state is controlled again in a short period after the end of the time reduction (at the maximum after the end of the period of four variable display of the maximum reserved storage number of the second special figure) (“time reduction”). In "C" and "time reduction D"), as shown in the case, when the variable display result corresponding to the first special figure is "loss (time reduction)" in the normal state ("time reduction A" and "time reduction B"). The confirmation time is shorter than. Therefore, it is necessary to clearly notify the player that the time saving state is controlled, and it is possible to control the time saving state by lengthening the confirmation period for the normal state and the variable display of the first special figure. A period can be provided to clearly notify the player. In addition, in the case where the time is controlled again in a short period of time after the end of the time reduction, if the confirmation period is long, the game interest may be deteriorated. Is prevented from decreasing.

When the time saving medium flag is on in step 059AKS041 of FIG. 11-15 (A) (step 059AKS041; Yes), or when the time saving start flag is off in step 059AKS042 (step 059AKS042; No), the CPU103 Sets to transmit the command 8F00 (fixed period 0.5 seconds) as the decorative symbol stop command (step 059AKS044), and ends the decorative symbol stop command transmission setting process.

After returning to FIG. 11-13 and executing the process of step 059AKS021, the CPU 103 has a confirmation period (10 seconds, 5 seconds, 2 seconds, 0) corresponding to the decorative symbol stop command (symbol confirmation command) set in step 059AKS021. (Any of .5 seconds) is set as the special figure confirmation display time (step 059AKS022). In the process of step 059AKS022, a timer initial value predetermined according to the variable display result and the time saving type may be set in the game control process timer provided in the game control timer setting unit 153. Then, after the special symbol confirmation display flag is set to the ON state (step S295), the special symbol stop process is terminated. In this way, after the confirmed special symbol is derived and displayed by the process of step S292, the special symbol process process corresponding to the occurrence of the timer interrupt is performed until the special symbol confirmed display time set in step 059AKS022 elapses. Every time the stop process is executed, it is determined in step S291 that the special figure confirmation display flag is on.

When the special figure confirmation display flag is on in step S291 (step S291; Yes), it is determined whether or not the special figure confirmation display time has elapsed (step S296). For example, in the process of step S296, the game control process timer value, which is the stored value of the game control process timer for which the timer initial value is set by the process of step S294, is read, and whether or not the timer value becomes "0" is determined. Therefore, it may be determined whether or not the special figure confirmation display time has elapsed. If the timer value is a value other than "0", the game control process timer value should be updated so that it is decremented by 1 each time the game control timer interrupt process is executed based on the occurrence of the timer interrupt. Just do it. If the special symbol confirmation display time has not elapsed in step S296 (step S296; No), the special symbol stop processing is terminated, and the process waits until the special symbol confirmation display time elapses.

When the special figure confirmation display time has elapsed in step S296 (step S296; Yes), after clearing the special figure confirmation display flag and turning it off (step S297), whether or not the jackpot flag is on is determined. Determine (step S298). At this time, if the jackpot flag is on (step S298; Yes), a predetermined fixed time is set as the effect waiting time at the start of the jackpot (step S299). In addition, a setting for transmitting a hit start designation command from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 is made (step S300). For example, in the process of step S300, the setting data indicating the storage address in the ROM 101 of the hit start designation command table prepared in advance for transmitting the hit start designation command according to the jackpot type buffer value is the transmission command in the transmission command buffer. It may be stored in the buffer area specified by the pointer.

Following the process of step S300, the jackpot flag is cleared to turn it off (step S301). In addition, a setting for ending the probability change state, the time saving state, and the remaining holding period described later is made (step 059AKS023). For example, as the process of step 059AKS023, the process of clearing the probability change flag, the time saving medium flag, and the remaining holding period flag to turn off the state, and the number of time saving times for counting the remaining number of times of the special figure game executed in the time saving state. A process such as clearing the counter may be executed. Then, after updating the value of the special symbol process flag to "4", which is a value corresponding to the jackpot opening pre-processing (step S303), the special symbol stop processing is terminated.

If the big hit flag is off in step S298 (step S298; No), it is determined whether or not the small hit flag is on (step S304). At this time, if the small hit flag is on (step S304; Yes), a predetermined fixed time is set as the effect waiting time at the start of the small hit (step S305). Subsequently, a setting is made for transmitting a hit start designation command corresponding to the special figure display result of "small hit" from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 (step S306). After that, the small hit flag is cleared to turn it off (step S307). In addition, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "8", which is a value corresponding to the small hit opening preprocessing (step S308).

If the small hit flag is off in step S304 (step S304; No), it is determined whether or not the time saving start flag is on (step 059AKS024). If the time saving start flag is on (step 059AKS024; Yes), the time saving start time processing is executed (step 059AKS025). The details of the time saving start processing will be described later. After executing the process of step 059AKS025, or when the time saving start flag is off in step 059AKS024 (step 059AKS024; No), the CPU 103 clears the special figure process flag and initializes the value to "0". (Step S309). After executing any of the processes of steps S308 and S309, it is determined whether or not to end the time saving state (step 059AKS027). Specifically, in the process of step 059AKS027, when the time reduction flag is on, the time reduction count value, which is the stored value of the time reduction counter, is updated by, for example, subtracting one. Then, it is determined whether or not the updated time reduction count value matches a predetermined time reduction end determination value (for example, "0"). At this time, if it matches the time saving end determination value, it is determined as Yes. On the other hand, if it does not match the time saving end determination value, it is determined as No.

When ending the time saving state (step 059AKS027; Yes), the CPU 103 performs the time saving ending time processing (step 059AKS028). The details of the processing at the end of working hours will be described later. After executing the process of step 059AKS028, or when the time saving state is not terminated in step 059AKS027 (step 059AKS027; No), the CPU 103 determines whether or not the remaining hold period is reached (step 059AKS030). Whether or not it is the remaining hold period may be determined by checking whether or not the flag during the remaining hold period, which will be described later, is set to the ON state. When the remaining hold period is set, that is, when the flag during the remaining hold period is on (step 059AKS030; Yes), the CPU 103 performs the remaining hold period end determination process (step 059AKS031), and then ends the special symbol stop process. .. The details of the remaining hold period end determination process will be described later. On the other hand, when it is not the remaining hold period, that is, when the flag during the remaining hold period is off (step 059AKS030; No), the CPU 103 ends the special symbol stop process as it is.

FIG. 11-16 is a flowchart showing an example of the process executed in step 059AKS025 of FIG. 11-13 as the process at the start of time reduction. The time saving start time processing is a processing in which the variable display result is "loss (time saving)" and a setting is made to perform time saving control from the next variable display. In the time saving start time processing shown in FIGS. 11-16, the CPU 103 first clears the time saving start flag to the off state (step 059AKS051), and sets the time saving medium flag to the on state (step 059AKS052). Subsequently, it is determined whether or not the flag is on during the remaining hold period (step 059AKS053). The remaining hold period flag is a flag indicating that the variable display corresponding to the hold (remaining hold) of the second special figure remaining after the end of the time reduction is in progress, and is described in step 059AKS063 (see FIG. 11-17) described later. When all the variable displays corresponding to the hold (remaining hold) of the second special figure that is set to the on state in the process are finished (step 059AKS072 described later), or the first remaining after the time saving is finished. 2 When the variable display result of the variable display corresponding to the hold (remaining hold) of the special figure becomes "loss (time reduction)", it is cleared to the off state (step 059AKS055 described later).

When it is determined in step 059AKS053 of FIG. 11-16 that the flag is off during the remaining hold period (step 059AKS053; No), the CPU 103 launches a game ball into the game area on the right side of the player. Is set to send a right-handed instruction command for instructing (step 059AKS054), and the time saving start time processing is ended. By transmitting the right-handed instruction command set in the process of step 059AKS054 to the effect control board 12, the right-handed instruction display of the aspect shown in FIG. 11-33 (F) is displayed on the effect control board 12 side. Will be done.

On the other hand, when it is determined in step 059AKS053 of FIG. 11-16 that the remaining holding period flag is in the on state (step 059AKS053; Yes), the CPU 103 clears the remaining holding period flag to the off state (step 059AKS055). , Clear various count values (step 059AKS056). In the process of step 059AKS056, the values of the remaining hold count value and the variable count value after the end of working hours, which will be described later, may be cleared to the initial value "0". Like the remaining hold count value, the variable count value after the end of the time reduction may be provided in a predetermined area of the RAM 102, and is a count value indicating the number of variable displays performed after the end of the time reduction state. Although not shown, the variation count value after the end of the reduced working hours is not shown, but for example, in the special symbol variation process in step S112 of FIG. It should be +1.

After executing the process of step 059AKS056 of FIG. 11-16, the CPU 103 sets to transmit the simple mode right-handed instruction command (step 059AKS057), and ends the time saving start time process. By transmitting the simple mode right-handed instruction command set in the process of step 059AKS057 to the effect control board 12, the right-handed instruction of the aspect shown in FIG. 11-35 (O) is performed on the effect control board 12 side. The display is done. The right-handed instruction command in the simplified mode transmitted and set in step 059AKS057 of FIG. 11-16 is different from the right-handed instruction command transmitted and set in the process of step 059AKS054, which is during the remaining hold period. This is because the variable display result is "missing (time saving)". Specifically, in a short period after the end of the time reduction (at the maximum after the end of the period of four variable display of the maximum number of reserved storages in the second special figure), the time reduction state is controlled again, so that step 059AKS057 In the process of, if the right-handed instruction command set to be transmitted in the process of step 059AKS054 is transmitted, the player may be troubled. Therefore, in the process of step 059AKS057, a command for displaying the right-handed instruction is transmitted in a simple manner to prevent the player from being bothered and deteriorating the game interest. ..

FIG. 11-17 is a flowchart showing an example of the process executed in step 059AKS028 of FIG. 11-13 as the process at the end of working hours. The time saving end time processing is a process of ending the time saving control and setting the remaining holding period. Regarding the probabilistic state in which the time saving / medium flag is on and the probabilistic change flag is on, the time reduction control may be continuously performed until the next variable display result becomes a “big hit”. Alternatively, it may be determined whether or not the time reduction control is terminated even in the probability change state, and the time reduction control may be terminated based on the determination result that the time reduction control is terminated. When the time reduction control is terminated in this way, the normal state may be obtained by also ending the probability variation control, and for the probability variation control, until the next variable display result becomes a "big hit", or further. It may be continued until a predetermined number of special figure games are executed.

In the time saving end processing shown in FIG. 11-17, the CPU 103 first clears the time saving medium flag to the off state (step 059AKS061). Subsequently, it is determined whether or not there is a hold (remaining hold) of the second special figure (step 059AKS062). In step 059AKS062, it may be determined whether or not there is a hold (remaining hold) of the second special figure by checking the hold information corresponding to the second special figure stored in the predetermined area of the RAM 102.

When the second special figure is held (remaining hold) (step 059AKS062; Yes), the flag is set to the on state during the remaining hold period (step 059AKS063), and the second special figure is held (remaining hold). The remaining hold count value is set according to the number (step 059AKS064). Specifically, in step 059AKS064, if the number of hold information corresponding to the second special figure stored in the predetermined area of the RAM 102 is "4", "4" is set in the remaining hold number count value, and "4" is set. If it is "3", "3" may be set, if it is "2", "2" may be set, and if it is "1", "1" may be set.

After executing the process of step 059AKS064, the CPU 103 initializes by setting "0" to the fluctuation count value after the end of the reduced working hours (step 059AKS065). Since the fluctuation count value after the end of the reduced working hours is initialized to "0" in step 059AKS056 of FIG. 11-16, if it is "0", the process of step 059AKS065 may be skipped. good. After executing the process of step 059AKS065, the CPU 103 sets to send a right-handed erase command for erasing the right-handed instruction display (step 059AKS066), and ends the time-saving end-time process. By transmitting the right-handed erase command set in the process of step 059AKS066 to the effect control board 12, the process of step 059AKS136 shown in FIG. 11-30 is executed on the effect control board 12 side. , The right-handed instruction display will be deleted.

When it is determined in step 059AKS062 of FIG. 11-17 that the hold (remaining hold) of the second special figure does not exist (step 059AKS062; No), the CPU 103 fires the game ball to the game area on the left side of the player. A setting is made to send a left-handed instruction command for instructing to return to the so-called left-handed type (step 059AKS067), and the time saving end time processing is ended.

FIG. 11-18 is a flowchart showing an example of the process executed in step 059AKS031 of FIG. 11-13 as the remaining hold period end determination process. The remaining hold period end determination process determines whether or not the remaining hold period has ended, that is, whether or not all the variable displays corresponding to the hold (remaining hold) of the second special figure remaining after the end of the reduced working hours have ended. Then, when it ends, it is a process to end the remaining holding period. In the remaining hold period end determination process, the CPU 103 first determines whether or not the variation count value after the end of the reduced working hours matches the remaining hold number count value set in step 059AKS064 of FIG. 11-17 (step 059AKS071). .. If the variation count value after the end of the reduced working hours does not match the remaining hold number count value (step 059AKS071; No), the CPU 103 ends the remaining hold period end determination process as it is.

On the other hand, when the variable count value after the end of working hours matches the remaining hold count value (step 059AKS071; Yes), the CPU 103 clears the flag during the remaining hold period to the off state (step 059AKS072), and various count values. (Step 059AKS073). In the process of step 059AKS073, as in the process of step 059AKS056, the values of the remaining hold count value and the variable count value after the end of the reduced working hours may be cleared to the initial value "0". After executing the process of step 059AKS074, the CPU 103 is set to transmit a left-handed instruction command for instructing the player to return to the so-called left-handed shot in which the game ball is launched into the game area on the left side (step 059AKS074). , Ends the remaining hold period end determination process. When the left-handed instruction command set in the process of step 059AKS074 is transmitted to the effect control board 12, left-handed as shown in FIG. 11-34 (N-2) on the effect control board 12. Instructions will be displayed.

FIG. 11-19 is a flowchart showing an example of the jackpot end processing executed in step S117 of FIG. In the jackpot end process shown in FIG. 11-19, the CPU 103 first determines whether or not the effect waiting time at the end of the jackpot has elapsed (step S321). As an example, in the process after opening the jackpot in step S116 shown in FIG. 6, when the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "7", the waiting time at the end of the jackpot, which is the execution period of the ending effect, is preliminarily supported. The specified timer initial value is set in the game control process timer. Then, in the process of step S321, the game control process timer value is updated by subtracting 1 from the game control process timer value, and the updated game control process timer value matches a predetermined waiting time elapsed determination value (for example, "0"). Depending on whether or not it is, it may be determined whether or not the production waiting time at the end of the big hit has elapsed. If the effect waiting time at the end of the jackpot has not elapsed in step S321 (step S321; No), the jackpot end process is terminated as it is.

On the other hand, when the effect waiting time at the end of the jackpot has elapsed in step S321 (step S321; Yes), the jackpot type buffer value stored in the game control buffer setting unit 155 is read out (step S322). , Identify whether the jackpot type was "non-probability", "probability", or "probability". At this time, it is determined whether or not the specified jackpot type is "non-probability variation" (step S323).

When it is determined in step S323 that the jackpot type is "non-probability variation" (step S323; Yes), a setting is made to start control for setting the gaming state to the time saving state (step S324). For example, the CPU 103 sets the time saving flag to the on state, and sets a predetermined count initial value (for example, "100") corresponding to the upper limit value of the special figure game that can be executed in the time saving state to the time saving number counter. Set to. On the other hand, when it is determined that the jackpot type is "probability change" or "probability change" (step S323; No), a setting is made to start control for setting the gaming state to the probability change state (step S325). For example, the CPU 103 sets both the probability change flag and the time saving flag to the ON state.

It should be noted that the setting for controlling the different types of probability change states may be made depending on whether the jackpot type is determined to be "probability change" or the jackpot type is determined to be "probability change". As an example, when the jackpot type is determined to be "probability change", both the probability change flag and the time reduction flag are set to the ON state, the initial value of the time reduction count value is not set, and then the special figure display result is displayed. Set so that both probability variation control and time reduction control are continuously performed until a "big hit" is reached. On the other hand, when the jackpot type is determined to be "probability", both the probability change flag and the time reduction flag are set to the on state, and the initial value of the time reduction count value is set in the same manner as when the time reduction state is controlled. After making the setting, the probability variation control is continuously performed until the next special figure display result becomes "big hit", while the time saving control is continued until the number of executions of the special figure game reaches a predetermined number (for example, "100"). It may be set as. Alternatively, when the jackpot type is determined to be "sudden probability", if the predetermined time saving medium collision probability flag is on, the setting for starting the time saving control together with the probability change control is made, while the time saving medium collision probability flag is off. If there is, the setting for starting only the probability change control may be made. Here, for the time saving medium sudden probability flag, for example, when it is determined in step S298 shown in FIG. 11-13 that the big hit flag is on, the big hit type is "probable" and the time saving flag is on. It suffices to be set to the on state corresponding to the time saving control being performed.

After executing any of the processes of steps S324 and S325, the special figure process flag is cleared, the value is initialized to "0" (step S326), and then the jackpot end process is terminated.

Next, the processing of the feature unit 059AK on the effect control board 12 in this embodiment will be described. FIG. 11-20 is a flowchart showing an example of command analysis processing. In the command analysis process, the effect control CPU 120 receives a start winning command (start winning opening designation command, special figure hold storage number designation command, symbol judgment result designation command, variation pattern judgment result designation command) from the main board 11. It is determined whether or not it was present (step S401).

When it is determined that the start winning command has been received (step S401; Yes), the received command is stored in the starting winning command buffer (step S402). When the 1st start opening prize designation command or the 1st special figure hold storage number designation command is received as the start winning command, the start winning command (1st start opening prize designation command, 1st special figure hold storage number designation command) , The symbol determination result specification command, the variation pattern determination result specification command) are stored in the first start winning command buffer provided in the predetermined area of the RAM 122. When the 2nd start opening prize designation command or the 2nd special figure hold storage number designation command is received as the start winning command, the start winning command (2nd start opening prize designation command, 2nd special figure hold storage number designation command) , The symbol determination result specification command, the variation pattern determination result specification command) are stored in the second start winning command buffer provided in the predetermined area of the RAM 122.

FIG. 11-21 (A) is a configuration example of the command buffer at the time of the first start winning. In the first start winning command buffer, various command data constituting the starting winning command received at the time of the first starting winning is stored. The command buffer at the time of winning the first start corresponds to each of the storage areas (hold display numbers 1 to 4) capable of storing various data for the number corresponding to the maximum value (for example, 4) of the first special figure hold storage number. Area) is provided. As shown in the figure, the command buffer at the time of the first start winning in the feature unit 059AK in this embodiment has an area in which various command data corresponding to the variable display during execution are stored as the hold display number "0". Is provided (the same applies to the command buffer at the time of winning the second start).

When there is a start prize to the 1st start winning opening, 4 commands, 1st starting opening winning designation command, 1st special figure hold memory designation command, symbol judgment result designation command, and variation pattern judgment result designation command, are 1 The set effect control command (command at the time of starting winning) is transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12. In the command buffer at the time of the first start winning, in addition to these first start opening winning designation commands, the first special figure hold memory designation command, the symbol judgment result designation command, and the variation pattern judgment result designation command, other information is held. A storage area is secured so that it can be stored in association with the stored information.

The effect control CPU 120 stores the data for specifying the start winning command from the beginning of the free area of the first start winning command buffer according to the reception order. The free area of the command buffer at the time of winning the first start, that is, the data in the area where the data is not stored is "0000 (H)". Therefore, when the start winning command is received, the effect control CPU 120 corresponds to the minimum hold display number in which the storage area of the start winning command is "0000 (H)" in the first start winning command buffer. Each effect control command data is stored in the storage area in the order of the first start opening winning designation command, the first special figure hold storage designation command, the symbol judgment result designation command, and the variation pattern judgment result designation command.

Further, FIG. 11-21 (B) is a configuration example of the command buffer at the time of winning the second start. In the second start winning command buffer, various command data constituting the starting winning command received at the time of the second starting winning is stored. The command buffer at the time of winning the second start corresponds to each of the storage areas (hold display numbers 1 to 4) capable of storing various data corresponding to the maximum value (for example, 4) of the second special figure hold storage number. Area) is provided. Similar to the command buffer at the time of the first start winning, the command buffer at the time of the second start winning in the feature unit 059AK in this embodiment has a hold display number “0” as shown in the variable display during execution. An area is provided for storing various corresponding command data.

When there is a start prize to the 2nd start winning opening, 4 commands, the 2nd starting opening winning designation command, the 2nd special figure hold memory designation command, the symbol judgment result designation command, and the variation pattern judgment result designation command, are 1 The set effect control command (command at the time of starting winning) is transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12. In the command buffer at the time of the second start winning, in addition to these second start opening winning designation commands, the second special figure hold memory designation command, the symbol judgment result designation command, and the variation pattern judgment result designation command, other information is held. A storage area is secured so that it can be stored in association with the stored information.

The effect control CPU 120 stores the data for specifying the start winning command from the beginning of the free area of the second start winning command buffer according to the reception order. The free area of the command buffer at the time of winning the second start, that is, the data in the area where the data is not stored is "0000 (H)". Therefore, when the start winning command is received, the effect control CPU 120 corresponds to the minimum hold display number in which the storage area of the start winning command is "0000 (H)" in the second start winning command buffer. Each effect control command data is stored in the storage area in the order of the second start opening winning designation command, the first special figure hold storage designation command, the symbol judgment result designation command, and the variation pattern judgment result designation command.

Further, in the second start winning command buffer, similarly to the first starting winning command buffer, a storage area for storing other information corresponding to each of the hold display numbers is provided, and a display stage change pattern described later is provided. A storage area for storing is provided. In the example shown in FIG. 10-8 (B), an example is shown in which the effect control command data is not stored in any of the storage areas of the hold display numbers “0” to “4”.

Returning to the description of the flowchart of the command analysis process shown in FIG. 11-20, after executing step S402, or when it is determined that the command at the time of starting winning is not received (step S401; No), the effect control CPU 120 , It is determined whether or not the game state designation command has been received (step S403). When it is determined that the game state designation command has been received (step S403; Yes), the effect control CPU 120 switches the on / off state of the high accuracy flag and the high base flag based on the content of the received game state designation command. (Step S404).

The high-probability flag is provided in a predetermined area of the RAM 122 (for example, the effect control flag setting unit) and is turned on in response to the probable change state. The on state / off state is switched according to the switching of the on state / off state. The high base flag is provided in a predetermined area of the RAM 122 (for example, the effect control flag setting unit) and is turned on in response to the time saving state. The on state / off state is switched according to the switching of the on state / off state. For example, when the game state specification command specifies the high accuracy high base state (for example, when the probability variation flag and the time saving flag are specified to be on), the effect control CPU 120 has a high accuracy flag and a high accuracy flag. Turn both base flags on (if they are already on, keep them on. The same applies to the on / off states for both flags). When the game state specification command specifies the high probability low base state (for example, when the probability variation flag is on and the time saving flag is off), the high probability flag is turned on and the high base is set. Turn off the flag. When the game state specification command specifies the low probability low base state (normal state) (for example, when the probability variation flag and the time saving flag are specified to be off), both the high probability flag and the high base flag are used. Turn it off.

After executing step S404, or when it is determined that the start winning command has not been received (step S403; No), the effect control CPU 120 executes other analysis processing (step S405), and the command analysis processing To finish.

FIG. 11-22 is a flowchart showing an example of the process executed in step S161 of FIG. 9 as the look-ahead notice setting process. In the hold display setting process shown in FIG. 11-22, the effect control CPU 120 first receives an effect control command (start opening winning designation command, winning determination result command, hold storage number notification command, etc.) transmitted at the time of starting winning. It is determined whether or not there is a reception (step S1301). In the process of step S1301, for example, whether or not the start opening winning designation command, the winning determination result command, and the hold storage number notification command are newly stored in the first start winning command buffer and the second starting winning command buffer. By confirming, it is sufficient to determine whether or not a command has been received at the time of winning a start.

If no command is received in step S1301 (step S1301; No), the read-ahead notice setting process ends. On the other hand, when it is determined that the command has been received (step S1301; Yes), the winning determination result corresponding to the received winning determination result command is specified (step S1302). At this time, it is determined whether or not "the winning determination is being restricted" is specified (step S1303). If the winning judgment result is other than "Limited winning judgment" (step S1303; No), whether or not the production control command transmitted at the time of starting winning includes the first starting opening winning designation command. That is, it is determined whether or not the received start opening winning command is the first starting opening winning designation command (step 059AKS081).

In the case of the first start opening winning designation command (step 059AKS081; Yes), the effect control CPU 120 holds or holds the variable display result as "big hit" or "miss (time reduction)" in the stored hold. It is determined whether or not the variable display result is "missing" and the hold, which is the fluctuation pattern of the time saving gap, is stored (step 059AKS082). In the process of step 059AKS082, by confirming the contents of the first start winning buffer shown in FIG. 11-21 (A), the variable display result becomes "big hit" or "loss (time reduction)". It suffices to determine whether or not the result is "loss" and the hold, which is the fluctuation pattern of the time saving gap, is stored.

When neither the hold in which the variable display result is "big hit" or "loss (time reduction)" or the hold in which the variable display result is "loss" and which is the fluctuation pattern of the time reduction is stored (step 059AKS082; No). ), The normal hold change determination table shown in FIG. 11-23 (A) is selected as the table to be used (step 059AKS083).

On the other hand, when either the hold in which the variable display result is "big hit" or "loss (time reduction)" or the hold in which the variable display result is "loss" and the fluctuation pattern of the time reduction is stored (step). 059AKS082; Yes), the restricted hold change determination table shown in FIG. 11-23 (B) is selected as the table to be used (step 059AKS084).

When it is determined in step 059AKS081 that it is not the first start opening winning command (step 059AKS081; No), it is the second starting opening winning command and the time is shortened. The time-saving hold change determination table for special figure 2 shown in C) is selected as the table to be used (step 059AKS085).

After executing any of the processes of step 059AKS083, 059AKS084, and 059AKS085, the effect control CPU 120 pre-reads according to the variable display result and the fluctuation pattern according to the determination ratio shown in the pending change determination table selected as the table to be used. Whether or not to execute the hold display change effect as the advance notice effect and the execution mode are determined (step S1304).

In the normal hold change determination table shown in FIG. 11-23 (A), the received start opening winning command is the first starting opening winning designation command, and the variable display result is "big hit" or in the stored hold. This table is selected when the hold that becomes "miss (time reduction)" or the variable display result is "loss" and neither the hold that is the fluctuation pattern of the time reduction is stored is stored. As shown in the figure, in the normal hold change determination table, when the variable display result is "big hit", the variable display result is "miss" and the fluctuation pattern of super reach loss, or the variable display result of "small hit". In the case of, if it is a variable display result of "loss (time reduction)" or "loss" and it is a fluctuation pattern of time reduction, in other cases, it corresponds to, and when it is executed, it is a big hit than when it is not executed. The decision ratio is assigned as shown in the figure so that the expectation is high and the jackpot expectation is high in the order of "red"> "green"> "blue" when executing. When the normal time hold change determination table is selected, in step S1304 of FIG. 11-22, whether or not the hold display change effect is executed and the execution mode are determined according to the determination ratio shown in the normal time hold change determination table. ..

In the restricted hold change determination table shown in FIG. 11-23 (B), the received start opening winning command is the first starting opening winning designation command, and the variable display result is "big hit" or in the stored hold. This table is selected when either the hold that becomes "loss (time reduction)" or the hold that is the variable display result is "loss" and the change pattern of the time reduction is stored. In such a case, the change from the normal state to the time saving state (which may be the probability change state) after the end of the variable display executed first, that is, before the execution of the variable display corresponding to the hold of the read-ahead notice target. Therefore, the variable display result and the fluctuation pattern may differ between the time of pre-reading and the time of executing the variable display corresponding to the hold of the pre-reading notice target. Therefore, in the restricted hold change determination table shown in FIG. 11-23 (B), the execution of the hold display change effect in which the jackpot expectation degree is a certain value or more (“green” or more in this example) is restricted. In the illustrated example, the hold display change effect in the "blue" mode can be executed, but it may be performed only without execution. For example, when the variable display result is "missing" in the stored hold and the hold, which is the fluctuation pattern of the time saving, is stored, the display mode of the hold display to be notified is initially set to "blue". , And after the end of the variable display corresponding to the hold of the fluctuation pattern of the time saving gas, the display mode for the hold to be announced (the hold displayed in "blue") is changed to the hold display of "green" or higher. You may change it. Further, the active display may be changed to a mode of "green" or higher. When the restricted hold change determination table is selected, in step S1304 of FIG. 11-22, whether or not the hold display change effect is executed and the execution mode are determined according to the determination ratio shown in the restricted hold change determination table. ..

Further, in the normal hold change determination table shown in FIG. 11-23 (A) and the restricted hold change determination table shown in FIG. 11-23 (B), when the variable display result is "miss (time reduction)" or the like. , An example in which the mode is the same as the case of "big hit" is shown, but for example, when the variable display result is "loss (time reduction)" or the variable display result is "loss", the time reduction variation. When it is a pattern, there may be a peculiar aspect (for example, "time?"). According to this, the variation of the hold display change effect increases, and the player's attention can be attracted.

The time saving hold change determination table for special figure 2 shown in FIG. 11-23 (C) is a table selected when the received start opening winning command is the second starting opening winning command. As shown in the figure, in the time saving hold change determination table for special figure 2, the normal time hold change determination table shown in FIG. 11-23 (A) and the limited time hold change determination table shown in FIG. 11-23 (B) are Unlike this, the determination ratio is not assigned when the variable display result is "loss (time reduction)" or when the variable display result is "loss" and the variation pattern of the time reduction is lost. If the received start opening winning command is the second starting opening winning designation command and the winning determination is not in progress, the gaming state is in the time saving state (high base control is in progress). In the feature unit 059AK of this embodiment, even if the time saving symbol (special figure) is stopped and displayed in the time saving state, the time saving control is not newly performed, and further, the time saving control is controlled to the time saving state in the remaining hold by the return effect described later. Since the effect suggesting whether or not to be performed is performed, it is not necessary to execute the hold display change effect foretelling that the time will be shortened. Therefore, as shown in the figure, in the special figure 2 time saving hold change determination table, the variable display result is "missing (time saving)" or the variable display result is "missing", which is a fluctuation pattern of the time saving gap. If no decision percentage is assigned. When the time-saving hold change determination table for special figure 2 is selected, in step S1304 of FIG. 11-22, execution of the hold display change effect according to the determination ratio shown in the time-saving hold change determination table for special figure 2. The presence or absence and the execution mode are determined.

Returning to FIG. 11-22, after executing the process of step S1304, or when it is determined in step S1303 that the winning determination is being restricted (step S1303; Yes), the effect control CPU 120 determines the determination result of step S1304. Is stored in the hold display data storage unit in association with the hold number corresponding to the new start winning prize (step S1311). At this time, if it is determined in step S1303 that the winning determination is being restricted, the data corresponding to "no execution (white)" in the pending change determination table shown in FIG. 11-23 may be stored.

Following the process of step S1311, the hold display update setting at the time of starting winning is performed (step S1313), and then the pre-reading notice setting process is terminated. For example, when the number of 1st special figure hold storage increases by 1 due to the game ball passing (entering) through the 1st start winning opening, the 1st hold display on the 1st hold display unit 5HR is increased by 1. Add a new first hold display. On the other hand, when the number of the second special figure hold memory increases by 1 due to the game ball passing (entering) through the second start winning opening, the second hold display on the second hold display unit 5HL is increased by 1. Add a new second hold display. The first hold display and the second hold display added at this time may be any hold display in the mode determined in step S1304 and stored in step S1311.

FIG. 11-24 is a flowchart showing an example of the variable display start setting process executed in step S171 of FIG. When the variable display start setting process is started, the effect control CPU 120 first determines whether or not the time is being shortened (step 059AKS086). In step 059AKS086, it is determined whether or not the time is being shortened by confirming whether or not the high base flag provided in the predetermined area of the RAM 122 (for example, the effect control flag setting unit) is set to the ON state. good.

If the time reduction is in progress (step 059AKS086; Yes), the effect control CPU 120 subtracts 1 from the time reduction number to update the time reduction number (step 059AKS086A). The number of time reductions is set in the process of step 059AKS133 (see FIG. 11-30), which will be described later, and is stored in a predetermined area of the RAM 122. After executing the process of step 059AKS086A, or when it is determined in step 059AKS086 that the time is not shortened (step 059AKS086; No), whether or not the effect control CPU 120 has received the left-handed instruction command from the main board 11 side. (Step 059AKS087), and when it is received (Step 059AKS087; Yes), a left-handed instruction display (see M6 in FIG. 11-34 (N-2)) is performed to instruct the player to hit left (see M6 in FIG. 11-34 (N-2)). Step 059AKS088). The left-handed instruction display may be continued for 5 seconds each time from the reception of the left-handed instruction command to the time when the variable display is performed four times, for example. .. When the left-handed instruction command is not received (step 059AKS087; No) or when the process of step 059AKS088 is executed, the effect control CPU 120 issues a right-handed instruction command or a simplified right-handed right-handed instruction command to the main board 11. It is determined whether or not the command was received from (step 059AKS089).

When either of the right-handed instruction command and the simplified right-handed instruction command is received (step 059AKS089; Yes), the effect control CPU 120 displays the right-handed instruction according to each command (step 059AKS090). Specifically, when the right-handed instruction command is received, the right-handed instruction display M3 of the mode shown in FIG. 11-33 (F) is performed, and when the simplified right-handed instruction command is received, FIG. 11- The right-handed instruction display M3 according to the aspect shown in 35 (O) is performed. In addition, after the right-handed instruction display corresponding to each command is performed in step 059AKS090, other effects are shown in each variable display until the time saving state ends, as shown in FIG. 11-33 (G). The right-handed instruction display may be performed in a manner that does not interfere with the above.

After executing the process of step 059AKS090, or when it is determined in step 059AKS089 that neither the right-handed instruction command nor the simplified right-handed instruction command has been received (step 059AKS089; No), the effect control CPU 120 , It is determined whether or not the display result specification command and the variation pattern specification command can be normally received (step 059AKS090A). In step 059AKS090A, for example, by checking the contents of the effect control command reception buffer provided in the RAM 122, it may be determined whether or not the display result designation command and the variation pattern designation command can be normally received.

If either of the display result specification command and the variation pattern specification command has not been normally received (step 059AKS090A; No), the effect control CPU 120 executes the omission processing (step 059AKS090B).

FIG. 11-25 is a flowchart showing an example of the process executed in step 059AKS090B of FIG. 11-24 as the process at the time of missing. In the missed time processing shown in FIG. 11-25, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the variation pattern designation command can be normally received, that is, whether or not the missed command is a display result designation command (step). 059AKS093). If the variation pattern designation command has not been normally received (step 059AKS093; No), the effect control CPU 120 ends the processing at the time of dropping as it is. In this case, the decorative symbol is not variably displayed, and the previous variable display result remains as it is, waiting until the symbol confirmation designation command is transmitted from the main board 11 side, and the symbol confirmation designation command is received in accordance with the reception. , The decorative design corresponding to the display result specification command may be stopped and displayed.

On the other hand, when the variation pattern specification command can be normally received (step 059AKS093; Yes), that is, when the missed command is the display result specification command, the effect control CPU 120 has the variation pattern specified by the variation pattern specification command. Is a fluctuation pattern of time saving determination or a fluctuation pattern of time saving gas, that is, whether or not it is a fluctuation pattern of PB2-4 or PB2-5 (step 059AKS094). In the case of a fluctuation pattern of time saving determination or a fluctuation pattern of time saving gas (step 059AKS094; Yes), since the fluctuation pattern includes a time saving fanning effect period, the stop symbol setting process described later is performed (step 059AKS095). Ends the processing at the time of dropping. In the feature unit 059AK of this embodiment, even if the display result specification command is missed, if the variation pattern specification command can be normally received, the variation pattern specified by the variation pattern specification command is generated. If it is a fluctuation pattern of time saving confirmation or a fluctuation pattern of time saving gas, it is possible to execute the time saving fanning effect by performing the stop symbol setting process described later, but either the display result specification command or the variation pattern specification command was missed. In that case, it is possible to prohibit the execution of a time-saving effect such as a time-saving fanning effect, such as stopping and displaying a predetermined decorative pattern at the time of omission.

On the other hand, when it is not the fluctuation pattern of the time saving determination or the fluctuation pattern of the time saving gap (step 059AKS094; No), the effect control CPU 120 uses a combination of decorative symbols corresponding to the fluctuation pattern specified by the fluctuation pattern designation command as the final stop symbol. It is determined (step 059AKS096), and the processing at the time of dropping is completed. In step 059AKS096, the combination of decorative symbols that can be selected in the variation pattern specified by the variation pattern designation command may be determined to be the combination having the lowest advantage for the player. According to this, it is possible to prevent inconsistencies such as a result of actually having a low advantage even though the combination of decorative symbols having a high advantage is stopped and displayed, and it is possible to prevent a decrease in the interest of the game. be able to. In this case, since the display result designation command is missed, it cannot be determined on the side of the effect control board 12 whether or not the variable display result is "missing (time saving)". Therefore, the effect control CPU 120 seems to have a variable display result of "loss (time reduction)" after executing an effect according to the variation pattern specified by the variation pattern designation command (for example, a reach effect of super reach). In this case, for example, a decorative symbol of "???" may be displayed or a predetermined lost symbol may be shaken until the symbol confirmation designation command is received.

Returning to FIG. 11-24, when the display result designation command and the variation pattern designation command can be normally received (step 059AKS090A; Yes), the effect control CPU 120 is the display result designation command transmitted from the main board 11 (step 059AKS090A; Yes). It is determined whether or not the special figure display result (variable display result) becomes "missing" based on the display result designation command (command stored in the storage area) or the like (step S551). When it is determined that the special figure display result (variable display result) is "missing" (step S551; Yes), the effect control CPU 120 is, for example, a variation pattern determination result specification command (variation pattern determination) transmitted from the main board 11. The non-reach fluctuation pattern (PA1-1, PA1) corresponding to the case where the fluctuation pattern specified by the result specification command storage area) is "non-reach" in which the variable display mode of the decorative symbol is not the reach mode. -2) It is determined whether or not it is (step S552).

When it is determined in the process of step S552 that the pattern is a non-reach variation pattern (step S552; Yes), the effect control CPU 120 determines a combination of fixed decorative symbols to be the final stop symbol constituting the non-reach combination (step S553). ). The effect control CPU 120 extracts numerical data indicating a random number value for determining a decorative symbol of a non-reach combination, which is updated by, for example, an effect random counter provided in a predetermined area of the random number circuit 124 or the RAM 122, and outputs the ROM 121. The fixed decorative symbol (decorative symbol of the non-reach combination) is determined by referring to the decorative symbol determination table of the non-reach combination prepared in advance.

When it is determined in the process of step S552 that the pattern is not a non-reach variation pattern (step S552; No), the effect control CPU 120 executes the stop symbol setting process (step 059AKS092).

FIG. 11-26 is a flowchart showing an example of the stop symbol setting process executed in step 059AKS092 of FIG. 11-24. In the stop symbol setting process, the execution setting of the time saving fanning effect and the execution setting of the return effect are performed, and when the special symbol display result (variable display result) is "missing (time saving)", the time saving symbol is finally stopped. Processing to make a symbol is performed. In addition, the time-saving symbol that is stopped and displayed in the decorative symbol is referred to as a time-saving symbol in order to distinguish it from the special symbol.

In the stop symbol setting process in FIGS. 11-26, the effect control CPU 120 displays a special figure based on a display result designation command (command stored in the display result designation command storage area) transmitted from the main board 11. It is determined whether the result is "loss (time reduction)" or "loss" and the fluctuation pattern of the time reduction gap (step 059AKS101).

If the special figure display result is "loss (time reduction)", or if it is "loss" and the variation pattern of the time reduction is (step 059AKS101; Yes), whether or not the effect control CPU 120 is in the time reduction. Is determined (step 059AKS102). In step 059AKS102, if it is determined whether or not the time is being shortened by confirming whether or not the high base flag provided in the predetermined area of the RAM 122 (for example, the effect control flag setting unit) is set to the ON state. good. When the time is not shortened (step 059AKS102; No), the effect control CPU 120 determines the lost symbol of the reach combination as the temporary stop symbol (step 059AKS103). Specifically, in the feature unit 059AK, when the special figure display result is "loss (time reduction)" or "loss" and the variation pattern of the time reduction gap, the reach effect of super reach is executed, and then. A time-saving fanning effect is performed. Therefore, in step 059AKS103, the symbol to be temporarily stopped and displayed as a result of the reach effect of the super reach is determined as the lost symbol of the reach combination. In step 059AKS103, for example, the numerical data indicating the random number value for determining the decorative symbol of the reach combination updated by the random number circuit 124 or the random counter for effect is extracted, and the decorative of the reach combination prepared in advance in the ROM 121 is stored. The temporary stop symbol (decorative symbol of the reach combination) may be determined by referring to the symbol determination table.

After executing the process of step 059AKS103, the effect control CPU 120 executes the time-saving fanning effect setting process for setting to execute the time-saving fanning effect (step 059AKS104).

FIG. 11-27 is a flowchart showing an example of the process executed in step 059AKS104 of FIG. 11-26 as the time saving fanning effect setting process. In the time-saving fanning effect setting process shown in FIGS. 11-27, the effect control CPU 120 is shown in FIG. As shown in 11-28, the time-saving fanning effect pattern is determined (step 059AKS113), and the time-saving fanning effect setting process is completed. Although not shown in FIGS. 11-28, if the time-saving fanning effect setting process is executed due to the stop symbol setting process being performed in the missing time process in FIG. 11-25, the time-saving effect setting process is executed. Since the time-saving type is unknown except for the fluctuation pattern of the ghost, it may be determined to be the time-saving fanning effect pattern of the pattern dedicated to the missing time (for example, the effect pattern of "success D" with the effect time of 5 seconds).

As shown in FIGS. 11-28, when the time saving types are "time saving A" and "time saving B", the time saving fanning effect pattern of "success A" with an effect time of 10 seconds is determined. When the time saving type is "time saving C", the time saving fanning effect pattern of "success B" having an effect time of 2 seconds is determined. When the time saving type is "time saving D", the time saving fanning effect pattern of "success C" having an effect time of 1 second is determined. In the case of a variation pattern of the time saving gas, it is determined to be a time saving fanning effect pattern of "failure" with an effect time of 10 seconds. The effect time is a time corresponding to the time-saving fanning effect period added in step 059AKS013 in FIG. 11-8 (see FIG. 11-9), and the effect control CPU 120 is the display result transmitted from the main board 11. The time corresponding to the time-saving fanning effect period is determined as the time-saving fanning effect time by the designation command and the variation pattern specification command. In addition, in the feature unit 059AK, for example, the same character is displayed because the production time is the same for the time-saving fanning effect pattern of "success A" and the time-saving fanning effect pattern of "failure", and the time-saving symbol is displayed in "success A". Is the success pattern that finally stops and displays, and in "Failure", the time saving symbol does not finally stop and displays, and the decorative symbol of the reach combination stops and displays. Therefore, it is possible to attract the player's attention to whether or not it succeeds (whether or not the time saving symbol is stopped and displayed). Further, in the feature unit 059AK, as shown in FIG. 11-12, the rate at which the variable display result becomes "loss (time reduction)" differs depending on the type of reach effect to be executed. Similarly, the execution ratio differs depending on the type of reach effect to be executed. That is, with respect to the reach effect of Super Reach A, which has a high expectation of a big hit, the variable display result does not become "loss (time reduction)", and the time reduction fanning effect is not executed. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the special effect from being excessively executed, and it is possible to maintain the expectation that a specific display result will be obtained. Further, as shown in FIG. 11-12 (B), with respect to the fluctuation pattern of the time saving gap in which the variable display result does not become "loss (time saving)" even if the time saving fanning effect is executed, the jackpot expectation degree such as Super Reach C is obtained. A low reach effect is performed. Therefore, the rate at which the time-saving fanning effect is executed differs depending on the type of reach effect to be executed, and the rate at which the time-saving symbol is stopped and displayed as a result of executing the time-saving fanning effect also differs.

After returning to FIG. 11-26 and executing the process of step 059AKS104, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the special figure display result is "loss (time reduction)" (step 059AKS105). When the special symbol display result is "loss (time reduction)" (step 059AKS105; Yes), the effect control CPU 120 determines the decorative symbol of the reach combination including the time reduction symbol as the final stop symbol (step 059AKS106), and stops. The symbol setting process ends. In step 059AKS106, the time saving symbol in the mode corresponding to the time saving type may be determined as the final stop symbol (see FIGS. 11-32 (D-1) and 11-34 (M-1)).

In step 059AKS101, when the special figure display result is neither "loss (time reduction)" nor "loss" and is not a fluctuation pattern of the time reduction gap (step 059AKS101; No), the effect control CPU 120 is a decorative symbol to be stopped and displayed this time. It is determined whether or not the variable display of is the variable display corresponding to the first (first) variation of the second special figure performed after the end of the time reduction (step 059AKS107). For example, in step 059AKS107, after the number of time reductions is subtracted by 1 to become "0" in step 059AKS086A of FIG. 11-24, the time reduction end flag is set to the on state, and the variable display performed immediately after that is displayed. Whether or not the display is variable corresponding to the second special figure may be determined by whether or not the second symbol variation start designation command has been received.

In the case of variable display (variation) corresponding to the first (first) second special figure performed after the end of the time reduction (step 059AKS107; Yes), the effect control CPU 120 is stored in the second special figure after the end of the time reduction. Executes the return effect setting process to execute the return effect that suggests whether or not the hold for which the special figure display result is "missing (time reduction)" is stored in the hold memory corresponding to the variable display of the figure. (Step 059AKS108).

FIG. 11-29 is a flowchart showing an example of the process executed in step 059AKS108 of FIG. 11-26 as the return effect setting process. In the return effect setting process shown in FIGS. 11-29, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not there is a hold in the hold memory corresponding to the second special figure for which the special figure display result is "missing (time reduction)". , Of the effect control command reception buffers provided in the RAM 122, the determination is made by checking the contents of the effect control command reception buffer corresponding to the second special figure (step 059AKS115).

When there is a hold in the hold memory corresponding to the second special figure in which the special figure display result is "missing (time reduction)" (step 059AKS115; Yes), the effect control CPU 120 holds the hold corresponding to the second special figure. A return success pattern is set to notify that there is a hold in the memory in which the special figure display result is "missing (time saving)", that is, the time saving symbol is stopped and displayed again due to one of the remaining holds (step 059AKS116). ), Ends the return effect setting process. On the other hand, when there is no hold in the hold memory corresponding to the second special figure for which the special figure display result is "missing (time reduction)" (step 059AKS115; No), the effect control CPU 120 corresponds to the second special figure. A return failure pattern that notifies that there is no hold in the hold memory for which the special figure display result is "missing (time saving)", that is, the time saving symbol will not be stopped and displayed again due to any of the remaining holds. The setting (step 059AKS117) is performed, and the return effect setting process is completed. In addition, in the feature unit 059AK, both the return effect of the return success pattern and the return effect of the return failure pattern execute a common effect (an effect of inciting whether or not the time is shortened again), and as a result, a stop display is displayed. The combination of decorative patterns to be made is different.

After returning to FIG. 11-26 and executing the process of step 059AKS108, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the return effect pattern set in step 059AKS108 is a return success pattern (step 059AKS109). If it is a return success pattern (step 059AKS109; Yes), a decorative symbol of the reach combination including the time saving return symbol is determined as the final stop symbol (step 059AKS110), and the stop symbol setting process is terminated. The time saving return symbol is a symbol different from the time saving symbol determined as the final stop symbol in step 059AKS106 according to the time saving type (see FIG. 11-34 (K-1)). On the other hand, when it is not a return success pattern (step 059AKS109; No), when it is determined in step 059AKS102 that the time is being shortened (step 059AKS102; Yes), or when it is determined in step 059AKS105 that the special figure display result is "missing (time saving)". When it is determined that the display is not (step 059AKS105; No), or when it is determined that the display is not variable corresponding to the first (first) variation of the second special figure performed after the time reduction is completed in step 059AKS107 (step 059AKS107; No). ), The effect control CPU 120 determines the combination of the final stop symbols that constitute the reach combination (step 059AKS111). Specifically, the effect control CPU 120 extracts numerical data indicating a random number value for determining a decorative symbol of a reach combination updated by, for example, a random number circuit 124 or a random number counter for effect, and prepares it by storing it in ROM 121 in advance. The final decorative symbol (decorative symbol of the reach combination) is determined by referring to the decorative symbol determination table of the reach combination. In this way, even if it is determined in step 059AKS105 that the special symbol display result is "loss (time reduction)" in the stop symbol setting process, if the time reduction is in progress (step 059AKS102; Yes), the decorative symbol The final stop symbol of is a decorative symbol of the reach combination by the processing of step 059AKS111.

After returning to FIG. 11-24 and executing the process of step 059AKS092, the effect control CPU 120 changes the display mode of the active display in addition to the settings in the effect control pattern determined in response to the fluctuation pattern. After making settings for executing the effect during variable display including the variable display operation of the decorative pattern such as the effect to be performed or the mini game (step S559), the effect control pattern is one of a plurality of prepared patterns. (Step S560). The effect control CPU 120 selects and uses one of a plurality of prepared effect control patterns (special figure variation effect control pattern) in response to, for example, the variation pattern indicated by the variation pattern determination result specification command. Set as a pattern. Further, when it is decided to execute the time saving fanning effect or the returning effect, the effect control pattern corresponding to the time saving fanning effect or the returning effect is selected and set as the usage pattern. If it is determined in step 059AKS090B that the variation pattern designation command has not been normally received in the process when the data is missed, it is not necessary to select the effect control pattern. In this case, the decorative symbol is not variably displayed and the previous variable display result remains, but it waits until the symbol confirmation designation command is transmitted from the main board 11 side, and the symbol confirmation designation command is received. At the same time, the decorative design corresponding to the display result specification command may be stopped and displayed. On the other hand, if it is determined in step 059AKS090B that the variation pattern specification command has not been normally received in the missing time processing, the effect control pattern dedicated to the missing time may be selected in the step S560. ..

Following the process of step S560, the effect control CPU 120 receives, for example, a predetermined area of the RAM 122 ( The initial value of the effect control process timer provided in the effect control timer setting unit or the like) is set (step S561). Specifically, in step S561, when the execution setting of the time saving fanning effect is made in the time saving fanning effect setting process of step 059AKS104 of FIG. 11-26, it is indicated by the variation pattern specified by the variation pattern determination result specification command. The initial value of the effect control process timer is set by adding the effect time of the time-shortening effect to the time. After the execution of step S561, the effect control CPU 120 makes a setting for starting the variation of the decorative pattern or the like on the display screen of the image display device 5 (step S562). At this time, the effect control CPU 120, for example, issues a display control command specified by the display control data included in the effect control pattern (effect control pattern when the special figure fluctuates) determined in the process of step S560 to the VDP of the display control unit 123. In each of the "left", "middle", and "right" decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R provided in the display area of the image display device 5, the decorative symbols are started to fluctuate. Just do it.

After executing the process of step S562, the effect control CPU 120 updates the value of the effect process flag to "2", which is a value corresponding to the effect process during variable display (step S563), and then performs the variable display start setting process. To finish.

FIG. 11-30 is a flowchart showing an example of the variable display effect processing executed in step S172 of FIG. When the effect processing during variable display shown in FIG. 11-30 is started, the effect control CPU 120 first determines whether or not the variable display time has elapsed based on the timer value of the effect control process timer (step S801). ). For example, when the effect control CPU 120 updates the timer value of the effect control process timer (for example, 1 is subtracted) and the end code is read from the effect control pattern in response to the updated effect control process timer value. In addition, it may be determined that the variable display time has elapsed.

When it is determined in the process of step S801 that the variable display time has not elapsed (step S801; No), the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not it is the time reduction number display period for displaying the time reduction number (step 059AKS121). ). The time reduction number display period is a period for displaying the time reduction number updated in step 059AKS086A of FIG. 11-24, and may be predetermined in the effect control pattern determined in step S560. When it is determined that the time reduction number display period is reached (step 059AKS121; Yes), the effect control CPU 120 displays the time reduction number display control updated in step 059AKS086A of FIG. 11-24 as the remaining time reduction number. (Step 059AKS122).

After executing the process of step 059AKS122, or when it is determined in step 059AKS121 that it is not the time reduction display period (step 059AKS121; No), whether or not the effect control CPU 120 is the reach effect period for executing the reach effect. (Step 059AKS123). The reach effect period may be predetermined, for example, in the effect control pattern determined according to the fluctuation pattern. When it is determined that the reach effect period is reached (step 059AKS123; Yes), the effect control CPU 120 controls to execute the reach effect (step 059AKS124).

After executing the process of step 059AKS124, or when it is determined in step 059AKS123 that it is not the reach effect period (step 059AKS123; No), the effect control CPU 120 is at the symbol temporary stop timing which is the timing to temporarily stop and display the decorative symbol. It is determined whether or not there is (step 059AKS125). The symbol temporary stop timing may be predetermined in the effect control pattern determined when the temporary stop symbol of the reach combination is determined in the stop symbol setting process of FIGS. 11-26 (step 059AKS103). When it is determined that the symbol temporary stop timing is reached (step 059AKS125; Yes), the effect control CPU 120 displays the decorative symbol temporary stop display (step 059AKS126), and temporarily stops the decorative symbol of the reach combination determined in step 059AKS103. Display it.

After executing the process of step 059AKS126, or when it is determined in step 059AKS125 that it is not the symbol temporary stop timing (step 059AKS125; No), the effect control CPU 120 is the time-saving fanning effect period for executing the time-saving fanning effect. Whether or not it is determined (step 059AKS127). The time-saving fanning effect period may be predetermined, for example, in the effect control pattern determined according to the pattern set in the time-saving fanning effect setting process of FIGS. 11-27. When it is determined that the time-saving fanning effect period is in effect (step 059AKS127; Yes), the effect control CPU 120 performs the time-saving fanning effect control for executing the time-saving fanning effect (step 059AKS128).

After executing the process of step 059AKS128, or when it is determined in step 059AKS126 that it is not the time saving effect period (step 059AKS126; No), whether or not the effect control CPU 120 is the return effect period for executing the return effect. (Step 059AKS129). The return effect period may be predetermined, for example, in the effect control pattern determined according to the pattern set in the return effect setting process of FIGS. 11-29. When it is determined that it is the return effect period (step 059AKS129; Yes), the effect control CPU 120 performs the return effect control for executing the return effect (step 059AKS130).

After executing the process of step 059AKS130, or when it is determined that it is not the return effect period (step 059AKS129; No), the effect control CPU 120 is based on the setting in the effect control pattern determined corresponding to the fluctuation pattern. In addition, control for changing the display mode of the active display and performing the effect during the variable display including the variable display operation of the decorative symbol such as a mini game is performed (step S808), and the effect process during the variable display is performed. finish.

On the other hand, when it is determined in step S801 that the variable display time has elapsed (step S801; Yes), it is determined whether or not the symbol determination command transmitted from the main board 11 is normally received (step S809). At this time, if the symbol confirmation command is not normally received (step 809; No), the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the special figure display result (variable display result) is "missing (time reduction)". (Step 059AKS137). When the special figure display result (variable display result) is not "loss (time reduction)" (step 059AKS137; No), the effect control CPU 120 ends the effect process during variable display.

On the other hand, when the special figure display result (variable display result) is "loss (time reduction)" (step 059AKS137; Yes), the effect control CPU 120 sets "XXX" as the special time reduction number in the time reduction number (step). 059AKS138), after performing the special time reduction notification control that displays "??? times" as the notification of the time reduction number (059AKS139), the variable display during effect processing is terminated. If the symbol confirmation command has not been received normally, the effect itself of notifying the number of time reductions may not be executed. In addition, even if it is received normally, for example, if there is an inconsistency such as the content indicated by the symbol confirmation command and the content indicated by the display result specification command do not match, "? The special time reduction notification control for displaying "?? times" may be performed, or the effect itself for notifying the time reduction number may not be executed.

When the symbol confirmation command is normally received in step S809 (step S809; Yes), the effect control CPU 120 transmits a predetermined display control command to the VDP or the like of the display control unit 123, for example. Control is performed to derive and display the final stop symbol (fixed decorative symbol) that is the display result in the variable display of the symbol (step S810). After executing the process of step 810, the effect control CPU 120 sets the confirmation symbol display time according to the received symbol confirmation command (step 059AKS131). In step 059AKS131, the confirmation time indicated by the commands 8F00 to 8F04 set for transmission in step 059AKS043 shown in FIG. 11-15 or step 059AKS044 may be set.

After executing the process of step 059AKS131, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the special figure display result (variable display result) is "loss (time reduction)" (step 059AKS132). When the special figure display result (variable display result) is "loss (time reduction)" (step 059AKS132; Yes), the effect control CPU 120 is specified by the received symbol confirmation command the number of time reductions (FIGS. 11-15 (B)). ) Is set (step 059AKS133), and the time reduction number notification control for displaying the time reduction number (notifying the time reduction number) is performed (step 059AKS134).

After executing the process of step 059AKS134, or when it is determined in step 059AKS132 that the special figure display result (variable display result) is not "loss (time reduction)" (step 059AKS132; No), the effect control CPU 120 is right-handed. It is determined whether or not the erase command is received from the main board 11 side (step 059AKS135), and if it is received (step 059AKS135; Yes), the right-handed instruction display is erased (step 059AKS136). After executing the process of step 059AKS136, or when it is determined in step 059AKS135 that the right-handed erase command has not been received (step 059AKS135; No), the effect control CPU 120 waits for the value of the effect process flag. It is updated to "3" which is a value corresponding to the processing (step S812), and the effect processing during variable display is terminated.

FIG. 11-31 is a timing chart showing each timing during the variable display in the case where the time saving symbol is stopped and displayed and in other cases. 11-31 (A) to 11-31 (C) show an example in which the variable display result is "loss" (including loss (time reduction)). Specifically, FIGS. 11-31 (A) show an example in which a time-saving symbol (referred to as "time-saving A" as a time-saving type) is stopped and displayed as the final stop symbol of the decorative symbol. (B) shows an example in which the time saving symbol is not stopped and displayed as the final stop symbol of the decorative symbol without executing the time saving fanning effect, and FIGS. 11-31 (C) shows the time saving gasse. An example in the case of a fluctuation pattern is shown. In the illustrated example, in order to facilitate understanding, all of FIGS. 11-31 (A) to (C) show an example in which Super Reach C is executed, and FIGS. 11-31 (A) and (C). B) shows an example in which the fluctuation pattern of PB2-1 is selected, and FIG. 11-31 (C) shows an example in which the fluctuation pattern of PB2-5 is selected.

As shown in FIG. 11-31 (A), when the time-saving symbol is stopped and displayed as the final stop symbol of the decorative symbol, when the variable display is started, the reach state is reached, and then the reach effect of Super Reach C is executed. NS. Then, when the symbol temporary stop timing is reached, as shown in the figure, the decorative symbol of the reach combination is temporarily stopped and displayed (in this example, the decorative symbol of 757). Then, a time-saving fanning production is performed. The time-saving fanning effect period L4 is 10 seconds, similarly to the time-saving fanning effect period L5 shown in FIGS. 11-31 (C) (see FIGS. 11-9 and 11-10). When the symbol confirmation command is received after the time saving fanning effect is completed, the time saving symbol is stopped and displayed as the final stop symbol (in this example, the combination of the decorative symbols at 7:07), and the fluctuation changes after the confirmation symbol display period L1 elapses. finish. The confirmed symbol display period L1 is 10 seconds (see FIG. 11-15 (B)).

As shown in FIG. 11-31 (B), when the time-saving fanning effect is not executed and the time-saving symbol is not stopped and displayed as the final stop symbol of the decorative symbol, the reach state is reached when the variable display is started. After that, the reach production of Super Reach C is executed. After that, when the symbol confirmation command is received (767 in this example). Then, after the confirmation symbol display period L2 elapses, the fluctuation ends. The finalized symbol display period L2 is 0.5 seconds (see FIG. 11-15 (A)), which is the same as the finalized symbol display period L3 shown in FIG. 11-31 (C).

As shown in FIG. 11-31 (C), in the case of the variation pattern of the time saving gap, when the variable display is started, the reach state is reached, and then the reach effect of the super reach C is executed. Then, when the symbol temporary stop timing is reached, as shown in the figure, the decorative symbol of the reach combination is temporarily stopped and displayed (in this example, the decorative symbol of 757). Then, a time-saving fanning production is performed. The time-saving fanning effect period L5 is 10 seconds, similarly to the time-saving fanning effect period L4 shown in FIG. 11-31 (A) (see FIGS. 11-9 and 11-10). When the symbol confirmation command is received after the time-saving fanning effect is completed, the lost symbol of the reach combination is stopped and displayed as the final stop symbol (767 in this example). Then, after the confirmation symbol display period L3 elapses, the fluctuation ends. The finalized symbol display period L3 is 0.5 seconds (see FIG. 11-15 (A)), which is the same as the finalized symbol display period L2 shown in FIG. 11-31 (B).

Next, an example of the operation of the effect when the time-saving symbol is stopped and displayed or when the time-saving fanning effect is executed will be described with reference to FIGS. 11-32 to 11-35.

As shown in FIG. 11-32 (A), when the game state is the normal state after the reach effect of the super reach C is executed, the symbol temporary stop timing is shown in FIG. 11-32 (B-1). As shown, the decorative design of the reach combination is temporarily stopped and displayed. In the illustrated example, in each of the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of "left", "middle", and "right", the decorative symbol 5La is "7", the decorative symbol 5Ca is "5", and the decorative symbol 5Ra, respectively. An example is shown in the case where "7" is temporarily stopped and displayed. As shown in the figure, the symbol "5" as the decorative symbol 5Ca may be displayed in a visually recognizable manner as being temporarily stopped while being shaken. Further, the present invention is not limited to the decorative symbol 5Ca in each “middle” decorative symbol display area 5C, and all the decorative symbols may remain swaying. On the other hand, when the game state is the reduced working hours state, since it is determined as No in step 059AKS102 in FIGS. 11-26, the process of step 059AKS111 is performed without the decorative symbol of the reach combination being temporarily stopped and displayed. , As shown in FIG. 11-32 (B-2), the lost symbol of the reach combination is stopped and displayed as the final stop symbol. In the illustrated example, the time saving symbol is stopped and displayed as the special symbol display result (in the illustrated example, an example of the special symbol display result of "1" which is the time saving type of the time saving A is shown), while the decorative symbol is displayed. Shows an example when the time saving symbol is not stopped and displayed. As shown in FIG. 11-32 (B-2), after the lost symbol of the reach combination is stopped and displayed as the final stop symbol, the fluctuation ends 0.5 seconds after the final stop symbol display period.

When the time-saving fanning effect period starts from the state shown in FIG. 11-32 (B-1), the time-saving fanning effect is executed as shown in FIG. 11-32 (C). In the illustrated example, the message M1 of "maybe time saving !?" is displayed to indicate whether or not the time saving symbol is stopped and displayed. In addition, for example, two characters battle. Depending on whether or not the player wins, it may be possible to incite whether or not the time-saving symbol is stopped and displayed.

Then, when the symbol confirmation command is received, the final stop symbol is displayed as shown in FIGS. 11-32 (D-1) or (D-2). In FIG. 11-32 (D-1), the variable display result is “loss (time reduction)”, and the symbol confirmation command of 8F01 shown in FIG. 11-15 (B) is received as the symbol confirmation command, and “time reduction A”. An example is shown in the case where the time saving symbol 5Cb of the time saving type of is stopped and displayed as the final stop symbol, and the special symbol display result also shows the number "1" which is the time saving symbol of the time saving type of "time saving A". An example is shown when a special symbol is displayed as a special symbol display result. In the illustrated example, an example is shown in which the display mode of the active display AHA is changed to the “green” display mode before the time saving symbol 5Cb is stopped and displayed. The display mode may change immediately after the start of the effect, or may change during the reach effect of the super reach. On the other hand, in the case of the fluctuation pattern of the time saving gap, since the symbol confirmation command of 8F00 shown in FIG. 11-15 (A) is received, as the final stop symbol as shown in FIG. 11-32 (D-2). The lost symbol of the reach combination is stopped and displayed. As the special symbol display result, as shown in the figure, a special symbol indicating the symbol “−” which is a lost symbol is displayed as the special symbol display result. Then, the fluctuation ends 0.5 seconds after the finalized symbol display period. In the illustrated example, the display mode of the active display AHA is changed to the display mode of "blue" before the lost symbol of the reach combination is stopped and displayed. The display mode may be changed immediately after the start of the fanning effect, or may be changed during the reach effect of the super reach. Further, regarding the active change effect that changes the display mode of the active display, depending on which display mode the active display display mode is changed to, the time saving symbol is stopped and displayed even if the reach effect is the same type of super reach. The display mode of the active display may be changed so that the ratio of the active display is different. The change destination of the display mode in the active change effect may be the same as the determination ratio in the normal hold change determination table shown in FIG. 11-23 (A). Further, unlike the normal hold change determination table shown in FIG. 11-23 (A), the variable display result is different depending on whether the variable display result is "loss (time reduction)" or the fluctuation pattern of the time reduction gap. When is "missing (shorter time)", the proportion of "green" or "red" display mode may be higher.

By executing the process of step 059AKS134 in FIG. 11-30 in the state shown in FIG. 11-32 (D-1), as shown in FIG. 11-33 (E), the time reduction number display as the time reduction number notification control. M2 is performed. In this case, since the symbol confirmation command of 8F01 shown in FIG. 11-15 (B) is received as the symbol confirmation command, "time reduction 100 times!" Is displayed as the time reduction number display M2. When the process of step 059AKS139 in FIG. 11-30 is executed, "time reduction ??? times" is displayed as special time reduction notification control, and notification of the time reduction number (time reduction number) is restricted. Just do it. Then, when 10 seconds, which is the confirmed symbol display period specified by the symbol confirmation command of 8F01, elapses, as shown in FIG. 11-33 (F), the time is controlled to a shorter time state and a new variable display (hold display) is performed. Variable display corresponding to HL1) is started. At that time, the hold display HL3 and HL2 shift to the right. Further, by the process of step 059AKS122 in FIG. 11-30, as shown in FIG. 11-33 (F), the time reduction number display M4 of "time reduction remaining 99 times" is displayed. Further, in step 059AKS090 of FIG. 11-24, the right-handed instruction display M3 of the aspect shown in FIG. 11-33 (F) is performed.

After that, the variable display is performed a plurality of times in the time saving state. FIG. 11-33 (G) shows an example of the 81st variable display after the time saving symbol is stopped and displayed. In the time saving state, since the game ball can easily enter the second start winning opening, the variable display corresponding to the second special figure is performed, and the hold corresponding to the second special figure is stored. In the example shown in FIG. 11-33 (G), four reserved storages corresponding to the second special figure are stored, and four reserved displays HR1 to HR4 are displayed. Further, an example is shown in which the time saving number display M4 of "time saving remaining 19 times" is displayed. The right-handed instruction display in the mode displayed in FIG. 11-33 (F) ends with the first variable display after the time saving symbol is stopped and displayed, and the second and subsequent times are finished in FIG. 11-33 (G). ), It is displayed as a right-handed instruction display M3 in a mode that does not interfere with other effects.

Then, when the 100th variable display (100th variation in the time saving state) is completed after the time saving symbol is stopped and displayed, the time saving state ends. FIG. 11-33 (H) shows an example in which the decorative symbols 5La, 5Ca, and 5Ra, which are the final stop symbols constituting the non-reach combination, are stopped and displayed in the 100th variable display after the time saving symbol is stopped and displayed. Is shown. After the decorative symbols 5La, 5Ca, and 5Ra, which are the final stop symbols, are stopped and displayed, the fluctuation ends 0.5 seconds after the confirmed symbol display period specified by the symbol confirmation command of 8F00, and the time saving state ends. When the time saving state ends, the right-handed erase command is received from the main board 11 side, so that the process of step 059AKS136 shown in FIG. 11-30 is performed, and right-handed as shown in FIG. 11-33 (H). The instruction display M3 will be erased. In this state, as shown in the figure, four reserved storages corresponding to the second special figure are stored, four of the reserved displays HR1 to HR4 are displayed, and the variable corresponding to the reserved display HR1 is displayed. The remaining hold period is the period from the start of the display to the end of the variable display corresponding to HR4).

Subsequently, when the time saving state ends and the normal state is reached, as shown in FIG. 11-33 (I), the variable display corresponding to the hold display HR1 is started. In the illustrated example, an example is shown in which the variable display result is "loss" (an example that is not "loss (time reduction)" is also shown). In the feature unit 059AK of this embodiment, although it is in the normal state, the special figure display result becomes "miss (time reduction)" in the variable display corresponding to the hold of the second special figure stored at the end of the time saving state. Since the ratio is high (see FIGS. 11-5 (A) and 11-5 (B)), the ratio of being controlled to the time saving state again is high. Therefore, although it is in a normal state during the remaining hold period, the left-handed instruction display is not performed as shown in the figure, and the right-handed instruction display and the left-handed instruction display are repeatedly displayed, which confuses the player. It is prevented from letting you. As shown in FIG. 11-34 (N-2), the left-handed instruction display is performed in the first variable display performed after the end of the remaining hold period.

The variable display is the first variable display in the second special drawing performed after the end of the reduced working hours, and since the return effect is executed and set in the process of step 059AKS108 in FIGS. 11-26, the return effect is produced. When the period is reached, the return effect is executed as shown in FIG. 11-34 (J). In the return effect, for example, depending on whether or not a predetermined mission is cleared, whether or not a hold for which the special figure display result is "missing (time reduction)" is stored (variable corresponding to HR2 to HR4 which is the remaining hold). Whether or not the display result is "missing (time reduction)"), that is, an effect suggesting whether or not the time reduction return symbol is stopped and displayed may be executed. In the case of the return success pattern, the predetermined mission is cleared and the time saving return symbol is stopped and displayed, while in the case of the return failure pattern, the predetermined mission ends in failure and the time saving return symbol is not displayed as stopped. The combination of decorative symbols constituting the reach may be stopped and displayed as the final stop. In addition, there may be a plurality of types of predetermined missions, and the success rate may differ depending on the type of the mission. If the variable display corresponding to the hold display HR1 is "missing (time reduction)", it is determined as Yes in step 059AKS101 of FIGS. 11-26, so that the return effect is not executed, but the return effect is executed. You may try to do it. In this case, the time-saving fanning effect may be executed after the return effect.

When the hold in which the special figure display result is "missing (time reduction)" is stored, that is, when the return is a successful pattern, the process of step 059AKS110 in FIGS. 11-26 changes the display to FIG. 11-34 (K-1). As shown, the combination of decorative symbols including the time reduction return symbol 5Cc is stopped and displayed as the final stop symbol, and it is notified that there is a hold in which the variable display result is "miss (time reduction)" in the stored hold. Will be done. In this example, the case where the variable display result of the variable display corresponding to the hold display HR4 is "loss (time reduction)" (more specifically, the time reduction type of "time reduction D") is shown.

Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 11-34 (L-1), the variable display corresponding to the hold display HR2 is executed. At this time, as shown in the drawing, the time-saving return small symbol M5 that makes it visible that the time-saving return symbol 5Cc is stopped and displayed may be displayed in a manner that does not interfere with other effects. According to this, it becomes possible to visually recognize that the time saving symbol is stopped and displayed during the remaining hold, so that the player can be given a sense of security.

Then, in the variable display corresponding to the hold display HR4, the variable display result of the variable display corresponding to the hold display HR4 is "loss (time reduction)" (the time reduction type is "time reduction D"), so that it can be used as a symbol confirmation command. Upon receiving the symbol confirmation command of 8F04 shown in FIG. 11-15 (B), as shown in FIG. 11-34 (M-1), the time saving symbol 5Cb of the time saving type of "time saving D" is stopped as the final stop symbol. Is displayed. As for the special figure display result, unlike FIG. 11-32 (D-1), a special symbol indicating the number "8" corresponding to the time saving symbol of the time saving type of "time saving D" is displayed as the special figure display result. NS. In the illustrated example, the display mode of the active display AHA is changed to the “green” display mode before the time saving symbol 5Cb is stopped and displayed.

By executing the process of step 059AKS134 in FIG. 11-30 in the state shown in FIG. 11-34 (M-1), as shown in FIG. 11-35 (N-1), the time reduction as the time reduction number notification control is performed. The number display M2 is performed. In this case, since the symbol confirmation command of 8F04 shown in FIG. 11-15 (B) is received as the symbol confirmation command, "time reduction 20 times!" Is displayed as the time reduction number display M2. Then, when 2 seconds, which is the confirmed symbol display period specified by the symbol confirmation command of 8F04, elapses, the fluctuation ends, and as shown in FIG. 11-35 (O), the time is controlled to a new state and a new one. Variable display (variable display corresponding to hold display HL3) is started. Further, by the process of step 059AKS122 in FIG. 11-30, as shown in FIG. 11-35 (O), the time reduction number display M4 of "time reduction remaining 19 times" is displayed. Further, as shown in FIG. 11-35 (O) in step 059AKS090 of FIG. 11-24, the right-handed instruction display M3 in a simple mode, which is less conspicuous than the mode shown in FIG. 11-33 (F), is displayed. Will be done.

On the other hand, when the hold in which the special figure display result is "missing (time reduction)" is not stored, that is, in the case of the return failure pattern, the processing of step 059AKS111 in FIGS. 11-26 causes FIG. 11-34 (K-2). ), The decorative symbols 5La, 5Ca, and 5Ra of the reach combination are stopped and displayed as the final stop symbols, and the fluctuation ends 0.5 seconds after the confirmed symbol display period specified by the symbol confirmation command of 8F00. Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 11-34 (L-2), the variable display corresponding to the hold display HR2 is executed. At this time, unlike FIG. 11-34 (L-1), the short-time return small symbol M5 is not displayed because the return effect was the return failure pattern.

Then, as shown in FIG. 11-34 (M-2), the decorative symbols 5La, 5Ca, and 5Ra, which are the final stop symbols constituting the non-reach combination, are stopped and displayed, and the confirmed symbols specified by the symbol confirmation command of 8F00 are displayed. After 0.5 seconds of the display period, the fluctuation ends and the remaining hold period ends. When the remaining hold period ends, a left-handed instruction command is transmitted from the main board 11 in step 059AKS074 of FIG. 11-18.

Then, when the variable display corresponding to the hold display HL3 is started, the process of step 059AKS088 in FIG. 11-24 causes "return to left-handed!" As shown in FIG. 11-34 (N-2). Left-handed instruction display M6 is displayed. In this way, the left-handed instruction display is performed in the variable display executed next after the variable display corresponding to the hold (remaining hold) of the second special figure remaining after the end of the time reduction is completed.

11-36 is a flowchart showing an example of processing in the information output processing performed in the information output processing in step S23 of FIG. In the processing in the information output processing shown in FIGS. 11-36, for example, a processing for outputting signals such as jackpot information, starting information, and probability fluctuation information supplied to a hall management computer installed outside the pachinko gaming machine 1. I do. When the process in the information output process shown in FIGS. 11-36 is started, the CPU 103 outputs a signal indicating the special figure display result or the normal figure display result as the display signal output process (step S1801). After executing the process of step S1801, the CPU 103 executes the drive signal output process (step S1802) and outputs the drive signals of the solenoid 81 and the solenoid 82.

Subsequently, the CPU 103 executes the external information output process (step S1803), and ends the process in the information output process. In step S1803, the jackpot signal 1 indicating that the jackpot is in progress, the jackpot signal 2 indicating that the jackpot is in the middle or time saving state (the prize is being awarded), the jackpot signal 3 indicating that the time saving state is in progress, and Various signals such as a symbol confirmation signal indicating that the fluctuation has ended are output.

FIG. 11-37 is a timing chart showing the output timings of various signals output in the external information output process in step S1803 of FIG. 11-36. Specifically, FIG. 11-37 (A) shows the output timings of various signals in the case where the time saving state is reached due to the end of the jackpot game state, and FIG. 11-37 (B) shows the time saving state due to the time saving symbol stop. The output timings of various signals in the case of

As shown in FIG. 11-37 (A), when the time is shortened due to the end of the jackpot gaming state, first, a symbol confirmation signal indicating the jackpot symbol stop is output, and thereby (the output of the symbol confirmation signal is stopped). Then, the jackpot signal 1 and the jackpot signal 2 are output at the same timing. Then, the output of the jackpot signal 1 is stopped at the end of the jackpot game state, but the time is shortened at that timing, so that the jackpot signal 3 is output. Then, with the passage of time, a symbol confirmation signal indicating a lost symbol stop is output, and when the symbol confirmation signal indicating a jackpot symbol stop is output again without ending the time saving state, the jackpot signal 1 is output and the jackpot signal 3 is output. Stops output. Since it is a big hit in the time saving state, the output of the big hit signal 2 is continued as shown in the figure. Then, the output of the jackpot signal 1 is stopped at the end of the jackpot game state, but the time is shortened at that timing, so that the jackpot signal 3 is output. After that, with the passage of time, when the final variable display of the predetermined number of time reductions is completed, a symbol confirmation signal indicating a lost symbol stop is output, and the time reduction state ends at the timing when the output of the symbol confirmation signal is stopped. , The outputs of the jackpot signal 2 and the jackpot signal 3 are stopped at the same timing.

On the other hand, as shown in FIGS. 11-37 (B), when the time saving state is reached due to the time saving symbol stop, first, the symbol confirmation signal indicating the time saving symbol stop is output, and thereby (the output of the symbol confirmation signal is stopped). Then, the jackpot signal 2 and the jackpot signal 3 are output at the same timing. Then, with the passage of time, a symbol confirmation signal indicating a lost symbol stop is output, and when a symbol confirmation signal indicating a jackpot symbol stop is output without ending the time saving state, a jackpot is output at the timing when the output of the symbol confirmation signal is stopped. At the same time as the signal 1 is output, the output of the jackpot signal 3 is stopped. Then, the output of the jackpot signal 1 is stopped at the end of the jackpot game state, but the time is shortened again at that timing, so that the jackpot signal 3 is output. As shown in the figure, the jackpot signal 2 is continuously output. After that, with the passage of time, when the final variable display of the predetermined number of time reductions is completed, a symbol confirmation signal indicating a lost symbol stop is output, and the time reduction state ends at the timing when the output of the symbol confirmation signal is stopped. , The outputs of the jackpot signal 2 and the jackpot signal 3 are stopped at the same timing. In this way, since the outputs of the jackpot signal 2 and the jackpot signal 3 are stopped at the same timing, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of deviation and prevent confusion, and the external device is suitable for a time saving state or continuous operation. The state of the villa can be identified. After that, when the symbol confirmation signal indicating the time saving symbol stop is output again, the jackpot signal 2 and the jackpot signal 3 are output at the same timing when the output of the symbol confirmation signal is stopped.

As described above, according to the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the feature unit 059AK in this embodiment, the following effects can be obtained.

In the process of step S1240 shown in FIG. 11-4, the CPU 103 can determine "loss (time reduction)" as the special figure display result regardless of whether or not the game state is the time reduction state, and the special figure display result. When "Loss (time reduction)" (special display result) is derived and displayed as, in the normal state, while controlling to the time reduction state (travel-specific state) in the next special figure game (variable display), the time reduction When it is in the state, the control regarding the game state based on the derivation and display of the "loss (time reduction)" is not performed (the new time reduction control is not performed). Further, the effect control CPU 120 reduces the time as the final stop symbol of the decorative symbol in step 059AKS106 of FIGS. 11-26 in the normal state when "loss (time reduction)" is derived and displayed as the special figure display result. On the other hand, when the time is shortened, the final stop symbol constituting the reach combination is stopped and displayed in step 059AKS111 of FIGS. 11-26. According to this, it is possible to perform control according to the game state when the special display result is displayed, and it is possible to improve the game interest.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 11-32 (B-2) and (D-1), there is a "loss (time reduction)" (special display result) depending on whether the game state is the normal state or the time reduction state. The special figure display result of is a common display result (a special figure display result indicating the number "1" corresponding to the time saving type of "time saving A"), while the variable display result of the decorative symbol is in the game state. In the normal state, the time saving symbol is stopped and displayed as the final stop symbol of the decorative symbol in step 059AKS106 of FIG. 11-26, while in the time saving state, the reach is reached in step 059AKS111 of FIG. 11-26. The final stop symbol that composes the combination is displayed as a stop. According to this, it is possible to prevent a deterioration of the game interest when the special display result is displayed in the special state.

Further, in the process of step 059AKS104 of FIGS. 11-26, the execution setting of the time saving fanning effect for inciting whether or not the time saving symbol indicating that the time saving symbol is controlled to be controlled to the time saving state from the next variable display is stopped is set. Therefore, the effect control CPU 120 can execute a time-saving fanning effect. Then, the effect control CPU 120 does not perform the process of step 059AKS104 when the gaming state is in the normal state, and does not perform the process of step 059AKS104 when the game state is in the time saving state. Therefore, in the case of the time saving state (special state), the time saving fanning effect is not executed. According to this, it is possible to prevent a deterioration of the game interest when the special display result is displayed in the special state.

Further, when the "loss (time reduction)" (special display result) is derived and displayed as the special figure display result, the CPU 103 is in the normal state, as shown in FIG. 11-15, in the process of step 059AKS043. While the decorative symbol stop command with the fixed time shown in FIG. 11-15 (B) is transmitted, if Yes is determined in step 059AKS041, the decorative symbol stop command with the fixed time set to 0.5 seconds is transmitted. That is, when "missing (time reduction)" (special display result) is derived and displayed as the special figure display result, the variable display result is displayed and confirmed depending on whether it is in the normal state or the special state. Time (fixed time) is different. According to this, it is possible to prevent a deterioration of the game interest when the special display result is displayed in the special state.

Further, in the process of step S1240 shown in FIG. 11-4, the CPU 103 can determine "loss (time reduction)" as the special figure display result regardless of whether or not the game state is the time saving state. When "Loss (time reduction)" (special display result) is derived and displayed as the display result, when it is in the normal state, it is controlled to the time reduction state (travel-specific state) in the next special figure game (variable display). , In the time saving state, the control regarding the game state based on the derivation and display of the "loss (time saving)" is not performed (the new time saving control is not performed). Then, as shown in FIG. 11-5, in the first special figure display result determination table and the second special figure display result determination table, the second special figure display result determination table "misses" the special figure display result. The determination data is assigned so that the probability of being determined to control the time reduction state from the next variable display as "time reduction)" is high. Further, the effect control CPU 120 returns based on whether or not the hold of "loss (time saving)" is stored in the hold stored at the end of the time saving state by the process of step 059AKS108 of FIGS. 11-26. It is possible to execute the production. Then, the effect control CPU 120 can display a right-handed instruction in the process of step 059AKS090 in FIG. 11-24, and until it receives the left-handed instruction command transmitted in step 059AKS074 in FIG. 11-18, that is, The left-handed instruction display is not performed until all the variable displays corresponding to the hold (remaining hold) of the second special figure stored at the end of the time saving state are finished. According to this, it is possible to perform control according to the game state when the special display result is displayed, and it is possible to improve the game interest.

Further, the effect control CPU 120 can display the left-handed instruction display in step 059AKS088 of FIG. 11-24 by receiving the left-handed instruction command in the normal state. Then, the left-handed instruction command is transmitted in step 059AKS074 of FIG. 11-18, that is, when all the variable displays corresponding to the hold of the second special figure stored at the end of the time saving state are completed. The effect control CPU 120 displays the left-handed instruction display in step 059AKS088 of FIG. 11-24 in the variable display performed after receiving the left-handed instruction command, that is, after the variable display corresponding to the remaining hold is completed. .. According to this, it is possible to perform a suitable launch notification, and the game can proceed smoothly.

Further, the CPU 103 transmits different right-handed instruction commands depending on whether or not there is a remaining hold period, as in the processes of step 059AKS054 and step 059AKS057 of FIG. 11-16. Then, on the side of the effect control CPU 120, right-handed instruction display in a mode corresponding to the received command is performed in step 059AKS090 of FIG. 11-24. According to this, it is possible to prevent the player from being annoyed and deteriorating the game interest.

In the return effect, the effect control CPU 120 stores, for example, whether or not a hold for which the special figure display result is "missing (time reduction)" is stored depending on whether or not a predetermined mission is cleared (HR2 which is a remaining hold). -Whether or not the variable display result corresponding to HR4 is "loss (time reduction)"), that is, whether or not the time reduction return symbol is stopped and displayed. The return effect includes a return effect of the return success pattern and a return effect of the return failure pattern, both of which aim to clear a predetermined mission to determine whether or not the time is shortened again. The combination of decorative symbols that are stopped and displayed differs depending on whether or not the predetermined mission is cleared as a result of executing the production). According to this, it is possible to attract the player's attention after performing a common effect.

Further, as shown in FIG. 11-7, when the variable display result of the remaining hold is "loss (time reduction)", the CPU 103 determines "time reduction C" or "time reduction D" as the time reduction type. Then, in the process of step 059AKS113 of FIG. 11-27, the effect control CPU 120 determines as a time-saving fanning effect pattern that executes a time-saving fanning effect of different patterns according to the time-saving type, as shown in FIG. 11-28. That is, the time-saving fanning effect executed when the variable display result corresponding to the first special figure in the normal state becomes "loss (time reduction)" and the variable display result corresponding to the second special figure on hold are "loss". (Time saving) ”is executed, and a different pattern of time saving fanning effect is executed. According to this, since different patterns of production are executed depending on the situation, it is possible to improve the game entertainment.

Further, the CPU 103 transmits a right-handed erase command in the variable display of the time saving end times by the process of step 059AKS066 in FIG. 11-17. Then, at the end of the variable display of the reduced working hours end time, the effect control CPU 120 erases the right-handed instruction display by the process of step 059AKS136 in FIG. 11-30 based on the command. Therefore, the right-handed instruction display is erased during the remaining hold period. Further, the CPU 103 transmits different right-handed instruction commands depending on whether or not there is a remaining hold period, as in the processes of step 059AKS054 and step 059AKS057 of FIG. 11-16. Then, on the side of the effect control CPU 120, in the first variable display controlled to the time saving state (variable display performed after the variable display in which the time saving symbol is stopped and displayed), the said in step 059AKS090 of FIG. 11-24. A right-handed instruction is displayed according to the received command. According to this, it is possible to perform a suitable launch notification, and the game can proceed smoothly.

Further, the CPU 103 has a big hit signal 1 indicating that it is in a big hit, a big hit signal 2 indicating that it is in a big hit or a time saving state (it is in a special prize), and a time saving by the process of step S1803 in FIG. 11-36. Various signals such as a jackpot signal 3 indicating that the state is in the state and a symbol confirmation signal indicating that the fluctuation has been completed can be output to, for example, a hall management computer installed outside the pachinko gaming machine 1. Then, when the time saving state is reached due to the time saving symbol stop, as shown in FIG. 11-37 (B), a symbol confirmation signal indicating the time saving symbol stop is output, and a big hit signal is output at the timing when the output of the symbol confirmation signal is stopped. Is output. According to this, it is possible to preferably identify the time saving state and the consecutive villa state with an external device.

Further, as shown in FIG. 11-37 (B), the CPU 103 outputs the jackpot signal 2 and the jackpot signal 3 at the same timing at the timing when the output of the symbol confirmation signal corresponding to the end of the time saving state is stopped. Stop. According to this, it is possible to preferably identify the time saving state and the consecutive villa state with an external device.

Further, the CPU 103 determines the fluctuation pattern according to the fluctuation pattern determination table shown in FIGS. 11-12. As shown in the figure, when the variable display result is "loss (time reduction)" (special display result) (when the loss fluctuation pattern determination table when the time reduction start flag is on is selected), the super reach A with the highest jackpot expectation is selected. The decision value is not assigned, and the decision value is assigned so that the rate of "loss (time reduction)" differs depending on the type of super reach to be executed. Then, the CPU 103 transmits different right-handed instruction commands depending on whether or not there is a remaining hold period, as in the processes of step 059AKS054 and step 059AKS057 of FIG. 11-16. Then, on the side of the effect control CPU 120, in the first variable display controlled to the time saving state (variable display performed after the variable display in which the time saving symbol is stopped and displayed), the said in step 059AKS090 of FIG. 11-24. A right-handed instruction is displayed according to the received command. According to this, it is possible to perform control according to the game state when the special display result is displayed, and it is possible to improve the game interest.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 11-11 and 11-12, when the reach effect of Super Reach B or Super Reach C is executed, it becomes a big hit, it becomes a loss (time reduction), or it simply becomes a loss. The determined value is assigned so as to obtain a plurality of variable display results. According to this, the variation of the production result is increased, and the game entertainment can be improved.

Further, the CPU 103 transmits a variation pattern designation command indicating the determined variation pattern and a display result designation command indicating the determined special figure display result (variable display result), and the effect control CPU 120 performs an effect based on these commands. .. The effect control CPU 120 determines that the variation pattern is such that the reach effect of the super reach B is performed by the received variation pattern specification command, and even if it is determined as No in step S552 of FIG. 11-24, the display is displayed. Based on the result designation command, whether or not to execute the processes of step 059AKS104 and step 059AKS106 differs depending on whether the determination is Yes or No in 059AKS101 of FIGS. 11-26. That is, even when a variation pattern command of common effect contents such as executing the reach effect of super reach B or super reach C is received, a different effect is executed depending on the content of the display result designation command. According to this, the variation of the production result is increased, and the game entertainment can be improved.

Further, in the process of step 059AKS104 of FIGS. 11-26, the execution setting of the time-saving fanning effect (special effect) that fuels whether or not the time-saving symbol indicating that the time-saving symbol is controlled to be controlled to the time-saving state from the next variable display is stopped and displayed. By performing the above, the effect control CPU 120 can execute the time-saving fanning effect. Then, the effect control CPU 120 executes the time-saving fanning effect after executing the reach effect common to the case where the time-saving fanning effect is executed and the case where the time-saving fanning effect is not executed. According to this, since the special production is executed, it is possible to improve the game entertainment.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 11-12, since the ratio of the variable display result to "loss (time reduction)" differs depending on the type of reach effect to be executed, the time reduction fanning effect is also executed in the same manner. The execution rate differs depending on the type of reach effect to be performed. According to this, it is possible to prevent the special effect from being excessively executed, and it is possible to maintain the expectation that a specific display result will be obtained.

Further, as shown in FIG. 11-12 (B), with respect to the fluctuation pattern of the time saving gap in which the variable display result does not become "loss (time saving)" even if the time saving fanning effect is executed, the jackpot expectation degree such as Super Reach C is obtained. A low reach effect is performed. Therefore, the rate at which the time-saving fanning effect is executed differs depending on the type of reach effect to be executed, and the rate at which the time-saving symbol is stopped and displayed as a result of executing the time-saving fanning effect also differs. According to this, it is possible to prevent the special effect from being excessively executed, and it is possible to maintain the expectation that a specific display result will be obtained.

Further, in the effect control CPU 120, the rate at which the time saving symbol is stopped and displayed differs depending on which display mode the active display display mode changes, even if the reach effect is the same type of super reach. Change the display mode of the active display. According to this, it is possible to prevent the special effect from being excessively executed, and it is possible to maintain the expectation that a specific display result will be obtained.

Further, the CPU 103 transmits a variation pattern designation command indicating the determined variation pattern and a display result designation command indicating the determined special figure display result (variable display result), and the effect control CPU 120 performs an effect based on these commands. .. Even if the contents of the received display result specification command are different, the effect control CPU 120 can display the special figure display result (variable) if the received variation pattern specification command is a variation pattern that performs the reach effect of Super Reach B. Regardless of the display result), the common reach effect of Super Reach B is executed. According to this, the effect can be preferably executed.

Further, as shown in FIG. 11-7, the number of time reductions controlled in the time reduction state differs depending on the time reduction type, and as shown in FIG. 11-12, the super reach effect executed according to the time reduction type The proportions are different. Further, as shown in FIGS. 11-28, the pattern of the time-saving fanning effect to be executed differs depending on the time-saving type. According to this, it is possible to attract the attention of the player because the number of time reductions thereafter differs depending on the effect to be executed.

Further, the CPU 103 transmits the display result designation command in step S268 of FIG. 11-8, and sets the transmission of the decorative symbol stop command in step 059AKS021 of FIG. 11-15. The effect control CPU 120 sets the execution of the effect based on the content of the received display result specification command in the stop symbol setting process of FIGS. 11-26, and receives the received symbol confirmation command in the process of step 059AKS133 of FIG. 11-30. Set the number of time reductions specified by. According to this, the effect control can be preferably performed.

Further, the effect control CPU 120 confirms the contents of the effect control command reception buffer provided in the RAM 122 in the process of step 059AKS090A in FIG. 11-24, thereby transmitting the display result specification command and the variation pattern specification command. When it is judged whether or not the command can be received normally, and when the command cannot be received normally, the missing time processing shown in FIG. 11-25 is executed and either the display result specification command or the variation pattern specification command is missed. , It is prohibited to perform a time-saving effect such as a time-saving fanning effect, such as stopping and displaying a predetermined decorative pattern at the time of missing. According to this, it is possible to suitably perform the production while preventing the deterioration of the game interest.

On the other hand, when it is determined that the effect control CPU 120 could not be normally received in the process of step 059AKS090A in FIG. 11-24, the fluctuation pattern designation command can be normally received and is specified by the fluctuation pattern designation command. When the fluctuation pattern is a fluctuation pattern for determining the time reduction or a fluctuation pattern for the time reduction, the stop symbol setting process is executed in step 059AKS095 of FIG. 11-25 to execute an effect related to the time reduction state such as a time reduction fanning effect. It is possible. According to this, it is possible to suitably perform the production while preventing the deterioration of the game interest.

Further, the effect control CPU 120 specifies the number of time reductions by the received symbol confirmation command in the process of step 059AKS133 in FIG. 11-30. Then, when the symbol confirmation command cannot be received normally, the special time reduction number notification control that displays "??? times" as the notification of the time reduction number in the process of step 059AKS139 is performed to execute the time reduction number notification. Restrict. According to this, it is possible to suitably perform the production while preventing the deterioration of the game interest.

Further, the effect control CPU 120 can execute the hold display change effect in the read-ahead notice setting process shown in FIGS. 11-22. Then, in the hold storage currently stored in step 059AKS082, the variable display result is a hold that becomes a "big hit", a hold that becomes a "loss (time reduction)", or a hold that is a "loss" and the fluctuation pattern is "time reduction". When the hold of the fluctuation pattern is stored, the hold change determination table at the time of limitation shown in FIG. 11-23 (B) is selected, and the hold display change effect is executed. That is, when a hold whose variable display result is "missing (time reduction)" is stored in the currently stored hold storage, the execution of the hold display change effect is restricted. According to this, it is possible to perform control according to the game state when the special display result is displayed, and it is possible to improve the game interest.

Further, in step 059AKS082, the variable display result is "big hit" in the hold storage currently stored, the hold is "loss (time reduction)", or the fluctuation pattern is "loss" and the fluctuation pattern is "time reduction". When the hold of the fluctuation pattern is stored, the hold change determination table at the time of limitation shown in FIG. 11-23 (B) is selected and the hold display change effect is executed. Even when the hold in which the display result is "big hit" is stored, as in the case where the hold in which the variable display result is "miss (shorter time)" is stored in the currently stored hold storage, FIG. Select the hold change determination table at the time of restriction shown in -23 (B) to restrict the execution of the hold display change effect. According to this, it is possible to suppress the deviation of the production due to the transition of the state, and it is possible to prevent the deterioration of the game interest.

Further, in step 059AKS082, the variable display result is "big hit" in the hold storage currently stored, the hold is "loss (time reduction)", or the fluctuation pattern is "loss" and the fluctuation pattern is "time reduction". When the hold of the fluctuation pattern is stored, the hold change determination table at the time of limitation shown in FIG. 11-23 (B) is selected and the hold display change effect is executed. Even when the display result is "missing" and the holding of the fluctuation pattern whose fluctuation pattern is "time saving" is stored, the execution of the hold display change effect is restricted. According to this, it is possible to prevent a deterioration of the game interest when the production related to the state transition is performed.

As shown in FIG. 11-23 (B), the effect control CPU 120 does not execute the hold display change effect when the hold display change effect is restricted, or even if the hold display change effect is executed, the hold display change of the display mode of "blue" is changed. Perform the production. That is, the hold display change effect indicating the degree of expectation higher than the display mode of "green" is not executed. According to this, it is possible to suppress the deviation of the production due to the transition of the state, and it is possible to prevent the deterioration of the game interest.

Further, as shown in FIG. 11-23 (B), the effect control CPU 120 does not execute a hold display change effect of a type that changes to a display mode such as "green" or "red" when the hold display change effect is restricted. .. According to this, since the execution of the advance notice effect of a specific type is restricted, it is possible to prevent the player from deteriorating the interest in the game without giving the player a sense of unnecessary expectation.

(Modification example of feature part 059AK)
In the above embodiment, as shown in FIG. 11-5, an example is shown in which the time saving symbol as a special figure display result is a part of "loss", but this is an example. For example, as shown in FIGS. 11-38, a part of the small hit symbol may be a time-saving symbol. In this case, the time saving control may be performed after the end of the small hit game state, and the right-handed instruction display or the like may be performed in the first variable display performed after the end of the small hit game state. Further, as in the above embodiment, even when the small hit symbol which is the time saving symbol is stopped and displayed again in the special drawing game in the time saving state, the time saving state is not newly controlled, and the effect control CPU 120 is used. Instead of the small hit symbol including the time saving symbol, the combination of the decorative symbols constituting the small hit may be simply stopped and displayed.

Further, in the above embodiment, when all the variable displays corresponding to the remaining hold are completed, the left-handed instruction command is transmitted in the process of step 059AKS074 in FIG. 11-18, and the remaining hold is performed by the effect control CPU 120. An example of performing a left-handed instruction display in the first variable display performed after the end of the variable display corresponding to the above is shown. There may be a second aspect that is inconspicuous to the player, and the left-handed instruction display of the second aspect may be performed in the first variable display that is performed after the end of the variable display corresponding to the remaining hold. The left-handed instruction display is performed for 5 seconds each time from the reception of the left-handed instruction command to the time when the variable display is performed four times, for example, from the second aspect with the lapse of time. It may change to the first aspect. Further, the left-handed instruction display is not limited to a simple display, and may include voice, lighting of a lamp, and the like (that is, left-handed notification for notifying left-handed). Then, for example, in the first aspect, the other output sound is erased and the sound for notifying the left-handed is output, while in the second aspect, the sound for notifying the left-handed is output without erasing the other output sound. do it.

Further, in the above embodiment, an example in which the return effect is performed when the variable display (variation) corresponding to the first (first) second special figure performed after the end of the reduced working hours is shown is shown, but this is an example. Is. The execution timing of the return effect is not limited to the first variable display after the end of the reduced working hours. , Any of the timings of the 1st to 3rd variable displays performed after the end of the reduced working hours may be determined by lottery as the execution timing of the return effect. In addition, after the return effect of the return failure pattern is executed, the pattern is switched to the return success pattern, and after the return effect of the return failure pattern is executed, the return effect of the return success pattern is performed in the next variable display. The return effect may be executed a plurality of times until a success pattern is reached over the display.

In the above embodiment, an example in which the pattern of the time saving fanning effect executed according to the time saving type is different, that is, when the variable display result corresponding to the remaining hold is "missing (time saving)" (time saving of time saving C or D). An example is shown in which the pattern of the time saving fanning effect is different depending on the type and the case where the variable display result of the first special figure in the normal state is "loss (time saving)" (time saving type of time saving A or B). This is an example. There are cases where the variable display result corresponding to the remaining hold is "loss (time reduction)" and cases where the variable display result of the first special figure in the normal state is "loss (time reduction)". , The pattern of the time-saving fanning effect may be common.

Further, in the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 11-15, when the variable display result corresponding to the remaining hold is "loss (time reduction)" (time reduction type of time reduction C or D), or in the normal state. An example in which the time (confirmation time) from the display of the variable display result to the confirmation is different depending on the case where the variable display result of the first special figure is "loss (time reduction)" (time reduction type of time reduction A or B). Is shown, but this is just an example. When the variable display result corresponding to the remaining hold is "loss (time reduction)" (time reduction type of time reduction C or D), the variable display result of the first special figure in the normal state is "loss (time reduction)". The fixed time may be the same depending on the case (time saving type A or B). According to this, it is possible to suppress an increase in control data.

For example, the fixed time when the variable display result corresponding to the remaining hold is "loss (time reduction)" is the same as the case where the variable display result of the first special figure is "loss (time reduction)" in the normal state. It may be time. According to this, by lengthening the period between the normal state and the time saving state, it is possible to clearly notify the player that the time saving state will be achieved.

In addition, when the variable display result corresponding to the remaining hold is "loss (time reduction)" (time reduction type of time reduction C or D), the variable display result of the first special figure in the normal state is "loss (time reduction)". An example (FIGS. 11-35 (N-1) and 11-33 (E)) of notifying the number of times of time reduction in a common mode in the fixed time in the case of (time reduction type A or B) is shown. However, these may be in different modes.

Further, in the above embodiment, an example is shown in which the right-handed instruction display is deleted after the end of the time saving state and the right-handed instruction display is not performed during the remaining hold period, but this is an example. The right-handed instruction display is not limited to a simple display, but may include voice, lighting of a lamp, etc. (that is, it may be a right-handed notification that notifies right-handed), and an image is displayed during the remaining hold period. The right-handed lamp indicating right-handedness may be turned on without displaying and outputting the sound in the device 5.

Further, in the above embodiment, as shown in FIG. 11-37 (B), when the final variable display of the predetermined number of time reductions is completed, a symbol confirmation signal indicating the loss symbol stop is output, and the symbol confirmation is performed. Since the time saving state ends at the timing when the signal output is stopped, an example is shown in which the output with the jackpot signal 3 is stopped at the timing, but this is an example. For example, the variable display result corresponding to the hold (remaining hold) of the second special figure stored at the end of the reduced working hours has a high ratio of "missing (shortening the working hours)". The output of the jackpot signal 3 may not be stopped until the variable display corresponding to the hold is completed. The same applies to the jackpot signal 2. According to this, it is possible to preferably identify the time saving state and the consecutive villa state with an external device.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, an example is shown in which a time-saving fanning effect is performed after the reach effect of the super reach, and it is suggested whether or not the time-saving symbol is stopped, but this is an example. For example, as a result of the reach effect, the results of big hit (including small hit), time saving symbol stop, and loss may be displayed. According to this, the variation of the execution result of the reach effect is increased, and the game entertainment can be improved.

Further, in the above embodiment, when the variable display result is "loss (time reduction)", an example of adding the time reduction fanning effect period to the fluctuation pattern is shown, but in addition to this, for example, the "revival jackpot" is variable. A display result is provided, the same fluctuation pattern as when the variable display result is "missing (shorter time)" can be selected, the revival effect period to be executed after the reach effect is added (for example, 20 seconds), and a big hit is configured after the revival effect. The symbol (special symbol and corresponding decorative symbol) to be displayed may be stopped and displayed. According to this, the variation of the production is increased and the game entertainment can be improved. Further, when the variable display result is "revival jackpot", the process of adding the revival effect period may be executed after step S262 in FIG. 11-8, and the variation of the effect can be increased by a simple process. can.

In the above-described embodiment, after the effect of inciting whether or not the variable display result is a big hit is performed by the reach effect of the super reach, the effect of inciting whether or not the time-saving symbol is stopped and displayed is performed by the time-saving fanning effect. In addition to this, for example, in the time saving fanning effect, in addition to whether or not the time saving symbol is stopped and displayed, whether or not the jackpot symbol is stopped and displayed is more advantageous than the time saving. May be notified. According to this, the expectation that a specific display result can be obtained can be maintained.

Further, in the above embodiment, the symbol confirmation command is not normally received in steps S809 and 059AKS137 of FIG. 11-30, and the special symbol display result (variable display result) is the symbol in "loss (time reduction)". If it is a confirmation command, an example of limiting the notification of the number of time reductions by performing the special time reduction notification control that displays "??? times" as the notification of the number of time reductions in step 059AKS139 is shown. The background image may be changed according to the number of time reductions so that the player can specify the number of time reductions to some extent even when the special time reduction notification control is performed. Specifically, the background designation command is transmitted from the main board 11 side according to the remaining number of time reductions, and the background image specified by the received background designation command is displayed on the effect control board 12 side. do it. According to this, since the player can specify the number of time reductions to some extent from the background image, it is possible to prevent the deterioration of the game interest.

Further, each time the variable display is executed, the main board 11 side sends a time reduction number designation command indicating the remaining time reduction number, and the effect control board 12 side sends the remaining time reduction number according to the time reduction number designation command. The number of times may be notified. According to this, even when the special time reduction notification control is performed, the player can specify the remaining time reduction number of times, so that it is possible to prevent a deterioration of the game interest. Further, for example, when the number of time reductions is 100, a special fluctuation pattern may be transmitted from the main board 11 side to the effect control board 12 side at the timing when the remaining 50 times are reached. On the side, the remaining 50 times of time saving notification may be performed according to the reception of the special fluctuation pattern. According to this, even when the special time reduction notification control is performed, the player can specify the remaining time reduction number of times, so that it is possible to prevent a deterioration of the game interest.

In the above embodiment, the variable display result is "big hit" in the hold memory currently stored in step 059AKS082 of FIG. 11-22, "loss (time reduction)", or "loss". When the hold of the change pattern whose change pattern is "time saving" is stored, an example of selecting the hold change determination table at the time of limitation shown in FIG. 11-23 (B) and executing the hold display change effect, that is, , When a hold whose variable display result is "missing (time reduction)" is stored in the currently stored hold storage, or when a hold whose variable display result is "big hit" is stored, FIG. 11- An example is shown in which the common limited-time hold change determination table shown in 23 (B) is selected and the execution of the hold display change effect is restricted, but this is an example. The hold that the variable display result is "missing (time saving)" is stored in the hold storage that is currently stored, and the hold that the variable display result is "big hit" is stored. The execution of the hold display change effect may be restricted by selecting the hold change determination table at the time of restriction. For example, on the one hand, the pre-reading notice effect of the hold display change effect may be executed, and on the other hand, the pre-reading notice effect of the dialogue notice may be executed. In this case, it is sufficient to execute a kind of production with a low degree of expectation. In addition, if a hold that causes the variable display result to be "missing (time reduction)" is stored in the currently stored hold memory, the hold display change effect is not executed and the variable display result becomes a "big hit". When the hold is stored, it may be determined whether or not the hold change effect is executed based on the hold change determination table which does not have the display mode of "green" or more shown in FIG. 11-23 (B).

Further, in the above embodiment, a hold in which the variable display result becomes a "big hit" in the hold storage currently stored in step 059AKS082 in FIG. When the hold of the change pattern of "Loss" and the change pattern of "Time saving" is stored, select the hold change determination table at the time of limitation shown in FIG. 11-23 (B), and expect the degree of expectation to be "green" or higher. An example is shown in which the hold display change effect is not executed, but this is an example. For example, in addition to the hold display change effect as the look-ahead notice effect, a plurality of types of look-ahead notice effects such as a dialogue notice and a look-ahead zone notice can be executed, and if Yes is determined in step 059AKS082 of FIG. 11-22, the look-ahead notice effect is performed. The look-ahead notice effect of the zone notice type may not be executed. According to this, it is possible to prevent the player's attention from being distracted from the hold stored before the read-ahead notice target.

In the above embodiment, the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B are composed of 7-segment LEDs and the like, and the special symbols are numbers indicating "0" to "9" and "-". An example represented by a lighting pattern or the like is shown, but this is an example. The first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B are composed of eight LEDs, for example, as shown in FIGS. 11-39, and the special symbol is represented by a lighting combination of these eight LEDs. May be good. Specifically, as shown in the figure, when the variable display result is "big hit" or "small hit", it is represented by lighting of three of the eight LEDs, and the variable display result is "missing (time saving)". In the case of "" and "missing", it may be represented by lighting of two LEDs.

Further, in the above embodiment, after the state shown in FIG. 11-34 (L-1), as shown in FIG. 11-34 (M-1), “time saving D” is performed at the central portion of the image display device 5. An example is shown in which the time-saving symbol 5Cb of the time-saving type is displayed as a final stop symbol, and this is an example. For example, as shown in FIG. 11-40, after the state shown in FIG. 11-40 (L-1) (similar to FIG. 11-34 (L-1)), the time saving return symbol 5Cc is stopped and displayed. Since the small working-time return symbol M5 to be visible is displayed and it has already been notified that the short-time working symbol will stop during the remaining holding period, as shown in FIG. 11-40 (M-3), the decorative symbol is displayed. The variable display of the above may be reduced and displayed (referred to as the reduced symbol M8), and the result display M7, which is the result of whether or not the time-saving symbol is stopped and displayed, may be displayed large in the center of the image display device 5. According to this, the game can be sharpened and the game can be improved. Since it has already been notified that the time-saving symbol will stop during the remaining hold period, the execution of the active change effect that changes the display mode of the active display may be restricted during the remaining hold period. In addition to not executing, the restriction may include executing in a mode with low expectation, or executing in an inconspicuous manner such as making the display smaller or transparent.

(Explanation of Means Concerning Feature 059AK)
(1) The gaming machine related to the feature unit 059AK is
It is a gaming machine (for example, pachinko gaming machine 1) that can perform variable display and control to an advantageous state that is advantageous to the player when a specific display result is displayed as the variable display result.
A state control means that can control a special state in which variable display is more likely to be executed than in a normal state (for example, CPU 103 that executes the process of step 059AKS025) and
It is provided with an effect execution means (for example, an effect control CPU 120 that executes the process of step S172) capable of executing an effect corresponding to the variable display.
The state control means
When a special display result different from the specific display result (for example, a special figure display result of "loss (time reduction)") is displayed as the variable display result in the normal state, the normal display result is based on the special display result. Control from the state to the special state (for example, execute the process of step 059AKS025).
When the special display result is displayed as the variable display result in the special state, the control based on the special display result is not performed (for example, when Yes is determined in step 059AKS006, the process of step 059AKS006A is not executed).
When the special display result is displayed as the variable display result, the effect executing means can execute different effects depending on whether it is in the normal state or the special state (for example, the process of step 059AKS092). Execute, etc.),
It is characterized by that.

According to such a configuration, it is possible to perform control according to the game state when the special display result is displayed, and it is possible to improve the game interest.

(2) In the gaming machine described in (1) above,
As the variable display, the identification information is variably displayed, and the identification information for production is variably displayed in response to the variable display of the identification information (for example, the variable display of the first special figure and the second special figure and the decorative pattern. Variable display, etc.),
When the special display result is displayed as the variable display result, the identification information common to the normal state and the special state is displayed (for example, FIGS. 11-32 (B-2)) and As shown in (D-1), the special figure display result as "loss (time reduction)" (special display result) is common to the case where the game state is the normal state and the case where the time is shortened. (Special figure display result indicating the number "1" which is the time saving symbol of the time saving type of "time saving A")), the identification information for the effect different between the normal state and the special state. (For example, regarding the variable display result of the decorative symbol, when the game state is the normal state, the time saving symbol is stopped and displayed as the final stop symbol of the decorative symbol in step 059AKS106 of FIGS. 11-26, while the time saving is shortened. When it is in the state, the final stop symbol constituting the reach combination is stopped and displayed in step 059AKS111 in FIGS. 11-26).
You may do so.

According to such a configuration, it is possible to prevent a deterioration of the game interest when the special display result is displayed in the special state.

(3) In the gaming machine according to (1) or (2) above.
In the normal state, the effect executing means can execute a special effect suggesting that the special display result is displayed as the variable display result (for example, the effect control CPU 120 is No. 1 in step 059AKS102. If it is determined that, the process of step 059AKS104 can be executed, etc.), if it is in the special state, the special effect is not executed (for example, if it is determined that Yes in step 059AKS102, the process of step 059AKS104 is not executed, etc.) ),
You may do so.

According to such a configuration, it is possible to prevent a deterioration of the game interest when the special display result is displayed in the special state.

(4) In the gaming machine according to any one of (1) to (3) above.
When the special display result is displayed as the variable display result, the time from the display of the variable display result to the confirmation is different between the normal state and the special state (for example, the normal state). If so, while the decorative symbol stop command for the fixed time shown in FIG. 11-15 (B) is transmitted in the process of step 059AKS043, if Yes is determined in step 059AKS041, the fixed time is set to 0.5 seconds. (Send a command to stop the decorative pattern, etc.),
You may do so.

According to such a configuration, it is possible to prevent a deterioration of the game interest when the special display result is displayed in the special state.

(Explanation of means relating to feature unit 060AK)
The feature unit 059AK includes the following feature unit 060AK.
(1) The gaming machine related to the feature unit 060AK is
It is a gaming machine (for example, pachinko gaming machine 1) that can perform variable display and control to an advantageous state that is advantageous to the player when a specific display result is displayed as the variable display result.
A state control means that can control a special state in which variable display is more likely to be executed than in a normal state (for example, CPU 103 that executes the process of step 059AKS025) and
It is provided with an effect execution means (for example, an effect control CPU 120 that executes the process of step S172) capable of executing an effect corresponding to the variable display.
The state control means
When a special display result different from the specific display result (for example, a special figure display result of "loss (time reduction)") is displayed as the variable display result in the normal state, the normal display result is based on the special display result. Control from the state to the special state (for example, execute the process of step 059AKS025).
When the special display result is displayed as the variable display result in the special state, the control based on the special display result is not performed (for example, when Yes is determined in step 059AKS006, the process of step 059AKS006A is not executed).
As the variable display, the first identification information and the second identification information are variably displayed, and the effect identification information is variably displayed in response to the variable display of the first identification information and the variable display of the second identification information. The variable display result of the second identification information has a higher ratio of displaying the special display result than the variable display result of the first identification information (for example, the first special figure display result determination table and the second special). In the figure display result determination table, the probability that the second special figure display result determination table is determined to control the special figure display result from the next variable display to the time reduction state as "loss (time reduction)" is higher. , Decision data is assigned, etc.),
The effect executing means is
It is possible to execute different effects depending on whether or not the information about the variable display stored at the end of the special state includes the information that the variable display result becomes the special display result (for example, for effect control). The CPU 120 can execute the process of step 059AKS108, etc.),
The second identification information stored at the end of the special state by notifying that the game medium should be launched to a specific path in the game area during control to the special state (for example, executing the process of step 059AKS090). The information related to the variable display of is stored at the end of the special state depending on whether the variable display result includes the information that becomes the special display result or the information that becomes the special display result. Until the variable display corresponding to the information related to the variable display of the second identification information is completed, the notification that the game medium should be launched to the normal route different from the specific route is not performed (for example, right in the process of step 059AKS090). The hitting instruction display is possible, and until the left hitting instruction command transmitted in step 059AKS074 is received, that is, until all the variable displays corresponding to the hold of the second special figure stored at the end of the time saving state are finished. Do not display left-handed instructions, etc.),
It is characterized by that.

According to such a configuration, it is possible to perform control according to the game state when the special display result is displayed, and it is possible to improve the game interest.

(2) In the gaming machine described in (1) above,
The effect executing means is
Notifying that the game medium should be launched to the normal path in the advantageous state and the normal state different from the special state (for example, the effect control CPU 120 that executes the process of step 059AKS088) is performed.
In the variable display of the first identification information, which is executed first after the variable display corresponding to the information related to the variable display of the second identification information stored at the end of the special state is completed, the game medium to the normal route. (In the variable display performed after receiving the left-handed instruction command, that is, after the variable display corresponding to the remaining hold is completed, the left-handed instruction display is displayed in step 059AKS088, etc.).
You may do so.

According to such a configuration, suitable launch notification is possible, and the game can proceed smoothly.

(3) The gaming machine according to (1) or (2) above.
The effect executing means is stored when the special display result is displayed as the variable display result of the first identification information in the advantageous state and the normal state different from the special state, and when the special state ends. When the special display result is displayed as the variable display result corresponding to the information related to the variable display of the second identification information, the notification that the game medium should be launched to the specific route performed during control in the special state. The mode is different (for example, right-handed instruction display of the mode according to the command received in step 059AKS090 is performed).
You may do so.

According to such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the player from being annoyed and deteriorating the game interest.

(4) The gaming machine according to any one of (1) to (3) above.
The effect executing means includes a case where the information regarding the variable display of the second identification information stored at the end of the special state includes information in which the variable display result becomes the special display result, and the special display. In the variable display corresponding to the information related to the variable display of the second identification information stored at the end of the special state, different effects are obtained after the common effect is executed, depending on whether the resulting information is included. (For example, the return effect includes a return effect of a return success pattern and a return effect of a return failure pattern, and both perform a common effect (for example, an effect aimed at clearing a predetermined mission). However, as a result, the combination of decorative symbols that are stopped and displayed differs depending on whether or not the specified mission is cleared),
You may do so.

With such a configuration, it is possible to attract the player's attention after performing a common effect.

(5) The gaming machine according to any one of (1) to (4) above.
The effect executing means is stored when the special display result is displayed as the variable display result of the first identification information in the advantageous state and the normal state different from the special state, and when the special state ends. The effect when the special display result is controlled is different from that when the special display result is displayed as the variable display result corresponding to the information related to the variable display of the second identification information (for example, as shown in FIGS. 11-28). The pattern of the time saving fanning effect that is executed depends on the time saving type, etc.),
You may do so.

According to such a configuration, different patterns of production are executed depending on the situation, so that the game entertainment can be improved.

(6) The gaming machine according to any one of (1) to (5) above.
The case where the special display result is displayed as the variable display result of the first identification information in the advantageous state and the normal state different from the special state, and the case where the second identification information is stored at the end of the special state. The display time of the special display result is the same as when the special display result is displayed as the variable display result corresponding to the information related to the variable display (for example, the variable display result corresponding to the remaining hold is "missing (time reduction)). (Time saving type of time saving C or D) and when the variable display result of the first special figure in the normal state is "missing (time saving)" (time saving type of time saving A or B) Time is common, etc.),
You may do so.

According to such a configuration, it is possible to suppress an increase in control data.

(7) The gaming machine according to any one of (1) to (6) above.
The effect executing means is
During the execution of the variable display corresponding to the information related to the variable display of the second identification information stored at the end of the special state, the notification that the game medium should be launched to the specific route is not performed (for example, the process of step 059AKS136). Etc.),
In the first variable display executed after the special display result is displayed, a notification that the game medium should be launched to the specific route is given (for example, the process of step 059AKS090 is executed).
You may do so.

According to such a configuration, suitable launch notification is possible, and the game can proceed smoothly.

(8) The gaming machine according to any one of (1) to (7) above.
A first signal output means (for example, a CPU 103 that outputs a jackpot signal 1) capable of outputting a first signal corresponding to being controlled in the advantageous state, and
A second signal output means (for example, a CPU 103 that outputs a jackpot signal 2) capable of outputting a second signal corresponding to being controlled to the advantageous state or the special state, and
A third signal output means capable of outputting a third signal corresponding to being controlled in the special state (for example, a CPU 103 that outputs a jackpot signal 3),
A fourth signal output means (for example, a CPU 103 that outputs a symbol confirmation signal) capable of outputting a fourth signal corresponding to the end of the variable display is provided.
When the special display result is displayed as the variable display result, the fourth signal is output by the fourth signal output means and the third signal is output by the third signal output means at the end of the variable display. Output (for example, when the time saving state is reached due to the time saving symbol stop, as shown in FIG. 11-37 (B), the symbol confirmation signal indicating the time saving symbol stop is output, and the timing at which the output of the symbol confirmation signal is stopped is stopped. (For example, a big hit signal is output),
You may do so.

According to such a configuration, it is possible to preferably specify the time saving state and the consecutive villa state with an external device.

(9) The gaming machine according to any one of (1) to (8) above.
A first signal output means (for example, a CPU 103 that outputs a jackpot signal 1) capable of outputting a first signal corresponding to being controlled in the advantageous state, and
A second signal output means (for example, a CPU 103 that outputs a jackpot signal 2) capable of outputting a second signal corresponding to being controlled to the advantageous state or the special state, and
A third signal output means (for example, a CPU 103 that outputs a jackpot signal 3) capable of outputting a third signal corresponding to being controlled in the special state is provided.
The third signal output means continues to output the third signal until the variable display corresponding to the information related to the variable display of the second identification information stored at the end of the special state is completed (time reduction). Even when the state ends, the output of the jackpot signal 3 is not stopped until the variable display corresponding to the remaining hold ends),
You may do so.

According to such a configuration, it is possible to preferably specify the time saving state and the consecutive villa state with an external device.

(10) The gaming machine according to (8) or (9) above.
The output of the second signal and the third signal are stopped at the same time (for example, at the timing when the output of the symbol confirmation signal corresponding to the end of the time saving state is stopped, the outputs of the jackpot signal 2 and the jackpot signal 3 are the same. Stop at the timing, etc.),
You may do so.

According to such a configuration, it is possible to preferably specify the time saving state and the consecutive villa state with an external device.

(Explanation of Means Concerning Feature 061AK)
The feature portion 059AK includes the following feature portion 061AK.
(1) The gaming machine related to the feature unit 061AK is
It is a gaming machine (for example, pachinko gaming machine 1) that can perform variable display and control to an advantageous state that is advantageous to the player when a specific display result is displayed as the variable display result.
A state control means that can control a special state in which variable display is more likely to be executed than in a normal state (for example, CPU 103 that executes the process of step 059AKS025) and
It is provided with an effect execution means (for example, an effect control CPU 120 that executes the process of step S172) capable of executing an effect corresponding to the variable display.
When the state control means displays a special display result (for example, a special figure display result of "loss (time reduction)") different from the specific display result as the variable display result in the normal state, the special display result. Based on this, the normal state is controlled to the special state (for example, the process of step 059AKS025 is executed).
The effect executing means is
Depending on whether the variable display result is the specific display result or the special display result, a plurality of types of common specific effects can be executed (for example, a plurality of types of reach effects can be executed).
The ratio of the special display result differs depending on which type of the specific effect is executed among the plurality of types of the specific effect (for example, as shown in FIGS. 11-12, " The rate of "loss (shorter working hours)" is different, etc.),
While controlling to the special state, the game medium should be notified to be launched to the specific route in the game area, and the game medium should be launched to the specific route in the first variable display executed after the special display result is displayed. Start the notification (for example, display a right-handed instruction in a mode corresponding to the command received in step 059AKS090).
It is characterized by that.

According to such a configuration, it is possible to perform control according to the game state when the special display result is displayed, and it is possible to improve the game interest.

(2) In the gaming machine described in (1) above,
The effect executing means is common to the specific display result, the special display result, and the specific display result and the predetermined display result different from the special display result. Multiple types of effects can be executed (for example, as shown in FIGS. 11-11 and 11-12, when the reach effects of Super Reach B and Super Reach C are executed, if a big hit occurs, a loss (time reduction) occurs. In the case of a simple loss, the decision value is assigned so that multiple variable display results are obtained, etc.),
You may do so.

According to such a configuration, the variation of the production result is increased and the game entertainment can be improved.

(3) In the gaming machine according to (1) or (2) above.
As the variable display, the identification information is variablely displayed, and the identification information for production is variablely displayed in response to the variable display of the identification information (for example, the variable display of the decorative pattern is performed).
Determining means for determining the variable display result (for example, CPU 103 that executes the process of step S110) and
A variable display pattern determining means (for example, a CPU 103 that executes the process of step S111) that determines a variable display pattern of the identification information based on the determination result of the determining means, and
A command transmitting means (for example, changed in step S268) for transmitting a variable display result command indicating a variable display result determined by the determining means and a variable display pattern command indicating a variable display pattern determined by the variable display pattern determining means. It is further equipped with a pattern specification command, a CPU 103 that sends a display result specification command, etc.).
The variable display pattern determining means has a predetermined display result different from the specific display result and the special display result when the variable display result determined by the determination means becomes the specific display result, the special display result, and the specific display result. In some cases, a common variable display pattern can be determined (for example, a variable pattern that performs super reach B or super reach C can be determined regardless of the variable display result).
The variable display of the effect identification information is variably displayed based on the contents of the variable display result command and the variable display pattern command transmitted by the command transmission means (for example, the processes of steps S171 and S172 are executed).
When the effect executing means receives a variable display pattern command indicating the common variable display pattern, the effect executing means executes a different effect depending on the type of the received variable display result command (for example, when it is determined as No in step S552). Even so, different effects are executed depending on whether the command is determined to be Yes or No by 059AKS101).
You may do so.

According to such a configuration, the variation of the production result is increased and the game entertainment can be improved.

(4) In the gaming machine according to any one of (1) to (3) above.
After executing the specific effect, the effect executing means can execute a special effect suggesting whether or not the special display result is obtained (for example, after executing the reach effect of super reach, the time-saving fanning effect can be executed. Etc.),
You may do so.

According to such a configuration, since the special effect is executed, the game entertainment can be improved.

(5) In the gaming machine according to any one of (1) to (4) above.
After executing the specific effect, the effect executing means can execute a special effect suggesting whether or not the special display result is obtained, and whether or not the special effect is executed differs depending on the type of the specific effect (for example,). Depending on the type of reach effect to be executed, the rate at which the time-saving fanning effect is executed differs, etc.),
You may do so.

According to such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the special effect from being excessively executed, and it is possible to maintain the expectation that a specific display result will be obtained.

(6) In the gaming machine according to any one of (1) to (5) above.
The effect executing means can execute a special effect suggesting whether or not the special display result is obtained after executing the specific effect, and when the special effect is executed depending on the type of the specific effect, the effect is described. The ratio of the special display result is different (for example, the ratio of the time saving fanning effect being executed differs depending on the type of reach effect to be executed, and the ratio of the time saving symbol being stopped and displayed as the execution result of the time saving fanning effect is also different. Different, etc.),
You may do so.

According to such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the special effect from being excessively executed, and it is possible to maintain the expectation that a specific display result will be obtained.

(7) In the gaming machine according to any one of (1) to (6) above.
The effect executing means is
It is possible to further execute a predetermined effect different from the specific effect (for example, an effect of changing the display mode of the active display).
Depending on the execution mode of the predetermined effect, the ratio of the special display result when the specific effect is executed differs (for example, depending on which display mode the active display display mode changes to, the same type of supermarket Even in the reach production of reach, the rate at which the time saving symbol is stopped and displayed is different),
You may do so.

According to such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the special effect from being excessively executed, and it is possible to maintain the expectation that a specific display result will be obtained.

(8) In the gaming machine according to any one of (1) to (7) above.
The effect executing means can execute a special effect suggesting whether or not the special display result is obtained after executing the specific effect, and executes an effect of notifying the specific display result after executing the special effect. It is possible (for example, in the time saving fanning effect, in addition to whether or not the time saving symbol is stopped and displayed, it is notified that the advantage is higher than the time saving, such as whether or not the jackpot symbol is stopped and displayed). ,
You may do so.

With such a configuration, the expectation that a specific display result can be obtained can be maintained.

(9) In the gaming machine according to any one of (1) to (8) above.
As the variable display, the identification information is variablely displayed, and the identification information for production is variablely displayed in response to the variable display of the identification information (for example, the variable display of the decorative pattern is performed).
Determining means for determining the variable display result (for example, CPU 103 that executes the process of step S110) and
A variable display pattern determining means (for example, a CPU 103 that executes the process of step S111) that determines a variable display pattern of the identification information based on the determination result of the determining means, and
A command transmitting means (for example, changed in step S268) for transmitting a variable display result command indicating a variable display result determined by the determining means and a variable display pattern command indicating a variable display pattern determined by the variable display pattern determining means. It is further equipped with a pattern specification command, a CPU 103 that sends a display result specification command, etc.).
The variable display pattern determining means has a predetermined display result different from the specific display result and the special display result when the variable display result determined by the determination means becomes the specific display result, the special display result, and the specific display result. In some cases, a common variable display pattern can be determined (for example, a variable pattern that performs super reach B or super reach C can be determined regardless of the variable display result).
In the variable display of the identification information, the variable display time of the identification information is set based on the variable display result determined by the determination means and the variable display pattern determined by the variable display pattern determination means (for example, the CPU 103 sets the variable display time of step 059AKS013). Perform processing, etc.),
In the variable display of the effect identification information, the variable display time of the effect identification information is specified based on the contents of the variable display result command and the variable display pattern command transmitted by the command transmission means (for example, effect control). CPU 120 executes the process of step S561),
When the types of the received variable display result commands are different, the effect executing means can execute a common effect if the received variable display pattern command is a variable display pattern command indicating the common variable display pattern. (For example, the effect control CPU 120 can execute the reach effect of Super Reach B even when the content indicated by the display result specification command is different),
You may do so.

According to such a configuration, the effect can be suitably executed.

(10) In the gaming machine according to any one of (1) to (9) above.
There are multiple types of the special display results (for example, "time saving A" to "time saving D").
The state control means can control the special state having a different period according to the type of the special display result (for example, it can control the time reduction state of the number of time reductions according to the time reduction type).
The effect executing means can execute different types of effects depending on the type of the special display result in the variable display that is the special display result (for example, "time reduction B" rather than the time reduction type of "time reduction A". The execution rate of Super Reach C is higher in the time-saving type, and the pattern of the time-saving fanning effect executed according to the time-saving type is different),
You may do so.

According to such a configuration, it is possible to attract the attention of the player because the number of time reductions thereafter differs depending on the effect to be executed.

(11) In the gaming machine according to any one of (1) to (10) above.
There are multiple types of the special display results (for example, "time saving A" to "time saving D").
The state control means can control the special state having a different period according to the type of the special display result (for example, it can control the time reduction state of the number of time reductions according to the time reduction type).
It is possible to send a first command indicating the number of variable displays executed during control in the special state, and after sending the first command, it is possible to send a second command different from the first command (for example,). In step S268, the display result specification command is transmitted, and in step 059AKS021, the transmission setting of the decorative symbol stop command is performed, such as CPU103).
The effect executing means determines the effect during variable display based on the received first command, and specifies the number of variable displays executed during control to the special state based on the received second command. (For example, the effect corresponding to the content of the display result specification command is executed, and the number of time reductions specified by the received symbol confirmation command is set in step 059AKS133, etc.),
You may do so.

According to such a configuration, the effect control can be preferably performed.

(12) In the gaming machine according to any one of (1) to (11) above.
Determining means for determining the variable display result (for example, CPU 103 that executes the process of step S110) and
A variable display pattern determining means (for example, a CPU 103 that executes the process of step S111) that determines a variable display pattern of the identification information based on the determination result of the determining means, and
A command transmitting means (for example, changed in step S268) for transmitting a variable display result command indicating a variable display result determined by the determining means and a variable display pattern command indicating a variable display pattern determined by the variable display pattern determining means. It is further equipped with a pattern specification command, a CPU 103 that sends a display result specification command, etc.).
The effect executing means executes the effect based on the contents of the variable display result command and the variable display pattern command transmitted by the command transmitting means, and either the variable display result command or the variable display pattern command. If one of them cannot be received normally, the execution of the effect related to the special state is restricted (for example, the effect control CPU 120 that executes the process of step 059AKS090B).
You may do so.

According to such a configuration, it is possible to suitably perform the production while preventing the deterioration of the game interest.

(13) In the gaming machine according to any one of (1) to (12) above.
Determining means for determining the variable display result (for example, CPU 103 that executes the process of step S110) and
A variable display pattern determining means (for example, a CPU 103 that executes the process of step S111) that determines a variable display pattern of the identification information based on the determination result of the determining means, and
A command transmitting means (for example, changed in step S268) for transmitting a variable display result command indicating a variable display result determined by the determining means and a variable display pattern command indicating a variable display pattern determined by the variable display pattern determining means. It is further equipped with a pattern specification command, a CPU 103 that sends a display result specification command, etc.).
The effect executing means is
An effect is executed based on the contents of the variable display result command and the variable display pattern command transmitted by the command transmitting means (for example, the process of step S171 is executed).
When the variable display pattern command is normally received but the variable display result cannot be normally received, the effect related to the special state can be executed when the received variable display pattern command is a specific variable display pattern. Yes (for example, the process of step 059AKS095 can be executed).
You may do so.

According to such a configuration, it is possible to suitably perform the production while preventing the deterioration of the game interest.

(14) In the gaming machine according to any one of (1) to (13) above.
There are multiple types of the special display results.
The state control means can control the special state having a different period according to the type of the special display result (for example, it can control the time reduction state of the number of time reductions according to the time reduction type).
It is possible to send a first command indicating the number of variable displays executed during control in the special state, and after sending the first command, it is possible to send a second command different from the first command (for example,). In step S268, the display result specification command is transmitted, and in step 059AKS021, the transmission setting of the decorative symbol stop command is performed, such as CPU103).
The effect executing means determines the effect during variable display based on the received first command, and notifies the number of variable displays executed during control to the special state based on the received second command. If the second command cannot be received normally, the notification of the number of variable displays executed during control in the special state is limited (for example, the effect control CPU 120 that executes the process of step 059AKS139).
You may do so.

According to such a configuration, it is possible to suitably perform the production while preventing the deterioration of the game interest.

(Explanation of means relating to feature part 062AK)
The feature section 059AK includes the following feature section 062AK.
(1) The gaming machine related to the feature unit 062AK is
It is a gaming machine (for example, pachinko gaming machine 1) that can perform variable display and control to an advantageous state that is advantageous to the player when a specific display result is displayed as the variable display result.
A game control means (for example, CPU 103) that controls the progress of the game,
It is provided with an effect executing means (for example, an effect control CPU 120 that executes an effect based on an effect control command) capable of executing an effect based on information from the game control means.
The game control means
Determining means for determining the advantageous state (for example, CPU 103 that executes the process of step S110) and
A determination means (for example, CPU 103 that executes the process of step S213) for determining that the advantageous state is obtained before the determination of the determination means, and
A state control means that can control a special state in which variable display is more likely to be executed than in a normal state (for example, CPU 103 that executes the process of step 059AKS025) and
Information transmitting means (for example, effect control) capable of transmitting a plurality of types of information including determination result information that can identify that the determination means is controlled to the advantageous state when the determination means is determined to be in the advantageous state. CPU 103 that sends commands, etc.), including
When a special display result different from the specific display result is displayed as the variable display result in the normal state, the state control means controls from the normal state to the special state based on the special display result ( For example, the process of step 059AKS025 is executed),
The determination means can determine that the state control means will be in the special state before the state control means controls the special state (for example, the process of step 059AKS001 is executed).
The information transmitting means can transmit special information that can be specified to be controlled to the special state when the determination means determines to be in the special state (for example, designating a display result of "loss (time reduction)"). Commands can be sent, etc.),
The effect executing means is
When the determination result information is received, the look-ahead effect can be executed based on the determination result information (for example, the process of step S161 can be executed).
When the determination result information is received after receiving the special information, the execution of the look-ahead effect based on the determination result information is restricted (for example, when it is determined Yes in step 059AKS082, the processing of step 059AKS084 and step S1304). Etc.),
It is characterized by that.

According to such a configuration, it is possible to perform control according to the game state when the special display result is displayed, and it is possible to improve the game interest.

(2) In the gaming machine described in (1) above,
The effect executing means is
When the determination result information is newly received after receiving the determination result information indicating that the control is performed in the advantageous state, the execution of the look-ahead effect based on the newly received determination result information is further restricted ( For example, if a hold whose variable display result is a "big hit" is stored in the currently stored hold storage, it is determined as Yes in step 059AKS082),
During the limitation of the look-ahead effect, the look-ahead effect can be executed in the same manner as the look-ahead effect that can be executed when the determination result information is received after receiving the special information (for example, in step 059AKS084 and step S1304). Execute processing, etc.),
You may do so.

According to such a configuration, it is possible to suppress the deviation of the production due to the state transition and prevent the deterioration of the game interest.

(3) In the gaming machine according to (1) or (2) above.
The effect executing means is
When the determination result information is newly received after receiving the determination result information indicating that the suggestion effect suggesting whether or not the special state is controlled is executed, the newly received determination result information is added to the newly received determination result information. Further restricting the execution of the pre-reading effect (for example, if a hold for executing the time-saving fanning effect is stored in the currently stored hold memory, it is determined as Yes in step 059AKS082).
During the limitation of the look-ahead effect, the look-ahead effect can be executed in the same manner as the look-ahead effect that can be executed when the determination result information is received after receiving the special information (for example, in step 059AKS084 and step S1304). Execute processing, etc.),
You may do so.

According to such a configuration, it is possible to prevent a decrease in the interest in the game when the effect related to the state transition is performed.

(4) In the gaming machine according to any one of (1) to (3) above.
While the pre-reading effect is restricted, the effect executing means does not execute the pre-reading effect in an aspect indicating that the advantage controlled in the advantageous state is equal to or higher than the specific advantage (for example, FIG. 11-23 (B)). (For example, do not execute the hold display change effect above "green" as shown in),
You may do so.

According to such a configuration, it is possible to suppress the deviation of the production due to the state transition and prevent the deterioration of the game interest.

(5) In the gaming machine according to any one of (1) to (4) above.
The effect executing means does not execute a specific type of the look-ahead effect while the look-ahead effect is restricted (for example, as shown in FIG. 11-23 (B), when the hold display change effect is restricted, “green” or “green” or “ Do not execute the type of hold display change effect that changes to a display mode such as "red"),
You may do so.

According to such a configuration, since the execution of a specific type of advance notice effect is restricted, it is possible to prevent a deterioration of the game interest without giving a useless expectation to the player.

(Explanation of feature part 063AK)
Hereinafter, the feature unit 063AK according to the present embodiment will be described.

As shown in FIG. 12-1, the game area 2 formed on the board surface of the game board includes a left game area 063AK1 on the left side of the top side of the image display device 5 and a right side side of the top side of the image display device 5. A right game area 063AK2 is provided. The left game area 063AK1 and the right game area 063AK2 may be separated by, for example, the end face of the image display device 5 inside the game area 2 or the arrangement PL of the nails. When the game ball (game medium) launched from the hitting ball launching device and driven into the game area 2 is guided to the left game area 063AK1, for example, by being guided along the arrangement PL of the nails, the right game area. It becomes impossible or difficult to induce to 063AK2. Further, when the game ball launched from the hitting ball launching device and driven into the game area 2 is guided to the right game area 063AK2, for example, by being guided along the arrangement PL of the nails, the game ball is guided to the left game area 063AK1. And it becomes impossible or difficult to induce.

The left game area 063AK1 is provided with a general winning opening 10 and a winning ball device 6A. On the other hand, the right game area 063AK2 is provided with a variable winning ball device 6B (ordinary electric accessory) and a special variable winning ball device 7 (variable means). The special variable winning ball device 7 is provided below the variable winning ball device 6B.

The general winning opening 10 is always kept in a constant open state in which a game ball can win a prize by a predetermined ball receiving member. When a game ball wins (enters) the general winning opening 10, a predetermined number (for example, 10) of game balls is paid out as a prize ball.

The winning ball device 6A forms, for example, a first starting winning opening in which a game ball is always kept in a constant open state in which a game ball can be won by a predetermined ball receiving member. When a game ball wins in the first start winning opening, a predetermined number (for example, three) of prize balls are paid out, and the first start condition, which is a condition for executing the first special figure game, can be satisfied. .. The variable winning ball device 6B forms a second starting winning opening that is changed between a closed state and an open state by a solenoid 81 (see FIG. 2). When a game ball wins in the second start winning opening, a predetermined number (for example, three) of prize balls can be paid out and the second special figure game can be started.

As shown in FIG. 12-2, the special variable winning ball device 7 includes a large winning opening door 063AK3 that is opened and closed by a solenoid 82 (see FIG. 2) for the large winning opening door (for a special electric accessory). The large winning opening door 063AK3 has a large winning opening 063AK4 that changes between an open state in which the game ball is easy to win (first state) and a closed state in which the game ball cannot win or is difficult to win (second state). ing. FIG. 12-2 shows a state in which the large winning opening door 063AK3 is in a closed state of the large winning opening 064AK4.

As an example, in the special variable winning ball device 7, when the solenoid 82 for the big winning door is off, the big winning door 063AK3 closes the big winning door 063AK4, and the game ball wins the big winning door 063AK4. Impossible or difficult to win. On the other hand, in the special variable winning ball device 7, when the solenoid 82 for the big winning door is on, the big winning door 063AK3 opens the big winning door 063AK4, and the game ball can easily win the big winning door 063AK4. It becomes. When a game ball wins in the large prize opening 063AK4, a predetermined number (for example, 14) of game balls are paid out as a prize ball. When a game ball wins in the large winning opening 063AK4, more prize balls are paid out than when the game ball wins in, for example, the first starting winning opening, the second starting winning opening, or the general winning opening 10.

In the big winning opening 063AK4 formed by the special variable winning ball device 7, the big hit symbol (specific display result) is derived and displayed (stop display) as a confirmed special symbol in the special figure game, and the display result of the variable display becomes "big hit". , When controlled to the jackpot game state (advantageous state), it is controlled to the open state in a predetermined mode. The open state includes the elapsed timing of a predetermined period (29 seconds in this embodiment) and the timing until the number of game balls winning in the large winning opening 063AK4 reaches a predetermined number (9 in this embodiment). , Whichever comes first. One cycle in which the large winning opening 063AK4 is opened in this way is called a round (round game). In the jackpot game state, the round can be repeatedly executed until the maximum number of times (15 times in the present embodiment) is reached.

Further, in the large winning opening 063AK4 formed by the special variable winning ball device 7, a small hit symbol (special display result) is derived and displayed as a confirmed special symbol in the special figure game, and the display result of the variable display becomes "small hit". , When controlled to the small hit game state, it is controlled to the open state in a predetermined mode. Specifically, in the small hit game state, the open state and the closed state of the large winning opening 063AK4 formed by the special variable winning ball device 7 are repeated. For example, in the small hit game state, the open state for 0.1 seconds and the closed state for 1.0 seconds are repeated. The operation of repeatedly opening and closing the large winning opening 063AK4 is also referred to as opening and closing the large winning opening. The opening and closing of the large winning opening is repeated up to a predetermined upper limit opening number of times (10 times in this embodiment) for 0.1 seconds, or a predetermined upper limit winning number of game balls is placed in the large winning opening 063AK4 (this embodiment). Then, it ends when one of the conditions is satisfied among the winning up to 10).

In the feature unit 063AK, the player is made to perform a game method (hereinafter, referred to as “left-handed”) in which the left game area 063AK1 launches a game ball in a normal state (low probability low base state). A game method in which a game ball is launched into the right game area 063AK2 in a time saving state (low accuracy and high base state) while aiming to win a prize in the general winning opening 10 or the first starting winning opening formed by the winning ball device 6A (a gaming method). Hereinafter, it is referred to as “right-handed”) to aim for winning in the second starting winning opening formed by the variable winning ball device 6B.

Further, in the feature unit 063AK, when the player is controlled to the big hit game state or the small hit game state, the player is made to hit right to the large winning opening 063AK4 formed by the special variable winning ball device 7. It is configured to aim for a prize.

The feature unit 063AK performs a right-handed promotion effect that encourages the player to make a right-handed hit during a period in which the right-handed hit is controlled to a time-saving state, a big hit game state, and a small hit game state.

The game ball that has won the large winning opening 063AK4 formed in the special variable winning ball device 7 passes (enters) the large winning opening switch 063AK5, is detected by the large winning opening switch 063AK5, and then falls into the recess 063AK6. The game ball that has fallen into the recess 063AK6 is guided backward by a guide piece (not shown) and passes through the passage port 063AK7. Behind the passage port 063AK7, a distribution section supply path 063AK8 extending toward the lower left and a discharge path 063AK9 extending toward the lower right are provided.

All the game balls that have won the big winning opening 063AK4 in the big hit game state are discharged to the outside of the special variable winning ball device 7 through the discharge path 063AK9. On the other hand, in the small hit game state, only one of the game balls that won the big winning opening 063AK4 flows down to the distribution part 063AK18 described later through the distribution part supply path 063AK8, and the one game. Other than the balls, they are discharged to the outside of the special variable winning ball device 7 through the discharge path 063AK9.

12-3 (a) to 12-3 (c) are views showing the configuration of the special variable winning ball device 7 with respect to the feature portion 063AK, as viewed from the arrow I-I in FIG. 12-2. The case is shown. As shown in FIG. 12-3 (a), the special variable winning ball device 7 moves the plunger 063AK11 in the left-right direction by switching between the abbreviated rotating piece 063AK10 and the on state and the off state. It is provided with a solenoid 063AK12 for supplying a distribution unit. The rotating piece 063AK10 has a connecting projection 063AK13 connected to the plunger 063AK11, and rotates about the rotating shaft 063AK14 by switching between the on state and the off state of the distribution unit supply solenoid 063AK12.

As shown in FIG. 12-3 (a), when the distribution unit supply solenoid 063AK12 is in the ON state, the bent surface 063AK15 of the rotating piece 063AK10 faces forward. Further, the lower surface of the distribution section supply path 063AK8 is located at a position lower than the lower surface of the discharge path 063AK9 (provided below). Therefore, as shown in FIG. 12-3 (a), the game ball A1 that first passes through the passage port 063AK7 falls into the distribution section supply path 063AK8, and its movement is restricted by the bending surface 063AK15 of the rotating piece 063AK10. Will be done. As a result, the game ball A1 is held by the rotating piece 063AK10. As shown in FIG. 12-3 (b), the game ball A2 that has passed through 063AK7 following the game ball A1 cannot enter the distribution section supply path 063AK8 due to being blocked by the game ball A1 and proceeds to the right side. Change direction. The game ball A2 flows down the discharge path 063AK9 as it is. A discharge count switch 063AK16 is provided in the discharge path 063AK9, and a game ball that has passed through the discharge path 063AK9 is detected by the discharge count switch 063AK16. The game ball that has passed through the discharge path 063AK9 is discharged to the outside of the special variable winning ball device 7. When the distribution unit supply solenoid 063AK12 is controlled from the on state to the off state while the rotating piece 063AK10 holds the game ball A1, the plunger 063AK11 supplies the distribution unit as shown in FIG. 12-3 (c). Solenoid 063 AK12 pops out from the main body. As a result, the rotating piece 063AK10 rotates around the rotating shaft 063AK14, and the game ball A1 is repelled toward the distribution section supply path 063AK8. The repelled game ball A1 flows down the distribution section supply path 063AK8.

As shown in FIG. 12-4 (a), the game ball A3 flowing down the distribution unit supply path 063AK8 passes through the distribution unit passage switch 063AK17, is detected by the distribution unit passage switch 063AK17, and then distributes. Enter the section 063AK18.

The distribution unit 063AK18 is provided in the special variable winning ball device 7, and guides the game ball that has flowed down through the distribution unit supply path 063AK8 to guide the game ball that has flowed down through the distribution unit supply path 063AK8, and has a jackpot area 063AK19 (specific area) and a time saving area 063AK20 (special area). ) And the loss area 063AK21.

The jackpot area 063AK19, the time saving area 063AK20, and the loss area 063AK21 are all areas (members) configured to allow the game ball to pass through, and are provided in the special variable winning ball device 7. The jackpot region 063AK19, the time saving region 063AK20, and the loss region 063AK21 are provided below the distribution portion 063AK18.

The game ball that has entered the jackpot area 063AK19 passes through the jackpot area passing switch 063AK22, is detected by the jackpot area passing switch 063AK22, and then passes through the jackpot area discharge path (not shown) to the outside of the special variable winning ball device 7. Is discharged to. The game ball discharged to the outside of the special variable winning ball device 7 through the big hit area discharge path is detected by the big hit area discharge count switch (not shown).

In the special figure game, the small hit symbol is derived and displayed and controlled to the small hit game state, and when the large winning opening 063AK4 is controlled to the open state, the game ball winning the large winning opening 063AK4 passes through the large winning area 063AK19. Based on this, the game is controlled to the big hit game state after the end of the small hit game state.

The game ball that has entered the time saving area 063AK20 passes through the time saving area passing switch 063AK23, is detected by the time saving area passing switch 063AK23, and then passes through the time saving area discharge path (not shown) to the outside of the special variable winning ball device 7. Is discharged to. The game ball discharged to the outside of the special variable winning ball device 7 through the time saving area discharge path is detected by the time saving area discharge count switch (not shown).

In the normal state, the small hit symbol is derived and displayed in the special figure game and controlled to the small hit game state, and when the large prize opening 063AK4 is controlled to the open state, the game ball that wins the large prize opening 063AK4 Based on passing through the time saving area 063AK20, the time saving transition control for controlling the time saving state (special state) in which the variable display is more likely to be executed than the normal state is performed for a predetermined period after the end of the small hit game state. Will be played. On the other hand, in the time saving state, the small hit symbol is derived and displayed in the special figure game and controlled to the small hit game state, and when the large winning opening 063AK4 is controlled to the open state, the game ball that wins the large winning opening 063AK4. However, when the game has passed the time-saving region 063AK20, the time-saving transition control based on the passage is not performed. That is, when the time saving state is already controlled, even if the game ball winning the large winning opening 063AK4 passes through the time saving area 063AK20 in the small hit game state, the period during which the time saving transition control is performed to control the time saving state. It is configured so that the control to extend is not performed.

In the present embodiment, in the normal state, when the small hit symbol is derived and displayed in the special figure game and controlled to the small hit game state and the large winning opening 063AK4 is controlled to the open state, the large winning opening 063AK4 is won. When the game ball passes through the time saving area 063AK20, the time saving transition control based on the passage is started when the next variable display is started after the large winning opening 063AK4 is controlled to the closed state and the small hit game state is finished. Is performed, and the time is controlled from the normal state to the time saving state. That is, when the big winning opening 063AK4 is controlled to the open state, if the game ball passes through the time saving area 063AK20, it is configured not to be controlled to the time saving state until the big winning opening 063AK4 is controlled to the closed state. .. According to such a configuration, after one game ball passes through the time saving area 063AK20, another game ball passes through the big hit area 063AK19 or the loss area 063AK21, so that the game state after the end of the small hit game state It is possible to suppress the possibility that an inconsistency will occur between the control and the production, which will confuse the player and reduce the enjoyment of the game. That is, according to such a configuration, suitable control can be performed according to the state.

The game ball that has entered the loss area 063AK21 passes through the loss area passage switch 063AK24, is detected by the loss area passage switch 063AK24, and then passes through the loss area discharge path (not shown) to the outside of the special variable winning ball device 7. Is discharged to. The game ball discharged to the outside of the special variable winning ball device 7 through the loss area discharge path is detected by the loss area discharge count switch (not shown).

In the special figure game, the small hit symbol is derived and displayed and controlled to the small hit game state, and when the large winning opening 063AK4 is controlled to the open state, the game ball winning the large winning opening 063AK4 has passed through the loss area 063AK21. In this case, after the end of the small hit game state, the control to change the game state based on the passage is not performed.

The jackpot region light emitting portion 063AK25 is provided at the upper end and the lower end of the jackpot region 063AK19. A light emitting portion 063AK26 for a time saving region is provided at an upper end portion and a lower end portion of the time saving region 063AK20. Loss region light emitting units 063AK27 are provided at the upper end and lower end of the loss region 063AK21. The jackpot region light emitting unit 063AK25, the time saving region light emitting unit 063AK26, and the loss region light emitting unit 063AK27 are configured to be visible to the player, and are provided with a light emitting element such as an LED (Light Emitting Diode) so as to be capable of emitting light. .. Although the details will be described later, in the feature unit 063AK, the effect of causing the jackpot region light emitting unit 063AK25, the time saving region light emitting unit 063AK26, and the loss region light emitting unit 063AK27 to emit light in a predetermined manner is performed. FIG. 12-4 (a) shows a state in which the jackpot region light emitting unit 063AK25, the time saving region light emitting unit 063AK26, and the loss region light emitting unit 063AK27 are all turned off.

The distribution unit 063AK18 includes a distribution member 063AK28. The distribution member 063AK28 is formed with a left inclined surface 063AK29 facing diagonally upward to the right and a right inclined surface 063AK30 facing diagonally upward to the left. The game ball that has entered the distribution unit 063AK18 is guided by the distribution member 063AK28 and passes through any of the jackpot region 063AK19, the time saving region 063AK20, and the loss region 063AK21.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 12-4 (b), the distribution unit 063AK18 is provided with a jackpot area entrance 063AK31, a time saving area entrance 063AK32, and a loss area entrance 063AK33. The jackpot area entrance 063AK31, the time saving area entrance 063AK32, and the loss area entrance 063AK33 are all configured to allow game balls to pass through, and are arranged along the left-right direction. The jackpot area entrance 063AK31 communicates with the jackpot area 063AK19, and the game ball that has passed through the jackpot area entrance 063AK31 passes through the jackpot area 063AK19. The time saving area entrance 063AK32 communicates with the time saving area 063AK20, and the game ball that has passed through the time saving area entrance 063AK32 passes through the time saving area 063AK20. The loss area entrance 063AK33 communicates with the loss area 063AK21, and the game ball that has passed through the loss area entrance 063AK33 passes through the loss area 063AK21.

The distribution member 063AK28 is arranged above the jackpot region entrance 063AK31, the time saving region entrance 063AK32, and the loss region entrance 063AK33. The distribution member 063AK28 is formed with a passage port 063AK34 through which a game ball can pass. Hereinafter, in order to facilitate understanding, the P coordinate axes shown in FIG. 12-4 (b) are set. The P coordinate axes are set parallel to the left-right direction. The distribution member 063AK28 is driven by a distribution member motor (not shown), and is located in the left-right direction between the position P6 as the left end position and the position P3 as the right end position shown in FIG. 12-4 (b). Move back and forth along. FIG. 12-4 (b) shows a state in which the distribution member 063AK28 is located at the position P0 as the center position (origin position).

When the distribution member 063AK28 is located at the position P0 shown in FIG. 12-4 (b), the game ball A4 that has entered the distribution unit 063AK18 is distributed as shown in FIG. 12-5 (a). It passes through the passage port 063AK34 formed in the member 063AK28, and passes through the time saving area entrance 063AK32. The game ball A4 that has passed through the time saving area entrance 063AK32 passes through the time saving area 063AK20. When the distribution member 063AK28 is located at the position P3 shown in FIG. 12-4 (b), the game ball A5 that has entered the distribution unit 063AK18 is distributed as shown in FIG. 12-5 (b). It collides with the left inclined surface 063AK29 formed on the member 063AK28, moves to the left along the inclined direction, and passes through the jackpot region entrance 063AK31 formed on the left side of the distribution portion 063AK18. The game ball A5 that has passed through the jackpot area entrance 063AK31 passes through the jackpot area 063AK19. When the distribution member 063AK28 is located at the position P6 shown in FIG. 12-4 (b), the game ball A6 that has entered the distribution unit 063AK18 is distributed as shown in FIG. 12-5 (c). It collides with the right inclined surface 063AK30 formed on the member 063AK28, moves to the right along the inclined direction, and passes through the loss region entrance 063AK33 formed on the right side of the distribution portion 063AK18. The game ball A6 that has passed through the loss area entrance 063AK33 passes through the loss area 063AK21.

The distribution member 063AK28 is configured to be able to execute an operation according to the distribution member operation pattern shown in FIG. 12-6. FIG. 12-6 shows the transition of the position of the distribution member 063AK28 according to the time passage when the distribution member 063AK28 is performing the operation according to the distribution member operation pattern, and the time of the region through which the game ball passes. The transition according to the progress is shown. The distribution member 063AK28 is stopped at the position P0 shown in FIG. 12-4 (b) when the operation according to the distribution member operation pattern is not performed.

As shown in FIG. 12-6, when the distribution member 063AK28 starts the operation according to the distribution member operation pattern, it stops at the position P0 for a predetermined central standby time, and then moves to the right from the position P0 at a constant speed. It moves to, passes through the position P1 on the right side of the position P0 shown in FIG. 12-4 (b), passes through the position P2 on the right side of the position P1 shown in FIG. It reaches the position P3 shown in b). The time required for the distribution member 063AK28 to reach the position P0 from the position P0 may be predetermined as the middle right movement time. The distribution member 063AK28 that has reached the position P3 stops at the position P3 for a predetermined right end standby time. Subsequently, the distribution member 063AK28 moves to the left at a constant speed from the position P3, passes through the position P2, passes through the position P1, and reaches the position P0. The time required for the distribution member 063AK28 to reach the position P0 from the position P3 may be predetermined as the right middle movement time. The distribution member 063AK28 that has reached the position P0 stops at the position P0 over the central standby time. Next, the distribution member 063AK28 moves to the left at a constant speed from the position P0, passes through the position P4 on the left side of the position P0 shown in FIG. 12-4 (b), and is shown in FIG. 12-4 (b). It passes through the position P5 on the left side of the indicated position P4 and reaches the position P6 shown in FIG. 12-4 (b). The time required for the distribution member 063AK28 to reach the position P0 to the position P6 may be predetermined as the middle-left movement time. The distribution member 063AK28 that has reached the position P6 stops at the position P6 for a predetermined left end standby time. After that, the distribution member 063AK28 moves to the right from the position P6 at a constant speed, passes through the position P5, passes through the position P4, and reaches the position P0. The time required for the distribution member 063AK28 to reach the central position P0 from the position P6 may be predetermined as the left middle movement time. The distribution member 063AK28 that has reached the position P0 repeats the above-described operation again. In this way, the distribution member 063AK28 reciprocates in the left-right direction between the position P3 and the position P6 by operating according to the distribution member operation pattern.

When the distribution member 063AK28 is performing an operation according to the distribution member operation pattern, as shown in FIG. 12-6, a game ball that has entered the distribution unit 063AK18 in response to a change in the position of the distribution member 063AK28. However, it also changes whether it passes through the jackpot area 063AK19, the time saving area 063AK20, or the loss area 063AK21. Specifically, during the period when the distribution member 063AK28 is located between the position P2 and the position P3, the game ball that has entered the distribution unit 063AK18 passes through the jackpot area 063AK19 by being guided by the distribution member 063AK28. It will be the jackpot area passing period. The period in which the distribution member 063AK28 is located between the positions P0 and the position P1 and the period in which the distribution member 063AK28 is located between the positions P0 and the position P4 have entered the distribution unit 063AK18. When the game ball is guided by the distribution member 063AK28, the time-saving region passing period is set when the game ball passes through the time-saving region 063AK20. During the period when the distribution member 063AK28 is located between the position P5 and the position P6, the game ball that has entered the distribution unit 063AK18 is guided by the distribution member 063AK28 to pass through the loss area 063AK21. It will be a period. The period in which the distribution member 063AK28 is located between the positions P1 and P2 and the period in which the distribution member 063AK28 is located between the positions P4 and P5 enter the distribution unit 063AK18. When the game ball is guided to the distribution member 063AK28, it becomes a passing area uncertain period in which it is not determined which of the jackpot area 063AK19, the time saving area 063AK20, and the loss area 063AK21 is entered.

In the present embodiment, the small hit symbol is derived and displayed in the special figure game, and when the small hit game state is controlled, the small hit start effect (small hit) for notifying that the control to the small hit game state is started is performed. The fanfare effect) is feasible, and the distribution member 063AK28 is configured to start an operation according to the distribution member operation pattern in response to the start of the small hit start effect. As shown in FIG. 12-6, the small hit start effect is started in response to the elapse of a predetermined special figure confirmation display time after the small hit symbol is derived and displayed in the special figure game, and then the small hit start effect is started. It ends according to the passage of the production time.

In the present embodiment, in the small hit game state, as shown in FIG. 12-6, the opening and closing of the large winning opening is started in response to the end of the small hit start effect. As described above, the opening and closing of the large winning opening is either whether the opening state of 0.1 seconds is repeated up to the predetermined upper limit opening number of times, or whether the game ball wins the large winning opening 063AK4 up to the predetermined upper limit winning number. It ends when either of the conditions is satisfied.

In the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 12-6, in the small hit game state, the solenoid 063AK12 for supplying the distribution unit is turned on in response to the end of the small hit start effect and the start of opening and closing of the large winning opening. The state is controlled so that the rotating piece 063AK10 can hold the game ball that has entered the distribution unit supply path 063AK8. The distribution unit supply solenoid 063AK12 is controlled to the on state and then to the off state according to the elapse of a predetermined game ball holding time. As a result, the rotating piece 063AK10 repels the held game ball toward the distribution section supply path 063AK8, and the repelled game ball flows down the distribution section supply path 063AK8 and enters the distribution section 063AK18. .. With such a configuration, in the present embodiment, only one of the game balls winning the large winning opening 063AK4 in the small hit game state flows down to the distribution unit 063AK18 through the distribution unit supply path 063AK8. Then, except for the one game ball, the ball is discharged to the outside of the special variable winning ball device 7 through the discharge path 063AK9. On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the distribution unit supply solenoid 063AK12 is not controlled to be turned on in the jackpot game state. With such a configuration, in the present embodiment, all the game balls that have won the big winning opening 063AK4 in the big hit game state are discharged to the outside of the special variable winning ball device 7 through the discharge path 063AK9. In the example shown in FIG. 12-6, the distribution unit supply solenoid 063AK12 is controlled to the off state and rotates at time t0 when the game ball holding time elapses after the distribution unit supply solenoid 063AK12 is controlled to the on state. The game ball repelled by the piece 063AK10 enters the distribution unit 063AK18. As shown in FIG. 12-6, the time t0 when the game ball enters the distribution unit 063AK18 is included in the jackpot area passing period. Therefore, the game ball that has entered the distribution unit 063AK18 at time t0 passes through the jackpot area 063AK19 by being guided by the distribution member 063AK28.

The game ball holding time is set longer than the time required to execute the opening and closing of the large winning opening by a predetermined upper limit opening number in the small hit game state. That is, the game ball enters the distribution unit 063AK18 after the opening and closing of the large winning opening is completed.

As shown in FIG. 12-6, the timing at which the game ball enters the distribution unit 063AK18 (time t0 in the example shown in FIG. 12-6) is the special figure confirmation display time, the small hit start effect time, and the game ball. Specified by retention time.

In the present embodiment, when the small hit game state is controlled, the special figure confirmation display time and the game ball holding time are set to the same time regardless of the small hit type, while the small hit start effect time is Depending on the small hit type, it is set to one of a plurality of types of time. With such a configuration, the timing at which the game ball enters the distribution unit 063AK18 differs depending on the small hit type.

Specifically, in the present embodiment, when the small hit game state is controlled, the small hit start effect time is set to the predetermined first specific time to the third specific time shown in FIG. 12-7 according to the small hit type. Set to one of the times. As shown in FIG. 12-7, the second specific time (for example, 12 seconds) is longer than the first specific time (for example, 11 seconds), and the third specific time (for example, 13 seconds) is longer than the second specific time.

As shown in FIG. 12-7, when the small hit start effect time is set to the first specific time, the special figure confirmation display time elapses after the small hit symbol is derived and displayed in the special figure game. After the small hit start effect is started, the distribution unit supply solenoid 063AK12 is controlled to be turned on at the timing when the small hit start effect is finished according to the elapse of the first specific time. After that, at time t1 when the game ball holding time elapses after the distribution unit supply solenoid 063AK12 is controlled to the on state, the distribution unit supply solenoid 063AK12 is controlled to the off state, and the game is repelled by the rotating piece 063AK10. The ball enters the distribution unit 063AK18. As shown in FIG. 12-7, since the time t1 is included in the loss region passing period, the game ball that has entered the distribution unit 063AK18 at the time t1 is guided by the distribution member 063AK28 and is lost. It passes through region 063AK21. That is, when the small hit start effect time is set to the first specific time, the game ball that has won the large winning opening 063AK4 in the small hit game state passes through the loss area 063AK21.

When the small hit start effect time is set to the second specific time, the small hit start effect is started according to the elapse of the special figure confirmation display time after the small hit symbol is derived and displayed in the special figure game. After that, the distribution unit supply solenoid 063AK12 is controlled to be turned on at the timing when the small hit start effect is completed according to the elapse of the second specific time. After that, at time t2 when the game ball holding time elapses after the distribution unit supply solenoid 063AK12 is controlled to the on state, the distribution unit supply solenoid 063AK12 is controlled to the off state, and the game is repelled by the rotating piece 063AK10. The ball enters the distribution unit 063AK18. As shown in FIG. 12-7, since the time t2 is included in the time saving region passing period, the game ball that has entered the distribution unit 063AK18 at the time t2 is guided by the distribution member 063AK28 to shorten the time. It passes through region 063AK20. That is, when the small hit start effect time is set to the second specific time, the game ball that has won the large winning opening 063AK4 in the small hit game state passes through the time saving area 063AK20.

When the small hit start effect time is set to the third specific time, the small hit start effect is started according to the elapse of the special figure confirmation display time after the small hit symbol is derived and displayed in the special figure game. After that, the distribution unit supply solenoid 063AK12 is controlled to be turned on at the timing when the small hit start effect is completed according to the elapse of the third specific time. After that, at time t3 when the game ball holding time elapses after the distribution unit supply solenoid 063AK12 is controlled to the on state, the distribution unit supply solenoid 063AK12 is controlled to the off state, and the game is repelled by the rotating piece 063AK10. The ball enters the distribution unit 063AK18. As shown in FIG. 12-7, since the time t3 is included in the jackpot region passing period, the game ball that has entered the distribution unit 063AK18 at the time t3 is guided by the distribution member 063AK28 to hit the jackpot. It passes through region 063AK19. That is, when the small hit start effect time is set to the third specific time, the game ball that has won the large winning opening 063AK4 in the small hit game state passes through the large hit area 063AK19.

As described above, depending on which of the first specific time to the third specific time is set for the small hit start effect time, the game ball that has won the large winning opening 063AK4 in the small hit game state is the large hit area 063AK19. Which of the time saving area 063AK20 and the loss area 063AK21 is passed is different. In the feature unit 063AK, the small hit start effect time is set to any of the first specific time to the third specific time according to the small hit type, so that the game ball that wins the large winning opening 063AK4 in the small hit game state. , The area corresponding to the small hit type among the large hit area 063AK19, the time saving area 063AK20, and the loss area 063AK21 is passed.

The feature unit 063AK is based on the execution of variable display (hereinafter referred to as "small hit variation") in which the small hit symbol is derived and displayed and the display result of the variable display is "small hit" in the special figure game. As shown in FIG. 12-8 (a), as the effects corresponding to the small hit fluctuations, in addition to the above-mentioned right-handed promotion effect and small hit start effect, a time saving suggestion effect, a passing fanning effect, and a passing notification are provided. The production is configured to be feasible.

In the present embodiment, as a right-handed promotion effect, an effect of displaying a right-handed promotion image indicating an arrow pointing in the right direction is executed on the screen of the image display device 5. As described above, the right-handed promotion effect is executed during the period controlled to the time saving state and the big hit gaming state, and is controlled to the small hit gaming state as shown in FIG. 12-8 (a). Performed in a period.

Further, in the present embodiment, as a small hit start effect, an effect of displaying a right arrow image and a small hit start image on the screen of the image display device 5 is executed. The right arrow image has the shape of an arrow pointing in the right direction, and is an effect image showing the message "Aim to the right!". The small hit start image shows the shape of the special variable winning ball device 7, and also shows the message "Put a ball here!" To encourage the player to win the game ball in the special variable winning ball device 7. It is an image. As described above, the small hit start effect time elapses after the small hit start effect is started in response to the fact that the small hit symbol is derived and displayed in the special figure game and the control to the small hit game state is started. It ends according to what you did.

The time saving suggestion effect is an effect suggesting that the time saving state is controlled, and is configured to be feasible during execution of the small hit variation. As described above, in the normal state, the game ball that has won the large winning opening 063AK4 in the small hit game state is controlled to the time reduction state after the end of the small hit game state based on the fact that the game ball has passed through the time saving area 063AK20. NS. Correspondingly, in the feature unit 063AK, in the normal state, when the small hit variation is executed, as an effect suggesting that the small hit symbol is derived and displayed as a definite special symbol in the special figure game. It is configured so that the time saving suggestion effect can be executed during the execution of the small hit fluctuation. According to such a configuration, in the normal state, in the variable display when the small hit symbol is derived and displayed as the confirmed special symbol in the special symbol game, various effects can be executed and the game entertainment can be improved. can.

As shown in FIG. 12-8 (a), when the normal reach effect, which is the reach effect of the normal reach, the super reach effect, which is the reach effect of the super reach, and the time saving suggestion effect, are executed in the small hit fluctuation, the time is shortened. The suggestion effect is started after the reach is established, the normal reach effect is executed, and the super reach effect is executed, and then the small hit symbol is derived and displayed in the special figure game, and the small hit fluctuation is completed. finish. Hereinafter, the details of the time saving suggestion effect will be described with reference to FIGS. 12-9 (a) and 12-9 (b).

As shown in FIG. 12-9 (a), when the time saving suggestion effect is started, the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R provided in the image display device 5 are started. In the above, the predetermined lost symbol (“767” in the present embodiment) is temporarily stopped and displayed in a mode different from the case where it is derived and displayed. Next, the revariable display of the decorative symbol is executed in the decorative symbol display area 5C of the "middle", and then, in the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of the "left", "middle", and "right", FIG. The time saving suggestion symbol suggesting that the time saving state shown in -9 (b) is controlled is temporarily stopped and displayed. As for the time saving suggestion symbol, the decorative symbol indicating the number "7" is displayed in the decorative symbol display areas 5L and 5R of "left" and "right", and it is called "chance" in the decorative symbol display area 5C of "middle". It is a combination of decorative symbols on which a decorative symbol indicating a message is displayed. Returning to FIG. 12-9 (a), after the time saving suggestion symbol is temporarily stopped and displayed, the decorative symbol is revariably displayed in the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of "left", "middle", and "right". It is executed, the small hit symbol is derived and displayed in the special figure game, and the time saving suggestion effect ends according to the end of the small hit fluctuation.

Returning to FIG. 12-8 (a), the passing fanning effect suggests that the game ball winning the big winning opening 063AK4 passes through any of the big hit area 063AK19, the time saving area 063AK20, or the loss area 063AK21 in the small hit game state. This is an effect (an effect that suggests passage between the jackpot area 063AK19, the time saving area 063AK20, and the loss area 063AK21). The passing fanning effect is started in response to the end of the small hit start effect and the start of opening and closing of the large winning opening, and then the game ball that has won the large winning opening 063AK4 in the small hit game state is in the large hit area 063AK19, shortening the time. It ends depending on whether it has passed through either the area 063AK20 or the lost area 063AK21.

The passage notification effect is an effect of notifying which of the big hit area 063AK19, the time saving area 063AK20, and the loss area 063AK21 the game ball that has won the big winning opening 063AK4 has passed in the small hit game state. In the present embodiment, the passage notification effect is executed as a small hit end effect (small hit ending effect) that notifies that the control to the small hit game state is completed. The passage notification effect is started in response to the game ball winning the large winning opening 063AK4 passing through the large hit area 063AK19, the time saving area 063AK20, or the loss area 063AK21 in the small hit game state, and then the predetermined passage notification effect time. It ends according to the passage.

In the present embodiment, the passage notification effect time is a predetermined number depending on whether the game ball winning the large winning opening 063AK4 has passed through the large hit area 063AK19, the time saving area 063AK20, or the loss area 063AK21 in the small hit game state. It is set to any of 1 special time to 3rd special time. Specifically, when the game ball passes through the loss area 063AK21, the passage notification effect time is set to the first special time (for example, 5 seconds). Further, in the time-saving state, when the game ball passes through the time-saving area 063AK20, the time-saving transition control is not performed based on the passage, and the passage notification effect time is such that the game ball loses the time-saving area 063AK21. It is set to the first special time as in the case of passing through. In the normal state, when the game ball passes through the time saving area 063AK20, the passage notification effect time is set to the second special time (for example, 20 seconds). When the game ball passes through the jackpot area 063AK19, the passage notification effect time is set to the third special time (for example, 10 seconds). According to such a configuration, suitable control can be performed according to the state.

In the feature unit 063AK, as shown in FIG. 12-8 (b), the time saving suggestion effect and the passing fanning occur depending on whether the small hit variation is executed in the normal state or the small hit variation is executed in the time saving state. It is configured so that whether or not the effect and the passage notification effect are executed or the mode of the effect is different.

Specifically, in the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 12-8 (b), when the small hit variation is executed in the normal state, the time saving suggestion effect can be executed during the execution of the small hit variation, while the time saving suggestion effect can be executed. When the small hit variation is executed in the time saving state, the time saving suggestion effect is not executed during the execution of the small hit variation. That is, in the feature unit 063AK, when the small hit variation is executed and the small hit symbol is derived and displayed in the normal state, and when the small hit variation is executed and the small hit symbol is derived and displayed in the time saving state, It is configured so that different effects can be performed during the execution of small hit fluctuations.

In the feature unit 063AK, in the normal state, when the small hit variation is executed, the time saving suggestion effect can be executed, so that the player can know that the game ball has passed through the time saving area 063AK20. It is configured so that the game can be enjoyed by giving a feeling of expectation that the time saving transition control is performed and the time saving state is controlled.

On the other hand, in the feature unit 063AK, in the case of the time saving state, when the small hit variation is executed, the time saving suggestion effect is not executed, so that when the game ball passes through the time saving area 063AK20, the passage is performed. Prevents the player from having the expectation that the game ball will be controlled to the time saving state based on passing through the time saving area 063AK20 even though the time saving transition control based on the time saving is not performed. It is configured so that the decline in the game interest can be suppressed.

In this way, in the feature unit 063AK, when the small hit variation is executed and the small hit symbol is derived and displayed in the normal state, and when the small hit variation is executed and the small hit symbol is derived and displayed in the time saving state. By being configured so that different effects can be executed during the execution of the small hit variation, a suitable effect can be performed according to the state.

In the feature unit 063AK, as shown in FIG. 12-8 (b), when the small hit fluctuation is executed in the normal state, the big winning opening is opened and closed under the control of the small hit gaming state after the small hit fluctuation is completed. At that time, as a passing fanning effect, a normal passing fanning effect (special effect) is executed, which is an effect suggesting the passage between the jackpot area 063AK19, the time saving area 063AK20, and the loss area 063AK21. On the other hand, when the small hit variation is executed in the time saving state, when the small hit gaming state is controlled to open and close the large winning opening after the small hit variation is completed, the passage of the time saving area 063AK29 is related as a passing fanning effect. Without making any suggestion, a time-saving time-passing fanning effect (specific effect) is executed, which is an effect of suggesting the passage between the jackpot area 063AK19 and the loss area 063AK21.

In the present embodiment, the normal passage fanning effect suggests that the game ball passes through the jackpot area 063AK19, the game ball passes through the time saving area 063AK20, and the game ball passes through the loss area 063AK21. It is a production to do. On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the time-saving time-passing fanning effect does not suggest that the game ball passes through the time-saving area 063AK20, but the game ball passes through the jackpot area 063AK19 and the game ball passes through the loss area 063AK21. It is a production that suggests passing through.

In the feature unit 063AK, when the small hit game state is controlled after the small hit fluctuation is completed in the normal state and the large winning opening 063AK4 is controlled to the open state, the player is given a normal passing fanning effect. , It is configured to give a feeling of expectation that the game ball is controlled to the time saving state based on passing through the time saving area 063AK20, and to improve the game entertainment.

On the other hand, in the feature unit 063AK, when the small hit game state is controlled after the end of the small hit fluctuation in the time saving state and the large winning opening 063AK4 is controlled to the open state, the game is performed by executing the time saving time passing fanning effect. Expectations from the player that the game ball is controlled in a time-saving state based on the time-saving area 063AK20, even though the control based on the passage is not performed when the ball passes through the time-saving area 063AK20. It is configured so that it can be prevented from giving a feeling and the deterioration of the game interest can be suppressed.

In this way, in the feature unit 063AK, when the small hit game state is controlled after the end of the small hit fluctuation in the normal state and the large winning opening 063AK4 is controlled to the open state, the normal passing fanning effect is executed. In the time saving state, when the small hit game state is controlled after the end of the small hit fluctuation state and the large winning opening 063AK4 is controlled to the open state, the time saving time passing fanning effect is executed. A suitable effect can be produced according to the state.

In the present embodiment, as a normal passing fanning effect, as shown in FIG. 12-10 (a), the normal passing fanning image AK1 is displayed on the screen of the image display device 5, and the special variable winning ball device 7 is provided. The jackpot region light emitting unit 063AK25, the time saving region light emitting unit 063AK26, and the loss region light emitting unit 063AK27 are made to emit light, and the normal time passing fanning sound indicating the message "Big hit? Time saving? Loss?" Is output from the speakers 8L and 8R. Perform the production.

The normal time passing fan image AK1 shows the message "big hit", and shows the big hit area passing fan image AK2 suggesting that the game ball passes through the big hit area 063AK19, and the message "time saving", and the game ball shows the time saving area. It includes a time-saving region passing fanning image AK3 suggesting that it passes through 063AK20, and a losing region passing fanning image AK4 showing the message "missing" and suggesting that the game ball passes through the losing region 063AK21.

In the feature unit 063AK, it is expected that the game ball will be controlled to the big hit game state after the end of the small hit game state based on the fact that the game ball has passed through the big hit area 063AK19 in the small hit game state according to the display mode of the normal passing fan image AK1. Based on the degree (ratio) and the expectation that the game ball passes through the time saving area 063AK20 in the small hit game state, the expected degree to be controlled to the time saving state after the end of the small hit game state, and the game ball in the small hit game state It is configured to be able to suggest the degree of expectation of passing through the loss region 063AK21. According to such a configuration, it is possible to make the player pay attention to the display mode of the normal passing fanning image AK1 and improve the game entertainment. Specifically, in the present embodiment, in the normal passing fanning image AK1, the jackpot area passing fanning image AK2 is the degree of expectation that the game ball passes through the jackpot area 063AK19 in the small hitting game state (big hit after the end of the small hitting gaming state). It is displayed in a display area according to the expected degree controlled by the game state), and the time-saving area passing fan image AK3 shows the expected degree that the game ball passes through the time-saving area 063AK20 in the small hit gaming state (end of the small hit gaming state). It is displayed in a display area according to the expected degree that is later controlled in the time saving state), and the loss area passing fan image AK4 has a display area corresponding to the expected degree that the game ball passes through the loss area 063AK21 in the small hit game state. Is displayed.

As will be described later, in the present embodiment, when the small hit symbol is derived and displayed in the second special figure game (special figure game using the second special figure), the first special figure game (first special figure is played). In the special figure game used), the game ball passes through the time saving area 063AK20 in the small hit game state at a higher rate than when the small hit symbol is derived and displayed, and is controlled to the time saving state after the end of the small hit game state. .. Corresponding to this, in the present embodiment, in the normal state, when the small hit symbol is derived and displayed in the first special figure game and controlled to the small hit game state, in the normal passing fanning effect, it is normal. While the time-passing fan image AK1 is displayed in the display mode shown in FIG. 12-10 (a), when the small hit symbol is derived and displayed in the second special figure game and controlled to the small hit game state, it is normal. In the time-passing fanning effect, the normal time-passing fanning image AK1 is displayed in the display mode shown in FIG. 12-10 (b). In the display mode shown in FIG. 12-10 (b), the display area of the time-saving region passing fanned image AK2 is larger than that in the display mode shown in FIG. 12-10 (a). In addition, in the second special figure game, the normal passing fanning effect shown in FIG. 12-10 (b), which is executed when the small hit symbol is derived and displayed and controlled to the small hit gaming state, is a normal passing fanning image. Except for the difference in the display mode of AK1, the normal passage shown in FIG. 12-10 (a) is executed when the small hit symbol is derived and displayed and controlled to the small hit game state in the first special figure game. It is a production mode similar to the fanning production.

In the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 12-10 (c), the time-saving time-saving passing fan image AK5 is displayed on the screen of the image display device 5, and the special variable winning ball device 7 is provided. The jackpot region light emitting unit 063AK25 and the loss region light emitting unit 063AK27 are made to emit light without causing the time saving region light emitting unit 063AK26 to emit light, and from the speakers 8L and 8R, a time saving passing fanning voice indicating the message "Is it a big hit? Perform an output effect. The time-saving time-saving passing fan image AK5 includes the jackpot area passing fanning image AK2 and the lost area passing fanning image AK4, while the time-saving area passing fanning image AK3 is not included.

Returning to FIG. 12-8 (b), in the normal state, when the game ball winning the big winning opening 063AK4 passes through the big hit area 063AK19 in the small hit game state, the game ball passes through the big hit area 063AK19. A normal time jackpot area passage notification effect is executed to notify that the player passes through 063AK19 and is controlled to the jackpot gaming state after the end of the small hit gaming state. In the present embodiment, as a normal time jackpot area passage notification effect, an effect of displaying a normal time jackpot area passage notification image indicating the message "V" is executed on the screen of the image display device 5.

In the normal state, when the game ball winning the large winning opening 063AK4 in the small hit game state passes through the time saving area 063AK20, the game ball passes through the time saving area 063AK20 as a passage notification effect, and the small hit game state. After the end, the time saving area passage notification effect for notifying that the time saving state is controlled is executed. In the present embodiment, as the time-saving area passage notification effect, an effect of displaying a time-saving area passage notification image indicating the message "lucky!" Is executed on the screen of the image display device 5.

In the normal state, when the game ball winning the large winning opening 063AK4 passes through the loss area 063AK21 in the small hit game state, the game ball passes through the loss area 063AK21 as a passage notification effect, and the small hit game state. After the end, the loss area passage notification effect for notifying that the control for changing the game state is not performed is executed. In the present embodiment, as the loss area passage notification effect, an effect of displaying a loss area passage notification image indicating the message "Sorry!" Is executed on the screen of the image display device 5.

On the other hand, in the case of the time saving state, as shown in FIG. 12-8 (b), when the game ball winning the big winning opening 063AK4 passes through the big hit area 063AK19 in the small hit game state, as a passing notification effect. , A time-saving big hit area passage notification effect different from the normal time big hit area passage notification effect is executed, which notifies that the game ball passes through the big hit area 063AK19 and is controlled to the big hit game state after the end of the small hit game state. NS. In the present embodiment, as a time-saving big hit area passage notification effect, an effect of displaying a time-saving big hit area passage notification image indicating the message "BONUS!" Is executed on the screen of the image display device 5.

In the case of the time saving state, when the game ball winning the large winning opening 063AK4 passes through the time saving area 063AK20 in the small hit game state, the passing notification effect is produced in response to the fact that the time saving transition control based on the passage is not performed. As a result, the above-mentioned loss area passage notification effect is executed.

In the case of the time saving state, when the game ball winning the large winning opening 063AK4 passes through the loss area 063AK21 in the small hit game state, the loss area passage notification effect is executed as the passage notification effect.

As shown in FIGS. 12-8 (a) and 12-8 (b), in the feature unit 063AK, a small hit symbol is derived and displayed as a confirmed special symbol in the special symbol game, and the special variable winning ball device 7 is formed. When the big winning opening 063AK4 is controlled to the open state and then the big winning opening 063AK is controlled to the closed state, the game ball passes through the big hit area 063AK19 and the game ball passes through the time saving area 063AK20. , Is configured to enable different productions. According to such a configuration, it is possible to make the player pay attention to the effect executed when the grand prize opening 063AK4 is controlled to the closed state, and to improve the game entertainment.

Further, in the feature unit 063AK, as shown in FIG. 12-8 (b), when the small hit symbol is derived and displayed as the confirmed special symbol in the special symbol game in the normal state, and the large winning opening 063AK4 is controlled to the open state. In addition, when the game ball passes through the time saving area 063AK20, by executing the time saving area passage notification effect, the player is in a time saving state after the end of the small hit game state based on the fact that the game ball has passed through the time saving area 063AK20. It is possible to improve the game entertainment by recognizing that it is controlled by.

On the other hand, in the feature unit 063AK, when the small hit symbol is derived and displayed as a confirmed special symbol in the special symbol game in the time saving state and the big winning opening 063AK4 is controlled to the open state, the game ball passes through the time saving area 063AK20. By executing the loss area passage notification effect, the game ball has passed the time saving area 063AK20 to the player even though the time saving transition control based on the game ball passing through the time saving area 063AK20 is not performed. Based on the above, it is possible to prevent a feeling of expectation from being controlled to a time saving state after the end of the small hit game state, and to suppress a decline in the game interest.

In this way, in the feature unit 063AK, the small hit symbol is derived and displayed as the confirmed special symbol in the special symbol game in the normal state, and when the large winning opening 063AK4 is controlled to the open state, the game ball passes through the time saving area 063AK20. When the small hit symbol is derived and displayed as a confirmed special symbol in the special symbol game in the time saving state and the large winning opening 063AK4 is controlled to the open state, the game ball passes through the time saving area 063AK20. Since different effects can be executed, suitable control can be performed according to the state when the small hit symbol is derived and displayed.

More specifically, in the feature unit 063AK, when the game ball passes through the time saving area 063AK20 in the time saving state, and when the game ball passes through the losing area 063AK21 in the time saving state, both the jackpot area 063AK19 and the time saving area 063AK20 pass. It is configured so that the loss area passage notification effect, which is the same effect as when it was not performed, can be executed. According to such a configuration, when the game ball passes through the time saving area 063AK20 in the time saving state, the player is not controlled based on the fact that the game ball has passed through the time saving area 063AK20. In addition, it is possible to prevent the game ball from having a feeling of expectation that it will be controlled to the time saving state after the end of the small hit game state based on the passing of the time saving area 063AK20, and to suppress the deterioration of the game interest. Can be done.

Further, in the feature unit 063AK, as shown in FIG. 12-8 (b), it is executed when the game ball passes through the jackpot area 063AK19 in the time saving state and when the game ball passes through the jackpot area 063AK19 in the normal state. It is configured to be able to execute a time-saving big hit area passage notification effect different from the normal time big hit area passage notification effect. According to such a configuration, it is possible to make the player pay attention to the effect performed when the game ball passes through the jackpot area 063AK19, and to improve the game entertainment.

In the present embodiment, as will be described later, the small hit symbol is derived and displayed in the second special figure game that is easily executed in the time saving state, and the game ball is in the big hit area when the big winning opening 063AK4 is controlled to the open state. When passing through 063AK19, the small hit symbol is derived and displayed in the first special figure game which is easy to be executed in the normal state, and when the big winning opening 063AK4 is controlled to the open state, the game ball passes through the big hit area 063AK19. Is also controlled at a high rate to "big hit A", which is more advantageous to the player than "big hit B" after the end of the small hit game state. With such a configuration, when the game ball passes through the jackpot area 063AK19, the player is made to pay attention to whether the time-saving jackpot area passage notification effect or the normal time jackpot area passage notification effect is executed, and the game is played. You can improve your interest.

FIG. 12-11 is a flowchart showing an example of the process executed in step S110 of the special symbol process process as the special symbol normal process with respect to the feature unit 063AK.

When the special symbol normal processing is started, the CPU 103 first determines whether or not the second special symbol hold storage number is "0" (step 063AKS101). The second special figure hold storage number is the hold storage number of the special figure game using the second special figure by the second special symbol display device 4B. For example, in the process of step 063AKS101, the RAM 102 may read the second hold storage number count value stored in the second hold storage number counter, and determine whether or not the read value is “0”.

In the present embodiment, for example, a second special figure holding storage unit is provided in a predetermined area of the RAM 102. The second special figure holding storage unit is a special figure game (second special figure game) in which the game ball enters the second start winning opening formed by the variable winning ball device 6B and the second starting winning is generated, but the game has not been started yet. The hold data of the special figure game) using the second special figure in the symbol display device 4B is stored. As an example, the second special figure reservation storage unit associates the winning order with the second starting winning opening (the order of detecting the game ball) with the holding number, and based on the establishment of the second starting condition by the entry of the game ball. Numerical data indicating the random number value MR1 for determining the special figure display result, the random number value MR2 for determining the jackpot type, and the random number value MR3 for determining the fluctuation pattern extracted by the CPU 103 from the random number circuit 104 or the like are set as pending data, and the number of them is Store until a predetermined upper limit value (for example, "4") is reached. In this way, the hold data stored in the second special figure hold storage unit indicates that the execution (variable display) of the special figure game using the second special figure is held, and the variable display result in this special figure game. Hold that makes it possible to determine whether or not it is determined to control the jackpot game state based on (special figure display result), and whether or not the variable display mode of the decorative symbol is a specific mode (for example, reach effect). It becomes stored information.

When the second special figure hold storage number is other than "0" in step 063AKS101 (step 063AKS101; No), the CPU 103 is stored in the second special figure hold storage unit corresponding to the hold number "1". As the pending data, numerical data indicating the random value MR1 for determining the special figure display result, the random value MR2 for determining the jackpot type, and the random value MR3 for determining the fluctuation pattern are read out (step 063AKS102). The numerical data read at this time may be stored in, for example, a random number buffer for fluctuation and temporarily stored.

Following the process of step 063AKS102, for example, by subtracting 1 from the second reserved storage number count value and updating, the second special figure reserved storage number is updated to be subtracted by 1, and the second special figure reserved storage is updated. The hold data indicating the random numbers MR1 to MR3 stored in the entries lower than the hold number "1" (for example, the entries corresponding to the hold numbers "2" to "4") is shifted upward one entry at a time. (Step 063AKS103). Further, in the process of step 063AKS103, the RAM 102 may be updated so as to subtract 1 from the total hold storage count value stored in the total hold storage counter. After that, the CPU 103 updates the variable special figure designation buffer value, which is the stored value of the variable special figure designation buffer, to “2” (step 063AKS104).

When the second special figure reserved storage number is "0" in step 063AKS101 (step 063AKS101; Yes), it is determined whether or not the first special figure reserved storage number is "0" (step 063AKS114). The first special figure hold storage number is the hold storage number of the special figure game using the first special figure by the first special symbol display device 4A. For example, in the process of step 063AKS114, the RAM 102 may read the first hold storage number count value stored in the first hold storage number counter, and determine whether or not the read value is “0”. As described above, the process of step 063AKS114 is executed when it is determined in step 063AKS101 that the second special figure reserved storage number is "0", and the first special figure reserved storage number is "0". Judge whether or not. As a result, the special figure game using the second special figure (special figure 2) is started to be executed with priority over the special figure game using the first special figure (special figure 1).

It should be noted that the special figure game using the second special figure is not limited to the one that is executed with priority over the special figure game using the first special figure, for example, the first start winning opening and the second starting winning opening. The execution of the special figure game may be started in the order in which the game balls enter (pass) and the start prize is generated. In this case, a table for storing data that can specify the order in which the start winnings are generated is provided, and the execution of the special figure game using either the first special figure or the second special figure is started from the stored data. It is only necessary to be able to determine.

In the present embodiment, for example, the first special figure holding storage unit is provided in a predetermined area of the RAM 102. The first special figure reservation storage unit is a special figure game (first special symbol) that has not been started yet, although the game ball enters the first start winning opening formed by the winning ball device 6A and the first start winning is generated. The reserved data of the special figure game) using the first special figure in the display device 4A is stored. As an example, the first special figure reservation storage unit associates the winning order with the first starting winning opening (the order of detecting the game ball) with the holding number, and based on the establishment of the first starting condition by the entry of the game ball. The number of stored data such as the random number value MR1 for determining the special figure display result extracted from the random number circuit 104 by the CPU 103, the random number value MR2 for determining the jackpot type, and the numerical data indicating the random number value MR3 for determining the fluctuation pattern are reserved data. Is stored until a predetermined upper limit value (for example, "4") is reached. In this way, the hold data stored in the first special figure hold storage unit indicates that the execution (variable display) of the special figure game using the first special figure is held, and the variable display result in this special figure game. Hold that makes it possible to determine whether or not it is determined to control the jackpot game state based on (special figure display result), and whether or not the variable display mode of the decorative symbol is a specific mode (for example, reach effect). It becomes stored information.

When the number of first special figure hold storage is other than "0" in step 063AKS114 (step 063AKS114; No), the hold data stored in the first special figure hold storage unit corresponding to the hold number "1". As a result, numerical data indicating the random value MR1 for determining the special figure display result, the random value MR2 for determining the jackpot type, and the random value MR3 for determining the fluctuation pattern are read out (step 063AKS115). The numerical data read at this time may be stored in, for example, a random number buffer for fluctuation and temporarily stored.

Following the process of step 063AKS115, for example, by subtracting 1 from the first reserved storage number count value and updating, the first special figure reserved storage number is updated to be subtracted by 1, and the first special figure reserved storage is updated. The hold data indicating the random numbers MR1 to MR3 stored in the entries lower than the hold number "1" (for example, the entries corresponding to the hold numbers "2" to "4") is shifted upward one entry at a time. (Step 063AKS116). Further, in the process of step 063AKS116, the RAM 102 may be updated so as to subtract 1 from the total hold storage count value stored in the total hold storage counter. After that, the CPU 103 updates the variable special figure designation buffer value to "1" (step 063AKS117).

After executing any of the processes of steps 063AKS104 and 063AKS117, the CPU 103 determines whether the special symbol display result, which is the variable display result of the special symbol, is "big hit", "small hit", or "missing". As the table to be used for this purpose, the special figure display result determination table corresponding to the variable special figure designation buffer value is selected and set (step 063AKS105). For example, when the variable special figure designation buffer value is "1", the first special figure display result determination table shown in FIG. 12-12 (a) is set in the used table. On the other hand, when the variable special figure designation buffer value is "2", the second special figure display result determination table shown in FIG. 12-12 (b) is set in the table to be used.

In the first special symbol display result determination table shown in FIG. 12-12 (a), a definite special symbol that is a variable display result in a special symbol game using the first special symbol by the first special symbol display device 4A is derived and displayed. Before It is a table referred to for determination based on the random number value MR1 for. In the second special symbol display result determination table shown in FIG. 12-12 (b), a definite special symbol that is a variable display result in a special symbol game using the second special symbol by the second special symbol display device 4B is derived and displayed. Before It is a table referred to for determination based on the random number value MR1 for.

The first special figure display result determination table shown in FIG. 12-12 (a) and the second special figure display result determination table shown in FIG. 12-12 (b) are compared with the random number value MR1 for determining the special figure display result. Numerical values (decision values) are assigned to the special figure display results of "big hit", "small hit", and "miss".

In the first special figure display result determination table shown in FIG. 12-12 (a) and the second special figure display result determination table shown in FIG. 12-12 (b), the random value MR1 for determining the special figure display result is compared. The table data indicating the determined value indicates whether or not the special figure display result is controlled as a "big hit" in the big hit game state, and whether or not the special figure display result is controlled as a "small hit" in the small hit game state. It is the decision data assigned to the decision result.

Further, in the second special figure display result determination table shown in FIG. 12-12 (b), a larger number of decision values than in the first special figure display result determination table shown in FIG. 12-12 (a) is "small hit". It is assigned to the special figure display result of. That is, the first special figure display result determination table shown in FIG. 12-12 (a) and the second special figure display result determination table shown in FIG. 12-12 (b) are the second special figure display result determination table. The determination data is assigned so that the probability of being determined to control the special figure display result as a "small hit" to the small hit game state is high.

Returning to FIG. 12-11, following the processing of step 063AKS105, the CPU 103 selects the numerical data indicating the random number value MR1 for determining the special figure display result stored in the random number buffer for variation in the special figure selected in step 063AKS105. By comparing with the decision value assigned to the "big hit" in the display result determination table, it is determined whether or not the special figure display result is the "big hit" (step 063AKS106).

After executing the process of step 063AKS106, the CPU 103 determines whether or not it is determined in step 063AKS106 that the special figure display result is "big hit" (step 063AKS107). Then, when it is determined that the special figure display result is determined to be "big hit" (step 063AKS107; Yes), the big hit flag provided in the RAM 102 is set to the on state (step 063AKS108). After that, the CPU 103 selects and sets the jackpot type determination table shown in FIG. 12-13 (b) as a table to be used for determining the jackpot type to one of a plurality of types (step 063AKS109). The CPU 103 first performs a random number lottery using the jackpot type determination table set in step 063AKS109, so that the jackpot type is variably displayed in the special figure game (“variable special figure”). "Big hit A" shown in FIG. 12-13 (a) depending on whether it is a special figure or a second special figure (whether the variable special figure buffer value is "1" or "2"). And "big hit B" (step 063AKS110).

Both "big hit A" and "big hit B" shown in FIG. 12-13 (a) are "non-probable variable big hits" that are not controlled to the probable change state after the end of the big hit game state. When it is controlled to "big hit A", it is controlled to a time saving state for a period from the end of the big hit game state until the variable display is executed five times. When it is controlled to "big hit B", it is controlled to a time saving state for a period from the end of the big hit game state until the variable display is executed once. The "big hit A", which has a longer time period controlled to the time saving state after the end of the big hit game state than the "big hit B", has a higher advantage for the player than the "big hit B". In the big hit type determination table shown in FIG. 12-13 (b), when the variable special figure is the first special figure, the big hit type is determined to be either "big hit A" or "big hit B". On the other hand, when the variable special figure is the second special figure, the big hit type is determined to be "big hit A" and is not determined to be "big hit B". With such a configuration, when the jackpot symbol is derived and displayed in the second special figure game, it is higher for the player than "big hit B" when the jackpot symbol is derived and displayed in the first special figure game. It is controlled to "big hit A", which has a high advantage of.

After returning to FIG. 12-11 and executing the process of step 063AKS110, the CPU 103 corresponds to the jackpot type determined in step 063AK110, for example, the jackpot type buffer value which is the stored value of the jackpot type buffer provided in the RAM 102. (Step 063AKS111), the determined jackpot type is stored. As an example, if the jackpot type is "big hit A", the jackpot type buffer value may be set to "0", and if it is "big hit B", it may be set to "1".

In step 063AKS107, when it is determined in step 063AKS106 that the variable display result is not determined to be a "big hit" (step 063AKS107; No), the CPU 103 is for determining the special figure display result stored in the random number buffer for variation. By comparing the numerical data indicating the random number value MR1 with the determined value assigned to the "small hit" in the special figure display result determination table selected in step 063AKS105, the special figure display result is set as the "small hit". Whether or not it is determined (step 063AKS118).

After executing the process of step 063AKS118, the CPU 103 determines in step 063AKS118 whether or not it is determined that the special figure display result is "small hit" (step 063AKS119). Then, when it is determined that the special figure display result is determined to be "small hit" (step 063AKS119; Yes), the small hit flag provided in the RAM 102 is set to the on state (step 063AKS120). After that, the CPU 103 selects and sets the small hit type determination table shown in FIG. 12-14 (b) as a table to be used for determining the small hit type to one of a plurality of types (step 063AKS121). The CPU 103 performs a random number lottery using the small hit type determination table set in step 063AKS121 to determine whether the small hit type is the first special figure or the second special figure (variation). Depending on whether the special figure buffer value is "1" or "2"), it is determined to be one of "small hit A" to "small hit E" shown in FIG. 12-14 (a) ( Step 063AKS122).

As shown in FIG. 12-14 (a), in the "small hit A" and "small hit B", the game balls that have won the large winning opening 063AK4, which is controlled to be open in the small hit game state, are the distribution members. It is a small hit type that passes through the big hit area 063AK19 by being guided to 063AK28. Specifically, in the present embodiment, when the small hit type is "small hit A" or "small hit B", the small hit start effect time is set to the above-mentioned third specific time. As described above, when the small hit start effect time is set to the third specific time, the game ball winning the big winning opening 063AK4 passes through the big hit area 063AK19. Therefore, when the small hit type is "small hit A" or "small hit B", the game ball that has won the large winning opening 063AK4 passes through the large hit area 063AK19. When the game ball winning the big winning opening 063AK4 passes through the big hit area 063AK19 in the small hit gaming state of "small hit A", it is controlled to the big hit gaming state of "big hit A" after the end of the small hit gaming state. .. On the other hand, when the game ball winning the big winning opening 063AK4 passes through the big hit area 063AK19 in the small hit gaming state of "small hit B", the big hit gaming state of "big hit B" is completed after the end of the small hit gaming state. Is controlled by.

In the "small hit C" and "small hit D", the game ball that has won the large winning opening 063AK4, which is controlled to be open in the small hit game state, is guided to the distribution member 063AK28, so that the time saving area 063AK20 is set. It is a small hit type that passes. Specifically, in the present embodiment, when the small hit type is "small hit C" or "small hit D", the small hit start effect time is set to the above-mentioned second specific time. As described above, when the small hit start effect time is set to the second specific time, the game ball winning the large winning opening 063AK4 passes through the time saving area 063AK20. Therefore, when the small hit type is "small hit C" or "small hit D", the game ball that has won the large winning opening 063AK4 passes through the time saving area 063AK20. When the game ball winning the large winning opening 063AK4 passes through the time saving area 063AK20 in the small hit gaming state of "small hit C", the variable display is executed five times after the end of the small hit gaming state. It is controlled to shorten the working hours. On the other hand, when the game ball winning the large winning opening 063AK4 passes through the time saving area 063AK20 in the small hit game state of "small hit D", the variable display is executed once after the end of the small hit game state. It is controlled to shorten the working hours over the period until.

"Small hit E" is a small hit type in which the game ball that has won the large winning opening 063AK4, which is controlled to be open in the small hit game state, is guided to the distribution member 063AK28 and passes through the loss area 063AK21. be. Specifically, in the present embodiment, when the small hit type is "small hit E", the small hit start effect time is set to the above-mentioned first specific time. As described above, when the small hit start effect time is set to the first specific time, the game ball winning the large winning opening 063AK4 passes through the loss area 063AK21. Therefore, when the small hit type is "small hit E", the game ball that has won the large winning opening 063AK4 passes through the loss area 063AK21.

In the small hit type determination table shown in FIG. 12-14 (b), when the variable special figure is the second special figure, the small hit type is set at a higher rate than when the variable special figure is the first special figure. When the game ball passes through the jackpot area 063AK19, it is configured to be determined as a "small hit A" controlled by a "big hit A" which is more advantageous to the player than the "big hit B". With such a configuration, when the small hit symbol is derived and displayed in the second special figure game and the game ball passes through the big hit area 063AK19 when the big winning opening 063AK4 is controlled to the open state, in the first special figure game. When the small hit symbol is derived and displayed and the large winning opening 063AK4 is controlled to the open state, the game is played from "Big hit B" after the end of the small hit game state at a higher rate than when the game ball passes through the large hit area 063AK19. It is controlled by "big hit A", which has a high advantage for the person.

In the small hit type determination table shown in FIG. 12-14 (b), the total of the ratio in which the small hit type is determined to be "small hit A" and the ratio in which the small hit type is determined to be "small hit B". The value corresponds to the degree of expectation that the game ball is controlled to the big hit game state after the end of the small hit game state based on the fact that the game ball has passed through the big hit area 063AK19 in the small hit game state. Further, the total value of the ratio in which the small hit type is determined to be "small hit C" and the ratio in which the small hit type is determined to be "small hit D" is the total value of the game ball in the small hit gaming state in the time saving area 063AK20. It corresponds to the expectation degree that is controlled to the time saving state after the end of the small hit game state based on passing through. Further, the ratio at which the small hit type is determined to be "small hit E" is a control that changes the game state after the end of the small hit game state based on the fact that the game ball has passed the loss area 063AK21 in the small hit game state. Corresponds to the expectation that will not be done.

As shown in FIG. 12-14 (b), when the variable special figure is the second special figure, the ratio (15%) in which the small hit type is determined to be "small hit C" and the small hit type is ". The ratio (15%) determined as "small hit D" and the total value (30%) are determined so that the small hit type is "small hit C" when the variable special figure is the first special figure. It is larger than the total value (25%) of the ratio (15%) and the ratio (10%) in which the small hit type is determined to be "small hit D". That is, in the feature unit 063AK, when the small hit symbol is derived and displayed in the second special figure game, the small hit symbol is derived and displayed at a higher rate than when the small hit symbol is derived and displayed in the first special figure game, in the small hit game state. The game ball passes through the time saving area 063AK20, and is configured to be controlled to the time saving state after the end of the small hit game state. According to such a configuration, it is possible to make the player pay attention to whether or not the small hit symbol is derived and displayed as the final special symbol of the second special symbol game, and to improve the game interest.

After returning to FIG. 12-11 and executing the process of step 063AKS122, the CPU 103 corresponds to the small hit type determined in step 063AK122, for example, a small hit which is a stored value of the small hit type buffer provided in the RAM 102. By setting the type buffer value or the like (step 063AKS123), the determined small hit type is stored. As an example, if the small hit type is "small hit A", the small hit type buffer value is set to "0", if it is "small hit B", it is set to "1", and if it is "small hit C", it is set to "2". If it is a "small hit D", it may be set to "3", and if it is a "small hit E", it may be set to "4".

In step 063AKS119, when it is determined in step 063AKS118 that the special figure display result is not determined to be "small hit" (step 063AKS119; No), or after executing the process of step 063AKS111 or step 063AKS123, the CPU 103 The definite special symbol is determined in accordance with the pre-determined result of whether or not to control the jackpot gaming state or the small hit gaming state, the determination result of the jackpot type in the case of the jackpot gaming state, and the like (step 063AKS112).

After executing the process of step 063AKS112, the CPU 103 updates the value of the special figure process flag to "1" which is a value corresponding to the variation pattern setting process (step 063AKS113), and then ends the special symbol normal process. When the number of first special figure hold storage is "0" in step 063AKS114 (step 063AKS114; Yes), the CPU 103 sets a predetermined demo display setting (step 063AKS124), and then ends the special symbol normal processing.

In the present embodiment, in the variation pattern setting process executed in step S111 of the special symbol process process, the variation pattern is determined to be any of the variation patterns PA1-1 to PB5-3 shown in FIGS. 12-15.

As shown in FIGS. 12-15, in the present embodiment, the fluctuation patterns PA1-1 to PB2-3 corresponding to the case where the variable display result is "missing" and the case where the variable display result is "big hit" are supported. The variation patterns PA3-1 to PB3-3 and the variation patterns PA4-1 to PB5-3 corresponding to the case where the variable display result is a "small hit" are set in advance.

In the present embodiment, three types of super reach, super reach A, super reach B, and super reach C, are set, and a normal reach effect is executed for the fluctuation pattern shown in FIGS. 12-15. Fluctuation patterns PB2-1, PB3-1, PB4-1, PB5-1 in which the reach effect of Super Reach C is executed together with the fluctuation patterns PA2-1, PA3-1, PA4-1, and PA5-1. Fluctuation patterns PB2-2, PB3-2, PB4-2, PB5-2 in which the reach effect of Super Reach B is executed, and variation patterns PB2-3, PB3-3, PB4 in which the reach effect of Super Reach A is executed. -3, PB5-3, and. In the present embodiment, as a reach effect of the super reach A, an effect of displaying a character image indicating the character A is performed on the screen of the image display device 5, and as a reach effect of the super reach B, a screen of the image display device 5 is displayed. In addition, an effect of displaying a character image showing the character B is performed, and as a reach effect of the super reach C, an effect of displaying a character image showing the character C is performed on the screen of the image display device 5.

Further, the fluctuation patterns PA4-1 to PB5-3 corresponding to the case where the variable display result is a "small hit" include fluctuation patterns PA4-1 and PB4-1 to PB4-3 in which the time saving suggestion effect is executed. Fluctuation patterns PA5-1 and PB5-1 to PB5-3 in which the time saving suggestion effect is not executed are included.

FIG. 12-16 is a flowchart showing an example of the process executed in step S111 of the special symbol process process as the variation pattern setting process for the feature unit 063AK.

When the variation pattern setting process is started, the CPU 103 first determines whether or not the jackpot flag is on (step 063AK201). When it is determined that the jackpot flag is on (step 063AKS201; Yes), the CPU 103 performs a random number lottery using the jackpot variation pattern determination table shown in FIG. 12-17 to display the variation pattern as "variable display result". It is determined to be one of the fluctuation patterns PA3-1 to PB3-3 corresponding to the case of "big hit" (step 063AK202).

As shown in FIG. 12-17, in the jackpot fluctuation pattern determination table, the fluctuation pattern is the fluctuation pattern PB3- in which the reach effect of Super Reach C is executed at a higher rate than the variation pattern PA3-1 in which the normal reach effect is executed. It is determined to be 1, and the reach effect of Super Reach B is executed at a higher rate than the variation pattern PB3-1. The reach effect of Super Reach A is determined at a rate higher than that of the variation pattern PB3-2. Is determined in the variation pattern PB3-3 to be executed. With such a configuration, the jackpot expectation is higher when the reach effect of Super Reach A is executed than when the reach effect of Super Reach B is executed, and the reach effect of Super Reach B is executed. The time is higher than when the reach effect of Super Reach C is executed, and the time is higher when the reach effect of Super Reach C is executed than when the normal reach effect is executed.

Returning to FIG. 12-16, when it is determined in step 063AK201 that the big hit flag is not on (step 063AKS201; No), the CPU 103 determines whether or not the small hit flag is on (step 063AKS207). When it is determined that the small hit flag is not on (step 063AK207; No), the CPU 103 performs a random number lottery using the loss fluctuation pattern determination table shown in FIG. 12-18 to display the fluctuation pattern in a variable display result. It is determined to be one of the fluctuation patterns PA1-1 to PB2-3 corresponding to the case of "loss" (step 063AKS208).

As shown in FIG. 12-18, in the loss fluctuation pattern determination table, the fluctuation pattern is executed at a rate lower than that of the fluctuation pattern PA2-1 in which the normal reach effect is executed. It is determined to be 1, and the reach effect of Super Reach B is executed at a lower rate than the variation pattern PB2-1. The reach effect of Super Reach A is determined to be the variation pattern PB2-2, which is higher than the variation pattern PB2-2. Is determined in the variation pattern PB2-3 to be executed.

Returning to FIG. 12-16, when it is determined in step 063AKS207 that the small hit flag is on (step 063AKS207; Yes), the CPU 103 determines whether or not the time saving flag provided in the RAM 102 is set to the ON state. Determine (step 063AKS209). The time saving flag is a flag indicating that the time saving state is controlled.

When it is determined that the time saving flag is not set to the ON state (step 063AKS209; No), the CPU 103 performs a random number lottery using the time saving fluctuation pattern determination table for the normal state shown in FIG. 12-19 (a). , Depending on whether the small hit type is "small hit A" to "small hit E", the variation pattern is changed to correspond to the case where the variable display result is "small hit", and the time saving suggestion effect is executed. The fluctuation pattern is determined to be one of PA4-1 to PB4-3 (step 063AKS210). Whether the small hit type is "small hit A" to "small hit E" may be specified based on the small hit type buffer value. On the other hand, when it is determined that the time saving flag is set to the ON state (step 063AKS209; Yes), the CPU 103 performs a random number lottery using the time saving fluctuation pattern determination table for the time saving state shown in FIG. 12-19 (b). As a result, depending on whether the small hit type is "small hit A" to "small hit E", the variation pattern can be changed to the case where the variable display result is "small hit", and the time saving suggestion effect can be achieved. It is determined to be one of the variation patterns PA5-1 to PB5-3 that are not executed (step 063AKS211). With such a configuration, when the small hit fluctuation is executed in the normal state, the time saving suggestion effect can be executed during the execution of the small hit fluctuation, while when the small hit fluctuation is executed in the time saving state, the small hit fluctuation is executed. The time saving suggestion effect is not executed during the execution of.

In both the time-saving fluctuation pattern determination table for the normal state shown in FIG. 12-19 (a) and the time-saving fluctuation pattern determination table for the time-saving state shown in FIG. 12-19 (b), the small hit type is the game ball. When is a "small hit A" or a "small hit B" passing through the big hit area 063AK19, the fluctuation pattern is at a higher rate than the fluctuation patterns PB4-1 and PB5-1 in which the reach effect of the super reach C is executed. The variation pattern PB4-2 and PB5-2 in which the reach effect of Super Reach B is executed is determined, and the variation pattern PB4 in which the reach effect of Super Reach A is executed at a higher rate than the variation patterns PB4-2 and PB5-2. -3, PB5-3 is determined. With such a configuration, the degree of expectation that the game ball passes through the jackpot area 063AK19 (the degree of expectation of passing through the jackpot area) is such that the reach effect of Super Reach B is executed when the reach effect of Super Reach A is executed. It is higher when the reach effect of Super Reach B is executed than when the reach effect of Super Reach C is executed. According to such a configuration, it is possible to make the player pay attention to which of the reach effects of Super Reach A to Super Reach C is executed, and to improve the interest of the game.

In both the time-saving fluctuation pattern determination table for the normal state shown in FIG. 12-19 (a) and the time-saving fluctuation pattern determination table for the time-saving state shown in FIG. 12-19 (b), the small hit type is the game ball. When is a "small hit C" or a "small hit D" passing through the time saving region 063AK20, the fluctuation pattern is at a higher rate than the fluctuation patterns PB4-3 and PB5-3 in which the reach effect of the super reach A is executed. Fluctuation patterns PB4-2 and PB5-2 in which the reach effect of Super Reach B is executed are determined, and variation patterns PB4 in which the reach effect of Super Reach C is executed at a higher rate than the variation patterns PB4-2 and PB5-2. -1, PB5-1 is determined. With such a configuration, the degree of expectation that the game ball passes through the time saving area 063AK20 (the degree of expectation of passing through the time saving area) is such that the reach effect of Super Reach B is executed when the reach effect of Super Reach C is executed. It is higher when the reach effect of Super Reach B is executed than when the reach effect of Super Reach A is executed. According to such a configuration, it is possible to make the player pay attention to which of the reach effects of Super Reach A to Super Reach C is executed, and to improve the interest of the game.

Returning to FIG. 12-16, after executing the process of step 063AKS202, 063AKS208, 063AKS210 or 063AKS211th, the CPU 103 sets the special figure fluctuation time corresponding to the determined fluctuation pattern (step 063AKS203). The special symbol fluctuation time, which is the variable display time of the special symbol, is the time required from the start of the fluctuation of the special symbol in the special symbol game until the definite special symbol that becomes the variable display result (special symbol display result) is derived and displayed. Is. The CPU 103 can set the timing at which the variable display result of the special symbol or the decorative symbol is derived by setting the special symbol fluctuation time corresponding to the fluctuation pattern. The special figure fluctuation time is set, for example, by setting a timer value according to the special figure fluctuation time in a game control process timer provided in a predetermined area of the RAM 102.

Following the process of step 063AKS203, the CPU 103 determines the special figure game using the first special figure in the first special symbol display device 4A and the special figure game using the second special figure in the second special symbol display device 4B. Among them, a setting for starting the fluctuation of the special symbol is made so as to start any of the special symbol games for which the start condition is satisfied (step 063AKS204). As an example, if the variable special figure designation buffer value is "1", a setting is made to transmit a drive signal for updating the display of the first special figure in the first special symbol display device 4A. On the other hand, if the variable special figure designation buffer value is "2", a setting is made to transmit a drive signal for updating the display of the second special figure in the second special symbol display device 4B. As a result, the special figure game is started. When the CPU 103 starts the variable display using the first special figure, the CPU 103 controls the first hold indicator 25A to display a display capable of specifying the subtracted 1st special figure hold storage number. The hold indicator 25A may be made to perform (for example, reduce the number of LEDs lit by one). When the CPU 103 starts the variable display using the second special figure, the CPU 103 controls the second hold display 25B to display a display capable of specifying the subtracted second special figure hold storage number. The hold indicator 25B may be made to perform (for example, reduce the number of LEDs lit by one).

After executing the process of step 063AKS204, the CPU 103 issues a command at the start of fluctuation of the special symbol (command at the start of fluctuation) in order to notify the effect control board 12 of the special symbol display result, the determination result of the fluctuation pattern, and the like. Set the transmission (step 063AKS205). For example, when the fluctuation special figure designation buffer value is "1", the CPU 103 sends the first fluctuation start designation command and the fluctuation pattern designation command as the fluctuation start command from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 ( Step 063AKS202, 063AKS208, 063AKS210 or 063AKS211 command including EXT data indicating the variation pattern), display result specification command (command including EXT data indicating the determined variable display result), first special figure hold storage number specification command (1 deducted 1st special figure reserved memory count value, that is, a command including EXT data indicating the 1st special figure reserved memory when one reserved memory is exhausted by the start of execution of the special figure game) is sequentially executed. Set the transmission settings for transmission. On the other hand, when the fluctuation special figure designation buffer value is "2", the CPU 103 sends the second fluctuation start designation command and the fluctuation pattern designation command as the fluctuation start command from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 ( Step 063AKS202, 063AKS208, 063AKS210 or 063AKS211 command including EXT data indicating the variation pattern), display result specification command (command including EXT data indicating the determined variable display result), second special figure hold storage number specification command (The second special figure reserved memory count value reduced by 1, that is, the command including the EXT data indicating the second special figure reserved memory when one reserved memory is exhausted by the start of execution of the special figure game) is sequentially executed. Set the transmission settings for transmission. In the present embodiment, in the display result designation command (variable display result notification command), the determination result (predetermined result) of whether the variable display result is "miss", "big hit", or "small hit" is used. , The decision result of which of the multiple types of big hits should be used when the variable display result is "big hit" (big hit type determination result), and multiple types of small hit types when the variable display result is "small hit" Different EXT data are set according to the determination result (small hit type determination result) of which one to be used.

After executing the process of step 063AKS205, the CPU 103 updates the value of the special symbol process flag to "2" which is a value corresponding to the special symbol variation process (step 063AKS206), and then ends the special symbol normal process.

FIG. 12-20 is a flowchart showing an example of the process executed in step S113 of the special symbol process process as the special symbol stop process with respect to the feature unit 063AK.

When the special symbol stop processing is started, the CPU 103 first determines whether or not the special symbol confirmation display flag provided in the predetermined area of the RAM 102 is on (step 063AKS301). Here, the flag for confirming the special figure is set to the ON state by the process of step 063AKS305 described later in response to the derivation and display of the confirmed special symbol that is the variable display result in the special figure game.

When the flag for confirming the special symbol is off (step 063AKS301; No), the CPU 103 makes a setting for deriving and displaying the confirmed special symbol (step 063AKS302), and issues a decorative symbol stop command to the effect control board 12. Make settings for transmission (step 063AKS303). The decorative symbol stop command is also called a symbol confirmation command, and is a command that specifies that the variable display (variation) of the decorative symbol is terminated and the display result (stop symbol) is derived and displayed.

After executing the process of step 063AKS303, the CPU 103 sets a predetermined time as the special figure confirmation display time (step 063AKS304). In the process of step 063AKS304, the special figure confirmation display time timer value, which is a stored value of the special figure confirmation display time timer provided in the predetermined area of the RAM 102, is set to a value corresponding to the predetermined special figure confirmation display time. After that, the CPU 103 sets the special symbol confirmation display flag to the on state (step 063AKS305), and then ends the special symbol stop process.

In step 063AKS301, when the special figure confirmation display flag is on (step 063AKS301; Yes), the CPU 103 determines whether or not the special figure confirmation display time has elapsed (step 063AKS306). For example, in the process of step 063AKS306, the special figure confirmation display time timer value is updated by subtracting 1, and the special figure confirmation is performed according to whether or not the updated special figure confirmation display time timer value is “0”. It may be determined whether or not the display time has elapsed. If the special symbol confirmation display time has not elapsed in step 063AKS306 (step 063AKS306; No), by ending the special symbol stop process, the process waits until the special symbol confirmation display time elapses.

When the special figure confirmation display time has elapsed in step 063AKS306 (step 063AKS306; Yes), the CPU 103 clears the special figure confirmation display flag and turns it off (step 063AKS307), and then is the jackpot flag turned on? It is determined whether or not (step 063AKS308). At this time, if the jackpot flag is on (step 063AKS308; Yes), a predetermined time is set as the jackpot start effect waiting time (step 063AKS309). The jackpot start effect waiting time corresponds to the jackpot start effect time when the jackpot start effect (big hit fanfare effect) is executed. In the process of step 063AK309, the jackpot start effect waiting time timer value, which is the stored value of the jackpot start effect waiting time timer provided in the predetermined area of the RAM 102, is set to a value corresponding to the predetermined jackpot start effect waiting time. After executing the process of step 063AKS309, the CPU 103 makes a setting for transmitting a hit start designation command (big hit fanfare command) corresponding to the big hit from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 (step 063AKS310).

After executing the process of step 063AKS310, the CPU 103 clears the jackpot flag and puts it in the off state (step 063AKS311), and clears the time saving flag and puts it in the off state (step 063AKS312). After that, the CPU 103 makes settings for transmitting a game state designation command (effect control command for designating the current game state in pachinko game 1) indicating a normal state from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 (step). 063AKS313).

Next, the CPU 103 sets the open count value, which is a stored value of the open count counter provided in the predetermined area of the RAM 102, to a value corresponding to the upper limit number of rounds (15 in the present embodiment) in the jackpot game state (15 times in the present embodiment). In this embodiment, it is set to "15") (step 063AKS314).

After executing the process of step 063AKS314, the CPU 103 clears the time reduction counter (063AKS315). The time reduction counter is provided in a predetermined area of the RAM 102 and counts the time reduction number, which is the remaining number of variable displays controlled in the time reduction state. In the process of step 063AKS315, the time reduction counter is cleared, so that the time reduction count value, which is the stored value of the time reduction counter, is set to "0" as the initial value. After that, the CPU 103 updates the value of the special figure process flag to "4", which is a value corresponding to the jackpot release pre-processing (step 063AKS316), and then ends the special symbol stop process.

When it is determined in step 063AKS308 that the big hit flag is not on (step 063AKS308; No), the CPU 103 determines whether or not the small hit flag is on (step 063AKS317). When it is determined that the small hit flag is not on (step 063AKS317; No), the CPU 103 updates the value of the special figure process flag to "0" which is a value corresponding to the special symbol normal processing (step 063AKS318).

When it is determined in step 063AKS317 that the small hit flag is on (step 063AKS317; Yes), the CPU 103 sets the small hit start effect waiting time to any of the above-mentioned first specific time to third specific time. (Step 063AKS319). The small hit start production waiting time corresponds to the small hit start production time. Specifically, in step 063AKS319, the CPU 103 sets the small hit start effect waiting time by referring to the small hit start effect waiting time determination table shown in FIG. 12-21, and the small hit type is "small hit A" to "small hit A" to ". It is determined to be any of the first specific time to the third specific time according to which of the small hit E ”, and is a stored value of the small hit start effect waiting time timer provided in the predetermined area of the RAM 102. The hit start effect waiting time timer value is set to a value corresponding to the determined small hit start effect waiting time. The small hit type may be specified based on the small hit type buffer value.

As shown in FIG. 12-21, in the present embodiment, when the small hit type is "small hit A" or "small hit B", the small hit start effect time is set to the third specific time. Then, the waiting time for the small hit start effect is also determined at the third specific time. When the small hit type is "small hit C" or "small hit D", the small hit start effect waiting time is also the second specific corresponding to the small hit start effect time being set to the second specific time. Determined by time. When the small hit type is "small hit E", the small hit start effect waiting time is also determined to be the first specific time corresponding to the small hit start effect time being set to the first specific time.

After executing the process of step 063AKS319, the CPU 103 makes a setting for transmitting a hit start designation command (small hit fanfare command) according to the small hit from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 (step 063AKS320). ..

After executing the process of step 063AKS320, the CPU 103 controls the distribution member 063AK28 to start the operation according to the distribution member operation pattern (step 063AKS321). After that, the CPU 103 clears the small hit flag and puts it in the off state (step 063AKS322), and the opening number count value corresponds to the upper limit opening number of opening and closing of the large winning opening in the small hit game state (10 times in this embodiment). (In this embodiment, "10") is set (step 063AKS323). After executing the process of step 063AKS323, the CPU 103 updates the value of the special figure process flag to “8”, which is a value corresponding to the small hit release preprocessing (step 063AKS324).

After executing the process of step 063AKS318 or step 063AKS324, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the time saving flag is on (step 063AKS325). When it is determined that the time saving flag is not on (step 063AKS325; No), the CPU 103 ends the special symbol stop process.

When it is determined that the time reduction flag is on (step 063AKS325; Yes), the CPU 103 updates by subtracting 1 from the time reduction count value (step 063AKS326), and the updated time reduction count value is "0". Whether or not it is determined (step 063AKS327). When it is determined that the time reduction count value is not "0" (step 063AKS327; No), the CPU 103 ends the special symbol stop process.

When it is determined that the time reduction count value is "0" (step 063AKS327; Yes), the CPU 103 clears the time reduction flag and sets it to the off state (step 063AKS328), and transmits a game state specification command indicating the normal state. (Step 063AKS329) is performed, and the special symbol stop process is terminated.

FIG. 12-22 is a flowchart showing an example of the processing executed in step S118 of the special symbol process processing as the small hit opening preprocessing with respect to the feature unit 063AK.

When the small hit opening pre-processing is started, the CPU 103 first determines whether or not the small hit start effect waiting time has elapsed (step 063AKS401). In the process of step 063AKS401, the small hit start effect waiting time timer value is updated by subtracting 1, and the small hit start is started depending on whether or not the updated small hit start effect waiting time timer value is "0". It is determined whether or not the production waiting time has elapsed. When it is determined that the small hit start effect waiting time has not elapsed (step 063AKS401; No), the CPU 103 ends the small hit release pre-processing.

When it is determined in step 063AKS401 that the small hit start effect waiting time has elapsed (step 063AKS401; Yes), the CPU 103 controls the distribution unit supply solenoid 063AK12 to be in the ON state (step 063AKS402). After that, the CPU 103 sets a predetermined time as the game ball holding time (step 063AKS403). In step 063AKS403, the CPU 103 sets the game ball holding time timer value, which is the stored value of the game ball holding time timer provided in the predetermined area of the RAM 102, to a value corresponding to the predetermined game ball holding time. After executing the process of step 063AKS403, the CPU 103 updates the value of the special figure process flag to “9” which is a value corresponding to the process during the small hit opening (step 063AKS404), and ends the small hit opening preprocessing.

FIG. 12-23 is a flowchart showing an example of the process executed in step S119 of the special symbol process process as the process during the opening of the small hit with respect to the feature unit 063AK.

When the small hit opening process is started, the CPU 103 first determines whether or not the opening count value is “0” (step 063AKS501). When it is determined that the opening count value is not "0" (step 063AKS501; No), the CPU 103 determines that the number of game balls that have won the large winning opening 063AK4 in the small hit game state is a predetermined upper limit in the small hit game state. It is determined whether or not the number of winnings (10 in this embodiment) or more (step 063AKS502). In step 063AKS502, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the number of game balls detected by the large winning opening switch 063AK5 (the number of times the game balls are detected by the large winning opening switch 063AK5) is equal to or greater than the upper limit winning number.

If it is determined in step 063AKS502 that the number of game balls that have won the large winning opening 063AK4 is less than the maximum number of winnings (step 063AKS502; No), the CPU 103 determines whether or not it is the opening timing of the large winning opening 063AK4. (Step 063AKS503). When it is determined that it is the opening timing of the large winning opening 063AK4 (step 063AKS503; Yes), the CPU 103 controls the large winning opening 063AK4 to the open state by controlling the solenoid 82 for the large winning opening door to the on state. (Step 063AKS504), the setting for transmitting the designated command during the opening of the large winning opening is made (step 063AKS505). After performing the process of step 063AKS505, the CPU 103 updates by subtracting 1 from the release count value (step 063AKS506).

After executing the process of step 063AKS506, or when it is determined in step 063AKS503 that it is not the opening timing of the large winning opening 063AK4 (step 063AKS503; No), the CPU 103 determines whether or not it is the closing timing of the large winning opening 063AK4. (Step 063AKS507). When it is determined that it is not the closing timing of the large winning opening 063AK4 (step 063AKS507; No), the CPU 103 ends the processing during the small hit opening. When it is determined that it is the closing timing of the large winning opening 063AK4 (step 063AKS507; Yes), the CPU 103 controls the large winning opening 063AK4 to the closed state by controlling the solenoid 82 for the large winning opening door to the off state. (Step 063AKS508). After executing the process of step 063AKS508, the CPU 103 makes a setting for transmitting the designated command after opening the big winning opening (step 063AKS509), and ends the process during the small hit opening.

When it is determined in step 063AKS501 that the open count value is "0" (step 063AKS501; Yes), or when it is determined in step 063AKS502 that the number of game balls that have won the large winning opening 063AK4 is equal to or greater than the maximum number of winnings. (Step 063AKS502; Yes), the CPU 103 determines whether or not the game ball holding time has elapsed (step 063AKS510). In step 063AKS510, the CPU 103 updates the game ball holding time timer value by subtracting 1, and the game ball holding time elapses depending on whether or not the updated game ball holding time timer value is "0". Determine if it has been done. When it is determined that the game ball holding time has not elapsed (step 063AKS510; No), the CPU 103 ends the small hit opening process.

When it is determined in step 063AKS510 that the game ball holding time has elapsed (step 063AKS510; Yes), the CPU 103 controls the distribution unit supply solenoid 063AK12 to the off state (step 063AKS511).

After executing the process of step 063AKS511, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the game ball that has won the big winning opening 063AK4 in the small hit game state has passed through any of the big hit area 063AK19, the time saving area 063AK20, and the loss area 063AK21. (Step 063AKS512). In step 063AKS512, the CPU 103 is in the small hit gaming state depending on whether or not any of the big hit area passing flag, the time saving area passing flag, and the losing area passing flag provided in the predetermined area of the RAM 102 is on. It is determined whether or not the game ball winning the big winning opening 063AK4 has passed through any of the big hit area 063AK19, the time saving area 063AK20, and the losing area 063AK21.

When it is determined that the game ball has not passed through any of the jackpot region 063AK19, the time saving region 063AK20, or the loss region 063AK21 (step 063AKS512; No), the CPU 103 determines whether or not the jackpot region passage switch 063AK22 is turned on (big hit region). It is determined (whether or not the passing switch 063AK22 has detected the game ball) (step 063AKS518). When it is determined that the big hit area passing switch 063AK22 is turned on (step 063AKS518; Yes), the CPU 103 sets the big hit area passing flag to the on state (step 063AKS519), and ends the processing during the small hit opening.

When it is determined in step 063AKS518 that the jackpot area passing switch 063AK22 is not on (step 063AKS518; No), the CPU 103 determines whether or not the time saving area passing switch 063AK23 is turned on (the time saving area passing switch 063AK23 detects the game ball). Whether or not it was done) is determined (step 063AKS520). When it is determined that the time saving area passing switch 063AK23 is turned on (step 063AKS520; Yes), the CPU 103 determines whether or not the time saving flag is turned on (step 063AKS521). When it is determined that the time saving flag is not on (step 063AKS521; No), the CPU 103 sets the time saving area passing flag to the on state (step 063AKS522), and ends the small hit opening process.

When it is determined in step 063AKS520 that the time saving area passing switch 063AK23 is not on (step 063AKS520; No), the CPU 103 determines whether or not the losing area passing switch 063AK24 is turned on (the losing area passing switch 063AK24 detects the game ball. Whether or not it was done) is determined (step 063AKS523). When it is determined that the loss area passing switch 063AK24 is not on (step 063AKS523; No), the CPU 103 ends the small hit opening process.

When it is determined in step 063AKS523 that the loss area passing switch 063AK24 is turned on (step 063AKS523; Yes), or when it is determined in step 063AKS521 that the time saving flag is on (step 063AKS521; Yes), the CPU 103 is lost. The area passage flag is set to the ON state (step 063AKS524), and the processing during the small hit opening process is completed.

As described above, in the present embodiment, even when it is determined that the time saving area passing switch 063AK24 is turned on (step 063AKS520; Yes), it is determined that the time saving flag is on (step 063AKS521; Yes). Occasionally, the lost area passage flag is set to the on state without the time saving area passing flag being set to the on state.

In step 063AKS512, when it is determined that the game ball has passed any of the jackpot area 063AK19, the time saving area 063AK20, or the loss area 063AK21 (step 063AKS512; Yes), the CPU 103 wins the big winning opening 063AK4 in the small hit game state. It is determined whether or not all the game balls have been discharged to the outside of the special variable winning ball device 7 (step 063AKS513). In step 063AKS513, the CPU 103 includes the number of game balls detected by the discharge count switch 063AK16 (the number of times the game balls are detected by the discharge count switch 063AK16) and the number of game balls detected by the jackpot area discharge count switch (big hit). The number of game balls detected by the area discharge count switch), the number of game balls detected by the time saving area discharge count switch (the number of times the game ball was detected by the time saving area discharge count switch), and the lost area discharge count switch. Whether or not the total value of the number of game balls detected by (the number of times the game balls are detected by the loss area discharge count switch) matches the number of game balls detected by the grand prize opening switch 063AK5. Accordingly, it is determined whether or not all the game balls that have won the large winning opening 063AK4 have been discharged to the outside of the special variable winning ball device 7.

In step 063AKS513, when it is determined that all the game balls that have won the large winning opening 063AK4 have not been discharged to the outside of the special variable winning ball device 7 (step 063AKS513; No), the CPU 103 ends the processing during the small hit opening process. do. On the other hand, when it is determined that all the game balls that have won the large winning opening 063AK4 have been discharged to the outside of the special variable winning ball device 7 (step 063AKS513; Yes), the CPU 103 sets the distribution member operation pattern by the distribution member 063AK28. Control is performed to end the according operation (step 063AKS514).

After executing the process of step 063AKS514, the CPU 103 makes a setting for transmitting a hit end designation command (small hit ending command) according to the small hit from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 (step 063AKS515).

In step 063AKS515, the CPU 103 determines whether or not it is controlled to the big hit game state or the time saving state after the end of the small hit game state as a hit end designation command according to the small hit, and changes to the big hit game state after the end of the small hit game state. An effect control command indicating the type of big hit when controlled and the number of variable displays controlled to the time saving state when controlled to the time saving state after the end of the small hit game state is transmitted.

Specifically, in step 063AK515, the CPU 103 refers to the hit end designation command determination table shown in FIG. 12-24 to determine the states of the big hit area pass flag, the time saving area pass flag, and the lost area pass flag, and the small hit type. According to the above, one of the small hit end designation command 1 to the small hit end designation command 5 is selected as the hit end designation command according to the small hit, and the setting for transmitting the selected command is made.

More specifically, as shown in FIG. 12-24, when the big hit area passing flag is set to the on state and the small hit type is "small hit A", "big hit A" is completed after the end of the small hit game state. The small hit end designation command 1 indicating that the game is controlled to the big hit game state is selected. When the big hit area passing flag is set to the on state and the small hit type is "small hit B", it indicates that the small hit is controlled to the big hit game state of "big hit B" after the end of the small hit game state. The end specification command 2 is selected. When the time saving area passing flag is set to the on state and the small hit type is "small hit C", the time saving state is controlled for a period until the variable display is executed 5 times after the end of the small hit game state. The small hit end designation command 3 indicating that the command is to be performed is selected. When the time saving area passing flag is set to the on state and the small hit type is "small hit D", the time saving state is controlled for the period from the end of the small hit game state until the variable display is executed once. The small hit end designation command 4 indicating that the command is to be performed is transmitted. When the loss area passage flag is set to the ON state, the small hit end specification command 5 indicating that the control to change the game state is not performed after the end of the small hit game state is transmitted regardless of the small hit type. Will be done.

After returning to FIG. 12-23 and executing the process of step 063AKS515, the CPU 103 sets the passage notification effect waiting time to any of the above-mentioned first special time to third special time (step 063AKS516). The passage notification effect waiting time corresponds to the passage notification effect time. In step 063AKS516, the CPU 103 sets the passing notification effect waiting time to the state of the jackpot area passing flag, the time saving area passing flag, and the lost area passing flag by referring to the passing notification effect waiting time determination table shown in FIG. 12-25. Correspondingly, it was determined to be one of the first special time to the third special time, and the passage notification effect waiting time timer value, which is the stored value of the passing notification effect waiting time timer provided in the predetermined area of the RAM 102, was determined. Set to a value corresponding to the passage notification effect waiting time.

As shown in FIG. 12-25, in the present embodiment, when the jackpot area passing flag is set to the on state, the passing notification effect waiting time is set to the third special time, and the time saving area passing flag is turned on. When is set to, the passage notification effect waiting time is set to the second special time, and when the loss area passage flag is set to the ON state, the passage notification effect waiting time is set to the first special time. NS.

After returning to FIG. 12-23 and executing the process of step 063AKS516, the CPU 103 updates the value of the special figure process flag to “10” which is a value corresponding to the small hit end process (step 063AKS517), and releases the small hit. End the middle process.

FIG. 12-26 is a flowchart showing an example of the process executed in step S120 of the special symbol process process as the small hit end process for the feature unit 063AK.

When the small hit end process is started, the CPU 103 first determines whether or not the passage notification effect waiting time has elapsed (step 063AKS601). In step 063AKS601, the CPU 103 updates the passage notification effect waiting time timer value by subtracting 1, and waits for the passage notification effect depending on whether or not the updated passage notification effect waiting time timer value is "0". Determine if time has passed. When it is determined that the passage notification effect waiting time has not elapsed (step 063KS601; No), the CPU 103 ends the small hit end process.

When it is determined that the passage notification effect waiting time has elapsed (step 063AKS617), the CPU 103 determines whether or not the jackpot area passage flag is on (step 063AKS602). When it is determined that the jackpot area passing flag is on (step 063AKS602; Yes), the CPU 103 clears the jackpot area passing flag and sets it to the off state (step 063AKS603).

After executing the process of step 063AKS603, the CPU 103 sets the big hit type buffer value according to the small hit type (step 063AKS604). Specifically, in step 063AKS604, if the small hit type is "small hit A" controlled to the big hit gaming state of "big hit A" after the end of the small hit gaming state, the jackpot type buffer value is set to "big hit A". While setting the corresponding "0", if the small hit type is "small hit B" which is controlled to the big hit game state of "big hit B" after the end of the small hit game state, the big hit type buffer value is set to "big hit B". Set to "1" corresponding to "". The small hit type may be specified based on the small hit type buffer value.

After executing the process of step 063AKS604, the CPU 103 sets a predetermined time as the jackpot start effect waiting time (step 063AKS605), and transmits a hit start designation command according to the jackpot from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12. (Step 063AKS606). After executing the process of step 063AKS606, the CPU 103 clears the time saving flag to turn it off (step 063AKS607), and transmits a game state designation command indicating a normal state from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12. Make the settings (step 063AKS608). Next, the CPU 103 sets the open number count value to a value corresponding to the upper limit number of rounds in the jackpot game state (step 063AKS609), and clears the time reduction counter (063AKS610). After that, the CPU 103 updates the value of the special figure process flag to "4", which is a value corresponding to the large hit release pre-processing (step 063AKS611), and then ends the small hit end processing.

When it is determined in step 063AKS602 that the jackpot area passing flag is not on (step 063AKS602; No), the CPU 103 determines whether or not the time saving area passing flag is on (step 063AKS612). When it is determined that the time saving area passing flag is on (step 063AKS612; Yes), the CPU 103 clears the time saving area passing flag and sets it to the off state (step 063AKS613).

After executing the process of step 063AKS613, the CPU 103 sets the time saving flag to the ON state (step 063AKS614), and sets the time saving number count value according to the small hit type (step 063AKS615). Specifically, in step 063AKS615, if the small hit type is "small hit C", which is controlled to be in a time saving state over a period from the end of the small hit gaming state until the variable display is executed five times, the time saving count value. Is set to "5", while if the small hit type is "small hit D", which is controlled to be in a time saving state for a period from the end of the small hit game state until the variable display is executed once, the time saving count is counted. Set the value to "1". The small hit type may be specified based on the small hit type buffer value. After executing the process of step 063AKS615, the CPU 103 makes a setting for transmitting a game state designation command indicating a time saving state from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 (step 063AKS616).

When it is determined in step 063AKS612 that the time saving area passing flag is not on (step 063AKS612; No), the CPU 103 clears the losing area passing flag and sets it to the off state (step 063AKS617).

After performing the process of step 063AKS616 or step 063AKS617, the CPU 103 updates the value of the special figure process flag to "0" which is a value corresponding to the special symbol normal process (step 063AKS618), and then performs the small hit end process. finish.

As described above, in the present embodiment, the small hit end process is started in response to the completion of the small hit opening process in which the large winning opening is opened, and the game ball passes through the time saving area 063AK20 (step 063AKS612). ; Yes), in the small hit end process, the time saving flag is set to the ON state (step 063AKS614). With such a configuration, when the big winning opening 063AK4 is controlled to the open state, when the game ball passes through the time saving area 063AK20, it is not controlled to the time saving state until the big winning opening 063AK4 is controlled to the closed state. It is configured.

In the game control timer interrupt process shown in the flowchart of FIG. 4, the feature unit 063AK executes each of the above-described processes as the process in the special symbol process process of step S25, and also executes the above-described processes as the information output process of step S23. Similarly, the process shown in the flowchart of FIGS. 11-36 is executed. With such a configuration, in the information output process of step S23, the feature unit 063AK has the jackpot signal 1 indicating that the jackpot is being hit and the jackpot signal 1 indicating that the jackpot is being hit and the jackpot is being hit or the time is shortened (in the special prize). In addition to the jackpot signal 2 indicating that there is), the jackpot signal 3 indicating that the time is being shortened is output to an external device such as a hall management computer installed outside the pachinko gaming machine 1.

According to such a configuration, when the time saving state is controlled based on the end of the big hit game state, and in the normal state, the game ball which has won the big winning opening 063AK4 in the small hit game state has the time saving area 063AK4. In either case, the time saving state is controlled after the end of the small hit game state based on the passage, or the time saving state or the consecutive villa state can be preferably specified in the external device.

FIG. 12-27 is a flowchart showing an example of the process executed in step S171 of the effect control process process as the variable display start setting process for the feature unit 063AK.

When the variable display start setting process is started, the effect control CPU 120 first determines whether or not the sub-side time saving flag provided in the predetermined area of the RAM 122 is on (step 063AKS701). The sub-side time saving flag is a flag indicating that the time saving state is controlled. When it is determined that the sub-side time reduction flag is on (step 063AKS701; Yes), the effect control CPU 120 sets the sub-side time reduction count value, which is the stored value of the sub-side time reduction counter provided in the predetermined area of the RAM 122. It is updated by subtracting one (step 063AKS702). The sub-side time reduction counter counts the number of time reductions (the remaining number of variable displays controlled in the time reduction state).

After executing the process of step 063AKS702, the effect control CPU 120 makes a setting for executing the time reduction number notification effect for notifying the time reduction number of times (step 063AKS703). In the present embodiment, as the time reduction number notification effect, an effect of displaying a time reduction number notification image indicating the time reduction number on the screen of the image display device 5 can be executed. In the time reduction number notification effect, the time reduction number notification image is displayed in a display mode indicating the current time reduction number based on the sub-side time reduction count value. In the present embodiment, the time saving number notification effect is executed when the variable display is executed in the time saving state.

After executing the process of step 063AKS703, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the right-handed promotion effect flag provided in the predetermined area of the RAM 122 is on (step 063AKS704). When it is determined that the right-handed promotion effect flag is not on (step 063AKS704; No), the effect control CPU 120 sets the right-handed promotion effect flag to the on state (step 063AKS705), and controls to start the right-handed promotion effect. (Step 063AKS706).

After executing the process of step 063AKS706, the effect control CPU 120 sets the setting for executing the time-saving rush effect to notify that the control to the time-saving state has started (controlled from the normal state to the time-saving state). (Step 063AKS707). In the present embodiment, as the time saving rush effect, the first time saving rush image showing the message "time saving!" And the message "Put the ball into the electric chew aiming to the right!" Are shown on the screen of the image display device 5. The effect of displaying the second time-saving rush image is executed. The second time-saving rush image is a production image that urges the player to win a game ball in the variable winning ball device 6B. In the present embodiment, the time saving rush effect is executed when the variable display is first executed after being controlled from the normal state to the time saving state.

After executing the process of step 063AKS707, when it is determined in step 063AKS701 that the sub-side time saving flag is not on (step 063AKS701; No), and when it is determined in step 063AKS704 that the right-handed promotion effect flag is on. (Step 063AKS704; Yes), the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the special figure display result is a "big hit" based on the display result designation command transmitted from the main board 11 (step 063AKS708). When it is determined that the special symbol display result is a "big hit" (step 063AKS708; Yes), the effect control CPU 120 is a decoration that is a jackpot combination as a final stop symbol that is a final stop symbol that is a variable display result of the decorative symbol. The combination of symbols is determined (step 063AKS709). In step 063AKS709, the effect control CPU 120 uses, for example, a random number lottery by referring to the decoration symbol determination table of the jackpot combination prepared in advance stored in the ROM 121 to obtain the decoration symbol of the jackpot combination as the final decoration symbol. decide.

When it is determined in step 063AKS708 that the special figure display result is not a "big hit" (step 063AKS708; No), the effect control CPU 120 displays the special figure based on the display result designation command transmitted from the main board 11. It is determined whether or not the result is a "small hit" (step 063AKS710). When it is determined that the special figure display result is not "small hit" (step 063AKS710; No), the effect control CPU 120 determines the combination of decorative symbols to be a lost combination as the final decorative symbol (step 063AKS711). In step 063AKS711, the effect control CPU 120 uses, for example, a random number lottery by referring to the decoration symbol determination table of the loss combination prepared in advance stored in the ROM 121 to obtain the decoration symbol of the loss combination as the final decoration symbol. decide.

When it is determined in step 063AKS710 that the special figure display result is "small hit" (step 063AKS710; Yes), the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the sub-side time saving flag is on (step 063AKS712). ..

When it is determined that the sub-side time saving flag is not set to the ON state (step 063AKS712; No), the effect control CPU 120 sets the normal state small hit time confirmation decoration symbol determination table shown in FIGS. 12-28 (b). By performing a random number lottery using the random number, as a fixed decorative symbol (final stop symbol) that becomes a small hit combination according to which of the small hit types "small hit A" to "small hit E", FIG. 12 Any one of the first small hit symbol to the fifth small hit symbol shown in −28 (a) is determined (step 063AKS713). Which of the small hit types "small hit A" to "small hit E" may be specified based on the display result designation command or the like transmitted from the main board 11. On the other hand, when it is determined that the sub-side time saving flag is set to the ON state (step 063AKS712; Yes), the effect control CPU 120 determines the small hit time confirmation decorative symbol for the time saving state shown in FIGS. 12-28 (c). By performing a random number lottery using the table, depending on which of the small hit types "small hit A" to "small hit E", the small hit combination is a fixed decorative symbol (final stop symbol). One of the first small hit symbol to the fifth small hit symbol shown in FIG. 12-28 (a) is determined (step 063AKS714).

In the first small hit symbol shown in FIG. 12-28 (a), the decorative symbol indicating the number "7" is displayed in the "left" and "right" decorative symbol display areas 5L and 5R, and is "middle". This is a combination of decorative symbols in which a rectangular decorative symbol in red indicating a message of "V" suggesting that the player is controlled to the jackpot game state is displayed in the decorative symbol display area 5C. As for the second small hit symbol, the decorative symbol indicating the number "7" is displayed in the "left" and "right" decorative symbol display areas 5L and 5R, and the big hit is displayed in the "middle" decorative symbol display area 5C. It is a combination of decorative symbols in which a blue rectangular decorative symbol indicating the message "V" suggesting that the game is controlled is displayed. As for the third small hit symbol, the decorative symbol indicating the number "7" is displayed in the decorative symbol display areas 5L and 5R of "left" and "right", and the time is shortened in the decorative symbol display area 5C of "middle". It is a combination of decorative symbols in which a red rectangular decorative symbol indicating the message "time" suggesting that the state is controlled is displayed. As for the 4th small hit symbol, the decorative symbol indicating the number "7" is displayed in each of the "left" and "right" decorative symbol display areas 5L and 5R, and the time is shortened in the "middle" decorative symbol display area 5C. It is a combination of decorative symbols in which a blue rectangular decorative symbol indicating the message "time" suggesting that the state is controlled is displayed. As for the 5th small hit symbol, the decorative symbol indicating the number "7" is displayed in each of the "left" and "right" decorative symbol display areas 5L and 5R, and the "middle" decorative symbol display area 5C is displayed. It is a combination of decorative symbols in which a white rectangular decorative symbol indicating the message "small" is displayed. The first small hit symbol and the second small hit symbol are a combination of decorative symbols suggesting that the jackpot game state is controlled. The third small hit symbol and the fourth small hit symbol are a combination of decorative symbols suggesting that the time saving state is controlled.

In the small hit determination decorative symbol determination table for the normal state shown in FIG. 12-28 (b), when the small hit type is "small hit A" or "small hit B" in which the game ball passes through the large hit area 063AK19. , The fixed decorative symbol is determined to be the 4th small hit symbol at a higher rate than the 5th small hit symbol, and is determined to be the 3rd small hit symbol at a higher rate than the 4th small hit symbol, and is determined from the 3rd small hit symbol. Is also determined as the second small hit symbol at a high rate, and is determined as the first small hit symbol at a higher rate than the second small hit symbol. With such a configuration, the degree of expectation that the game ball passes through the big hit area 063AK19 and is controlled to the big hit game state after the end of the small hit game state is when the first small hit symbol is derived and displayed as a definite decorative symbol. This is higher than when the second small hit symbol is derived and displayed, and when the second small hit symbol is derived and displayed as the final decorative symbol, it is higher than when the third small hit symbol is derived and displayed. It was higher, and when the 3rd small hit symbol was derived and displayed as the final decoration symbol, it was higher than when the 4th small hit symbol was derived and displayed, and the 4th small hit symbol was derived and displayed as the final decoration symbol. The time is higher than when the fifth small hit symbol is derived and displayed. According to such a configuration, it is possible to make the player pay attention to which of the first small hit symbol to the fifth small hit symbol is derived and displayed as the final decorative symbol, and to improve the interest of the game.

Further, in the small hit fixed decoration symbol determination table for the normal state, as shown in FIGS. 12-28 (b), the third small hit symbol and the fourth small hit symbol suggesting that the fixed decorative symbol is controlled to the time saving state. It is configured so that it can be determined as a small hit pattern. According to such a configuration, in the normal state, the player can derive and display the third small hit symbol or the fourth small hit symbol, which suggests that the fixed decorative symbol is controlled in the time saving state. Based on the fact that the game ball has passed through the time saving area 063AK20, the time saving transition control is performed to give a feeling of expectation that the game ball is controlled to the time saving state, and the game interest can be improved.

Specifically, in the small hit fixed decorative symbol determination table for the normal state, as shown in FIG. 12-28 (b), the small hit type is "small hit C" or "small hit C" in which the game ball passes through the time saving area 063AK20. In the case of "small hit D", the fixed decorative symbol is determined to be the first small hit symbol at a higher rate than the fifth small hit symbol, and is determined to be the second small hit symbol at a higher rate than the first small hit symbol. , The fourth small hit symbol is determined at a higher rate than the second small hit symbol, and the third small hit symbol is determined at a higher rate than the fourth small hit symbol. With such a configuration, the degree of expectation that the game ball passes through the time saving area 063AK20 and is controlled to the time saving state after the end of the small hit game state is when the third small hit symbol is derived and displayed as a fixed decorative symbol. However, it is higher than when the 4th small hit symbol is derived and displayed, and when the 4th small hit symbol is derived and displayed as the final decorative symbol, it is higher than when the 2nd small hit symbol is derived and displayed. , When the second small hit symbol is derived and displayed as the final decorative symbol, it is higher than when the first small hit symbol is derived and displayed, and when the first small hit symbol is derived and displayed as the final decorative symbol. Is higher than when the fifth small hit symbol is derived and displayed. According to such a configuration, it is possible to make the player pay attention to which of the first small hit symbol to the fifth small hit symbol is derived and displayed as the final decorative symbol, and to improve the interest of the game.

On the other hand, in the small hit time-saving fixed decoration symbol determination table for the time-saving state shown in FIG. 12-28 (c), the third small hit symbol and the fourth small hit suggesting that the fixed decoration symbol is controlled to the time-saving state. It is configured so that it is not determined as a winning symbol. According to such a configuration, in the time saving state, when the game ball passes through the time saving area 063AK20, the time saving transition control based on the passage is not performed, but the time saving state is controlled as a fixed decorative symbol. The third small hit symbol or the fourth small hit symbol is derived and displayed, and the player is expected to be controlled to the time saving state based on the fact that the game ball has passed the time saving area 063AK20. It is configured so that it is possible to prevent the player from being hugged and to suppress the decline in the interest in the game. As described above, in the present embodiment, the third small hit symbol or the fourth small hit symbol, which suggests that the fixed decoration symbol is controlled in the time saving state in the normal state, can be derived and displayed, while the fixed decoration in the time saving state can be derived and displayed. Since the third small hit symbol or the fourth small hit symbol is not derived and displayed as a symbol, a suitable effect can be performed according to the state.

Returning to FIG. 12-27, after executing the processes of step 063AKS709, step 063AKS711, step 063AKS713 or step 063AKS714, the effect control CPU 120 determines the effect control pattern (step 063AKS715). In step 063AKS715, the effect control CPU 120 has a plurality of types of effect control patterns (special figure variation time effect control pattern) prepared (set) in advance according to the variation pattern indicated by the variation pattern designation command received from the main board 11. ), And set it as the effect control pattern to be used. When the setting for executing the time saving number of times notification effect is made in step 063AKS703, the effect control pattern (time saving number of times notification effect control pattern) corresponding to the time saving number of times notification effect is selected and used in step 063AKS715. Set as a pattern. When the setting for executing the time saving rush effect control is made in step 063AKS707, as the effect control pattern (time saving rush effect control pattern) to select and use the effect control pattern corresponding to the time saving rush effect in step 063AKS715. set.

After executing the process of step 063AKS715, the effect control CPU 120 sets the initial value of the effect control process timer provided in the predetermined area of the RAM 122 according to the variation pattern indicated by the variation pattern designation command received from the main board 11. Set (step 063AKS716).

After executing the process of step 063AKS716, the effect control CPU 120 makes a setting for starting variable display of a decorative pattern or the like on the screen of the image display device 5 (step 063AKS717). In step 063AKS717, the effect control CPU 120 transmits, for example, a display control command (command) specified by the display control data included in the effect control pattern determined in step 063AKS715 to the VDP of the display control unit 123. Variable display of decorative symbols is started in the "left", "middle", and "right" decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R provided on the screen of the image display device 5.

After executing the process of step 063AKS717, the effect control CPU 120 sets the settings for updating the display of the hold display or the active display displayed on the screen of the image display device 5 in response to the start of the variable display. (Step 063AKS718).

After executing the process of step 063AKS718, the effect control CPU 120 updates the value of the effect process flag to "2", which is a value corresponding to the effect process during variable display (step 063AKS719), and performs the variable display start setting process. finish.

FIG. 12-29 is a flowchart showing an example of the process executed in step S172 of the effect control process process as the effect process during variable display with respect to the feature unit 063AK.

When the effect processing during variable display is started, the effect control CPU 120 first determines whether or not the special figure variation time, which is the variable display time corresponding to the variation pattern, has elapsed based on, for example, the timer value of the effect control process timer. Is determined (step 063AKS801). Specifically, in step 063AKS801, the effect control CPU 120 updates the timer value of the effect control process timer by, for example, subtracting 1, and the effect control pattern determined in step 063AKS715 (effect control pattern when the special figure fluctuates). ) To determine whether or not the end code has been read corresponding to the updated timer value, thereby determining whether or not the variable display time has elapsed.

When it is determined that the variable display time has not elapsed (step 063AKS801; No), whether or not the effect control CPU 120 is in the reach effect period in which the reach effect is executed based on the timer value of the effect control process timer or the like. (Step 063AKS802). The reach effect period may be predetermined, for example, in the effect control pattern (effect control pattern when the special figure fluctuates) determined in step 063AKS715. When it is determined that the reach effect period is reached (step 063AKS802; Yes), the effect control CPU 120 controls to execute the reach effect (step 063AKS803).

After executing the process of step 063AKS803, or when it is determined in step 063AKS802 that it is not the reach effect period (step 063AKS802; No), the effect control CPU 120 determines the number of time reductions based on the timer value of the effect control process timer and the like. It is determined whether or not it is the time saving number of times notification effect period in which the notification effect is executed (step 063AKS804). The time reduction number notification effect period may be predetermined, for example, in the effect control pattern (time reduction number notification effect control pattern) determined in step 063AKS715. When it is determined that the time reduction number notification effect period is reached (step 063AKS804; Yes), the effect control CPU 120 controls to execute the time reduction number notification effect (step 063AKS805).

After executing the process of step 063AKS805, or when it is determined in step 063AKS804 that it is not the time saving number notification effect period (step 063AKS804; No), the effect control CPU 120 is based on the timer value of the effect control process timer and the like. It is determined whether or not the time saving suggestion effect is executed in the time saving suggestion effect period (step 063AKS806). The time saving suggestion effect period may be predetermined, for example, in the effect control pattern (effect control pattern when the special figure fluctuates) determined in step 063AKS715. When it is determined that the time saving suggestion effect period is reached (step 063AKS806; Yes), the effect control CPU 120 controls to execute the time saving suggestion effect (step 063AKS807).

After executing the process of step 063AKS807, or when it is determined in step 063AKS806 that it is not the time saving suggestion effect period (step 063AKS806; No), the effect control CPU 120 reduces the time based on the timer value of the effect control process timer or the like. It is determined whether or not the rush effect is executed in the time-saving rush effect period (step 063AKS808). The time-saving rush effect period may be predetermined, for example, in the effect control pattern (time-saving rush effect control pattern) determined in step 063AKS715. When it is determined that the time saving rush effect period is reached (step 063AKS808; Yes), the effect control CPU 120 controls to execute the time saving rush effect (step 063AKS809).

After executing the process of step 063AKS809, or when it is determined in step 063AKS808 that it is not the time saving rush effect period (step 063AKS808; No), the effect control CPU 120 is set in the effect control pattern determined in step 063AKS715. Based on this, other control is performed to execute the effect during the variable display including the variable display operation of the decorative symbol (step 063AKS810), and the effect process during the variable display is terminated.

When it is determined in step 063AKS801 that the variable display time has elapsed (step 063AKS801; Yes), the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not a symbol determination command has been received from the main board 11 (step 063AKS811). When it is determined that the symbol confirmation command has not been received (step 063AKS811; No), the effect control CPU 120 ends the effect processing during variable display.

When it is determined that the symbol confirmation command has been received (step 063AKS811; Yes), the effect control CPU 120 transmits a predetermined display control command to the VDP of the display control unit 123, thereby transmitting "left" and "middle". In each of the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of "right", the fixed decorative symbol as the final stop symbol determined in step 063AKS709, step 063AKS711, or step 063AKS712 is derived and displayed (step 063AKS812).

After executing the process of step 063AKS812, the effect control CPU 120 sets a predetermined time as the waiting time for receiving the hit start designation command (step 063AKS813), and sets the value of the effect process flag to a value corresponding to the special figure hit wait process. It is updated to "3" (step 063AKS814), and the effect processing during variable display is terminated.

FIG. 12-30 (a) is a flowchart showing an example of the process executed in step S173 of the effect control process process as the special figure hit wait process for the feature unit 063AK.

When the special figure hit waiting process is started, the effect control CPU 120 first determines whether or not the hit start designation command reception waiting time has elapsed (step 063AKS901). When it is determined that the hit start designation command reception waiting time has elapsed (step 063AKS901; Yes), the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the sub-side time reduction flag is on (step 063AKS902).

When it is determined that the sub-side time reduction flag is on (step 063AKS902; Yes), the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the sub-side time reduction count value is "0" (step 063AKS903). When it is determined that the sub-side time reduction count value is "0" (step 063AKS903; Yes), the effect control CPU 120 clears the sub-side time reduction flag and sets it to the off state (step 063AKS904) to promote right-handed strike. After clearing the effect flag and setting it to the off state (step 063AKS905), control is performed to end the right-handed promotion effect (step 063AKS906).

After executing the process of step 063AKS906, or when it is determined in step 063AKS902 that the sub-side time saving flag is not on (step 063AKS902; No), the sub-side time saving count value is not "0" in step 063AKS903. When the determination is made (step 063AKS903; No), the effect control CPU 120 updates the value of the effect process flag to “0”, which is a value corresponding to the variable display start wait process (step 063AKS907), and waits for the special figure. To finish.

When it is determined in step 063AKS901 that the waiting time for receiving the hit start designation command has not elapsed (step 063AKS901; No), the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the hit start designation command corresponding to the jackpot has been received. (Step 063AKS908).

When it is determined that the hit start designation command corresponding to the jackpot has been received (step 063AKS908; Yes), the effect control CPU 120 sets a predetermined time as the jackpot start effect time (step 063AKS909). In step 063AKS909, the jackpot start effect time timer value, which is a stored value of the jackpot start effect time timer provided in the predetermined area of the RAM 122, is set to a value corresponding to the predetermined jackpot start effect time. After executing the process of step 063AKS909, the effect control CPU 120 controls to start the jackpot start effect (step 063AKS910), and sets the value of the effect process flag to "6", which is a value corresponding to the effect process during the jackpot. After updating (step 063AKS911), the waiting process for hitting the special figure is terminated.

If it is determined in step 063AKS908 that the hit start designation command corresponding to the big hit has not been received (step 063AKS908; No), the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the hit start designation command corresponding to the small hit has been received. Determine (step 063AKS912). When it is determined that the hit start designation command corresponding to the small hit has not been received (step 063AKS912; No), the effect control CPU 120 ends the special figure hit waiting process.

When it is determined that the hit start designation command corresponding to the small hit has been received (step 063AKS912; Yes), the effect control CPU 120 sets the small hit start effect time to any of the first specific time to the third specific time. (Step 063AKS913). Specifically, in step 063AKS913, the effect control CPU 120 sets the small hit start effect time by referring to the small hit start effect time determination table shown in FIG. 12-30 (b), and the small hit type is "small hit". Depending on which of "A" to "small hit E", it is determined to be any of the first specific time to the third specific time, and the stored value of the small hit start effect time timer provided in the predetermined area of the RAM 122. The small hit start effect time timer value is set to a value corresponding to the determined small hit start effect time. The small hit type may be specified based on the display result designation command transmitted from the main board 11.

As shown in FIG. 12-30 (b), in the present embodiment, when the small hit type is "small hit A" or "small hit B", the small hit start effect time is set to the third specific time. When the small hit type is "small hit C" or "small hit D", the small hit start effect time is set to the second specific time, and when the small hit type is "small hit E", the small hit start effect The time is set to the first specific time.

After returning to FIG. 12-30 (a) and executing the process of step 063AKS913, the effect control CPU 120 controls to start the small hit start effect (step 063AKS914), and sets the value of the effect process flag during the small hit. After updating to "4", which is a value corresponding to the effect processing (step 063AKS915), the special figure hit waiting process is terminated.

FIG. 12-31 is a flowchart showing an example of the process executed in step S174 of the effect control process process as the small hit medium effect process with respect to the feature unit 063AK.

When the small hit middle effect process is started, the effect control CPU 120 first determines whether or not the small hit start effect time set in step 063AKS913 has elapsed (step 063AKS1001). In step 063AKS1001, the small hit start effect time timer value is updated by subtracting 1, and the small hit start effect time elapses depending on whether or not the updated small hit start effect time timer value is "0". Determine if it has been done. When it is determined that the small hit start effect time has not elapsed (step 063AKS1001; No), the effect control CPU 120 ends the small hit medium effect process.

When it is determined that the small hit start effect time has elapsed (step 063AKS1001; Yes), the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the small hit start effect end flag provided in the predetermined area of the RAM 122 is on (step 063AKS1001; Yes). Step 063AKS1002). When it is determined that the small hit start effect end flag is not on (step 063AKS1002; No), the effect control CPU 120 controls to end the small hit start effect (step 063AKS1004) and turns on the small hit start effect end flag. Set to the state (step 063AKS1005).

After executing the process of step 063AKS1005, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the sub-side time saving flag is on (step 063AKS1006). When it is determined that the sub-side time reduction flag is not on (step 063AKS1006; No), the effect control CPU 120 controls to start the normal pass-through effect (step 063AKS1007), and ends the small hit medium effect process. On the other hand, when it is determined that the sub-side time saving flag is on (step 063AKS1006; Yes), the effect control CPU 120 controls to start the time saving time passing fanning effect (step 063AKS1008), and ends the small hit medium effect process. do.

When it is determined in step 063AKS1002 that the small hit start effect end flag is on (step 063AKS1002; Yes), the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not a hit end designation command corresponding to the small hit has been received (step 063AKS1002; Yes). Step 063AKS1003). When it is determined that the hit end designation command corresponding to the small hit has not been received (step 063AKS1003; No), the effect control CPU 120 ends the small hit middle effect process.

When it is determined that the hit end designation command corresponding to the small hit has been received (step 063AKS1003; Yes), the effect control CPU 120 clears the small hit start effect end flag, sets it to the off state (step 063AKS1009), and passes. After controlling to end the normal time passing fanning effect or the time saving passing fanning effect being executed as the time fanning effect (step 063AKS1010), the value of the effect process flag is set to a value corresponding to the small hit end effect processing. Update to 5 ”(step 063AKS1011).

After executing the process of step 063AKS1011, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not it has received either the small hit end designation command 1 or the small hit end designation command 2 as the hit end designation command according to the small hit. Determine (step 063AKS1012).

When it is determined that either the small hit end designation command 1 or the small hit end designation command 2 has been received (step 063AKS1012; Yes), the effect control CPU 120 sets the passage notification effect time to the third special time (step 063AKS1012; Yes). Step 063AKS1013). In step 063AKS1013, the passage notification effect time timer value, which is a stored value of the passage notification effect time timer provided in the predetermined area of the RAM 122, is set to a value corresponding to the third special time.

After executing the process of step 063AKS1013, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the sub-side time saving flag is on (step 063AKS1014). When it is determined that the sub-side time reduction flag is not on (step 063AKS1014; No), the effect control CPU 120 controls to start the normal large hit area passage notification effect (step 063AKS1015), and ends the small hit medium effect process. do. When it is determined that the sub-side time saving flag is on (step 063AKS1014; Yes), the effect control CPU 120 controls to start the time saving big hit area passage notification effect (step 063AKS1016), and ends the small hit medium effect process. do.

When it is determined in step 063AKS1012 that neither the small hit end designation command 1 nor the small hit end designation command 2 has been received (step 063AKS1012; No), the effect control CPU 120 specifies the hit end according to the small hit. As a command, it is determined whether or not any of the small hit end designation command 3 and the small hit end designation command 4 is received (step 063AKS1017).

When it is determined that either the small hit end designation command 3 or the small hit end designation command 4 has been received (step 063AKS1017; Yes), the effect control CPU 120 sets the passage notification effect time to the second special time (step 063AKS1017; Yes). Step 063AKS1018). In step 063AKS1018, the passage notification effect time timer value is set to a value corresponding to the second special time. After executing the process of step 063AKS1018, the effect control CPU 120 controls to start the time saving area passage notification effect (step 063AKS1019), and ends the small hit medium effect process.

When it is determined in step 063AKS1017 that neither the small hit end designation command 3 nor the small hit end designation command 4 has been received (step 063AKS1017; No), the effect control CPU 120 sets the passage notification effect time to the first special. Set to time (step 063AKS1020). In step 063AKS1020, the passage notification effect time timer value is set to a value corresponding to the first special time. After executing the process of step 063AKS1020, the effect control CPU 120 controls to start the loss area passage notification effect (step 063AKS1021), and ends the small hit medium effect process.

FIG. 12-32 is a flowchart showing an example of the process executed in step S175 of the effect control process process as the small hit end effect process for the feature unit 063AK.

When the small hit end effect process is started, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the passage notification effect time set in step 063AKS1013, step 063AKS1018, or step 063AKS1020 has elapsed (step 063AKS1101). In step 063AKS1101, the passage notification effect time timer value is updated by subtracting 1, and whether or not the passage notification effect time has elapsed depending on whether or not the updated passage notification effect time timer value is "0". Is determined. When it is determined that the passage notification effect time has not elapsed (step 063AKS1101; No), the effect control CPU 120 ends the small hit end effect process.

When it is determined that the passage notification effect time has elapsed (step 063AKS1101; Yes), the effect control CPU 120 uses the small hit end specification command 1 and the small hit end specification command 2 as the hit end specification commands according to the small hits. It is determined whether or not any of them has been received (step 063AKS1102). When it is determined that either the small hit end designation command 1 or the small hit end designation command 2 has been received (step 063AKS1102; Yes), the effect control CPU 120 sets a predetermined time as the hit start designation command reception waiting time. (Step 063AKS1103), the value of the effect process flag is updated to "3", which is a value corresponding to the special figure hit wait process (step 063AKS1104), and the small hit end effect process is terminated.

When it is determined in step 063AKS1102 that neither the small hit end designation command 1 nor the small hit end designation command 2 has been received (step 063AKS1102; No), the effect control CPU 120 specifies the hit end according to the small hit. As a command, it is determined whether or not any of the small hit end designation command 3 and the small hit end designation command 4 is received (step 063AKS1105). When it is determined that either the small hit end designation command 3 or the small hit end designation command 4 has been received (step 063AKS1105; Yes), the effect control CPU 120 sets the sub-side time reduction flag to the ON state (step 063AKS1106). ).

After executing the process of step 063AKS1106, the effect control CPU 120 receives a sub-hit end designation command 3 or a small hit end designation command 4 as a hit end designation command according to the small hit. The side time reduction count value is set (step 063AKS1107). When the small hit end designation command 3 indicating that the variable display is controlled to the time saving state is received for a period from the end of the small hit game state until the variable display is executed five times, in step 063AKS1107, the sub-side time saving count value is set. Set to "5". When the small hit end designation command 4 indicating that the variable display is controlled to the time saving state is received for the period from the end of the small hit game state until the variable display is executed once, in step 063AKS1107, the sub-side time saving count value is set. Set to "1".

When it is determined in step 063AKS1105 that neither the small hit end designation command 3 nor the small hit end designation command 4 has been received (step 063AKS1105; No), the effect control CPU 120 has the sub-side time reduction flag turned on. Whether or not it is determined (step 063AKS1108). When it is determined that the sub-side time reduction flag is on (step 063AKS1108; Yes), the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the sub-side time reduction count value is "0" (step 063AKS1109).

When it is determined that the sub-side time reduction count value is "0" (step 063AKS1109; Yes), the effect control CPU 120 clears the sub-side time reduction flag and sets it to the off state (step 063AKS1110) to promote right-handed strike. After clearing the effect flag and setting it to the off state (step 063AKS1111), control is performed to end the right-handed promotion effect (step 063AKS1112).

After executing the process of step 063AKS1107 or step 063AKS1112, or when it is determined in step 063AKS1108 that the sub-side time saving flag is not on (step 063AKS1108; No), the sub-side time saving count value is "0" in step 063AKS1109. If it is determined that this is not the case (step 063AKS1109; No), the effect control CPU 120 updates the value of the effect process flag to “0”, which is a value corresponding to the variable display start waiting process (step 063AKS1113), and makes a small hit. End The production process ends.

Hereinafter, an example of the effect operation according to the feature unit 063AK will be described with reference to FIGS. 12-33 to 12-36.

First, with reference to FIGS. 12-33 and 12-34, an example of the effect operation in the case where the small hit variation is executed in the normal state will be described. Specifically, hereinafter, the small hit fluctuation is executed in the normal state, and during the small hit fluctuation, the reach effect of Super Reach A and the time saving suggestion effect are executed, and the third small hit symbol is executed as the final decorative symbol. Will be described using an example in which is derived and displayed.

In the normal state, FIGS. 12-33 (a) show the lost symbols (“135”) in the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of the image display device 5. Indicates the stopped display state. In FIG. 12-33 (b), the small hit fluctuation is started in the normal state, and the variable display of the decorative symbol is executed in each of the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of "left", "middle", and "right". It shows the state that is being done.

FIG. 12-33 (c) shows a state in which the reach is established and the character image AK6 showing the character A is displayed on the screen of the image display device 5 as the reach effect of the super reach A. ..

In FIG. 12-33 (d), the time saving suggestion effect is started, and a predetermined lost symbol (“767”) is provisionally set in each of the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R. Indicates the stopped display state. FIG. 12-24 (e) shows a state in which the decorative symbol is revariably displayed in the “middle” decorative symbol display area 5C in the time saving suggestion effect. FIG. 12-33 (f) shows a state in which the time saving suggestion symbols are temporarily stopped and displayed in the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R in the time saving suggestion effect. There is. FIG. 12-33 (g) shows a state in which the decorative symbols are revariably displayed in the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of the “left”, “middle”, and “right” in the time saving suggestion effect. Shown.

In FIG. 12-33 (h), the third small hit symbol is derived and displayed as a fixed decorative symbol in each of the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of "left", "middle", and "right", and the small hit variation. Indicates the finished state.

In FIG. 12-33 (i), the control to the small hit game state is started, and as the small hit start effect, the screen of the image display device 5 has the shape of an arrow pointing to the right, and "Aim to the right! AK8, a right arrow image showing the message, and AK9, a small hit start image showing the message "Put a ball here!", While showing the shape of the special variable winning ball device 7. Indicates the state of being. In the state shown in FIG. 12-33 (i), the right-handed promotion effect is started in response to the start of control to the small hit game state, and the right-handed promotion image AK7 showing an arrow pointing in the right direction is displayed as an image. It is displayed on the screen of the device 5.

In the normal state, after the effect operation shown in FIG. 12-33 (i) is executed, the effect operation shown in FIG. 12-34 (a) is executed. FIG. 12-34 (a) shows a state in which the normal passage fanning effect is being executed. In the normal time passing fanning effect, as shown in FIG. 12-34 (a), the big hit area passing fanning image AK2, the time saving area passing fanning image AK3, and the lost area passing fanning image AK4 are displayed on the screen of the image display device 5. The normal time passing fan image AK1 including the Is it a short time? Is it a loss? "

Hereinafter, the effect operation when the game ball passes through the jackpot area 063AK19 while the normal pass fanning effect is being executed in the normal state will be described.

In the normal state, when the game ball passes through the jackpot area 063AK19, the effect operation shown in FIG. 12-34 (a) is completed, and the effect operation shown in FIG. 12-34 (b) is executed. FIG. 12-34 (b) shows a state in which the normal time jackpot area passage notification effect is executed and the normal time jackpot area passage notification image AK10 indicating the message “V” is displayed on the screen of the image display device 5. ing.

FIG. 12-34 (c) shows that after the small hit game state is completed, the big hit game state is controlled, and as a big hit start effect, the screen of the image display device 5 has the shape of an arrow pointing in the right direction. Shows the state in which the effect of displaying the first jackpot start image AK11 showing the message "Aim to the right!" And the second jackpot start image AK12 showing the message "Put the ball into the attacker!" Is being executed. There is. The second big hit start image AK12 is a production image that urges the player to win a game ball in the special variable winning ball device 7. In the state shown in FIG. 12-34 (c), the right-handed promotion effect is subsequently executed when the small hit game state is controlled, and the right-handed promotion image AK7 is displayed on the screen of the image display device 5. Has been done.

Next, in the normal state, when the normal time passing fanning effect is being executed, the effect operation when the game ball passes through the time saving area 063AK20 will be described.

In the normal state, the effect operation shown in FIG. 12-34 (a) ends and the effect operation shown in FIG. 12-34 (d) is executed in response to the game ball passing through the time saving region 063AK20. FIG. 12-34 (d) shows a state in which the time-saving area passage notification effect is executed and the time-saving area passage notification image AK13 indicating the message “lucky!” Is displayed on the screen of the image display device 5.

FIG. 12-34 (e) shows the screen of the image display device 5 as a time saving rush effect, in which the normal state is controlled to the time saving state according to the start of the next variable display after the small hit game state is finished. In addition, the effect of displaying the first time-saving rush image AK14 showing the message "Time saving!" And the second time-saving rush image AK15 showing the message "Aim at the right and put the ball in the electric chew!" Is executed. Indicates the state of. In the state shown in FIG. 12-34 (e), the right-handed promotion effect is subsequently executed when the small hit game state is controlled, and the right-handed promotion image AK7 is displayed on the screen of the image display device 5. Has been done. Further, in the state shown in FIG. 12-34 (e), the time reduction number notification effect is executed according to the time reduction state, and the time reduction number notification image AK16 is displayed on the screen of the image display device 5. It is displayed in a display mode indicating that the number of times is four.

Next, in the normal state, the effect operation when the game ball passes through the loss area 063AK21 while the normal pass fanning effect is being executed will be described.

In the normal state, the effect operation shown in FIG. 12-34 (a) ends and the effect operation shown in FIG. 12-34 (f) is executed in response to the game ball passing through the loss region 063AK21. FIG. 12-34 (f) shows a state in which the loss area passage notification effect is executed and the loss area passage notification image AK17 indicating the message “Sorry!” Is displayed on the screen of the image display device 5.

In FIG. 12-34 (g), after the small hit game state ends, when the game state is controlled to the normal state without changing, the next variable display is started, and “left”, “middle”, It shows a state in which variable display is executed in each decorative symbol display area 5L, 5C, 5R on the “right”.

Hereinafter, an example of the effect operation in the case where the small hit variation is executed in the time saving state will be described with reference to FIGS. 12-35 and 12-36. Specifically, hereinafter, a case where the small hit variation is executed in the time saving state, the reach effect of Super Reach A is executed during the small hit variation, and the third small hit symbol is derived and displayed as the final decorative symbol. It will be described using an example.

In FIG. 12-35 (a), the lost symbols (“135”) are shown in the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of the image display device 5 “left”, “middle”, and “right” in the time saving state. Indicates the stopped display state. In the state shown in FIG. 12-35 (a), the right-handed promotion effect is executed, and the right-handed promotion image AK7 is displayed on the screen of the image display device 5. Further, in the state shown in FIG. 12-35 (a), the time reduction number notification effect is executed, and the time reduction number notification image AK16 is displayed on the screen of the image display device 5 to indicate that the time reduction number is 4 times. It is displayed in the mode.

In FIG. 12-35 (b), the small hit fluctuation is started in the time saving state, and the variable display of the decorative symbol is executed in each of the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of "left", "middle", and "right". It shows the state that is being done. In the state shown in FIG. 12-35 (b), the display mode of the time reduction number notification image AK16 is updated in response to the start of the variable display, and is displayed in a display mode indicating that the time reduction number is 3 times. Has been done.

FIG. 12-35 (c) shows a state in which the reach is established, the reach effect of the super reach A is executed, and the character image AK6 showing the character A is displayed on the screen of the image display device 5.

In FIG. 12-35 (d), the second small hit symbol is derived and displayed as a fixed decorative symbol in each of the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of "left", "middle", and "right", and the small hit variation. Indicates the finished state.

In FIG. 12-35 (e), the control to the small hit game state is started, the small hit start effect is executed, and the right arrow image AK8 and the start image AK9 are displayed on the screen of the image display device 5. Indicates the state. In the state shown in FIG. 12-35 (e), the right-handed promotion effect is continuously executed in response to the start of control to the small hit game state, and the right-handed promotion image AK7 is displayed on the screen of the image display device 5. Has been done.

In the time saving state, after the effect operation shown in FIG. 12-35 (e) is executed, the effect operation shown in FIG. 12-36 (a) is executed. FIG. 12-36 (a) shows a state in which the time-saving time-passing fanning effect is being executed. In the time-saving time-passing fanning effect, as shown in FIG. 12-36 (a), the time-saving time-passing fanning image including the jackpot area passing fanning image AK2 and the lost area passing fanning image AK4 is displayed on the screen of the image display device 5. AK5 is displayed, and the jackpot region light emitting unit 063AK25 and the loss region light emitting unit 063AK27 are made to emit light without causing the time-saving region light emitting unit 063AK26 provided in the special variable winning ball device 7 to emit light. An effect is performed to output a short-time passing fanning voice indicating the message "Is it?"

Hereinafter, the effect operation when the game ball passes through the jackpot area 063AK19 while the time-saving time-saving passing fanning effect is being executed in the time-saving state will be described.

In the time saving state, the effect operation shown in FIG. 12-36 (a) is completed and the effect operation shown in FIG. 12-36 (b) is executed in response to the game ball passing through the jackpot area 063AK19. FIG. 12-36 (b) shows a state in which the time-saving big hit area passage notification effect is executed and the time-saving big hit area passage notification image AK18 indicating the message “BONUS!” Is displayed on the screen of the image display device 5. Shown.

In FIG. 12-36 (c), after the small hit game state is completed, the big hit start effect is executed under the control of the big hit game state, and the first big hit start image AK11 and the second big hit are displayed on the screen of the image display device 5. The state in which the start image AK12 is displayed is shown. In the state shown in FIG. 12-36 (c), the right-handed promotion effect is subsequently executed when the small hit game state is controlled, and the right-handed promotion image AK7 is displayed on the screen of the image display device 5. Has been done.

Next, the effect operation when the game ball passes through the time saving area 063AK20 or the loss area 063AK21 while the time saving time passing fanning effect is being executed in the time saving state will be described. In the time saving state, the same effect operation is executed when the game ball passes through the time saving area 063AK20 and when the game ball passes through the losing area 063AK21.

In the time saving state, the effect operation shown in FIG. 12-36 (a) is completed and the effect operation shown in FIG. 12-36 (d) is executed in response to the game ball passing through the time saving area 063AK or the loss area 063AK21. Will be done. FIG. 12-36 (d) shows a state in which the loss area passage notification effect is executed and the loss area passage notification image AK17 is displayed on the screen of the image display device 5.

In FIG. 12-36 (e), after the small hit game state is completed, when the game state is controlled to the time saving state without changing, the next variable display is started, and “left”, “middle”, It shows a state in which variable display is executed in each decorative symbol display area 5L, 5C, 5R on the “right”. In the state shown in FIG. 12-36 (e), the display mode of the time reduction number notification image AK16 is updated in response to the start of the variable display, and is displayed in a display mode indicating that the time reduction number is twice. Has been done. Further, in the state shown in FIG. 12-36 (e), the right-handed promotion effect is subsequently executed when the small hit game state is controlled, and the right-handed promotion image AK7 is displayed on the screen of the image display device 5. It is displayed in.

As described above, in the feature unit 063AK, the small hit symbol (special display result) is derived and displayed as a confirmed special symbol in the special figure game in the normal state, and is formed in the special variable winning ball device 7 (variable means). When the game ball (game medium) passes through the time saving area 063AK20 (special area) when the large winning opening 063AK4 is controlled to the open state, the time saving transition control is performed based on the passage, and the time saving from the normal state is shortened. While controlling to the state (special state), the small hit symbol is derived and displayed as a confirmed special symbol in the special figure game when the time is shortened, and when the large winning opening 063AK4 is controlled to the open state, the game ball is shortened. When the region 063AK20 is passed, the time saving transition control based on the passage is not performed. Further, in the feature unit 063AK, when the small hit symbol is derived and displayed in the special figure game in the normal state and the large winning opening 063AK4 is controlled to the open state, the game ball passes through the time saving area 063AK20 and the time saving state. In the special figure game, the small hit symbol is derived and displayed, and when the large winning opening 063AK4 is controlled to the open state, a different effect can be executed depending on whether the game ball passes through the time saving area 063AK20. .. According to such a configuration, suitable control can be performed according to the state.

Further, in the feature unit 063AK, the same effect is produced when the game ball passes through the time saving area 063AK20 in the time saving state and when neither of the jackpot area 063AK19 and the time saving area 063AK20 passes in the time saving state. It is configured to be executable. According to such a configuration, it is possible to suppress a decrease in the interest in the game.

Further, the feature unit 063AK is configured to be capable of executing different effects depending on whether the game ball passes through the jackpot area 063AK19 in the time saving state and when the game ball passes through the jackpot area 063AK19 in the normal state. According to such a configuration, it is possible to improve the game entertainment.

Further, in the feature unit 063AK, different effects are variably displayed depending on whether the small hit symbol is derived and displayed in the special figure game in the normal state and the small hit symbol is derived and displayed in the special figure game in the time saving state. It is configured to be executable during execution. According to such a configuration, it is possible to perform a suitable effect depending on the state.

Further, in the feature unit 063AK, when the small hit symbol is derived and displayed in the special figure game in the normal state, it is controlled to the time saving state as an effect suggesting that the small hit symbol is derived and displayed as the confirmed special symbol. It is configured so that the time saving suggestion effect suggesting that can be executed during the execution of the variable display. According to such a configuration, it is possible to execute various effects and improve the game entertainment.

Further, in the feature unit 063AK, when the small hit symbol is derived and displayed as the confirmed special symbol in the second special symbol game, it is higher than when the small hit symbol is derived and displayed as the confirmed special symbol in the first special symbol game. It is configured to be controlled in a time-saving state at a rate. According to such a configuration, it is possible to make the player pay attention to whether the small hit symbol is derived and displayed as the definite special symbol in the second special symbol game, and to improve the game interest.

The present invention is not limited to the above-described embodiment, and various modifications and applications are possible. For example, the pachinko gaming machine 1 does not have to have all the technical features shown in the above embodiment, and is shown in the above embodiment so as to solve at least one problem in the prior art. It may have a part of the configuration.

In the above embodiment, as a look-ahead notice effect, the display mode of the hold display displayed on the image display device 5 is displayed in a display mode different from the display mode in the normal time, so that the hold display can be changed. In the display, the game ball that has entered the large winning opening 063AK4 that is controlled to the small hit gaming state or is controlled to the open state in the small hit gaming state is either the big hit area 063AK19, the time saving area 063AK20, or the loss area 063AK21. The hold display change effect for notifying the passing of the image may be made feasible.

For example, by changing the display color of the hold display corresponding to the variable display that has not been started yet by the hold display change effect, the display color of the hold display is changed to blue, green, or red, which is different from the normal white color, so that the hold display can be displayed. The game ball that has entered the big winning opening 063AK4, which is controlled to the small hit game state by making the change in the display mode recognizable and controlled to the open state in the small hit game state, has the big hit area 063AK19, the time saving area. It may be configured so that it can be suggested that it passes through either 063AK20 or the lost area 063AK21.

Specifically, when the hold display change effect is configured to be executable as a look-ahead notice, the look-ahead judgment is performed based on the occurrence of the start prize in the start prize determination process executed in step S101 of the special symbol process process. You just have to be. In the look-ahead determination, for example, by referring to the first special figure display result determination table shown in FIG. 12-12 (a) and the second special figure display result determination table shown in FIG. 12-12 (b), a random number lottery is performed. , Fig. 12-14 when the process of pre-reading whether the variable display result is "big hit", "small hit", or "missing", or when the variable display result is pre-reading as "small hit" By performing a random number lottery with reference to the small hit type determination table shown in (b), a process of pre-reading and determining which of the small hit types "small hit A" to "small hit E" is performed is performed. Just do it. After that, in the start winning determination process, a setting for transmitting a start winning command indicating the result of the look-ahead determination may be made.

The start prize command that has been set to be transmitted in the start prize determination process is mainly generated by executing the command control process in step S27 of the game control timer interrupt process shown in the flowchart of FIG. It is transmitted from the board 11 to the effect control board 12. The start winning command transmitted from the main board 11 is provided in a predetermined area of the RAM 122 at the time of starting winning by executing the command analysis process in step S75 of the effect control main process shown in the flowchart of FIG. It may be stored in the command buffer.

In this case, in the pre-reading notice setting process executed in step S161 of the effect control process process, whether or not the hold display change effect as the pre-reading notice effect is executed in response to receiving the start winning command from the main board 11. And the execution mode may be determined.

In the hold storage that is stored when determining whether to execute the hold display change effect and the execution mode, the hold that the variable display result is "big hit" and the variable display result are "small hit", and the small hit type is , After the end of the variable display executed first, that is, the destination, when any of the "small hit C" or the "small hit D" hold in which the game ball passes through the time saving area 063AK20 is included. By changing from the normal state to the time saving state before executing the variable display corresponding to the hold of the read notice target, the variable display is performed at the time of pre-reading and at the time of executing the variable display corresponding to the hold of the read notice target. Results and variation patterns may vary. In such a case, there will be an inconsistency between the suggested content of the hold display change effect as the look-ahead notice effect and the actual variable display result or variation pattern, which will lead to distrust of the player and reduce the game interest. There is a risk.

Therefore, in the stored hold, a hold in which the variable display result is "big hit" and a hold in which the variable display result is "small hit" and the small hit type is "small hit C" or "small hit D". And, if any of the above is included, the execution of the hold display change effect may be restricted. With such a configuration, it is possible to suppress a decline in the interest in the game.

For example, in the pre-reading notice setting process, in the stored hold, the variable display result is "big hit" and the variable display result is "small hit", and the small hit type is "small hit C" or "small hit C". When none of the hold that becomes "small hit D" is included, according to the variable display result and the small hit type according to the decision ratio shown in the normal hold change determination table shown in FIG. 12-37 (a). , Whether or not to execute the hold display change effect and the execution mode may be determined. On the other hand, in the stored hold, the variable display result is "big hit" and the variable display result is "small hit", and the small hit type is "small hit C" or "small hit D". When any of the above is included, the variable display result and the small hit are according to the determination ratio shown in the normal hold change determination table shown in the restricted hold change determination table shown in FIG. 12-37 (b). Depending on the type, whether or not the hold display change effect is executed and the execution mode may be determined. In the stored hold, a hold in which the variable display result is "big hit" and a hold in which the variable display result is "small hit" and the small hit type is "small hit C" or "small hit D". Whether or not is included may be determined by checking the contents of the buffer at the time of starting winning.

In the normal hold change determination table, as shown in FIG. 12-37 (a), when the variable display result is "big hit", the hold display change effect is held at a higher rate than it is determined not to be executed (white). The display mode of the display is determined to be blue, the display mode of the hold display is determined to be green at a rate higher than blue, and the display mode of the hold display is determined to be red at a rate higher than green. With such a configuration, the jackpot expectation is higher when the hold display is displayed in red than when it is displayed in green, and when the hold display is displayed in green, it is in blue. It is higher than when it is displayed, and when the hold display is displayed in blue, it is higher than when it is displayed in white (when the hold display change effect is not executed). On the other hand, in the limited time hold change determination table, as shown in FIG. 12-37 (b), the execution of the hold display change effect in which the jackpot expectation is green or higher is restricted. In the example shown in FIG. 12-37 (b), the hold display change effect in which the hold display is displayed in blue can be executed, but it may be limited to "no execution".

In the normal hold change determination table shown in FIG. 12-37 (a) and the restricted hold change determination table shown in FIG. 12-37 (b), when the variable display result is "small hit", the variable display is made. An example is shown in which the display mode is determined in the same manner as when the result is "big hit", but this is only an example, the variable display result is "small hit", and the small hit type is "small hit A" or When it becomes "small hit B" When the display mode peculiar to it (for example, "big hit?") Or the variable display result becomes "small hit" and the small hit type becomes "small hit C" or "small hit D". There may be a unique display mode (“hour?”). With such a configuration, the variation of the hold display change effect increases, and the player's attention can be attracted.

In the above embodiment, the special figure display result is "small hit" in the hold storage corresponding to the second special figure game stored after the time saving state is completed, and the small hit type is the game ball in the time saving area 063AK20. Even if it is configured so that different effects can be executed depending on whether a hold memory that becomes a "small hit C" or a "small hit D" passing through the above is included and a case where such a hold memory is not included. good. According to such a configuration, it is possible to improve the game entertainment.

For example, in the hold storage corresponding to the second special figure game that is stored after the time saving state ends, the special figure display result becomes "small hit", and the small hit type is "small hit C" or "small hit D". If the hold memory that becomes There is a hold in which the special figure display result is "small hit" and the small hit type is "small hit C" or "small hit D" in the hold memory corresponding to). Just do it. On the other hand, the special figure display result becomes "small hit" in the hold storage corresponding to the second special figure game stored after the time saving state ends, and the small hit type is "small hit C" or "small hit D". If the hold that becomes is not included, it will not be controlled to the time saving state again by any of the remaining hold (the special figure display result will be "small hit" in the hold memory corresponding to the second special figure game. , There is no hold for which the small hit type is "small hit C" or "small hit D"). As an example, both the return success effect and the return failure effect are the effects in which the combination of different decorative symbols is stopped and displayed after performing the effect of inciting whether or not the time is controlled again as a common effect. All you need is.

In the above embodiment, as an effect corresponding to the small hit variation, the game ball that has won the large winning opening 063AK4 controlled to the open state in the small hit game state does not suggest that the game ball passes through the time saving area 063AK20. The jackpot fanning effect suggesting that the ball passes through the jackpot area 063AK19 and the game ball passes through the loss zone 063AK21 can be executed, and the game ball passes through the time saving area 063AK20 in the normal state. Based on this, after performing a loss effect suggesting that the game ball did not pass through the big hit area 063AK19, the game ball passes through the time saving area 063AK20, and based on the passage, the time saving state is set after the end of the small hit game state. Relief effects that suggest being controlled may be configured to be feasible. According to such a configuration, it is possible to improve the game entertainment.

For example, as a big hit fanning effect, as shown in FIG. 12-38 (a), a message "big hit" is displayed on the screen of the image display device 5, suggesting that the game ball passes through the big hit area 063AK19. An effect of displaying the jackpot fanning image AK19 including the image AK20, the loss suggestion image AK21 which indicates the message of “loss” and suggests that the game ball passes through the loss region 063AK21 may be configured to be feasible. In this case, based on the fact that the game ball has passed through the time saving region 063AK20, as a loss effect, as shown in FIG. 12-38 (b), an effect of highlighting the loss suggestion image AK21 included in the jackpot fanning image AK19. Just execute. In the state shown in FIG. 12-38 (b), the frame line of the loss suggestion image AK21 is displayed thicker than the frame line of the jackpot suggestion image AK20 which is not highlighted, so that the loss suggestion image AK21 is highlighted. There is. After performing the effect operation shown in FIG. 12-38 (b) as the loss effect, as a relief effect, as shown in FIG. 12-38 (c), a part of the area where the loss suggestion image AK21 is displayed is displayed. The message "time saving" is displayed, the time saving suggestion image AK22 suggesting that the game ball passes through the time saving region 063AK20 is displayed, the highlighting of the loss suggestion image AK21 is finished, and the time saving suggestion image AK22 is highlighted. All you have to do is execute the production. In the state shown in FIG. 12-38 (c), the frame line of the time saving suggestion image AK22 is displayed thicker than the frame lines of the unhighlighted jackpot suggestion image AK20 and the loss suggestion image AK21, so that the time saving suggestion image AK22 is displayed. Is highlighted.

In the above embodiment, in the special symbol normal processing shown in the flowchart of FIG. 12-11, after deciding whether or not to set the special figure display result as a "big hit" (step 063AKS106), the special figure display result is displayed in step 063AKS106. When it is determined that the "big hit" is not determined (step 063AKS107; No), it is determined whether or not the special figure display result is the "small hit" (step 063AKS118). However, this is only an example, and the process of determining whether or not the special figure display result is a "big hit" and the process of determining whether or not the special figure display result is a "small hit" are optional. Can be executed in the order of. For example, after executing a process of determining whether or not the special figure display result is a "small hit", when the special figure display result is not determined to be a "small hit" in the process, the special figure is displayed. It may be configured to execute a process of determining whether or not the result is a "big hit". Alternatively, by determining whether the special figure display result is "big hit", "small hit", or "loss" by a single process, it is determined whether or not the special figure display result is "big hit". The process of determining whether or not to set the special figure display result as a "small hit" may be executed at the same time.

In the above embodiment, only one of the game balls that won the big winning opening 063AK4 in the small hit game state flows down to the distribution part 063AK18 through the distribution part supply path 063AK8, and the one is Except for the game ball, it has been described that the ball is discharged to the outside of the special variable winning ball device 7 through the discharge path 063AK9. However, this is only an example, and a plurality of game balls among the game balls that have won the large winning opening 063AK4 in the small hit game state are configured to enter the distribution section 063AK18 through the distribution section supply path 063AK8. You may. According to such a configuration, it is possible to improve the game entertainment.

In this configuration, one game ball enters the distribution section 063AK18, passes through one of the jackpot area 063AK19, the time saving area 063AK20, and the loss area 063AK21, and then at least one or more other game balls. Enters the distribution section 063AK18 and may pass through other regions of the jackpot region 063AK19, the time saving region 063AK20, and the loss region 063AK21. In this case, among the plurality of game balls that entered the distribution unit 063AK18 in the small hit game state, the game ball that first entered the distribution unit 063AK18 passed through any of the large hit area 063AK19, the time saving area 063AK20, and the loss area 063AK21. Based on the above, the game state after the small hit game state ends may be controlled. For example, when the game ball that first enters the distribution unit 063AK18 in the small hit game state passes through the big hit area 063AK19, even if another game ball passes through the time saving area 063AK20 or the loss area 063AK21 after the passage, the first Based on the fact that the game ball of No. 1 has passed through the big hit area 063AK19, the big hit game state may be controlled after the end of the small hit game state.

Alternatively, of the plurality of game balls that have entered the distribution unit 063AK18 in the small hit game state, which of the large hit area 063AK19, the time saving area 063AK20, and the loss area 063AK21 has passed the game ball that last entered the distribution unit 063AK18. The game state after the small hit game state ends may be controlled based on the above. For example, when the game ball that last entered the distribution unit 063AK18 in the small hit game state passes through the big hit area 063AK19, it is assumed that another game ball has passed through the time saving area 063AK20 or the loss area 063AK21 before the passage. Also, based on the fact that the last game ball has passed through the big hit area 063AK19, the big hit game state may be controlled after the end of the small hit game state.

Alternatively, the priority order is set in advance between the jackpot area 063AK19, the time saving area 063AK20, and the loss area 063AK21, and a plurality of game balls that have entered the distribution unit 063AK18 in the small hit game state are set in the jackpot area 063AK19. , Time saving area 063AK20 and loss area 063AK21, when passing through multiple areas, the game after the small hit game state ends based on the passage to the area with the highest priority among the areas passed by the game ball. You may control the state. For example, the priority of the jackpot area 063AK19 may be set higher than the priority of the time saving area 063AK20, and the priority of the time saving area 063AK20 may be set higher than the priority of the losing area 063AK21. In this case, when a plurality of game balls that have entered the distribution unit 063AK18 pass through the jackpot area 063AK19, the time saving area 063AK20, and the loss region 063AK21, respectively, the game balls pass through the jackpot area 063AK19 having the highest priority. Then, after the end of the small hit game state, it is controlled to the big hit game state.

In the above embodiment, in the case of the time saving state, when the game ball winning the large winning opening 063AK4 controlled to the open state in the small hit game state passes through the time saving area 063AK20, the time saving transition control based on the passage is performed. I explained it as something that couldn't be done. However, this is only an example, and in the case of the time saving state, when the game ball winning the large winning opening 063AK4 controlled to the open state in the small hit game state passes through the time saving area 063AK20, based on the passage. By performing the time saving transition control and controlling the time saving state for a predetermined period after the end of the small hit game state, the period controlled to the time saving state may be extended. According to such a configuration, it is possible to improve the game entertainment.

In this case, the effect of notifying that the period controlled to the time saving state has been extended based on the fact that the game ball that has entered the large winning opening 063AK4 has passed through the time saving area 063AK20 in the time saving state is produced. It may be configured to be feasible. According to such a configuration, it is possible to improve the game entertainment. For example, as an effect of notifying that the period controlled in the time saving state has been extended, a time saving number recovery effect of increasing the time saving number indicated by the time saving number notification image AK16 may be performed.

In this case, in the time saving state, without suggesting the passage of the time saving area 063AK20, the suggestion regarding the passage between the jackpot area 063AK19 and the loss area 063AK21 is given (the game ball passes through the time saving area 063AK20). It is suggested that the game ball passes through the jackpot area 063AK19 and the game ball passes through the loss region 063AK21 without suggesting). Suggests that the game ball passes through the jackpot area 063AK19, the game ball passes through the time saving area 063AK20, and the game ball passes through the loss area 063AK21. ) It may be configured so that the normal passing fanning effect can be executed. According to such a configuration, it is possible to improve the game entertainment.

In the above embodiment, as an effect corresponding to the small hit fluctuation, the game ball that has entered the large winning opening 063AK4 controlled to the open state in the small hit gaming state has the large hit area 063AK19, the time saving area 063AK20, and the loss area 063AK21. An effect suggesting which of the two should be passed may be configured to be feasible during the execution of the small hit variation. According to such a configuration, it is possible to improve the game entertainment. For example, if the small hit type is "small hit A" or "small hit B" in which the game ball passes through the large hit area 063AK19, a small hit variation suggests that the game ball passes through the large hit area 063AK19. If the small hit type is "small hit C" or "small hit D" in which the game ball passes through the time saving area 063AK20, an effect suggesting that the game ball passes through the time saving area 063AK20 is produced. If the small hit type is "small hit E", which is executed during the execution of the small hit variation and the game ball passes through the loss area 063AK21, a small hit suggests that the game ball passes through the loss area 063AK21. It may be configured to be executed during the execution of the fluctuation.

In the above embodiment, the normal time passing fanning effect and the short time passing fanning effect are started in response to the end of the small hit variation, the end of the small hit start effect, and the start of opening and closing of the large winning opening. It was explained as. However, this is only an example, and the normal time passing fanning effect and the short time passing fanning effect may be configured to be able to start from the execution of the small hit variation. According to such a configuration, it is possible to improve the game entertainment. In particular, when the normal passage fanning effect is configured to be executable during the execution of the small hit variation, the game ball is hit in the small hit game state by displaying the normal passage fanning image AK1 during the execution of the small hit variation. Based on the expectation that the game ball will be controlled to the big hit game state after the end of the small hit game state based on passing through the area 063AK19, and the small hit game based on the fact that the game ball has passed through the time saving area 063AK20 in the small hit game state. It is possible to suggest the degree of expectation that the time is controlled to be shortened after the end of the state and the degree of expectation that the game ball passes through the loss area 063AK21 in the small hit game state, and the game interest can be improved.

In the above embodiment, when the game ball passes through the time-saving area 063AK20 in the normal state, the time-saving area passage notification image AK13 indicating the message "lucky!" Is displayed on the screen of the image display device 5. On the other hand, when the game ball passes through the time saving area 063AK20 in the time saving state, it is a pity! The loss region passage notification image AK17 indicating the message “” is displayed on the screen of the image display device 5 as the loss region passage notification effect. However, this is only an example, and the effect executed when the game ball passes through the time saving area 063AK20 in the normal state is different from the effect executed when the game ball passes through the time saving area 063AK20 in the time saving state. It may be a production of. For example, when the game ball passes through the time-saving region 063AK20 in the normal state, the time-saving region light emitting unit 063AK26 is emitted, while when the game ball passes through the time-saving region 063AK20 in the time-saving state, the time-saving region light emitting unit 063AK26 is emitted. It is also possible to perform an effect of not emitting light (turning off). Alternatively, when the game ball passes through the time saving area 063AK20 in the normal state, a notification voice indicating the message "time saving!" Is output from the speakers 8L and 8R, while the game ball outputs the time saving area 063AK20 in the time saving state. When passing through, the effect of not outputting the notification voice from the speakers 8L and 8R may be performed.

In the above embodiment, the special variable winning ball device 7 has been described as having a jackpot area 063AK19, a time saving area 063AK20, and a loss area 063AK21, but this is only an example. The special variable winning ball device 7 may be configured so as to include a time saving area 063AK20 but not a jackpot area 063AK19 or a loss area 063AK21. According to such a configuration, the manufacturing cost can be reduced.

In the above embodiment, the special variable winning ball device 7 may be configured to include a plurality of time saving regions 063AK20. In this case, in the small hit game state, the time saving state may be controlled for different periods after the small hit game state ends, depending on which of the plurality of time saving areas 063AK20 the game ball has passed through. good. For example, the time saving area 063AK20 is configured to include a first time saving area and a second time saving area, and when the game ball passes through the first time saving area in the small hit game state, the small hit game state. After the end of, the time saving state is controlled for a period until the variable display is executed five times, while when the game ball passes through the second time saving area in the small hit game state, after the small hit game state ends. , It may be configured to control the time saving state for a period until the variable display is executed once. According to such a configuration, it is possible to make the player pay attention to which of the plurality of time-saving regions 063AK20 the game ball passes through in the small hit game state, and improve the game interest.

In the above embodiment, in the low probability low base state as the normal state, the time saving transition control is performed based on the fact that the game ball has passed the time saving area 063AK20 in the small hitting game state, and the small hitting game state is performed. It was explained that it is controlled to the time saving state after the end of. However, this is only an example, and in the high-accuracy low-base state, the time-saving transition control is performed based on the fact that the game ball has passed the time-saving region 063AK20 in the small-hit gaming state, and the small-hit gaming state is performed. It may be configured to be controlled in a time saving state after the end of.

Any part or all of each of the above configurations can be combined with each other in any way.

Each configuration relating to the feature portion 063AK may be appropriately combined with a part or all of each configuration relating to the other feature portion. The feature portions thus combined or the individual feature portions that are not combined may be appropriately combined with a part or all of each configuration related to the other feature portions.

For example, the feature unit 079SG may be introduced into the pachinko gaming machine 1 related to the feature unit 063AK. Specifically, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 related to the feature unit 063AK, the production is performed in the first period such as the normal time passing fanning effect, the time saving passing fanning effect, and the reach effect of Super Reach A to Super Reach C as predetermined effects. An effect moving image having a progress speed of the first speed can be displayed on the image display device 5 as a display means, and the progress speed of the effect is the first in the second period of the predetermined effect after the first period. An effect moving image having a second speed slower than the speed can be displayed on the image display device 5, and the effect sound corresponding to the predetermined effect is the effect sound in both the first period and the second period. The speeds related to the above may be configured to be output at the same speed by the speakers 8L and 8R as sound output means. According to such a configuration, the progress speed of the effect moving image of the predetermined effect changes between the first period and the second period, but the normal time passing fanning effect, the time saving passing fanning effect, and the super reach A to the predetermined effect Since the speed related to the effect sound corresponding to the reach effect of Super Reach C does not change between the first period and the second period, it is possible to prevent the player from giving a sense of discomfort.

(Explanation of Means Concerning Feature 063AK)
(1) The gaming machine related to the feature unit 063AK is
A gaming machine (for example, a gaming machine that can execute variable display and can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a big hit game state) that is advantageous to the player when a specific display result (for example, a big hit symbol) is derived and displayed as the variable display result. In pachinko game machine 1 etc.)
A state control means (for example, CPU 103) that can control a special state (for example, a time saving state) in which variable display is more likely to be executed than a normal state,
A first state (for example, an open state) in which a game medium (for example, a game ball) has a special area (for example, a time saving area 063AK20) and is easy to enter, and a second state (for example, an open state) in which the game medium cannot enter or is difficult to enter (for example, a game ball). Variable means that can be controlled (for example, special variable winning ball device 7) and
It is equipped with an effect execution means (for example, an effect control CPU 120) capable of executing an effect corresponding to variable display.
The variable means is controlled to the first state (for example, FIGS. 12-6 and 12) when a special display result (for example, a small hit symbol) different from the specific display result is derived and displayed as the variable display result. -8, Fig. 12-23, etc.),
The state control means
When the special display result is derived and displayed as the variable display result in the normal state and the game medium passes through the special area when the variable means is controlled to the first state, the above-mentioned Control from the normal state to the special state (for example, FIGS. 12-23, 12-26, etc.).
When the special display result is derived and displayed as a variable display result in the special state and the game medium passes through the special area when the variable means is controlled to the first state, control based on the passage is performed. (For example, Fig. 12-23, Fig. 12-26, etc.),
The effect executing means derives and displays the special display result as a variable display result in the normal state, and when the variable means is controlled to the first state, the game medium passes through the special area. In the special state, the special display result is derived and displayed as a variable display result, and when the variable means is controlled to the first state, a different effect can be executed depending on whether the game medium passes through the special area. (For example, FIG. 12-8, FIG. 12-23, FIG. 12-24, FIG. 12-31, FIG. 12-34, FIG. 12-36, etc.).
It is characterized by that.
According to such a configuration, suitable control can be performed according to the state.

(2) In the gaming machine of (1) above, which relates to the feature unit 063AK.
The variable means has a specific area (for example, a jackpot area 063AK19).
The state control means can control the advantageous state when the game medium passes through the specific region (for example, FIGS. 12-23, 12-26, etc.).
The effect executing means is the same effect when the game medium passes through the special area in the special state and when the game medium does not pass through either the specific area and the special area in the special state. Is feasible (eg, FIGS. 12-8, 12-23, 12-24, 12-31, 12-36, etc.).
You may do so.
According to such a configuration, it is possible to suppress a decrease in the interest in the game.

(3) In the gaming machine of (2) above, which relates to the feature unit 063AK.
The effect executing means can execute different effects depending on whether the game medium passes through the specific area in the special state and when the game medium passes through the specific area in the normal state (for example, FIG. 12). -8, FIG. 12-23, FIG. 12-24, FIG. 12-31, FIG. 12-34, FIG. 12-36, etc.),
You may do so.
According to such a configuration, it is possible to improve the game entertainment.

(4) In any of the above-mentioned gaming machines (1) to (3) according to the feature unit 063AK,
The effect executing means produces different effects depending on whether the special display result is derived and displayed as a variable display result in the normal state and when the special display result is derived and displayed as a variable display result in the special state. It can be executed during the execution of the variable display (for example, FIG. 12-8, FIG. 12-9, FIG. 12-15, FIG. 12-16, FIG. 12-19, FIG. 12-33, FIG. 12-35, etc.).
You may do so.
According to such a configuration, it is possible to perform a suitable effect depending on the state.

(5) In any of the above-mentioned gaming machines (1) to (4) according to the feature unit 063AK,
The effect executing means brings the special display result into the special state as an effect suggesting that the special display result is derived and displayed as the variable display result when the special display result is derived and displayed as the variable display result in the normal state. An effect suggesting control (eg, a time saving suggestion effect) can be performed during the execution of the variable display (eg, FIGS. 12-8, 12-9, 12-15, 12-16, 12). -19, Fig. 12-33, Fig. 12-35, etc.),
You may do so.
According to such a configuration, it is possible to execute various effects and improve the game entertainment.

(6) In any of the above-mentioned gaming machines (1) to (5) according to the feature unit 063AK,
Variable display of the first identification information (for example, the first special figure game) and variable display of the second identification information (for example, the second special figure game) can be executed.
When the special display result is derived and displayed as the variable display result of the second identification information, the special state is higher than when the special display result is derived and displayed as the variable display result of the first identification information. (For example, FIG. 12-14),
You may do so.
According to such a configuration, it is possible to make the player pay attention to whether the special display result is derived and displayed as the variable display result of the second identification information, and to improve the game interest.

(Explanation of Means Concerning Feature 064AK)
The feature section 063AK includes the feature section 064AK shown below.
(1) The gaming machine related to the feature unit 064AK is
In a gaming machine (for example, pachinko gaming machine 1) in which variable display can be executed and can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous to the player.
A state control means (for example, CPU 103) that can control a special state (for example, a time saving state) in which variable display is more likely to be executed than a normal state,
A first state (for example, an open state) that has a specific area (for example, a jackpot area 063AK19) and a special area (for example, a time saving area 063AK20) and is easy for a game medium (for example, a game ball) to enter, and a game A second state in which the medium is inaccessible or difficult to enter (for example, a closed state), a variable means that can be controlled (for example, a special variable winning ball device 7), and
It is equipped with an effect execution means (for example, an effect control CPU 120) capable of executing an effect corresponding to variable display.
The state control means
Based on the fact that the game medium has passed through the specific area, the advantageous state can be controlled (for example, FIGS. 12-23, 12-26, etc.).
Based on the fact that the game medium has passed through the special region, it is possible to control from the normal state to the special state (for example, FIGS. 12-23, 12-26, etc.).
When the variable means is controlled to the first state, the effect executing means can execute a special effect (for example, a normal passing fanning effect) that suggests passage between the specific area and the special area. Yes (eg, FIGS. 12-8, 12-10, 12-31, 12-34, etc.).
When the variable means is controlled to the first state and the game medium passes through the special region, the state control means controls the variable means to the special state until the variable means is controlled to the second state. No (eg, Figures 12-23, 12-26, etc.),
It is characterized by that.
According to such a configuration, suitable control can be performed according to the state.

(2) In the gaming machine of (1) above, which relates to the feature unit 064AK.
The effect executing means is
In the normal state, when the variable means is controlled to the first state, the special effect is executed (for example, FIGS. 12-8, 12-10, 12-31, 12-34, etc.).
In the special state, when the variable means is controlled to the first state, a specific effect (for example, a time-saving time-passing fanning effect) that suggests the passage of the specific area without suggesting the passage of the special area is performed. ) (For example, FIG. 12-8, FIG. 12-10, FIG. 12-31, FIG. 12-36, etc.).
You may do so.
According to such a configuration, it is possible to perform a suitable effect depending on the situation.

(3) In the gaming machine of (1) or (2) above, which relates to the feature unit 064AK.
The effect executing means can execute different effects depending on whether the game medium passes through the specific area in the special state and when the game medium passes through the specific area in the normal state (for example, FIG. 12). -8, FIG. 12-23, FIG. 12-24, FIG. 12-31, FIG. 12-34, FIG. 12-36, etc.),
You may do so.
According to such a configuration, it is possible to improve the game entertainment.

(4) In the gaming machine of (3) above, which relates to the feature unit 064AK.
The variable means is controlled to the first state (for example, FIGS. 12-6 and 12-) when a special display result (for example, a small hit symbol) different from the specific display result is derived and displayed as a variable table result. 8, Fig. 12-23, etc.),
The effect executing means produces different effects depending on whether the special display result is derived and displayed as a variable display result in the normal state and when the special display result is derived and displayed as a variable display result in the special state. It can be executed during the execution of the variable display (for example, FIG. 12-8, FIG. 12-9, FIG. 12-15, FIG. 12-16, FIG. 12-19, FIG. 12-33, FIG. 12-35, etc.).
You may do so.
According to such a configuration, it is possible to perform a suitable effect depending on the state.

(5) In the gaming machine of (3) or (4) above, which relates to the feature unit 064AK.
The effect executing means brings the special display result into the special state as an effect suggesting that the special display result is derived and displayed as the variable display result when the special display result is derived and displayed as the variable display result in the normal state. An effect suggesting control (eg, a time saving suggestion effect) can be performed during the execution of the variable display (eg, FIGS. 12-8, 12-9, 12-15, 12-16, 12). -19, Fig. 12-33, Fig. 12-35, etc.),
You may do so.
According to such a configuration, it is possible to execute various effects and improve the game entertainment.

(6) In any of the above-mentioned gaming machines (3) to (5) according to the feature unit 064AK,
In the effect executing means, when the special display result is derived as a variable display result, the variable means is controlled to the first state, and then the variable means is controlled to the second state, the game medium is released. It is possible to perform different effects depending on whether the game medium passes through the specific area or the special area (for example, FIGS. 12-8, 12-23, 12-24, 12-31). , Fig. 12-34, Fig. 12-36, etc.),
You may do so.
According to such a configuration, it is possible to make the player pay attention to the effect executed when the variable means is controlled to the second state, and to improve the game entertainment.

(Explanation of feature 065AK)
The feature unit 065AK will be described. In the feature section 065AK, the description of the parts (configuration, processing, etc.) common to the basic description will be omitted.

In the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the basic explanation, after being controlled to the jackpot game state, it is possible to control to the high base state (time saving state). In the pachinko gaming machine 65AK1 of the feature unit 065AK, in the low base state (normal state), the display result of the variable display of the normal symbol on the normal symbol display 20 is the predetermined "time saving symbol" among the "normal symbol loss". In the case of, the high base state (time saving state) is controlled regardless of the display result of the variable display of the special symbol. As a result, the game may shift from the low base state to the high base state without going through the jackpot game state, so that it is possible to provide unexpected game playability.

In the pachinko gaming machine 65AK1 of the feature unit 065AK, when the display result of the normal symbol is "time saving symbol", the state shifts from the low base state to the high base state even during the execution of the variable display of the special symbol. It has become like.

Further, in the pachinko gaming machine 65AK1 of the feature unit 065AK, it is possible to execute a predetermined effect of suggesting / notifying the display result of the normal symbol or the display result of the special symbol. It is possible to suggest and notify that the display result of the normal symbol is "normal symbol hit" or "time saving symbol", or the display result of the special symbol is "big hit" by the predetermined effect. With such a predetermined effect, the player can expect which display result is suggested / notified, and the interest is improved.

(Structure of feature 065AK)
FIG. 13-1 is a front view of the pachinko gaming machine 65AK1 having the feature portion 065AK, and shows the layout of the main members. The pachinko gaming machine 65AK1 of the feature portion 065AK is different from the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the basic description shown in FIG. 1 in the arrangement of a part of the configuration. In addition, here, the part different from FIG. 1 will be mainly described, and the same number will be assigned to the same configuration and the description will be omitted.

In the pachinko gaming machine 65AK1 of the feature unit 065AK shown in FIG. 13-1, the gaming ball launched from the hitting ball launching device is the first path, which is the path on the left side of the frame surrounding the image display device 5, or the image display device. It is guided to the lower side of the game area via the second route, which is the route on the right side of the frame surrounding 5, and either wins (enters) each winning opening or goes to the out opening without entering any winning opening. It is captured.

Launching the game ball so that the game ball passes through the first path on the left side of the image display device 5 is called left-handed, and launches the game ball so that the game ball passes through the second path on the right side of the image display device 5. Making it right-handed is called right-handed. The area where the left-handed game ball can be guided is called the left area, and the area where the right-handed game ball can be guided is also called the right area.

In the pachinko gaming machine 65AK1 of the feature unit 065AK, the winning ball device 6A is provided below the image display device 5 and in the left region of the gaming area as in the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the basic description, while the winning ball device 6A is a variable winning machine. The ball device 6B and the special variable winning ball device 7 are provided in the lower right region of the image display device 5 and in the right region of the game area. Therefore, in the high base state in which the variable winning ball device 6B (second starting winning opening) is open, or in the big hit game state in which the special variable winning ball device 7 (large winning opening) is open, the game can be played by hitting right. In the low base state where the winning opening is not opened, the game is played by left-handed.

Further, in the pachinko gaming machine 65AK1 of the feature portion 065AK, the passing gates 41 are provided in the left region and the right region, so that the normal drawing game can be easily executed even in the low base state where the game is played by left-handed. .. As a result, in the low base state, it is possible to secure an opportunity for the display result of the normal symbol to become a "short-time symbol" and shift to the high base state.

Further, in the pachinko gaming machine 65AK1 of the feature portion 065AK, general winning openings 10 are provided in the left region and the right region. The general winning opening 10 may be provided in either area.

In addition, in the pachinko gaming machine 65AK1 of the feature portion 065AK, a main lamp 9a, a frame lamp 9b, an attacker lamp 9c, and a movable body lamp 9d are provided as the game effect lamp 9. The main lamp 9a is provided at a position above the image display device 5 in the gaming machine frame 3, the frame lamp 9b is provided so as to surround the gaming area, and the attacker lamp 9c is a special variable winning prize in the gaming board 2. It is provided near the ball device 7. A movable body 32 that operates according to the effect is provided at a position above the image display device 5 of the game board 2, and the movable body lamp 9 is provided on the movable body 32.

Subsequently, the operation of the pachinko gaming machine 65AK1 of the feature unit 065AK will be described. FIG. 13-2 is a flowchart showing an example of the normal symbol process process executed in step S26 of FIG. In the normal symbol process process, when the CPU 103 detects that the gate switch 21 is in the ON state, that is, the game ball has passed through the gate 41 (step S411; Yes), the CPU 103 executes the gate switch pass process (step S412). do.

In the gate switch passing process in step S412, the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the count value (gate passing storage number) of the gate passing storage counter has reached the maximum value (“4” in this example). If the maximum value is not reached, the count value of the gate passing storage counter is incremented by 1, the value of the random number for normal symbol determination, which is a software random number, is extracted and stored in the storage area corresponding to the value of the gate passing storage number. In addition, the number of lights of the normal figure hold indicator 25C is increased by 1. After that, one of the processes of steps S400 to S404 as shown below is executed according to the value of the normal symbol process flag.

In the normal symbol normal processing of step S400, the CPU 103 is not in a state where the normal symbol variation can be started (for example, the normal symbol variation display is not executed in the normal symbol display 20 and the variable winning prize is obtained. If the ball device 6B is not in the open state) and the number of stored gates is not 0, the value of the random number for determining the hit of the normal symbol stored in the storage area and the normal symbol shown in FIG. 13-3. Using the determination table, it is determined whether or not to make a hit (whether or not the stop symbol of the normal symbol is a hit symbol) and whether or not to make a time-saving symbol. If the gaming state is in the low base state (if the time saving flag is not set), use the table shown in FIG. 13-3 (A), and if the game state is in the high base state (if the time saving flag is set). For example, the table shown in FIG. 13-3 (B) is used. Then, the value of the normal symbol process flag is updated to a value (“1” in this example) indicating the normal symbol variation pattern setting process (step S401).

In the normal symbol fluctuation pattern setting process of step S401, the CPU 103 normally sets a value corresponding to the variable display time (normal symbol fluctuation time) until the normal symbol is variably displayed and derived and displayed in the normal symbol process timer. Start the symbol process timer. In addition, a control for transmitting a command for designating the start of fluctuation of the normal symbol to the effect control board 12 is executed. Then, the value of the normal symbol process flag is updated to a value (“2” in this example) corresponding to the normal symbol variation process (step S402).

The CPU 103 executes variable display (variation) of the normal symbol in the normal symbol variation process of step S402. Then, it is confirmed whether or not the normal symbol process timer has timed out, and if it has timed out, the value of the normal symbol process flag is updated to a value (“3” in this example) indicating the normal symbol stop processing (step S403). ..

The CPU 103 stops the fluctuation of the normal symbol on the normal symbol display 20 in the normal symbol stop processing in step S403. Then, the normal symbol process timer is started by setting a value corresponding to the symbol confirmation time (stop symbol display time) of the normal symbol in the normal symbol process timer, and when the timer times out, the stop symbol of the normal symbol is a hit symbol. Check if it exists. If it is not a hit symbol (if it is a lost symbol), if it is a time-saving symbol, the process for starting the time-saving state is executed. If it is not a hit symbol (if it is a lost symbol), the value of the normal symbol process flag is updated to a value (“0” in this example) indicating the normal symbol normal processing (step S400). If the stop symbol of the normal symbol is a hit symbol, the normal symbol process timer is started by setting a value corresponding to the normal electric accessory opening time in the normal symbol process timer. Then, the value of the normal symbol process flag is updated to a value (“4” in this example) indicating the normal electric accessory opening process (step S404).

The CPU 103 sets the variable winning ball device (ordinary electric accessory) 6B to the open state in the process of opening the ordinary electric accessory in step S404. When the normal symbol process timer times out, the variable winning ball device 6B is closed and the value of the normal symbol process flag is updated to a value (“0” in this example) indicating the normal symbol normal processing (step S400).

FIG. 13-3 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of a normal symbol determination table in which a determination value regarding the display result of the normal symbol for determining the display result of the normal symbol is set in the normal symbol normal process of step S400. In this embodiment, the range in which the random number for normal symbol determination can be taken is 1 to 250, but the normal symbol determination table is compared with the random number value for normal symbol determination and the determination value is set.

FIG. 13-3 (A) is a normal symbol determination table used in a low base state. As shown in FIG. 13-3 (A), in the low base state, when the random value for normal symbol determination is 1 or 2, it is determined to be a hit (normal symbol hit). If it is determined that the ball is hit by a normal figure, the variable winning ball device 6A is opened for 5 seconds. When the random value for normal symbol determination is 3 to 230, it is determined to be a loss (normal symbol loss). If it is determined that the normal figure is lost, the variable winning ball device 6A is not opened. In the case of hitting or losing a normal symbol, the fluctuation time of the normal symbol is 10 seconds, and the symbol confirmation time is 0.5 seconds.

Further, when the random value for normal symbol determination is 231 to 240, it is determined to be lost (time saving symbol A). When it is determined that the time saving symbol A is determined, the variable winning ball device 6A is not opened, but is controlled to a high base state (time saving state). In the case of the time-saving symbol A, the fluctuation time of the normal symbol is 10 seconds, and the symbol confirmation time is 10 seconds.

Further, when the random value for normal symbol determination is 241-250, it is determined to be lost (time saving symbol B). When it is determined that the time saving symbol B is determined, the variable winning ball device 6A is not opened, but is controlled to a high base state (time saving state). In the case of the time-saving symbol B, the fluctuation time of the normal symbol is 15 seconds, and the symbol confirmation time is 10 seconds.

In this way, the time-saving symbol is a part of the loss (normal figure loss), and a part of the determination value corresponding to the normal figure loss is assigned to the time-saving symbol.

Further, in the normal symbol normal processing of step S400, after determining (determining) whether or not the symbol is a normal symbol, it is determined whether or not the symbol is a time-saving symbol. By doing so, when it is determined that the symbol is a normal figure and the time saving symbol is due to a random number error or the like, the normal figure hit can be prioritized. In the low base state, it is more advantageous for the player to use the time-saving symbol than to hit the normal symbol. Therefore, it is first determined whether or not to use the time-saving symbol, and then the normal symbol is used. It may be determined whether or not it is a figure hit.

In this embodiment, two types of time-saving symbols are provided, and the period of the high base state (end condition, number of time-savings) is different between the case of the time-saving symbol A and the case of the time-saving symbol B. As shown in FIG. 13-4 (A), when the display result of the normal symbol becomes "time saving symbol A" in the low base state, the high base state continues until the special symbol is changed 50 times (time saving number of times). Is 50 times). Further, when the display result of the normal symbol becomes "time saving symbol B" in the low base state, the high base state continues until the special symbol is changed 100 times (the number of time saving is 100 times). Therefore, the time saving symbol B is more advantageous to the player than the time saving symbol A.

In this embodiment, whether or not the time-saving symbol is used and the type of the time-saving symbol are determined by the random number value for normal symbol determination when the normal symbol is lost, but different random numbers are used. You may decide whether or not to use the time-saving symbol and the type of the time-saving symbol. Further, the types of time-saving symbols are not limited to two types, and there may be one type or three or more types. When there is only one type of time-saving symbol, it is easy to determine the display result by determining whether or not to use the time-saving symbol by the normal symbol determination random value.

As shown in FIG. 13-3 (A), the symbol confirmation time for hitting or losing a normal symbol is 0.5 seconds, whereas the symbol confirmation time for a time-saving symbol is as long as 10 seconds. In this way, by lengthening the symbol confirmation time of the time-saving symbol, it is possible to perform notification of shifting to a high base state (time reduction state) or right-handed at the symbol confirmation time. Therefore, it is possible to prevent or reduce the sudden transition to a high base state and the player being disadvantaged due to lack of preparation. The symbol confirmation time may be constant regardless of the display result.

The fluctuation time for the time-saving symbol B is 15 seconds, and the fluctuation time for other display results is 10 seconds. As a result, the display result can be announced by the fluctuation time of the normal symbol. The fluctuation time may be determined according to the display result, or the fluctuation time of all display results may be the same (for example, 10 seconds).

FIG. 13-3 (B) is a normal symbol determination table used in the high base state. As shown in FIG. 13-3 (B), in the high base state, when the random value for normal symbol determination is 1 to 229, it is determined to be a hit (normal symbol hit). If it is determined that the ball is hit by a normal figure, the variable winning ball device 6A is opened for 7.5 seconds. When the random value for normal symbol determination is 230, it is determined to be a loss (normal symbol loss). When the random value for normal symbol determination is 231 to 240, it is determined to be lost (time saving symbol A). When the random value for normal symbol determination is 241-250, it is determined to be lost (time saving symbol B). In the high base state, even if the time saving symbols (time saving symbols A and B) are set, as shown in FIG. 13-4 (B), the number of time saving (the end condition of the high base state) is not updated and is controlled. It is designed not to affect the high base state inside. That is, in the high base state, the time saving symbol is treated in the same way as the normal diagram loss. If it is determined that the normal figure is lost, the variable winning ball device 6A is not opened.

In the high base state, the fluctuation time of the normal symbol is 1.5 seconds and the symbol confirmation time is 0.5 seconds regardless of the display result. As a result, the fluctuation of the normal symbol can be quickly repeated.

In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 13-3, the fluctuation time is determined according to the display result of the normal symbol, but the fluctuation time (variation pattern) of the normal symbol is based on the determined display result of the normal symbol. May be decided. In this case, if the display result is a loss of the normal figure, the determination rate of the fluctuation time may be different depending on whether or not the symbol is a time-saving symbol. By doing so, it is possible to suggest whether or not the time-saving symbol is obtained depending on the fluctuation time of the normal symbol.

As shown in FIGS. 13-3 (A) and 13-3 (B), the symbol confirmation time of the time-saving symbol in the high base state is 0.5 seconds, whereas the symbol confirmation time of the time-saving symbol in the low base state is 10. It's getting longer, seconds. In this way, by lengthening the symbol confirmation time of the time-saving symbol in the low base state, it is possible to perform notification of shifting to the high base state (time reduction state) or right-handed in the symbol confirmation time. Therefore, it is possible to prevent or reduce the sudden transition to a high base state and the player being disadvantaged due to lack of preparation. In addition, in the high base state, even if the display result of the normal symbol becomes a time-saving symbol, such notification is not necessary. Therefore, by shortening the symbol confirmation time, the change of the next normal symbol should be executed promptly. Can be done. The symbol confirmation time may be constant regardless of the game state.

In this embodiment, even after the display result of the special symbol becomes a big hit and is controlled to the big hit game state, it is controlled to the time saving state. As shown in FIG. 13-5 (A), "big hit A" and "big hit B" are provided as big hit types when the display result of the first special figure is a big hit, and the big hit of "big hit A" is provided. After entering the game state, the high base state continues until the special symbol change is executed 50 times (the number of time reductions becomes 50 times), and after the big hit game state of "Big hit B" is reached, 100 times. The high base state continues until the special symbol change is executed (the number of time reductions is 100). It should be noted that the display result of the first special figure becomes a big hit basically when the base is low. Further, as shown in FIG. 13-5 (B), "big hit C" is provided as a big hit type when the display result of the second special figure is a big hit, and it is a big hit gaming state of "big hit C". After that, the high base state continues until the special symbol change is executed 100 times (the number of time reductions becomes 100 times). It should be noted that the display result of the second special figure becomes a big hit basically at the time of high base.

As described above, in this embodiment, the end condition (number of time reductions) in the high base state (time reduction state) is that the display result of the second special figure is a big hit than the case where the display result of the first special figure is a big hit. It is more advantageous when it becomes. As a result, the player's disappointment can be suppressed because the end condition of the high base state does not become disadvantageous to the player because the normal symbol becomes the reduced working hours symbol and shifts to the high base state. In addition, at the time of high base, the end condition of the high base state (time saving state) in the case of a big hit is more advantageous than the low base state, so once the high base state is reached, it is easy to maintain the high base state for a long time. Can be done.

In the feature unit 065AK, it suffices to be controlled to at least a time saving state after being controlled to the big hit gaming state, and the number of rounds of "big hit A" to "big hit C" and the presence or absence of probability variation control are arbitrary. good. Further, the jackpot type and the number of time reductions shown in FIG. 13-5 are examples, and the number of jackpot types and the number of time reductions may be larger or smaller than those in FIG. 13-5, and for example, the number of time reductions may be the same.

FIG. 13-6 is a flowchart showing an example of the normal symbol stop processing in step S403 of FIG. 13-2. In the normal symbol stop processing, the CPU 103 first determines whether or not the flag for confirming the normal symbol is set (step 065AKS001). Ordinary symbols are displayed from the time when the display result is derived and displayed until the symbol confirmation time elapses. That is, the symbol confirmation time can be said to be the period from when the display result of the normal symbol is derived and displayed until the next fluctuation of the normal symbol is started. If it is the symbol confirmation time, the flag for displaying the normal symbol confirmation is set.

If the flag for confirming the normal symbol is not set (step 065AKS001; No), the display result of the normal symbol (confirmed normal symbol) is derived and displayed on the normal symbol display 20 (step 065AKS002), and the fluctuation of the normal symbol is stopped. The setting for transmitting the designated normal figure stop designation command to the effect control board 12 is executed (step 065AKS003). In step 065AKS003, the effect control board 12 is set to send a normal map stop designation command according to the display result so that the display result of the normal symbol can be specified. Then, the game state (high base state, low base state) and the symbol confirmation period (see FIG. 13-3) according to the normal figure display result are set (step 065AKS004), and the normal figure confirmation display flag is set to the on state. (Step 065AKS005). After that, the normal symbol stop processing is terminated.

If the normal symbol confirmation display flag is set (step 065AKS001; Yes), it is determined whether or not the symbol confirmation period of the normal symbol has elapsed (step 065AKS011). In the process of step 065AKS011, for example, the timer value corresponding to the symbol determination period set in step 065AKS004 is subtracted to determine whether or not it becomes 0. If the symbol determination period has not elapsed (step 065AKS011; No), the normal symbol stop processing is terminated.

If the symbol determination period has elapsed (step 065AKS011; Yes), it is determined whether or not the display result is a normal symbol (step 065AKS012). When the display result is a normal symbol (step 065AKS012; Yes), the normal symbol process timer is set to the normal electric accessory release time (step 065AKS013), and the value of the normal symbol process flag is set to the normal electric accessory release. The value indicating the intermediate processing (for example, "4") is updated (step 065AKS014), and the normal symbol stop processing is terminated.

When the display result is not a normal figure (step 065AKS012; No), it is determined whether or not the display result is a time-saving symbol (step 065AKS015). If the display result is a time saving symbol (step 065AKS015; Yes), it is determined whether or not the time saving flag is set to determine whether or not it is in the high base state (step 065AKS016). If it is not in the high base state (step 065AKS016; No), for example, by checking the value of the special figure process flag, it is determined whether or not it is in the big hit game state (step 065AKS017). In this embodiment, in the case of the jackpot gaming state, since the time saving state is controlled after the end of the jackpot gaming state, the transition to the time saving state based on the time saving symbol is not performed. There is. In addition, when the special symbol is changing and the display result of the change is a big hit, it is controlled to the time saving state after the end of the big hit game state based on the big hit, so that it is a time saving symbol. The transition to the based time saving state may not be performed.

If it is not in the jackpot game state (step 065AKS017; No), the time saving flag is set to the on state (step 065AKS018), and the time saving number counter is set according to the time saving symbol (see FIG. 13-4 (A)). (Step 065AKS019). As a result, it is possible to shift to a high base state (time saving state). Further, in response to the shift to the time saving state, a setting is made to transmit the game state designation command for designating the time saving state to the effect control board 12 (step 065AKS020).

When the display result is not a time-saving symbol but a normal drawing loss (step 065AKS015; No), a high base state (step 065AKS016; Yes), a jackpot game state (step 065AKS017; Yes), or step 065AKS020 After executing the process of (step 065AKS021), the value of the normal symbol process flag is updated to a value indicating the normal symbol normal process (for example, "0"), and the process when the normal symbol is stopped is terminated.

FIG. 13-7 is a flowchart showing an example of the effect control process process (step S76) shown in FIG. 8 of the feature unit 065AK. In the effect control process process of the feature unit 065AK, in addition to the effect control process process of the basic description shown in FIG. 9, the pre-reading notice setting process (step S161) is followed by the normal figure interlocking effect control process (step 065AKS1) and the time reduction. The notification setting process (step 065AKS2) is executed.

FIG. 13-8 is a flowchart showing an example of the normal figure interlocking effect control process (step 065AKS1) executed in the effect control process process of FIG. 13-7. The normal symbol interlocking effect is an effect that suggests and notifies the display result of the normal symbol in conjunction with the execution of the fluctuation of the normal symbol. The Fuzu-linked production is included in the predetermined production. In the normal map interlocking effect control process, control is performed to execute the normal map interlocking effect.

In the normal map interlocking effect control process, the effect control CPU 120 confirms whether or not the normal map interlocking effect executing flag is set (step 065AKS031). The normal map interlocking effect executing flag is set when the execution of the normal map interlocking effect is started as a predetermined effect. If the normal figure interlocking effect executing flag is not set (step 065AKS031; No), it is confirmed whether or not the special figure interlocking effect executing flag is set (step 065AKS032). The special figure interlocking effect executing flag is set when the execution of the special figure interlocking effect is started. In this embodiment, it is possible to execute a special symbol interlocking effect that suggests and notifies the display result of the special symbol in conjunction with the execution of the variation of the special symbol (decorative symbol) as the predetermined effect. The special figure interlocking effect will be described later. When the special figure interlocking effect executing flag is set (step 065AKS032; Yes), that is, when the special figure interlocking effect is being executed as the predetermined effect, a new predetermined effect (normal figure interlocking effect) is executed. Therefore, the normal map interlocking effect control process is terminated.

If the special figure interlocking effect executing flag is not set in step 065AKS032 (step 065AKS032; No), it is confirmed whether or not the normal symbol variation start designation command has been received (step 065AKS051). If the normal symbol variation start designation command has not been received (step 065AKS051; No), the normal symbol interlocking effect control process is terminated.

When the normal symbol fluctuation start designation command is set (step 065AKS051; Yes), the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the sub time reduction flag is on, and thus whether or not it is in the high base state. Is confirmed (step 065AKS052). In the case of a high base state (step 065AKS052; Yes), the frequency of fluctuation of the normal symbol is high, and the display result is almost the same as the normal figure. To finish.

If it is not in the high base state (step 065AKS052; No), it is confirmed whether or not it is in the jackpot game state (step 065AKS053). Whether or not it is in the jackpot game state is confirmed by, for example, the value of the effect control process flag. In that case, it is assumed that the jackpot game state is when the value of the effect control process flag is 6 or more. In the case of the big hit game state (step 065AKS053; Yes), since the effect during the big hit is not hindered and the high base state is controlled after the end of the big hit game state, the normal figure interlocking effect is not executed. The figure-linked effect control process ends.

When it is not in the jackpot game state (step 065AKS053; No), it is determined whether or not the reach effect of the super reach is being executed (step 065AKS056). Here, it is the time when the fluctuation is executed according to the fluctuation pattern accompanied by the super reach, and it may be determined by whether or not the elapsed time from the start of the fluctuation exceeds the start timing of the super reach. When the reach effect of the super reach is being executed (step 065AKS056; Yes), in order to pay attention to the reach effect of the super reach, the normal figure interlocking effect control process is terminated without executing the normal figure interlocking effect. Even if the normal map interlocking effect is not executed even during the execution of the effect other than the reach effect of the super reach (the advance notice effect on the image display device 5, the operation effect of the movable body 32, the effect with high expectation of big hit, etc.). good.

When the reach effect of the super reach is not being executed (step 065AKS056; No), a predetermined effect pattern corresponding to whether or not the normal figure interlocking effect is executed and the effect mode when the normal figure interlocking effect is executed is determined (step 065AKS059). In step 065AKS059, as shown in FIG. 13-8 (B), whether or not to execute the normal symbol interlocking effect and the predetermined effect pattern are determined according to the display result of the normal symbol specified from the normal symbol change start designation command.

FIG. 13-8 (C) is a diagram showing a predetermined effect pattern. The predetermined effect is an effect that suggests / notifies the display result of the normal symbol or the display result of the special symbol, and the predetermined effect pattern SP1 is a pattern that suggests that both the normal symbol and the special symbol are lost, and the predetermined effect pattern SP2 Is a pattern for notifying that it will be a "normal figure hit", and a predetermined effect pattern SP3 is a pattern for notifying that it will be a "time saving symbol". The predetermined effect patterns SP4 and SP5 are patterns suggesting that the special symbol becomes a big hit symbol, and the predetermined effect pattern SP5 is expected to be a big hit more than the predetermined effect pattern SP4. In this embodiment, the predetermined effects of all the predetermined effect patterns are started in the same manner, and then the results corresponding to the predetermined effect patterns are notified. Therefore, even if the predetermined effect pattern SP1 suggests that the effect is lost, it can be expected that the predetermined effect pattern will be another predetermined effect pattern at the start of the effect.

After suggesting the display result or the display result of the special symbol, a Gase pattern suggesting that the pattern may be lost may be provided. For example, a pattern that displays an image such as "maybe it is a time saving?" May be provided.

The predetermined effect patterns corresponding to the normal figure interlocking effect are SP1 to SP3, and in step 065AKS059, the presence / absence of execution of the normal figure interlocking effect and the predetermined effect pattern SP1 to SP3 are performed at a determination ratio as shown in FIG. 13-8 (B). Which one to use is decided. As shown in FIG. 13-8 (B), when the display result (normal figure display result) of the normal symbol is "per normal figure", the ratio determined to the predetermined effect pattern SP2 is high, and the "normal figure" is determined. In the case of "loss", the ratio of being determined by the predetermined effect pattern SP1 is high, and in the case of "time saving symbol A" or "time saving symbol B", especially in the case of "time saving symbol B" having a large number of time saving times. Is determined by the predetermined effect pattern SP3 at a high rate. As a result, it is possible to suggest and notify the normal map display result by the normal map interlocking effect (predetermined effect). The determination ratio shown in FIG. 13-8 (B) is an example, and any ratio may be used as long as the normal map display result can be suggested and notified by the normal map interlocking effect (predetermined effect). Further, as a predetermined effect pattern for the normal drawing interlocking effect, a predetermined effect pattern other than the predetermined effect patterns SP1 to SP3 may be provided.

Subsequently, the effect control CPU 120 confirms whether or not it is determined to execute the normal figure interlocking effect (step 065AKS064). If it is not decided to execute the normal figure interlocking effect (step 065AKS064; No), the normal figure interlocking effect control process is terminated.

When it is decided to execute the normal figure interlocking effect (step 065AKS064; Yes), the execution time of the normal figure interlocking effect according to the decision result (predetermined effect pattern) in step 065AKS059 is set in the normal figure interlocking effect timer. The value corresponding to is set (step 065AKS078). Then, the normal map interlocking effect (predetermined effect) is started based on the effect control data or the like corresponding to the predetermined effect pattern (step 065AKS079). Then, in response to the start of the normal map interlocking effect, the flag indicating that the normal map interlocking effect is being executed is set (step 065AKS080), and the normal map interlocking effect control process is terminated.

If the normal map interlocking effect execution flag is set (step 065AKS031; No), the value of the normal map interlocking effect timer is subtracted by 1 (step 065AKS034), and the value of the normal map interlocking effect timer becomes 0. It is determined whether or not (step 065AKS035). If the value of the normal figure interlocking effect timer is not 0 (step 065AKS035; No), the normal figure interlocking effect control process ends.

When the value of the normal figure interlocking effect timer becomes 0 (step 065AKS035; Yes), the normal figure interlocking effect is ended (step 065AKS036), and the normal figure interlocking effect executing flag is reset to the off state (step 065AKS037). ), Ends the normal map interlocking effect control process.

FIG. 13-9 (A) is a flowchart showing an example of a special figure interlocking effect determination process for determining whether or not a special figure interlocking effect is executed as a predetermined effect and a predetermined effect pattern when the special figure interlocking effect is executed. The special figure interlocking effect determination process is executed in the variable display start setting process (step S171) of the effect control process process shown in FIG. 13-7 before starting the variation of the decorative symbol. In the special figure interlocking effect determination process, the effect control CPU 120 confirms whether or not the normal figure interlocking effect executing flag is set (step 065AKS091). When the normal figure interlocking effect execution flag is set (step 065AKS091; Yes), that is, when the normal figure interlocking effect is executed as the predetermined effect, a new predetermined effect (special figure interlocking effect) is executed. Therefore, the special figure interlocking effect determination process is terminated. When the normal figure interlocking effect execution flag is not set (step 065AKS091; No), it is confirmed whether or not it is in the high base state by determining whether or not the sub time reduction flag is on (step 065AKS092). ). In the high base state (step 065AKS092; Yes), since the average special figure fluctuation time is short and the period for executing the special figure interlocking effect cannot be secured, the special figure interlocking effect is not executed. The production determination process ends.

Since the special figure interlocking effect determination process is a process executed at the start of the change of the decorative symbol, the special figure interlocking effect is not determined and executed in the case of the big hit game state or the small hit game state. If it is not in the high base state (step 065AKS092; No), it is confirmed whether or not the fluctuation started this time is a fluctuation pattern that results in a super reach loss or a super reach jackpot (step 065AKS093). It should be noted that whether or not the fluctuation pattern is a super reach loss or a super reach jackpot can be specifically determined by checking the fluctuation pattern specified by the fluctuation pattern designation command. If it is not a fluctuation pattern of super reach loss or super reach jackpot (step 065AKS093; No), the special figure interlocking effect determination process is terminated. As described above, in this embodiment, the special figure interlocking effect is not executed when the fluctuation pattern is not accompanied by super reach, but the special figure interlocking is performed at a predetermined ratio even when the fluctuation pattern is not accompanied by super reach. The effect (for example, the predetermined effect of the predetermined effect pattern SP1) may be executed.

In the case of a fluctuation pattern of super reach loss or super reach jackpot (step 065AKS093; Yes), a predetermined effect pattern corresponding to whether or not the special figure interlocking effect is executed and the effect mode when the special figure interlocking effect is executed is determined (step 065AKS094). In step 065AKS094, as shown in FIG. 13-9 (B), whether or not to execute the special symbol interlocking effect and a predetermined effect pattern are determined according to the display result of the special symbol (decorative symbol).

The predetermined effect patterns corresponding to the special figure interlocking effect are SP1, SP4, and SP5. In step 065AKS094, the presence / absence of execution of the special figure interlocking effect and the predetermined effect pattern SP1 are performed at a determination ratio as shown in FIG. 13-9 (B). , SP4, SP5 is determined. As shown in FIG. 13-9 (B), when the special figure display result is "big hit", the ratio determined by the predetermined effect pattern SP5 is high, and when the special figure display result is "miss". , The ratio determined by the predetermined effect pattern SP4 is high. As a result, the jackpot expectation (reliability) is higher in the predetermined effect pattern SP5 than in the predetermined effect pattern SP4. Since the predetermined effect patterns SP4 and SP5 are determined when they are variable patterns accompanied by super reach, it is possible to notify that the predetermined effect patterns will be super reach when the special figure interlocking effect of these predetermined effect patterns is executed. Further, at the determination ratio shown in FIG. 13-9, a big hit may be obtained even when the predetermined effect pattern SP1 is used, so that an unexpected effect can be executed. The determination ratio shown in FIG. 13-9 (B) is an example, and any ratio may be used as long as the special figure display result can be suggested and notified by the special figure interlocking effect (predetermined effect). Further, as a predetermined effect pattern for the special figure interlocking effect, a predetermined effect pattern other than the predetermined effect patterns SP1, SP4, and SP5 may be provided.

After that, the effect control CPU 120 confirms whether or not it has been decided not to execute the special figure interlocking effect (step 065AKS095). When it is decided not to execute the special figure interlocking effect (step 065AKS095; Yes), the special figure interlocking effect determination process ends. When it is decided to execute the special figure interlocking effect (step 065AKS095; No), a setting is made to execute the special figure interlocking effect corresponding to the determined predetermined effect pattern (step 065AKS096). In step 065AKS096, for example, effect control data corresponding to a predetermined effect pattern is set in a predetermined area of the RAM 122 as usage data. Then, the special figure interlocking effect executing flag is set to the ON state (step 065AKS097), and the special figure interlocking effect determination process is completed.

FIG. 13-10 is a flowchart showing an example of the time saving notification setting process (step 065AKS2) executed in the effect control process process of FIG. 13-7. The time saving notification setting process is a process for notifying the shift to the time saving state when the display result of the normal symbol is controlled to the high base state (time saving state) corresponding to the time saving symbol. ..

In the time saving notification setting process, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not a normal figure stop designation command for designating that the time saving symbol has stopped has been received (step 065AKS101). If the normal figure stop designation command for designating that the time saving symbol has stopped has not been received (step 065AKS101; No), the time saving notification setting process ends.

If a normal figure stop specification command for specifying that the time saving symbol has stopped is received (step 065AKS101; Yes), it is determined whether the sub time saving flag is on or not to determine whether the time saving symbol is in the high base state. Check whether or not (step 065AKS102). In the high base state (step 065AKS102; Yes), the time saving notification setting process is terminated because the control based on the time saving symbol is not executed.

If it is not in the high base state (step 065AKS102; No), the sub-time reduction flag is set to the on state (step 065AKS103). The sub time saving flag is also set to the on state when the big hit game state ends and the time saving state is controlled.

Subsequently, it is determined whether or not the game is in the big hit game state (step 065AKS104). In the case of the big hit game state (step 065AKS104; Yes), since the time reduction state is controlled after the big hit game state, the time reduction notification setting process is terminated without notifying that the time reduction state has been entered.

When it is not in the jackpot game state (step 065AKS104; No), a right-handed display instructing the right-handed person to hit the image at a predetermined position of the image display device 5 is displayed (step 065AKS105).

Then, it is determined whether or not the reach effect of the super reach is being executed (step 065AKS106). When the reach effect of the super reach is not being executed (step 065AKS106; No), the setting for starting the notification of the transition to the time saving state (time saving transition notification) and the notification of right-handed hitting (right-handed notification). (Step 065AKS107).

Further, when the reach effect of the super reach is being executed (step 065AKS106; Yes), a setting for starting the right-handed notification is made at the start of the next fluctuation (step 065AKS108). As described above, in this embodiment, when the reach effect of the super reach is being executed, the time reduction shift notification and the right-handed notification are not executed in order to pay attention to the reach effect of the super reach, and the right-handed hit is performed in the next fluctuation. It is designed to execute notification. By doing so, it is possible to prevent the reach production of Super Reach from being hindered. It should be noted that the time saving shift notification and the right-handed notification are not executed even during the execution of the effects other than the reach effect of the super reach (the advance notice effect on the image display device 5, the operation effect of the movable body 32, the effect with high expectation of big hit, etc.). It may be. Further, although the shift to the time saving state may have already been performed at the start of the next fluctuation, the time saving shift notification may be executed at the next fluctuation.

Although the time saving shift notification and the right-handed notification are not executed, the right-handed display is displayed, so that it is possible to indicate that the time saving state has been shifted to the minimum, which is disadvantageous because the player cannot grasp the game state. Can be reduced.

After executing the process of step 065AKS107 or step 065AKS108, the time saving notification setting process is terminated.

FIG. 13-11 is a timing chart showing the content of the effect at the time of time reduction transition. In FIGS. 13-11, ON of "special symbol fluctuation" indicates that the special symbol is changing, and OFF indicates that the special symbol is stopped. ON of "normal symbol fluctuation" indicates that the normal symbol is changing, and OFF indicates that the normal symbol is stopped. ON of the "right-handed image" indicates that the right-handed image is displayed on the image display device 5, and OFF indicates that the right-handed image is not displayed.

FIG. 13-11 (A) is a timing chart when the reach effect of the super reach is not executed when the time saving symbol is stopped. As shown in FIG. 13-11 (A), when the time saving symbol is stopped as a display result of the normal symbol during the fluctuation of the special symbol, the time saving shift notification and the right-handed notification are executed. In addition, a right-handed image is displayed at the timing when the time-saving symbol stops. Then, after the symbol determination time of the time-saving symbol has elapsed, the time-saving control is started at the next start of fluctuation of the normal symbol. In this way, by executing the time saving shift notification and the right-handed notification at the symbol confirmation time of the time saving symbol before the time saving control is actually started, even if the time saving state is shifted during the fluctuation of the special symbol, the time saving is shortened. It is possible to appropriately notify that the game is to be changed to the state and that the game is to be played by right-handed hitting.

FIG. 13-11 (B) is a timing chart when the reach effect of the super reach is not executed when the time saving symbol is stopped. As shown in FIG. 13-11 (B), when the super reach occurs during the fluctuation of the special symbol and the time saving symbol stops as a result of displaying the normal symbol during the reach production of the super reach, the time saving symbol stops at the timing of stopping. The right-handed image is displayed, but the time saving shift notification and the right-handed notification are not executed. Then, at the start of the next fluctuation after the end of the fluctuation accompanied by super reach, the right-handed notification is executed. If the next fluctuation start timing is after the symbol confirmation time of the time-saving symbol, the time is already shortened. Therefore, in this embodiment, when the time-saving symbol is stopped during the reach production of the super reach, the next time. The time saving notification is not performed at the start of the fluctuation of. On the other hand, the time saving notification may be executed at the start of the next fluctuation. For example, as shown in FIG. 13-11 (B), when the symbol determination time of the time-saving symbol elapses after the start of the next fluctuation, the time-saving notification may be executed at the start of the next fluctuation.

If the end timing of the fluctuation of the special symbol being executed when the time-saving symbol is stopped is before the lapse of the symbol confirmation time of the time-saving symbol, which is the timing when the time-saving control is actually started, this special symbol is used. Since it is not necessary to rush to execute the time saving shift notification or right-handed notification during the fluctuation of the time saving symbol, the time saving transition notification or right-handed notification is sent after the start of the next special symbol fluctuation and before the lapse of the symbol confirmation time of the time saving symbol. You may want to do it.

Subsequently, an example of the effect operation of the feature unit 065AK will be described. 13-12 to 13-14 show an example of the production operation of the predetermined effect of the feature unit 065AK. FIG. 13-12 (A) is a downward arrow indicating that the decorative symbol is changed in the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R. There is. At the upper left of the image display device 5, a small symbol that is always visible to the player is also changed. Further, a predetermined effect area 65AK11 is provided in the lower center portion of the image display device 5. In this embodiment, the predetermined effect (normal figure interlocking effect, special figure interlocking effect) is executed in the predetermined effect area 65AK11. The predetermined effect area 65AK11 may be constantly displayed on the image display device 5, or may be displayed when the predetermined effect is executed. For example, the predetermined effect area 65AK11 may be erased in the high base state or the big hit game state in which the predetermined effect is not executed.

When it is decided to execute the predetermined effect, as shown in FIG. 13-12 (B), the effect image is scrolled and displayed in the predetermined effect area 65AK11, and the predetermined effect is started. In FIG. 13-12 (B), it is shown that the effect image is scrolled by the downward arrow. After that, the effect result according to the predetermined effect pattern is notified.

In the case of the predetermined effect pattern SP1, as shown in FIG. 13-12 (C), the effect image of “x” is displayed in the predetermined effect area 65AK11 and the process is stopped. As a result, it is notified that the predetermined effect fails and the degree of expectation that the display result of the normal symbol or the special symbol is a hit is low.

In the case of the predetermined effect pattern SP2, as shown in FIG. 13-12 (D), the effect image of “◯” is displayed in the predetermined effect area 65AK11 and the process is stopped. As a result, it is notified that the predetermined effect is successful and that the normal symbol is a hit.

In the case of the predetermined effect pattern SP4, as shown in FIG. 13-12 (E), the effect image of the musical note is displayed in the predetermined effect area 65AK11 and the process is stopped. As a result, it is notified that the predetermined production is successful, the expectation that the special symbol will be a big hit is high, and the super reach will be executed.

In the case of the predetermined effect pattern SP5, as shown in FIG. 13-12 (F), the effect image of the characters "heat" is displayed in the predetermined effect area 65AK11 and the process is stopped. As a result, the predetermined production is successful, and it is notified that the expectation that the special symbol will be a big hit is higher and that the super reach will be executed.

In the case of the predetermined effect patterns SP4 and SP5, for example, as shown in FIGS. 13-12 (E) and 13-12 (F), the decorative symbols having the same numbers stop in the left and right decorative symbol display areas 5L and 5R, and reach. After that, the effect result of the predetermined effect (the effect image of the musical note and the characters of "heat") is displayed. By doing so, when a predetermined effect is executed during the reach, it can be expected that the super reach will be achieved.

The predetermined effect patterns SP1 and SP2 are executed as the normal figure interlocking effect, and the predetermined effect patterns SP1, SP4, and SP5 are executed as the special figure interlocking effect. Since the normal symbol interlocking effect is executed regardless of the change of the special symbol (decorative symbol), it can be executed at any timing during the change of the special symbol (decorative symbol).

FIG. 13-13 is an example of an effect operation when a predetermined effect (ordinary figure interlocking effect) of the predetermined effect pattern SP3 is executed. FIG. 13-13 (A) shows that the variation of the decorative symbol is executed in each decorative symbol display area 5L, 5C, 5R. At the upper left of the image display device 5, a small symbol that is always visible to the player is also changed. Further, a predetermined effect area 65AK11 is provided in the lower center portion of the image display device 5.

When it is decided to execute the predetermined effect, as shown in FIG. 13-13 (B), the effect image is scrolled and displayed in the predetermined effect area 65AK11, and the predetermined effect is started.

In the case of the predetermined effect pattern SP3, as shown in FIG. 13-13 (C), the effect image of "hour" is displayed in the predetermined effect area 65AK11 and the process is stopped. As a result, it is notified that the predetermined effect is successful and the display result of the normal symbol becomes the reduced working hours symbol.

When the time saving symbol is stopped, as shown in FIG. 13-13 (D), a right-handed display instructing right-handed is displayed in the lower right part of the image display device 5, and a “time-saving rush” is displayed in the central part of the image display device 5. The time saving transition notification is executed when the image of the characters "!" Is displayed. At this time, the number of time reductions is displayed in the upper left portion of the image display device 5. Here, "100 times" is displayed corresponding to the time saving symbol B.

After that, as shown in FIG. 13-13 (E), a right-handed notification is executed in which an image of the characters "Aim right!" Is displayed in the central portion of the image display device 5. Then, as shown in FIG. 13-13 (F), the image of the right-handed notification is erased and the right-handed notification ends. At this time, the effect image of "time" is also deleted in the predetermined effect area 65AK11. As described above, in this embodiment, even when the special symbol (decorative symbol) is changing, when the display result of the normal symbol becomes the reduced working hours, the working hours shift to the shortened working hours state. In that case, it is possible to execute a predetermined effect for notifying that the time saving symbol is stopped, and the time saving transition notification and the right-handed notification as shown in FIGS. 13-13 (D) and 13-13 (D) and (E) are executed. Therefore, it is possible to preferably notify the transition to the time saving state. As a result, the player can continue the game without being confused.

FIG. 13-14 is an example of an effect operation in which a predetermined effect (ordinary figure interlocking effect) of the predetermined effect pattern SP3 is executed during the reach effect of the super reach. In FIG. 13-14 (A), the decorative symbol indicating the number "7" is stopped in the left and right decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R, and the decorative symbol is changed in the inner decorative symbol display area 5C. It shows that it is in reach. At the upper left of the image display device 5, a small symbol that is always visible to the player is also changed. Further, a predetermined effect area 65AK11 is provided in the lower center portion of the image display device 5.

When it is decided to execute the predetermined effect, as shown in FIG. 13-14 (B), the effect image is scrolled and displayed in the predetermined effect area 65AK11, and the predetermined effect is started. At this time, the reach effect of the super reach is started in the image display device 5.

In the case of the predetermined effect pattern SP3, as shown in FIG. 13-14 (C), the effect image of "hour" is displayed in the predetermined effect area 65AK11 and the process is stopped. As a result, it is notified that the predetermined effect is successful and the display result of the normal symbol becomes the reduced working hours symbol.

When the time saving symbol is stopped during the super reach effect, as shown in FIG. 13-14 (D), a right-handed display instructing right-handed is displayed in the lower right portion of the image display device 5, but the image display device 5 The time saving shift notification and the right-handed notification in the above are not executed, and the reach effect of the super reach is continuously executed.

After that, as shown in FIG. 13-14 (E), the decorative symbol showing the number "6" stops in the decorative symbol display area 5C inside, resulting in a loss. At this time, the effect image of "time" is also deleted in the predetermined effect area 65AK11. Then, as shown in FIG. 13-14 (F), a right-handed notification in which an image of the characters "Aim to the right!" Is displayed in the central portion of the image display device 5 as the next decorative symbol starts to fluctuate. Is executed. At this time, the number of time reductions is displayed in the upper left portion of the image display device 5. Here, "49 times" is displayed corresponding to the time saving symbol A. Here, the number of time reductions is subtracted from 50 times to 49 times due to the transition to the time reduction state during the previous fluctuation and the digestion of one fluctuation.

As described above, in this embodiment, when the display result of the normal symbol becomes the time saving symbol during the reach production of the super reach, the time saving transition notification and the right-handed notification are not executed, and the reach production of the super reach is prioritized. Is executed. When a big hit is obtained as a result of the super reach, the time is controlled after the big hit game state corresponding to the big hit. Therefore, even if the time saving transition notification is executed during the reach production of the super reach, the notification may be wasted or the production may be annoying, so that the reach production of the super reach is prioritized. Then, when the display result is lost, the right-handed notification is executed at the time of the next fluctuation, so that it is possible to preferably notify that the time has been shortened or that the player has right-handed. If the display result of the normal symbol becomes a time-saving symbol during the reach production of the super reach and the display result of the fluctuation accompanying the super reach becomes a big hit, the display result of the normal symbol becomes the time-saving symbol. The corresponding notification (time saving transition notification, right-handed notification) may not be executed, or the notification corresponding to the fact that the display result of the normal symbol becomes the time saving symbol due to the first fluctuation after the end of the jackpot game state is sent. You may want to do it.

(Modification example of feature part 065AK)
This feature portion is not limited to this embodiment, and various modifications and applications are possible, and further features may be added. The processing contents and determination ratios of the flowcharts and the determination methods of various effects shown in the above-described examples and modifications are merely examples, and the same effects as those of the above-described examples can be obtained. Anything may be used as long as it can be carried out suitably. Further, the effect example shown in the above embodiment is an example, and can be appropriately changed as long as the same effect can be achieved. Moreover, not all of the configurations described in the above-described embodiment are essential configurations, and some of them may be missing. Moreover, you may combine this feature part and other feature part as appropriate.

In the case of pre-reading the display result of the special symbol and executing the pre-read notice effect, if the display result of the normal symbol is a time-saving symbol, the execution of the pre-read notice effect may be restricted. For example, when the display result of the normal symbol is the reduced working hours symbol, the pre-reading advance notice effect may not be executed until the reduced working hours symbol is stopped and the state shifts to the reduced working hours state. In addition, if the display result of the normal symbol before the start of fluctuation is pre-read and there is pending data of the normal symbol that becomes the time saving symbol, the pre-reading notice effect for notifying the display result of the special symbol may be restricted. good. By doing so, the game state is changed after the pre-reading notice effect is executed, so that the fluctuation pattern changes between the pre-reading time and the actual fluctuation execution time, which is consistent with the production content of the pre-reading notice effect. It is possible to prevent it from disappearing.

As signals to be externally output to the hall computer or data display, in addition to the big hit signal (output during the big hit) and the special prize medium signal (output during the big hit and during the time reduction), the time reduction medium signal (output only during the time reduction) is provided. May be good.

In the above embodiment, when the display result of the normal symbol becomes the time saving symbol in the big hit game state, the control to the time saving state is not performed, but when the big hit occurs in the low base state, the big hit is obtained. In the corresponding big hit game state, the time saving state may be controlled based on the time saving symbol. In this case, the order is as follows: start of big hit game state → start of time saving control based on the time saving symbol → end of big hit game state, and the base changes before and after the big hit game state. Therefore, the number of time reductions based on the control of the jackpot gaming state may be set at the start of fluctuation after the jackpot gaming state ends. For example, if the number of time reductions when a big hit is made in the low base state is 50 or 100 times, and when the number of time reductions when a big hit is made in the high base state is 100 times, the time reduction during the big hit game state is achieved. When the symbol is stopped, the number of time reductions after the end of the big hit game state is set to 100 times. By setting the number of time reductions at the start of fluctuation after the end of the big hit game state, it is possible to suitably shift to the state even if the game state changes during the big hit. In addition, when the big hit game state is reached, the number of time reductions may be constant regardless of the game state, or the number of time reductions may be determined at a constant rate.

In the above embodiment, the predetermined effect (normal pattern interlocking effect, special figure interlocking effect) that suggests / notifies the display result of the normal symbol or the display result of the special symbol is the effect result by scrolling the effect image in the predetermined effect area 65AK11. (FIGS. 13-12 to 13-14), but any effect may be used as long as it can suggest and notify the display result of the normal symbol or the display result of the special symbol. Further, the predetermined effect may be at least an effect that suggests / notifies whether or not the normal symbol becomes a time-saving symbol, or the display result of the special symbol.

Further, in the above embodiment, when the display result of the normal symbol becomes the time saving symbol in the high base state, the number of time reductions is not updated, but the display result of the normal symbol becomes the time saving symbol in the high base state. If this happens, the number of working hours may be updated or added. In addition, the determination ratio of the number of time reductions and the number of time reductions differs depending on whether the display result of the normal symbol is the time reduction symbol in the low base state or the display result of the normal symbol is the time reduction symbol in the high base state. You may do it.

In the above embodiment, the execution of the time saving transition notification and the right-handed notification is restricted in a predetermined case such as during the reach production of the super reach, but the time saving symbol is used regardless of the production content during the execution. When shifting to the time saving state accordingly, the time saving transition notification or the right-handed notification may be executed. For example, when the time saving shift notification or the right-handed notification is executed by a display means different from the image display device 5, the time saving transition notification or the right-handed notification may be executed regardless of the effect content of the image display device 5. good.

(Means pertaining to feature 065AK)
(1) The gaming machine related to the feature unit 065AK is
The special identification information (for example, a special symbol) is variablely displayed, and the special variable means (for example, the special variable winning ball device 7 (for example, a special variable winning ball device 7) is based on the fact that the variable display result of the special identification information becomes a specific display result (for example, a jackpot symbol). It is a gaming machine (for example, pachinko gaming machine 65AK1) that can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a big hit gaming state) in which the game medium can easily enter the big winning opening)).
The normal identification information (for example, a normal symbol) is variably displayed, and based on the fact that the variable display result of the normal identification information becomes a predetermined result (for example, per normal figure), the normal variable means (for example, the variable winning ball device 6B (for example, the first) A variable control means (for example, the CPU 103 that executes the process of step S404) that changes the game medium into a predetermined state (for example, an open state) that is easy for the game medium to enter (2 start winning opening)).
A state control means (for example, CPU 103 that executes the process of step 065AKS018) capable of controlling the normal variable means to a special state (for example, a time saving state) in which the normal variable means is more likely to change to the predetermined state than the normal state.
It is provided with an effect execution means (for example, an effect control CPU 120) capable of executing the effect.
The state control means can control the normal state to the special state based on the fact that the variable display result of the normal identification information is a special result (for example, a time saving symbol) different from the predetermined result (for example, a step). Execute the process of 065AKS018),
The effect executing means includes a specific effect (for example, a predetermined effect of predetermined effect patterns SP4 and SP5, a special figure interlocking effect) suggesting that the variable display result of the special identification information becomes the specific display result, and a variable display of the normal identification information. It is possible to execute a special effect (for example, a predetermined effect of the predetermined effect pattern SP3, a normal figure interlocking effect) that suggests that the display result is the special result.
The state control means can control from the normal state to the special state even if the variable display of the special identification information is being executed when the variable display result of the normal identification information becomes the special result (the normal state). For example, the process of step 065AKS018 is executed).
According to such a configuration, the state transition can be suitably performed, and the game entertainment can be improved.

(2) In the gaming machine described in (1) above,
A predetermined notification means that performs a predetermined notification (for example, a time saving shift notification, a right-handed notification) based on the change of the ordinary variable means to the predetermined state, and a predetermined notification means.
Depending on the effect content during the variable display of the special identification information, a predetermined notification limiting means (for example, an effect control CPU 120 that executes the processes of step 065AKS106 and step 065AKS108) may be provided. ..
According to such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the predetermined notification from interfering with the effect during the variable display of the special identification information.

(3) In the gaming machine according to (1) or (2) above.
In the effect executing means, in the normal state, the variable display result of the ordinary identification information is the predetermined result, the variable display result of the ordinary identification information is the special result, and the variable display result of the special identification information is the above. It is possible to execute an effect that suggests which of the specific display results will be obtained (for example, the predetermined effects of the predetermined effect patterns SP1 to SP5 can be executed. FIGS. 13-12 and 13-13). You may do so.
With such a configuration, it is possible to pay attention to the display results of both the ordinary identification information and the special identification information.

(4) In the gaming machine according to any one of (1) to (3) above.
The state control means can be controlled to the special state based on being controlled to the advantageous state (for example, FIG. 13-5).
When the variable display of the special identification information after being controlled to the advantageous state is started, it is controlled based on the fact that the special identification information is controlled to the advantageous state according to whether it is the normal state or the special state. The termination conditions of the special state may be different.
According to such a configuration, the state transition can be preferably performed.

(5) In the gaming machine according to any one of (1) to (4) above.
When the variable display result of the ordinary identification information is the special result, it takes longer time from the display of the variable display result to the confirmation than when the variable display result of the ordinary identification information is the predetermined result (for example, FIG. 13-3 (A)) may be used.
According to such a configuration, the state transition can be preferably performed.

(6) In the gaming machine according to any one of (1) to (5) above.
In the case of the normal state, the time from the display of the special result as the variable display result of the normal identification information to the confirmation is longer than in the case of the special state (for example, FIGS. 13-3 (A), (Fig. 13-3 (A)). B)) may be done.
According to such a configuration, the state transition can be preferably performed.

(Explanation related to the association of feature parts)
Each configuration relating to the feature portion may be appropriately combined with a part or all of each configuration relating to the other feature portion. The feature portions thus combined or the individual feature portions that are not combined may be appropriately combined with a part or all of each configuration related to the other feature portions.

It should be considered that the embodiments disclosed this time are exemplary in all respects and not restrictive. The scope of the present invention is shown by the scope of claims rather than the above description, and it is intended to include all modifications within the meaning and scope equivalent to the scope of claims.

(Explanation of feature section 079SG)
Next, the feature portion 079SG (hereinafter, abbreviated as the present feature portion 079SG) in the embodiment of the present invention will be described. FIG. 14-1 is a configuration diagram showing various control boards and the like mounted on the pachinko gaming machine 1 in the feature unit 079SG. As shown in FIG. 14-1, the voice control board 13 in the feature unit 079SG is used for voice synthesis to generate sounds (effect sounds) output from the speakers 8L and 8R in cooperation with the effect control CPU 120. The IC079SG132, the amplification circuit (amplifier) 079SG134 for amplifying the output sound of the sound generated by the voice synthesis CI079SG132, and the voice data ROM 079SG133 are mounted, and the effect control CPU 120 is from the main board 11. The sound number data is output to the voice synthesis IC079SG132 based on the effect control command, and the sound corresponding to the sound number data is generated in the voice synthesis IC079SG132.

When the sound number data is input from the effect control CPU 120, the voice synthesis IC 079SG 132 individually generates voices and sound effects corresponding to the input sound number data for each of the speakers 8L and 8R, and causes the amplifier circuit 079SG134. Output. The amplifier circuit 079SG134 amplifies the voice and sound effects output from the voice synthesis IC 079SG132, and outputs them to the speakers 8L and 8R.

The audio data ROM 079SG133 stores control data for each of the speakers 8L and 8R for outputting a sound corresponding to the effect performed by the effect command corresponding to the sound number data in association with the sound number data. .. That is, these control data are the output modes (frequency characteristics, timing (delay), etc.) of sound effects such as sound effects and BGM (musical pieces) output from the speakers 8L and 8R during the effect period (for example, the decorative pattern variable display period). Is a collection of data including audio data and the like described in chronological order.

FIG. 14-2 (A) is an explanatory diagram showing an image display device 5 in the feature unit 079. The display area of the image display device 5 in the feature unit 079SG is formed in a rectangular shape having a height L and a left-right width L when viewed from the front. Most of the display area constitutes a first display area 079SG005F for displaying an effect such as a variable display of a decorative pattern, a reach effect, an operation promotion effect described later, and a still image display effect. Further, the lower end of the image display device 5 has a first reserved storage display area 079SG005D in which the first special figure reserved storage number can be displayed by the number of white circular hold displays, and the second special figure reserved storage number is outlined. A second display area 079SG005Sa including a second hold storage display area 079SG005U that can be displayed by the number of circular hold displays and a telop display area 079SG005T that can display a telop indicating a game state is configured.

That is, the portion of the entire display area of the image display device 5 excluding the second display area 079SG005Sa and the third display area 079SG005Sb is the first display area 079SG005F.

The second display area 079SG005Sa and the third display area 079SG005Sb display information related to the game (hold display, telop display, fourth symbol) at the peripheral portion of the display area of the image display device 5 rather than the first display area 079SG005F. This is the display area for displaying (displaying the number of stored items on hold). That is, the second display area 079SG005Sa and the third display area 079SG005Sb in the feature unit 079SG are also UI (user interface) display areas in the pachinko gaming machine 1.

Then, the upper right end portion of the image display device 5 includes a fourth symbol 079SG005J indicating that the special symbol is being variably displayed, a display of the first special symbol reserved storage number, and a display of the second special symbol reserved storage number. 3 Display area 079SG005Sb is configured.

Of these, the second display area 079SG005Sa is formed in a rectangular shape when viewed from the front, and its height is formed to be less than half the height H of the entire display area of the image display device 5. The left-right width is formed to have the same length as the left-right width L of the entire display area of the image display device 5. Further, although the third display area 079SG005Sb is formed in a rectangular shape when viewed from the front, its height and left-right width are formed to be extremely shorter than the height H and the left-right width L of the entire display area of the image display device 5. There is.

Therefore, in the feature unit 079SG, the area of the first display area 079SG005F in the entire display area of the image display device 5 is larger than the combined area of the second display area 079SG005Sa and the third display area 079SG005Sb. ..

As shown in FIG. 14-2 (B), in the first hold storage display area 079SG005D and the second hold storage display area 079SG005U, the effect control CPU 120 executes the hold display operation process (see FIG. 8-13) described later. As a result, each hold display can be rotated and displayed at a constant speed (for example, rotation speed V3) around the vertical axis.

As shown in FIG. 14-2 (C), in the telop display area 079SG005T, the effect control CPU 120 executes the telop operation process (see FIG. 14-13) described later to respond to the gaming state and the effect being executed. A message (for example, a message according to the state of the effect such as "XX mode is in progress!" During a specific reach effect) is moved by a constant speed (for example, movement speed V3) from the left to the right. It is possible to display while.

The characters included in the message according to the game state reach the right end of the telop display area 079SG005T and end the display, and at the same time, are displayed again at the left end of the telop display area 079SG005T and are displayed again from the left to the right. Moved in the direction. Therefore, when the message corresponding to the game state is displayed while being moved in the telop display area 079SG005T, the entire message according to the game state is always displayed in the telop display area 079SG005T, so that the player can see the message. It is easier to recognize the current game state.

In the feature unit 079SG, the hold display in the first hold storage display area 079SG005D and the second hold storage display area 079SG005U and the message in the telop display area 079SG005T are rotated and moved at a common constant speed (V3). Although illustrated, the present invention is not limited to this, and the hold display in the first hold storage display area 079SG005D and the second hold storage display area 079SG005U and the message in the telop display area 079SG005T have different constant speeds. It may be rotatable and movable with.

As shown in FIG. 14-2 (D), the fourth symbol 079SG005J has an upper symbol 079SG005Ja and a lower symbol 079SG005Jb, and the upper symbol 079SG005Ja and the lower symbol 079SG005Jb blink alternately at regular intervals. Indicates that a special symbol is being displayed in a variable manner. Further, when the variable display result is off, both the upper symbol 079SG005Ja and the lower symbol 079SG005Jb are turned off (OFF) at the end timing of the variable display, while the variable display result is a big hit or a miss. In that case, both are lit (turned on) at the end timing of the variable display.

The display of the first special figure reserved storage number and the display of the second special figure reserved storage number in the third display area 079SG005Sb are the timing when a new reserved storage occurs and the timing when a new variable display is started. Only the number changes. That is, the display of the first special figure reserved storage number and the display of the second special figure reserved storage number in the third display area 079SG005Sb are the fourth symbol 079SG005J, the first reserved storage display area 079SG005D, and the second reserved storage display area 079SG005U. , Unlike the telop display area 079SG005T, the display mode does not change except for the start timing of the variable display.

Next, the display control unit 123 in the feature unit 079SG will be described. The CGROM in the display control unit 123 stores a plurality of types of image data for displaying an image on the image display device 5. The display control unit 123 can display a predetermined image on the image display device 5 based on the image data of 1 stored in the CGROM based on the instruction by the effect control CPU 120, and can display a plurality of types of image data. By arranging and displaying an image on the image display device 5, it is possible to display a predetermined effect screen. When the predetermined image is not displayed on the image display device 5, the image of the predetermined image is arranged by arranging other image data on the front side of the image data of the predetermined image with a transparency of 0% depending on the situation. The predetermined image is not displayed on the effect screen by controlling the image based on the data so as not to be displayed on the effect screen and by displaying the image on the image display device 5 that has created the display data in which the image data of the predetermined image is not arranged. It may be controlled as such.

As shown in FIGS. 14-3 (A) to 14-3 (D), for example, when displaying an image on the image display device 5, a plurality of image data including image data 1 to 3 are arranged. An image is displayed on the image display device 5 based on the created display data.

As shown in FIG. 14-3 (A), the image data 1 displays the first reserved storage display area 079SG005D, the second reserved storage display area 079SG005U and the telop display area 079SG005T in the second display area 079SG005Sa, and the fourth This is data drawn to display the symbol 079SG005J in the third display area 079SG005Sb. It is also data drawn for displaying a small symbol of the image data 1 decorative symbol in the first display area 079SG005F (on the left side of the third display area 079SG005Sb).

As shown in FIG. 14-3 (B), the image data 2 is data drawn for displaying the images of the chance-up effect, the still image display effect, and the operation promotion effect, which will be described later, in the first display area 079SG005F. ..

As shown in FIG. 14-3 (C), the image data 3 is data drawn for displaying the variable display of the decorative pattern and the reach effect in the first display area 079SG005F.

As shown in FIGS. 14-3 (A) to 14-3 (C), the image data 1, the image data 2, and the image data 3 have display priorities for displaying an image on the image display device 5. Is set. As for the display priority, the image data 1 is set to be the highest and the image data 3 is set to the lowest (image display priority in the image display device 5: image data 1> image data 2> image data 3). .. That is, in the image display device 5, the image based on the image data 1 is displayed as the uppermost image, the image based on the image data 2 is displayed as an image lower than the image based on the image data 1, and is based on the image data 3. The image is displayed as an image of a lower layer (bottom layer) than the image based on the image data 1 and the image based on the image data 2. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 14-3 (D), in the image display device 5, the image based on the image data 2 is displayed with priority over the image based on the image data 3, and the image based on the image data 1 is displayed. The image based on the image data 2 and the image based on the image data 3 are displayed with priority.

As shown in FIG. 14-3 (D), when the image based on the image data 1, the image based on the image data 2, and the image based on the image data 3 are simultaneously displayed on the image display device 5, the image data 3 Since the image based on is displayed as the image of the lowest layer, at least a part of the image based on the image data 3 becomes difficult to see or invisible due to the image based on the first data or the image based on the image data 2. There is.

Although details will be described later in this feature unit 079SG, the image based on the image data 1 and the image data 2 is displayed on the image display device 5 as a moving image whose progress speed is always constant, while on the image data 3. The based image is displayed on the image display device 5 as a plurality of moving speed moving images or still images based on the data stored in the CGROM in advance.

In particular, in this feature unit 079SG, although details will be described later, it is possible to display a moving image of the reach effect at a normal progress speed V1 and a progress speed V2 (slow motion) slower than the V1 during the reach effect of the super reach. It has become. This is because the data for the production moving image displayed at the progress speed V1 and the data for the production movie displayed at the progress speed V2 are stored in advance in the CGROM, but the present invention is limited to this. Only the data for the production video to be displayed at the progress speed V1 is stored in advance in the CGROM, and a part of the production video of the reach production is set to the progress speed V2 by performing a predetermined process on the data. It may be possible to display it.

As described above, in the feature unit 079SG, the progress speed of the reach effect recognized by the player is set to V1 by setting the image progress speed, which is the speed at which the effect moving image changes, to the first speed, which is the non-slow motion period and the image. By setting the progress speed to V2, which is slower than V1, the slow motion period is set to the second speed at which the progress speed of the reach effect recognized by the player is slow. That is, the slow motion video, which is a production video in which the progress speed of the production in the feature unit 079SG is slow, is a video progress as compared with the non-slow motion video whose video progress speed is V1 displayed in front of the slow motion video. Anything with a slow speed will do.

The feature unit 079SG exemplifies a form in which a slow motion period is provided in all super reach effects (see FIGS. 14-18 to 14-25), but the present invention is limited to this. Instead, for example, as a super reach effect, the content of the effect moving image displayed on the image display device 5 is the same as the content of the super reach effect shown in FIGS. 14-18 to 14-25, but the video progress speed. Does not change from V1 to V2, that is, by executing a super reach effect that does not result in a slow motion period, the slow motion period is achieved in the super reach effect shown in FIGS. 14-18 to 14-25. May be made easier for the player to recognize.

That is, in the case of executing the super reach effect in which the content of the effect movie is the same but the video progress speed does not change to V2, the effect movie is a second speed slower than the first speed in the present invention. By displaying the production video with the same content at a video progress speed V2, which is slower than the video progress speed V1 in the non-slow motion super reach production, for a longer period than the non-slow motion super reach production. The displayed production video corresponds to this.

As described above, the feature unit 079SG configures a slow motion effect in which the reach effect felt by the player is slow by slowing the video advance speed of the effect moving image, and the sound from the speakers 8L and 8R. Although the output of the above is illustrated as a form that does not change from the playback speed V3, the present invention is not limited to this, and the speakers 8L, 8R are not limited to this, and the video progress speed of the production moving image is not changed (V1 remains). By conversely increasing the reproduction speed of the sound output from the speaker and the light emission cycle of the game effect lamp 9, a pseudo slow motion that the player feels that the progress speed of the reach effect has slowed down may be configured.

That is, the pachinko gaming machine 1 in the feature unit 079SG includes a plurality of effect output means including display means capable of displaying the effect moving image, and the progress speed of the effect by at least one of these effect output means. Is different between the slow motion period and the non-slow motion period, so that the player can recognize that the effect being executed is slow motion in the slow motion period.

It should be noted that the feature unit 079SG exemplifies a mode in which the display of the effect video of the reach effect is always executed at the progress speed V2 during the slow motion period, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the slow motion is not limited to this. The period may be such that the progress speed of the display of the effect moving image of the reach effect can be changed (for example, the progress speed gradually decreases with the passage of time, or the progress speed increases or decreases within a predetermined range).

FIG. 14-4 (A) is an explanatory diagram showing an example of the contents of the effect control command used in the feature unit 079SG. The effect control command has, for example, a 2-byte structure, the first byte represents MODE (command classification), and the second byte represents EXT (command type). The first bit (bit 7) of the MODE data is always set to "1", and the first bit of the EXT data is set to "0". The command form shown in FIG. 14-4 (A) is an example, and other command forms may be used. Further, in this example, the control command is composed of two control signals, but the number of control signals constituting the control command may be one or a plurality of three or more.

In the example shown in FIG. 14-4 (A), the command 8001H is the first variable display start command for designating the start of the variable display in the special figure game using the first special figure in the first special symbol display device 4A. .. The command 8002H is a second variable display start command for designating the start of variable display in the special figure game using the second special figure in the second special symbol display device 4B. The command 81XXH is a decoration that is variably displayed in the "left", "middle", and "right" decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R in the image display device 5 in response to the variable display of the special symbol in the special symbol game. This is a variation pattern specification command that specifies a variation pattern (variation time (variable display time)) such as a symbol (also referred to as an effect symbol). Here, XXH indicates that it is an unspecified hexadecimal number, and may be a value arbitrarily set according to the content of instruction by the effect control command. In the variation pattern specification command, different EXT data is set according to the variation pattern to be specified.

The command 8CXXXH is a variable display result designation command, and is an effect control command for designating a variable display result such as a special symbol or a decorative symbol. In the variable display result specification command, for example, as shown in FIG. 14-4 (B), it is determined whether the variable display result (also referred to as the variable display result) is "missing", "big hit", or "small hit". Different EXT data are set according to the result (pre-determined result) and the determined result (big hit type determination result) of which of the plurality of types the jackpot type is to be used when the variable display result is "big hit".

In the variable display result designation command, for example, as shown in FIG. 14-4 (B), the command 8C00H is the first variable display result designation command indicating a predetermined result indicating that the variable display result is “missing”. .. The command 8C01H is a second variable display result designation command for notifying the pre-determined result that the variable display result is "big hit" and the big hit type is "probability variable big hit A" and the big hit type determination result. The command 8C02H is a third variable display result designation command for notifying the pre-determined result that the variable display result is "big hit" and the big hit type is "probability variable big hit B" and the big hit type determination result. The command 8C03H is a fourth variable display result designation command for notifying the pre-determined result and the jackpot type determination result that the variable display result is "big hit" and the jackpot type is "probability variable jackpot C". The command 8C04H is the fifth variable display result designation command for notifying the pre-determined result and the jackpot type determination result that the variable display result is "big hit" and the jackpot type is "non-probability variable jackpot". The command 8C05H is the sixth variable display result designation command for notifying the predetermined result that the variable display result is a "small hit".

The command 8F00H is a symbol confirmation command for designating the change stop (confirmation) of the decorative symbol in each of the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R in the image display device 5. The command 95XXH is a game state designation command for designating the current gaming state in the pachinko gaming machine 1. In the game state designation command, different EXT data are set according to, for example, the current game state in the pachinko gaming machine 1. As a specific example, the command 9500H is used as the first game state specification command corresponding to the game state (low probability low base state, normal state) in which neither the time saving control nor the probability variation control is performed, and the command 9501H is executed by the time saving control. On the other hand, it is a second game state specification command corresponding to a game state (low probability high base state, time saving state) in which probability change control is not performed. In addition, the command 9502H is used as the third game state specification command corresponding to the game state (high probability low base state, time saving no probability change state) in which the time saving control is performed while the probability change control is performed, and the command 9503H is used as the time saving control and probability change. This is the fourth game state specification command corresponding to the game state (high accuracy high base state, time reduction probability change state) in which control is performed together.

The command A0XXH is a hit start designation command (also referred to as a "fanfare command") for designating the display of an effect image indicating the start of a big hit game or a small hit game. The command A1XXH is a notification command during the opening of the big winning opening that notifies that the big winning opening is in the open state in the big hit game state. The command A2XXH is a notification command after opening the big winning opening that notifies that it is a period during which the big winning opening has changed from the open state to the closed state in the big hit game state. The command A3XXH is a hit end designation command for designating the display of the effect image at the end of the big hit game or the small hit.

In the hit start designation command and the hit end designation command, different EXT data may be set according to the pre-determination result and the jackpot type determination result, for example, by setting the same EXT data as the variable display result specification command. .. Alternatively, in the hit start designation command or the hit end designation command, the correspondence between the pre-determined result and the jackpot type determination result and the set EXT data may be different from the correspondence in the variable display result specification command. .. In the notification command during opening of the big winning opening and the notification command after opening of the big winning opening, different EXT data are set according to the number of round executions (for example, "1" to "10") in the big hit state described later, for example. ..

The command B100H is based on the fact that the game ball that has passed (entered) the first starting winning opening formed by the winning ball device 6A is detected by the first starting opening switch 22A and the starting winning (first starting winning) is generated. This is a first start opening winning designation command for notifying that the first start condition for executing the special figure game using the first special figure in the first special symbol display device 4A has been satisfied. The command B200H is based on the fact that the game ball that has passed (entered) the second start winning opening formed by the variable winning ball device 6B is detected by the second starting opening switch 22B and the starting winning (second starting winning) is generated. , The second start opening winning designation command for notifying that the second start condition for executing the special figure game using the second special figure in the second special symbol display device 4B has been satisfied.

The command C1XXH is a first hold storage number notification command for notifying the first special figure hold storage number in order to make it possible to specify the special figure hold storage number. The command C2XXH is a second hold storage number notification command for notifying the second special figure hold storage number in order to make it possible to specify the special figure hold storage number. The first hold memory number notification command is, for example, when the first start opening prize designation command is transmitted based on the fact that the game ball passes (enters) the first start winning opening and the first starting condition is satisfied. , Is transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12. The second hold memory number notification command is, for example, when the second start opening prize designation command is transmitted based on the fact that the game ball passes (enters) the second start winning opening and the second starting condition is satisfied. , Is transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12. Further, the first hold storage number notification command and the second hold storage number notification command are used in the special figure game when either the first start condition or the second start condition is satisfied (when the hold storage number decreases). It may be transmitted in response to the start of execution.

Instead of the first hold storage number notification command and the second hold storage number notification command, the total hold storage number notification command for notifying the total hold storage number may be transmitted. That is, a total hold storage number notification command may be used to notify an increase (or decrease) of the total hold storage number.

The commands shown in FIG. 14-4 (A) are examples, and some of these commands may not be provided, or different commands may be used in place of these commands. You may add a command different from the command in. For example, a prize ball number notification command for making it possible to specify the number of prize balls to be paid out based on the winning of a game ball at each winning opening, or a gate for notifying that the game ball has passed through the passing gate 41. A passage notification command, a notification command for notifying the remaining number of times that the probability change control or the time reduction control is executed, or the like may be provided.

FIG. 14-5 is an explanatory diagram illustrating a random number value counted on the side of the main board 11. As shown in FIG. 14-5, in the feature unit 079SG, on the side of the main board 11, the random number value MR1 for determining the special figure display result, the random number value MR2 for determining the jackpot type, and the random number value MR3 for determining the fluctuation pattern , Numerical data indicating each of the random number values MR4 for determining the display result of the general map is controlled so as to be countable. In addition, a random number value other than these may be used in order to enhance the game effect. Random numbers used to control the progress of such games are also called game random numbers.

The random number circuit 104 may count numerical data indicating a part or all of these random number values MR1 to MR4. The CPU 103 uses a random counter different from the random number circuit 104, such as a random counter provided in the game control counter setting unit 079SG154 shown in FIG. 14-10, and updates various numerical data by software to update the random number value. Numerical data indicating a part of MR1 to MR4 may be counted.

The random number value MR1 for determining the special figure display result is a random number value used for determining whether or not to control the variable display result such as a special symbol in the special figure game as a "big hit" to the big hit game state, for example. It takes a value in the range of "1" to "65536". The random value MR2 for determining the jackpot type has any of "probability variation jackpot A", "probability variation jackpot B", "probability variation jackpot C", and "non-probability variation jackpot" when the variable display result is "big hit". It is a random value used to determine, for example, a value in the range of "1" to "100".

The random value MR3 for determining the fluctuation pattern is a random value used to determine the fluctuation pattern in the variable display of the special symbol or the decorative symbol to one of a plurality of types prepared in advance, and is, for example, "1" to "1" to "". It takes a value in the range of 997.

The random number value MR4 for determining the normal figure display result is used to determine whether the variable display result in the normal figure game by the normal symbol display 20 is "per normal figure" or "out of normal figure". It is a random number value to be obtained, and takes a value in the range of "3" to "13", for example.

FIG. 14-6 (A) shows a configuration example of the special figure display result determination table 1 stored in the ROM 101. The feature unit 079SG uses a special figure display result determination table common to the first special figure and the second special figure as the special figure display result determination table, but the present invention is not limited to this. , The first special figure and the second special figure may use individual special figure display result determination tables.

The special figure display result determination table 1 is a variable display result in a special figure game using the first special figure by the first special symbol display device 4A and a special figure game using the second special figure by the second special symbol display device 4B. In order to determine whether or not to control the variable display result as a "big hit" to the big hit game state before the definite special symbol is derived and displayed, based on the random number value MR1 for determining the special figure display result. This is the referenced table.

In the special figure display result determination table 1 in the feature unit 079SG, depending on whether the gaming state of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is a normal state, a time saving state (low probability state), or a probability change state (high probability state). A numerical value (judgment value) to be compared with the random number value MR1 for determining the special figure display result is assigned to the special figure display result of "big hit" or "missing".

In the special figure display result judgment table 1, whether or not the table data indicating the judgment value to be compared with the random number value MR1 for the special figure display result judgment is controlled to the big hit game state with the special figure display result as a "big hit". It is the judgment data assigned to the decision result. In the special figure display result determination table 1 in the feature unit 079SG, when the game state is the probability change state (high probability state), more judgment values are obtained than when the game state is the normal state or the time saving state (low probability state). It is assigned to the special figure display result of "big hit". As a result, in the probability change state (high probability state) in which the probability change control is performed in the pachinko gaming machine 1, the special figure display result is set as a "big hit" and controlled to the big hit game state in the normal state or the time saving state (low probability state). Then, the probability of being determined to control the special figure display result as a "big hit" to the jackpot gaming state is higher than the probability of being determined (about 1/300 in the feature section 079SG) (about 1 in the feature section 079SG). / 30). That is, in the special figure display result determination table 1, it is determined that when the gaming state of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is in the probability changing state (high probability state), it is controlled to the jackpot gaming state as compared with the case of the normal state or the time saving state. The determination data is assigned to the determination result of whether or not to control the jackpot gaming state so that the probability of the game is high.

Further, FIG. 14-6 (B) shows a configuration example of the special figure display result determination table 2 stored in the ROM 101. The special figure display result determination table 2 is a variable display result in a special figure game using the first special figure by the first special symbol display device 4A and a special figure game using the second special figure by the second special symbol display device 4B. Before the definite special symbol that becomes The table referenced for.

In the special figure display result determination table 2 in the feature unit 079SG, regardless of whether the gaming state of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is a normal state, a time saving state (low probability state), or a probability change state (high probability state). A numerical value (judgment value) to be compared with the random number value MR1 for determining the special figure display result is assigned to the special figure display result of "small hit".

In the special figure display result determination table 2, whether or not the table data indicating the determination value to be compared with the random number value MR1 for determining the special figure display result is controlled to the small hit game state with the special figure display result as "small hit". It is the judgment data assigned to the decision result. In the special figure display result judgment table 2 in the feature unit 079SG, the number of judgment values assigned to the "small hit" is different between the case of the special figure game of the first special figure and the case of the second special figure. There is. Specifically, in the case of the special figure game of the first special figure, the judgment value is assigned to "small hit", but in the case of the special figure game of the second special figure, it is assigned to "small hit". Judgment value is not assigned. Therefore, as will be described later, the variable display of the second special figure is executed with priority over the variable display of the first special figure, and the second start winning is formed by the variable winning ball device 6B by executing the time saving control. In the high base state where a prize is given to the mouth and the variable display of the second special figure is often executed, "small hit" is almost not generated, and the second start formed by the variable winning ball device 6B. In a high base state in which a game ball easily enters the winning opening, it is possible to avoid the occurrence of a small hit in which a large number of game balls cannot be obtained and to prevent the game interest from being deteriorated.

FIG. 14-7 (A) shows a configuration example of the jackpot type determination table stored in the ROM 101. The jackpot type determination table in the feature unit 079SG sets any of a plurality of jackpot types based on the random number value MR2 for determining the jackpot type when it is determined to control the jackpot game state with the special figure display result as "big hit". It is a table referenced to determine the crab. In the jackpot type determination table, whether the special symbol whose variable display (variable display) is performed in the special symbol game is the first special symbol (special symbol game by the first special symbol display device 4A) or the second special symbol (first). 2 The numerical value (judgment value) to be compared with the random number value MR2 for determining the jackpot type is "non-probability variation jackpot", "probability variation jackpot A", or "probability variation jackpot A", depending on whether the game is a special figure game by the special symbol display device 4B). It is assigned to a plurality of types of jackpots such as "probability variation jackpot B" and "probability variation jackpot C".

Here, the jackpot type in the feature unit 079SG will be described with reference to FIG. 14-7 (B). In the feature unit 079SG, the jackpot type includes high accuracy control and time saving control after the end of the jackpot gaming state. "Probability change big hit A", "Probability change big hit B", "Probability change big hit C" which are executed and shift to the high accuracy high base state, and only the time saving control is executed after the end of the big hit game state to the low accuracy high base state. A "non-probability change jackpot" to be transferred is set.

The big hit game state by the "probability change big hit A" is a big hit in which the special variable winning ball device 7 is repeatedly executed 10 times (so-called 10 rounds) to change the special variable winning ball device 7 into the first state which is advantageous for the player. The jackpot game state by the "probability variation jackpot B" is a jackpot in which the special variable winning ball device 7 is repeatedly executed five times (so-called five rounds) to change the special variable winning ball device 7 into the first state which is advantageous for the player. The jackpot game state by the "probability variation jackpot C" is a jackpot in which the special variable winning ball device 7 is repeatedly executed twice (so-called two rounds) in a first state that is advantageous to the player. Further, the jackpot game state due to the "non-probability variation jackpot" is a jackpot in which the special variable winning ball device 7 is repeatedly executed twice (so-called two rounds) in a first state that is advantageous to the player. Therefore, "Probability change jackpot A" is called 10 rounds (10R) probability variation jackpot, "Probability variation jackpot B" is called 5 rounds (5R) probability variation jackpot, and "Probability variation jackpot C" is called 2 rounds (2R) probability variation jackpot. It may be called and the "non-probable variable jackpot" may be referred to as a two-round (2R) non-probable variable jackpot.

Further, although not particularly shown, the small hit game state in the feature unit 079SG changes the special variable winning ball device 7 to the first state advantageous to the player twice, and the opening time is the same as the probability variation big hit C. It is an open period (0.1 seconds in this feature unit 079SG). After the small hit game is completed, the game state immediately before the small hit game is inherited.

The high-accuracy control and the time-saving control executed after the end of the jackpot gaming state of the probabilistic jackpot A, the probabilistic jackpot B, and the probabilistic jackpot C are continuously executed until the jackpot occurs again after the end of the jackpot gaming state. .. Therefore, when the jackpot that occurs again is the probability variation jackpot A or the probability variation jackpot B, the high accuracy control and the time saving control are executed again after the end of the jackpot gaming state, so that the jackpot gaming state does not go through the normal state. It becomes a so-called consecutive villa state that occurs continuously.

On the other hand, the time saving control executed after the end of the big hit game state by the "non-probability change big hit" is that the special figure game is executed a predetermined number of times (100 times in this feature unit 079SG), or the special figure of the predetermined number of times. It ends when it becomes a big hit game state before the game is executed.

In the setting example of the jackpot type determination table shown in FIG. 14-7 (A), "probability variable jackpot A" and "probability variable jackpot A" are set according to whether the special figure to be variably displayed is the first special figure or the second special figure. The allocation of judgment values for the jackpot types of "probability variation jackpot B", "probability variation jackpot C", and "non-probability variation jackpot" is different. That is, when the special figure to be variably displayed is the first special figure, the determination value in the predetermined range (value in the range of "81" to "100") is "probability change jackpot B" or "probability change" with a small number of rounds. While assigned to the jackpot type of "big hit C", if the special figure that is variably displayed is the second special figure, the judgment value is assigned to the jackpot type of "probability variation jackpot B" or "probability variation jackpot C". Not done. With such a setting, the jackpot type is determined to be one of a plurality of types based on the fact that the first start condition for starting the special figure game using the first special figure by the first special symbol display device 4A is satisfied. When the jackpot type is determined to be one of a plurality of types based on the establishment of the second start condition for starting the special figure game using the second special figure by the second special symbol display device 4B Therefore, the ratio of determining the jackpot type to "probability variation jackpot B" or "probability variation jackpot C" with a small number of rounds can be made different. In particular, in the special figure game using the second special figure, it is not determined to control the jackpot type to the jackpot state with a small number of rounds as "probability variation jackpot B" or "probability variation jackpot C". Due to the high opening control, in the game state in which the game ball easily enters the second start winning opening formed by the variable winning ball device 6B, the frequent occurrence of the big hit state in which the number of winning balls obtained is small is avoided, and the game interest is reduced. It is designed to prevent this.

In the setting example of the jackpot type determination table shown in FIG. 14-7 (A), the allocation of the determination value for the jackpot type of "non-probability variation" is the special figure game of the first special figure or the second special figure. Since it is the same regardless of whether it exists, the probability of becoming a non-probability jackpot and the probability of becoming a probabilistic jackpot are the same regardless of whether it is a special figure game of the first special figure or a second special figure. It is said that.

Therefore, as described above, the allocation of the judgment values for the "probability variation jackpot B" and the "probability variation jackpot C" differs depending on whether the game is the special figure game of the first special figure or the second special figure. Therefore, the allocation of the judgment value to the "probability change jackpot A" also differs depending on whether it is the special figure game of the first special figure or the second special figure, and for the "probability change jackpot A" having a large number of rounds, the second It is set so that the case of the special figure game of the special figure is easier to determine than the case of the special figure game of the first special figure.

Even in the case of the special figure game of the second special figure, the judgment value in a predetermined range different from that of the special figure game of the first special figure is the big hit of "probability variation jackpot B" or "probability variation jackpot C". It may be assigned to a type. For example, in the case of the special figure game of the second special figure, a smaller judgment value than in the case of the special figure game of the first special figure is assigned to the jackpot type of "probability variation jackpot B" or "probability variation jackpot C". May be assigned. Alternatively, the jackpot type may be determined by referring to the common table data regardless of whether the game is the special figure game of the first special figure or the second special figure.

FIG. 14-8 shows the fluctuation pattern in the feature unit 079SG. In the feature unit 079SG, among the cases where the variable display result is "off", the variable display mode of the decorative symbol is variable according to each of the case of "non-reach" and the case of "reach". A plurality of fluctuation patterns are prepared in advance in response to a case where the display result is a "big hit" or a "small hit". The variation pattern corresponding to the case where the variable display result is "off" and the variation display mode of the decorative symbol is "non-reach" is called a non-reach variation pattern (also referred to as "non-reach out-of-reach variation pattern"). The variation pattern corresponding to the case where the variable display result is "out of reach" and the variation display mode of the decorative symbol is "reach" is called a reach variation pattern (also referred to as "out of reach variation pattern"). Further, the non-reach fluctuation pattern and the reach fluctuation pattern are included in the missed fluctuation pattern corresponding to the case where the variable display result is “off”. The fluctuation pattern corresponding to the case where the variable display result is "big hit" is called a big hit fluctuation pattern.

The jackpot fluctuation pattern and the reach fluctuation pattern include a normal reach fluctuation pattern in which the reach effect of the normal reach is executed and a super reach fluctuation pattern in which the reach effect of the super reach is executed. Although the feature unit 079SG provides only one type of normal reach fluctuation pattern, the present invention is not limited to this, and a plurality of normal reach fluctuation patterns such as normal reach α, normal reach β, and so on are provided. It may be provided. Further, in the super reach fluctuation pattern, a plurality of super reach fluctuation patterns may be provided, such as super reach α, super reach β, and so on.

The fluctuation pattern in the feature unit 079SG also includes a fluctuation pattern (PC1-1) of a special hit corresponding to the case where the variable display result is a “small hit”.

As shown in FIG. 14-8, the special figure variable display time of the normal reach variation pattern in which the reach effect of the normal reach is executed in the feature unit 079SG is set shorter than that of the super reach variation pattern.

Further, in this feature unit 079SG, as will be described later, these fluctuation patterns are determined first, such as a non-reach type, a normal reach type, a super reach type, and the like. Then, instead of determining the variation pattern to be executed from the variation pattern belonging to the determined type, the determination is made using only the random value MR3 for determining the variation pattern without determining these types. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, in addition to the random value MR3 for determining the variation pattern, a random value for determining the variation pattern type is provided for determining the variation pattern type. The type of the variation pattern may be determined first from the random value of the above, and then the variation pattern to be executed may be determined from the variation patterns belonging to the variation pattern belonging to the determined type.

FIG. 14-9 is an explanatory diagram of a method of determining a fluctuation pattern in the feature unit 079SG. In this feature unit 079SG, the variation pattern determination table to be selected is different depending on the display result of the variable display to be executed and the number of reserved storages.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 14-9, when the variable display result is a non-probability variation jackpot, the jackpot variation pattern determination table A is selected, and the variation pattern is used using the jackpot variation pattern determination table A. PB1-1 (normal reach jackpot fluctuation pattern), PB1-2 (super reach α1 jackpot fluctuation pattern), PB1-3 (super reach α3 jackpot fluctuation pattern) and PB1-4 (super reach β1 jackpot fluctuation pattern) And PB1-5 (fluctuation pattern of super reach β3 jackpot). If the variable display result is the probability variation jackpot A or the probability variation jackpot B, the jackpot variation pattern determination table B is selected, and the variation pattern is set to PB1-1 (normal reach jackpot) using the jackpot variation pattern determination table A. It is determined from the fluctuation pattern) and PB1-2 (the fluctuation pattern of the super reach jackpot).

As shown in FIG. 14-9, the number of assigned determination values for PB1-2 to PB1-5 is different between the jackpot variation pattern determination table A and the jackpot variation pattern determination table. Specifically, in the jackpot fluctuation pattern determination table A, 45 determination values are assigned to PB1-2, 150 determination values are assigned to PB1-3, 300 determination values are assigned to PB1-4, and 500 determination values are assigned to PB1-5. In the jackpot variation pattern determination table B, 30 determination values are assigned to PB1-2, 135 determination values are assigned to PB1-3, 315 determination values are assigned to PB1-4, and 515 determination values are assigned to PB1-5. That is, in the present feature unit 079SG, when the variable display result is a probabilistic jackpot, PB1-3 and PB1-4, which are fluctuation patterns of the super reach β system, are at a higher rate than when the variable display result is a non-probability jackpot. Since it is determined to be, it is possible to draw the player's attention to the fluctuation pattern in the variable display.

If the variable display result is a small hit, a special hit variation pattern determination table is selected, and the variation pattern is determined to be PC1-1 (special hit variation pattern) using the special hit variation pattern determination table. do.

If the variable display result is "off" in the normal game state (low base state) and the number of reserved memory of the variation special figure is 2 or less, the deviation pattern determination table A is selected, and the variation pattern determination table A is selected. Using the out-of-reach variation pattern determination table A, the variation patterns are PA1-1 (non-reach out-of-reach variation pattern), PA2-1 (normal reach out-of-range variation pattern), PA2-2 (super reach α2 out-of-reach variation pattern), and PA2. It is determined from -3 (fluctuation pattern out of super reach α3), PA2-4 (variation pattern out of super reach β2), and PA2-5 (fluctuation pattern out of super reach β3).

If the variable display result is "off" in the normal game state (low base state) and the number of reserved memory of the variation special figure is 3, the deviation pattern determination table B for deviation is selected and the deviation is achieved. Using the fluctuation pattern determination table B, the fluctuation patterns are PA1-2 (shortening fluctuation pattern of non-reach loss), PA2-1 (variation pattern of normal reach loss), PA2-2 (variation pattern of super reach α2 loss), and PA2. It is determined from -3 (fluctuation pattern out of super reach α3), PA2-4 (variation pattern out of super reach β2), and PA2-5 (fluctuation pattern out of super reach β3).

If the variable display result is "off" in the normal game state (low base state) and the number of reserved memory of the variation special figure is 4, the deviation pattern determination table C for deviation is selected and the deviation is achieved. Using the fluctuation pattern determination table C for use, the fluctuation patterns are PA1-3 (shortening fluctuation pattern of non-reach loss), PA2-1 (variation pattern of normal reach loss), PA2-2 (variation pattern of super reach α2 loss), and PA2. It is determined from -3 (fluctuation pattern out of super reach α3), PA2-4 (variation pattern out of super reach β2), and PA2-5 (fluctuation pattern out of super reach β3).

If the variable display result is "out of place" in the time saving state (high base state), the out-of-order fluctuation pattern determination table D is selected, and the out-of-order fluctuation pattern determination table D is used to set the variation pattern to PA1-4. (Non-reach out-of-time shortening fluctuation pattern), PA2-1 (normal reach out-of-time fluctuation pattern), PA2-2 (super reach α2 out-of-order fluctuation pattern), PA2-3 (super reach α3 out-of-range fluctuation pattern), and PA2 It is determined from -4 (fluctuation pattern out of super reach β2) and PA2-5 (variation pattern out of super reach β3).

That is, when the variable display result is "off" in the feature unit 079SG, the special figure is based on the fact that the number of reserved memory of the variable special figure is 3 or 4, or the time is shortened. Since the variable display time is shorter than the normal non-reach out-of-reach fluctuation pattern (PA1-1), the variable display is executed at a higher rate due to the shortening fluctuation pattern (PA1-2, PA1-3, PA1-4). It is possible to shorten the period until the next variable display result becomes a big hit while preventing the game from being delayed.

As shown in FIG. 14-8, the reach effect of the super reach α1 (the reach effect executed by the variable display of the fluctuation pattern PB1-2) is variable after the first half of the first reach effect described later is executed. The reach effect in which the display result is a big hit, and the reach effect of the super reach α2 (the reach effect executed by the variable display of the variable pattern PA2-2) executes the first half part and the second half part of the first reach effect described later. This is a reach effect in which the variable display result is out of alignment, and the reach effect of the super reach α3 (the reach effect executed by the variable display in the variable pattern PA2-3 or PB1-3) is the first reach described later. This is a reach effect in which the variable display result is a big hit or a miss by executing the second reach effect described later after executing the first half portion and the second half part of the effect.

As for the variable display of these fluctuation patterns PA2-2, PA2-3, PB1-2, and PB1-3, as shown in FIGS. 14-8 and 14-9, the longer the special figure variable display time is, the more variable the display is. The rate at which the result is a big hit (big hit expectation) is set to be high. That is, for the variable display of these fluctuation patterns PA2-2, PA2-3, PB1-2, and PB1-3, the ratio of the variable display result being a big hit is executed by the first reach effect. The variable display result is set higher than the ratio that becomes a big hit.

In addition, the reach effect of super reach β1 (reach effect executed by the variable display of the variable pattern PB1-4) is a reach effect in which the variable display result becomes a big hit after executing the first half of the third reach effect described later. Yes, in the reach effect of Super Reach β2 (the reach effect executed by the variable display of the variable pattern PA2-4), the variable display result is out of alignment after executing the first half part and the second half part of the third reach effect described later. The reach effect of the super reach β3 (the reach effect executed by the variable display in the variable pattern PA2-5 or PB1-5) is the first half part and the second half part of the third reach effect described later. After that, the fourth reach effect, which will be described later, is executed, and the variable display result is a big hit or a miss.

As for the variable display of these fluctuation patterns PA2-4, PA2-5, PB1-4, and PB1-5, as shown in FIGS. 14-8 and 14-9, the longer the special figure variable display time is, the more variable the display is. The rate at which the result is a big hit (big hit expectation) is set to be high. That is, for the variable display of these fluctuation patterns PA2-4, PA2-5, PB1-4, and PB1-5, the ratio of the variable display result being a big hit after being executed up to the fourth reach effect is executed by the third reach effect. The variable display result is set higher than the ratio that becomes a big hit.

In the feature unit 079SG, the second reach effect is always executed after the first reach effect, and the fourth reach effect is always executed after the third reach effect, but the present invention is limited to this. The second reach effect and the fourth reach effect may be performed by themselves.

Further, in the feature unit 079SG, each reach effect can be executed by a combination of the first reach effect and the second reach effect during the variable display, and can be executed by the combination of the third reach effect and the fourth reach effect. Although possible forms have been illustrated, the present invention is not limited to this, and the reach effect is a combination other than these combinations (for example, a first reach effect and a fourth reach effect, a second reach effect and a third reach effect). A case may be provided in which the execution is performed by a combination of reach effects and the like).

Further, in the present feature section 069SG, as shown in FIG. 14-9, the fluctuation patterns of the super reach β system (fluctuation patterns PA2-4, PA2-5, PB1-4, PB1-5) are generally super reach α system. The rate at which the variable display result becomes a big hit (big hit expectation) is set higher than the fluctuation pattern (variation pattern PA2-2, PA2-3, PB1-2, PB1-3) of the present invention. A part of the fluctuation pattern of the super reach β system (variation pattern PA2-4, PA2-5, PB1-4, PB1-5) is not limited, and the fluctuation pattern of the super reach α system (variation pattern PA2- 2. The jackpot expectation may be lower than any of PA2-3, PB1-2, PB1-3).

In the RAM 102 of the feature unit 079SG, as an area for holding various data used for controlling the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1, for example, a game control data holding area 079SG150 as shown in FIG. 14-10. Is provided. The game control data holding area 079SG150 shown in FIG. 14-10 includes a first special figure holding storage unit 079SG151A, a second special figure holding storage unit 079SG151B, a normal drawing holding storage unit 079SG151C, and a game control flag setting unit 079SG152. , The game control timer setting unit 079SG153, the game control counter setting unit 079SG154, and the game control buffer setting unit 079SG155 are provided.

The first special figure reservation storage unit 079SG151A is a special feature in which the game ball passes (enters) the first starting winning opening formed by the winning ball device 6A and a starting winning (first starting winning) is generated, but has not been started yet. The reserved data of the figure game (the special figure game using the first special figure in the first special symbol display device 4A) is stored. As an example, the first special figure reservation storage unit 079SG151A associates the winning order (the order of detecting the game ball) with the first starting winning opening with the holding number, and determines the first starting condition in the passage (entry) of the game ball. Hold data such as a random number value MR1 for determining a special figure display result, a random number value MR2 for determining a jackpot type, and a random number value MR3 for determining a fluctuation pattern extracted from a random number circuit 104 or the like by the CPU 103 based on the establishment. As a result, the data is stored until the number of stored data reaches a predetermined upper limit value (for example, "4"). The hold data stored in the first special figure hold storage unit 079SG151A indicates that the execution of the special figure game using the first special figure is suspended, and the variable display result (special figure display) in this special figure game. Based on the result), it becomes the pending information that makes it possible to judge whether or not it will be a big hit.

The second special figure reservation storage unit 079SG151B has not been started yet, although the game ball has passed (entered) the second start winning opening formed by the variable winning ball device 6B and the starting winning (second starting winning) has occurred. The reserved data of the special figure game (the special figure game using the second special figure in the second special symbol display device 4B) is stored. As an example, the second special figure reservation storage unit 079SG151B associates the winning order (the order of detecting the game ball) with the second starting winning opening with the holding number, and determines the second starting condition in the passage (entry) of the game ball. Hold data such as a random number value MR1 for determining a special figure display result, a random number value MR2 for determining a jackpot type, and a random number value MR3 for determining a fluctuation pattern extracted from a random number circuit 104 or the like by the CPU 103 based on the establishment. As a result, the number is stored until it reaches a predetermined upper limit value (for example, "4"). The hold data stored in the second special figure hold storage unit 079SG151B in this way indicates that the execution of the special figure game using the second special figure is suspended, and the variable display result (special figure display) in this special figure game. Based on the result), it becomes the pending information that makes it possible to judge whether or not it will be a big hit.

It should be noted that the hold information (first hold information) based on the establishment of the first start condition due to the game ball passing (entering) through the first start winning opening and the game ball passing (entering) through the second start winning opening. The hold information (second hold information) based on the establishment of the second start winning prize may be stored in association with the hold number in the common hold storage unit. In this case, the start port data indicating which of the first start winning opening and the second starting winning opening the game ball has passed (entered) may be included in the hold information and stored in association with the hold number. ..

The normal figure hold storage unit 079SG151C stores the hold information of the normal figure game that has not yet been started by the normal symbol display 20 even though the game ball that has passed through the passing gate 41 is detected by the gate switch 21. For example, the normal figure hold storage unit 079SG151C associates the game ball with the hold number in the order in which it passes through the passage gate 41, and determines the normal figure display result extracted from the random number circuit 104 or the like by the CPU 103 based on the passage of the game ball. Numerical data indicating the random number value MR4 for use is set as pending data, and is stored until the number reaches a predetermined upper limit value (for example, “4”).

The game control flag setting unit 079SG152 is provided with a plurality of types of flags whose state can be updated according to the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1. For example, the game control flag setting unit 079SG152 stores data indicating a flag value and data indicating an on state or an off state for each of a plurality of types of flags.

The game control timer setting unit 079SG153 is provided with various timers used to control the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1. For example, the game control timer setting unit 079SG153 stores data indicating timer values for each of a plurality of types of timers.

The game control counter setting unit 079SG154 is provided with a plurality of types of counters for counting the count values used for controlling the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1. For example, the game control counter setting unit 079SG154 stores data indicating count values for each of a plurality of types of counters. Here, the game control counter setting unit 079SG154 may be provided with a random counter for the CPU 103 to count a part or all of the game random numbers so that they can be updated by software.

In the random counter of the game control counter setting unit 079SG154, a random number value not generated by the random number circuit 104, for example, numerical data indicating the random number values MR2 to MR4 is stored as a random count value, and is stored as a random count value according to the execution of the software by the CPU 103. Numerical data indicating each random number value is updated periodically or irregularly. The software executed by the CPU 103 to update the random count value may be for updating the random count value separately from the operation of updating the numerical data in the random number circuit 104, or may be extracted from the random number circuit 104. It may be for updating the random count value by performing a predetermined process such as scramble processing or arithmetic processing on all or a part of the numerical data.

The game control buffer setting unit 079SG155 is provided with various buffers for temporarily storing data used for controlling the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1. For example, the game control buffer setting unit 079SG155 stores data indicating buffer values in each of a plurality of types of buffers.

The RAM 122 mounted on the effect control board 12 shown in FIG. 3 holds the effect control data as shown in FIG. 14-11 (A) as an area for holding various data used for controlling the effect operation. Area 079 SG190 is provided. The effect control data holding area 079SG190 shown in FIG. 14-11 (A) includes an effect control flag setting unit 079SG191, an effect control timer setting unit 079SG192, an effect control counter setting unit 079SG193, and an effect control buffer setting unit 079SG194. I have.

The effect control flag setting unit 079SG191 has a plurality of types capable of updating the state according to the effect operation state such as the display state of the effect image on the screen of the image display device 5 and the effect control command transmitted from the main board 11. Flag is provided. For example, the effect control flag setting unit 079SG191 stores data indicating a flag value and data indicating an on state or an off state for each of a plurality of types of flags.

The effect control timer setting unit 079SG192 is provided with a plurality of types of timers used to control the progress of various effect operations such as the display operation of the effect image on the screen of the image display device 5. For example, the effect control timer setting unit 079SG192 stores data indicating timer values for each of a plurality of types of timers.

The effect control counter setting unit 079SG193 is provided with a plurality of types of counters used to control the progress of various effect operations. For example, the effect control counter setting unit 079SG193 stores data indicating the count values of the plurality of types of counters.

The effect control buffer setting unit 079SG194 is provided with various buffers for temporarily storing data used for controlling the progress of various effect operations. For example, the effect control buffer setting unit 079SG194 stores data indicating buffer values in each of a plurality of types of buffers.

In the feature unit 079SG, the data constituting the start winning command buffer 079SG194A as shown in FIG. 14-11 (B) is stored in a predetermined area of the effect control buffer setting unit 079SG194. The reception command buffer 079SG194A at the time of starting winning is stored in the storage area (buffer numbers "1-1" to "1-4" corresponding to the maximum value (for example, "4") of the total number of reserved storages in the first special figure reserved storage. A corresponding area) and a storage area (area corresponding to the buffer number “1-0”) corresponding to the first special figure during variable display are provided. Further, the start winning command buffer 079SG194A has a storage area (buffer numbers "2-1" to "2-4" corresponding to the maximum value (for example, "4") of the total number of reserved storages in the second special figure reserved storage. (Area corresponding to) and a storage area (area corresponding to the buffer number “2-0”) corresponding to the second special figure during variable display are provided. When there is a start prize to the 1st start winning opening or the 2nd starting winning opening, the starting opening winning designation command (the 1st starting opening winning designation command or the 2nd starting opening winning designation command) and the hold memory number notification command (the first) Two commands (1 hold storage number notification command or second hold storage number notification command) are transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 as one set. The storage area corresponding to the first special figure hold storage and the storage area corresponding to the second special figure hold storage in the start winning command buffer 079SG194A associate these start opening winning designation commands with the hold storage number notification command. , A storage area (entry) for storing the first special figure reservation storage and the second special figure reservation storage separately is secured.

The stored contents of these storage areas (entries) will be described later when the start condition is satisfied and the variable display of the highest held storage (buffer number "1-1" or buffer number "2-1") is started. The stored contents of the buffer number "1-0" or the buffer number "2-0" for storing the contents of the reserved storage for which the start condition is satisfied are displayed in a variable manner while being shifted upward one by one. It is designed to be cleared in the special figure hit waiting process that is executed when the is finished.

The effect control CPU 120 stores the command at the time of starting winning to the first starting winning opening from the beginning (the entry with the youngest buffer number) in the empty entry corresponding to the first special figure hold storage of the command buffer 079SG194A received at the time of starting winning. Then, at the time of the start winning to the second start winning opening, the command is stored from the beginning (the entry with the youngest buffer number) in the free entry corresponding to the second special figure hold storage of the start winning command buffer 079SG194A. go. At the time of the start winning, the start opening prize designation command to the hold storage number notification command are sequentially transmitted. Therefore, when the command is received, the start opening prize designation command is placed in the storage area corresponding to each of the end "1" to "4" of the buffer number corresponding to the first special figure hold storage or the second special figure hold storage. , The hold storage number notification command will be stored in this order.

The command stored in the start winning command buffer 079SG194A shown in FIG. 14-11 (B) is an entry (buffer) corresponding to the hold storage of the variable display that ended immediately before each time the variable display of the decorative symbol was started. The entry (entry with the number "1-0" or "2-0") is deleted, and the entry corresponding to the hold storage of the variable display to be started (buffer number "1-1" or "2") is deleted. The stored contents of the entries after the hold storage of the variable display to be started are shifted from those stored in the entry corresponding to -1 ”. For example, when the variable display of the decorative symbol of the first special figure hold storage is completed in the stored state shown in FIG. 14-11 (B), each command stored in the buffer number "0" is deleted and the buffer number is deleted. Each command stored in "1" is shifted to the buffer number "0", and each command stored in the area corresponding to the buffer number "2" is moved to the area corresponding to the buffer number "1". Each command that is shifted and stored in the area corresponding to the buffer numbers "3" and "4" is shifted to the area corresponding to the buffer numbers "2" and "3". Therefore, the buffer number "0" is an area (entry) for storing each command related to the hold storage that is variably displayed at that time.

Next, the start winning determination process of the feature unit 079SG executed in step S101 of FIG. 6 will be described with reference to FIGS. 14-12. In the start winning determination process, the CPU 103 first turns on the first starting port switch 22A based on the detection signal from the first starting opening switch 22A provided corresponding to the first starting winning opening formed by the winning ball device 6A. It is determined whether or not it is in a state (step 079 SGS101). At this time, if the first start port switch 22A is in the ON state (step 079 SGS101; Y), the number of reserved special figure reservations, which is the number of reserved special figure games using the first special figure, is the predetermined upper limit. It is determined whether or not it is a value (for example, "4" as the upper limit storage number) (step 079 SGS102). The CPU 103 may specify the first special figure reserved storage number by reading, for example, the first reserved storage number count value which is the stored value of the first reserved storage number counter provided in the game control counter setting unit 079SG154. When the number of reserved first special figure is not the upper limit value in step 079SGS102 (step 079SGS102; N), for example, the stored value of the start port buffer provided in the game control buffer setting unit 079SG155 is set to "1" (step 079SGS102; N). Step 079 SGS103).

Variable when the first start port switch 22A is off in step 079SGS101 (step 079SGS101; N) or when the first special figure reserved storage number reaches the upper limit value in step 079SGS102 (step 079SGS102; Y). Based on the detection signal from the second starting port switch 22B provided corresponding to the second starting winning opening formed by the winning ball device 6B, it is determined whether or not the second starting opening switch 22B is in the ON state ( Step 079 SGS104). At this time, if the second start port switch 22B is in the ON state (step 079 SGS104; Y), the number of reserved special figure reservations, which is the number of reserved special figure games using the second special figure, is the predetermined upper limit. It is determined whether or not it is a value (for example, "4" as the upper limit storage number) (step 079 SGS105). The CPU 103 may specify the second special figure reserved storage number by reading, for example, the second reserved storage number count value which is the stored value of the second reserved storage number counter provided in the game control counter setting unit 079SG154. When the second special figure hold storage number is not the upper limit value in step 079SGS105 (step 079SGS105; N), for example, the stored value of the start port buffer provided in the game control buffer setting unit 079SG155 is set to "2" (step 079SGS105; N). Step 079 SGS106).

After executing any of the processes of step 079SGS103 and step 079SGS106, the number of special figure hold storages corresponding to the start port buffer value, which is the stored value of the start port buffer, is updated to be added by 1 (step 079SGS107). For example, when the start port buffer value is "1", the first hold storage count value is added by 1, while when the start port buffer value is "2", the second hold storage count value is added by 1. In this way, the first hold memory count value is set to 1 when the game ball passes (enters) the first start winning opening and the first start condition corresponding to the special figure game using the first special figure is satisfied. Updated to increase. Further, the second reserved memory count value is set to 1 when the game ball passes (enters) the second start winning opening and the second start condition corresponding to the special figure game using the second special figure is satisfied. Updated to increase. At this time, the total number of reserved storages is also updated to be added by 1 (step 079 SGS108). For example, the total hold storage count value, which is the stored value of the total hold storage counter provided in the game control counter setting unit 079SG154, may be updated so as to be added by 1.

After executing the process of step 079SGS108, the CPU 103 determines the random number value MR1 for determining the special figure display result and the jackpot type determination from the numerical data updated by the random number circuit 104 and the random number of the game control counter setting unit 079SG154. Numerical data indicating the random number value MR2 for the purpose and the random number value MR3 for the fluctuation pattern determination are extracted (step 079 SGS109). Numerical data indicating each random number value extracted in this way is stored by being set as hold information at the beginning of an empty entry in the special figure hold storage unit corresponding to the start port buffer value (step 079 SGS110). For example, when the start port buffer value is "1", the first special figure reservation storage unit 079SG151A stores numerical data indicating the random values MR1 to MR3, while when the start port buffer value is "2", the start port buffer value is "2". Numerical data indicating the random values MR1 to MR3 are stored in the second special figure reservation storage unit 079SG151B.

The numerical data indicating the random value MR1 for determining the special figure display result and the random value MR2 for determining the jackpot type determines whether or not the variable display result of the special symbol or decorative symbol is set as "big hit", and further, the variable display result. It is used to determine the type of big hit when it is called "big hit". The random value MR3 for determining the variation pattern is used to determine the variation pattern including the variable display time of the special symbol or the decorative symbol. By executing the process of step 079SGS109, the CPU 103 extracts numerical data indicating all of the random number values used for determining the variable display result of the special symbol or the decorative symbol and the variable display mode including the variable display time.

Following the process of step 079 SGS110, the transmission setting of the start port winning designation command according to the start port buffer value is performed (step 079 SGS111). For example, when the start port buffer value is "1", the storage address of the first start port winning designation command table in the ROM 101 is stored in the buffer area specified by the send command pointer in the send command buffer. The setting for transmitting the first start opening prize designation command to 12 is made. On the other hand, when the start port buffer value is "2", the storage address of the second start port winning designation command table in the ROM 101 is stored in the buffer area of the transmission command buffer, so that the effect control board 12 is subjected to. Make settings to send the second start port winning designation command. The start port winning designation command set in this way is executed from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 by, for example, executing the command control process in step S27 shown in FIG. 5 after the special symbol process process is completed. Be transmitted.

Following the process of step 079 SGS111, for example, by storing the storage address of the hold storage number notification command table in the ROM 101 in the buffer area specified by the transmission command pointer in the transmission command buffer, the hold storage is stored in the effect control board 12. Make settings for sending the number notification command (step 079 SGS113). The hold storage number notification command set in this way is executed from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 by, for example, executing the command control process in step S27 shown in FIG. 5 after the special symbol process process is completed. Be transmitted.

After executing the process of step 079SGS113, it is determined whether or not the start port buffer value is "1" (step 079SGS114). At this time, if the start port buffer value is "1" (step 079SGS114; Y), the start port buffer is cleared, the stored value is initialized to "0" (step 079SGS115), and then the process of step 079SGS104 is performed. move on. On the other hand, when the start port buffer value is "2" (step 079 SGS114; N), the start port buffer is cleared, the stored value is initialized to "0" (step 079 SGS116), and then the start prize is won. End the process. As a result, even when both the first start port switch 22A and the second start port switch 22B simultaneously detect a valid start prize for the game ball, the process based on the detection of both valid start prizes can be reliably completed.

FIG. 14-13 is a part of a flowchart showing the effect control process processing in the feature unit 079SG. In the effect control process process, the effect control CPU 120 updates the hold display in the first hold storage display area 079SHSG005D and the second hold storage display area 079SG005U after executing the pre-reading advance notice setting process (step S161), and these first Hold display operation processing (step 079SG162) for operating (rotating display) the hold display displayed in the hold storage display area 079SHSG005D and the second hold storage display area 079SG005U, and the operation display of the telop in the telop display area 079SG005T. After executing the telop operation process (step 079SGS163) to be performed and the fourth symbol display process (step 079SG164) to execute the variable display of the fourth symbol 079SG005J, any one of steps S170 to S177 is executed according to the value of the effect control process flag. Executes the processing of.

14-14 is a flowchart showing the variable display start setting process (step S171) in the effect control process process shown in FIG. In the variable display start setting process, the effect control CPU 120 first determines whether or not the first variable start command reception flag is on (step 079 SGS271). When the first variable start command reception flag is on (step 079SGS271; Y), the buffer numbers "1-0" to "1-4" of the first special figure hold storage in the start winning command buffer 079SG194A are set. The various command data and various flags stored in association with each other are shifted upward by one buffer number (step 079SGS272). The contents of the buffer number "1-0" are deleted because they cannot be shifted because there is no shift destination.

Specifically, the shift is made so that various command data and various flags stored in association with the buffer number "1-1" of the first special figure hold storage are stored in association with the buffer number "1-0". Then, the various command data and various flags stored in association with the buffer number "1-2" of the first special figure hold storage are shifted so as to be stored in association with the buffer number "1-1". 1 Special figure The first special figure is shifted so that various command data and various flags stored in association with the buffer number "1-3" of the hold storage are stored in association with the buffer number "1-2". The various command data and various flags stored in association with the buffer number "1-4" of the hold storage are shifted so as to be stored in association with the buffer number "1-3".

If the first fluctuation start command reception flag is off in step 079SGS271 (step 079SGS271; N), it is determined whether or not the second fluctuation start command reception flag is on (step 079SGS273). When the second variation start command reception flag is off (step 079SGS273; N), the variable display start setting process is finished, and when the second variation start command reception flag is on (step 079SGS273; Y), Various command data and various flags stored in association with the buffer numbers "2-0" to "2-4" of the second special figure hold storage in the received command buffer 079SG194A at the time of starting winning are stored for each buffer number. Shift to the top (step 079 SGS274). The contents of the buffer number "2-0" are deleted because they cannot be shifted because there is no shift destination.

Specifically, the shift is made so that various command data and various flags stored in association with the buffer number "2-1" of the second special figure hold storage are stored in association with the buffer number "2-0". Then, the various command data and various flags stored in association with the buffer number "2-2" of the second special figure hold storage are shifted so as to be stored in association with the buffer number "2-1". 2 Special figure The second special figure is shifted so that various command data and various flags stored in association with the buffer number "2-3" of the hold storage are stored in association with the buffer number "2-2". The various command data and various flags stored in association with the buffer number "2-4" of the hold storage are shifted so as to be stored in association with the buffer number "2-3".

After executing step 079SGS272 or step 079SGS274, the effect control CPU 120 reads the variation pattern designation command from the variation pattern designation command storage area (step 079SGS275).

Next, the display result (stop symbol) of the decorative symbol is determined according to the data stored in the display result designation command storage area (that is, the received display result designation command) (step 079SGS276). In this case, the effect control CPU 120 determines the stop symbol of the decorative symbol according to the display result specified by the display result designation command, and stores the data indicating the determined stop symbol of the decorative symbol in the decorative symbol display result storage area. do.

In the feature unit 079SG, when the received variable display result designation command is the second variable display result designation command corresponding to the probability variation jackpot A, the effect control CPU 120 has, for example, three symbols "7" as stop symbols. ”Determine the combination of decorative symbols (big hit symbols). Further, when the received variable display result specification command is the third variable display result specification command or the fourth variable display result specification command corresponding to the probability variation jackpot B or the probability variation jackpot C, the stop symbol is other than "7". It is determined from a plurality of combinations of odd-numbered symbols (for example, combinations of decorative symbols such as "111", "333", "555", and "999"). Further, when the received variable display result specification command is the fifth variable display result specification command corresponding to the non-probability change jackpot, the effect control CPU 120 has, for example, a decorative symbol in which three symbols are arranged as even symbols as the stop symbol. Determine the combination (big hit symbol). Further, when the received variable display result designation command is the sixth variable display result designation command corresponding to a small hit, the stop symbol is determined from "334", "778", etc., which are chance eyes. Further, when the received variable display result specification command is the first variable display result specification command corresponding to the deviation, it is a decorative symbol in which the three symbols are not uniform as the stop symbol, and a combination other than the above-mentioned chance eyes. (Out of design) is decided.

In determining these stop symbols, the effect control CPU 120 uses, for example, a stop symbol determination table in which random numbers for determining stop symbols are extracted and data indicating a combination of decorative symbols and numerical values are associated with each other. Then, the stop symbol of the decorative symbol may be determined. That is, the stop symbol may be determined by selecting data indicating a combination of decorative symbols corresponding to the numerical value corresponding to the extracted random number.

Then, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the variable display variation pattern is a super reach variation pattern (step 079 SGS277). When the variable display variation pattern is a non-reach or normal reach variation pattern (step 079SGS277; N), the process proceeds to step 079SGS283, and when the variable display variation pattern is a super reach variation pattern (step 079SGS277; Y). Executes the chance-up effect determination process (step 079 SGS278), and determines whether or not to execute the chance-up effect in the latter half of the first reach effect or the second half of the third reach effect.

Specifically, as shown in FIGS. 14-15, when the variable display result is out of alignment, the chance-up effect is decided to be executed at a rate of 20%, and the chance-up effect is not executed at a rate of 80%. decide. When the variable display result is a big hit, the execution of the chance-up effect is determined at a rate of 80%, and the non-execution of the chance-up effect is determined at a rate of 20%. That is, in the variable display of the reach of the feature unit 079SG, when the chance-up effect is executed, the jackpot expectation is set higher than when the chan-up effect is not executed.

As shown in FIGS. 14-27 and 14-32, the feature unit 079SG is provided with only one effect pattern as the effect mode of the chance-up effect, but the present invention is limited to this. Instead, a plurality of effect patterns may be provided as an effect mode of the chance-up effect, and the jackpot expectation may be different depending on which effect pattern the chance-up effect is executed.

Further, in the present feature unit 079SG, as shown in FIGS. 14-27 and 14-32, there is only one production start timing of the chance-up effect, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the chance-up effect is not limited to this. A plurality of production start timings of the production may be provided, and the jackpot expectation may be different depending on which production start timing the chance-up production is started.

Further, after the execution / non-execution of the chance-up effect is determined in step 079 SGS278, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the variation pattern of the variable display is the variation pattern of the super reach α3 (PA2-3 or PB1-3). (Step 079 SGS279). When the variation pattern of the variable display is the variation pattern of the super reach α3 (PA2-3 or PB1-3) (step 079SGS279; Y), the notification effect (big hit notification effect or loss) is performed after the second reach effect is completed. In the period until the notification effect) is started, the still image display effect for determining the effect pattern of the still image display effect that displays the still image displayed on the image display device 5 at the end of the second reach effect. The determination process (step 079SGS280) is executed, and the process proceeds to step 079SGS283.

In the still image display effect determination process, as shown in FIG. 14-16 (A), the effect control CPU 120 sets the effect pattern of the still image display effect at a rate of 100% when the variable display result is out of alignment. If the pattern SG-1 is determined and the variable display result is a big hit, the effect pattern of the still image display effect is determined to be the pattern SG-1 at a rate of 80%, and the pattern SG-2 is determined at a rate of 20%. do.

As shown in FIG. 14-16 (B), the still image display effect pattern SG-1 stops the image displayed in the first display area 079SG005F of the image display device 5 at the end of the second reach effect. It is an effect pattern to be displayed as an image, and the still image display effect pattern SG-2 is after displaying the image displayed in the first display area 079SG005F of the image display device 5 as a still image at the end of the second reach effect. , It is an effect pattern that changes the color of the still image.

In particular, the pattern SG-2 is an effect pattern that is executed only when the variable display result is a big hit. Therefore, when the second reach effect is executed, is the still image display effect executed in the pattern SG-2? It is possible to draw the player's attention to whether or not (whether or not the color of the still image changes).

Further, when it is not the fluctuation pattern of the super reach α3 in step 079 SGS281 (step 079 SGS281; N), it is further determined whether or not the fluctuation pattern of the variable display is the super reach β3 (PA2-5 or PB1-5) (step 079 SGS281; N). Step S079SGS282). When the variable display variation pattern is a variation pattern other than super reach β3 (step 079 SGS281; N), the process proceeds to step 079 SGS283, and when the variable display variation pattern is a super reach β3 variation pattern (step 079 SGS281; Y). ), The operation promotion effect determination process (step 079SGS282) for determining the effect pattern of the operation promotion effect that prompts the player to operate the push button 31B during the execution of the fourth reach effect is executed, and the process proceeds to step 079SGS283. ..

In the operation promotion effect determination process, as shown in FIG. 14-17 (A), the effect control CPU 120 sets the effect pattern SS of the operation promotion effect at a rate of 80% when the variable display result is out of alignment. It is determined to be -1, and the pattern SS-2 is determined at a rate of 20%. When the variable display result is a big hit, the effect pattern of the operation promotion effect is determined to be pattern SS-1 at a rate of 20%, and to pattern SS-2 at a rate of 80%.

As shown in FIG. 14-17 (B), the operation promotion effect pattern SS-1 is an effect pattern for displaying the image of the push button 31B on the first display area 079SG005F of the image display device 5, and is an operation promotion pattern. The effect pattern SS-2 is an effect pattern for displaying the image of the push button 31B in the first display area 079SG005F of the image display device 5 in a size larger than that of the pattern SS-1.

That is, as the operation promotion effect in the feature unit 079SG, when the image of the large size push button 31B is displayed in the first display area 079SG005F of the image display device 5 (the operation promotion effect is executed in the pattern SS-2). When the image of the push button 31B of a normal size is displayed in the first display area 079SG005F of the image display device 5 (when the operation promotion effect is executed in the pattern SS-1), the ratio is higher. Since the rate at which the variable display result becomes a big hit (the big hit notification effect is executed) is high, the player is made to pay attention to the size of the image of the push button 31B displayed on the image display device 5 when the operation promotion effect is executed. It is possible to improve the game entertainment.

In step 079 SGS283, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not each effect such as the above-mentioned chance-up effect, still image display effect, and operation promotion effect is executed, and the effect control pattern (process table) according to the effect pattern and the variation pattern designation command. select. Then, the process timer in the process data 1 of the selected process table is started (step 079 SGS284).

In the process table, display control execution data for controlling the display of the image display device 5, lamp control execution data for controlling the lighting of each LED, and sound output from the speakers 8L and 8R are controlled. The sound control execution data, the operation unit control execution data for controlling the operation of the push button 31B and the stick controller 31A, and the like are arranged in order in chronological order in association with each process data n (1 to N). There is.

Next, the effect control CPU 120 displays the effect device (image display as an effect component) according to the contents of the process data 1 (display control execution data 1, lamp control execution data 1, sound control execution data 1, operation unit control execution data 1). Control of the device 5, various lamps as production parts, speakers 8L, 8R as production parts, and operation units (push button 31B, stick controller 31A, etc.) is executed (step 079SGS285). For example, the image display device 5 outputs a command to the display control unit 123 in order to display an image according to the fluctuation pattern. Further, in order to control the lighting / extinguishing of various lamps, a control signal (lamp control execution data) is output to the lamp control board 14. Further, in order to output the voice from the speakers 8L and 8R, the control signal (sound number data) is output to the voice control board 13.

In the feature unit 079SG, the effect control CPU 120 controls the variation pattern designation command so that the decorative pattern is variably displayed according to the variation pattern corresponding to one-to-one. However, the effect control CPU 120 controls the variation pattern. The fluctuation pattern to be used may be selected from a plurality of types of fluctuation patterns corresponding to the specified command.

Then, a value corresponding to the variable display time specified by the variable pattern designation command is set in the variable display time timer (step 079SGS286). Further, a predetermined time is set in the variable display control timer (step 079 SGS287). The predetermined time is, for example, 30 ms. Every time the predetermined time elapses, the effect control CPU 120 writes the image data indicating the display state of the left, middle, and right decorative symbols to the VRAM, and the display control unit 123 writes the image data to the VRAM. The variable display (variation) of the decorative pattern is realized by outputting the signal corresponding to the image data to the image display device 5 and displaying the image according to the signal by the image display device 5. Next, the value of the effect control process flag is set to a value corresponding to the effect processing during variable display (step S172) (step 079 SGS288).

In the variable display effect processing, the effect control CPU 120 subtracts (-1) the value of the process timer each time the variable display effect process is executed, and the process timer after the subtraction is timered out. Determine if it has been done. Then, if the process timer after subtraction is not timer-out, the effect device is controlled according to the contents of the process data corresponding to the process timer, and if the process timer after subtraction is timer-out, the process data The production device may be controlled according to the contents of the next process data by switching and starting the next process timer.

Next, an effect mode of variable display of super reach α1 to α3 and super reach β1 to β3 in the feature unit 079SG will be described with reference to FIGS. 14-18 to 14-35.

First, with respect to the variable display of super reach α1 to α3 shown in FIGS. 14-18, 14-19, 14-26 (A) to 14-26 (G), when the variable display is started, an image is displayed. In the first display area 079SG005F of the device 5, an effect moving image such as a variable display of a decorative pattern is started at V1 which is a normal traveling speed. At this time, in the second display area 079SG005Sa, the rotation of the hold display and the movement of the telop from the left direction to the right direction (the moving speed of the moving image in the second display area 079SG005Sa) are executed in V3, which is the normal progress speed. At the same time, from the speakers 8L and 8R, BGM, production sound, and the like corresponding to the variable display are started at V4, which is a normal reproduction speed.

Further, in the third display area 079SG005Sb, in the fourth symbol 079SG005J, the upper symbol 079SG005Ja and the lower symbol 079SG005jb are started to be alternately lit (blinking) at a fixed cycle, and the game effect lamp 9 is started to blink at a fixed cycle. NS. Hereinafter, the blinking and lighting of the game effect lamp 9 in the feature unit 079SG means that the main lamp 9a, the frame lamp 9b, the attacker lamp 9c, and the movable body lamp 9d are all synchronized and blinked and lit. The invention is not limited to this, and the blinking and lighting of the main lamp 9a, the frame lamp 9b, the attacker lamp 9c, and the movable lamp 9d do not necessarily have to be synchronized.

Then, as shown in FIGS. 14-18, 14-19, 14-26 (A) to 14-26 (C), when the development timing of the reach effect is reached due to the progress of the variable display, the first half of the reach effect is reached. During the execution period, the battle effect between the ally character A and the enemy character A is started. As the battle effect progresses, when the latter half of the first half of the first reach effect execution period is approached, the display of a moving image in which the ally character A attacks the enemy character A is started in the first display area 079SG005F of the image display device 5. NS. When the display of the moving image is started, the traveling speed of the moving image displayed in the first display area 079SG005F including the moving image is switched from the above-mentioned V1 to V2 which is slower than the V1. Therefore, in the first display area 079SG005F of the image display device 5, it is displayed in slow motion that the ally character A hits the enemy character A.

During the period in which the ally character A attacks the enemy character A in slow motion in this way (during the period in which the progress speed of the video of the battle effect is V2 in the first display area 079SG005F). Is executed while maintaining the traveling speed V3 without changing the rotation of the hold display and the movement of the telop from the left direction to the right direction in the second display area 079SG005Sa, and BGM, production sound, etc. from the speakers 8L and 8R. Is output while maintaining the playback speed V4. Further, the variable display of the fourth symbol 079SG005J and the blinking of the game effect lamp 9 are also executed without changing the cycle.

When the variable display is the variable display of the super reach α1, when the first half of the reach effect execution period ends, as shown in FIGS. 14-18 and 14-26 (E) to 14-26 (G). In addition, in the first display area 079SG005F, as a jackpot notification effect, after a video in which the attack of the ally character A is successful and the enemy character A collapses is displayed, the decorative symbol is stopped by the combination of jackpots and controlled to the jackpot game state. It is notified that it will be done. In particular, when the jackpot notification effect is started, the first hold storage display area 079SG005D, the second hold storage display area 079SG005U, and the telop display area 079SG005T are hidden, and the first display area 079SG005F and the second display area are hidden. An image of the jackpot notification effect is displayed with 079SG005Sa. Then, as shown in FIGS. 14-26 (H), when the variable display is completed, the decorative symbols are stopped and displayed in a combination indicating a big hit, and the display on the image display device 5 is the normal background image before the reach effect. Switch to the display. Further, the display of the first reserved storage display area 079SG005D, the second reserved storage display area 079SG005U, and the telop display area 079SG005T is resumed. After the end of the variable display, during the symbol confirmation period, the stop display with a combination showing the jackpot of the decorative symbol and the small symbol and the lighting display of the fourth symbol (the lighting display of both the upper symbol 079SG005Ja and the lower symbol 079SG005Jb). ) Is performed.

During the jackpot notification effect, the moving image of the part where the attack of the ally character A is successful is displayed at V1 which is the normal progress speed (corresponding to FIG. 14-26 (E)), and the subsequent enemy character. The display of the moving image of the part where the character collapses is executed at the traveling speed V2, which is slower than V1 (corresponding to FIG. 14-26 (F)). Then, the moving image of the portion where it is notified that the decorative symbol is stopped by the combination of jackpots and controlled to the jackpot game state is executed again at the normal progress speed of V1 (FIGS. 14-26 (G)). Applicable to).

During the jackpot notification effect, the rotation of the hold display and the movement of the telop from the left direction to the right direction in the second display area 079SG005Sa are executed while maintaining the traveling speed V3, and from the speakers 8L and 8R. Is output while maintaining the reproduction speed V4 without changing the BGM, the effect sound, and the like. Further, the variable display of the fourth symbol 079SG005J and the blinking of the game effect lamp 9 are also executed without changing the cycle.

On the other hand, when the variable display is a variable display of super reach α2 or super reach α3, when the first half of the first reach effect execution period ends, as shown in FIGS. 14-19 and 14-26 (D). , The attack of the ally character A is not successful, and the second half of the first reach effect is executed.

As shown in FIGS. 14-19 and 14-27 (A) to 14-27 (B), when the second half execution period of the first reach effect is entered, the battle effect between the ally character A and the enemy character A continues. proceed.

At this time, in the first display area 079SG005F of the image display device 5, the production moving image of the battle effect is executed at the normal progress speed V1. Further, the rotation of the hold display in the second display area 079SG005Sa and the movement of the telop from the left direction to the right direction are executed while maintaining the traveling speed V3, and from the speakers 8L and 8R, BGM, directing sound, etc. Is output while maintaining the reproduction speed V4. Further, the variable display of the fourth symbol 079SG005J and the blinking of the game effect lamp 9 are also executed without changing the cycle.

In the latter half execution period of the first reach effect, when the effect movie of the battle effect is executed at the progress speed V1, the chance-up effect may be executed as shown in FIG. 14-27 (B). .. The chance-up effect is executed at the progress speed V1 as in the effect movie of the battle effect.

As the battle effect progresses, when the latter half of the second half execution period of the first reach effect is approached, the display of a moving image in which the ally character A attacks the enemy character A is started in the first display area 079SG005F of the image display device 5. NS. When the display of the moving image is started, the traveling speed of the moving image displayed in the first display area 079SG005F including the moving image is switched from V1 to V2 which is slower than the V1. Therefore, in the first display area 079SG005F of the image display device 5, it is displayed in slow motion that the ally character A hits the enemy character A.

During the period in which the ally character A attacks the enemy character A in slow motion in this way (during the period in which the progress speed of the video of the battle effect is V2 in the first display area 079SG005F). Is executed while maintaining the traveling speed V3 without changing the rotation of the hold display and the movement of the telop from the left direction to the right direction in the second display area 079SG005Sa, and BGM, production sound, etc. from the speakers 8L and 8R. Is output while maintaining the playback speed V4. Further, the variable display of the fourth symbol 079SG005J and the blinking of the game effect lamp 9 are also executed without changing the cycle.

When the variable display is the variable display of the super reach α2, as shown in FIGS. 14-19 and 14-27 (E) to 14-27 (G) when the second half execution period of the first reach effect is completed. In addition, in the first display area 079SG005F, as an out-of-order notification effect, after the attack of the ally character A fails and is defeated by the enemy character A, the decorative symbol stops with a combination of out-of-orders and the variable display result is out of order. Is notified.

During the missed notification effect, the moving image is displayed at V1 which is the normal progress speed in the part where the attack of the ally character A fails and the part where the variable display result is notified that the variable display result is missed. NS.

Further, during the disengagement notification effect, the rotation of the hold display and the movement of the telop from the left direction to the right direction in the second display area 079SG005Sa are executed while maintaining the traveling speed V3, and from the speakers 8L and 8R. Is output while maintaining the reproduction speed V4 without changing the BGM, the effect sound, and the like. Further, the variable display of the fourth symbol 079SG005J and the blinking of the game effect lamp 9 are also executed without changing the cycle. Then, as shown in FIG. 14-27 (H), when the variable display is completed, the decorative symbols are stopped and displayed in a combination indicating the detachment, and the display on the image display device 5 is the normal background image before the reach effect. Switch to the display. After the end of the variable display, during the symbol confirmation period, the stop display with a combination indicating the detachment of the decorative symbol and the small symbol and the extinguishing display of the fourth symbol (both the upper symbol 079SG005Ja and the lower symbol 079SG005Jb) are extinguished. ) Is performed.

On the other hand, when the variable display is the variable display of the super reach α3, as shown in FIGS. 14-20, 14-21 and 14-27 (D), the ally in the latter half execution period of the first reach effect. The attack of character A succeeds and defeats the enemy character A. Then, the first half of the second reach effect is executed.

As shown in FIGS. 14-20, 14-21 and 14-28 (A) to 14-28 (B), when the first half execution period of the second reach effect is entered, the ally character A and the enemy character B become Battle production progresses.

At this time, in the first display area 079SG005F of the image display device 5, the production moving image of the battle effect is executed at the normal progress speed V1. Further, the rotation of the hold display in the second display area 079SG005Sa and the movement of the telop from the left direction to the right direction are executed while maintaining the traveling speed V3, and from the speakers 8L and 8R, BGM, directing sound, etc. Is output while maintaining the reproduction speed V4. Further, the variable display of the fourth symbol 079SG005J and the blinking of the game effect lamp 9 are also executed without changing the cycle.

As the battle effect progresses, when the second half of the first half execution period of the second reach effect is approached, as shown in FIGS. 14-20, 14-21 and 14-28 (C), an image is displayed as an effect effect. The display of the concentrated line is started in the first display area 079SG005F of the display device 5, and the display of the moving image in which the ally character A attacks the enemy character B is started in the first display area 079SG005F of the image display device 5. When the display of the moving image is started, the traveling speed of the moving image displayed in the first display area 079SG005F including the moving image is switched from V1 to V2 which is slower than the V1. Therefore, in the first display area 079SG005F of the image display device 5, it is displayed in slow motion that the ally character A hits the enemy character B.

During the period in which the ally character A attacks the enemy character B in slow motion in this way (during the period in which the progress speed of the video of the battle effect is V2 in the first display area 079SG005F). Is executed while maintaining the traveling speed V3 without changing the rotation of the hold display and the movement of the telop from the left direction to the right direction in the second display area 079SG005Sa, and BGM, production sound, etc. from the speakers 8L and 8R. Is output while maintaining the playback speed V4. Further, the variable display of the fourth symbol 079SG005J is executed without changing the alternating blinking cycle of the upper symbol 079SG005Ja and the lower symbol 079SG005Jb, while the blinking cycle of the game effect lamp 9 is shortened (the blinking cycle is shorter). It will be faster). Further, as shown in FIG. 14-28 (D), the number of concentrated lines as the above-mentioned effect effect is gradually increased and displayed.

That is, in the latter half execution period of the second reach effect, the progress speed of the video of the battle effect decreases to V2, so that the number of concentrated lines displayed in the first display area 079SG005F increases and the game effect lamp 9 blinks violently. Therefore, it is possible to effectively draw the player's attention to the effect result of the battle effect (whether the jackpot notification effect or the out-of-order notification effect is executed) by increasing the number of concentrated lines and blinking the game effect lamp 9. It is possible.

Then, after the second half of the reach effect execution period is completed, as shown in FIGS. 14-20, 14-21 and 14-28 (E), it is displayed at the end of the battle effect as a still image display effect. The image (the image immediately before the attack of the ally character A hits the enemy character B in the feature unit 079SG) is displayed in the first display area 079SG005F.

During the execution period of the still image display effect, the progress speed of the moving image displayed in the first display area 079SG005F is switched from V1 to 0, but the rotation of the hold display in the second display area 079SG005Sa and the telop from the left to the right The movement in the direction is executed while maintaining the traveling speed V3 without changing, and the BGM, the effect sound, and the like are output from the speakers 8L and 8R while maintaining the reproduction speed V4. Further, the variable display of the fourth symbol 079SG005J is executed without changing the alternating blinking cycle of the upper symbol 079SG005Ja and the lower symbol 079SG005Jb, while the blinking cycle of the game effect lamp 9 is the progress of the video of the battle effect. It returns to the cycle before the speed drops to V2.

When the pattern SG-2 is determined as the effect pattern of the still image display effect, as shown in FIGS. 14-29 (A) to 14-29 (E), the battle effect is performed as the still image display effect. The color of the image displayed at the end of is reversed. Then, after the end of the still image display effect in which the colors are reversed, as a jackpot notification effect, the attack of the ally character A hits the enemy character B, and after the enemy character B collapses, it is controlled to the jackpot game state. Be notified. In particular, when the decorative symbol stops in a combination indicating a jackpot as the jackpot notification effect, the first hold storage display area 079SG005D, the second hold storage display area 079SG005U, and the telop display area 079SG005T are hidden and the first display is performed. An image of the jackpot notification effect is displayed in the area 079SG005F and the second display area 079SG005Sa. Then, as shown in FIG. 14-29 (F), when the variable display is completed, the decorative symbols are stopped and displayed in a combination indicating a big hit, and the display on the image display device 5 is the normal background image before the reach effect. Switch to the display. Further, the display of the first reserved storage display area 079SG005D, the second reserved storage display area 079SG005U, and the telop display area 079SG005T is resumed. After the end of the variable display, during the symbol confirmation period, the stop display with a combination showing the jackpot of the decorative symbol and the small symbol and the lighting display of the fourth symbol (the lighting display of both the upper symbol 079SG005Ja and the lower symbol 079SG005Jb). ) Is performed.

As a jackpot notification effect when the still image display effect is executed in the pattern SG-2, as shown in FIG. 14-20, a moving image in which the attack of the ally character A hits the enemy character B is performed at the progress speed V1. Although it is displayed, the moving image in which the enemy character B collapses is displayed at the progress speed V2. Then, the moving image in which the decorative symbol stops in the combination of big hits after the enemy character B collapses is displayed at the progress speed V1. In particular, when the decorative symbol stops in a combination indicating a jackpot as the jackpot notification effect, the first hold storage display area 079SG005D, the second hold storage display area 079SG005U, and the telop display area 079SG005T are hidden and the first display is performed. An image of the jackpot notification effect is displayed in the area 079SG005F and the second display area 079SG005Sa.

During the jackpot notification effect, the rotation of the hold display and the movement of the telop from the left direction to the right direction in the second display area 079SG005Sa are executed while maintaining the traveling speed V3, and from the speakers 8L and 8R. Is output while maintaining the reproduction speed V4 without changing the BGM, the effect sound, and the like. Further, the variable display of the fourth symbol 079SG005J and the blinking of the game effect lamp 9 are also executed without changing the cycle.

On the other hand, when the pattern SG-1 is determined as the still image display effect, the color of the image displayed at the end of the battle effect is not reversed as the still image display effect, and FIG. 14-30 (A). )-As shown in FIGS. 14-30 (D), when the jackpot notification effect is executed as described above, and as shown in FIGS. 14-30 (F) to 14-30 (H), the miss notification is announced. The production may be executed.

The jackpot notification effect when the still image display effect is executed in the pattern SG-1 is the same as the jackpot notification effect when the still image display effect is executed in the pattern SG-2, as shown in FIG. 14-20. In addition, the moving image in which the attack of the ally character A hits the enemy character B is displayed at the progress speed V1, but the moving image in which the enemy character B collapses is displayed at the progress speed V2. Then, after the enemy character B collapses, it is displayed at the progress speed V1. During the jackpot notification effect, the rotation of the hold display and the movement of the telop from the left direction to the right direction in the second display area 079SG005Sa are executed while maintaining the traveling speed V3, and from the speakers 8L and 8R. Is output while maintaining the reproduction speed V4 without changing the BGM, the effect sound, and the like. Further, the variable display of the fourth symbol 079SG005J and the blinking of the game effect lamp 9 are also executed without changing the cycle. Then, as shown in FIG. 14-30 (E), when the variable display is completed, the decorative symbols are stopped and displayed in a combination indicating a big hit, and the display on the image display device 5 is the normal background image before the reach effect. Switch to the display. Further, the display of the first reserved storage display area 079SG005D, the second reserved storage display area 079SG005U, and the telop display area 079SG005T is resumed. After the end of the variable display, during the symbol confirmation period, the stop display with a combination showing the jackpot of the decorative symbol and the small symbol and the lighting display of the fourth symbol (the lighting display of both the upper symbol 079SG005Ja and the lower symbol 079SG005Jb). ) Is performed.

Further, when the still image display effect is executed in the pattern SG-1, the attack of the ally character A does not hit the enemy character B, and the attack of the enemy character B is conversely the attack of the ally character A. After a hit and the ally character A collapses, the decorative symbol stops in a combination of being off, and it is notified that the jackpot game state is not controlled.

As an out-of-order notification effect, as shown in FIG. 14-21, a moving image until the attack of the ally character A is not hit and is defeated by the enemy character B is displayed at the progress speed V1. During the disengagement notification effect, the rotation of the hold display in the second display area 079SG005Sa and the movement of the telop from the left direction to the right direction are executed while maintaining the traveling speed V3, and from the speakers 8L and 8R. Is output while maintaining the reproduction speed V4 without changing the BGM, the effect sound, and the like. Further, the variable display of the fourth symbol 079SG005J and the blinking of the game effect lamp 9 are also executed without changing the cycle. Then, as shown in FIG. 14-30 (I), when the variable display is completed, the decorative symbols are stopped and displayed in a combination indicating the detachment, and the display on the image display device 5 is the normal background image before the reach effect. Switch to the display. After the end of the variable display, during the symbol confirmation period, the stop display with a combination indicating the detachment of the decorative symbol and the small symbol and the extinguishing display of the fourth symbol (both the upper symbol 079SG005Ja and the lower symbol 079SG005Jb) are extinguished. ) Is performed.

Next, regarding the variable display of the super reach β1 to β3 shown in FIGS. 14-22, 14-23, 14-31 (A) to 14-31 (H), when the variable display is started, the image In the first display area 079SG005F of the display device 5, an effect moving image such as a variable display of a decorative pattern is started at V1 which is a normal traveling speed. At this time, in the second display area 079SG005Sa, the rotation of the hold display and the movement of the telop from the left direction to the right direction (the moving speed of the moving image in the second display area 079SG005Sa) are executed in V3, which is the normal progress speed. At the same time, from the speakers 8L and 8R, BGM, production sound, and the like corresponding to the variable display are started at V4, which is a normal reproduction speed.

Further, in the third display area 079SG005Sb, in the fourth symbol 079SG005J, the upper symbol 079SG005Ja and the lower symbol 079SG005jb are started to be alternately lit (blinking) at a fixed cycle, and the game effect lamp 9 is started to blink at a fixed cycle. NS.

Then, as shown in FIGS. 14-22, 14-23, 14-31 (A) to 14-31 (C), when the development timing of the reach effect is reached due to the progress of the variable display, the first half of the third reach effect is reached. During the execution period, the battle production between the ally character B and the enemy character A is started. As the battle effect progresses, when the latter half of the first half execution period of the third reach effect is approached, the display of a moving image in which the ally character B attacks the enemy character A is started in the first display area 079SG005F of the image display device 5. NS. When the display of the moving image is started, the traveling speed of the moving image displayed in the first display area 079SG005F including the moving image is switched from the above-mentioned V1 to V2 which is slower than the V1. Therefore, in the first display area 079SG005F of the image display device 5, it is displayed in slow motion that the ally character B hits the enemy character A.

During the period in which the ally character B attacks the enemy character A in slow motion in this way (during the period in which the progress speed of the video of the battle effect is V2 in the first display area 079SG005F). Is executed while maintaining the traveling speed V3 without changing the rotation of the hold display and the movement of the telop from the left direction to the right direction in the second display area 079SG005Sa, and BGM, production sound, etc. from the speakers 8L and 8R. Is output while maintaining the playback speed V4. Further, the variable display of the fourth symbol 079SG005J and the blinking of the game effect lamp 9 are also executed without changing the cycle.

When the variable display is the variable display of the super reach β1, when the first half execution period of the third reach effect ends, as shown in FIGS. 14-22 and 14-31 (E) to 14-31 (G). In the first display area 079SG005F, as a jackpot notification effect, it is notified that after a moving image in which the attack of the ally character B is successful and the enemy character A collapses is displayed, the control to the jackpot gaming state is performed. In particular, when the jackpot notification effect is started, the first hold storage display area 079SG005D, the second hold storage display area 079SG005U, and the telop display area 079SG005T are hidden, and the first display area 079SG005F and the second display area are hidden. An image of the jackpot notification effect is displayed with 079SG005Sa. Then, as shown in FIG. 14-31 (H), when the variable display is completed, the decorative symbols are stopped and displayed in a combination indicating a big hit, and the display on the image display device 5 is the normal background image before the reach effect. Switch to the display. Further, the display of the first reserved storage display area 079SG005D, the second reserved storage display area 079SG005U, and the telop display area 079SG005T is resumed. After the end of the variable display, during the symbol confirmation period, the stop display with a combination showing the jackpot of the decorative symbol and the small symbol and the lighting display of the fourth symbol (the lighting display of both the upper symbol 079SG005Ja and the lower symbol 079SG005Jb). ) Is performed.

During the jackpot notification effect, the video of the part where the attack of the ally character B succeeds is displayed at V1 which is the normal progress speed (corresponding to FIG. 14-30 (E)), and the enemy character thereafter. The display of the moving image of the part where the character collapses is executed at the traveling speed V2, which is slower than V1 (corresponding to FIG. 14-30 (F)). Then, the moving image of the portion where it is notified that the decorative symbol is stopped by the combination of big hits and controlled to the big hit game state is executed again at the normal progress speed V1 (FIG. 14-30 (G)). Applicable to).

During the jackpot notification effect, the rotation of the hold display and the movement of the telop from the left direction to the right direction in the second display area 079SG005Sa are executed while maintaining the traveling speed V3, and from the speakers 8L and 8R. Is output while maintaining the reproduction speed V4 without changing the BGM, the effect sound, and the like. Further, the variable display of the fourth symbol 079SG005J and the blinking of the game effect lamp 9 are also executed without changing the cycle.

On the other hand, when the variable display is a variable display of super reach β2 or super reach β3, when the first half execution period of the third reach effect ends, as shown in FIGS. 14-23 and 14-31 (D). , The attack of the ally character B is not successful, and the second half of the third reach effect is executed.

As shown in FIGS. 14-23 and 14-32 (A) to 14-32 (B), when the second half execution period of the third reach effect is entered, the battle effect between the ally character B and the enemy character A continues. proceed.

At this time, in the first display area 079SG005F of the image display device 5, the production moving image of the battle effect is executed at the normal progress speed V1. Further, the rotation of the hold display in the second display area 079SG005Sa and the movement of the telop from the left direction to the right direction are executed while maintaining the traveling speed V3, and from the speakers 8L and 8R, BGM, directing sound, etc. Is output while maintaining the reproduction speed V4. Further, the variable display of the fourth symbol 079SG005J and the blinking of the game effect lamp 9 are also executed without changing the cycle.

In the latter half execution period of the third reach effect, when the effect movie of the battle effect is executed at the progress speed V1, the chance-up effect may be executed as shown in FIG. 14-32 (B). .. The chance-up effect is executed at the progress speed V1 as in the effect movie of the battle effect.

In particular, in the image display device 5, the small design is displayed with priority over the production video of the chance-up effect, while the production video of the chance-up effect is the image shown in the decorative design (FIGS. 14-32 (B)). It is displayed with priority over "7") displayed on the upper left and right sides of the display device 5. Therefore, in this feature unit 079SG, during the execution period of the chance-up effect, the player can recognize that the variable display is being performed by visually recognizing the small symbol, and display the effect video of the chance-up effect. By displaying the symbol with priority over the symbol, it is possible to reliably secure an area for displaying the effect moving image of the chan-up effect in the image display device 5.

In the feature unit 079SG, the production video of the chance-up effect is displayed with priority over the decorative design, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the decorative design is displayed from the production video of the chance-up effect. May be displayed with priority. By doing so, the player can easily recognize which combination of decorative symbols the reach effect during execution has evolved from, so that the game interest can be improved.

As the battle effect progresses, when the latter half of the second half execution period of the first reach effect is approached, the display of a moving image in which the ally character B attacks the enemy character A is started in the first display area 079SG005F of the image display device 5. NS. When the display of the moving image is started, the traveling speed of the moving image displayed in the first display area 079SG005F including the moving image is switched from V1 to V2 which is slower than the V1. Therefore, in the first display area 079SG005F of the image display device 5, it is displayed in slow motion that the ally character B hits the enemy character A.

During the period in which the ally character B attacks the enemy character A in slow motion in this way (during the period in which the progress speed of the video of the battle effect is V2 in the first display area 079SG005F). Is executed while maintaining the traveling speed V3 without changing the rotation of the hold display and the movement of the telop from the left direction to the right direction in the second display area 079SG005Sa, and BGM, production sound, etc. from the speakers 8L and 8R. Is output while maintaining the playback speed V4. Further, the variable display of the fourth symbol 079SG005J and the blinking of the game effect lamp 9 are also executed without changing the cycle.

When the variable display is the variable display of the super reach β2, as shown in FIGS. 14-23 and 14-32 (E) to 14-32 (G) when the second half execution period of the third reach effect is completed. In the first display area 079SG005F, as an out-of-order notification effect, it is notified that the variable display result is out of alignment after the attack of the ally character B fails and the enemy character A defeats it.

During the missed notification effect, the moving image is displayed at V1 which is the normal progress speed in the part where the attack of the ally character B fails and the part where the variable display result is notified that the variable display result is missed. NS.

Further, during the disengagement notification effect, the rotation of the hold display and the movement of the telop from the left direction to the right direction in the second display area 079SG005Sa are executed while maintaining the traveling speed V3, and from the speakers 8L and 8R. Is output while maintaining the reproduction speed V4 without changing the BGM, the effect sound, and the like. Further, the variable display of the fourth symbol 079SG005J and the blinking of the game effect lamp 9 are also executed without changing the cycle. Then, as shown in FIG. 14-32 (H), when the variable display is completed, the decorative symbols are stopped and displayed in a combination indicating the detachment, and the display on the image display device 5 is the normal background image before the reach effect. Switch to the display. After the end of the variable display, during the symbol confirmation period, the stop display with a combination indicating the detachment of the decorative symbol and the small symbol and the extinguishing display of the fourth symbol (both the upper symbol 079SG005Ja and the lower symbol 079SG005Jb) are extinguished. ) Is performed.

On the other hand, when the variable display is the variable display of the super reach β3, as shown in FIGS. 14-24, 14-25 and 14-32 (D), the ally in the latter half execution period of the third reach effect. The attack of character B succeeds and defeats enemy character A. Then, the first half of the fourth reach effect is executed.

As shown in FIGS. 14-24, 14-25 and 14-33 (A) to 14-33 (B), when the first half execution period of the fourth reach effect is entered, the ally character AB and the enemy character B The battle production progresses.

At this time, in the first display area 079SG005F of the image display device 5, the production moving image of the battle effect is executed at the normal progress speed V1. Further, the rotation of the hold display in the second display area 079SG005Sa and the movement of the telop from the left direction to the right direction are executed while maintaining the traveling speed V3, and from the speakers 8L and 8R, BGM, directing sound, etc. Is output while maintaining the reproduction speed V4. Further, the variable display of the fourth symbol 079SG005J and the blinking of the game effect lamp 9 are also executed without changing the cycle.

As the battle effect progresses, the latter half of the first half execution period of the fourth reach effect is approached, and as shown in FIGS. 14-24, 14-25 and 14-33 (C), the image display device 5 In the first display area 079SG005F, the display of the moving image in which the ally character B attacks the enemy character B is started. When the display of the moving image is started, the traveling speed of the moving image displayed in the first display area 079SG005F including the moving image is switched from V1 to V2 which is slower than the V1. Therefore, in the first display area 079SG005F of the image display device 5, it is displayed in slow motion that the ally character B hits the enemy character B.

During the period in which the ally character B attacks the enemy character B in slow motion in this way (during the period in which the progress speed of the video of the battle effect is V2 in the first display area 079SG005F). Is executed while maintaining the traveling speed V3 without changing the rotation of the hold display and the movement of the telop from the left direction to the right direction in the second display area 079SG005Sa, and BGM, production sound, etc. from the speakers 8L and 8R. Is output while maintaining the playback speed V4. Further, the variable display of the fourth symbol 079SG005J is executed without changing the alternating blinking cycle of the upper symbol 079SG005Ja and the lower symbol 079SG005Jb, while the blinking cycle of the game effect lamp 9 is shortened (the blinking cycle is shorter). It will be faster).

That is, in the latter half execution period of the fourth reach effect, the game effect lamp 9 blinks violently as the progress speed of the video of the battle effect decreases to V2, so that the blinking of the game effect lamp 9 causes the battle effect. It is possible to effectively draw the player's attention to the effect result (whether the jackpot notification effect or the out-of-order notification effect is executed).

Then, as the latter half of the fourth reach effect progresses, the operation promotion effect is executed. When the effect pattern of the operation promotion effect is determined to be the pattern SS-1, the push button 31B together with the operation promotion image 079SG005Ba that imitates the shape of the push button 31B in the center of the first display area 079SG005F of the image display device 5. The display of the meter 079SG005M and the effect image 079SG005E suggesting the operation acceptance period of the meter 079SG005M is started, and the update display of the meter 079SG005M and the enlarged update display of the effect image 079SG005E toward the peripheral edge of the image display device 5 are started. As described above, since the images of these operation promotion effects are displayed in the first display area 079SG005F as images based on the image data 2 (see FIG. 14-3), they are constant regardless of the progress speed of the battle effects. It is displayed as a moving speed video.

As shown in FIG. 14-33 (D), during the execution period of the operation promotion effect, the operation acceptance period of the push button 31B can be notified to the player by the update display of the meter 079SG005M, while the effect image 079SG005E is enlarged. The update display progresses. Since the effect image 079SG005E has a predetermined transmittance (for example, 10% to 50%), the player can visually recognize the battle effect through the effect image 079SG005E, and when the operation promotion effect is not executed. The visibility of the battle effect is lower than that. Since the execution period of the operation promotion effect is included in the latter half of the fourth reach effect, the battle effect continues at the progress speed V2 even during the execution of the operation promotion effect.

As shown in FIGS. 14-33 (D) and 14-33 (E), the battle effect continues at the progress speed V2 during the execution period of the operation promotion effect, but the end timing (push) of the operation promotion effect. At the time of the end timing of the operation reception of the button 31B), the scene does not proceed to the scene where it is known whether or not the attack of the ally character B hits the enemy character B, that is, the jackpot notification effect or the miss notification effect is not started. It has become.

On the other hand, as shown in FIGS. 14-34 (A) to 14-34 (E), when the effect pattern of the operation promotion effect is determined to be the pattern SS-2, the first display of the image display device 5 In the center of the area 079SG005F, as an operation promotion image imitating the shape of the push button 31B, the operation promotion image 079SG005Bb, which is larger in size than the operation promotion image 079SG005Ba, and the meter 079SG005M suggesting the operation acceptance period of the push button 31B are displayed. Then, the update display of the meter 079SG005M is started. As described above, since the images of these operation promotion effects are displayed in the first display area 079SG005F as images based on the image data 2 (see FIG. 14-3), they are constant regardless of the progress speed of the battle effects. It is displayed as a moving speed video.

As shown in FIG. 14-34 (D), during the execution period of the operation promotion effect, the operation acceptance period of the push button 31B can be notified to the player by the update display of the meter 079SG005M, while the operation promotion image 079SG005Bb makes it possible to notify the player. Most of the images of the battle production are hidden. As described above, the operation promotion image 079SG005Bb is an image having a size larger than that of the operation promotion image 079SG005Ba and having a transmittance of 0%. Therefore, when the operation promotion effect is executed in the pattern SS-2, the visibility of the battle effect is lower than that in the case where the operation promotion effect is executed in the pattern SS-1. Since the execution period of the operation promotion effect is included in the latter half of the fourth reach effect, the battle effect continues at the progress speed V2 even during the execution of the operation promotion effect.

As shown in FIGS. 14-34 (D) and 14-34 (E), the battle effect continues at the progress speed V2 during the execution period of the operation promotion effect, but the end timing (push) of the operation promotion effect. At the time of the end timing of the operation reception of the button 31B), the scene does not proceed to the scene where it is known whether or not the attack of the ally character B hits the enemy character B, that is, the jackpot notification effect or the miss notification effect is not started. It has become.

Then, when the player operates the push button 31B during the execution period of the operation promotion effect, or when the operation promotion effect ends without the player operating the push button 31B (the operation acceptance period of the push button 31B is set). When it ends), the jackpot notification effect or the miss notification effect is executed from the timing when the players operate the push button 31B or the timing when the operation promotion effect ends.

As a big hit notification effect after the operation promotion effect, as shown in FIGS. 14-24 and 14-35 (A) to 14-35 (C), a moving image in which the attack of the ally character B hits the enemy character B is Although it is displayed at the progress speed V1, the moving image in which the enemy character B collapses is displayed at the progress speed V2. Then, the moving image after the enemy character B has fallen is displayed at the progress speed V1. During the jackpot notification effect, the rotation of the hold display and the movement of the telop from the left direction to the right direction in the second display area 079SG005Sa are executed while maintaining the traveling speed V3, and from the speakers 8L and 8R. Is output while maintaining the reproduction speed V4 without changing the BGM, the effect sound, and the like. Further, the variable display of the fourth symbol 079SG005J and the blinking of the game effect lamp 9 are also executed without changing the cycle. Then, as shown in FIGS. 14-35 (D), when the variable display is completed, the decorative symbols are stopped and displayed in a combination indicating a big hit, and the display on the image display device 5 is the normal background image before the reach effect. Switch to the display. Further, the display of the first reserved storage display area 079SG005D, the second reserved storage display area 079SG005U, and the telop display area 079SG005T is resumed. After the end of the variable display, during the symbol confirmation period, the stop display with a combination showing the jackpot of the decorative symbol and the small symbol and the lighting display of the fourth symbol (the lighting display of both the upper symbol 079SG005Ja and the lower symbol 079SG005Jb). ) Is performed.

Further, as the disengagement notification effect after the operation promotion effect, as shown in FIGS. 14-25 and 14-35 (E) to 14-35 (G), the attack of the ally character B hits the enemy character B. On the contrary, after the attack of the enemy character B hits the ally character B and the ally character B collapses, it is notified that the jackpot game state is not controlled. In particular, when the disengagement notification effect is executed, the first hold storage display area 079SG005D, the second hold storage display area 079SG005U, and the telop display area 079SG005T are hidden, and the first display area 079SG005F and the second display area are hidden. An image of the jackpot notification effect is displayed with 079SG005Sa.

As the missed notification effect, as shown in FIGS. 14-25, a moving image until the attack of the ally character B does not hit and the decorative symbol stops due to the combination of missed is displayed at the progress speed V1. During the disengagement notification effect, the rotation of the hold display in the second display area 079SG005Sa and the movement of the telop from the left direction to the right direction are executed while maintaining the traveling speed V3, and from the speakers 8L and 8R. Is output while maintaining the reproduction speed V4 without changing the BGM, the effect sound, and the like. Further, the variable display of the fourth symbol 079SG005J and the blinking of the game effect lamp 9 are also executed without changing the cycle. Then, as shown in FIG. 14-35 (H), when the variable display is completed, the decorative symbols are stopped and displayed in a combination indicating the detachment, and the display on the image display device 5 is the normal background image before the reach effect. Switch to the display. After the end of the variable display, during the symbol confirmation period, the stop display with a combination indicating the detachment of the decorative symbol and the small symbol and the extinguishing display of the fourth symbol (both the upper symbol 079SG005Ja and the lower symbol 079SG005Jb) are extinguished. ) Is performed.

14-26 (H), 14-27 (H), 10-29 (F), 14-30 (E), 14-30 (I), 14-31 (H), FIG. As shown in 14-32 (H), 14-35 (D), and 14-35 (H), in the feature unit 079SG, a telop (message) is displayed on the image display device 5 at the end timing of the variable display. The form in which the telop display area 079SG005T including the telop display area 079SG005T is displayed is illustrated, but the present invention is not limited to this, and at the end timing of the variable display, the display itself of the telop display area 079SG005T on the image display device 5 is displayed. On the other hand, the display of the telop (message) in the telop display area 079SG005T itself may not be executed.

Further, in the feature unit 079SG, in the variable display of the super reach α3 and the super reach β3, the game effect lamp 9 is used only during the slow motion period immediately before the notification effect (the period during which the display of the effect movie of the reach effect is executed at the progress speed V2). Although the embodiment of shortening the blinking cycle of the game effect lamp 9 is illustrated, the present invention is not limited to this, and the blinking cycle of the game effect lamp 9 may be shortened in a slow motion period other than immediately before the notification effect. Further, the blinking cycle of the game effect lamp 9 may be shortened even in a part of the period (non-slow motion period) in which the display of the effect moving image of the reach effect is executed at the progress speed V1.

As described above, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 in the feature unit 079SG, as shown in FIGS. 14-19 to 14-25, each of the first reach effect, the second reach effect, the third reach effect, and the fourth reach effect. During the first half execution period, the moving image of each reach effect is displayed on the image display device 5 at the progress speed V1, and the latter half of each of the first reach effect, the second reach effect, the third reach effect, and the fourth reach effect. During the partial execution period, the moving image of each reach effect is displayed on the image display device 5 at the progress speed V2. Therefore, while the moving image of each reach effect is displayed on the image display device 5 at the progress speed V2, the degree of emotional transfer of the player to the ally character displayed during the reach effect is increased, and the jackpot notification is given. Since it is possible to raise the expectation that the production will be executed, it is possible to improve the interest of the game. On the other hand, during the first half execution period and the second half execution period of each of the first reach production, the second reach production, the third reach production, and the fourth reach production, the BGM and the production sound from the speakers 8L and 8R, etc. Since the output remains unchanged at V4, which is the normal playback speed, it is possible to prevent the player from giving a sense of discomfort.

Further, since the sound output hand in the feature unit 079SG includes the voice synthesis IC 079SG132, the amplifier circuit 079SG134, and the speakers 8L and 8R, the reproducibility is achieved during variable display including execution of reach effect and execution of jackpot game. It is possible to output high-quality BGM (music), sound effects, and other directing sounds from the speakers 8L and 8R at an appropriate volume, which makes it possible to improve the enjoyment of the game.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 14-20, 14-21, 14-24, and 14-25, the game effect is exhibited during the second half execution period of the second reach effect and the second half execution period of the fourth reach effect. Since the lamp 9 blinks at a shorter cycle than usual, the effect can be improved by blinking the game effect lamp 9 at a shorter cycle during the period when the progress speed of the effect moving image is V2.

In the feature unit 079SG, a mode in which the blinking cycle of the game effect lamp 9 is shortened during the second half execution period of the reach effect and the second half execution period of the fourth reach effect is illustrated, but the present invention is limited to this. The blinking cycle of the game effect lamp 9 may be gradually shortened according to the progress of the second reach effect and the fourth reach effect. By doing so, the player can recognize that the notification effect will be executed soon by the blinking cycle of the game effect lamp 9, so that the game interest can be improved.

Further, the feature unit 079SG exemplifies a mode in which the blinking cycle of the game effect lamp 9 is shortened during the second half execution period of the reach effect and the second half execution period of the fourth reach effect, but the present invention is limited to this. The blinking cycle of the game effect lamp 9 may be executed at any timing from the first reach effect to the fourth reach effect.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 14-19 to 14-25, the progress of the effect video of the reach effect during each execution period of the first reach effect, the second reach effect, the third reach effect, and the fourth reach effect. While the speed changes between V1 and V2, the rotation speed of the hold display and the movement speed of the telop are both constant at V3, and the reproduction speed of the production sound output from the speakers 8L and 8R is constant at V4. Therefore, it is possible to further prevent the player from giving a sense of discomfort.

The feature unit 079SG exemplifies a mode in which both the rotation speed of the hold display displayed in the second display area 079SG005Sa and the movement display speed of the telop are V3, but the present invention is not limited to this. , The rotation speed of the hold display and the movement display speed of the telop may be different speeds as long as they are constant regardless of the progress of each reach effect.

Further, as shown in FIG. 14-2 (A), the area of the first display area 079SG005F is larger than the combined area of the second display area 079SG005Sa and the third display area 079SG005Sb. During execution, the player can more easily recognize the reach effect displayed on the first display area 079SG005F than the hold display or telop displayed on the second display area 079SG005Sa, so that the game entertainment can be improved.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 14-18 to 14-25, the rotation display of the hold display is the rotation speed V3 in the first hold storage display area 079SG005D and the second hold storage display area 079SG005U during the period other than the reach effect. In the telop display area 079SG005T, the telop movement display is executed at the movement speed V3, that is, the rotation display of the hold display and the telop movement display are executed at the same speed as during the reach production, so that the player can perform the telop movement display. It is possible to prevent these pending displays and telops from becoming difficult to recognize.

Further, as shown in FIG. 14-2 (C), the characters included in the telop (message) in the telop display area 079SG005T reach the right end of the telop display area 079SG005T, and at the same time the display ends, the telop display area is displayed. Since it is displayed again at the left end of the 079SG005T and moved from the left to the right again, the entire telop (message) is always displayed in the telop display area 079SG005T. Therefore, the player can always recognize the entire movement display of the telop in the telop display area 079SG005T.

The feature unit 079SG exemplifies a form in which the entire telop is always moved and displayed in the telop display area 079SG005T, but the present invention is not limited to this and moves in the telop display area 079SG005T. Some of the displayed telops may be invisible to the player at some time.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 14-20, 14-21, and 14-28, during the second half execution period of the reach effect, the effect movie of the reach effect is displayed at the progress speed V2 and the image is displayed. By executing the effect effect of displaying the concentrated line on the display device 5, the effect effect of the second half of the reach effect can be enhanced by the effect effect, so that the game entertainment can be improved. In particular, in this feature unit 079SG, as shown in FIGS. 14-28 (C) and 1-28 (D), the number of concentrated lines displayed increases as the battle effect progresses, so that the concentrated lines are displayed. It is possible for the player to more easily recognize that the second reach effect is completed and the jackpot notification effect or the miss notification effect is executed due to the increase in the number.

The feature unit 079SG exemplifies a form in which the effect effect in the present invention is displayed as a concentrated line, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the operation of the movable body 32 within a predetermined range, the speaker 8L, and the speaker 8L. The output of the specific sound effect from the 8R, the vibration of the stick controller 31A and the push button 31B, the vibration of the image displayed on the image display device 5 or the image display device 5 itself, etc. are executed as the effect effect, and the second reach effect ( As the battle effect progresses, the effect level of the effect effect is gradually increased (for example, the operating range of the movable body 32 is widened, the volume of the specific effect sound from the speakers 8L and 8R is increased, and the stick. The vibration of the controller 31A and the push button 31B may be increased, the vibration of the image displayed on the image display device 5 or the image display device 5 itself may be increased, and the like).

Further, as shown in FIGS. 14-26 (G), 14-29 (E), 14-30 (D), 14-31 (G), and 14-35 (C), as a jackpot notification effect. When the decorative symbol is stopped by the combination of big hits, the first reserved storage display area 079SG005D, the second reserved storage display area 079SG005U, and the telop display area 079SG005T in the second display area 079SG005Sa are hidden and the first display area 079SG005F is displayed. Since the image of the jackpot notification effect is displayed in the second display area 079SG005Sa, the player is made to recognize that the jackpot gaming state is controlled while further improving the visibility of the jackpot notification effect in the second display area 079SG005Sa. It can be done easily.

When executing the jackpot notification effect, the feature unit 079SG hides the first reserved storage display area 079SG005D, the second reserved storage display area 079SG005U, and the telop display area 079SG005T displayed in the second display area 079SG005Sa. The first display area 079SG005F and the second display area 079SG005Sa exemplify a mode in which an image of the jackpot notification effect is displayed, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the second display area 079SG005Sa is used. In a state where the first reserved storage display area 079SG005D, the second reserved storage display area 079SG005U, and the telop display area 079SG005T are displayed, the image of the jackpot notification effect is displayed in the first display area 079SG005F and the second display area 079SG005Sa (the first). (2) In the display area 079SG005Sa, the image of the jackpot notification effect may be displayed overlapping with the first reserved storage display area 079SG005D, the second reserved storage display area 079SG005U, and the telop display area 079SG005T).

At this time, the first reserved storage display area 079SG005D, the second reserved storage display area 079SG005U, and the telop display area 079SG005T are transparently displayed or reduced, or the first reserved storage display area 079SG005D and the second reserved storage display area 079SG005U are displayed. The visibility of the jackpot notification image may be improved by hiding only one of the hold display displayed in the hold display area.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 14-28 and 14-29, during the second half execution period of the reach effect, the still image display effect can be executed in the first display area 079SG005F, while FIGS. 14-20 and FIGS. As shown in 14-21, during the still image display effect execution period, the rotation display of the hold display in the first hold storage display area 079SG005D and the second hold storage display area 079SG005U in the second display area 079SG005Sa, and FIG. 14-2. Since the telop movement display in the telop display area 079SG005T shown in (C) continues without stopping, the hold display is being displayed and the telop movement display is being displayed during the execution period of the still image display effect. Can be easily recognized by the player, and it is possible to prevent the player from becoming difficult to recognize the display of the hold display and the display of the telop by stopping the rotation display of the hold display and the movement display of the telop. ..

Further, as shown in FIGS. 14-16 and 14-29 (A) to 14-29 (B), when the still image display effect is executed in the pattern SG-2, the colors of the still image are reversed. Therefore, the player can easily recognize that the still image display effect is executed by reversing the color of the still image.

In the feature unit 079SG, as a still image display effect, as a form of changing the color of the still image displayed in the first display area 079SG005F, a form of reversing the color of the still image is illustrated. The form that changes the color of the still image is not limited to one that changes the color of the still image to black and white, one that changes only a part of the color of the still image, and a new color for the still image. It may be added.

Further, as shown in FIG. 14-29 (B), when the color of the still image displayed in the first display area 079SG005F is reversed by executing the still image display effect in the pattern SG-2, Since the colors of the hold display and telop displayed in the second display area 079SG005Sa and the color of the fourth symbol displayed in the third display area 079SG005Sb are not inverted, the player is displayed in these second display areas 079SG005Sa. By comparing the hold display, telop, fourth symbol, etc. with the still image, it is possible to easily recognize that the color of the still image has changed.

In addition, in each variable display of the super reach in this feature unit 079SG, a pattern that shifts to the second reach effect or the fourth reach effect after the execution of the first reach effect or the third reach effect, and the first reach effect or the third reach effect. Since there is a pattern in which the variable display that shifts to the second reach production and the fourth reach production ends after the production is executed, the display of the production video of the reach production progresses during the first reach production and the third reach production. Whether or not to shift to the second reach effect or the fourth reach effect after being executed at the speed V2, and the display of the effect video of the reach effect during the second reach effect or the third reach effect is executed at the progress speed V2. Since it is possible to draw the player's attention to whether or not it is notified that the game is controlled to the big hit game state after the game is played, the game entertainment can be improved.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 14-19, 14-20, 14-21, 14-23, 14-24, and 14-25, the first reach effect and the third reach effect are performed during the first reach effect. During the 1st reach production second half execution period and the 3rd reach production second half execution period, the production in which the ally character is defeated by the enemy character and the 1st reach production second half execution period or the 3rd reach production second half execution period proceed at the same time. Since it is executed at speed V1, the progress speed when shifting from the first reach effect first half execution period to the first reach effect second half execution period or from the third reach effect first half execution period to the third reach effect second half execution period. However, in the second half execution period of the first reach production and the second half execution period of the third reach production, the expectation that the ally character is controlled to the jackpot game state by being different from the progress speed of the production in which the enemy character is defeated is excessively raised. It is possible to prevent it from happening. Further, FIGS. 14-18, 14-20, 14-22, 14-24, 14-25 and 14-26 (E) to 14-26 (G), 14-29 (C). 14-29 (E), 14-30 (B) to 14-30 (D), 14-31 (E) to 14-31 (G), 14-35 (A) to As shown in 14-35 (C), in the jackpot notification effect of this feature unit 079SG, while the video is displayed at the progress speed V2 when the enemy character collapses due to the hit of the attack of the ally character, while it is executed. 14-19, 14-21, 14-23, 14-25 and 14-27 (E) to 14-27 (G), 14-30 (F) to 14-30 (H). ), FIGS. 14-32 (E) to 14-32 (G), and 14-35 (D) to 14-35 (F). Since the display of is executed at the progress speed V1, when the disengagement notification effect is executed, the display of the effect video of the disengagement notification effect is not executed at the progress speed V2, so that the player is dissatisfied. Can be prevented from increasing excessively, and the game entertainment can be improved.

It should be noted that, in the present feature unit 079SG, when the variable display result of the super reach is the result of the disengagement notification effect, the display of the effect video of the disengagement notification effect is executed at the progress speed V1. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and in a part of the variable display of the super reach, the display of the effect moving image of the out-of-order notification effect may be executed at a progress speed V2 slower than V1. By doing so, it is possible to create variations in the production of the out-of-court notification effect, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

In the feature unit 079SG, the mode in which the traveling speed V1 of the production moving image during the jackpot notification effect is the third speed in the present invention and the traveling speed V2 of the effecting moving image during the jackpot notification effect is the fourth speed in the present invention is exemplified. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the third speed in the present invention may be a speed different from the traveling speed V1. Further, the fourth speed in the present invention may be a speed different from the traveling speed V2 as long as it is slower than the third speed.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 14-24 and 14-25, the operation promotion effect is executed when the display of the video of the reach effect is executed at the progress speed V2 during the latter half execution period of the fourth reach effect. Therefore, the effect of the fourth reach effect can be enhanced by the operation promotion effect.

It should be noted that the feature unit 079SG exemplifies a mode in which the display of the effect moving image of the fourth reach effect is executed at the progress speed V2 during the execution of the operation promotion effect, but the present invention is not limited to this. During the execution of the operation promotion effect, the display of the effect moving image of the fourth reach effect may be executed at the progress speed V1. Further, it is possible to execute a suggestion effect suggesting that the operation promotion effect is executed before the operation promotion effect is executed, and during the execution period of the suggestion effect, the effect video of the fourth reach effect is displayed at the progress speed V2. It may be executed.

Further, as the operation promotion effect of the feature unit 079SG, in addition to the operation promotion image 079SG005Ba or the operation promotion image 079SG005Bb, the meter 079SG005M for notifying the operation acceptance period of the push button 31B is displayed in the first display area 079SG005F. While the operation promotion image 079SG005Ba or the operation promotion image 079SG005Bb and the meter 079SG005M are being displayed, the display of the effect video of the fourth reach effect at the progress speed V2 is continuously executed, but the notification effect is not progressed. .. Further, when the player operates the push button 31B during the operation acceptance period of the push button 31B, and when the operation promotion effect ends without the player operating the push button 31B during the operation acceptance period of the push button 31B. Then, the same jackpot notification effect or miss notification effect is executed. Therefore, since the notification effect is not executed at the timing before the end of the operation acceptance period of the push button 31B (until the end of the operation promotion effect), the push button is not operated by the player. It is possible to prevent the player from recognizing whether or not the push button 31B is controlled to the jackpot game state during the operation acceptance period.

The feature unit 079SG exemplifies a form in which the detection means in the present invention is a push button 31B, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the detection means is other than the push button 31B such as the stick controller 31A. In addition to the operation means of the above, sensors such as a motion sensor and a touch sensor that can detect the movement of the player may be used.

Further, FIGS. 14-18, 14-20, 14-22, 14-24, 14-26 (E) to 14-26 (G), 14-29 (C) to 14-29. (E), FIGS. 14-30 (B) to 14-30 (D), 14-31 (E) to 14-31 (G), 14-35 (A) to 14-35C). As shown, in the jackpot notification effect in the feature unit 079SG, the video of the part where the attack of the ally character hits the enemy character is displayed at the progress speed V1, while the video of the part where the enemy character collapses is the progress speed V2. It is displayed in. On the other hand, FIGS. 14-19, 14-21, 14-23, 14-25 and 14-27 (E) to 14-27 (G), 14-30 (E) to 14-. As shown in 30 (G), FIGS. 14-32 (E) to 14-32 (G), and 14-35 (D) to 14-35 (F), the disengagement notification effect of the feature unit 079SG is produced. The moving image is displayed at the progress speed V1 and is not displayed at the progress speed V2. That is, when the jackpot notification effect is executed, the player can be impressed that the jackpot gaming state is controlled by displaying a part of the effect movie of the jackpot notification effect at the progress speed V2. can.

Further, in the feature unit 079SG, as a special effect that can be executed only when the variable display result is a big hit in the present invention, the still image display effect can be executed by the pattern SG-2 (still image display effect in which the colors are inverted). Therefore, as a still image display effect, the player can pay attention to whether or not the color of the still image displayed in the first display area 079SG005F is reversed, so that the game interest can be improved.

In the feature unit 079SG, a mode in which the still image display effect of the pattern SG-2 is a special effect in the present invention is illustrated, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the special effect in the present invention is not limited to this. , An effect other than the still image display effect of the pattern SG-2 (for example, an effect in which a specific character is displayed, an effect in which the color of the effect is gold or rainbow, etc.) may be executed.

Further, in the operation promotion effect of the feature unit 079SG, the pattern SS-1 in which the operation promotion image 079SG005Ba imitating the push button 31B is imitated in the first display area 079SG005F and the push button 31B imitating the push button 31B in the first display area 079SG005F. As the operation promotion image, the operation promotion image 079SG005Bb, which is larger in size than the operation promotion image 079SG005Ba, can be displayed in any of the effect patterns of the pattern SS-2. When the operation promotion effect is executed in the pattern SS-1, the battle effect of the fourth reach effect can be visually recognized through the effect image 079SG005E displayed in the first display area 079SG005F, while the battle effect of the fourth reach effect can be visually recognized in the pattern SS-2. When the operation promotion effect is executed, most of the battle effect of the fourth reach effect is hidden by the operation promotion image 079SG005Ba. The visibility of the battle production of 4 reach production is low. Further, as shown in FIG. 14-17, the ratio at which the variable display result becomes a big hit when the operation promotion effect is executed in the pattern SS-2 is when the operation promotion effect is executed in the pattern SS-1. Since the variable display result is lower than the jackpot ratio, the player can pay attention to whether the operation promotion effect is executed in the pattern SS-1 or the pattern SS-2, and the game interest can be improved. Further, as shown in FIGS. 14-24, 14-25 and 14-33 (C) to 14-33 (E), when the operation promotion image 079SG005Ba is displayed as the operation promotion effect, the operation promotion image is displayed. While the 079SG005Ba is being displayed, the display of the production video of the battle effect is executed at the progress speed V2, so that the game entertainment can be improved.

In the feature unit 079SG, when the operation promotion effect is executed by the pattern SS-2, the operation promotion image 079SG005Bb is displayed on the image display device 5, and the operation promotion image 079SG005Bb causes the traveling speed V2 (slow motion). ) Has illustrated a form in which the visibility of the production video (battle production) of the fourth reach effect is reduced, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the operation promotion effect is the pattern SS. When executed in -2, in addition to the display of the operation promotion image 079SG005Bb, a dedicated background image is displayed over the entire display area of the image display device 5, so that the production video (battle) of the fourth reach effect is displayed. The production) may be completely invisible. In addition, during the period when the production video (battle production) of the 4th reach production is completely invisible due to the background image dedicated to the operation promotion production pattern SS-2, the production video of the 4th reach production is displayed. The display may be executed at the traveling speed V1 (non-slow motion).

Further, in the feature unit 079SG, as the reach effect of the super reach, the second reach effect can be executed after the first reach effect, and the fourth reach effect can be executed after the third reach effect. Further, as the variable display of the super reach, the variable display of the super reach α1 that notifies the big hit after the first half execution period of the first reach effect and the variable display of the super reach β1 that notifies the big hit after the first half execution period of the third reach effect. Display, variable display of super reach α2 that executes the first half of the first reach effect and then the second half of the first reach effect to notify the deviation, and the second half of the third reach after the first half of the third reach effect. Variable display of super reach β2 that executes the partial execution period and notifies the deviation, variable display of super reach α3 that shifts to the second reach effect after the first reach effect exchange, third reach effect exchange partial execution period It is possible to execute the variable display of the super reach α3 that shifts to the fourth reach effect after When shifting to the execution period, when shifting from the first reach effect second half execution period to the second reach effect first half execution period, when shifting from the third reach effect first half execution period to the third reach effect second half execution period , When shifting from the third reach production second half execution period to the fourth reach production first half execution period, the production video of each reach production is executed at the progress speed V2, and the first reach production first half execution period is started. When shifting to the second half of the reach effect execution period, when shifting from the second half of the reach effect to the first half of the second reach effect, the first half of the third reach effect to the second half of the third reach effect When shifting from the third reach production second half execution period to the fourth reach production first half execution period, BGM and sound effects are output from the speakers 8L and 8R at the same playback speed V4 as in other periods. Therefore, when shifting from the first reach effect first half execution period to the first reach effect second half execution period, when shifting from the first reach effect second half execution period to the second reach effect first half execution period, the third reach When shifting from the first half of the production period to the second half of the third reach production, and when shifting from the second half of the third reach production to the first half of the fourth reach production, the player feels uncomfortable. It is possible to prevent it from being stored. Further, by displaying the effect video of each reach effect at the progress speed V2, it is possible to easily recognize the branch of the reach effect drawn by the player.

The variable display of the super reach of the feature unit 079SG exemplifies a mode in which two reach effects can be executed. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the variable display of the super reach is 3 or more. The reach effect may be executable, or only one reach effect may be executable.

Although the feature portion 079SG of the present invention has been described above with reference to the drawings, the specific configuration is not limited to these feature portions, and the present invention may be changed or added without departing from the gist of the present invention. included.

For example, in the feature unit 079SG, a first reach effect, a second reach effect, a third reach effect, and a fourth reach effect are provided as the reach effect of the super reach, and a part of the effect movie of the reach effect is provided in all of these reach effects. Although the embodiment in which the display of is executed at the progress speed V2 (slow motion) is illustrated, the present invention is not limited to this, and the display of the production moving image is not executed at the progress speed V2 in each reach effect (a pattern in which the display of the production moving image is not executed at the progress speed V2. A pattern in which the display of the production moving image is always executed at the progress speed V1) and a pattern in which a part of the production movie is displayed at the progress speed V2 may be provided. Further, the effect contents may be different between the reach effect in which a part of the effect moving image is displayed at the progress speed V2 and the reach effect in which the display of the effect moving image is not executed at the progress speed V2. By doing so, it is possible to create variations in the reach production of the super reach, so that the game entertainment can be improved.

Further, in the feature unit 079SG, the production sound output from the speakers 8L and 8R always has a constant playback speed (reproduction speed V4) regardless of whether or not the display of the production video is executed at the progress speed V2. Although the output form is illustrated, the present invention is not limited to this, and for example, as the modified example 079SG-1, the first reach effect, the second reach effect, the third reach effect, and the fourth reach are shown. In the first half of each reach production second half execution period of the production, the playback speed V4 from the speakers 8L, 8R as in the first half execution period of each reach production of 1 reach production, 2nd reach production, 3rd reach production, and 4th reach production. While the production sound is output at, what is V4 in the latter half of each reach production (slow motion period) of the first reach production, the second reach production, the third reach production, and the fourth reach production? The production sound may be output at a different reproduction speed (for example, V5 slower than the reproduction speed V4). By doing so, it is possible to improve the effect of the effect sound on the reach effect by making the reproduction speed of the effect sound different while the display of the effect video of the reach effect is being executed at the progress speed V2. You can improve your interest.

Further, in the feature unit 079SG, as shown in FIGS. 14-33 and 14-34, the first display area 079SG005F is visually recognized during the execution period of the reach effect by displaying the effect image 079SG005E and the operation promotion image 079SG005Bb. The present invention exemplifies a form in which the visibility of the second display area 079SG005Sa and the third display area 079SG005Sb cannot be reduced while the property can be reduced, but the present invention is not limited thereto. As a modification 079SG-2, it may be possible to reduce the visibility of the second display area 079SG005Sa and the third display area 079SG005Sb.

Further, when it is possible to reduce the visibility of the second display area 079SG005Sa and the third display area 079SG005Sb in this way, as shown in FIGS. 14-36 and 14-37, after the end of the reach effect. , The visibility of the first display area 079SG005F may be reduced as a part of the notification effect.

Specifically, as shown in FIGS. 14-36 (A) to 14-36 (D), when the second reach effect is executed, when the second reach effect is completed together with the still image display effect, A circular effect image 079SG005Ea is displayed in the center of the first display area, and the effect image 079SG005Ea is enlarged and displayed toward the second display area 079SG005Sa and the third display area 079SG005Sb as a part of the jackpot notification effect or the loss notification effect. To go. Then, when the effect image 079SG005Ea spreads over the entire first display area 079SG005F (when the entire first display area 079SG005F is concealed by the effect image 079SG005Ea), it is shown in FIGS. 14-36 (E) and 14-36 (F). As described above, it is sufficient to notify that the jackpot gaming state is controlled as the jackpot notification effect, or that the jackpot gaming state is not controlled as the loss notification effect.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 14-37 (A) to 14-37 (D), when the fourth reach effect is executed, the player operates the push button 31B, or the player pushes. When the operation promotion effect is completed without operating the button 31B, a circular effect image 079SG005Ea is displayed in the center of the first display area and the effect image 079SG005Ea is displayed second as part of the jackpot notification effect or the loss notification effect. Enlarged display is performed toward the area 079SG005Sa and the third display area 079SG005Sb. Then, when the effect image 079SG005Ea spreads over the entire first display area 079SG005F (when the entire first display area 079SG005F is concealed by the effect image 079SG005Ea), it is shown in FIGS. 14-37 (E) and 14-37 (F). As described above, it is sufficient to notify that the jackpot gaming state is controlled as the jackpot notification effect, or that the jackpot gaming state is not controlled as the loss notification effect.

The effect image 079SG005Ea shown in FIGS. 14-36 and 14-37 is an image based on the image data 2 shown in FIG. 14-3 (B), and the drawing range is expanded as an image based on the image data 2. Therefore, it is possible to reduce only the visibility of the first display area 079SG005F and not to reduce the visibility of the second display area 079SG005Sa and the third display area 079SG005Sb.

As described above, in the present modification 079SG-2, the visibility of the second display area 079SG005Sa and the third display area 079SG005Sb can be changed, while the second display area is shown in FIGS. 14-36 and 14-37. After the end of the reach effect or after the end of the fourth reach effect, the effect image 079SG005Ea reduces the visibility of the first display area 079SG005F, but the visibility of the second display area 079SG005Sa and the third display area 079SG005Sb. Does not change, so that the player can easily recognize the timing when the notification effect is set by changing the visibility of the first display area 079SG005F, and the visibility of the second display area 079SG005Sa and the third display area 079SG005Sb can be improved. Since it does not change, it is possible to prevent the player from becoming difficult to recognize the hold display, the telop display, the variable display of the fourth symbol, and the like.

Further, the effect image 079SG005Ea that reduces the visibility of the first display area 079SG005F is an image drawn as an image of the second image data shown in FIG. 14-3 (B), and is the second display area 079SG005Sa or the third display area 079SG005Sa. Since the visibility of the first display area 079SG005F is changed by drawing so as to enlarge the display toward the display area 079SG005Sb, the first display area 079SG005Sa and the third display area 079SG005Sb are not changed. Only the visibility of the display area 079SG005F can be accurately reduced, and the drawing of the enlarged display of the effect image 079SG005Ea as the second image data can be drawn from the center of the first display area 079SG005F to the second display area 079SG005Sa or the third display. Since the visibility of the first display area 079SG005F is lowered by executing toward the area 079SG005Sb, it is possible to make it difficult to change the visibility of the area corresponding to the second display area 079SG005Sa and the third display area 079SG005Sb.

Further, in the present modification 079SG-2, a mode in which the operation promotion effect is executed during the fourth reach effect is illustrated, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the operation promotion effect is one of the notification effects. It may be executed as a part.

When the operation promotion effect is executed as a part of the notification effect, it is the same as the modified example 079SG-2 as shown in FIGS. 14-38 (A) to 14-38 (F) as the modified example 079SG-3. In addition, the visibility of the first display area 079SG005F is reduced by enlarging the effect image 079SG005Ea. Then, when the effect image 079SG005Ea spreads over the entire first display area 079SG005F, the operation promotion image 079SG005Ba and the meter 079SG005M are displayed in the center of the first display area 079SG005F as an operation promotion effect as shown in FIG. 14-38 (D). do.

By displaying the operation promotion image 079SG005Ba and the meter 079SG005M as images based on the first image data shown in FIG. 14-2 (A), it is possible to avoid deterioration of visibility due to the effect image 079SG005Ea.

After that, the player operates the push button 31B, or the player is controlled to the jackpot game state based on the end of the operation promotion effect without operating the push button 31B, or the jackpot game state. Is notified that it is not controlled.

As described above, in the present modification 079SG-3, the visibility of the first display area 079SG005F is lowered by the enlarged display of the effect image 079SG005Ea, but the operation promotion image 079SG005Ba and the meter 079SG005M displayed as the image of the first image data. Since the visibility of the push button 31B is not lowered, the operation promotion effect can be made to stand out with respect to the fourth reach effect, so that the player can be effectively encouraged to operate the push button 31B.

Further, in the feature unit 079SG, when the still image display effect is executed in the pattern SS-2 during the execution period of the second reach effect, the variable display result is always a big hit. The present invention is not limited to this, and as the modified example 079SG-4, when the still image display effect is executed in the pattern SS-2 during the execution period of the second reach effect, the jackpot type of the jackpot is always specified. The probability variation jackpot (furthermore, the probability variation jackpot A that is most advantageous to the player) may be set. Furthermore, as an effect pattern when the still image display effect is executed in the pattern SS-2 during the execution period of the second reach effect, the jackpot game state is controlled again after the disconnection notification effect is once executed. It may be possible to execute a revival effect that notifies. In the case where the revival effect is executed after the still image display effect is executed in the pattern SS-2 in this way, the big hit type is a probable big hit and a non-probable big hit (non-probable big hit). A case where the game is controlled to the jackpot game state and a case where the probability variation jackpot is controlled to the jackpot game state) may be provided. By doing so, it is possible to draw the player's attention to whether or not the jackpot notification effect is executed after the still image display effect is executed in the pattern SS-2, so that the game interest can be improved. ..

Further, in the feature unit 079SG, as a telop displayed in the telop display area 079SG005T, a mode in which a message indicating a game state is displayed is exemplified, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the telop display area 079SG005T is not limited to this. As the displayed telop, even if it is possible to display a message suggesting whether or not the variable display being executed or the variable display that has not been started is controlled to the jackpot game state, the title of the reach effect being executed, and the like can be displayed. good.

Further, in the feature unit 079SG, a form in which a telop can be displayed according to the state of the effect being executed is illustrated in the telop display area 079SG005T, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the telop display area 079SG005T is not limited thereto. The telops displayed in are those that can identify the game state, the degree of expectation that the variable display result will be a big hit in the variable display during execution (big hit expectation), the explanation of the effect during execution (especially the reach effect), and the reach effect. It may be a notice effect or the like that can be executed from a timing earlier than that.

Further, in the feature unit 079SG, as shown in FIGS. 14-33 and 14-34, the operation promotion effect (operation promotion image 079SG005Ba and operation promotion) is performed during the period when the moving image of the reach effect is displayed at the progress speed V2. Although the mode of executing the image 079SG005Bb) is illustrated, the present invention is not limited to this, and the operation promotion effect is executed after the moving image of the reach effect returns from the progress speed V2 to the progress speed V1. May be good.

Further, in the feature unit 079SG, as shown in FIGS. 14-33 and 14-34, as an operation promotion effect, a mode in which the operation promotion image 079SG005Ba and the operation promotion image 079SG005Bb are displayed on the image display device 5 is illustrated. The present invention is not limited to this, and as the operation promotion effect, not only the operation promotion image 079SG005Ba and the operation promotion image 079SG005Bb are displayed, but also the operation promotion image 079SG005Ba and the operation promotion image 079SG005Bb are displayed, for example. As an effect before displaying, the images of the plurality of push buttons 31B move toward the center of the image display device 5, and finally the images of the push buttons 31B are duplicated and displayed to promote the operation. You may execute the effect that 079SG005Ba and the operation promotion image 079SG005Bb are displayed.

When the effect of moving the images of the plurality of push buttons 31B toward the center of the image display device 5 is executed as a precursor effect of the operation promotion effect, for example, the images of the plurality of push buttons 31B are displayed. The moving display speed of the image display device 5 may decrease as it approaches the central portion of the image display device 5. By doing so, the player can accurately recognize that the operation promotion effect is executed, so that the game entertainment can be improved.

Further, in the feature unit 079SG, as shown in FIGS. 14-20, 14-21, 14-24, and 14-25, when the display of the moving image of the reach effect is executed at the traveling speed V2, Although the embodiment in which the blinking cycle of the game effect lamps (main lamp 9a, frame lamp 9b, attacker lamp 9c, movable body lamp 9d) may be shortened is illustrated, the present invention is not limited to this. When the display of the reach effect video is executed at the progress speed V2, the number of colors (emission colors) of the game effect lamp 9 is different from that when the reach effect video display is executed at the progress speed V1. You may. For example, when the display of the video of the reach effect is executed at the progress speed V1, the game effect lamp 9 can emit light in a plurality of colors, while the display of the video of the reach effect is executed at the progress speed V2. In this case, the game effect lamp 9 may be capable of emitting light in a single color (for example, only white). By doing so, when the display of the moving image of the reach effect is executed at the progress speed V2, it is possible to prevent the game enjoyment from being lowered due to the emission color of the game effect lamp 9.

Further, in the feature unit 079SG, as shown in FIGS. 14-20, 14-21, 14-24, and 14-25, when the display of the moving image of the reach effect is executed at the progress speed V2, Although the embodiment in which the blinking cycle of the game effect lamps (main lamp 9a, frame lamp 9b, attacker lamp 9c, movable body lamp 9d) may be shortened is illustrated, the present invention is not limited to this. When the display of the moving image of the reach effect is executed at the progress speed V2, the blinking cycle of the game effect lamp 9 may be lengthened. By doing so, it is possible to give a sense of unity between the display of the video of the reach effect and the blinking of the game effect lamp 9, so that the game interest can be improved.

Further, in the feature unit 079SG, as shown in FIGS. 14-26, 14-29, 14-30, 14-31, and 14-35, as an effect mode of the jackpot notification effect, the reach effect is completed. Later, a form in which the decorative symbol is displayed while swinging with a combination indicating a jackpot is illustrated, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the decorative symbol is displayed while swinging with a combination indicating a jackpot. The timing may be during the reach production.

Further, the present invention is a gaming machine in which a player can select at least a part of production sounds such as BGM output from speakers 8L and 8R during a game by operating an operating means that can be operated by the player. May be applied to. By doing so, when the player sets the output of the effect sound that suits his / her own taste, the speaker 8L is displayed when the display of the moving image of each reach effect is executed at the progress speed V1. , Since the effect sound output from 8R is reproduced at the reproduction speed V4 without changing, the effect sound is reproduced from the reproduction speed V4 even though the player himself selects the effect sound output from the speakers 8L and 8R. However, it is possible to prevent the deterioration of the game interest due to the low-speed playback.

Further, in the feature unit 079SG, as the end suggestion effect in the present invention, it is possible to execute an effect in which the ally character is defeated by the enemy character in the first reach effect second half execution period and the third reach effect second half execution period. Although the variable display result is always out of alignment when is executed, the present invention is not limited to this, and in the first reach effect second half execution period and the third reach effect second half execution period. After the effect that the ally character is defeated by the enemy character is executed, the display on the image display device 5 is once switched to the display of the normal background image before the reach effect, and then the effect indicating that the variable display result is a big hit. A case may be provided in which (for example, a resurrection effect) is executed.

When the revival effect is executed in this way, the revival effect is performed for the player by lighting and blinking the game effect lamp 9 before displaying the moving image of the revival effect on the image display device 5. May be made aware that is executed. Further, as an effect mode of the revival effect, for example, the ally character may attack the enemy character again and defeat the enemy character. In particular, when executing the resurrection effect, a part of the video of the resurrection effect (for example, a video of a scene in which an enemy character collapses) is displayed at a progress speed of V2 so as to enhance the effect of the resurrection effect. May be good.

Further, although a plurality of feature portions and modified examples are disclosed in the present specification, the gaming machine of the present invention is implemented by combining two or more feature portions and modified examples from these plurality of feature portions and modified examples. You may.

For example, the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the feature unit 079SG may be a pachinko gaming machine whose jackpot probability can be changed by changing the set values as shown in FIGS. 1 to 9. In such a case, for example, in the variable display of the super reach α1 and the super reach β1, a pattern is provided in which the variable display result is out of alignment, and the pachinko gaming machine 1 is provided with a high setting value (for example, 6) that is advantageous for the player. When is set, even if the variable display result is out of order in the variable display of super reach α1 and super reach β1 at a higher rate than when other set values are set in the pachinko gaming machine 1. good. By doing so, the fact that the variable display result is out of alignment in the variable display of the super reach α1 and the super reach β1 can be used as a suggestion that the high setting value is set in the pachinko gaming machine 1. Therefore, it is possible to draw the player's attention to the fact that the variable display result is out of order while suppressing the deterioration of the player's interest due to the variable display result being out of place in the variable display of super reach α1 and super reach β1. It will be possible.

Further, in the feature unit 079SG, the pachinko game machine 1 is exemplified as a game machine that plays a predetermined game, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the game machine that plays a predetermined game is at least a predetermined game. It may be a slot machine or a general game machine other than the pachinko game machine 1 as long as it performs the above.

(Explanation related to the association of feature parts)
Each configuration relating to the feature portion 059AK may be appropriately combined with a part or all of the configurations relating to the other feature portions such as the feature portion 063AK, the feature portion 065AK, and the feature portion 079SG. The feature portions thus combined or the individual feature portions that are not combined may be appropriately combined with a part or all of each configuration related to the other feature portions. For example, in addition to controlling the time saving state by stopping and displaying the time saving symbol like the feature part 059AK, the small hit game state ends based on passing through the time saving area 063AK20 like the feature part 063AK. Then, it may be controlled to shorten the time for a predetermined period. In addition to this, even when the time-saving symbol is stopped and displayed as a variable display result of the normal symbol as in the feature unit 065AK, the time-saving state may be controlled. According to this, the opportunity to be controlled to the time saving state increases, and the game entertainment can be improved.

Further, for example, the feature unit includes a time-saving fanning effect in the feature unit 059AK, a normal time-passing fanning effect and a time-saving time-passing fanning effect in the feature unit 063AK, a predetermined effect in the feature unit 065AK, and a reach effect of Super Reach A to Super Reach C. It may be a predetermined effect in 079SG. Then, in the first period of the predetermined effect, the effect moving speed in which the progress speed of the effect is the first speed can be displayed on the image display device 5 as the display means, and the predetermined effect after the first period can be displayed. In the second period, it is possible to display the effect moving image, which is the second speed in which the progress speed of the effect is slower than the first speed, on the image display device 5, and the effect sound corresponding to the predetermined effect is the first period. In any of the second period and the second period, the speed related to the effect sound may be output at the same speed by the speakers 8L and 8R as the sound output means. According to this, the progress speed of the production video of the predetermined production changes between the first period and the second period, but the speed related to the production sound does not change between the first period and the second period. It is possible to prevent giving a feeling of strangeness.

The present invention is not limited to those described above. Further, the specific configuration is included in the present invention even if there are changes or additions within a range that does not deviate from the gist of the present invention, in addition to the above-described embodiment and other embodiment examples described later.

Further, all or a part of the configurations shown in the above-described embodiment and each modification, and the configurations shown in the following embodiment and each modification may be arbitrarily combined.

It should be noted that the above-described embodiment and the following-described embodiment disclosed this time are exemplary in all respects and are not considered to be restrictive. The scope of the present invention is shown by the scope of claims rather than the above description and the description below, and is intended to include all modifications within the meaning and scope equivalent to the scope of claims.

In addition to the gaming machine of the present invention, a gaming machine capable of performing variable display and controlling to an advantageous state advantageous to the player when a specific display result is displayed as the variable display result (for example, pachinko gaming machine 1 or the like). ) And
A game control means (for example, CPU 103) that controls the progress of the game,
It is provided with an effect executing means (for example, an effect control CPU 120 that executes an effect based on an effect control command) capable of executing an effect based on information from the game control means.
The game control means
Determining means for determining the advantageous state (for example, CPU 103 that executes the process of step S110) and
A determination means (for example, CPU 103 that executes the process of step S213) for determining that the advantageous state is obtained before the determination of the determination means, and
A state control means that can control a special state in which variable display is more likely to be executed than in a normal state (for example, CPU 103 that executes the process of step 059AKS025) and
Information transmitting means (for example, effect control) capable of transmitting a plurality of types of information including determination result information that can identify that the determination means is controlled to the advantageous state when the determination means is determined to be in the advantageous state. CPU 103 that sends commands, etc.), including
When a special display result different from the specific display result is displayed as the variable display result in the normal state, the state control means controls from the normal state to the special state based on the special display result ( For example, the process of step 059AKS025 is executed),
The determination means can determine that the state control means will be in the special state before the state control means controls the special state (for example, the process of step 059AKS001 is executed).
The information transmitting means can transmit special information that can be specified to be controlled to the special state when the determination means determines to be in the special state (for example, designating a display result of "loss (time reduction)"). Commands can be sent, etc.),
The effect executing means is
When the determination result information is received, the look-ahead effect can be executed based on the determination result information (for example, the process of step S161 can be executed).
When the determination result information is received after receiving the special information, the execution of the look-ahead effect based on the determination result information is restricted (for example, when it is determined Yes in step 059AKS082, the processing of step 059AKS084 and step S1304). Etc.),
Moreover,
A group effect execution means (for example, a group advance notice execution process shown in FIG. 51, 6 shown in FIGS. 98 to 104) for executing a group effect (for example, a group advance notice effect) for displaying an image in which a plurality of characters progress as a group. With crowd notice production)
The display period of the image in the group effect includes the first display period, the second display period, and the third display period (for example, the period shown in FIG. 63).
The first display period is a period from the start of the display of the first character in the group effect until the new display of the character is performed and the display of any of the characters ends first (for example, the figure). 98 (a23) to the period shown in FIG. 100 (a30)),
The second display period is a period longer than the first display period, and is a period in which a new display of the character is performed and the display of the displayed character is terminated (for example, FIG. 101 (a31) to the period shown in FIG. 102 (a36)),
The third display period is a period in which the display of the displayed character continues without displaying a new character (for example, FIGS. 103 (a37) to 104 (a42)). Period shown),
In the first display period, from the first situation in which a part of the first displayed character is displayed, a part of the first displayed character is displayed more than in the first situation and second. A gaming machine in which a part of the displayed character is displayed in the second situation (for example, the example shown in FIGS. 61 and 98) can be mentioned.

According to such a configuration, it is possible to perform control according to the game state when the special display result is displayed, and it is possible to improve the game interest. Further, the group effect can be more preferably performed.

That is, the effect executing means limits the execution of the look-ahead effect based on the determination result information when the determination result information is received after receiving the special information that can be specified to be controlled in the special state. For example, it is known in advance by executing the look-ahead effect that the judgment result information judged after being controlled is the judgment result that the special state ends, and the game interest is rather deteriorated by the look-ahead effect. In addition to avoiding such a situation, in the first display period, a part of the first displayed character is displayed more than the first situation from the first situation in which a part of the first displayed character is displayed. And after the second situation where a part of the second displayed character is displayed, a new display of the character is displayed and displayed in the second display period longer than the first display period. Since the state in which the display of the existing character is finished continues, it is possible to surely inform the player that it is a group production by eliminating the situation where only a single character is displayed, and the start and continuation of the group production can be started. It can be carried out favorably to improve the interest of group production. That is, it is possible to provide a gaming machine that does not easily reduce the interest of the game when installed in the amusement park and can improve the player's motivation to play.

Further, as the look-ahead effect, a look-ahead effect suggesting that the group effect is executed in the fluctuation of the lead may be executed. By doing so, not only the jackpot expectation but also the production can be noticed, and the interest will be improved.

Further, as another example of a gaming machine capable of improving the interest, a group effect executing means (for example, a group effect execution means) for executing a group effect (for example, a group notice effect) for displaying an image in which a plurality of characters progress in a group is performed. , The group notice execution process shown in FIG. 51, and the 6-person group notice effect shown in FIGS. 98 to 104).
The display period of the image in the group effect includes the first display period, the second display period, and the third display period (for example, the period shown in FIG. 63).
The first display period is a period from the start of the display of the first character in the group effect until the new display of the character is performed and the display of any of the characters ends first (for example, the figure). 98 (a23) to the period shown in FIG. 100 (a30)),
The second display period is a period longer than the first display period, and is a period in which a new display of the character is performed and the display of the displayed character is terminated (for example, FIG. 101 (a31) to the period shown in FIG. 102 (a36)),
The third display period is a period in which the display of the displayed character continues without displaying a new character (for example, FIGS. 103 (a37) to 104 (a42)). Period shown),
In the first display period, from the first situation in which a part of the first displayed character is displayed, a part of the first displayed character is displayed more than in the first situation and second. A gaming machine in which a part of the displayed character is displayed in the second situation (for example, the example shown in FIGS. 61 and 98) can be mentioned. A form example of this gaming machine will be described below as another form example.

(Example of other forms)

[Configuration of pachinko machines, etc.]
15 and 16 are front views of the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment. 15 and 16 show the layout of the main members of the pachinko gaming machine 1, which is an example of the gaming machine. The pachinko gaming machine 1, which is an example of a gaming machine, is roughly divided into a gaming board (gauge board) 2 constituting the game board surface and a gaming machine frame (underframe) 3 for supporting and fixing the game board 2. There is. A game area is formed on the game board 2, and a game ball as a game medium is launched from a predetermined ball launching device and is driven into the game area.

In the pachinko gaming machine 1, the game is performed by variably displaying a special symbol. The "variable display" of a special symbol is, for example, to display a plurality of types of special symbols in a variable manner (the same applies to other symbols described later). Fluctuations include update display of a plurality of symbols, scroll display of a plurality of symbols, deformation of one or more symbols, enlargement / reduction of one or more symbols, and the like. When the special symbol or the ordinary symbol described later is changed, a plurality of types of special symbols or ordinary symbols are updated and displayed. In the variation of the decorative symbol described later, a plurality of types of decorative symbols are scrolled or updated, and one or more decorative symbols are deformed or enlarged / reduced. The variation also includes a mode in which a certain symbol is blinked and displayed. At the end of the variable display, a predetermined special symbol is stopped and displayed (also referred to as derivation or derivation display) as a display result (the same applies to the variable display of other symbols described later). The variable display may be expressed as a variable display or a variable display.

Two types of special symbols are provided as the special symbols that are variably displayed in the pachinko gaming machine 1. For example, one special symbol is also referred to as a "first special symbol" or "first special symbol", and the other special symbol is also referred to as a "second special symbol" or "second special symbol". Further, the special figure game using the first special figure is also referred to as a "first special figure game", and the special figure game using the second special figure is also referred to as a "second special figure game".

An image display device 5 is provided near the center of the game area on the game board 2. The image display device 5 is composed of, for example, an LCD (liquid crystal display), an organic EL (Electro Luminescence), or the like, and displays various effects images. The image display device 5 may be composed of a projector and a screen. Various effects images are displayed on the image display device 5.

For example, on the screen of the image display device 5, in synchronization with the first special figure game and the second special figure game, decorative symbols (such as symbols indicating numbers) as a plurality of types of decorative identification information different from the special symbols are displayed. Is variable display. Here, in synchronization with the first special figure game or the second special figure game, the decorative symbols are variably displayed (for example, scroll display in the vertical direction) in each of the "left", "middle", and "right" decorative symbol display areas. Update display). It should be noted that the special figure game and the variable display of the decorative pattern that are executed in synchronization are also collectively referred to as simply variable display.

On the screen of the image display device 5, a display area for displaying a hold display corresponding to the variable display in which execution is suspended or an active display corresponding to the variable display being executed may be provided. Hold display and active display are also collectively referred to as variable display compatible display corresponding to variable display.

The number of variable displays on hold is also called the number of stored items on hold. The number of reserved storage corresponding to the first special figure game is also referred to as the first reserved storage number, and the number of reserved storage corresponding to the second special figure game is also referred to as the second reserved storage number. The total of the first reserved storage number and the second reserved storage number is also referred to as the total reserved storage number.

On the game board 2 on the left side of the image display device 5, a character named Yumemu-chan, who appears in the production executed by the pachinko game machine 1, is drawn. Yumemu-chan is the main character who appears in the content used in the pachinko machine 1. Further, on the lower right game board 2 of the image display device 5, a character named Jam who appears in the production executed by the pachinko game machine 1 is drawn. Jam-chan is a character that appears in the content used in the pachinko gaming machine 1. Since Yumemu-chan is the main character, it is the most important of all the characters, and appears more frequently (number of times) in the production than other characters including Jam-chan. In addition, Jam is the most important character other than Yumemu-chan, who is the main character, and appears more frequently (number of times) in the production than other characters other than Yumemu-chan. In addition, a character with a higher priority than other characters, such as Yumemu-chan and Jam-chan, is the character that appears first in the scene of selecting a character, the character that is placed in the most prominent position, or the character that is fully selected. It may be the character located at the highest rank among them.

A winning ball device 6A is provided below the image display device 5, and a variable winning ball device 6B is provided on the right side of the winning ball device 6A.

The winning ball device 6A forms a first starting winning opening that is always kept in a constant open state in which a game ball can enter by, for example, a predetermined ball receiving member. When a game ball enters the first start winning opening, a predetermined number (for example, three) of prize balls may be paid out and the first special figure game may be started.

The variable winning ball device 6B (ordinary electric accessory) forms a second starting winning opening (electric chew) that is changed between a closed state and an open state by a solenoid 81 (see FIG. 22). The variable winning ball device 6B includes, for example, an electric tulip-shaped accessory having a pair of movable wing pieces, and the movable wing pieces are in the vertical position when the solenoid 81 is in the off state, so that the second starting winning opening is used. It is in a closed state where the game ball does not enter (also referred to as the second start winning opening is in a closed state). On the other hand, the variable-sweep wing device 6B is in an open state in which the game ball can enter the second start winning opening because the movable wing piece is in the tilted position when the solenoid 81 is on (second start). It is also said that the winning opening is open). When a game ball enters the second start winning opening, a predetermined number (for example, three) of prize balls may be paid out and the second special figure game may be started. The variable winning ball device 6B may be any as long as it changes between the closed state and the open state, and is not limited to the one provided with the electric tulip type accessory.

A predetermined ball receiving member always keeps a constant open state at a predetermined position of the game board 2 (in the example shown in FIG. 15, three places on the lower left of the game area and one place on the upper side of the variable winning ball device 6B). A general winning opening 10 is provided. In this case, when entering any of the general winning openings 10, a predetermined number (for example, 10) of game balls are paid out as prize balls.

A special variable winning ball device 7A having a large winning opening is provided between the winning ball device 6A and the variable winning ball device 6B. The special variable winning ball device 7A includes a large winning opening door that is opened and closed by a solenoid 82 (see FIG. 22), and the large winning opening as a specific area that changes between an open state and a closed state depending on the large winning opening door (see FIG. 22). Hereinafter, it is usually referred to as a grand prize opening).

For example, the special variable winning ball device 7A includes a game board 2 located on the back side of the pachinko game machine 1 and a glass door frame 3a (see FIG. 17) located on the front side (player side) of the pachinko game machine 1. A large winning opening door is provided in the space between the pachinko machines, and this large winning opening door slides open and closes horizontally between the back side and the front side of the pachinko gaming machine 1 to open and close the normal large winning opening with a gaming ball. The route to is opened. Specifically, when the solenoid 82 is in the off state, the large winning opening door slides to the front side of the pachinko gaming machine 1 to close the normal large winning opening, and the game ball enters the normal large winning opening. You will not be able to (pass). On the other hand, when the solenoid 82 is in the ON state, the large winning opening door slides to the back side of the pachinko gaming machine 1 to open the normal large winning opening, and the game ball can easily enter the normal large winning opening. ..

The game ball that has entered the normal large winning opening is detected by the count switch 23 by passing through the area provided inside the normal large winning opening. When the game balls are detected by the count switch 23 (see FIG. 22), the game balls corresponding to the detection (for example, 10 balls for each detection) are paid out to the player as prize balls. When a game ball enters the normal large winning opening, more prize balls are paid out than when the game ball enters, for example, the first starting winning opening, the second starting winning opening, and the general winning opening 10. Further, when the number of game balls detected by the count switch 23 reaches the upper limit number (for example, 10), one round is completed and the normal large winning opening is controlled to be closed.

In the pachinko gaming machine 1, a V variable winning ball device 7B is provided next to the special variable winning ball device 7A. The V variable winning ball device 7B includes a large winning opening door that is opened and closed by a solenoid 83 (see FIG. 22), and the large winning opening that changes between an open state and a closed state depending on the large winning opening door (hereinafter referred to as V large). Form a winning opening).

For example, the special variable winning ball device 7B is provided with a large winning opening door in the space between the game board 2 and the glass door frame 3a, and the large winning opening door is located on the back side and the front side of the pachinko gaming machine 1. By sliding open and close in the horizontal direction between the spaces, the path to the V-large winning opening by the game ball is opened. Specifically, when the solenoid 83 is in the off state, the large winning opening door slides to the front side of the pachinko gaming machine 1 to close the V large winning opening, and the game ball enters the V large winning opening. You will not be able to (pass). On the other hand, when the solenoid 83 is in the ON state, the large winning opening door slides to the back side of the pachinko gaming machine 1 to open the V large winning opening, and the game ball can easily enter the V large winning opening. ..

The game ball that has entered the V-large winning opening is detected by the V-winning switch 24 (see FIG. 22) by passing through a specific area (also referred to as a V-winning area) provided inside the V-large winning opening. When the game ball is detected by the V winning switch 24, the game state is controlled to the probability change state. That is, in the present embodiment, the V prize is generated on the condition that the game ball enters the V big prize opening during the round of the big hit game state, and the game state is controlled to the probable change state. .. In addition, the normal large winning opening and the V large winning opening are collectively referred to as a large winning opening. The big prize opening is also called an attacker.

The entry of a game ball into each winning opening including the general winning opening 10 is also referred to as "winning". In particular, winning a prize at the starting opening (first starting winning opening, second starting winning opening) is also referred to as a starting winning.

In the pachinko gaming machine 1, variable display of a normal symbol as a plurality of types of ordinary identification information different from the special symbol is performed. Such a variable display of a normal pattern is also called a normal figure game.

A passing gate 41 through which a game ball can pass is provided on the right side of the image display device 5. Based on the fact that the game ball has passed through the passing gate 41, the normal drawing game is executed.

In addition to the above configuration, the surface of the game board 2 is provided with a windmill for changing the flow direction and speed of the game ball and a large number of obstacle nails. At the bottom of the game area, there is an out opening for taking in a game ball that has not entered any of the winning openings.

Speakers 8L and 8R for reproducing and outputting sound effects and the like are provided at the upper left and right positions of the gaming machine frame 3.

At a predetermined position of the game board 2 (upper position of the image display device 5 in FIG. 15), a movable body 32 that operates according to the effect is provided. The movable body 32 is configured such that the member with the letters "POWERFUL" is located on the front side of the member with the letters "2". As a result, the characters "POWERFUL2" are formed. "POWERFUL2" may be the model name of the pachinko gaming machine 1, or may be a name representing the content used in the pachinko gaming machine 1 (for example, the title of an animation or the name of a singer). In addition, the characters attached to the movable body 32 are the names of the main character appearing in the content used in the pachinko gaming machine 1 and the character with the next highest priority after the main character (for example, "dream" indicating the main character Yumemu-chan. You may show a dream "). In the present embodiment, the model name (powerful 2) of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is shown on the movable body 32.

In the present embodiment, the movable body 32 can move between the position above the image display device 5 as shown in FIG. 15 and the position over the front surface of the image display device 5 as shown in FIG. .. Specifically, as for the movable body 32, among the members with the letters "POWERFUL" and the members with the letters "2", only the members with the letters "POWERFUL" are shown in FIG. By falling from the position shown in FIG. 2, the image is stopped at a position that covers the front surface of the image display device 5 as shown in FIG. The movable body 32 is also referred to as an accessory.

At the lower right position of the gaming machine frame 3, a ball striking operation handle (operation knob) 30 operated by a player or the like to launch the game ball toward the game area by the striking ball launching device is provided.

At a predetermined position of the gaming machine frame 3 below the gaming area, the gaming balls paid out as prize balls and the gaming balls rented by the predetermined ball lending machine are held (stored) so as to be able to be supplied to the hitting ball launching device. ) A hitting ball supply plate (upper plate) is provided. In addition to the upper plate, the gaming machine frame 3 may be provided with a payout portion (ball hitting plate) on which prize balls are paid out when the upper plate is full.

A stick controller 31A that can be gripped and tilted by the player is attached to a predetermined position of the gaming machine frame 3 below the gaming area. The stick controller 31A is provided with a trigger button that can be pressed (or pressed) by the player. The operation on the stick controller 31A is detected by the controller sensor unit 35A (see FIG. 22).

A push button 31B is provided at a predetermined position of the gaming machine frame 3 below the gaming area so that the player can perform a predetermined instruction operation by a pressing operation or the like. The operation on the push button 31B is detected by the push sensor 35B (see FIG. 22).

In the pachinko gaming machine 1, stick controller 31A and push button 31B are provided as detection means for detecting the movement (operation, etc.) of the player, but detection means other than these may be provided.

The pachinko gaming machine 1 includes a special drawing LED board 20 at the lower left of the gaming board 2. The special figure LED board 20 is an LED board that is controlled by the game control microcomputer 100 and notifies the first reserved storage number, the second reserved storage number, and the like by turning on / blinking / turning off the LED. In the special figure LED board 20, the type of the special symbol (first special figure) in the first special figure game and the special symbol in the second special figure game are determined by the combination of lighting modes such as lighting / blinking / extinguishing by a plurality of LEDs. Indicates the type of (2nd special figure). For example, as shown in FIG. 19A, which will be described later, in the special figure LED board 20, depending on the combination of lighting modes such as lighting / blinking / extinguishing by a plurality of LEDs provided in the special figure 1 variable display unit 21. The type of the first special figure is represented, and the type of the second special figure is represented by a combination of lighting modes such as lighting / blinking / extinguishing by a plurality of LEDs provided in the variable display unit 22 of the special drawing 2.

Further, the pachinko gaming machine 1 includes a fourth symbol unit 50 at the lower left of the image display device 5. The fourth symbol unit 50 is an LED board that is controlled by the effect control CPU 120 and notifies the fluctuation of the special figure, the number of reserved memories, the right-handed display, and the like by turning on / blinking / turning off the LED. In the fourth symbol unit 50, the type of the special symbol (first special symbol) in the first special symbol game and the special symbol in the second special symbol game are determined by the combination of lighting modes such as lighting / blinking / extinguishing by a plurality of LEDs. Indicates the type of (2nd special figure). For example, as shown in FIG. 19B, which will be described later, in the fourth symbol unit 50, depending on the combination of lighting modes such as lighting / blinking / extinguishing by a plurality of LEDs provided in the special figure 1 variable display unit 53, The type of the first special figure is represented, and the type of the second special figure is represented by a combination of lighting modes such as lighting / blinking / extinguishing by a plurality of LEDs provided in the variable display unit 54 of the special figure 2.

The pachinko gaming machine 1 includes a plurality of lamps in the gaming board 2 and the gaming machine frame 3. Specifically, the pachinko gaming machine 1 includes an accessory lamp 9A provided on the movable body 32, a board left lamp 9B provided on the left side of the game board 2, and a board provided above the game board 2. The lamp 9C, the attacker lamp 9E provided near the special variable winning ball device 7B, the V attacker lamp 9F provided near the special variable winning ball device 7A, and the V large winning opening are opened to win the V prize. A V lamp 9G for notifying that a round of a big hit game state that can be generated and a V winning has occurred, an electric chew lamp 9H provided near the variable winning ball device 6B, and a stick controller 31A are provided. The stick controller lamp 9J, the trigger button lamp 9K provided on the push button 31B, the frame left lamp 9L provided on the left side of the gaming machine frame 3, and the frame right provided on the right side of the gaming machine frame 3. It is equipped with a lamp 9R. The V lamp may notify that a big hit has occurred.

The accessory lamp 9A is composed of a plurality of lamps such as the accessory lamps 9A1 to 9A4. Specifically, the member with the letter "POWERFUL" included in the movable body 32 is divided into four parts, the accessory lamp 9A1 is behind the "P" and "O" parts, and the accessory lamp 9A2 is. The accessory lamps 9A3 are arranged on the back side of the "W" and "E" parts, the accessory lamps 9A3 are arranged on the back side of the "R" and "F" parts, and the accessory lamps 9A4 are arranged on the back side of the "U" and "L" parts. There is. As a result, the accessory lamps 9A1 to 9A4 are lit (light-emitting) on the back side of the member with the letters "POWERFUL", so that "POWERFUL" is lit (light-emitting).

The panel left lamp 9B is composed of a plurality of lamps such as the panel left lamps 9B1 to 9B5. On the left side of the game board 2, the main character (for example, "Yumemu" indicating Yumemu-chan, the main character) is drawn in the content used in the pachinko game machine 1, and the left lamps 9B1 to 9B5 are the main characters. Are arranged on the back side of the part of the game board 2 on which is drawn. As a result, the left lamps 9B1 to 9B5 light up (light up) behind the part of the game board 2 on which the hero is drawn, so that the part of the game board 2 on which the hero is drawn lights up (lights up). ing.

As shown in FIG. 2, the on-board lamp 9C is composed of a plurality of lamps such as the on-board lamps 9C1 to 9C13. On the upper side of the game board 2, the board lamps 9C1 to 9C5, the board lamps 9C6 to 9C8, and the board lamps 9C9 to 9C13 are arranged on the back side of the game board 2, respectively, divided into three areas, left, middle, and right. Has been done. The part of the game board 2 provided with the board lamps 9C1 to 9C5, the board lamps 9C6 to 9C8, and the board lamps 9C9 to 9C13 is formed of a transparent member capable of transmitting light, whereby the board lamp is formed. When the 9C1 to 9C13 are lit (light-emitting) on the back side of the upper portion of the game board 2, the upper portion of the game board 2 is lit (light-emitting) in white or red.

The attacker lamp 9E is arranged on the back side of the game board 2 in the vicinity of the special variable winning ball device 7B. As a result, the attacker lamp 9E lights up (lights up) on the back side of the game board 2, so that the vicinity of the special variable winning ball device 7B lights up (lights up). Further, the V attacker lamp 9F is arranged on the back side of the game board 2 in the vicinity of the special variable winning ball device 7A. As a result, the V attacker lamp 9F lights up (lights up) on the back side of the game board 2, so that the vicinity of the special variable winning ball device 7A lights up (lights up).

The V lamp 9G is arranged on the back side of the part of the game board 2 marked with "V". As a result, the V lamp 9G lights up (lights up) behind the part of the game board 2 marked with "V", so that the part of the game board 2 marked with "V" lights up (lights up). It has become. The electric chew lamp 9H is arranged in the vicinity of the variable winning ball device 6B, and by lighting (light emitting), the vicinity of the special variable winning ball device 7B is lit (light emitting).

The stick controller lamp 9J is provided on the stick controller 31A, and by lighting (light emitting), the stick controller 31A is lit (light emitting). The trigger button lamp 9K is provided on the push button 31B, and by lighting (light emitting), the push button 31B is lit (light emitting).

The frame left lamp 9L is composed of a plurality of lamps 9L1 to 9L12 (described later in FIG. 18) provided on the left side of the gaming machine frame 3, and each lamp is lit (light emitting) for the gaming machine. The left side of the frame 3 is lit (light emitting). The frame right lamp 9R is composed of a plurality of lamps 9R2 to 9L12 (described later in FIG. 18) provided on the right side of the gaming machine frame 3, and each lamp is lit (light emitting) for the gaming machine. The right side of the frame 3 is lit (light emitting). The frame left lamp 9L and the frame right lamp 9R are also collectively referred to as a frame lamp. In addition, the accessory lamp 9A, the board left lamp 9B, the board lamp 9C, the attacker lamp 9E, the V attacker lamp 9F, the V lamp 9G, the electric chew lamp 9H, the stick controller lamp 9J, the trigger button lamp 9K, the frame left lamp 9L, And the frame right lamp 9R are also collectively referred to as a game effect lamp 9.

FIG. 17 is a rear perspective view of the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the present embodiment. On the back surface of the pachinko gaming machine 1, a main board 11 housed in a board case 201 is mounted. The main board 11 is provided with a setting key 51 and a setting changeover switch 52. The setting key 51 functions as a lock switch for switching to a setting change state or a setting confirmation state. The setting changeover switch 52 functions as a setting switch for changing set values such as a jackpot winning probability and a ball output rate in a setting change state. The setting key 51 and the setting changeover switch 52 may be attached to the outside of the main board 11 such as a predetermined position of the power supply board 17 (see FIG. 22).

A display monitor 29 is arranged in the center of the back surface of the main board 11, and a display changeover switch 30 (see FIG. 22) is arranged on the side of the display monitor 29. The display monitor 29 may be configured by using, for example, a 7-segment LED display device. The display monitor 29 and the display changeover switch 30 are arranged in front of the main board 11 when the back side of the game board 2 is visually recognized with the gaming machine frame 3 open.

The display monitor 29 can display winning information such as a continuous ratio, a combination ratio, and a base. The ream ratio is the ratio of the number of prize balls by winning a prize to the big prize opening (attacker) to the total number of prize balls. The role ratio is the ratio of the number of prize balls by winning the second starting winning opening (Denchu) and the number of winning balls by winning the big winning opening (attacker) to the total number of prize balls. The base is the ratio of the total number of prize balls to the number of game balls launched. The display monitor 29 can display the set value in the pachinko gaming machine 1 when the setting is changed or the setting is confirmed. The display monitor 29 may be capable of displaying a setting value or the like to be changed or confirmed when the setting is changed or the setting is confirmed.

The setting key 51 and the setting changeover switch 52 cannot be operated from the front side of the pachinko gaming machine 1 when the gaming machine frame 3 is closed. A glass door frame 3a having a glass window is rotatably provided in the game machine frame 3, and the game area can be opened and closed by the glass door frame 3a. When the glass door frame 3a is closed, the game area can be seen through the glass window.

In the pachinko gaming machine 1, a security cover 50A is attached to the right end of an outer frame 1a formed in a vertically long square frame shape. When the gaming machine frame 3 is closed, the security cover 50A covers the right side portion of the board case 201 including the setting key 51 and the setting changeover switch 52 from the back surface side. The security cover 50A is a substantially L-shaped member including a short piece 50Aa and a long piece 50Ab, and may be made of a transparent synthetic resin.

FIG. 18 is a diagram for explaining a frame lamp. The frame left lamp 9L has 12 lamp groups of the frame left lamps 9L1 to 9L12 in a counterclockwise direction from above to below the gaming machine frame 3. The frame left lamp 9L emits light near the left side of the gaming machine frame 3 by lighting or blinking each of a plurality of lamps (12 lamps in this example). On the other hand, the frame right lamp 9R has 11 lamp groups of the frame left lamps 9R2 to 9L12 clockwise from the upper side to the lower side of the gaming machine frame 3. The frame right lamp 9R emits light near the right side of the gaming machine frame 3 by lighting or blinking a plurality of lamps (11 lamps in this example).

FIG. 19 is a diagram for explaining the special figure LED substrate 20 and the fourth symbol unit 50. As shown in FIG. 19A, the special figure LED substrate 20 has a special figure 1 variable display unit 21 showing a variable display of the first special figure and a special figure 2 variable display unit showing a variable display of the second special figure. 22, the special figure 1 storage display unit 23 showing the first reserved storage number corresponding to the first special figure game, and the special figure 2 storage display unit 24 showing the second reserved storage number corresponding to the second special figure game. , The normal figure storage display unit 25 showing the number of stored normal figures, the normal figure display unit 26 showing the variable display of the normal symbol, the right-handed display unit 30 for urging the player to hit right, and the presence or absence of a probability change state. A probability variation display unit 28 indicating the presence or absence of a time reduction state, a time reduction display unit 29 indicating the presence or absence of a time reduction state, and a round display unit 27 indicating the number of rounds of a big hit are provided. Each display unit can notify the player of the presence or absence of variable display of a special figure or a normal symbol, the result, the current game state, the number of holds, etc. by lighting or blinking by a lighting means such as an LED. can.

For example, the special figure 1 variable display unit 21 determines whether or not the variable display of the first special symbol in the first special figure game is performed, and the stop symbol of the first special symbol determined by the result of the variable display. The player is notified by turning on / blinking / turning off by a lighting means such as an LED. The special figure 2 variable display unit 22 sets the stop symbol of the second special symbol determined by whether or not the second special symbol is variablely displayed in the second special figure game and the result of the variable display, such as an LED. The player is notified by lighting / blinking / extinguishing by the lighting means of.

Further, the special figure LED substrate 20 can urge the player to strike right by turning on / blinking / extinguishing the right-handed display unit 30 by a lighting means such as an LED. In the present embodiment, when urging the player to hit right, when the lighting means such as the LED in the right-handed display unit 30 lights up (lights up) and does not urge the player to hit right. That is, when urging the player to strike left, the lighting means such as the LED on the right-handed display unit 30 is turned off. After the symbol is confirmed, the CPU 103 transmits a right-handed display lighting designation command to the effect control CPU 120, lights the right-handed display unit 30, and after the symbol is confirmed by the final fluctuation in the high base state before returning to the normal state. , The right-handed display / off designation command is transmitted to the effect control CPU 120, and the right-handed display unit 30 is turned off. When the pachinko gaming machine 1 has a big hit or a small hit that is not controlled by the high base after the big hit game state, the effect control CPU 120 may turn on the right-handed display unit 30 only during the big hit round. In this case, the CPU 103 transmits a jackpot end designation command to the effect control CPU 120, and turns off the right-handed display unit 30.

Here, right-handed means firing a game ball toward the second flow path of the first flow path and the second flow path through which the game medium can flow in the game area provided in the game board 2. The hitting operation handle 30 is operated (how to hit) in this way. The first flow path is, for example, a path passing through the left region of the game area, and the first starting winning opening formed in the winning ball device 6A exists ahead of the path, while the variable winning ball device is present. This is a route in which the second starting winning opening formed in 6B does not exist. The second flow-down route is, for example, a route that passes through the area on the right side of the game area, and beyond that, a second start winning opening or a large winning opening (usually a large winning opening) formed in the variable winning ball device 6B. , V Grand Prize) is the route that exists. When the player launches the game ball toward the first flow path, the game ball flows through the first flow path toward the first start winning opening. When the player launches the game ball toward the second flow path, the game ball passes through the second flow path to the second start winning opening and the large winning opening (normal large winning opening, V large winning opening). Flow into.

In the present embodiment, in the big hit game after the big hit occurs and in the game state (time saving state or probability change state) after the big hit game, the player is provided on the right side of the game area by hitting right. The game ball is made to enter the second starting winning opening and the large winning opening, and during that time, the right-handed display unit 30 prompts the player to make a right-handed hit. By hitting right while the display prompting the player to hit right is displayed, the player enters the game ball into the second start winning opening and pays out a predetermined number (for example, 3) of prize balls. The right to the second special figure game can be obtained, or a predetermined number (for example, 10) of prize balls can be paid out by inserting a game ball into the normal large prize opening. Further, as will be described in detail later, the V-large winning opening is opened during the round of the probabilistic jackpot, but the player can make a right-handed hit while the display prompting the player to make a right-handed hit. It is also possible to obtain the right to enter the game ball into the winning opening and control it to a probabilistic state. For this reason, the player can have an overall advantage by hitting right while the display prompting him to hit right is being performed. It should be noted that, unlike right-handed hitting, operating the hitting ball operation handle 30 so as to launch the game ball toward the first opposite field path (hit method) is also referred to as left-handed hitting.

As shown in FIG. 19B, the fourth symbol unit 50 has a special figure 1 storage display unit 51 indicating a first reserved storage number corresponding to the first special figure game, and a second special figure game corresponding to the second special figure game. 2 Special figure 2 storage display unit 52 showing the number of reserved storage, special figure 1 variable display unit 53 showing the variable display status or display result of the first special figure, and the variable display status or display result of the second special figure. A special figure 2 variable display unit 54 showing the above, and a right-handed display unit 55 for urging the player to hit the right side are provided. Each display unit can notify the player of the presence / absence of variable display of the special figure, the number of holdings, the right-handed instruction, and the like by turning on / blinking / extinguishing by a lighting means such as an LED.

For example, the special figure 1 variable display unit 53 determines whether or not the variable display of the first special symbol in the first special figure game is performed, and the stop symbol of the first special symbol determined by the result of the variable display. The player is notified by turning on / blinking / turning off by a lighting means such as an LED. The special figure 2 variable display unit 54 sets a stop symbol of the second special symbol determined by whether or not the second special symbol is variablely displayed in the second special figure game and the result of the variable display, such as an LED. The player is notified by lighting / blinking / extinguishing by the lighting means of.

In the following, the variation display (variable display) of the first special symbol indicates that the variation of the stop symbol of the first special symbol is represented by the lighting means such as the LED in the special diagram 1 variable display unit 21 and the special diagram 1 variable display unit 53. Also called. In addition, the fact that the change of the stop symbol of the second special symbol is represented by the lighting means such as the LED in the special figure 2 variable display unit 22 and the special figure 2 variable display unit 54 is also referred to as the variation display (variable display) of the second special symbol. Refer to.

Further, in the present embodiment, when urging the player to strike right, the lighting means such as the LED in the right-handed display unit 55 of the fourth symbol unit 50 lights (lights up) and strikes right. When not prompting the player, that is, when prompting the player to strike left, the lighting means such as the LED on the right-handed display unit 55 is turned off. After the symbol is confirmed, the effect control CPU 120 lights the right-handed display unit 55 based on the reception of the right-handed display lighting designation command from the CPU 103, and the symbol is changed by the final fluctuation in the high base state before returning to the normal state. After confirmation, the right-handed display unit 55 is turned off based on the reception of the right-handed display / off designation command from the CPU 103. When the pachinko gaming machine 1 has a big hit or a small hit that is not controlled by the high base after the big hit game state, the effect control CPU 120 may turn on the right-handed display unit 55 only during the big hit round. In this case, the effect control CPU 120 turns off the right-handed display unit 55 based on receiving the jackpot end designation command from the CPU 103.

FIG. 20 is a view looking through between the game board 2 and the image display device 5. As shown in FIG. 1, the game board 2 is fixed so as to cover the edge of the screen of the image display device 5. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 20, when looking between the game board 2 and the image display device 5, the edge of the screen of the image display device 5 located on the back side of the game board 2 can be visually recognized. ..

FIG. 21 is a diagram for explaining a screen display mode in the image display device 5. Most of the display area of the image display device 5 displays an image such as a variable display of a decorative pattern or a reach effect. Specifically, in the center of the screen of the image display device 5, in synchronization with the first special figure game and the second special figure game, a decorative symbol (a symbol indicating a number or the like) as a plurality of types of decorative identification information different from the special symbol Etc.) are variablely displayed. Here, in synchronization with the first special figure game or the second special figure game, the decorative symbols are variably displayed (for example, up and down) in the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of "left", "middle", and "right". Direction scroll display and update display). It should be noted that the special figure game and the variable display of the decorative pattern that are executed in synchronization are also collectively referred to as simply variable display.

At the lower end of the screen of the image display device 5, the first hold storage display area 5D capable of displaying the first hold storage number by the number of circular hold displays and the second hold storage number by the number of circular hold displays are displayed. A displayable second hold storage display area 5U and an active display area 5A for displaying the hold display corresponding to the variable display being executed as the active display are provided.

At the upper right end of the screen of the image display device 5, it is displayed that the special symbol is being variably displayed, and the fourth symbol 5J indicating the first reserved storage number and the second reserved storage number is displayed. At the left end of the screen of the image display device 5, a small symbol 5M having a size smaller than that of each decorative symbol is displayed. The small symbols are displayed in the "left" decorative symbol display area 5L, the "middle" decorative symbol display area 5C, and the "right" decorative symbol display area 5R. The symbols corresponding to each of the decorative symbols are arranged vertically. Further, the small symbol 5M is also a symbol that is not hidden during the variable display and is always displayed on the screen of the image display device 5.

As shown in FIG. 21, a decorative symbol is arranged in the center of the screen of the image display device 5, and the small symbol 5M has a size smaller than the decorative symbol at the left end of the screen of the image display device 5. Have been placed. Therefore, the visibility of the small symbol 5M is lower than the visibility of the decorative symbol.

As shown in FIG. 21A, the shape of the screen of the image display device 5 is a quadrangle or a substantially quadrangle, but as described above, the game board 2 covers the edge of the screen of the image display device 5. It is fixed so as to cover it. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 21B, when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is viewed from the front, a part (particularly the end) of the screen of the image display device 5 cannot be visually recognized or is difficult to be visually recognized by the gaming board 2. It has become.

[Board configuration]
FIG. 22 is a diagram for explaining various substrates and the like mounted on the pachinko gaming machine 1. As shown in FIG. 22, the pachinko gaming machine 1 is equipped with a main board 11, an effect control board 12, a voice control board 13, a lamp control board 14, a relay board 15, and the like. In addition, various boards such as a payout control board, an information terminal board, and a launch control board are arranged on the back surface of the pachinko gaming machine 1. Further, a power supply board 17 connected to the power supply switch 91 is also mounted. Various control boards are configured so that not only electronic circuit boards such as printed wiring boards on which a conductor pattern is formed and electric components can be mounted, but also electric components are mounted on the electronic circuit boards to realize specific electrical functions. It is a concept including the electronic circuit mounting board.

In the pachinko gaming machine 1, electric power from an AC power source such as AC100V in an external power source such as a commercial power source can be supplied to electrical components including various control boards such as a main board 11 and an effect control board 12 by a power supply board 17. The power supply board 17 includes, for example, a rectifying circuit for converting alternating current (AC) to direct current (DC), a power supply circuit for converting a predetermined direct current voltage to a specific direct current voltage (for example, direct current 12V, direct current 5V, etc.), and the like. I have.

The main board 11 is a control board on the main side, and the progress of the above-mentioned game in the pachinko game machine 1 (execution of a special figure game (including management of hold), execution of a normal figure game (including management of hold), and a big hit. It has a function to control a gaming state, a small hit gaming state, a gaming state, etc.). The main board 11 includes a game control microcomputer 100, a switch circuit 110, an output circuit 111, and the like.

The game control microcomputer 100 mounted on the main board 11 is, for example, a one-chip microcomputer, which includes a ROM (Read Only Memory) 101, a RAM (Random Access Memory) 102, and a CPU (Central Processing Unit) 103. , A random number circuit 104, an I / O (Input / Output port) 105, and an RTC (Real Time Clock) 106.

The CPU 103 performs a process of controlling the progress of the game (a process of realizing the function of the main board 11) by executing the program stored in the ROM 101. At this time, various data stored in the ROM 101 (data such as a fluctuation pattern described later, an effect control command described later, and various tables referred to when making various decisions described later) are used, and the RAM 102 is used as the main memory. .. The RAM 102 is a backup RAM in which the stored contents are stored for a predetermined period even if a part or all of the RAM 102 is stopped from supplying power to the pachinko gaming machine 1. Note that all or part of the program stored in the ROM 101 may be expanded into the RAM 102 and executed on the RAM 102.

The random number circuit 104 updatablely counts numerical data indicating various random number values (game random numbers) used when controlling the progress of the game. The game random number may be one that is updated by the CPU 103 executing a predetermined computer program (one that is updated by software).

The I / O 105 is, for example, an input port for inputting various signals (detection signals described later) and an output port for transmitting various signals (signals for controlling (driving) the special figure LED board 20 and the like, solenoid drive signals). It is composed including and.

The switch circuit 110 is a detection signal (a gate switch 21, a start port switch (first start port switch 22A and a second start port switch 22B), a count switch 23, and a V winning switch 24) for detecting a game ball. A detection signal indicating that the game ball has passed or entered and the switch is turned on, etc.) is taken in and transmitted to the game control microcomputer 100. By transmitting the detection signal, the passage or approach of the game ball is detected.

The reset signal, power cutoff signal, and clear signal from the power supply board 17 are taken into the switch circuit 110 and transmitted to the game control microcomputer 100. The reset signal is an operation stop signal for putting a control circuit such as a game control microcomputer 100 into an operation stop state, and can be output by using any of a power supply monitoring circuit, an IC with a built-in watchdog timer, and a system reset IC. All you need is. The power cutoff signal turns off when the predetermined power supply voltage used in the pachinko gaming machine 1 exceeds a predetermined value, and turns on when the period during which the predetermined power supply voltage falls below the predetermined value continues for more than the power cutoff reference time. Become. The clear signal is turned on in response to, for example, a pressing operation on the clear switch 92 provided on the power supply board 17.

The output circuit 111 transmits a solenoid drive signal from the game control microcomputer 100 to the solenoid 81, the solenoid 82, or the solenoid 83.

A display monitor 29, a display changeover switch 30, a setting key 51, a setting changeover switch 52, and a door opening sensor 90 are connected to the main board 11. The door opening sensor 90 detects the opening of the gaming machine frame 3 including the glass door frame 3a.

The main board 11 (microcomputer 100 for game control) issues an effect control command (command for designating (notifying) the progress of the game) according to the progress of the game as a part of controlling the progress of the game. Supply to 12. The effect control command output from the main board 11 is relayed by the relay board 15 and supplied to the effect control board 12. The effect control command includes, for example, various determination results on the main board 11 (for example, a display result of a special figure game (including a jackpot type)) and a variation pattern used when executing the special figure game (details will be described later). )), The game status (for example, the start and end of the variable display, the opening status of the large winning opening, the occurrence of winning, the number of stored memories, the game status), the occurrence of an error, and the like are included.

The effect control board 12 is a control board on the sub side independent of the main board 11, receives an effect control command, and produces an effect (various effects according to the progress of the game) based on the received effect control command. It has a function of executing various notifications such as driving of the movable body 32, error notification, and notification of power failure recovery).

The effect control board 12 is equipped with an effect control CPU 120, a ROM 121, a RAM 122, a display control unit 123, a random number circuit 124, and an I / O 125.

The effect control CPU 120 is a process for executing an effect together with the display control unit 123 by executing a program stored in the ROM 121 (a process for realizing the above-mentioned function of the effect control board 12, and the effect to be executed). (Including the decision of). At this time, various data (data such as various tables) stored in the ROM 121 are used, and the RAM 122 is used as the main memory.

The effect control CPU 120 displays the execution of the effect based on the detection signal from the controller sensor unit 35A or the push sensor 35B (a signal output when an operation by the player is detected and an appropriate signal indicating the operation content). It may also instruct the control unit 123.

The display control unit 123 includes a VDP (Video Display Processor), a CGROM (Character Generator ROM), a VRAM (Video RAM), and the like, and executes the effect based on the effect execution instruction from the effect control CPU 120.

The display control unit 123 supplies the image display device 5 with a video signal corresponding to the effect to be executed based on the effect execution instruction from the effect control CPU 120, so that the effect image is displayed on the image display device 5. The display control unit 123 further supplies a sound designation signal (a signal for designating the output sound) to the sound control board 13 in order to output sound synchronized with the display of the effect image and turn on / off the game effect lamp 9. Or, a lamp signal (a signal for designating a lamp lighting / extinguishing mode) is supplied to the lamp control board 14. Further, the display control unit 123 supplies a signal for operating the movable body 32 to the movable body 32 or a drive circuit for driving the movable body 32.

The voice control board 13 is equipped with various circuits for driving the speakers 8L and 8R, drives the speakers 8L and 8R based on the sound designation signal, and outputs the sound designated by the sound designation signal from the speakers 8L and 8R. Let me.

The lamp control board 14 is equipped with various circuits for driving the game effect lamp 9, drives the game effect lamp 9 based on the lamp signal, and turns on / off the game effect lamp 9 in a mode designated by the lamp signal. do. In this way, the display control unit 123 controls the audio output and the lighting / extinguishing of the lamp.

The effect control CPU 120 executes audio output, lamp lighting / extinguishing control (sound designation signal, lamp signal supply, etc.), and movable body 32 control (signal supply for operating the movable body 32, etc.). You may do so.

The random number circuit 124 counts updatable numerical data indicating various random number values (random numbers for effect) used to execute various effects. The effect random number may be one that is updated (updated by software) when the effect control CPU 120 executes a predetermined computer program.

The I / O 125 mounted on the effect control board 12 is for transmitting various signals (video signal, sound designation signal, lamp signal) and an input port for taking in the effect control command transmitted from, for example, the main board 11. It is configured to include the output port of.

Boards other than the main board 11, such as the effect control board 12, the sound control board 13, and the lamp control board 14, are also referred to as sub-boards. A plurality of sub-boards may be provided for each function as in the pachinko gaming machine 1, or one sub-board may be configured to have a plurality of functions.

The fourth symbol unit 50 is connected to the effect control board 12, and each display unit can be lit (blinking) under the control of the control CPU 120.

[Outline of game progress]
In the pachinko gaming machine 1 having the above-described configuration, the game proceeds as follows. The game ball is launched toward the game area by the rotation operation of the ball striking operation handle 30 included in the pachinko game machine 1 by the player. When the game ball passes through the passing gate 41, the normal symbol game by the normal symbol display 20 is started. In addition, when the game ball passes through the passing gate 41 during the period during which the previous normal drawing game is being executed (when the game ball has passed through the passing gate 41 but the normal drawing game based on the passage cannot be executed immediately). , The game based on the passage is suspended up to a predetermined upper limit (for example, 4).

In this normal symbol game, if a specific normal symbol (design per normal symbol) is stopped and displayed, the display result of the normal symbol becomes "per normal symbol". On the other hand, if a normal symbol other than a normal symbol (a common symbol lost symbol) is stopped and displayed as a confirmed normal symbol, the display result of the normal symbol becomes "normal symbol lost". When it becomes "per normal drawing", the opening control is performed so that the variable winning ball device 6B is opened for a predetermined period (the second starting winning opening is opened).

When the game ball enters the first starting winning opening formed in the winning ball device 6A, the first special drawing game by the special drawing 1 variable display unit 21 of the special drawing LED substrate 20 is started.

When the game ball enters the second starting winning opening formed in the variable winning ball device 6B, the second special drawing game by the special drawing 2 variable display unit 22 of the special drawing LED substrate 20 is started.

In addition, when the game ball enters (wins) the start winning opening during the period during which the special figure game is being executed or during the period controlled by the big hit game state or the small hit game state described later (although the start prize has occurred). If the special figure game based on the start winning cannot be executed immediately), the execution of the special figure game based on the approach is suspended up to a predetermined upper limit (for example, 4).

In the special figure game, the combination of the lighting modes of the plurality of LEDs provided on the special figure 1 variable display unit 21 and the special figure 2 variable display unit 22 of the special figure LED board 20 is a specific special symbol (big hit symbol, which will be described later). The actual design differs depending on the type of big hit.) When the combination of lighting modes corresponding to) is used, the "big hit" is obtained. It should be noted that the lighting mode corresponding to a specific special symbol (big hit symbol) in the combination of the lighting modes of the plurality of LEDs provided on the special figure 1 variable display unit 21 and the special figure 2 variable display unit 22 of the special figure LED substrate 20. Is also referred to as a "specific display result". Further, the combination of the lighting modes of the plurality of LEDs provided on the special figure 1 variable display unit 21 and the special figure 2 variable display unit 22 of the special figure LED board 20 is a predetermined special symbol (small hit symbol) different from the big hit symbol. ) Corresponds to the combination of lighting modes, it becomes a "small hit". Further, the combination of the lighting modes of the plurality of LEDs provided on the special figure 1 variable display unit 21 and the special figure 2 variable display unit 22 of the special figure LED board 20 is a special symbol (loss) different from the big hit symbol and the small hit symbol. When the combination of lighting modes corresponding to the symbol) is used, it becomes "missing". It should be noted that, in the combination of the lighting modes of the plurality of LEDs provided in the special figure 1 variable display unit 21 and the special figure 2 variable display unit 22 of the special figure LED board 20, a special symbol (loss) different from the big hit symbol and the small hit symbol is used. The lighting mode corresponding to the symbol) is also referred to as a “loss display result”.

After the display result in the special figure game becomes "big hit", it is controlled to the big hit game state as an advantageous state advantageous for the player. After the display result in the special figure game becomes "small hit", it is controlled to the small hit game state. In addition, it is not always necessary to provide a small hit as a hit type.

In the big hit game state, the big winning opening formed by the special variable winning ball device 7 is opened in a predetermined mode. The open state is either the elapsed timing of a predetermined period (for example, 29 seconds or 1.8 seconds) or the timing until the number of game balls that have entered the large winning opening reaches a predetermined number (for example, 9). It will continue until early timing. This predetermined period is the upper limit period during which the large winning opening can be opened in one round, and is also hereinafter referred to as the opening upper limit period. One cycle in which the big winning opening is open in this way is called a round (round game). In the jackpot game state, the round can be repeatedly executed until the maximum number of times (10 times or 7 times) is reached.

In the big hit game state, the player can obtain the prize ball by letting the game ball enter the big prize opening. Therefore, the jackpot gaming state is an advantageous state for the player. The larger the number of rounds in the jackpot game state and the longer the open upper limit period, the more advantageous it is for the player.

The type of jackpot is set for "big hit". For example, multiple types of opening modes (number of rounds and maximum opening period) of the big winning opening and game states after the big hit game state (normal state, time saving state, probability change state, etc.) are prepared, and the big hit type is set according to these. Has been done. As the jackpot type, a jackpot type that can obtain many prize balls, a jackpot type with few prize balls, or a jackpot type that can hardly obtain prize balls may be provided.

In the small hit game state, the large winning opening formed by the special variable winning ball device 7 is opened in a predetermined opening mode. For example, in the small hit game state, the opening mode is the same as in the big hit game state for some big hit types (the number of times the big winning opening is opened is the same as the number of rounds, and the closing timing of the big winning opening is also the same. Etc.), the big winning opening becomes open. As with the big hit type, the small hit type may be provided for the "small hit".

After the jackpot game state is completed, it may be controlled to a time saving state or a probability change state according to the jackpot type.

In the time saving state, control (time saving control) is executed in which the average special figure fluctuation time (period in which the special figure is changed) is shortened as compared with the normal state. In the time saving state, the average fluctuation time of the normal map (the period during which the normal map is changed) is shortened from the normal state, and the probability of becoming a "normal map hit" in the normal map game is improved from the normal state. Controls (high opening control, high base control) that make it easier for the game ball to enter the second starting winning opening are also executed. The time saving state is a state in which the fluctuation efficiency of the special symbol (particularly the second special symbol) is improved, which is advantageous for the player.

In the probability variation state (probability fluctuation state), in addition to the time saving control, the probability variation control in which the probability that the display result becomes a "big hit" is higher than in the normal state is executed. The probabilistic state is a state that is more advantageous for the player because it is a state in which a “big hit” is likely to occur in addition to improving the fluctuation efficiency of the special symbol.

The time saving state and the probability change state continue until any one of the end conditions such as the execution of the special figure game a predetermined number of times and the start of the next big hit game state are satisfied first. A game whose end condition is that the special figure game has been executed a predetermined number of times is also referred to as a number-cutting (time-cutting time reduction, number-cutting probability change, etc.).

The normal state is a gaming state other than an advantageous state such as a big hit gaming state that is advantageous for the player, a time saving state, and a probability change state, and the display result in the normal drawing game is "normal drawing hit". The pachinko game machine 1 such as the probability and the probability that the display result in the special figure game becomes a "big hit" returns to a predetermined state after the power is turned on, such as the initial setting state of the pachinko game machine 1 (for example, when a system reset is performed). It is in the same controlled state as (when the process is not executed).

The state in which the probability change control is executed is also called a high probability state, and the state in which the probability change control is not executed is also called a low probability state. The state in which the time saving control is executed is also called a high base state, and the state in which the time saving control is not executed is also called a low base state. By combining these, it is also called a low-accuracy high-base state in the time-saving state, a high-accuracy high-base state in the probabilistic state, and a low-accuracy low-base state in the normal state. The high-accuracy state and low-base state are also called the high-accuracy low-base state.

After the small hit game state ends, the game state is not changed, and the game state is continuously controlled to the game state before the display result of the special figure game becomes "small hit" (however, "small hit" occurs. If the special figure game at the time is the special figure game of the predetermined number of times in the above number of times cut, the game state is naturally changed). It should be noted that there may be no "small hit" as the display result of the special figure game.

The game state may change based on the fact that the game ball has passed through a specific area (for example, a specific area in the big winning opening) during the big hit game state. For example, when the game ball passes through a specific area, it may be controlled to a probabilistic state after the big hit game state.

In the pachinko gaming machine 1, various effects (effects of notifying the progress of the game and enlivening the game) are executed according to the progress of the game. The effect is performed by displaying various effect images on the image display device 5, but in addition to or instead of the display, audio output from the speakers 8L and 8R, lighting of the game effect lamp 9, and the like. It may be turned off, the operation of the movable body 32, or an effect using an arbitrary effect device including a part or all of them.

As an effect executed according to the progress of the game, in the decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of the "left", "middle", and "right" provided in the image display device 5, the first special figure game or the first special figure game or the first 2 In response to the start of the special figure game, the variable display of the decorative pattern is started. At the timing when the display result (also referred to as the finalized special symbol) is stopped and displayed in the first special symbol game or the second special symbol game, the final decorative symbol (combination of three decorative symbols) that is the display result of the variable display of the decorative symbol is displayed. ) Is also displayed (derived) as a stop.

In the period from the start to the end of the variable display of the decorative symbol, the variable display mode of the decorative symbol may be a predetermined reach mode (reach is established). Here, the reach mode is a variable display of a decorative symbol that has not yet been stopped and displayed when the decorative symbol that has been stopped and displayed on the screen of the image display device 5 constitutes a part of the jackpot combination described later. It is a mode in which is continuing.

In addition, the reach effect is executed in response to the above-mentioned reach mode during the variable display of the decorative symbol. In the pachinko gaming machine 1, the ratio of the display result (display result of the special figure game or variable display of the decorative symbol) to be "big hit" (also called big hit reliability or big hit expectation) is determined according to the production mode. Multiple different types of reach effects are performed. Reach production includes, for example, normal reach, super reach with higher jackpot reliability than normal reach, and strongest reach with higher jackpot reliability than super reach. In addition, the super reach is divided into the first half of the super reach and the second half of the super reach. In the present embodiment, the jackpot reliability is higher when the variable display display result is derived in the first half of the super reach than when the variable display display result is derived in the normal reach. Further, the jackpot reliability is higher when the variable display display result is derived in the latter half of the super reach than when the variable display display result is derived in the first half of the super reach. Further, the jackpot reliability is higher when the variable display display result is derived with the strongest reach than when the variable display display result is derived in the latter half of the super reach. In the following, "super reach" is also referred to as "SP reach", "first half of super reach" is also referred to as "first half of SP", and "second half of super reach" is also referred to as "second half of SP".

When the display result of the special figure game is a combination of lighting modes corresponding to the "big hit" (the above-mentioned specific display result), it is predetermined as a display result of the variable display of the decorative symbol on the screen of the image display device 5. A definite decorative symbol that is a combination of big hits is derived (the display result of the variable display of the decorative symbol is "big hit"). As an example, the same decorative symbols (for example, "7") are aligned and stopped and displayed on predetermined effective lines in the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of "left", "middle", and "right". ..

In the case of a "probability change jackpot" that is controlled to a probability change state after the end of the jackpot game state, an odd number of decorative symbols (for example, "7") are aligned and displayed as a stop, and the probability change state is entered after the end of the jackpot game state. In the case of an uncontrolled "non-probability variable jackpot (normal jackpot)", an even number of decorative symbols (for example, "6") may be aligned and displayed as a stop. In this case, the odd-numbered decorative symbol is also referred to as a probabilistic symbol, and the even-numbered decorative symbol is also referred to as a non-probable variable symbol (normal symbol). After the non-probability pattern becomes the reach mode, the promotion effect that finally becomes the "probability big hit" may be executed.

When the display result of the special figure game is a combination of lighting modes corresponding to "small hit", a predetermined small hit combination is obtained as the display result of the variable display of the decorative symbol on the screen of the image display device 5. A definite decorative symbol (for example, "1 3 5") is derived (the display result of the variable display of the decorative symbol is "small hit"). As an example, the decorative symbols constituting the chance eyes are stopped and displayed on the predetermined effective lines in the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of "left", "middle", and "right". In addition, when the display result of the special figure game becomes a "big hit" of some big hit types (a big hit type in a big hit game state in the same manner as the small hit game state), and when it becomes a "small hit". , A common fixed decorative symbol may be derived and displayed.

When the display result of the special figure game is a combination of lighting modes corresponding to "loss" (the above-mentioned loss display result), the variable display mode of the decorative symbol is not the reach mode, but the variable display of the decorative symbol. As a display result of, the fixed decorative symbol of the non-reach combination (also referred to as “non-reach loss”) may be stopped and displayed (the display result of the variable display of the decorative symbol becomes “non-reach loss”). If the display result is "missing", after the variable display mode of the decorative symbol becomes the reach mode, the display result of the variable display of the decorative symbol is a predetermined reach combination ("reach loss") that is not a jackpot combination. The fixed decorative symbol (also referred to as) may be stopped and displayed (the display result of the variable display of the decorative symbol may be "reach loss").

The effect that the pachinko gaming machine 1 can execute includes displaying the above-mentioned variable display compatible display (hold display or active display). Further, as another effect, for example, a notice effect for notifying the reliability of the jackpot is executed during the variable display of the decorative symbol. The notice effect includes a notice effect that announces the jackpot reliability in the variable display during execution, and a pre-reading advance notice effect that announces the jackpot reliability in the variable display (variable display in which execution is suspended) before execution. As the pre-reading notice effect, an effect of changing the display mode of the variable display compatible display (hold display or active display) to a mode different from the usual mode may be executed.

Further, in the image display device 5, one variable display is simulated as a plurality of variable displays by temporarily stopping the decorative symbol during the variable display of the decorative symbol and then restarting the variable display. The pseudo-continuous production may be executed.

Even during the big hit game state, the big hit middle effect that notifies the big hit game state is executed. As the big hit middle effect, an effect of notifying the number of rounds and a promotion effect indicating that the value of the big hit gaming state is improved may be executed. Further, even during the small hit game state, the small hit medium effect for notifying the small hit game state is executed. It should be noted that the big hit game during the small hit game state and in some big hit types (the big hit type in the big hit game state having the same aspect as the small hit game state, for example, the big hit type in which the subsequent game state is set to the high accuracy state). By executing a common effect depending on the state, the player may not know whether the player is currently in the small hit game state or the big hit game state. In such a case, by executing a common effect after the end of the small hit game state and after the end of the big hit game state, it is not possible to distinguish between the high accuracy state and the low accuracy state. You may.

Further, for example, when a special figure game or the like is not executed, a demo (demonstration) image is displayed on the image display device 5 (a customer waiting demo effect is executed).

[Various tables related to big hits]
Various tables related to big hits will be described with reference to FIGS. 23 and 24.

(Hit type)
FIG. 23 is a diagram for explaining a hit type. As shown in FIG. 23, in the hit type table, for each type (type) of hit in the jackpot, the jackpot probability after the end of the jackpot game state, the base after the end of the jackpot game state, and the number of times of opening in the jackpot ( The number of rounds) is shown.

Specifically, as the types of jackpots, normal jackpots 1 and 2 and probabilistic jackpots 1 to 9 are provided. In the following, the marking of each round may be represented by "R". For example, the first round is also referred to as the 1Rth, and the second round is also referred to as the 2Rth.

The normal jackpot 1 is a jackpot controlled to a low probability state and a high base state after the end of the jackpot gaming state of 3 rounds. In the normal jackpot 1, such a low accuracy and high base state continues until the variable display (special figure variation) is executed for a predetermined number of times (for example, 50 times).

The normal jackpot 2 is a jackpot controlled to a low probability state and a high base state after the end of the jackpot gaming state of 3 rounds. In the normal jackpot 2, such a low accuracy and high base state continues until the variable display (special figure variation) is executed over a predetermined number of times (for example, 100 times).

The probabilistic jackpots 1 to 5 are jackpots that are controlled to a high probability state and a high base state after the end of the jackpot gaming state of three rounds. In the probability variation jackpot 1, such a high accuracy high base state continues until the variable display (special figure variation) is executed over a predetermined number of times (for example, 100 times).

The probability variation jackpot 6 is a jackpot controlled to a high probability state and a high base state after the end of the jackpot gaming state of 5 rounds. In the probability variation jackpot 6, such a high accuracy high base state continues until the variable display (special figure variation) is executed over a predetermined number of times (for example, 100 times).

The probability variation jackpot 7 is a jackpot controlled to a high probability state and a high base state after the end of the jackpot game state of 7 rounds. In the probability variation jackpot 7, such a high accuracy high base state continues until the variable display (special figure variation) is executed over a predetermined number of times (for example, 100 times).

The probabilistic jackpots 8 and 9 are jackpots that are controlled to a high probability state and a high base state after the end of the jackpot game state of 10 rounds. In the probability variation jackpots 8 and 9, such a high accuracy high base state continues until the variable display (special figure variation) is executed over a predetermined number of times (for example, 100 times).

(Each random number)
FIG. 24 is a diagram for explaining each random number. As shown in FIG. 24, each random number is used as follows. Specifically, Random 1 is a random counter for hit determination that determines whether or not to make a big hit. Random 1 is, for example, added and updated one by one from 1 and is added and updated up to the upper limit of 65536, and then added and updated again from 1. Random 2 is a random counter (for determining the jackpot type) that determines the jackpot type (type).

Random 3 and Random 4 are random counters (for determining the post-variation pattern) that determine the variation pattern (hereinafter referred to as the post-variation pattern) (variation time) corresponding to the post-variation among the variation patterns. Post-variation refers to the variation in the latter half of the variation in the special symbol. Random 3 is a random counter that determines the post-variation pattern corresponding to the case of loss. For example, it is updated one by one, added and updated from 1, and then added and updated up to the upper limit of 65519, and then added again from 1. Will be updated. Random 4 is a random counter that determines a post-variation pattern corresponding to a hit. For example, it is added and updated from 1 to 1 at a time, added and updated up to its upper limit of 239, and then added and updated again from 1.

Random 5 is a random counter (for determining the pre-variation pattern) that determines a variation pattern (hereinafter referred to as a pre-variation pattern) (variation time) corresponding to the pre-variation among the variation patterns. The pre-variation refers to the variation of the first half of the variation of the special symbol. Random 5 is, for example, added and updated from 1 to 1 at a time, added and updated up to the upper limit of 251 and then added and updated again from 1. Random 6 is a random counter (for determining whether or not to generate a hit based on a normal symbol). Random 6 is, for example, added and updated from 1 to 1 by 1, added and updated up to the upper limit of 201, and then added and updated again from 1.

In the present embodiment, whether or not the player is controlled to the jackpot gaming state as an advantageous state that is advantageous to the player is determined based on the value of the jackpot determination random number (random 1). Then, which of the plurality of types of jackpots is to be selected is determined based on the value of the jackpot type determination random number (random 2). At this time, the jackpot symbol may also be determined based on the value of random 2.

First, the post-variation pattern is determined according to the hit or loss using the random number for determining the post-variation pattern (random 3 and 4), and the pre-variation pattern is determined using the random number for determining the pre-variation pattern (random 5). Will be done. As described above, in this embodiment, the fluctuation pattern is determined by the two-step lottery process.

(Big hit judgment table, big hit type judgment table)
FIG. 25 is a diagram for explaining a jackpot determination table and a jackpot type determination table. These tables are stored in ROM 101.

FIG. 25A is an explanatory diagram showing a jackpot determination table. The jackpot determination table is a collection of data stored in the ROM 101, and is a table in which a jackpot determination value to be compared with random 1 is set. The jackpot determination table includes a normal time (non-probability variation) jackpot determination table used in a normal state (a gaming state that is not a probability variation state, that is, a non-probability variation state) and a probability variation jackpot determination table used in the probability variation state.

In the normal jackpot determination table, jackpot determination values are set for the number of determination values listed in the upper column of FIG. 25 (a), and in the probability variation jackpot determination table, the lower column of FIG. 25 (a). The jackpot judgment value is set for the number of judgment values described in. The jackpot judgment value set in the jackpot judgment table at the time of probability change is the jackpot judgment value common to the jackpot judgment value set in the jackpot judgment table at normal time, and the jackpot judgment value peculiar to the probability change is added to the jackpot judgment value at normal time. A larger number of jackpot determination values than the jackpot determination table are set. As a result, in the probabilistic state, it is determined that the jackpot is a big hit with a higher probability than in the normal state.

The CPU 103 extracts the count value of the random number circuit 104 at a predetermined time and compares the extracted value with the value of the big hit determination random number (random 1). If it matches the jackpot determination value, it is decided to make a jackpot (normal jackpot or probability variation jackpot) for the special symbol. In addition, FIG. 25A shows the probability of becoming a big hit (ratio) or the probability of losing (ratio).

25 (b) and 25 (c) are explanatory views showing a jackpot type determination table. FIG. 25B is a first special figure jackpot type determination table used for determining a jackpot type when a jackpot is determined by the first special symbol. FIG. 25 (c) is a second special figure big hit type determination table used for determining the big hit type when the big hit is determined by the second special symbol.

In the first special figure jackpot type determination table of FIG. 25 (b), the numerical values are compared with the random 2 values for determining the jackpot type, and correspond to the normal jackpots 1 and 2 and the probability variation jackpots 1 to 4, respectively. Judgment values are set for the number of judgment values that have been made. For example, as shown in FIG. 25 (b), for the first special figure, the normal jackpot 1 is assigned 25 random 2 values out of 100 random 2s, and the normal jackpot 2 is 100 random 2s. 25 random 2 values are assigned, probabilistic jackpot 1 is assigned 5 random 2 values out of 100 random 2s, and probabilistic jackpot 2 is 37 out of 100 random 2s. Random 2 values are assigned, probabilistic jackpot 3 is assigned 4 random 2 values out of 100 random 2s, and probabilistic jackpot 4 is 4 random 2 out of 100 random 2s. The value of is assigned.

In the second special symbol jackpot type determination table of FIG. 25 (c), the determination values are set by the number of determination values corresponding to each of the probabilistic jackpots 5 to 9, which are numerical values to be compared with the values of random 2. Has been done. For example, as shown in FIG. 25 (c), for the second special figure, the probability variation jackpot 5 is assigned 10 random 2 values out of 100 random 2s, and the probability variation jackpot 6 is 100 random 2s. 5 random 2 values are assigned, probabilistic jackpot 7 is assigned 5 random 2 values out of 100 random 2s, and probabilistic jackpot 8 is 70 out of 100 random 2s. Random 2 values are assigned, and the probability variation jackpot 9 is assigned 10 random 2 values out of 100 random 2.

Using such various jackpot type determination tables, the CPU 103 determines the type corresponding to the jackpot type determination value in which the random 2 values match as the jackpot type, and the random 2 values match as the jackpot symbol. Determine the big hit design you made. As a result, the jackpot type and the jackpot symbol corresponding to the jackpot type are determined at the same time.

[Direction control command]
FIG. 26 is a diagram for explaining an example of the effect control command. The game control microcomputer 100 mounted on the main board 11 which is the control board on the main side transmits various effect control commands to the effect control CPU 120 according to the game control state. The effect control command has, for example, a 2-byte configuration, the first byte indicates MODE (command classification), and the second byte indicates EXT (command type). The command form shown in FIG. 26 is an example, and other command forms may be used. In the following, "(H)" is shown to be a hexadecimal number, but may be omitted in the present specification.

The command 80XX (H) is a variation pattern that specifies a variation pattern (pre-variation pattern) corresponding to the pre-variation among the variation patterns of the decorative symbols that are variably displayed on the image display device 5 in response to the variable display of the special symbol. It is a command (XX corresponds to the number of the pre-variation pattern). The front variation on the sub side refers to the variation of the first half of the variation of the decorative symbol that is variably displayed on the image display device 5 in response to the variable display of the special symbol. When a unique number is assigned to each of a plurality of types of pre-variation patterns, there is a pre-variation pattern command corresponding to each of the pre-variation patterns specified by the number.

The command 8101 (H) is a first variable display start command for designating the start of the variable display of the first special figure. The command 8102 (H) is a second variable display start command for designating the start of the variable display of the second special figure. Upon receiving the command 8101 (H) or the command 8102 (H), the effect control CPU 101 controls the image display device 5 to start the variable display of the decorative symbol.

The command 84XX (H) is a variation pattern that specifies a variation pattern (post-variation pattern) corresponding to the post-variation among the variation patterns of the decorative symbols that are variably displayed on the image display device 5 in response to the variable display of the special symbol. It is a command (XX corresponds to the post-variation pattern number). The rear variation on the sub side refers to the variation of the latter half of the variation of the decorative symbol that is variably displayed on the image display device 5 in response to the variable display of the special symbol. When a unique number is assigned to each of a plurality of types of post-variation patterns, there is a post-variation pattern command corresponding to each of the post-variation patterns specified by the number.

The command 8C01 (H) is a display result 1 designation command (loss designation command) indicating that the command is determined to be lost. The command 8C02 (H) is a display result 2 designation command (normal jackpot 1 designation command) indicating that the normal jackpot 1 is determined. The command 8C03 (H) is a display result 3 designation command (normal jackpot 2 designation command) indicating that the normal jackpot 2 is determined. The command 8C04 (H) is a display result 4 designation command (probability variation jackpot 1 designation command) indicating that the probability variation jackpot 1 is determined. The command 8C05 (H) is a display result 5 designation command (probability variation jackpot 2 designation command) indicating that the probability variation jackpot 2 is determined. The command 8C06 (H) is a display result 6 designation command (probability variation jackpot 3 designation command) indicating that the probability variation jackpot 3 is determined. The command 8C07 (H) is a display result 7 designation command (probability variation jackpot 4 designation command) indicating that the probability variation jackpot 4 is determined. The command 8C08 (H) is a display result 8 designation command (probability variation jackpot 5 designation command) indicating that the probability variation jackpot 5 is determined. The command 8C09 (H) is a display result 9 designation command (probability variation jackpot 6 designation command) indicating that the probability variation jackpot 6 is determined. The command 8C10 (H) is a display result 10 designation command (probability variation jackpot 7 designation command) indicating that the probability variation jackpot 7 is determined. The command 8C11 (H) is a display result 11 designation command (probability variation jackpot 8 designation command) indicating that the probability variation jackpot 8 is determined. The command 8C12 (H) is a display result 12 designation command (probability variation jackpot 9 designation command) indicating that the probability variation jackpot 9 is determined. Each of the loss designation command, the normal jackpot 1, 2 designation command, and the probability variation jackpot 1 to 9 designation command, or these are collectively referred to as an 8C system command.

The command 8D01 (H) is a first symbol variation designation command indicating that the variable display of the first special figure is started. The command 8D02 (H) is a second symbol variation designation command indicating that the variable display of the second special figure is started. Each of the first symbol variation designation command and the second symbol variation designation command, or these collectively, are also referred to as 8D system commands. The command 8F00 (H) is a symbol confirmation designation command for designating the end of the variation of the first special figure and the second special figure.

The command 9000 (H) is an initialization specification command for designating the initialization (designating to display the initial screen at the time of turning on the power) to be transmitted when the power supply for the gaming machine is started. The command 9200 (H) is a power failure recovery designation command for designating the power failure recovery (designating to display the power failure recovery screen) transmitted when the power supply for the gaming machine is resumed. Command 9500 (H) is a normal state specification command for designating the background of the normal state. The command 9501 (H) is a time saving state specification command for designating the background of the time saving state. Command 9502 (H) is a probability change state specification command for designating the background of the probability change state. Each of the normal state specification command, the time saving state specification command, and the probabilistic state specification command, or these are collectively referred to as a 95 series command or a background specification command. Command 9F00 (H) is a customer waiting demo designation command for designating a customer waiting demonstration.

The command A001 (H) is a jackpot start 1 designation command that normally specifies the start of the jackpot 1. The command A002 (H) is a jackpot start 2 designation command that normally specifies the start of the jackpot 2. The command A003 (H) is a probability variation jackpot start 3 designation command that specifies the start of the probability variation jackpot 1. The command A004 (H) is a command for designating the probability variation jackpot start 4 to specify the start of the probability variation jackpot 2. The command A005 (H) is a probability variation jackpot start 5 designation command that specifies the start of the probability variation jackpot 3. The command A006 (H) is a command for designating the probability variation jackpot start 6 to specify the start of the probability variation jackpot 4. The command A007 (H) is a probability variation jackpot start 7 designation command that specifies the start of the probability variation jackpot 5. The command A008 (H) is a command for designating the probability variation jackpot start 8 to specify the start of the probability variation jackpot 6. The command A009 (H) is a probability variation jackpot start 9 designation command that specifies the start of the probability variation jackpot 7. The command A010 (H) is a command for designating the probability variation jackpot start 10 to specify the start of the probability variation jackpot 8. The command A011 (H) is a command for designating the probability variation jackpot start 11 to specify the start of the probability variation jackpot 9. Each of the jackpot start 1 to 11 designated commands, or these are collectively referred to as A0 series commands.

A1XX (H) is a command for designating the opening of the large winning opening for the number of times (round) indicated by XX. The command specified while the large winning opening is open is also referred to as an A1 command. A2XX (H) is a designated command after opening the large winning opening indicating the closing of the large winning opening for the number of times (round) indicated by XX. The designated command after opening the big winning opening is also called an A2 command.

The command A301 (H) is a jackpot end 1 designation command that normally specifies the end of jackpot 1. The command A302 (H) is a jackpot end 2 designation command that normally specifies the end of the jackpot 2. The command A303 (H) is a jackpot end 3 designation command for designating the end of the probability variation jackpot 1. The command A304 (H) is a jackpot end 4 designation command that specifies the end of the probability variation jackpot 2. The command A305 (H) is a jackpot end 5 designation command that specifies the end of the probability variation jackpot 3. The command A306 (H) is a jackpot end 6 designation command for designating the end of the probability variation jackpot 4. The command A307 (H) is a jackpot end 7 designation command for designating the end of the probability variation jackpot 5. The command A308 (H) is a jackpot end 8 designation command that specifies the end of the probability variation jackpot 6. The command A309 (H) is a jackpot end 9 designation command that specifies the end of the probability variation jackpot 7. The command A310 (H) is a jackpot end 10 designation command for designating the end of the probability variation jackpot 8. The command A311 (H) is a jackpot end 11 designation command that specifies the end of the probability variation jackpot 9. Each of the jackpot end 1 to 11 designated commands, or these are collectively referred to as A3 series commands.

The command AD00 (H) is a probability variation determination device pass designation command that specifies that a V prize has occurred. The probability change determination device pass designation command is a command transmitted when a game ball that has passed through the V large winning opening enters the V winning area and is detected by the V winning switch 24.

The command B100 (H) is a first start prize designation command for designating that there was a first start prize. The command B200 (H) is a second start prize designation command for designating that there was a second start prize.

The command C1XX (H) is a first hold storage number designation command for designating that the first hold storage number has reached the number indicated by XX. The first hold storage number designation command is also referred to as a C1 system command. The command C2XX (H) is a designated command for second hold storage that specifies that the second hold storage number has reached the number indicated by XX. The second hold storage number designation command is also referred to as a C2 system command.

The command C4XX (H) and the command C6XX (H) display the contents of the winning judgment results such as the big hit judgment, the big hit type judgment, and the variation pattern type judgment at the time of starting winning to the first starting winning opening or the second starting winning opening. This is an effect control command to be shown. Of these, the command C4XX (H) is a symbol designation command that indicates whether or not a jackpot will be achieved and a determination result of the type of jackpot among the winning determination results.

C7XX (H) is a large winning opening winning designation command indicating the passage of the game ball to the large winning opening of the number of times (round) indicated by XX.

The command in which MODE is FD (H) and the 4th bit of EXT is 0 is a right-handed display off-designated command indicating that the right-handed display is turned off. The command in which the MODE data is FD (H) and the 4th bit of the EXT data is 1, is a right-handed display lighting designation command indicating lighting of the right-handed display. In the present embodiment, the right-handed display lighting designation command is also referred to as an FD command.

The game control microcomputer 100 determines whether or not a big hit is obtained, the type of the big hit, and the value of the random number for determining the variation pattern type are in the range of the determination value at the time of starting winning. Then, a value for designating a big hit and a value for designating the type of the big hit are set in the EXT data of the symbol designation command, and control is performed to transmit the value to the effect control CPU 120. Further, the game control microcomputer 100 sets a value that specifies a range of determination values as a determination result of the variation pattern type in the EXT data of the variation type command, and controls transmission to the effect control CPU 120. The effect control CPU 120 can recognize whether or not the display result is a big hit based on the value set in the symbol designation command, the type of the big hit, and can recognize the fluctuation pattern type based on the fluctuation type command. ..

[Variation pattern]
The contents of the fluctuation pattern, determination of the fluctuation pattern, and the like will be described with reference to FIGS. 27 to 33.

In the present embodiment, a plurality of types of fluctuation patterns are set by the game control microcomputer 100 on the main side. Each fluctuation pattern is managed by the main fluctuation number, and is composed of a combination of a pre-variation pattern, which is a fluctuation pattern corresponding to the pre-variation, and a post-variation pattern corresponding to the post-variation. It is designed to include. The pre-variation pattern corresponds to the pre-variation pattern command (80XX (H)) described with reference to FIG. 26, and the post-variation pattern corresponds to the post-variation pattern command (84XX (H)) described with reference to FIG. Corresponds to.

(Pre-variation pattern on the main side)
FIG. 27 is a diagram for explaining an example of the pre-variation pattern on the main side. Of the plurality of types of pre-variation patterns to which each pre-variation number is assigned, the pre-variation number 1 is a pre-variation pattern command (8000 (H)) that specifies a normal variation (for example, a variation of a decorative symbol over 13 seconds). Is. The pre-variation number 2 is a pre-variation pattern command (8001 (H)) that specifies a shortened variation (for example, a variation of a decorative symbol over 7 seconds). The pre-variation number 3 is a pre-variation pattern command (8002 (H)) that specifies an ultra-shortening variation (for example, a variation of a decorative symbol over 3 seconds).

The pre-variation number 4 is a pre-variation pattern command (8003 (H)) that specifies a normal reach (accessory ×) (a reach in which the movable body 32 does not operate in a reach mode). The pre-variation number 5 is a pre-variation pattern command (8004 (H)) that specifies a normal reach (accessory ○) (a reach in which the movable body 32 operates in a reach mode). The pre-variation number 6 is a pre-variation pattern command (8005 (H)) that specifies a normal reach (final reach development) (a reach that develops into a final reach in a reach mode).

The pre-variation number 7 is a pre-variation pattern command (8006 (H)) that specifies that the normal reach (accessory ×) is executed after one pseudo-variation. Pseudo-variation means that the variable display is temporarily stopped and then restarted from the start of the variable display (variable display) of the decorative symbol until the display result of the variable display is derived and displayed. Variable display (variable display). The effect of repeating such pseudo-variations is also called pseudo-ream. By executing the pseudo-ream, the variable display based on one hold memory can be shown to the player as if it were a plurality of variable displays in a pseudo manner. The variable display that is temporarily stopped and then restarted is also referred to as "re-variable display". The pre-variation number 8 is a pre-variation pattern command (8007 (H)) that specifies that the normal reach (accessory ○) is executed after one pseudo-variation. The pre-variation number 9 is a pre-variation pattern command (8008 (H)) that specifies normal reach (final reach development) after one pseudo-variation.

The pre-variation number 10 is a pre-variation pattern command (8009 (H)) that specifies that the normal reach (accessory ×) is executed after the pseudo-variation is performed twice. The pre-variation number 11 is a pre-variation pattern command (800A (H)) that specifies that the normal reach (accessory ○) is executed after the pseudo-variation is performed twice. The pre-variation number 12 is a pre-variation pattern command (800B (H)) that specifies normal reach (final reach development) after performing pseudo-variation twice.

A fluctuation time is specified for each of the pre-variation patterns, and an animation (moving image) is displayed on the image display device 5 over each fluctuation time. In the pachinko gaming machine 1, it takes about 33.3 msec for one still image (referred to as a frame) constituting the moving image. For example, in the case of the patterns of the previous variation numbers 7 to 9, 41500 mse is set as the variation time, and the number of frames is about 1246. Further, in the case of the patterns of the previous variation numbers 10 to 12, 62000 mse is set as the variation time, and the number of frames is about 1861.

(Post-variation pattern on the main side)
FIG. 28 is a diagram for explaining an example of a post-variation pattern on the main side. Of the plurality of types of post-variation patterns to which the post-variation numbers are assigned, the post-variation number 1 is a post-variation pattern command (8400 (H)) that specifies a 13-second variation. The post-variation number 2 is a post-variation pattern command (8401 (H)) that specifies a 7-second variation. The post-variation number 3 is a post-variation pattern command (8402 (H)) that specifies a 3-second variation. The post-variation number 4 is a post-variation pattern command (8403 (H)) that specifies that the pseudo-continuous Gase is executed. Pseudo-ream Gase is an effect that pretends to execute pseudo-ream and does not execute pseudo-ream in the end.

The post-variation number 5 is a post-variation pattern command (8404 (H)) that specifies a normal reach (loss) (a variation of a decorative pattern that becomes a reach mode but becomes a loss mode without developing into SP reach). The post-variation number 6 is a post-variation pattern command (8405 (H)) that specifies the first half of the SP (loss) (the variation of the decorative pattern that develops into the SP reach but becomes the loss mode in the first half of the SP reach). The post-variation number 7 is a post-variation pattern command (8406 (H)) that specifies the latter half of the SP (loss) (the variation of the decorative pattern that develops in the latter half of the SP reach but becomes a loss mode in the latter half of the SP reach). The post-variation number 8 is a post-variation pattern command (8407 (H)) that specifies the final reach (loss) (the variation of the decorative pattern that develops into the final reach but becomes the loss mode in the final reach).

The post-variation number 9 is a post-variation pattern command (8408 (H)) that specifies a normal reach (hit) (a variation of a decorative symbol that becomes a reach mode and a hit mode). The post-variation number 10 is a post-variation pattern command (8409 (H)) that specifies the first half (hit) of the SP (the variation of the decorative pattern that develops into the SP reach and becomes the hit mode in the first half of the SP reach). The post-variation number 11 is a post-variation pattern command (840A (H)) that specifies the latter half of the SP (hit) (the variation of the decorative symbol that develops in the latter half of the SP reach and becomes the hit mode in the latter half of the SP reach). The post-variation number 12 is a post-variation pattern command (840B (H)) that specifies the final reach (hit) (the variation of the decorative symbol that develops into the final reach and becomes the hit mode in the final reach).

(Judgment of post-variation pattern)
The post-variation pattern is determined by using different random counters in the jackpot determination depending on whether the jackpot or the loss is determined. FIG. 29 is a diagram for explaining a post-variation pattern determination table at the time of loss. As shown in FIG. 29, when a loss is determined in the jackpot determination, the post-variation pattern is determined using the random 3 described in FIG. 24. Further, when the jackpot determination is determined to be lost, the post-variation pattern is determined using a different number of determination values according to the number of reserved memories after digestion, and the determined post-variation number is also different.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 29 (a), when the number of reserved memories after digestion is 0, one of the post-variation numbers 1, 4, 5 to 8 is determined as the post-variation pattern. A different number of determination values is provided for each of the post-variation patterns. The probability of being determined to be any of the post-variation numbers 6 to 8 that develops into the SP reach or the final reach (selection rate of the post-variation numbers 6 to 8) is about 1/102.

When the number of reserved memories after digestion is 1, one of the post-variation numbers 1, 4, 5 to 8 is determined, and a different number of determination values is provided for each of the post-variation patterns. ing. The probability of being determined to be any of the post-variation numbers 6 to 8 that develops into the SP reach or the final reach (selection rate of the post-variation numbers 6 to 8) is about 1/102.

When the number of reserved memories after digestion is 2, one of the post-variation numbers 2, 4, 5 to 8 is determined, and a different number of determination values is provided for each of the post-variation patterns. ing. The probability of being determined to be any of the post-variation numbers 6 to 8 that develops into the SP reach or the final reach (selection rate of the post-variation numbers 6 to 8) is about 1/102.

When the number of reserved memories after digestion is 3, one of the post-variation numbers 3, 4, 5 to 8 is determined, and a different number of determination values is provided for each of the post-variation patterns. ing. The probability of being determined to be any of the post-variation numbers 6 to 8 that develops into the SP reach or the final reach (selection rate of the post-variation numbers 6 to 8) is about 1/102.

In this way, the post-variation pattern is determined using a different number of determination values according to the number of reserved memories after digestion, and further, the post-variation number is determined using a different number of determination values according to the number of reserved memories after digestion. Therefore, the type of variation pattern changes according to the number of remaining reserved memories, which makes it possible to give variety to the game and improve the interest of the game.

FIG. 30 is a diagram for explaining a post-variation pattern determination table at the time of a big hit. As shown in FIG. 30, when the jackpot is determined in the jackpot determination, the post-variation pattern is determined using the random 4 described with reference to FIG. 24. Further, when the jackpot is determined in the jackpot determination, the post-variation pattern is determined using a different number of determination values according to the type of jackpot.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 30A, when it is determined to be one of the normal jackpot 1, 2 and the probability variation jackpot 1, 2, 5 to 8, any of the post-variation numbers 9 to 12 is determined. The post-variation pattern is determined, and different numbers of determination values are provided for each of the post-variation patterns. The probability of being determined to be any of the post-variation numbers 10 to 12 that develops into the SP reach or the final reach (selection rate of the post-variation numbers 10 to 12) is about 1 / 1.1.

When it is determined to be one of the probability variation jackpots 3 and 9, one of the posterior variation patterns 9 to 12 is determined, and a different number of determination values is provided for each of the posterior variation patterns. .. The probability of being determined to be any of the post-variation numbers 10 to 12 that develops into the SP reach or the final reach (selection rate of the post-variation numbers 10 to 12) is about 1 / 1.1.

When the probability variation jackpot 4 is determined, any of the posterior variation patterns 9 to 12 is determined, and a different number of determination values is provided for each of the posterior variation patterns. The probability of being determined to be any of the post-variation numbers 10 to 12 that develops into the SP reach or the final reach (selection rate of the post-variation numbers 10 to 12) is about 1 / 1.1.

In this way, since the post-variation pattern is determined using a different number of judgment values depending on the type of jackpot, the type of variation pattern changes according to the type of jackpot, thereby giving diversity to the game. It is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Further, as shown in FIG. 29, the probability of being determined to be any of the post-variation numbers 6 to 8 that develops into SP reach or final reach is about 1/102 at the time of loss, whereas it is a big hit. Since the time is about 1 / 1.1, which is higher than that, when the SP reach or the final reach is developed, the player can be expected to generate a big hit.

(Judgment of pre-variation pattern)
FIG. 31 is a diagram for explaining a pre-variation pattern determination table. The pre-variation pattern is determined using the number of random 5 determination values that differ depending on the type of post-variation pattern determined earlier. Further, the pre-variation number determined is also different depending on the type of the post-variation pattern determined earlier.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 31A, when the posterior variation pattern of the posterior variation number 1 is determined, the anterior variation pattern of the anterior variation number 1 is determined. As shown in FIG. 31B, when the posterior variation pattern of the posterior variation number 2 is determined, the anterior variation pattern of the anterior variation number 2 is determined. As shown in FIG. 31 (c), when the posterior variation pattern of the posterior variation number 3 is determined, the anterior variation pattern of the anterior variation number 3 is determined. As shown in FIG. 31 (d), when the posterior variation pattern of the posterior variation number 4 is determined, the anterior variation pattern of the anterior variation number 1 is determined.

As shown in FIG. 31 (e), when any of the post-variation numbers 5 and 9 is determined to be the post-variation pattern, the pre-variation pattern of any of the pre-variation numbers 4 and 7 is determined. As shown in FIG. 31 (f), when any of the post-variation numbers 6 and 10 is determined to be the post-variation pattern, the pre-variation pattern of any of the pre-variation numbers 4, 7 and 10 is determined. As shown in FIG. 31 (g), when the posterior variation pattern of the posterior variation number 7 is determined, it is determined to be any of the anterior variation patterns 5, 8 and 11 of the anterior variation numbers 5, 8 and 11.

As shown in FIG. 31 (h), when the posterior variation pattern of the posterior variation number 11 is determined, it is determined to be any of the anterior variation patterns of the anterior variation numbers 5, 8 and 11. As shown in FIG. 31 (i), when the posterior variation pattern of the posterior variation number 8 is determined, it is determined to be one of the anterior variation patterns 6, 9 and 12. As shown in FIG. 31 (j), when the posterior variation pattern of the posterior variation number 12 is determined, it is determined to be one of the anterior variation patterns 6, 9 and 12.

(Total variation pattern)
FIG. 32 is a diagram for explaining an example of the total variation pattern on the main side. When the post-variation pattern and the pre-variation pattern are determined as described with reference to FIGS. 29 to 31, any of the fluctuation patterns of the main variation numbers 1 to 26 as shown in FIG. 32 is obtained.

FIG. 33 is a diagram for explaining an example of the total variation pattern on the sub side. Further, on the sub side as well, the fluctuation patterns of the sub fluctuation numbers 1 to 26 are defined so as to correspond to each of the fluctuation patterns of the main fluctuation numbers 1 to 26.

[Each notice production]
FIG. 34 is a diagram for explaining a lottery table in each notice production. In the present embodiment, a notice effect suggesting that the display result of the variable display of the special symbol or the decorative symbol becomes a predetermined jackpot symbol may be executed. The advance notice production is also an effect that suggests or gives notice of the occurrence of a big hit, and is also an effect that makes the player expect a big hit. The notice production includes a group notice production (also referred to as a group notice or a group production) and a SP first half title notice production (also referred to as a SP first half title notice).

The group notice effect is an effect of displaying an image in which a plurality of objects progress as a group. A plurality of objects include any moving object such as a character such as a person, a fish or an animal, or a machine such as an airplane or a car. There may be one type of object such as a character, or a plurality of types. In the pachinko gaming machine 1, a plurality of types of group notice effects are provided. Specifically, a 6-person group notice in which 6 characters dressed as maids proceed in a group, a Baku Chu group notice in which a mouse character with a body of a bomb named Baku Chu progresses in a group, A Boingo group notice can be executed in which a character named Boingo progresses as a group.

In the present embodiment, whether or not the group notice effect is executed by the group notice lottery when the post-variation pattern of the post-variation numbers 6 to 8, 10 to 12 that develops into the SP reach or the final reach is determined. Or, the type of group notice effect to be performed is determined.

FIG. 34A shows a lottery table for executing the group notice lottery in stage A. In the present embodiment, even if variable display is performed based on the same fluctuation pattern, a plurality of types of stages are provided in which the production modes (background image, BGM, sound effects, characters appearing, etc.) are different from each other. .. As will be described in detail later, in the present embodiment, the stage A is a stage in which a character named Yumemu-chan, which is included in the six characters dressed as maids, is directed.

As shown in FIG. 34 (a), when the post-variation pattern of the post-variation numbers 6 to 8 corresponding to the loss is determined, the group notice effect is executed with a probability of 15%, and 6 of them have a probability of 13%. It will be decided as a crowd notice, and there is a 2% chance that it will be decided as a Boingo group notice. In addition, when the post-variation pattern of the post-variation numbers 10 to 12 corresponding to the hit is determined, the group notice effect is executed with a probability of 85%, and among them, the group notice effect is determined with a probability of 55%, and 30%. It is decided by the Boingo group notice with the probability of.

Here, considering that the probability of losing is about 319/320 and the probability of being determined by the post-variation pattern of post-variation numbers 6 to 8 is about 1/102, the variation numbers 6 to 8 at the time of loss The probability of being determined by the post-variation pattern is about 1/102. In this case, the probability that the group notice will be executed is about 15%, so that the probability that the group notice will be executed at the time of loss is about 0.15%. On the other hand, considering that the probability of becoming a big hit is about 1/320 and the probability of being determined by the post-variation pattern of post-variation numbers 10 to 12 is about 1 / 1.1, the variation numbers 10 to 12 at the time of hitting. The probability of being determined by the post-variation pattern is about 1/320. Then, in this case, since the probability that the group notice is executed is about 85%, the probability that the group notice is executed at the time of hit is about 0.27%. From this, the probability of becoming a big hit (reliability, expectation) when the group notice is executed is about 64%. The reliability (expectation) of the group notice is not limited to 64%, and if it exceeds 50%, it can be expected that the player will be hit by a big hit.

FIG. 34B shows a lottery table for executing the group notice lottery in stage B. As will be described in detail later, in the present embodiment, the stage B is a stage in which a character called Baku Chu is produced.

As shown in FIG. 34 (b), when the post-variation pattern of the post-variation numbers 6 to 8 corresponding to the loss is determined, the group notice effect is executed with a probability of 10%, and the explosion is performed with a probability of 8%. It will be decided as a Chu group notice, and there is a 2% chance that it will be decided as a Boingo group notice. In addition, when the post-variation pattern of the post-variation numbers 10 to 12 corresponding to the hit is determined, the group notice effect is executed with a probability of 90%, and among them, the group notice effect is determined with a probability of 60%, and 30 There is a% chance that it will be decided as a Boingo group notice.

Here, as described above, the probability of being determined as the post-variation pattern of the variation numbers 6 to 8 at the time of loss is about 1/102. In this case, the probability that the group notice will be executed is about 10%, so that the probability that the group notice will be executed at the time of loss is about 0.10%. On the other hand, the probability that the fluctuation pattern after the fluctuation numbers 10 to 12 is determined at the time of hit is about 1/320. Then, in this case, since the probability that the group notice is executed is about 90%, the probability that the group notice is executed at the time of hit is about 0.28%. From this, the probability (reliability, expectation) of a big hit when the group notice is executed is about 74%. The reliability (expectation) of the group notice is not limited to 74%, and if it exceeds 50%, it can be expected that the player will be hit by a big hit.

The SP first half title notice is an effect that suggests that when the SP reach is developed, it will be a big hit depending on the display mode of the character image indicating the title of the first half of the SP reach. In the present embodiment, the display of the character image of the first half title of the SP is executed in both the stage A and the stage B, but the advance notice effect for changing the display mode of the character image of the first half title of the SP is the case of the stage B. Is only executed. Even in the case of stage A, a notice effect for changing the display mode of the character image of the title in the first half of the SP may be executed.

In the present embodiment, whether or not the SP first half title notice is executed in the SP first half title notice lottery when the post-variation pattern of the post-variation numbers 6 to 12 that develops into the SP reach or the final reach is determined. , And the type of SP first half title notice to be executed is determined.

As shown in FIG. 34 (c), when the post-variation number 6 to 8 corresponding to the loss is determined, the SP first half title notice is executed with a probability of 20%, and the post-variation number corresponding to the hit is executed. If the post-variation pattern of 10 to 12 is determined, there is an 80% probability that the SP first half title notice will be executed.

Here, as described above, the probability of being determined as the post-variation pattern of the variation numbers 6 to 8 at the time of loss is about 1/102. In this case, since the probability that the SP first half title notice is executed is about 20%, the probability that the SP first half title notice is executed at the time of loss is about 0.20%. On the other hand, the probability that the fluctuation pattern after the fluctuation numbers 10 to 12 is determined at the time of hit is about 1/320. In this case, since the probability that the SP first half title notice is executed is about 80%, the probability that the SP first half title notice is executed at the time of hitting is about 0.25%. From this, the probability (reliability, expectation) of a big hit when the SP first half title notice is executed is about 56%. The reliability (expectation) of the SP first half title notice is not limited to 56%, and if it exceeds 50%, it can be expected that the player will be hit by a big hit.

In this way, the reliability (expectation of big hit) in the group notice is 64% (in the case of stage A) and 74% (in the case of stage B), while the reliability (in the case of big hit) in the SP first half title notice. Expectation) is 56%, and the group notice is more reliable than the SP first half title notice. Therefore, when the group notice is executed, the degree of advantage for the player is higher than when the SP first half title notice is executed, and the player is executed the group notice rather than the SP first half title notice. I have come to expect.

In addition, the boingo group notice in stage A is executed only with a probability of 2% at the time of loss, whereas it is executed with a probability of 30% at the time of hit, so when the boingo group notice is executed, it is executed. , Almost likely to be a big hit. On the other hand, the 6-person notice in stage A is executed with a probability of 13% at the time of loss, whereas it is executed with a probability of 55% at the time of hit, so even if the 6-person notice is executed, it is lost. The probability of being is greater than the Boingo group notice. Therefore, when the Boingo group notice is executed, the degree of advantage for the player is higher than when the 6-person group notice is executed, and the player is executed the Boingo group notice rather than the 6-person group notice. I have come to expect.

Similarly, the boingo group notice in stage B is executed only with a probability of 2% at the time of loss, whereas it is executed with a probability of 30% at the time of hit, so when the boingo group notice is executed. Is likely to be a big hit. On the other hand, the Baku Chu group notice in stage B is executed with a probability of 8% at the time of loss, whereas it is executed with a probability of 60% at the time of hit, so the Baku Chu group notice is executed. The possibility of losing is greater than the announcement of the Boingo group. Therefore, when the Boingo group notice is executed, the degree of advantage for the player is higher than when the Baku Chu group notice is executed, and the player executes the Boingo group notice rather than the Baku Chu group notice. I have come to expect that.

Furthermore, the 6-person group notice in stage A is executed with a probability of 13% at the time of loss, whereas it is executed with a probability of 55% at the time of hit. On the other hand, the Baku Chu Mondai notice in stage B is executed with a probability of 8% at the time of loss, and is executed with a probability of 60% at the time of hit. For this reason, the Baku Chu group notice in stage B is executed at a higher rate than the 6-person group notice in stage A at the time of a big hit. As a result, when the Baku Chu Mondai notice is executed in stage B, the degree of advantage for the player is higher than when the 6-person group notice is executed in stage A, and the player has 6 more than the 6-person group notice. We are now expecting the crowd announcement to be carried out.

The reliability of the group notice in stage A and the reliability of the group notice in stage B may be designed to be the same. In this case, both the group notice in stage A and the group notice in stage B need to be more reliable than the SP first half title notice, and the boingo group notice is higher than the 6-person group notice and the Baku Chu group notice. It suffices if the reliability is high.

[motion]
Next, the operation (action) of the pachinko gaming machine 1 will be described.

(Main operation of main board 11)
First, the main operations on the main board 11 will be described.

(Special symbol process processing)
FIG. 35 is a flowchart showing an example of the game control main process. When the power supply to the pachinko game machine 1 is started, the game control microcomputer 100 is started, and the game control main process is executed by the CPU 103.

In the game control main process shown in FIG. 35, the CPU 103 first sets interrupt prohibition (step S1). Subsequently, the CPU 103 makes necessary initial settings (step S2). The initial settings include stack pointer settings, register settings for built-in devices (CTC (counter / timer circuit), parallel input / output ports, etc.), settings for making the RAM 102 accessible, and the like.

Next, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the recovery condition is satisfied (step S3). The recovery condition can be satisfied when the clear signal is off, there is backup data, and the backup RAM is normal. When the power supply of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started, for example, if the clear switch 92 provided on the power supply board 17 is pressed, a clear signal in the ON state is input to the game control microcomputer 100. When such a clear signal in the ON state is input, it may be determined in step S3 that the recovery condition is not satisfied. The backup data may be stored in RAM 102, which is a backup RAM for game control. In step S3, the presence or absence of backup data, the presence or absence of data errors, and the like may be confirmed or inspected to determine whether or not the recovery conditions can be satisfied.

When the recovery condition is satisfied (Y in step S3), the CPU 103 executes the recovery process (step S4) and then the setting confirmation process (step S5). The CPU 103 sets the work area based on the stored contents of the RAM 102 by the recovery process in step S4. By setting the work area using the backup data stored in the RAM 102, the game state is restored when the power supply is stopped. For example, when the special symbol is changing, the state before the stop is special. It suffices if the fluctuation of the symbol can be resumed.

If the recovery condition is not satisfied (N in step S3), the CPU 103 executes the initialization process (step S6) and then the setting change process (step S7). The initialization process of step S6 includes a clear process for clearing the flags, counters, and buffers stored in the RAM 102, and the initial value is set in the work area by executing the clear process.

In the setting confirmation process of step S5, it is determined whether or not the predetermined setting confirmation condition is satisfied. The setting confirmation condition is satisfied, for example, when the detection signal from the door opening sensor 90 is on and the setting key 51 is turned on when the power supply is started. The setting confirmation process in step S5 is executed when the recovery conditions including the fact that the clear signal is in the off state are satisfied in step S3. Therefore, since the setting confirmation condition can be satisfied only when the clear signal is in the off state, the fact that the clear signal is in the off state can also be included in the setting confirmation condition.

When the setting confirmation condition is satisfied in the setting confirmation process in step S5, the setting confirmation state in which the setting value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 can be confirmed is set, and the setting is set from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12. A confirmation start command is sent. In the setting confirmation state, the setting value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 can be confirmed by the display on the display monitor 29. When the setting confirmation state is terminated, the setting confirmation end command is transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12.

When the pachinko gaming machine 1 is in the setting confirmation state, it may be in the gaming stop state in which the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is stopped. When the game is stopped, the launch of the game ball by the operation of the hitting ball operation handle 30, the detection of the game ball by various switches, and the like are stopped, and the lost symbol and the like are stopped and displayed, and the game stopped state different from the lost symbol. It suffices to control so that the display corresponding to is performed. When the setting confirmation state ends, the game stop state that accompanies this may also end.

In the setting change process of step S7, the CPU 103 determines whether or not a predetermined setting change condition is satisfied. The setting change condition is satisfied, for example, when the detection signal from the door opening sensor 90 is on and the setting key 51 is turned on when the power supply is started. The setting change condition may include that the clear signal is in the ON state.

When the setting change condition is satisfied in the setting change process of step S7, the setting value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is changed to the setting change state, and the setting is set from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12. A change start command is sent. In the setting change state, the set value is displayed on the display monitor 29, and each time the operation of the setting changeover switch 52 is detected, the numerical value displayed on the display monitor 29 is sequentially updated and displayed. After that, the CPU 103 stores (updates and stores) the set value displayed on the display monitor 29 in the backup area of the RAM 102 based on the fact that the setting key 51 is turned off by an operation by a staff member of the amusement park or the like. Turn off the display monitor 29. When the setting change state is terminated, the setting change end command is transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12.

When the pachinko game machine 1 is in the setting change state, the pachinko game machine 1 may be in the game stop state as in the case of the setting confirmation state. When the setting change state ends, the game stop state that accompanies this may also end.

When the effect control board 12 side receives the setting confirmation start command or the setting change start command, the control may be performed to notify that the setting is being confirmed or the setting is being changed. For example, a predetermined image may be displayed on the image display device 5, a predetermined sound may be output from the speakers 8L and 8R, and a light emitting member such as a game effect lamp 9 may be made to emit light in a predetermined manner.

The clear signal is turned on by, for example, pressing the clear switch 92 provided on the power supply board 17. Therefore, when the detection signal from the door opening sensor 90 is on and the setting key 51 is on when the power supply is started, if the clear switch 92 is on, the initialization process of step S6 is performed. The setting change process of step S7 is executed and the setting change state can be controlled. If the clear switch 92 is off, the setting confirmation process of step S5 is executed together with the recovery process of step S4 and the setting confirmation state can be controlled. .. When the detection signal from the door open sensor 90 is off or the setting key 51 is off when the power supply is started, if the clear switch 92 is on, the initialization process of step S6 is performed. While it is executed, it is not controlled to the setting change state, and if the clear switch 92 is off, the recovery process of step S4 is executed but not controlled to the setting confirmation state.

After executing the setting confirmation process or the setting change process, the CPU 103 executes the random number circuit setting process for initializing the random number circuit 104 (step S8). Then, the CPU 103 sets the CTC register built in the game control microcomputer 100 so that the timer is interrupted periodically every predetermined time (for example, 2 ms) (step S9), and enables interrupts. (Step S10). After that, the loop processing is started. After that, an interrupt request signal is sent from the CTC to the CPU 103 every predetermined time (for example, 2 ms), and the CPU 103 can periodically execute the timer interrupt process.

(Game control timer interrupt processing)
FIG. 36 is a flowchart showing an example of game control timer interrupt processing. When the CPU 103 that has executed the game control main process receives the interrupt request signal from the CTC and receives the interrupt request, it executes the game control timer interrupt process shown in the flowchart of FIG. 36. When the game control timer interrupt process shown in FIG. 36 is started, the CPU 103 first executes a predetermined switch process to perform the gate switch 21, the first start port switch 22A, and the second start port via the switch circuit 110. It is determined whether or not detection signals are received from various switches such as the switch 22B and the count switch 23 (step S21). Subsequently, the CPU 103 performs an abnormality diagnosis of the pachinko gaming machine 1 by executing a predetermined main-side error process, and can generate a warning if necessary according to the diagnosis result (step S22). After that, the CPU 103 executes a predetermined information output process to start, for example, jackpot information (information indicating the number of jackpot occurrences) supplied to the hall management computer installed outside the pachinko gaming machine 1. Data such as information (information indicating the number of start winning prizes) and probability fluctuation information (information indicating the number of times the probability change state has been reached) is output (step S23).

Following the information output process, the CPU 103 executes a game random number update process for updating at least a part of the game random numbers used on the main board 11 side by software (step S24). After that, the CPU 103 executes the special symbol process process (step S25). By executing the special symbol process process for each timer interrupt by the CPU 103, it is possible to manage the execution and hold of the special symbol game, control the big hit game state and the small hit game state, control the game state, and the like.

Following the special symbol process processing, the normal symbol process processing is executed (step S26). By executing the normal symbol process processing for each timer interrupt, the CPU 103 manages the execution and hold of the normal figure game based on the detection signal from the gate switch 21 (based on the passing of the game ball through the passing gate 41). It enables opening control of the variable winning ball device 6B based on "per-figure hit". The execution of the normal figure game is performed by driving the normal figure display unit 26, and the number of reserved normal figures is displayed by turning on the normal figure storage display unit 25.

After executing the normal symbol process process, as a part of the game control timer interrupt process, a process when a power failure occurs, a process for paying out a prize ball, and the like may be performed. After that, the CPU 103 executes the command control process (step S27). The CPU 103 may send and set an effect control command in each of the above processes. In the command control process of step S27, a process of transmitting the effect control command set for transmission to a control board on the sub side such as the effect control board 12 is performed. After executing the command control process, the interrupt is permitted and then the game control timer interrupt process is terminated.

(Special symbol process processing)
FIG. 37 is a flowchart showing an example of the special symbol process processing. The special symbol process process is a flowchart showing an example of the process executed in step S25 shown in FIG. 36. In this special symbol process process, the CPU 103 first executes a start winning determination process (step S101).

In the start winning determination process, a process of detecting the occurrence of a start winning, storing the hold information in a predetermined area of the RAM 102, and updating the hold storage number is executed. When the start winning is generated, the display result (including the jackpot type) and the random number value for determining the fluctuation pattern are extracted and stored as hold information. Further, a process of pre-reading and determining a display result or a fluctuation pattern may be executed based on the extracted random number value. After storing the hold information and the number of hold memories, the transmission setting for transmitting the effect control command for specifying the judgment result such as the occurrence of the start winning prize, the number of hold memories, the read-ahead judgment, etc. is set on the effect control board 12. Be told. The effect control command at the time of starting winning, which is set to be transmitted in this way, is executed from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 by, for example, executing the command control process in step S27 shown in FIG. 36 after the special symbol process process is completed. Is transmitted to.

After executing the start winning determination process in step S101, the CPU 103 selects and executes any of the processes of steps S110 to S120 according to the value of the special figure process flag provided in the RAM 102. In each process (steps S110 to S120) of the special symbol process process, a transmission setting for transmitting an effect control command corresponding to each process to the effect control board 12 is performed.

The special symbol normal processing in step S110 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is “0” (initial value). In this special symbol normal processing, it is determined whether or not to start the first special figure game or the second special figure game based on the presence or absence of the pending information. In addition, in the special symbol normal processing, whether or not the display result of the special symbol or decorative symbol is set to "big hit" or "small hit" based on the random value for determining the display result, and the big hit type when the display result is set to "big hit". Is determined (predetermined) before the display result is derived and displayed. Further, in the special symbol normal processing, a definite special symbol (either a big hit symbol, a small hit symbol, or a lost symbol) to be stopped and displayed in the special symbol game is set according to the determined display result. After that, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to "1", and the special symbol normal processing ends. The special figure game using the second special figure may be executed with priority over the special figure game using the first special figure (also referred to as special figure 2 priority digestion). Further, the winning order of the game balls to the first starting winning opening and the second starting winning opening may be memorized, and the starting condition of the special figure game may be satisfied in the winning order (also referred to as winning order digestion).

When making various determinations based on the random number values, various tables stored in the ROM 101 (tables in which the determination values to be compared with the random number values are assigned to the determination results) are referred to. The same applies to other decisions on the main board 11 and various decisions on the effect control board 12. In the effect control board 12, various tables are stored in the ROM 121.

The variation pattern setting process in step S111 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “1”. In this fluctuation pattern setting process, one of a plurality of types of fluctuation patterns is used by using a random value for determining the fluctuation pattern based on a preliminary determination result of whether or not the display result is a "big hit" or a "small hit". The process of deciding on is included. In the variation pattern setting process, when the variation pattern is determined, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "2", and the variation pattern setting process ends.

The fluctuation pattern includes the execution time of the special symbol game (special symbol fluctuation time) (which is also the execution time of the variable display of the decorative symbol), the mode of the variable display of the decorative symbol (presence or absence of reach, etc.), and the variable display of the decorative symbol. It specifies the content of the effect (type of reach effect, etc.), and is also called a variable display pattern.

The special symbol variation process in step S112 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is “2”. In this special symbol variation process, the process of setting the special symbol 1 variable display unit 21 and the special diagram 2 variable display unit 22 to change the special symbol, and the elapsed time from the start of the variation of the special symbol are performed. It includes processing to measure. In addition, it is also determined whether or not the measured elapsed time has reached the special figure fluctuation time corresponding to the fluctuation pattern. Then, when the elapsed time from the start of the special symbol variation reaches the special symbol variation time, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to "3", and the special symbol variation process ends.

The special symbol stop process in step S113 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is “3”. In this special symbol stop processing, the special symbol 1 variable display unit 21 and the special symbol 2 variable display unit 22 stop the fluctuation of the special symbol, and stop display (derive) the confirmed special symbol that is the display result of the special symbol. Contains the process of making settings for. Then, when the display result is "big hit", the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "4". If the display result is "missing", the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "0". When the display result is "missing", the game state is also updated when the time saving state or the probability change state is controlled and the end of the number of times cut is established. When the value of the special symbol process flag is updated, the special symbol stop processing ends.

The jackpot release preprocessing in step S114 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “4”. This big hit pre-opening process includes a process of setting to open the big winning opening by starting the execution of the round in the big hit game state based on the display result being "big hit". It has been. When the large winning opening is opened, a process of supplying a solenoid drive signal to the solenoid 82 for the large winning opening door is executed. At this time, for example, the upper limit period for opening the big winning opening and the upper limit number of executions for the round are set according to which type of jackpot is used. When these settings are completed, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "5", and the jackpot release preprocessing ends.

The process of opening the jackpot in step S115 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “5”. In this big hit opening process, the big winning opening is based on the process of measuring the elapsed time since the big winning opening is opened, the measured elapsed time, the number of game balls detected by the count switch 23, and the like. It includes a process of determining whether or not it is time to return the device from the open state to the closed state. Then, when the large winning opening is returned to the closed state, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "6" after executing a process of stopping the supply of the solenoid drive signal to the solenoid 82 for the large winning opening door. End the processing while the jackpot is open.

The post-processing after opening the jackpot in step S116 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “6”. In this post-opening process of the jackpot, a process of determining whether or not the number of executions of the round that opens the jackpot has reached the set maximum number of executions, and a jackpot game state when the maximum number of executions is reached. It includes processing to make settings to terminate. Then, when the number of round executions has not reached the upper limit, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "5", while when the number of round executions reaches the upper limit, the special figure process flag is set. The value is updated to "7". When the value of the special figure process flag is updated, the post-launch processing is completed.

The jackpot end processing of step S117 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “7”. In this jackpot end process, there is a process of waiting until the waiting time corresponding to the period in which the ending effect as an effect action for notifying the end of the jackpot game state is executed, and a probability change corresponding to the end of the jackpot game state. It includes processing to make various settings to start control and time reduction control. When such a setting is made, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "0", and the jackpot end processing ends.

The pachinko gaming machine 1 has a configuration in which the winning probability of a big hit and the payout rate change according to a set value. For example, in the special symbol normal processing of the special symbol process processing, the jackpot winning probability and the ball output rate are changed by using the display result determination table (winning probability) according to the set value. For example, the set value consists of 6 stages from 1 to 6, with 6 having the highest probability of winning a big hit, and the smaller the value in the order of 6, 5, 4, 3, 2, 1 the lower the probability of winning a big hit. In this example, when 6 is set as the set value, the advantage is highest for the player, and the smaller the value in the order of 6, 5, 4, 3, 2, 1 is, the lower the advantage is. .. If the jackpot winning probability changes according to the set value, the ball output rate may also change according to the set value. While the jackpot winning probability is constant regardless of the set value, the number of rounds in the jackpot gaming state may change according to the set value. The pachinko gaming machine 1 may be configured so that any one of a plurality of setting values having different advantages for the player can be set. The set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is notified by transmitting a set value designation command from the side of the main board 11 to the side of the effect control board 12.

The set value that can be set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 may be 5 or less or 7 or more. The smaller the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1, the more advantageous the player may be. The playability may be changed according to the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1. For example, when the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is 1, the jackpot probability in the normal state is 1/320, and the probability variation state is 65%. When the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is 2, the jackpot probability in the normal state is 1/200, and the gaming ball is provided inside the special variable winning ball device 7 during the jackpot game. While controlling the game state after the end of the big hit game to a probabilistic state based on passing through the switch, the game property (so-called V) in which the ratio of the game ball passing through the predetermined switch during the big hit game is different according to the fluctuation special figure. Probability variation type), and when the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is 3, the jackpot probability is 1/320 and the small hit probability is 1/50, and the game is played during high base (during time reduction control). It may be a game property (so-called 1 type 2 type mixed type) in which a ball is controlled to a big hit gaming state based on passing through a predetermined switch provided inside the special variable winning ball device 7. When the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is any of 1 to 3, the game playability is the same, but the jackpot probability and the small hit are higher than when these set values are any of 1 to 3. A setting may be provided in which the number of prize balls that can be obtained during the jackpot game is small while the probability is high (for example, when the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is any of 4 to 6). When the playability is changed according to the set value, a common switch may be used for different purposes. Specifically, when the set value is 1 to 3, the predetermined switch provided in the special variable winning ball device 7 is used as an effect switch (in order to execute a predetermined effect each time the game ball passes through the predetermined area). When the set value is 4 to 6, the predetermined switch is used as a game switch (for controlling the game state to the probability change state or the jackpot game state based on the fact that the game ball has passed the predetermined switch). It may be used as a switch).

The jackpot type may be determined at a different ratio depending on the set value based on the allocation of the determination value in the jackpot type determination table. Alternatively, the jackpot type may be determined at a common ratio regardless of the set value. The variation pattern may be determined at a different ratio depending on the set value based on the allocation of the determination values in the variation pattern determination table. Alternatively, the fluctuation pattern may be determined at a common ratio regardless of the set value. Since the execution rate of normal reach or super reach differs depending on the set value, the set value may be suggested by the frequency of execution of normal reach or super reach. Alternatively, the execution ratio of normal reach and super reach may be the same regardless of the set value. In addition, it may be possible to execute an arbitrary setting suggestion effect at different ratios according to the set value.

(Starting prize judgment process)
FIG. 38 is a flowchart showing a start winning prize determination process. The CPU 103 executes the start winning determination process in S101 of the special symbol process process shown in FIG. 37. In the start winning determination process, the CPU 103 first turns on the first starting port switch 22A based on the detection signal from the first starting opening switch 22A provided corresponding to the first starting winning opening formed by the winning ball device 6A. (Step S51). At this time, if the first start port switch 22A is on (Y in step S51), the number of reserved special figures reserved for the special figure game using the first special figure is a predetermined upper limit value. (For example, it is determined whether or not it is "4" as the upper limit storage number) (step S52). The CPU 103 may specify the first special figure reserved storage number by reading, for example, the first reserved storage number count value which is the stored value of the first reserved storage number counter provided in the game control counter setting unit (not shown). When the number of reserved first special figures is not the upper limit value in step S52 (N in step S52), for example, the stored value of the start port buffer provided in the game control buffer setting unit (not shown) is set to "1". (Step S53).

Variable when the first start port switch 22A is off in step S51 (N in step S51) or when the first special figure hold storage number reaches the upper limit value in step S52 (Y in step S52). Based on the detection signal from the second starting port switch 22B provided corresponding to the second starting winning opening formed by the winning ball device 6B, it is determined whether or not the second starting opening switch 22B is on (step). S54). At this time, if the second start port switch 22B is on (Y in step S54), the second special figure hold storage number, which is the hold storage number of the special figure game using the second special figure, is a predetermined upper limit value. (For example, it is determined whether or not it is "4" as the upper limit storage number) (step S55). The CPU 103 may specify the second special figure reserved storage number by reading, for example, the second reserved storage number count value which is the stored value of the second reserved storage number counter provided in the game control counter setting unit (not shown). When the second special figure reserved storage number is not the upper limit value in step S55 (N in step S55), for example, the stored value of the start port buffer provided in the game control buffer setting unit (not shown) is set to "2". (Step S56).

After executing any of the processes of step S53 and step S56, the special figure hold storage number corresponding to the start port buffer value, which is the stored value of the start port buffer, is updated to be added by 1 (step S57). For example, when the start port buffer value is "1", the first hold storage count value is added by 1, while when the start port buffer value is "2", the second hold storage count value is added by 1. In this way, the first hold memory count value is set to 1 when the game ball passes (enters) the first start winning opening and the first start condition corresponding to the special figure game using the first special figure is satisfied. Updated to increase. Further, the second reserved memory count value is set to 1 when the game ball passes (enters) the second start winning opening and the second start condition corresponding to the special figure game using the second special figure is satisfied. Updated to increase. At this time, the total number of reserved storages is also updated to be added by 1 (step S58). For example, the total hold storage count value, which is a stored value of the total hold storage counter provided in the game control counter setting unit (not shown), may be updated so as to be added by 1.

After executing the process of step S58, the CPU 103 uses the random number value random 1 for jackpot determination and the jackpot type determination from among the numerical data updated by the random number circuit 104 and the random number of the game control counter setting unit (not shown). Numerical data indicating the random number random 2 and the random number random 3 and 4 for determining the fluctuation pattern are extracted (step S59). Numerical data indicating each random number value extracted in this way is stored by being set as hold information at the beginning of an empty entry in the special figure hold storage unit corresponding to the start port buffer value (step S60). For example, when the start port buffer value is "1", numerical data indicating random values random 1 to random 4 is stored in the first special figure hold storage unit (not shown), while the start port buffer value is "2". At a certain time, numerical data indicating random values random 1 to random 4 is stored in a second special figure reservation storage unit (not shown).

For the numerical data indicating the random value random 1 for jackpot judgment and the random value random 2 for jackpot type judgment, whether or not the variable display result of the special symbol or decorative symbol is "big hit", and further, the variable display result is " It is used to determine the type of big hit when it is called "big hit". Random random values 3 and 4 for determining the variation pattern are used to determine the variation pattern including the variation display time of the special symbol or the decorative symbol. By executing the process of step S59, the CPU 103 extracts numerical data indicating all of the random value values used for determining the variable display mode including the variable display result of the special symbol and the decorative symbol and the variable display time.

Following the process of step S59, the transmission setting of the start port winning designation command according to the start port buffer value is performed (step S60). For example, when the start port buffer value is "1", the storage address of the first start prize designation command table in the ROM 101 is stored in the buffer area designated by the send command pointer in the send command buffer, thereby performing the effect control board 12 The setting for sending the first start winning prize designation command is made to. On the other hand, when the start port buffer value is "2", the storage address of the second start prize designation command table in the ROM 101 is stored in the buffer area of the transmission command buffer, so that the effect control board 12 is seconded. 2 Make settings for sending the start prize designation command. The start prize designation command set in this way is transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 by, for example, executing the command control process of S27 shown in FIG. 36 after the special symbol process process is completed. NS.

Following the process in step S60, the CPU 103 stores the random number value in the storage area corresponding to the hold storage (step S61). After that, the CPU 103 clears the start port buffer, initializes the stored value to "0" (step S62), and then ends the start winning determination process. As a result, even when both the first start port switch 22A and the second start port switch 22B simultaneously detect a valid start prize for the game ball, the process based on the detection of both valid start prizes can be reliably completed.

(Special design normal processing)
FIG. 39 is a flowchart showing an example of special symbol normal processing. As shown in FIG. 39, in the special symbol normal processing, the CPU 103 uses the first reserved storage buffer (storage buffer for storing the reserved storage information of the first special symbol) or the second reserved storage buffer (of the second special symbol). It is determined whether or not there is hold storage data in the storage buffer for storing the hold storage information (step S1001). When there is no hold storage data in either the first hold storage buffer or the second hold storage buffer (N in step S1001), it is determined whether or not a predetermined period has elapsed from the suspension of fluctuation (step S1002). If a predetermined period does not elapse from the suspension of fluctuation (N in step S1002), the special symbol normal processing is terminated. On the other hand, when a predetermined period has elapsed from the suspension of fluctuation (Y in step S1002), a process for transmitting a customer waiting demo designation command is performed (step S1003), and the special symbol normal process is terminated. Here, when the customer-waiting demo designation command is transmitted, the customer-waiting demo designation command sent flag indicating that the customer-waiting demo designation command has been sent is set. Then, when the special symbol normal processing after the next timer interrupt is executed after the customer waiting demo designation command is transmitted, the customer is repeated based on the fact that the customer waiting demo designation command sent flag is set. It is controlled not to send the wait demo specification command. Such a customer waiting demo designation command sent flag is reset when the next variation display of the special symbol is started.

When there is hold storage data in the first hold storage buffer or the second hold storage buffer (Y in step S1001), the CPU 103 indicates that the first data among the data set in the hold specific area indicates "second". It is determined whether or not the data is data (step S1004). When the first data set in the reserved specific area is not the data indicating the "second" (that is, the data indicating the "first") (N in step S1004), the CPU 103 uses the special symbol pointer (first). Data indicating "first" is set in (a flag indicating whether the special symbol process processing is being performed for the first special symbol or the special symbol process processing is being performed for the second special symbol) (step S1005). When the first data set in the reserved specific area is the data indicating "second" (Y in step S1004), the CPU 103 sets the data indicating "second" in the special symbol pointer (step S1006). ).

In this embodiment, hereinafter, the variable display of the first special symbol and the second special are performed according to whether the data indicating the "first" is set or the data indicating the "second" is set in the special symbol pointer. The variable display of the symbol is executed using a common processing routine. When the data indicating "first" is set in the special symbol pointer, the variation display of the first special symbol is performed based on the reserved storage data stored in the first reserved storage buffer. On the other hand, when the data indicating "second" is set in the special symbol pointer, the variation display of the second special symbol is performed based on the reserved storage data stored in the second reserved storage buffer.

Under the control of steps S1004 to S1006, if even one data of the second hold storage exists in the second hold storage buffer, the variation display of the second special symbol based on the data of the second hold storage is displayed. 1 Priority is given to the variable display of the first special symbol based on the data in the hold storage.

Next, the CPU 103 reads out each random number value stored in the storage area corresponding to the reserved storage number = 1 indicated by the special symbol pointer and stores it in the reserved storage buffer of the RAM 102 (step S1007). Specifically, when the special symbol pointer indicates "first", the CPU 103 has each random number value stored in the storage area corresponding to the first reserved storage number = 1 in the first reserved storage buffer. Is read and stored in the hold storage buffer of the RAM 102. Further, when the special symbol pointer indicates "second", the CPU 103 reads out each random number value stored in the storage area corresponding to the second reserved storage number = 1 in the second reserved storage buffer. It is stored in the hold storage buffer of the RAM 102.

Then, the CPU 103 subtracts 1 from the count value of the hold storage counter indicated by the special symbol pointer, and shifts the contents of each storage area (step S1008). Specifically, when the special symbol pointer indicates "first", the CPU 103 subtracts 1 from the count value of the first hold storage counter and sets each storage area in the first hold storage buffer. Shift the content. Further, when the special symbol pointer indicates "second", the count value of the second hold storage counter is subtracted by 1, and the contents of each storage area in the second hold storage buffer are shifted.

That is, when the special symbol pointer indicates "first", the CPU 103 is placed in the storage area corresponding to the first hold storage number = n (n = 2, 3, 4) in the first hold storage buffer of the RAM 102. Each stored random number value is stored in the storage area corresponding to the first reserved storage number = n-1. Further, when the special symbol pointer indicates "second", each stored in the storage area corresponding to the second reserved storage number = n (n = 2, 3, 4) in the second reserved storage buffer of the RAM 102. The random number value is stored in the storage area corresponding to the second reserved storage number = n-1.

Therefore, the order in which each random number value stored in each storage area corresponding to each first reserved storage number (or each second reserved storage number) is always extracted is the first reserved storage number (or each second reserved storage number). The order of the second reserved memory) = 1, 2, 3, 4 is matched.

Next, the CPU 103 controls to transmit the hold storage number designation command indicated by the special symbol pointer to the effect control CPU 120 based on the value of the hold storage number counter indicated by the special symbol pointer after subtraction (). Step S1009). In this case, when a value indicating "first" is set in the special symbol pointer, the CPU 103 controls to transmit the first hold storage number designation command. Further, when a value indicating "second" is set in the special symbol pointer, the CPU 103 controls to transmit the second hold storage number designation command.

Next, the CPU 103 transmits a background designation command (step S1010), reads a random R (random number for jackpot determination) from the hold storage buffer, and executes the jackpot determination module (step S1011). In this case, the CPU 103 reads out the jackpot determination random numbers extracted in the start winning determination process and stored in advance in the first hold storage buffer and the second hold storage buffer, and performs the jackpot determination. The jackpot determination module is a program that compares a predetermined jackpot determination value (see FIG. 24) with a random number for jackpot determination, and executes a process of determining a jackpot if they match. That is, it is a program that executes a jackpot determination process.

In the jackpot determination process, when the gaming state is in the probabilistic state (high probability state), the probability of becoming a jackpot is higher than when the gaming state is in the non-probability state (normal gaming state and time saving state). ing. Specifically, when the number of big hit judgment values is set in advance, the big hit judgment table (the table in which the numerical value in the lower column of FIG. 25 (a) is set) and the number of big hit judgment values are probable change. A normal jackpot determination table (a table in which the numerical value in the upper column of FIG. 25A is set), which is set less than the jackpot determination table, is provided. Then, the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the gaming state is in the probabilistic state, and when the gaming state is in the probabilistic state, the CPU 103 performs a jackpot determination process using the probabilistic jackpot determination table, and the gaming state is normal. In the state or the time saving state, the jackpot determination process is performed using the normal jackpot determination table. That is, when the value of the big hit determination random number (random 1) matches any of the big hit determination values shown in FIG. 25 (a), the CPU 103 determines that the special symbol is a big hit. If it is decided to make a big hit (Y in step S1011), the process proceeds to step S1012. It should be noted that deciding whether or not to make a big hit means deciding whether or not to shift to the big hit game state, but it also means deciding whether or not to make the stop symbol in the special symbol a big hit symbol. ..

It should be noted that confirmation of whether or not the current gaming state is in the probabilistic state is performed depending on whether or not the probabilistic flag is set. The probability change flag is set when the game state is changed to the probability change state, and is reset when the probability change state is finished. Specifically, the probability variation flag is set in the process of ending the jackpot game, and then the condition that the fluctuation display is performed a predetermined number of times (for example, 150 times) and the condition that the next jackpot is determined. When the earlier of the conditions is satisfied, the change display of the special symbol is ended and the stop symbol is reset at the timing of the stop display.

If the value of the big hit determination random number (random 1) does not match any of the big hit determination values (N in step S1011), the process proceeds to step S1015 described later.

If the value of the big hit determination random number (random 1) matches any of the big hit determination values in step S1011, the CPU 103 sets the big hit flag indicating that it is a big hit (step S1012). The jackpot flag is reset when the jackpot game ends. Then, as a table used to determine the jackpot type to one of a plurality of types, the first special symbol jackpot type determination table in FIG. 25 (b) and the second special symbol jackpot type in FIG. 25 (c) are used. Select one of the judgment tables. Specifically, when the special symbol pointer indicates "first", the CPU 103 selects the first special symbol jackpot type determination table shown in FIG. 25 (b). Further, when the special symbol pointer indicates "second", the CPU 103 selects the second special symbol jackpot type determination table shown in FIG. 25 (c). Then, the CPU 103 reads out the jackpot type determination random numbers extracted in the start winning determination process and stored in advance in the first hold storage buffer and the second hold storage buffer, and stores them in the hold storage buffer using the selected jackpot type determination table. The jackpot type and the jackpot symbol corresponding to the value corresponding to the value of the random number (random 2) for determining the jackpot type are determined (step S1013).

Further, the CPU 103 sets the jackpot type data indicating the determined jackpot type in the jackpot type buffer in the RAM 102 (step S1014).

Next, the CPU 103 sets a stop symbol of the special symbol (step S1015). Specifically, when the jackpot flag is not set, "-", which is a lost symbol, is set as a stop symbol of the special symbol. When the jackpot flag is set, the jackpot symbol determined in step S1014 is set as the stop symbol of the special symbol according to the determination result of the jackpot type.

Then, the CPU 103 transmits a display result designation command (step S1016), and updates the value of the special symbol process flag to a value corresponding to the variation pattern setting process (step S111) (step S1017).

(Variation pattern setting process)
FIG. 40 is a flowchart showing an example of the fluctuation pattern setting process. As shown in FIG. 40, in the variation pattern setting process, the CPU 103 determines the post-variation pattern based on random 3 and 4 according to the number of reserved storages and the presence / absence of a big hit (step S1101). Specifically, in the case of loss, the CPU 103 selects the post-variation pattern determination table shown in FIG. 29 according to the number of reserved storages, and after the selection, the post-variation pattern determination table and the value of random 3 are used as the post-variation pattern determination table. Determine the variation pattern. Further, in the case of a big hit, the CPU 103 selects the post-variation pattern determination table shown in FIG. 30 according to the type of jackpot, and selects the post-variation pattern determination table based on the selected post-variation pattern determination table and the value of random 4. decide.

Next, the CPU 103 determines the pre-variation pattern based on the random 5 (step S1102). Specifically, the CPU 103 selects the pre-variation pattern determination table shown in FIG. 31 according to the post-variation pattern determined in S1102, and pre-variates based on the selected pre-variation pattern determination table and the value of random 5. Determine the pattern.

Next, the CPU 103 controls to transmit the variation pattern command corresponding to the determined variation pattern (pre-variation pattern and post-variation pattern) to the effect control CPU 120 (step S1103).

Next, the CPU 103 sets a value corresponding to the fluctuation time corresponding to the selected fluctuation pattern in the fluctuation time timer formed in the RAM 102 (step S1104). Then, the CPU 103 controls to transmit the symbol variation designation command to the effect control CPU 120 (step S1105), and updates the value of the special symbol process flag to a value corresponding to the special symbol variation process (step S112) (step S1105). S1106).

(Special symbol variation processing)
FIG. 41 is a flowchart showing an example of special symbol variation processing. As shown in FIG. 41, in the special symbol variation processing, the CPU 103 subtracts 1 from the variation time timer (step S1201), and when the variation time timer times out (Y in step S1202), sets the value of the special symbol process flag to the special symbol. The value corresponding to the stop process (step S113) is updated (step S1203). If the fluctuation time timer has not timed out (N in step S1202), the process ends as it is.

(Special symbol stop processing)
FIG. 42 is a flowchart showing an example of the special symbol stop processing. As shown in FIG. 42, in the special symbol stop processing, the CPU 103 sets the end flag to end the variable display of the special symbol, and displays the stop symbol on the special figure 1 variable display unit 21 or the special figure 2 variable display unit 22. Control for derivation and display is performed (step S1301). When the data indicating "first" is set in the special symbol pointer, the variation of the first special symbol in the special diagram 1 variable display unit 21 is terminated, and the special symbol pointer indicates "second". When the data is set, the variation of the second special symbol on the special figure 2 variable display unit 22 is terminated. In addition, a symbol confirmation designation command is set in the effect control CPU 120 (step S1302). As a result, the symbol confirmation designation command is transmitted to the effect control CPU 120. Next, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the jackpot flag is set (step S1303). Then, if the jackpot flag is not set (N in step S1303), the process proceeds to step S1309.

When the jackpot flag is set (Y in step S1303), the CPU 103 resets the probability change flag and the time saving flag (step S1304). Next, a jackpot start designation command and a right-handed display lighting command are transmitted to the effect control CPU 120 (step S1305).

In addition, referring to the opening pattern data stored in ROМ101, the number of opening times (for example, 5 times or 10 times), the opening time (for example, 29 seconds), and the interval between rounds are obtained for the normal large winning opening and the V large winning opening. Data indicating an opening mode such as an interval time (for example, 0.5 seconds) is set in a predetermined storage area (step S1306). For example, in the case of a normal big hit of 3R, an opening mode for opening the normal big winning opening in all of 1 to 3R is stored in a predetermined storage area provided in the RAM 102. In the case of a probabilistic jackpot of 5R, an opening mode in which the normal large winning opening is opened at the 1st to 3rd Rs and the 5th R and the V large winning opening is opened at the 4th R is stored in a predetermined storage area provided in the RAM 102. Further, in the case of a probability variation jackpot of 10R, an opening mode in which the normal large winning opening is opened at the 1st to 8th Rs and the 10th R and the V large winning opening is opened at the 9th R is stored in a predetermined storage area provided in the RAM 102. .. The data of the number of times of opening (5 times or 10 times) is set in the number of times of opening counter for counting the number of times of opening.

Further, a value corresponding to the fanfare time (time for notifying the occurrence of the jackpot, for example, in the image display device 5), which is the jackpot display time, is set in the jackpot control timer (step S1307). After that, in the big hit opening preprocessing, the big winning opening control timer is subtracted by 1, and when it becomes 0, the big winning opening is opened and the round is started. Then, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the jackpot opening pre-processing (step S114) (step S1308), and the processing is terminated.

If it is determined in step S1303 that the jackpot flag is not set (N in step S1304), the CPU 103 determines whether or not the time saving flag indicating that the time saving state is set is set (step S1309). .. If the time saving flag is not set (N in step S1309), the process proceeds to step S1316. When the time saving flag is set (Y in step S1309), the counter value of the time saving number counter indicating the remaining number of fluctuations in the time saving state is subtracted by 1 (step S1310). Next, the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the value of the time reduction counter has become 0 (step S1311). When the value of the time reduction counter becomes 0 (Y in step S1311), it is determined that the duration of the time reduction state has expired, and the time reduction flag is reset (step S1312). As a result, when the variable display resulting in the loss display result is performed a specific number of times (150 times) in the reduced working hours state, the gaming state shifts from the reduced working hours state to the non-reduced working hours state. If the value of the time reduction counter is not 0 in step S1311 (N in step S1311), the process proceeds to step S1316.

After step S1312, it is determined whether or not the probability change flag indicating the probability change state is set (step S1313). If the probability change flag is set (Y in step S1313), the probability change flag is reset (step S1314). Next, the CPU 103 transmits a normal state designation command to the effect control CPU 120 in response to the transition of the game state from the time saving state to the normal state (low probability / low base state) (step S1315), and in step S1316. move on. If the probability change flag is not set in step S1313 (N in step S1313), the process proceeds to step S1315 without performing the process of step S1314. Then, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the special symbol normal process (step S110) (step S1316), and the process ends.

(Big hit pre-opening treatment)
FIG. 43 is a flowchart showing an example of the jackpot opening preprocessing. As shown in FIG. 43, in the jackpot opening preprocessing, the CPU 103 sets the value of the jackpot control timer by -1 (subtraction update) (step S1401). Then, it is determined whether or not the value of the large winning opening control timer is 0 (step S1402), and if the value of the large winning opening control timer is not 0 (N in step S1402), the process ends.

When the value of the large winning opening control timer is 0 (Y in step S1402), a command indicating that the large winning opening is open is transmitted to the effect control CPU 120 (step S1403). Then, the solenoid 82 is driven according to the opening pattern to open the normal large winning opening (step S1404). As a result, the large winning opening is usually opened in the 1st round.

Next, the CPU 103 sets the maximum time during which the large winning opening can be opened (large winning opening opening time) by the large winning opening control timer based on the opening pattern data (for example, the data stored in the RAM 102 in step S1306). The corresponding large winning opening opening time (for example, 29 seconds) is set (step S1405). Then, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the jackpot opening process (step S115) (step S1406), and the process ends.

(Processing during jackpot opening)
FIG. 44 is a flowchart showing an example of the processing during the opening of the jackpot. As shown in FIG. 44, in the process during the jackpot opening process, the CPU 103 sets the value of the jackpot control timer to -1 (subtraction update) (step S1501).

Then, the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the value of the large winning opening control timer has become 0 (step S1502). When the value of the large winning opening control timer is 0 (Y in step S1502), the process proceeds to step S1511. When the value of the large winning opening control timer is not 0 (N in step S1502), it is determined whether or not the normal large winning opening or the V large winning opening is being opened (step S1503). Whether or not the normal large winning opening or the V large winning opening is open may be determined by the value of the opening count counter.

If it is determined in step S1503 that the normal large winning opening or the V large winning opening is not open (N in step S1503), the process ends.

If the normal large winning opening or the V large winning opening is open (Y in step S1503), it is determined whether or not the count switch 23 or the V winning switch 24 is turned on (step S1504). If neither the count switch 23 nor the V winning switch 24 is turned on (N in step S1504), the process ends. On the other hand, if either the count switch 23 or the V winning switch 24 is turned on (Y in step S1504), the winning number counter is incremented by +1 (addition update) (step S1505).

Next, it is determined whether or not the probability variation determination flag is set (step S1506). The probability change determination flag is a flag set when it is determined that the probability change state is controlled when a V prize is generated. If the probability change determination flag is set (Y in step S1506), the process proceeds to step S1510. On the other hand, if the probability change determination flag is not set (N in step S1506), it is determined whether or not the V winning switch 24 is turned on (step S1507). If the V winning switch 24 is not turned on (N in step S1507), the process proceeds to step S1510. On the other hand, if the V winning switch is turned on (Y in step S1507), the probability change determination flag is set (step S1508), the probability change determination device passage designation command is transmitted (step S1509), and the process proceeds to step S1510. do.

Then, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the value of the winning number counter is a predetermined number (for example, 10) (step S1510). If the value of the winning number counter does not reach a predetermined number (N in step S1510), the process ends.

When the value of the winning number counter is a predetermined number (Y in step S1510), the CPU 103 controls to drive the solenoid 82 to close the normal large winning opening, or drives the solenoid 83 to drive the V large winning opening. One of the controls for closing the solenoid is controlled (step S1511). Next, the CPU 103 performs a process of clearing (setting to 0) the value of the winning number counter (step S1512). Next, the CPU 103 updates the value of the special symbol process flag to a value corresponding to the jackpot release post-processing (step S116) (step S1513), and ends the processing.

(Post-processing after opening the jackpot)
FIG. 45 is a flowchart showing an example of post-processing after opening the jackpot. As shown in FIG. 45, in the jackpot opening post-processing, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the value of the opening count counter is 0 (step S1601).

If the value of the open count counter is 0 (Y in step S1601), the jackpot end designation mand is transmitted to the effect control CPU 120 (step S1602), and the jackpot end time (the jackpot game is completed) is sent to the jackpot control timer. For example, a value corresponding to (time to be notified in the image display device 5) is set (step S1603), and the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the jackpot end processing (step S117) (step S1604). End the process.

In step S1601, if the value of the opening count counter is not 0 (N in step S1601), a designated mand is transmitted to the effect control CPU 120 after opening the large winning opening (step S1605), and a round is sent to the large winning opening control timer. A value corresponding to the interval time from the end to the start of the next round is set (step S1606).

Next, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the round before the round in which the V-large winning opening is opened (also referred to as the V-opening round), that is, the next round is the V-opening round (step S1607). If it is not before the V opening round (N in step S1607), the solenoid 82 is driven to control the normal opening of the large winning opening (step S1608). On the other hand, when it is before the V opening round (Y in step S1607), the solenoid 83 is driven to control the opening of the V large winning opening (step S1609).

After step S1608 or step S1609, the CPU 103 transmits a designated mand during the opening of the large winning opening to the effect control CPU 120 (step S1610). Then, the CPU 103 updates the value of the special symbol process flag to a value corresponding to the jackpot opening process (step S115) (step S1611), and ends the process.

(Big hit end processing)
FIG. 46 is a flowchart showing an example of the jackpot end processing. As shown in FIG. 46, in the jackpot end process, the CPU 103 subtracts 1 from the value of the jackpot control timer for which the jackpot end time is set (step S1701). Then, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the value of the big winning opening control timer is 0 (whether or not the big hit end time has elapsed) (step S1702). If the value of the large winning opening control timer is not 0 (N in step S1702), the process ends. If the value of the big winning opening control timer is 0 (Y in step S1702), the big hit flag is reset (step S1703).

Next, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the probability variation determination flag set by passing through the V winning region is set (step S1704). If the probability change determination flag is not set (N in step S1704), the process proceeds to step S1705. If the probability change determination flag is set in step S1704 (Y in step S1704), the probability change flag indicating the probability change state is set (step S1707). Next, a probability change state designation command is transmitted to the effect control CPU 120 (step S1708), the probability change determination flag is reset (step S1709), and the process proceeds to step S1710.

In step S1710, a time saving flag indicating that the time saving state is set is set (step S1710), and 150 is set in the time saving number counter (step S1711). Then, the process proceeds to step S1712.

On the other hand, if the probability variation determination flag is not set in step S1704 (N in step S1704), in step S1705, a time saving flag indicating that the time saving state is set is set (step S1705), and 100 is set in the time saving number counter. (Step S1706), the process proceeds to step S1712.

In step S1712, a time saving state designation command is transmitted to the effect control CPU 120 (step S1712). Then, the CPU 103 updates the value of the special symbol process flag to a value corresponding to the special symbol normal process (step S110) (step S1713), and ends the process. It should be noted that the effect control CPU 120 side can recognize which of the probabilistic change, the time saving, and the normal gaming state is in the probabilistic change state specification command transmitted from the CPU 103.

(Main operation of production control board 12)
Next, the main operation of the effect control board 12 will be described.

(Main processing of production control)
In the effect control board 12, when the power supply voltage is supplied from the power supply board or the like, the effect control CPU 120 is activated to execute the effect control main process as shown in the flowchart of FIG. 47. FIG. 47 is a flowchart showing an example of the effect control main process. When the effect control main process shown in FIG. 47 is started, the effect control CPU 120 first executes a predetermined initialization process (step S71) to clear the RAM 122, set various initial values, and press the effect control board 12. Set the registers of the mounted CTC (counter / timer circuit). Further, the initial operation control process is executed (step S72). In the initial operation control process, control for performing the initial operation of the movable body 32, such as control for driving the movable body 32 to return to the initial position and control for confirming a predetermined operation, is executed.

After that, it is determined whether or not the timer interrupt flag is turned on (step S73). The timer interrupt flag is set to the ON state every time a predetermined time (for example, 2 milliseconds) elapses, based on the register setting of the CTC, for example. At this time, if the timer interrupt flag is off (N in step S73), the process of step S73 is repeatedly executed and waits.

Further, on the effect control board 12, an interrupt for receiving the effect control command from the main board 11 is generated in addition to the timer interrupt that is generated every time a predetermined time elapses. This interrupt is, for example, an interrupt generated when the effect control INT signal from the main board 11 is turned on. When an interrupt occurs due to the effect control INT signal being turned on, the effect control CPU 120 automatically sets interrupt disabled, but if a CPU that is not automatically interrupt disabled is used, an interrupt occurs. It is desirable to emit a prohibition command (DI command). The effect control CPU 120 executes, for example, a predetermined command reception interrupt process in response to an interrupt caused by the effect control INT signal being turned on. In this command reception interrupt process, among the input ports included in the I / O 125, the effect control command is taken in from a predetermined input port that receives the control signal transmitted from the main board 11 via the relay board 15. The effect control command captured at this time is stored in, for example, the effect control command reception buffer provided in the RAM 122. After that, the effect control CPU 120 sets the interrupt enable, and then ends the command reception interrupt process.

If the timer interrupt flag is on in step S73 (Y in step S73), the timer interrupt flag is cleared and turned off (step S74), and the command analysis process is executed (step S75). In the command analysis process, for example, after reading various effect control commands transmitted from the game control microcomputer 100 of the main board 11 and stored in the effect control command reception buffer, the read effect control commands are used. Corresponding settings and controls are performed. For example, the read effect control command may be stored in a predetermined area of the RAM 122 or stored in the RAM 122 so that which effect control command is received and the content specified by the effect control command can be confirmed by the effect control process processing or the like. Turn on the provided reception flag. Further, when the effect control command specifies the game state, the display control unit 123 may be instructed to display the background according to the game state.

After executing the command analysis process in step S75, the effect control process process is executed (step S76). In the effect control process processing, for example, an effect image display operation in the display area of the image display device 5, an audio output operation from the speakers 8L and 8R, a lighting operation in a decorative light emitting body such as a game effect lamp 9 and a decorative LED, and a movable body 32. Controls are performed to operate various production devices such as the driving operation of the LED. In addition, the control content of the effect operation using various effect devices is determined, determined, set, and the like according to the effect control command transmitted from the main board 11.

Following the effect control process process in step S76, the effect random number update process is executed (step S77), and at least a part of the effect random numbers used on the effect control board 12 side is updated by the software. After that, the process returns to the process of step S73. Other processes may be executed before returning to the process of step S73.

(Production control process processing)
FIG. 48 is a flowchart showing an example of the effect control process process. The effect control process process is a process executed in step S76 of FIG. 47. In the effect control process process shown in FIG. 48, the effect control CPU 120 first executes the read-ahead notice setting process (step S161). In the pre-reading notice setting process, for example, a determination, determination, setting, and the like for executing the pre-reading notice effect are performed based on the effect control command at the time of starting winning, which is transmitted from the main board 11. In addition, a process for displaying the hold display is executed based on the number of hold storages specified from the effect control command.

After executing the process of step S161, the effect control CPU 120 selects and executes any of the following processes of steps S170 to S177 according to the value of the effect process flag provided in the RAM 122, for example.

The variable display start waiting process in step S170 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “0” (initial value). This variable display start waiting process is a process of determining whether or not to start the variable display of the decorative symbol on the image display device 5 based on whether or not a command or the like for designating the start of the variable display is received from the main board 11. Etc. are included. When it is determined that the variable display of the decorative symbol on the image display device 5 is to be started, the value of the effect process flag is updated to "1", and the variable display start waiting process is terminated.

The variable display start setting process in step S171 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “1”. In this variable display start setting process, the display result of the variable display of the decorative symbol (fixed decorative symbol), the mode of the variable display of the decorative symbol, the reach effect, and various types are based on the display result and the variation pattern specified by the effect control command. It is determined whether or not various effects such as a notice effect are executed, their modes, and the execution start timing. Then, an effect control pattern (a collection of control data for instructing the display control unit 123 to execute the effect) that reflects the determination result and the like is set. After that, based on the set effect control pattern, the display control unit 123 is instructed to start executing the variable display of the decorative symbol, the value of the effect process flag is updated to "2", and the variable display start setting process is completed. The display control unit 123 starts the variable display of the decorative symbol on the image display device 5 in response to the instruction to start the execution of the variable display of the decorative symbol.

The variable display effect process in step S172 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “2”. In this variable display effect processing, the effect control CPU 120 instructs the display control unit 123 to display the effect image based on the effect control pattern set in step S171 on the display screen of the image display device 5. Or, driving the movable body 32, outputting voice or sound effect from the speakers 8L, 8R by outputting a command (sound effect signal) to the voice control board 13, and commanding the lamp control board 14 (illumination signal). Various effect controls are executed during the variable display of the decorative pattern, such as turning on / off / blinking the game effect lamp 9 and the decorative LED according to the output. After performing such effect control, for example, an end code indicating the end of variable display of the decorative symbol is read from the effect control pattern, or a command is received from the main board 11 to specify that the fixed decorative symbol is to be stopped and displayed. In response to what has been done, the final decorative symbol, which is the display result of the decorative symbol, is stopped and displayed. When the fixed decorative symbol is stopped and displayed, the value of the effect process flag is updated to "3", and the effect process during variable display ends.

The special figure hit waiting process in step S173 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “3”. In this special figure hit waiting process, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not an effect control command that specifies to start the big hit game state has been received from the main board 11. Then, when the effect control command for specifying the start of the jackpot game state is received, if the command specifies the start of the jackpot game state, the value of the effect process flag is updated to "4". In addition, when the reception waiting time of the command elapses without receiving the command specifying to start the jackpot game state, it is determined that the display result in the special figure game is "missing", and the effect process flag. The value of is updated to the initial value "0". When the value of the effect process flag is updated, the waiting process for hitting the special figure ends.

The jackpot effect process in step S174 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “4”. In this big hit middle effect processing, the effect control CPU 120 sets, for example, an effect control pattern corresponding to the effect content in the big hit game state, and executes various effect controls in the big hit game state based on the set content. Further, in the big hit middle effect processing, for example, the value of the effect process flag is set to a value corresponding to the ending effect process in response to receiving a command from the main board 11 to specify the end of the big hit game state. Update to "" and end the production process during the big hit.

The ending effect process of step S175 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “5”. In this ending effect processing, the effect control CPU 120 sets, for example, an effect control pattern corresponding to the end of the jackpot game state, and controls various effects of the ending effect at the end of the jackpot game state based on the setting contents. Run. After that, the value of the effect process flag is updated to the initial value "0", and the ending effect process ends.

(Variable display start setting process)
FIG. 49 is a flowchart showing an example of the variable display start setting process. As shown in FIG. 49, the effect control CPU 120 confirms whether or not the result of the variable display is determined to be lost (step S7101). If the effect control CPU 120 is determined to be lost, it confirms whether or not a command corresponding to the non-reach fluctuation pattern has been received as the fluctuation pattern command (step S7103).

When the effect control CPU 120 determines that a command corresponding to the non-reach fluctuation pattern has been received, the effect control CPU 120 uses the loss symbol determination data table to determine the display result of the loss that does not reach as the final stop of the effect symbol (step). S7105), the process proceeds to step S7106.

When it is determined in the process of step S7103 that it is not a non-reach variation pattern (when it is determined that it is a reach variation pattern), the stop symbol of the effect symbol constituting the combination of reach symbols is determined (step S7104), and step S7106 Proceed to.

Further, when it is not decided to make a loss in the process of step S7101 (when it is decided to make a big hit), the effect control CPU 101 configures a combination of big hit symbols according to the type of big hit. The stop symbol of the effect symbol is determined (step S7102), and the process proceeds to step S7106.

Next, after executing the effect setting process (step S7106) for performing the process for setting various effects in the variable display (for example, the group notice setting process), the process proceeds to step S7107.

In step S7107, the effect control pattern is determined to be one of a plurality of types of effect control patterns. In step S7107, the symbol variation control is performed according to the variation pattern specified by the variation pattern designation command and various effect control (effect operation) patterns specified by the effect control pattern of the effect determined in the process of step S7106. Among the plurality of types of symbol variation control patterns stored in the pattern table, one of the effect control patterns corresponding to the various specified effect operation patterns is selected and determined as the pattern to be used.

In the control pattern table stored in the ROM 121, for example, the effect symbol in the display area of the image display device 5 during the period from the start of the variation of the effect symbol to the stop display of the final stop symbol. Data indicating the control contents of various production operations such as the fluctuation display operation, the effect display operation in the reach effect, the effect display operation by the pseudo-ream effect, and the effect display operation in the advance notice effect are stored as multiple types of symbol variation control patterns. Has been done.

In addition, each symbol variation control pattern can be used to display variations of the effect symbols such as the effect control process timer setting value, the effect control process timer determination value, the effect display control data, the voice control data, the lamp control data, and the end code. It includes control data for controlling various effect operations according to the situation, and the contents of various effect controls and the switching timing of the effect control are set in chronological order.

Next, the process table corresponding to the effect control pattern is selected (step S7108). Then, the process timer (effect setting process timer) in the process data of the selected process table is started (step S7109).

After executing the process of step S7109, the effect device (image display device 5 as the effect component, various lamps as the effect component, and various lamps as the effect component) according to the contents of the process data (display control execution data, lamp control execution data, sound number data). Then, the control of the speakers 8L, 8R) as the effect parts is started (step S7110). For example, according to the display control execution data, the image display device 5 outputs a command to display an image (including an effect symbol) corresponding to the fluctuation pattern. Further, a control signal (lamp control execution data) is output to the lamp control board 14 in order to control lighting / extinguishing of light emitters such as various LEDs. Further, in order to output the voice from the speakers 8L and 8R, the control signal (sound number data) is output to the voice control board 13.

Then, a value corresponding to the fluctuation time specified by the fluctuation pattern command is set in the fluctuation display time timer (step S7111), and the value of the effect control process flag is set to a value corresponding to the effect processing during variable display (step S172). (Step S7112), the variable display start setting process ends.

(Group notice setting process)
FIG. 50 is a flowchart showing an example of the group notice setting process. The group notice setting process is a process included in the variable display start setting process (step S171).

As shown in FIG. 50, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not a variation pattern command capable of executing the group notice has been received (step S7061). Specifically, the effect control CPU 120 issues a fluctuation pattern command including a post-variation pattern of post-variation numbers 6 to 8 at the time of loss, and a fluctuation pattern including a post-variation pattern of post-variation numbers 10 to 12 at the time of hitting. Determine if a command has been received. The fluctuation patterns including the post-variation patterns of the post-variation numbers 6 to 8 are the fluctuation patterns of the main fluctuation numbers 8 to 15, and the fluctuation patterns including the post-variation patterns of the post-variation numbers 10 to 12 are the main fluctuation numbers 18. It is a fluctuation pattern of ~ 26.

When the effect control CPU 120 has not received the variation pattern command capable of executing the group notice (N in step S7061), the process ends. On the other hand, when the effect control CPU 120 receives the variation pattern command capable of executing the group notice (Y in step S7061), the effect control CPU 120 converts the variation time of the variation pattern corresponding to the variation pattern command into the number of frames (step S7062). For example, in the case of the fluctuation pattern of the main variation number 22, since the pre-variation time is 41500 msec, the number of frames is about 1246, and since the post-variation time is 91900 msec, the number of frames is about 3000. Further, for example, in the case of the fluctuation pattern of the main variation number 26, since the pre-variation time is 62000 msec, the number of frames is about 1861, and since the post-variation time is 142,800 msec, the number of frames is about 4288. ..

The effect control CPU 120 executes a group notice lottery (step S7063). Specifically, the effect control CPU 120 uses the group notice lottery table shown in FIGS. 34 (a) and 34 (b) to determine whether or not to execute the group notice based on the post-variation number, and to execute the group notice. Determine the type of.

The effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the group has won the advance notice lottery. If the effect control CPU 120 is not won in the group notice lottery (N in step S7064), the process ends. On the other hand, when the effect control CPU 120 wins the group notice lottery (Y in step S7064), the effect control pattern for executing the group notice according to the stage is extracted (step S7065), and the process ends.

For example, as shown in Example 1, in the case of the fluctuation pattern of the main fluctuation number 22 and in the case of stage A, the effect control is performed so that the group notice is executed from the 985th frame out of the 1246 frames in the previous fluctuation. The pattern is set. Further, in the case of the fluctuation pattern of the main variation number 22 and in the case of the stage B, the effect control pattern is set so as to execute the group notice from the 1385th frame out of the 3000 frames in the post-variation.

For example, as shown in Example 2, in the case of the fluctuation pattern of the main fluctuation number 26 and in the case of stage A, the effect control is performed so that the group notice is executed from the 1600th frame out of the 1861 frames in the previous fluctuation. The pattern is set. Further, in the case of the fluctuation pattern of the main variation number 26 and in the case of the stage B, the effect control pattern is set so as to execute the group notice from the 2000th frame out of the 4288 frames in the post-variation.

As described above, in the present embodiment, in the case of stage A, the group notice is executed in the pre-variation, whereas in the case of stage B, the group notice is executed in the post-variation. There is.

(Group notice execution processing)
FIG. 51 is a flowchart showing an example of the group notice execution process. The group advance notice execution process is a process included in the variable display during effect process (step S172).

As shown in FIG. 51, the effect control CPU 120 subtracts one frame at a time from the number of frames corresponding to the effect control pattern set in the variable display start setting process (step S7201). For example, when the effect control pattern corresponding to the variation pattern of the main variation number 26 is set, the effect control CPU 120 subtracts one frame from the 6149th frame, which is the total number of frames.

When the effect control pattern for executing the group advance notice is not set (N in step S7202), the effect control CPU 120 ends the process. On the other hand, when the effect control pattern for executing the group notice is set (Y in step S7202), the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the frame of the group notice execution timing has been reached (S7203). For example, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the 1600th frame has been reached in the case of the fluctuation pattern of the main fluctuation number 26 and in the case of the stage A.

If the effect control CPU 120 has not reached the frame of the execution timing of the group notice (N in step S7203), the process ends. On the other hand, when the effect control CPU 120 reaches the frame of the execution timing of the group notice (Y in step S7203), the effect control CPU 120 controls various effect devices to execute the group notice (step S7204). For example, the effect control CPU 120 controls the game effect lamp 9 to turn on, blink, or turn off the game effect lamp 9 based on the group notice lighting table shown in FIGS. 66 to 72, which will be described later, and controls the speakers 8R and 8L. Controls to output sound. After that, the effect control CPU 120 ends the process.

[Outline of game progress]
In the pachinko gaming machine 1 configured as described above, the game proceeds as follows. In the pachinko gaming machine 1, the player first hits the left side to launch the game ball toward the first flow path passing through the area on the left side of the game area. When the launched game ball enters the first starting winning opening formed in the winning ball device 6A, the first special figure game is started. As a result of the first special figure game, when the special figure 1 variable display unit 21 is in a display mode showing a big hit symbol, a big hit occurs.

As described above, the types of jackpots in the first special figure game include normal jackpots 1 and 2, and probabilistic jackpots 1 to 4. When a big hit occurs, a fanfare effect is executed, and a right-handed promotion effect that encourages the player to strike right is executed. As a right-handed promotion effect, characters (for example, "right-handed") and figures (for example, an arrow pointing to the right, which is the direction of the second flow path) that encourage right-handed characters (for example, "right-handed") are displayed on the screen of the image display device 5. In addition to displaying an image, the right-handed display unit 30 of the special figure LED substrate 20 and the right-handed display unit 55 of the fourth symbol unit 50 also prompt right-handed by lighting a lighting means such as an LED. As a result, the player will hit right after that.

During the round of the jackpot game state, the jackpot is opened a predetermined number of times (for example, 3 times in the case of a normal jackpot of 3R and 10 times in the case of a probability variation jackpot of 10R). One opening of the big winning opening is between the elapsed timing of a predetermined period (for example, 29 seconds) and the timing until the number of game balls that have entered the big winning opening reaches a predetermined number (for example, 10). It will continue until the earlier timing.

When the ending effect after the big hit game state is completed, the game state is controlled to the reduced working hours state over a predetermined number of fluctuations (for example, 100 times). Further, when a V prize is generated during the jackpot round, the gaming state is controlled to the probabilistic state over a predetermined number of fluctuations (for example, 100 times) controlled in the time saving state.

Even in the probability change state or the time saving state after the big hit round, the right-handed promotion effect is continuously executed by the image display device 5, the right-handed display unit 30, and the right-handed display unit 55. For this reason, the player is always urged to hit right by the right-handed promotion effect even in the time-saving state after the big hit round is completed after the first big hit (also referred to as the first hit) occurs.

In the time saving state, control is executed to shorten the average special figure fluctuation time (period in which the special figure is changed) from the normal state, and the average normal figure fluctuation time (period in which the normal figure is changed) is executed. Is executed to shorten the time from the normal state, and further, the control to improve the probability of "hit the normal figure" in the normal state game is executed. Further, in the time saving state, the variable winning ball device 6B forming the second starting winning opening is opened more frequently, so that the game ball enters the second starting winning opening more frequently and the second start is started. Electric chew support control may be performed to facilitate winning a prize in the winning opening (higher entry, higher frequency).

In the time saving state after the big hit round, the second special figure game is started by the launched game ball entering the second starting winning opening formed in the variable winning ball device 6B. As a result of the second special figure game, when the special figure 2 variable display unit 22 is in a display mode showing a big hit symbol, a big hit (also referred to as a continuous chan hit) occurs.

As described above, there are 5 to 9 probabilistic jackpots as the types of jackpots in the second special figure game. When a big hit occurs, a fanfare effect is executed. The right-handed promotion effect by the image display device 5, the right-handed display unit 30, and the right-handed display unit 55 has continued since the first hit.

During the round of the jackpot game state, the jackpot is opened a predetermined number of times (for example, 10 times). One opening of the big winning opening is between the elapsed timing of a predetermined period (for example, 29 seconds) and the timing until the number of game balls that have entered the big winning opening reaches a predetermined number (for example, 10). It will continue until the earlier timing.

Then, when the ending effect after the big hit game state is completed, the game state is controlled to the reduced time state and the probable change state (high accuracy and high base state) over a predetermined number of fluctuations (for example, 100 times) as in the case of the first hit. Will be done. Even in the probable change state after the big hit round in the continuous chan, the right-handed promotion effect is continuously executed by the image display device 5, the right-handed display unit 30, and the right-handed display unit 55. For this reason, after the first hit occurs, the player will be hit by consecutive chans in the probable change state or time saving state after the big hit round is completed, and the player will be in the probable change state or time saving after the big hit round per continuous chan is finished. Even in the state, you are always encouraged to hit right by the right-handed promotion effect.

The probabilistic state or time saving state after the big hit round of the first hit ends, and the probabilistic state or time saving state ends without a big hit occurring in either the probable change state or the time saving state after the big hit round per consecutive chan ends. Then, the gaming state is controlled to the normal state (low accuracy and low base state), and the right-handed promotion effect by the image display device 5, the right-handed display unit 30, and the right-handed display unit 55 is also completed. As a result, the player launches the game ball toward the first flow path passing through the left area of the game area by hitting the left again.

[Design of group notice production]
Next, the design of the group notice effect at the development stage of the pachinko gaming machine 1 will be described.

(Group notice work process)
FIG. 52 is a flowchart showing an example of the group notice work process. As shown in FIG. 52, the work processes of the group notice are, in the order of work, a summary document creation process (step S901), an animation production process (step S902), this video production process (step S903), and an authoring process. (Step S904), sound creation process (step S905), lottery embedding process (step S906), video embedding process (step S907), sound embedding process (step S908), and lamp data. The production step (step S909) and the lamp incorporating step (step S910) are included.

In the process of creating the summary document in step S901, a summary document for newly designing the group notice is created in the pachinko gaming machine 1.

In the animation production process of step S902, the storyboard of the animation used in the group notice is created, the characters and backgrounds used in the animation are designed, the V-conte that serves as a script for creating the animation is created, and the CG for the animation is created. Production and actual animation production are performed.

In the main video production process of step S903, the video data used in the group notice is created using the animation created in the animation production process. The video data used in the group notice is created in this video production process, but the playback time of the created video data is longer than the execution time of the group notice actually executed in the pachinko gaming machine 1. Created longer. As a result, even if the execution time of the group notice becomes long due to the design change, the video data created in this video production process can be used as it is without being changed. Further, in this video production process, the playback timing is also designed for each video data so that the video data is played back at a predetermined timing for each production. For example, in the fluctuation pattern of the main fluctuation number 22, the group notice animation is incorporated in this video so that the group notice of the stage A is executed from the 985th frame, and the group notice of the stage B is the 1385th frame. The animation of the group notice is incorporated in this video so that the group notice is executed from. Further, in the fluctuation pattern of the main fluctuation number 26, the group notice animation is incorporated in this video so that the group notice of the stage A is executed from the 1600th frame, and the group notice of the stage B is the 2000th frame. The animation of the group notice is incorporated in this video so that the group notice is executed from.

In the authoring step of step S904, software (program) for video reproduction executed by the pachinko gaming machine 1 is created using the video data created in the video production step.

In the sound creation step of step S905, data of various sounds such as BGM (background sound) and sound effects used in the group notice are created in accordance with the video of the group notice.

In the process of incorporating the lottery in step S906, data on various lottery related to the group notice, such as the group notice lottery, is created. In the process of incorporating the lottery, the degree of expectation (reliability) of the group notice is designed. The created lottery data is incorporated into the pachinko game machine 1 as software for lottery executed in the pachinko game 1.

In the video embedding step of step S907, the video playback software created in the authoring step is incorporated into the pachinko gaming machine 1 as video playback software executed by the group notice.

In the sound incorporating step of step S908, the sound data created in the sound creating step is incorporated into the pachinko gaming machine 1 as software for sound reproduction executed by the group notice.

In the lamp data creation step of step S908, various lighting data such as lighting, blinking, and extinguishing in the lighting means (light emitting means) such as lamps and LEDs used in the group notice are created.

In the process of incorporating the lamp in step S910, various data such as lighting, blinking, and extinguishing of lamps and LEDs created in the lamp data creation process are used as software for lamp reproduction executed in pachinko game 1. It is incorporated in the game machine 1.

By going through the work in each of these steps, lottery, video, sound data, and the like related to the group notice production are created and incorporated as software so as to be executed in the pachinko gaming machine 1.

(This video production)
The main video production process of the group notice will be specifically described with reference to FIGS. 53 to 56. 53 to 56 are diagrams for explaining an example of this video production process.

As shown in FIG. 53, first, in STEP 1, a character image used in the group notice is prepared. For example, in the group notice, the main character Yumemu-chan is used, and four images g1 to g4 are prepared to show the mode in which Yumemu-chan runs. It should be noted that such a character image is created in the animation production process.

Next, in STEP2, the moving image creation tool is used to create a moving image in which the character steps on the four character images g1 to g4. For example, when the moving image creation tool is started, the timeline screen 710 is displayed. In the timeline screen 710, one or a plurality of layers are arranged on the vertical axis, and the horizontal axis is the time axis. Each layer is arranged in numerical order such as layers 1, 2, 3 ... From the top, and the more the layers are arranged on the top (that is, the younger the number), the more the image is displayed on the back side on the screen of the image display device 5. It is designed to be located. The number of layers and the width of the time axis can be set to the values desired by the user.

In STEP2, each character image g1 to g4 is arranged in a predetermined layer column. For example, in the example shown in (a), the character images g1 to g4 are arranged on the timeline corresponding to the layer 1 to form the moving image data A1 to A4. According to the moving image data A1 to A4, the stepping moving image of the pattern consisting of the character images g1 to g4 is obtained.

If the set of the moving image data A1 to A4 for stepping created as described above is repeatedly arranged on the timeline, the moving image for the character to step on is repeated. For example, in the example shown in (b), the moving image data A1 to A4 are repeated for three cycles. Then, this stepping video data is output. In this way, the stepping motion is created for the other characters by the same work.

As shown in FIG. 54, in STEP3, a moving image in which the character progresses is created. First, the screen size of the image display device 5 is set to a predetermined size. For example, in the example shown in (a), the width of the X-axis along the horizontal direction on the screen is set to 800, and the width of the XY-axis along the vertical direction on the screen is set to 640. The value corresponding to the center position is 0 for both the X-axis and the Y-axis. Therefore, the screen size is −400 ≦ X ≦ 400 and −320 ≦ Y ≦ 320.

By using the setting screen 730 of the moving image creation tool, it is possible to set the width at which the moving image data moves. For example, in the example shown in (b), one cycle of the stepping moving image data A1 to A4 of the pattern consisting of the character images g1 to g4 is set to 500, and the character images linearly move on the X-axis in the range of −1000 ≦ X ≦ 500. Is set to.

As shown in FIG. 55, in STEP 4, a moving image in which a plurality of characters progress is created. For example, in the example shown in (a), moving image data in which the character Jam-chan used for the group notice moves linearly on the X-axis in the range of −1000 ≦ X ≦ 500 is created by the same creation procedure.

As described above, when moving image data that linearly moves on the X axis in the range of −1000 ≦ X ≦ 500 is created for a plurality of characters, as shown in (b), the moving image data of each character is placed on different layers. Deploy. Also, if the time axis is shifted between the characters, the timing of appearance can be shifted. Further, by shifting the position of the Y-axis between the characters, the position on the Y-axis in which the character appears can be shifted. The Z axis is an axis between the front side (front side) and the back side (depth side) of the screen, and when a value is input, the front side (front side) and the back side (depth side) of the screen are input. It is possible to design the effect of the group notice (Boingo group notice of the present embodiment) so that the character moves between the side and the side.

As shown in FIG. 56, in STEP 5, a moving image of the group notice is finally created. For example, as shown in (a), by arranging the moving image data of six types of characters such as characters A to F on the timeline of the layer, the moving image of the group notice is completed.

Further, if the length of the video data on the timeline is changed, the animation itself changes the speed at which the character moves while maintaining the video in which the video of the pattern consisting of the character images g1 to g4 is repeated for three cycles. Can be done. For example, the moving image data of the character C arranged on the layer 10 is the moving image data in which the moving image of the pattern consisting of the character images g1 to g4 is repeated for three cycles like the moving image data of the character C arranged on the layer 9. The length on the timeline of the moving image data of the character C arranged on the layer 10 is shorter than the length on the timeline of the moving image data of the character C arranged on the layer 9. As a result, the character C arranged on the layer 10 moves on the screen at a faster speed than the character C arranged on the layer 9 while maintaining the same animation as the character C arranged on the layer 9. ..

In the 6-person group notice, a plurality of characters are not arranged at the same timing and the same speed at the coordinates arranged on the screen. For example, also in the example shown in FIG. 56A, moving image data of a plurality of characters at the same timing and the same length are not arranged on the timeline.

Further, as shown in (b), if the moving image data of sand smoke is arranged on the layer 1 located on the innermost back side, the moving image of sand smoke can be combined with the moving image in which a plurality of characters progress.

As described above, it is possible to create moving image data of a group notice in which a plurality of characters progress. In the actual creation of the video data of the group notice, it is assumed that the game board 2 covers the edge of the screen of a predetermined size (for example, 19 inches), and the game board 2 covers the screen. The video data of the group notice is created with the area corresponding to the position covered with a mask. Further, the group notice moving image data is created up to the area corresponding to the large size so that the screen can be applied to a size larger than a predetermined size (for example, 19 inches) (for example, 20 inches).

(Group notice work process)
FIG. 57 is a diagram showing an overall picture of the 6-person group notice. As shown in FIG. 57, in the 6-person group notice included in the group notice effect, an image in which 6 characters such as maid A to maid F proceed as a group is displayed. The group notice effect is not limited to the six characters, but the number of displayed characters is the largest among the effects that can be performed by the pachinko gaming machine 1 by the appearance of a plurality of each character. Since maids A to F all wear the same or substantially the same maid clothes, it is difficult to distinguish the type of character other than recognizing by face. In the present embodiment, the design of the apron worn by each character is different for each character, but it is difficult to recognize the difference at first glance. Maid A is Yume-chan, who is the main character, and Maid B is Jam-chan, who is the next highest priority character of Yume-chan, who is the main character.

In the 6-person group notice, the character image may fit in the display area of the image display device 5, or a part of the character image (for example, face or foot) does not fit in the display area of the image display device 5 and protrudes. In some cases. For example, of the characters appearing in the 6-person group notice, 6 maids A (Yumemu-chan) will appear, of which 5 are maids A who can see their faces. That is, the face of one of the six maids A appears does not fit in the display area of the image display device 5. Of the characters appearing in the 6-person group notice, 5 maids B (Jam-chan) will appear, of which 4 are maids B whose faces are visible. That is, the face of one of the five maids B appears does not fit in the display area of the image display device 5. Of the characters appearing in the 6-person group notice, 5 maids C will appear, of which 3 maids C can see their faces. That is, the faces of two of the five maids appearing in the maid C do not fit in the display area of the image display device 5. Of the characters appearing in the 6-person group notice, 5 maids D will appear, of which 3 maids D can see their faces. That is, the faces of two of the five maids appearing in the maid D do not fit in the display area of the image display device 5. Of the characters appearing in the 6-person group notice, 5 maids E will appear, of which 3 are maids E who can see their faces. That is, the faces of two of the five maids appearing in the maid E do not fit in the display area of the image display device 5. Of the characters appearing in the 6-person group notice, 5 maids F will appear, of which 3 maids F can see their faces. That is, the faces of two of the five maids appearing in the maid F do not fit in the display area of the image display device 5.

In this way, the plurality of characters displayed in the group notice effect include a character whose whole body is displayed in the display area of the screen and a part of the whole body (for example, a face) which does not fit in the display area of the screen. This includes a character in which other parts of the whole body (for example, a part other than the face) are displayed within the display area of the screen.

In addition, the plurality of characters displayed in the group notice production are characters of low importance in the contents of the pachinko gaming machine 1 such as maids C to F, and maid A (Yumemu-chan) and maid B (Jam-chan). Including characters that are more important than maids C to F in the contents of the pachinko game machine 1, maids A and B have a whole body that does not fit in the display area of the screen as compared to maids C to F. The proportion of parts other than the face that fit in the display area of the screen and are displayed is low. That is, the maid A and the maid B are designed so that the proportion of maids appearing while showing their faces is higher than that of the maids C to F.

(Auxiliary display)
FIG. 58 is a diagram for explaining the auxiliary display used in the group notice effect. As shown in FIG. 58, in the group notice effect, an auxiliary display emphasizing that the character is progressing is performed. In the present embodiment, an image of sand smoke is displayed as an auxiliary display. Displaying an image of sand smoke near the character, more effectively following the progressing character, can make the player feel as if the character's progress is causing sand smoke, and doing so. Therefore, it is possible to emphasize the mode in which the character runs through. As shown in FIG. 56 (b) described above, the image of sand smoke, which is an auxiliary display, is arranged on the layer 1 located on the rearmost side. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 58, the image of sand smoke is located on the back side of any of the appearing characters.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 58, since the layer on which the image of maid E is arranged is on the front side of the layer on which the image of maid C is arranged, the image of maid E is from the image of maid C. Is also displayed on the front side. On the other hand, the image of the auxiliary display corresponding to the maid E is located on the back side of both the image of the maid E and the image of the maid C.

In this way, when the display of the maid E and the display of the maid C overlap, the display of the maid E has priority over the display of the other maid C, while the auxiliary display corresponding to the maid E is used. When the display of the maid C overlaps with the display of the maid C, the display of the maid C has priority over the auxiliary display corresponding to the maid E.

(Motion blur processing)
FIG. 59 is a diagram for explaining the motion blur processing used in the group notice effect. As shown in FIG. 59, in the group notice effect, motion blur processing is applied to the progressing character. Motion blur processing is a process for displaying an afterimage of an object (for example, a character). By performing motion blur processing on the display of a progressing character, an afterimage of the character is displayed after the progressing character. It will be displayed. As a result, it is possible to create a dynamic group notice effect. Further, when the image obtained by the motion blur processing for one character overlaps the image obtained by the motion blur processing for another character, the motion blur processing for the one character is performed so as not to impair the visibility of the other character. The image is transparent.

(Aspect of contour when characters overlap)
FIG. 60 is a diagram for explaining an aspect of contours when characters overlap in a group notice effect. As shown in FIG. 60, in the group notice effect, one character may overtake another character. At that time, when the display of the character to be overtaken and the display of the other character overlap, the outline of the character to be overtaken is displayed thicker than the outline of the other character.

For example, in the example shown in (a), the maid B located on the front side of the maid A overtakes the maid A, but in this case, the contour of the maid B is larger than the contour of the maid A. It is thicker, and Maid B is displayed with more emphasis than Maid A. Further, it is shown that the maid A located on the front side of the maid F overtakes the maid F. In this case, the contour of the maid A is thicker than the contour of the maid F, and the maid A It is displayed with more emphasis than Maid F.

Further, in the example shown in (b), it is shown that the maid B located on the front side of the maid A overtakes the maid A, but in this case, the contour of the maid B is larger than the contour of the maid A. It is thicker, and Maid B is displayed with more emphasis than Maid A. Further, it is shown that the maid A located on the front side of the maid D overtakes the maid D. In this case, the contour of the maid A is thicker than the contour of the maid D, and the maid A It is displayed with more emphasis than Maid D.

When one character overtakes another character, it is not limited to thickening the outline of one character, but the size of one character may be increased, or the brightness of one character may be higher than the brightness of another character. One character may be displayed more emphasized than the other characters by increasing the value or making the contrast of one character clearer than the contrast of the other characters.

(Display of the screen of the image display device)
FIG. 61 is a view looking between the game board 2 and the image display device 5 during the execution of the group notice effect. As shown in FIGS. 58 to 60 described above, since the gaming board 2 covers the edge of the screen of the image display device 5, when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is viewed from the front, the screen of the image display device 5 is displayed. Of the edges, the portion covered by the game board 2 is invisible. However, as shown in FIG. 61, when looking between the game board 2 and the image display device 5, the edge of the screen of the image display device 5 located on the back side of the game board 2 can be visually recognized.

Here, in FIG. 61, as shown in (a), the entire maid A (Yumemu-chan), who is the main character, is not yet displayed in the 6-person group notice, while a part of the maid A (this example). Then, from the first situation where (a part of the face) is displayed, as shown in (b), while the entire maid A displayed first is not yet displayed, a part of the maid A is the first. The second maid B (Jam-chan), which is displayed more than the situation and is displayed second, is not displayed yet, while a part of the maid B (a part of the face in this example) is displayed. The situation has been shown. Further, the first displayed character (maid A) and the second displayed character (maid B) have different Y-axis position coordinates along the vertical direction on the screen.

Such a change from the first situation to the second situation occurs when the image display device 5 is visually recognized with the game board 2 covering the edge of the screen of the image display device 5, and when the game board 2 and the image display are displayed. This occurs in any case where the image display device 5 is visually recognized while looking through the device 5. That is, FIG. 61 is a case where the image display device 5 is visually recognized while looking between the game board 2 and the image display device 5, but as shown in FIG. 7B, the game board 2 is the image display device. Even if the edge of the screen of 5 is covered, the whole maid A (Yumemu-chan) who is the main character is not yet displayed in the 6-person group notice, but a part of the maid A (this example). From the first situation where (a part of the face) is displayed, the entire maid A displayed first is not yet displayed, while a part of the maid A is displayed more than in the first situation, and 2 The second situation is that while the entire maid B (Jam-chan) displayed second is not yet displayed, a part of the maid B (a part of the face in this example) is displayed.

(Overview of Baku Chu Mondai Notice)
FIG. 62 is a diagram showing an overall picture of the Baku Chu Mondai notice. As shown in FIG. 62, in the Baku Chu group notice included in the group notice effect, an image in which characters such as Baku Chu progress as a group is displayed.

In the Baku Chu Mondai notice, the character image may fit in the display area of the image display device 5, or a part of the character image (for example, ears or feet) may not fit in the display area of the image display device 5 and may protrude. In some cases.

As described above, in the Baku Chu Mondai notice, the moving image data of the Baku Chu Mondai notice is created by arranging the animation image in which one type of character moves on the screen. The moving image data in the Baku Chu Mondai notice is also created based on the work process shown in FIGS. 52 to 56 by the same method as the moving image data in the 6-person group notice.

(Volume change and brightness data table in group notice production)
FIG. 63 is a diagram for explaining a change in volume and a brightness data table in the group notice effect. As shown in FIG. 63, the group notice production (six-person group notice, Baku Chu notice, Boingo group notice) includes a first display period (1000 msec), a second display period (1310 msec), and a third display period (830 msec). It is divided into.

The first display period is a period from the first start of the character display in the group notice effect to the first end of the character display. More specifically, the first display period is a period from the first appearance of any character in the group notice effect to the first disappearance of any character. For example, if one character first appears in the group notice effect and the one character progresses at the top as it is, the period until the one character disappears is the first display period. Alternatively, if one character first appears in the group notice effect and the one character is overtaken by another character, the period until the other character disappears from the edge of the screen is the first display period. .. In the present embodiment, in the first display period, the display of the second displayed character ends before the display of the first displayed character ends. That is, in the first display period, the first character appears, the first character is overtaken by the second character, and the second character disappears from the edge of the screen first.

The second display period is a period longer than the first display period, and is a period in which the state in which the display of the new character starts and ends continues. More specifically, in the second display period, after one character disappears first in the group notice effect, a state in which new characters appear one after another continues, and the last character appears. It is the period until it appears. The second display period is longer than each of the first display period and the third display period. Further, in the second display period, the number of characters appearing is larger than in each of the first display period and the third display period.

The third display period is a period in which the display of the character ends without starting the display of the new character. More specifically, the third display period is the period from the appearance of the last character in the group notice effect to the disappearance of all the characters. The character that disappears last is not limited to the character that appears last, and may be a character that is omitted by the character that appears last. The third display period is longer than the first display period.

Regarding the change in volume in the group notice effect, the speakers 8L and 8R start outputting the effect sound corresponding to the group notice effect at the timing related to the start of the first display period, and during the first display period, the effect sound of the effect sound is output. The volume is raised to a specific volume, the volume of the effect sound is maintained at the specific volume in the second display period, and the volume of the effect sound is decreased in the third display period.

For example, as shown in FIG. 62, with respect to the effect sound corresponding to the group notice effect, the volume is the minimum (for example, mute or the lowest volume) at the beginning of the first display period, and then gradually increases gradually. It reaches the specified value and is maintained at the specified value (for example, set volume or maximum volume) thereafter. Even in the second display period, the volume remains at the specified value. After that, in the third display period, the volume is maintained at a specified value, and then gradually decreases to the minimum.

It should be noted that the stepwise increase in volume from the minimum to the specified value in the first display period is referred to as volume fade-in. Further, when the volume gradually decreases from the specified value to the minimum in the third display period, it is referred to as volume fade-out. In the present embodiment, the fade-in time from the output of the effect sound in the first display period to the increase in the volume of the effect sound from the minimum to the specified value decreases the volume of the effect sound in the third display period. It is shorter than the fade-out time from the start until the volume of the effect sound is minimized.

The luminance data table is composed of a plurality of luminance data for lighting each of the plurality of lighting means. The plurality of lighting means are frame lamp 9 (frame left lamp 9L, frame right lamp 9R), accessory lamp 9A, board left lamp 9B, board lamp 9C, attacker lamp 9E, V attacker lamp 9F, V lamp 9G, electric. Includes game effect lamps such as Chu Lamp 9H, Stick Controller Lamp 9J, and Trigger Button Lamp 9K. The luminance data table includes a first luminance data table corresponding to the first display period, a second luminance data table corresponding to the second display period, and a third luminance data table corresponding to the third display period. .. That is, in the first display period, the predetermined game effect lamp 9 is turned on, blinks, or turned off based on the brightness data included in the first brightness data table, and is included in the second brightness data table in the second display period. The predetermined game effect lamp 9 lights up, blinks, or goes out based on the brightness data, and in the third display period, the predetermined game effect lamp 9 lights up, blinks, or goes out based on the brightness data included in the third brightness data table. Or turn off.

(Timing of 6-person notice in stage A)
FIG. 64 is a diagram for explaining the occurrence timing of the 6-person group notice in the stage A. As described above, in stage A, the 6-person group notice is executed from the 1600th frame during the pre-variation.

For example, as shown in FIG. 64, in the case of the fluctuation pattern of fluctuation number 9 which is lost in the first half of SP reach, the fluctuation time of the front fluctuation is 62000 msec (1861 frames) and the fluctuation time of the rear fluctuation is 37400 msec (1123 frames). The 6-person group notice starts from the 53280 msec (1600th frame) of the previous fluctuation. Therefore, in the case of the fluctuation pattern of the variation number 9 which is lost in the first half of the SP reach, the timing (1600th frame) when the 6-person group notice is executed belongs to the latter half of the total variation time (2984 frames). That is, in the case of loss in the first half of SP reach, it is a case where it is suggested that it is a display result, and a predetermined period from the start of variable display to the suggestion that the variable display is a loss display result ( In (2984 frames), the first display period of the 6-person group notice starts in the latter half (1600th frame) of the predetermined period.

In the case of the fluctuation pattern of the fluctuation number 20 that hits in the first half of the SP reach, the fluctuation time of the front fluctuation is 62000 msec (1861 frames) and the fluctuation time of the rear fluctuation is 93300 msec (2801 frames). It starts from the 53280 msec (1600th frame) of the previous fluctuation. Therefore, in the case of the fluctuation pattern of the variation number 20 that is hit in the first half of the SP reach, the timing (1600th frame) when the 6-person group notice is executed belongs to the first half of the total variation time (4662 frames). That is, in the case of a hit in the first half of the SP reach, it is a case where it is suggested that it is a display result, and a predetermined period from the start of the variable display to the suggestion that the variable display is a hit display result ( In 4662 frames), the first display period of the 6-person group notice starts in the first half (1600th frame) of the predetermined period. Furthermore, the timing (1600th frame) when the 6-person group notice is executed is close to half (2331th frame) of the total variation time (4662 frame) in the first half of the total variation time (4662 frame) (the timing (2331th frame). The second half).

In the case of the fluctuation pattern of the fluctuation number 23 that hits in the latter half of the SP reach, the fluctuation time of the front fluctuation is 62000 msec (1861 frames) and the fluctuation time of the rear fluctuation is 99900 msec (3000 frames). It starts from the 53280 msec (1600th frame) of the previous fluctuation. Therefore, in the case of the fluctuation pattern of the variation number 23 that is hit in the latter half of the SP reach, the timing (1600th frame) when the 6-person group notice is executed belongs to the first half of the total variation time (4861 frames). That is, in the case of a hit in the latter half of the SP reach, it is a case where it is suggested that it is a display result, and a predetermined period from the start of the variable display to the suggestion that the variable display is a hit display result ( In the 4861 frame), the first display period of the 6-person group notice starts in the first half (1600th frame) of the predetermined period. Furthermore, the timing at which the 6-person group notice is executed (1600th frame) is close to half (about 2430th frame) of the total variation time (4861 frames) in the first half of the total variation time (4861 frames). (The second half).

In the case of the fluctuation pattern of the fluctuation number 26 that hits in the final reach, the fluctuation time of the front fluctuation is 62000 msec (1861 frames) and the fluctuation time of the rear fluctuation is 142800 msec (4288 frames). It starts from the 53280 msec (1600th frame) of the fluctuation. Therefore, in the case of the fluctuation pattern of the fluctuation number 26 that is hit in the final reach, the timing (1600th frame) in which the 6-person notice is executed belongs to the first half of the total variation time (6149 frames). That is, in the case of a hit in the final reach, it is a case where it is suggested that it is a display result, and a predetermined period (6149) from the start of the variable display to the suggestion that the variable display is a hit display result. In the frame), the first display period of the 6-person group notice starts in the first half (1600th frame) of the predetermined period. Furthermore, the timing at which the 6-person group notice is executed (1600th frame) is close to half (about 3074th frame) of the total variation time (6149 frames) in the first half of the total variation time (6149 frames). (The second half).

In the present embodiment, in the case of the fluctuation patterns of the fluctuation numbers 10 to 15 that are lost in the latter half of the SP reach or the final reach, the post-variation time is set longer, so that the variable display is started after the variable display is started. In the predetermined period until it is suggested that the variable display is a lost display result, the first display period of the 6-person notice is not configured to start in the first half (1600th frame) of the predetermined period. .. However, even in the case of fluctuation patterns of fluctuation numbers 10 to 15 that are lost in the latter half of SP reach or the final reach, from the start of variable display until it is suggested that the variable display is a lost display result. In a predetermined period, the first display period of the 6-person group notice may be started in the first half of the predetermined period.

FIG. 65 is a diagram for explaining the timing of occurrence of the Baku Chu Mondai notice in stage B. As described above, in stage B, the Baku Chu Mondai notice is executed from the 2000th frame during the post-variation.

For example, as shown in FIG. 65, in the case of the fluctuation pattern of fluctuation number 9 which is lost in the first half of SP reach, the fluctuation time of the front fluctuation is 62000 msec (1861 frames) and the fluctuation time of the rear fluctuation is 37400 msec (1123 frames). The Baku Chu Mondai notice starts from the 66600msec (2000th frame) of the previous fluctuation. Therefore, in the case of the fluctuation pattern of the variation number 9 which is lost in the first half of the SP reach, the timing (2000th frame) when the Baku Chu Mondai notice is executed belongs to the latter half of the total variation time (2984 frames). That is, in the case of loss in the first half of SP reach, it is a case where it is suggested that it is a display result, and a predetermined period from the start of variable display to the suggestion that the variable display is a loss display result ( In (2984 frames), the first display period of the Baku Chu Mondai notice starts in the latter half (2000th frame) of the predetermined period.

In the case of the fluctuation pattern of the fluctuation number 20 that hits in the first half of the SP reach, the fluctuation time of the front fluctuation is 62000 msec (1861 frames) and the fluctuation time of the rear fluctuation is 93300 msec (2801 frames). , Start from the 66600 msec (2000th frame) of the previous fluctuation. Therefore, in the case of the fluctuation pattern of the variation number 20 that is hit in the first half of the SP reach, the timing (2000th ram) when the Baku Chu Mondai notice is executed belongs to the first half of the total variation time (4662 frames). That is, in the case of a hit in the first half of the SP reach, it is a case where it is suggested that it is a display result, and a predetermined period from the start of the variable display to the suggestion that the variable display is a hit display result ( In 4662 frames), the first display period of the Baku Chu Mondai notice starts in the first half (2000th frame) of the predetermined period. Furthermore, the timing at which the Baku Chu Mondai notice is executed (2000th frame) is close to half (2331th frame) of the total variation time (4662 frames) in the first half of the total variation time (4662 frames). (The second half).

In the case of the fluctuation pattern of the fluctuation number 23 that hits in the latter half of the SP reach, the fluctuation time of the front fluctuation is 62000 msec (1861 frames) and the fluctuation time of the rear fluctuation is 99900 msec (3000 frames). , Start from the 66600 msec (2000th frame) of the previous fluctuation. Therefore, in the case of the fluctuation pattern of the variation number 23 that is hit in the latter half of the SP reach, the timing (2000th frame) when the Baku Chu Mondai notice is executed belongs to the first half of the total variation time (4861 frames). That is, in the case of a hit in the latter half of the SP reach, it is a case where it is suggested that it is a display result, and a predetermined period from the start of the variable display to the suggestion that the variable display is a hit display result ( In the 4861 frame), the first display period of the Baku Chu Mondai notice starts in the first half (2000th frame) of the predetermined period. Furthermore, the timing at which the Baku Chu Mondai notice is executed (2000th frame) is close to half (about 2430th frame) of the total variation time (4861 frames) in the first half of the total variation time (4861 frames). Timing (second half).

In the case of the fluctuation pattern of the fluctuation number 26 that hits in the latter half of the final reach, the fluctuation time of the front fluctuation is 62000 msec (1861 frames) and the fluctuation time of the rear fluctuation is 142800 msec (4288 frames). , Start from the 66600 msec (2000th frame) of the previous fluctuation. Therefore, in the case of the fluctuation pattern of the fluctuation number 26 that is hit in the final reach, the timing (2000th frame) when the Baku Chu Mondai notice is executed belongs to the first half of the total variation time (6149 frames). That is, in the case of a hit in the final reach, it is a case where it is suggested that it is a display result, and a predetermined period (6149) from the start of the variable display to the suggestion that the variable display is a hit display result. In the frame), the first display period of the Baku Chu Mondai notice starts in the first half (2000th frame) of the predetermined period. Furthermore, the timing at which the Baku Chu Mondai notice is executed (2000th frame) is close to half (about 3074th frame) of the total variation time (6149 frames) in the first half of the total variation time (6149 frames). Timing (second half).

In the present embodiment, in the case of the fluctuation patterns of the fluctuation numbers 10 to 15 that are lost in the latter half of the SP reach or the final reach, the post-variation time is set longer, so that the variable display is started after the variable display is started. In the predetermined period until it is suggested that the variable display is a lost display result, the first display period of the Baku Chu Mondai notice starts in the first half (2000th frame) of the predetermined period. No. However, even in the case of the fluctuation patterns of the fluctuation numbers 10 to 15 that are lost in the latter half of the SP reach or the final reach, from the start of the variable display until it is suggested that the variable display is the lost display result. In a predetermined period, the first display period of the Baku Chu Mondai notice within the predetermined period may be started.

[Brightness data]
With reference to FIGS. 66 to 90, the luminance data referred to when the effect control CPU 120 controls various lighting means in the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the present embodiment will be described. These luminance data tables are stored in the ROM 121. For example, the effect control CPU 120 moves the lighting (light emitting) portion of the game effect lamp according to the display in the group notice based on the luminance data stored in the luminance data table. In the present embodiment, the lit place literally means a lit place, and for example, among a plurality of lamps included in the frame lamp, the lit place is referred to as a lit place, and other parts. The place where the lamp that is not lit (that is, the lamp that is off) is located is not called the lit place. In another example, the lighting location refers to a portion that is lit with high brightness. For example, among a plurality of lamps included in the frame lamp, the portion where the lamp that is lit with high brightness is located is lit. The place where the lamp lit with a brightness lower than the brightness of the lamp located at the lit place is located may not be called the lit place.

More specifically, the data (also referred to as an element) for turning on or off the lamp is defined by the brightness data table, and in such a brightness data table, the data storage area referred to by a specific lamp is used. If 0 data (for example, "000" data corresponding to RGB) is stored, the specific lamp is turned off. Further, when the data storage area referred to by the specific lamp does not exist in the luminance data table, or the luminance data table itself does not exist, the specific lamp is turned off. On the other hand, there is a luminance data table referenced by a specific lamp, and one or more data (for example, "100", "010", "001" corresponding to RGB are stored in the data storage area referenced by the specific lamp. If is stored, the specific lamp lights up. For example, when a specific effect such as a big hit notice effect is executed at the time of an effect corresponding to a normal background, the specific effect is referred to in the specific effect. Even if the data of a specific lamp is not specified in the brightness data table, if the data of a specific lamp is specified in the brightness data table referred to in the effect corresponding to the normal background, the specific lamp is lit. Will be done.

(Parent table in group notice brightness data table)
FIG. 66 is a diagram for explaining an example of the parent table in the group warning luminance data table. As shown in FIG. 66, in the parent table in the group notice brightness data table, the frame lamp (frame right lamp 9R, frame left lamp 9L), accessory lamp 9A, board left lamp 9B, board lamp 9C, and attacker lamp 9E. For each lamp included in the game effect lamp 9, each effect time of the group notice effect is defined.

For example, each lamp in the game effect lamp 9 is controlled over 3140 msec so as to match the group notice effect.

(Child table in group notice brightness data table)
FIG. 67 is a diagram for explaining an example of a child table in the group warning luminance data table. As shown in FIG. 67, in the child table in the group notice brightness data table, the time of the group notice effect is subdivided for each lamp in the game effect lamp 9, and the grandchild table (brightness data table) referred to in each time zone is used. Also called) is specified.

For example, in the first display period (the period of the effect shown in FIGS. 99 to 100 and 155 to 157, which will be described later), among the periods in which the group notice effect is executed, the frame lamp W1 and the accessory lamp 9A A grandchild table of Y1, L1 for the left lamp 9B, U1 for the on-board lamp 9C, and A1 for the attacker lamp 9E is provided. These grandchild tables used in the first display period correspond to the first luminance data table shown in FIG. 63.

In the second display period (the period of the effect shown in FIGS. 101, 102, 158, and 159, which will be described later), among the periods in which the group notice effect is executed, W2 is used for the frame lamp and Y2 is used for the accessory lamp 9A. A grandchild table of L2 for the left panel lamp 9B, U2 for the onboard lamp 9C, and A2 for the attacker lamp 9E is provided. These grandchild tables used in the second display period correspond to the second luminance data table shown in FIG. 63.

Among the periods in which the group notice effect is executed, in the third display period (the period of the effect shown in FIGS. 103, 104, 160, and 161 described later), the frame lamp is W3, and the accessory lamp 9A is Y3. A grandchild table of L3 for the left panel lamp 9B, U3 for the onboard lamp 9C, and A3 for the attacker lamp 9E is provided. These grandchild tables used in the third display period correspond to the third luminance data table shown in FIG. 63.

As shown in FIG. 67, with respect to the brightness data table referred to in the group notice effect, the frame left lamp 9L, the frame right lamp 9R, and the combination are performed in all of the first display period, the second display period, and the third display period. Six types of brightness data tables are provided: an object lamp 9A, a board left lamp 9B, a board lamp 9C, and an attacker lamp.

The V lamp 9G is located at a position related to the direction in which the character advances in the group notice effect (for example, near the character appearing in the group notice effect), but since it is not used in the group notice effect, its grandchild table Is not prepared. Since the V lamp 9G is a lamp that notifies that a round of a jackpot game state in which a V prize can be generated is in progress or that a V prize has occurred, or a lamp that notifies that a jackpot has occurred, in the group notice production. If it lights up, it will be misunderstood that the player is winning a V or winning a big hit, and in order to avoid such inconvenience, the V lamp 9G is used in the group notice production. Not. The V lamp 9G may be provided at another position such as near the left lamp 9B on the board as a position related to the direction in which the character advances in the group notice effect, but even in this case, the group notice effect is also provided. It may not be used in.

Further, the stick controller lamp 9J provided on the stick controller 31A and the trigger button lamp 9K provided on the push button 31B are located at positions related to the direction in which the character advances in the group advance notice effect (for example, the character advances in the group advance notice effect). However, since it is not used in the group notice production, its grandchildren's table is not prepared. The stick controller lamp 9J is lit to encourage the operation of pulling the stick controller 31A in an operation effect (the effect shown in FIG. 136 (c91) described later), and the trigger button lamp 9K is a PUSH effect (the effect shown in FIG. 97 (described later)). Since it is a lamp that lights up to encourage the operation of pressing the push button 31B in the effect shown in a19), the player can operate the stick controller 31A and the push button 31B if the lamp lights up in the group notice effect. This is because the stick controller lamp 9J and the trigger button lamp 9K are not used in the group notice production in order to avoid such inconvenience. The stick controller lamp 9J and the trigger button lamp 9K may be provided at other positions such as near the left panel lamp 9B as positions related to the direction in which the character advances in the group notice effect. However, it may not be used in the group notice production.

The features of the grandchild tables W1 to W3 used for the grandchild table in the group notice production are summarized as follows. Specifically, the number of high-luminance lighting points is larger in W2 than in W1. Regarding the switching interval, W1 performs lighting control at equal intervals at 100 msec, while W2 performs lighting control at non-equal intervals at 50 to 80 msec, which is shorter than W1, and for W3, 10 msec with respect to the frame left lamp 9L. While lighting control is performed at short intervals, lighting control is performed at long intervals of 80 msec for the frame right lamp 9R.

Regarding the lighting pattern, the brightness data is specified so that W1 lights with high brightness while moving the lighting location according to the traveling direction of the group notice, while W2 lights with high brightness over a plurality of locations. For W3, the brightness data is specified so that both the frame left lamp 9L and the frame right lamp 9R are turned off or turned on at low brightness according to the traveling direction of the group notice. There is. Regarding the first luminance data, the luminance data is specified so that W1 turns off all the lamps or lights them with low luminance, whereas W2 and W3 emit light with high luminance at the predetermined lighting points. Luminance data is specified. On the other hand, regarding the final luminance data, the luminance data is defined so that the W3 turns off all the lamps of the frame left lamp 9L and the frame right lamp 9R with low luminance or low luminance.

Regarding the luminance data loop, while W1 and W3 do not specify the luminance data so that the same luminance data is used repeatedly, W2 defines the luminance data so that the same luminance data is used repeatedly. W1 and W3 are specified for the 10-minute luminance data for defect countermeasures, whereas W2 is not specified.

(Grandchild table for frame lamp in group notice brightness data table)
FIG. 68 is a diagram for explaining an example of a grandchild table for a frame lamp in the group warning luminance data table. Each lamp included in the frame lamp is an LED having a plurality of colors (in this example, three colors of red (R), green (G), and blue (B)), and the data are "0" to "F". The brightness is represented by a hexadecimal number. “0” is data corresponding to turning off, and “1” to “F” are data corresponding to turning on. Of "1" to "F", "1" to "7" are data corresponding to low-luminance lighting, and "8" to "F" are data corresponding to high-luminance lighting, respectively. When extinguishing is included as a concept of low brightness, "0" is included in the data corresponding to low brightness.

As shown in FIG. 68 (a), in the grandchild table W1 used in the first display period, RGB data is defined for each lamp from T1-1 to T1-10 at equal intervals of 100 msec. Further, in the final time T1-11, data for 10 minutes (600,000 msec) for troubleshooting is specified. Further, in W1, the first brightness data obtained by combining the data for turning off each lamp included in the frame lamp or turning on the lamp with low brightness and the data for turning on each lamp with high brightness for each time is used. The combination of the data for turning off each lamp or turning on the lamp with low brightness and the data for turning on each lamp with high brightness is composed of the second brightness data different from the first brightness data. For example, if the collection of data of each lamp corresponding to T1-2 is the first luminance data, the collection of data of each lamp corresponding to T1-3 can be the second luminance data. Predetermined luminance data is also specified for each of the other hours.

In W1, in the first 100 msec (T1-1) of the first display period, "1" indicating low brightness is defined as "R" for all the lamps included in the frame lamp, and "G" and "G" and " "0" indicating that the light is turned off is specified in "B". As a result, as shown in FIGS. 98 (a22) and 155 (b43) described later, at the beginning of the first display period in the group notice effect, all the lamps included in the frame lamps are turned off or turned on with low brightness. Will be. As a result, it is possible to make it easier for the player to pay attention to the fact that the group notice effect will be executed from now on. In the present embodiment, in order to make the effect effective by lighting each lamp mainly in red, "1" indicating low brightness is defined in "R", and "G" and "B" are defined. Is specified as "0" indicating that the lamp is off. For example, when each lamp is mainly lit in green, "G" is specified as "1" indicating low brightness, and "R" and "B" are specified. It suffices if "0" indicating extinguishing is specified in, and when each lamp lights mainly in blue, "1" indicating low brightness is specified in "B" and extinguished in "R" and "G". It suffices if "0" indicating is specified.

Further, in W1, as indicated by the dotted arrow, the lamps that are lit with high brightness from the vicinity of the frame right lamps 9R5 to 9R8 to the frame left lamp are at equal intervals of 100 msec from T1-2 to T1-10. Luminance data is specified so that it moves with. Here, the vicinity of the frame right lamps 9R5 to 9R8 corresponds to the part where the character appears in the group notice, and the brightness data is displayed so that the part of the lamp that lights up with high brightness moves according to the direction in which the character advances. It is stipulated. The left frame lamp is initially turned off or turned on at low brightness, and gradually increases as the location of the lamp that lights at high brightness moves according to the direction in which the character travels. Luminance data is specified so that the lamp lights with brightness. On the other hand, the frame right lamps 9R5 to 9R8, which were initially lit with high brightness, are turned off or lit with low brightness as the portion of the lamp that is lit with high brightness moves according to the direction in which the character travels. Luminance data is specified in. As a result, as shown in FIGS. 98 to 100 and 155 to 157, which will be described later, the frame lamp is also displayed from the right side of the pachinko gaming machine 1 in accordance with the effect that the character appears from the right end of the screen and progresses in the group notice. The position of lighting with high brightness changes toward the left side.

Further, in W1, the brightness includes data for turning on one frame lamp with high brightness and turning off the other frame lamp adjacent to the one frame lamp so that the portion of the lamp that lights in stages moves. The data is specified. As a result, in W1, the location of the lamp that lights up with high brightness can be moved according to the direction in which the character travels.

Further, in W1, the luminance data for defect countermeasures is defined in the last 10 minutes (600,000 ms) (T1-11) of the first display period. In this 10 minutes, the frame lamps are sparsely high in brightness according to the grandchild table W2 used in the second display period so that there is no discomfort in the lighting mode of the frame lamps when the next second display period is entered. Luminance data is specified so that it lights up with.

Here, if this 10-minute data is not provided, the lamp lighting control is performed again from T1-1 when the lighting control is performed using W1 and the lamp does not shift to W2 due to some abnormality. Even though the character of the group notice has already appeared and is progressing, as shown by the dotted arrow, it is high again from the vicinity of the frame right lamp 9R5-9R8 from T1-2 to T1-10. The part of the lamp that lights up with brightness will move, giving the player a sense of discomfort. However, in the present embodiment, since the data for 10 minutes is provided in T1-11, even if the lighting control is performed using W1 and the lighting is not transferred to W2 due to some abnormality, the data is set in 10 minutes. Since the frame lamp can be turned on in a light emitting mode that matches the grandchild table W2, it is possible to prevent a sense of discomfort. Then, if the abnormality is resolved in these 10 minutes, the player can continue the game without any particular discomfort.

In W1, since the brightness data for 10 minutes as described above is defined, the lighting control is not performed by repeatedly using the brightness data over T1-1 to T1-10. ..

In addition, the brightness data for 10 minutes for defect countermeasures specified in W1 is brightness data in which adjacent frame lamps are regularly turned on in order so that the lighting location deviates from the state of the previous T1-10. be.

As shown in FIG. 68 (b), in the grandchild table W2 used in the second display period, RGB data is transmitted to each lamp from T2-1 to T2-10 at non-equal intervals at 50 to 80 msec. It is stipulated. Further, in W2, the first brightness data obtained by combining the data for turning off each lamp included in the frame lamp or turning on the lamp with low brightness and the data for turning on each lamp with high brightness for each time is used. The combination of the data for turning off each lamp or turning on the lamp with low brightness and the data for turning on each lamp with high brightness is composed of the second brightness data different from the first brightness data. For example, if the collection of data of each lamp corresponding to T2-2 is the first luminance data, the collection of data of each lamp corresponding to T2-3 can be the second luminance data. Predetermined luminance data is also specified for each of the other hours.

In W2, one frame lamp is lit with high brightness, and other frame lamps adjacent to the one frame lamp are also lit with high brightness, including brightness data, and sparsely (randomly) lit with high brightness. Luminance data is specified so that For example, in W2, high-luminance data (for example, "A") is sparsely defined so as to light at a plurality of locations with high brightness. As a result, as shown in FIGS. 101, 102, 158, and 159, which will be described later, in the second display period in the group notice effect, the frame lamps match the appearance of the characters moving in groups in the group notice effect. Will be sparsely lit with high brightness. Further, W2 is designed to light more frame lamps with higher brightness than W1.

Since the W2 is not provided with the luminance data for troubleshooting as in the W1, the lighting control is performed by repeatedly using the luminance data from T2-1 to T2-10. Here, even if the lamp lighting control is performed again from T2-1 when the lighting control is performed using W2 and the lamp does not shift to W3 due to some abnormality, the frame lamp is sparsely high. Since the mode of lighting with brightness is merely repeated, the player is not particularly uncomfortable.

Further, unlike W2, it is possible to provide all the data referred to for each time over the entire time without repeating the luminance data over T2-1 to T2-10, but the time for creating each data. Also, it takes time to confirm that the created data is correct, which makes it very inefficient. On the other hand, as in W2 of the present embodiment, by repeatedly using the luminance data over T2-1 to T2-10 to perform lighting control, only one set of data that is repeatedly referred to can be created. The time efficiency can be improved. The reason why the lighting control is performed by repeatedly using one set of data in the second display period in the group notice effect is that the second display period in the group notice effect is larger than the first display period and the third display period. Since the second display period is long and the second display period is a time zone in which the screen is filled with a plurality of characters and the plurality of characters proceed as a group, the lighting corresponding to such an effect is lit. This is because it is sufficient to repeat the same lighting as the mode.

As shown in FIG. 68 (c), in the grandchild table W3 used in the third display period, RGB data is transmitted to the frame left lamp and the frame right lamp from T3-1 to T3-6 at intervals of 80 msec. It is stipulated. After that, RGB data is specified over T3-7 to T3-38 at short intervals of 10 msec for the frame left lamp, and continues over T3-7 to T3-38 at long intervals of 80 msec for the frame right lamp. RGB data is specified.

Further, in W3, as shown by the dotted arrow, the lamps that were lit with high brightness from the vicinity of the frame right lamps 9R5 to 9R8 gradually turn off or become low gradually from T3-2 to T3-30. Increase the number of lamps that are turned off or turned on at low brightness so that they turn on at brightness. Further, for T3-7 to T3-38, in the case of the frame right lamps 9R2 to 9R12, the brightness data is specified at intervals of 80 msec, whereas the frame left lamp 9L5 located in the direction in which the character advances in the group notice. For ~ 9L12, the brightness data is defined so that the brightness is changed from high brightness to off or low brightness at short intervals of 10 msec. As a result, as shown in FIGS. 103, 104, 160, and 161 described later, the frame lamp is also changed from the right side to the left side of the pachinko gaming machine 1 in accordance with the effect that the character disappears to the left edge of the screen in the group notice. The position where the light is turned off or the position where the light is turned on at low brightness is changed.

Further, in W3, the brightness data is defined so that all the lamps included in the frame lamp are turned off or turned on at low brightness at the time of transition to T3-30. Further, in W3, similarly to W1, the luminance data for defect countermeasures is defined in the last 10 minutes (600,000 ms) (T3-39) of the third display period. In this 10 minutes, the brightness data is defined so that the frame lamp is turned off or turned on at low brightness so that there is no discomfort in the lighting mode of the frame lamp when the next production is started.

In W3, since the brightness data for 10 minutes as described above is defined, the lighting control is not performed by repeatedly using the brightness data over T3-1 to T3-38. ..

(Grandchild table for accessory lamps in group notice brightness data table)
FIG. 69 is a diagram for explaining an example of a grandchild table for accessory lamps in the group warning brightness data table. As described above, the accessory lamp 9A is composed of a plurality of lamps such as the accessory lamps 9A1 to 9A4, and in the luminance data table shown in FIG. 69, the accessory lamps 9A1 to 9A4 are sequentially "corresponded to". It is expressed as "RRRR". Each of the accessory lamps 9A1 to 9A4 is a monochromatic (red in this example) LED, and the brightness is represented by "0" to "6" as data. “0” is data corresponding to turning off, and “1” to “6” are data corresponding to turning on. Of "1" to "6", "1" to "3" are data corresponding to low-luminance lighting, and "4" to "6" are data corresponding to high-luminance lighting, respectively. When extinguishing is included as a concept of low brightness, "0" is included in the data corresponding to low brightness. It should be noted that the monochromatic LED has less filters that block light than the full-color LED, so that the spectrum is strongly emitted. For this reason, the monochromatic LED has smaller luminance data corresponding to higher luminance than the full-color LED.

As shown in FIG. 69A, in the grandchild table Y1 used in the first display period, luminance data is defined for each lamp from T1-1 to T1-10 at equal intervals of 100 msec, and further. In the final time T1-11, data for 10 minutes (600,000 msec) for troubleshooting is specified.

In Y1, in the first 100 msec (T1-1) of the first display period, "1" indicating low brightness is specified for all the lamps included in the accessory lamp 9A. As a result, as shown in FIGS. 98 (a22) and 155 (b43) described later, at the beginning of the first display period in the group notice effect, all the lamps included in the accessory lamp 9A are turned off or have low brightness. It will light up. As a result, it is possible to make it easier for the player to pay attention to the fact that the group notice effect will be executed from now on.

Further, in Y1, the luminance data for defect countermeasures is defined in the last 10 minutes (600,000 ms) (T1-11) of the first display period. In this 10 minutes, the accessory lamp 9A is adjusted to the grandchild table Y2 used in the second display period so that there is no discomfort in the lighting mode of the accessory lamp 9A when the next second display period is entered. Luminance data is specified so that the lamps are sparsely lit with high brightness.

In Y1, since the luminance data for 10 minutes for troubleshooting as described above is defined, the lighting control is not performed by repeatedly using the luminance data from T1-1 to T1-10. ..

As shown in FIG. 69 (b), in the grandchild table Y2 used in the second display period, for each lamp of the accessory lamp 9A over T2-1 to T2-10 at non-equal intervals at 50 to 80 msec. Luminance data is specified.

In Y2, one lamp is lit with high brightness, and the other lamps adjacent to the one lamp are also lit with high brightness. The lamps that are sparsely (randomly) lit with high brightness change. Luminance data is specified as such. As a result, as shown in FIGS. 101, 102, 158, and 159, which will be described later, in the second display period in the group notice effect, the characters are arranged in groups in the group notice effect. The lamp 9A will be sparsely lit with high brightness.

Since the luminance data for troubleshooting is not provided in Y2 as in Y1, the lighting control is performed by repeatedly using the luminance data from T2-1 to T2-10.

As shown in FIG. 69 (c), in the grandchild table Y3 used in the third display period, brightness data is defined for the accessory lamp 9A over T3-1 to T3-6 at intervals of 80 msec. .. After that, the luminance data is defined over T3-7 to T3-38 at short intervals of 10 msec.

Further, in Y3, similarly to Y1, the luminance data for defect countermeasures is defined in the last 10 minutes (600,000 ms) (T3-39) of the third display period. In this 10 minutes, the brightness data is defined so that the accessory lamp 9A is lit with low brightness so that there is no discomfort in the lighting mode of the accessory lamp 9A when the next production is started.

In Y3, since the brightness data for 10 minutes as described above is defined, the lighting control is not performed by repeatedly using the brightness data over T3-1 to T3-38. ..

(Grandchild table for left lamp in group notice brightness data table)
FIG. 70 is a diagram for explaining an example of a grandchild table for the left lamp of the panel in the group warning brightness data table. As described above, the panel left lamp 9B is composed of a plurality of lamps such as the panel left lamps 9B1 to 9B5, and in the luminance data table shown in FIG. It is expressed as "WWWWWW". Each of the panel left lamps 9B1 to 9B5 is a single color (white in this example) LED, and the brightness is represented by "0" to "6" as data. “0” is data corresponding to turning off, and “1” to “6” are data corresponding to turning on. Of "1" to "6", "1" to "3" are data corresponding to low-luminance lighting, and "4" to "6" are data corresponding to high-luminance lighting, respectively. When extinguishing is included as a concept of low brightness, "0" is included in the data corresponding to low brightness. In the case of the above-mentioned accessory lamp 9A, the LED is only red, but even if the LED is only white such as the left panel lamp 9B, the value indicating high brightness is set to "6" at the maximum. ing.

As shown in FIG. 70A, in the grandchild table L1 used in the first display period, luminance data is defined for each lamp from T1-1 to T1-10 at equal intervals of 100 msec, and further. In the final time T1-11, data for 10 minutes (600,000 msec) for troubleshooting is specified.

In L1, in the first 100 msec (T1-1) of the first display period, "1" indicating low brightness is specified for all the lamps included in the left panel lamp 9B. As a result, as shown in FIGS. 98 (a22) and 155 (b43) described later, at the beginning of the first display period in the group notice effect, all the lamps included in the left panel lamp 9B are turned off or have low brightness. It will light up. As a result, it is possible to make it easier for the player to pay attention to the fact that the group notice effect will be executed from now on.

Further, in L1, the luminance data for defect countermeasures is defined in the last 10 minutes (600,000 ms) (T1-11) of the first display period. In this 10 minutes, the panel left lamp 9B is set according to the grandchild table L2 used in the second display period so that there is no discomfort in the lighting mode of the panel left lamp 9B when the next second display period is entered. Luminance data is specified so that the lamps are sparsely lit with high brightness.

In L1, since the luminance data for 10 minutes for troubleshooting as described above is defined, the lighting control is not performed by repeatedly using the luminance data from T1-1 to T1-10. ..

As shown in FIG. 70 (b), in the grandchild table L2 used in the second display period, for each lamp of the left lamp 9B on the panel from T2-1 to T2-10 at non-equal intervals at 50 to 80 msec. Luminance data is specified.

In L2, one lamp is lit with high brightness, and other lamps adjacent to the one lamp are also lit with high brightness. The lamps that are sparsely (randomly) lit with high brightness change. Luminance data is specified as such. As a result, as shown in FIGS. 101, 102, 158, and 159, which will be described later, in the second display period in the group notice effect, the left side of the board is adjusted to the state in which the characters progress in a group in the group notice effect. The lamp 9B is sparsely lit with high brightness.

Since the luminance data for troubleshooting is not provided in L2 as in L1, the lighting control is performed by repeatedly using the luminance data from T2-1 to T2-10.

As shown in FIG. 70 (c), in the grandchild table L3 used in the third display period, the brightness data is defined for the left lamp 9B over T3-1 to T3-6 at intervals of 80 msec. .. After that, the luminance data is defined over T3-7 to T3-38 at short intervals of 10 msec.

Further, in L3, similarly to L1, the luminance data for defect countermeasures is defined in the last 10 minutes (600,000 ms) (T3-39) of the third display period. In this 10 minutes, the brightness data is defined so that the panel left lamp 9B is lit with low brightness so that there is no discomfort in the lighting mode of the panel left lamp 9B when the next production is started.

In L3, since the brightness data for 10 minutes as described above is defined, the lighting control is not performed by repeatedly using the brightness data over T3-1 to T3-38. ..

(Grandchild table for on-board lamp in group notice brightness data table)
FIG. 71 is a diagram for explaining an example of a grandchild table for a board lamp in the group warning brightness data table. As described above, the on-board lamp 9C is composed of a plurality of lamps such as the on-board lamps 9C1 to 9C13, and each of the on-board lamps 9C1 to 9C5 and 9C9 to 9C13 has a plurality of colors (in this example, red (in this example, red (in this example)). The LEDs are three colors (R), green (G), and blue (B)), and the brightness is represented by hexadecimal numbers "0" to "F" as data. “0” is data corresponding to turning off, and “1” to “F” are data corresponding to turning on. Of "1" to "F", "1" to "7" are data corresponding to low-luminance lighting, and "8" to "F" are data corresponding to high-luminance lighting, respectively. When extinguishing is included as a concept of low brightness, "0" is included in the data corresponding to low brightness. On the other hand, each of the on-board lamps 9C6 to 9C8 is a monochromatic (white in this example) LED, and the brightness is represented by "0" to "6" as data. “0” is data corresponding to turning off, and “1” to “6” are data corresponding to turning on. Of "1" to "6", "1" to "3" are data corresponding to low-luminance lighting, and "4" to "6" are data corresponding to high-luminance lighting, respectively. When extinguishing is included as a concept of low brightness, "0" is included in the data corresponding to low brightness. As described above, the high-luminance value used in the multi-color LED is larger than the high-luminance value used in the monochromatic LED. In the case of the above-mentioned accessory lamp 9A, the LED is only red, but even if the LED is only white such as the on-board lamp 9C, the value indicating high brightness is set to "6" at the maximum. ing.

As shown in FIG. 71 (a), in the grandchild table U1 used in the first display period, luminance data is defined for each lamp from T1-1 to T1-10 at equal intervals of 100 msec, and further. In the final time T1-11, data for 10 minutes (600,000 msec) for troubleshooting is specified.

In U1, in the first 100 msec (T1-1) of the first display period, "1" or "0" indicating low brightness is specified for all the lamps included in the accessory lamp 9A. As a result, as shown in FIGS. 98 (a22) and 155 (b43) described later, at the beginning of the first display period in the group notice effect, all the lamps included in the on-board lamp 9C are turned off or have low brightness. It will light up. As a result, it is possible to make it easier for the player to pay attention to the fact that the group notice effect will be executed from now on.

Further, in U1, the luminance data for defect countermeasures is defined in the last 10 minutes (600,000 ms) (T1-11) of the first display period. In this 10 minutes, the on-board lamp 9C is adjusted to the grandchild table U2 used in the second display period so that there is no discomfort in the lighting mode of the on-board lamp 9C when the next second display period is entered. The brightness data is specified so that the lights are sparsely lit with high brightness.

In U1, since the brightness data for 10 minutes as described above is defined, the lighting control is not performed by repeatedly using the brightness data over T1-1 to T1-10. ..

As shown in FIG. 71 (b), in the grandchild table U2 used in the second display period, for each lamp of the on-board lamp 9C over T2-1 to T2-10 at non-equal intervals at 50 to 80 msec. Luminance data is specified.

In U2, one lamp is lit with high brightness, and other lamps adjacent to the one lamp are also lit with high brightness. The lamps that are sparsely (randomly) lit with high brightness change. Luminance data is specified as such. As a result, as shown in FIGS. 101, 102, 158, and 159, which will be described later, in the second display period in the group notice effect, the characters are grouped on the board in the group notice effect. The lamp 9C will be sparsely lit with high brightness.

Since the U2 is not provided with the luminance data for troubleshooting as in the U1, the lighting control is performed by repeatedly using the luminance data from T2-1 to T2-10.

As shown in FIG. 71 (c), in the grandchild table U3 used in the third display period, brightness data is defined for the on-board lamp 9C over T3-1 to T3-6 at intervals of 80 msec. .. After that, the luminance data is defined over T3-7 to T3-38 at short intervals of 10 msec.

Further, in U3, similarly to U1, the luminance data for defect countermeasures is defined in the last 10 minutes (600,000 ms) (T3-39) of the third display period. In this 10 minutes, the brightness data is defined so that the on-board lamp 9C is turned off or turned on at low brightness so that there is no discomfort in the lighting mode of the on-board lamp 9C when the next production is started.

In U3, since the brightness data for 10 minutes as described above is defined, the lighting control is not performed by repeatedly using the brightness data over T3-1 to T3-38. ..

In any of U1, U2, and U3, only the data of "0" is specified for the on-board lamps 9C6 to 9C8, which are monochromatic. That is, the on-board lamps 9C6 to 9C8 are not used in the group notice production.

(Grandchild table for attacker lamp in group notice brightness data table)
FIG. 72 is a diagram for explaining an example of a grandchild table for an attacker lamp in the group warning luminance data table. Each of the attacker lamp 9E and the electric chew lamp 9H is an LED having a plurality of colors (in this example, three colors of red (R), green (G), and blue (B)), and the data is from "0" to "0". The brightness is represented by the hexadecimal number of "F". “0” is data corresponding to turning off, and “1” to “F” are data corresponding to turning on. Of "1" to "F", "1" to "7" are data corresponding to low-luminance lighting, and "8" to "F" are data corresponding to high-luminance lighting, respectively. When extinguishing is included as a concept of low brightness, "0" is included in the data corresponding to low brightness. On the other hand, the V attacker lamp 9F is a monochromatic (white in this example) LED, and the brightness is represented by "0" to "6" as data. “0” is data corresponding to turning off, and “1” to “6” are data corresponding to turning on. Of "1" to "6", "1" to "3" are data corresponding to low-luminance lighting, and "4" to "6" are data corresponding to high-luminance lighting, respectively. When extinguishing is included as a concept of low brightness, "0" is included in the data corresponding to low brightness. As described above, the high-luminance value used in the multi-color LED is larger than the high-luminance value used in the monochromatic LED. In the case of the above-mentioned accessory lamp 9A, the LED is only red, but even if the LED is only white such as the V attacker lamp 9F, the value indicating high brightness is set to "6" at the maximum. ing.

As shown in FIG. 72 (a), in the grandchild table A1 used in the first display period, luminance data is defined for each lamp from T1-1 to T1-10 at equal intervals of 100 msec, and further. In the final time T1-11, data for 10 minutes (600,000 msec) for troubleshooting is specified.

In A1, "1" or "0" indicating low brightness is specified for all the lamps in the first 100 msec (T1-1) of the first display period. As a result, as shown in FIGS. 98 (a22) and 155 (b43) described later, the attacker lamp 9E, the electric chew lamp 9H, and the V attacker lamp 9F are turned off at the beginning of the first display period in the group notice effect. Or it comes to light at low brightness. As a result, it is possible to make it easier for the player to pay attention to the fact that the group notice effect will be executed from now on.

Further, in A1, the luminance data for defect countermeasures is defined in the last 10 minutes (600,000 ms) (T1-11) of the first display period. In this 10 minutes, each lamp has sparsely high brightness according to the grandchild table A2 used in the second display period so that there is no discomfort in the lighting mode of each lamp when the next second display period is entered. Luminance data is specified so that it lights up with.

In A1, since the brightness data for 10 minutes as described above is defined, the lighting control is not performed by repeatedly using the brightness data over T1-1 to T1-10. ..

As shown in FIG. 72 (b), in the grandchild table A2 used in the second display period, the brightness data is defined for each lamp from T2-1 to T2-10 at non-equal intervals at 50 to 80 msec. Has been done.

In A2, one lamp is lit with high brightness, and other lamps adjacent to the one lamp are also lit with high brightness. The lamps that are sparsely (randomly) lit with high brightness change. Luminance data is specified as such. As a result, as shown in FIGS. 101, 102, 158, and 159, which will be described later, in the second display period in the group notice effect, the attacker lamps match the appearance of the characters progressing in groups in the group notice effect. The 9E, the electric chew lamp 9H, and the V attacker lamp 9F will be sparsely lit with high brightness.

Since the brightness data for troubleshooting is not provided in A2 as in A1, the lighting control is performed by repeatedly using the brightness data over T2-1 to T2-10.

As shown in FIG. 72 (c), in the grandchild table A3 used in the third display period, luminance data is defined for each lamp from T3-1 to T3-6 at intervals of 80 msec. After that, the luminance data is defined over T3-7 to T3-38 at short intervals of 10 msec.

Further, in A3, as in A1, the luminance data for defect countermeasures is defined in the last 10 minutes (600,000 ms) (T3-39) of the third display period. In this 10 minutes, the attacker lamp 9E, the electric chew lamp 9H, and the V attacker so that there is no discomfort in the lighting mode of the attacker lamp 9E, the electric chew lamp 9H, and the V attacker lamp 9F when shifting to the next production. The brightness data is specified so that the lamp 9F is turned off or turned on at low brightness.

In A3, since the brightness data for 10 minutes as described above is defined, the lighting control is not performed by repeatedly using the brightness data over T3-1 to T3-38. ..

(Parent table in reach line luminance data table)
FIG. 73 is a diagram for explaining an example of the parent table in the reach line luminance data table. As shown in FIG. 73, in the parent table in the reach line brightness data table, the frame lamp (frame right lamp 9R, frame left lamp 9L), accessory lamp 9A, board left lamp 9B, board lamp 9C, and attacker lamp 9E. For each lamp included in the game effect lamp 9, each effect time of the reach line effect is defined.

The reach line effect is different from the group notice effect, and is an effect that announces that the display result of the variable display by the special symbol or the decorative symbol will be the display result that the jackpot symbol stops, and the game that the reach is reached. It is a production that suggests (or informs) a person. In the reach line effect, as shown in FIGS. 93 to 96 and 143 to 146, which will be described later, a streak of light (also referred to as a reach line) appears from the central portion of the screen of the image display device 5 together with a flash of light. , The reach line expands and contracts inward and outward (left and right direction) so as to connect the left and right decorative patterns that make up the reach, and then the reach line disappears.

In the parent table in the reach line luminance data table, each lamp in the game effect lamp 9 is controlled over 1500 msec so as to match the reach line effect.

(Child table in reach line data table)
FIG. 74 is a diagram for explaining an example of a child table in the reach line luminance data table. As shown in FIG. 74, in the child table in the reach line brightness data table, the reach line effect time is subdivided for each lamp in the game effect lamp 9, and the grandchild table (brightness data table) referred to in each time zone is used. Also called) is specified.

For example, in the period during which the reach line effect is executed, the period during which the flash occurs (the period of the effect shown in FIGS. 93 (a8) and (a9) and FIGS. 143 (a8) and (a9) described later) is a frame. A grandchild table of W11 for the lamp, Y11 for the accessory lamp 9A, L11 for the left panel lamp 9B, U11 for the onboard lamp 9C, and A11 for the attacker lamp 9E is provided.

Among the periods in which the reach line effect is executed, during the period in which the reach line occurs (the period of the effect shown in FIGS. 94 and 144 described later), the frame lamp is W12, the accessory lamp 9A is Y12, and the left panel lamp. A grandchild table of L12 is provided for each of 9B. Since the on-board lamp 9C and the attacker lamp 9E are not used during the period when the reach line is generated, the grandchild table is not prepared.

Among the periods in which the reach line effect is executed, the period in which the reach line expands and contracts inward and outward (shown in FIGS. 95 (a13) to 96 (b17) and FIGS. 145 (a13) to 146 (b17) described later). During the production period), a grandchild table of W13 for the frame lamp, Y13 for the accessory lamp 9A, L13 for the left panel lamp 9B, U13 for the onboard lamp 9C, and A13 for the attacker lamp 9E is provided.

Among the periods during which the reach line effect is executed, during the period when the reach line disappears (the period of the effect shown in FIGS. 96 (a18) and 146 (b18) described later), the frame lamp is W14 and the accessory lamp 9A is Y14. , L14 for the left lamp 9B, U14 for the on-board lamp 9C, and A14 for the attacker lamp 9E, respectively.

As shown in FIG. 74, with respect to the brightness data table referred to in the reach line effect, the frame left in any of the period in which the flash occurs, the period in which the reach line expands and contracts in and out, and the period in which the reach line disappears. Six types of brightness data tables are provided: a lamp 9L, a frame right lamp 9R, an accessory lamp 9A, a board left lamp 9B, a board lamp 9C, and an attacker lamp. On the other hand, regarding the brightness data table referred to in the reach line effect, in the brightness data table referred to during the period when the reach line is generated, the frame left lamp 9L, the frame right lamp 9R, the accessory lamp 9A, and the board left lamp 9B. Four types of brightness data tables are provided.

As described above, in the reach line effect, the brightness data table is provided for the same number of lamps as the group notice effect or a smaller number of lamps than the group notice effect.

(Grandchild table for frame lamp in reach line brightness data table)
FIG. 75 is a diagram for explaining an example of a grandchild table for a frame lamp in the reach line luminance data table. Each lamp included in the frame lamp is an LED having a plurality of colors (in this example, three colors of red (R), green (G), and blue (B)), and the data are "0" to "F". The brightness is represented by a hexadecimal number. “0” is data corresponding to turning off, and “1” to “F” are data corresponding to turning on. Of "1" to "F", "1" to "7" are data corresponding to low-luminance lighting, and "8" to "F" are data corresponding to high-luminance lighting, respectively. When extinguishing is included as a concept of low brightness, "0" is included in the data corresponding to low brightness.

As shown in FIG. 75A, in the grandchild table W11, only the luminance data of the frame left lamp 9L is defined, and the luminance data of the frame right lamp 9R is omitted, but the luminance data of the frame right lamp 9R is Data common to the luminance data of the frame left lamp 9L is used. For example, the brightness data of each of the frame right lamps 9R2 to 9R12 is common to the respective brightness data of the frame left lamps 9L2 to 9L12. The reach line production is a production that suggests to the player that it has reached the reach, and is not a production that arouses the player's expectation by suggesting a big hit like the group notice production. For this reason, the reach line effect does not perform elaborate lighting control such that different brightness data are provided for the frame right lamp 9R and the frame left lamp 9L and each lamp is individually controlled as in the group notice effect. Common brightness data is provided for the frame right lamp 9R and the frame left lamp 9L, and each lamp is controlled together. Furthermore, since the reach line effect has a shorter execution time than the group notice effect, it is elaborate to provide different brightness data for the frame right lamp 9R and the frame left lamp 9L and control each lamp individually as in the group notice effect. Rather than performing lighting control, common brightness data is provided for the frame right lamp 9R and the frame left lamp 9L, and each lamp is controlled together.

In W11, luminance data is defined for each lamp from T11-1 to T11-2 at intervals of 30 msec. In particular, as shown in FIGS. 93 (a8) and 143 (b8) described later, the brightness data is defined so that all the lamps included in the frame lamp are lit with high brightness at the timing when the flash is generated. ..

As shown in FIG. 75 (b), in the grandchild table W12, only the luminance data of the frame left lamp 9L is defined, and the luminance data of the frame right lamp 9R is omitted, but the luminance data of the frame right lamp 9R is Data common to the luminance data of the frame left lamp 9L is used. For example, the brightness data of each of the frame right lamps 9R2 to 9R12 is common to the respective brightness data of the frame left lamps 9L2 to 9L12.

In W12, luminance data is defined for each lamp from T12 to T12-2 at intervals of 30 msec. In particular, as shown in FIGS. 94 and 144 described later, among the lamps included in the frame lamps, the frame left lamps 9L6, 9L7, 9R6, 9R7 located on the left and right sides of the screen have high brightness while the reach line is generated. Luminance data is specified so that it lights up with.

As shown in FIG. 75 (c), in the grandchild table W13, only the luminance data of the frame left lamp 9L is defined, and the luminance data of the frame right lamp 9R is omitted, but the luminance data of the frame right lamp 9R is Data common to the luminance data of the frame left lamp 9L is used. For example, the brightness data of each of the frame right lamps 9R2 to 9R12 is common to the respective brightness data of the frame left lamps 9L2 to 9L12.

In W13, luminance data is defined for each lamp from T13 to T13-4 at intervals of 60 msec. In particular, as shown in FIGS. 95 and 145, which will be described later, among the lamps included in the frame lamps, the frame left lamps 9L6, 9L7, 9R6, 9R7 located on the left and right sides of the screen have high brightness while the reach line is generated. Luminance data is specified so that it lights up with.

As shown in FIG. 75 (d), in the grandchild table W14, only the luminance data of the frame left lamp 9L is defined, and the luminance data of the frame right lamp 9R is omitted, but the luminance data of the frame right lamp 9R is Data common to the luminance data of the frame left lamp 9L is used. For example, the brightness data of each of the frame right lamps 9R2 to 9R12 is common to the respective brightness data of the frame left lamps 9L2 to 9L12.

In W14, the luminance data is defined for each lamp over 100 msec (T14-1), but the value is “0”. As a result, as shown in FIGS. 96 (a18) and 146 (b18) described later, the frame lamp is turned off as the reach line disappears.

(Grandchild table for accessory lamps in reach line brightness data table)
FIG. 76 is a diagram for explaining an example of a grandchild table for accessory lamps in the reach line luminance data table. Each of the accessory lamps 9A1 to 9A4 is a monochromatic (red in this example) LED, and the brightness is represented by "0" to "F" as data. “0” is data corresponding to turning off, and “1” to “F” are data corresponding to turning on. Of "1" to "F", "1" to "7" are data corresponding to low-luminance lighting, and "8" to "F" are data corresponding to high-luminance lighting, respectively. When extinguishing is included as a concept of low brightness, "0" is included in the data corresponding to low brightness.

As shown in FIG. 76 (a), in the grandchild table Y11, the luminance data is defined for the accessory lamp 9A over T11-1 to T11-2 at intervals of 30 msec. In particular, as shown in FIGS. 93 (a8) and 143 (b8) described later, the brightness data is defined so that all the lamps included in the accessory lamp 9A are lit with high brightness at the timing when the flash is generated. ing.

As shown in FIG. 76 (b), in the grandchild table Y12, the luminance data is defined for the accessory lamp 9A from T12 to T12-2 at intervals of 30 msec. In particular, as shown in FIGS. 94 and 144, which will be described later, the brightness data is defined so that all the lamps included in the accessory lamp 9A are lit with high brightness while the reach line is generated.

As shown in FIG. 76 (c), in the grandchild Tave Y13, the brightness data is defined for the accessory lamp 9A from T13 to T13-2 at intervals of 30 msec. In particular, as shown in FIGS. 95 and 145, which will be described later, the brightness data is defined so that all the lamps included in the accessory lamp 9A are lit with high brightness while the reach line is generated.

As shown in FIG. 76 (d), in the grandchild table Y14, the luminance data is defined for the accessory lamp 9A over 100 msec (T14-1), but the value is “0”. As a result, as shown in FIGS. 96 (a18) and 146 (b18), which will be described later, the accessory lamp 9A is also turned off when the reach line disappears.

(Grandchild table for left lamp in reach line brightness data table)
FIG. 77 is a diagram for explaining an example of a grandchild table for the left lamp of the board in the reach line luminance data table. Each of the panel left lamps 9B1 to 9B5 is a single color (white in this example) LED, and the brightness is represented by "0" to "F" as data. “0” is data corresponding to turning off, and “1” to “F” are data corresponding to turning on. Of "1" to "F", "1" to "7" are data corresponding to low-luminance lighting, and "8" to "F" are data corresponding to high-luminance lighting, respectively. When extinguishing is included as a concept of low brightness, "0" is included in the data corresponding to low brightness.

As shown in FIG. 77 (a), in the grandchild table L11, the brightness data is defined for the left lamp 9B of the panel from T11-1 to T11-2 at intervals of 30 msec. In particular, as shown in FIGS. 93 (a8) and 143 (b8) described later, the brightness data is defined so that all the lamps included in the left panel lamp 9B are lit with high brightness at the timing when the flash is generated. ing.

As shown in FIG. 77 (b), in the grandchild table L12, the brightness data is defined for the left lamp 9B on the panel from T12 to T12-2 at intervals of 30 msec. In particular, as shown in FIGS. 94 and 144, which will be described later, the brightness data is defined so that all the lamps included in the left panel lamp 9B are lit with high brightness while the reach line is generated.

As shown in FIG. 77 (c), in the grandchild table L13, the brightness data is defined for the left panel lamp 9B from T13 to T13-4 at intervals of 60 msec. In particular, as shown in FIGS. 95 and 145, which will be described later, the brightness data is defined so that all the lamps included in the left panel lamp 9B are lit with high brightness while the reach line is generated.

As shown in FIG. 77 (d), in the grandchild table L14, the luminance data is defined for the left panel lamp 9B over 100 msec (T14-1), but the value is “0”. As a result, as shown in FIGS. 96 (a18) and 146 (b18), which will be described later, the left lamp 9B of the panel is also turned off when the reach line disappears.

(Grandchild table for on-board lamp in reach line brightness data table)
FIG. 78 is a diagram for explaining an example of a grandchild table for a board lamp in the reach line luminance data table. Each of the on-board lamps 9C1 to 9C5 and 9C9 to 9C13 is an LED having a plurality of colors (in this example, three colors of red (R), green (G), and blue (B)), and the data is as follows. The brightness is represented by "0" to "F". Further, each of the on-board lamps 9C6 to 9C8 is a single color (white in this example) LED, and the brightness is represented by "0" to "F" as data. “0” is data corresponding to turning off, and “1” to “F” are data corresponding to turning on. Of "1" to "F", "1" to "7" are data corresponding to low-luminance lighting, and "8" to "F" are data corresponding to high-luminance lighting, respectively. When extinguishing is included as a concept of low brightness, "0" is included in the data corresponding to low brightness.

As shown in FIG. 78 (a), in the grandchild table U11, the brightness data is defined for the on-board lamp 9C over T11-1 to T11-2 at intervals of 30 msec. In particular, as shown in FIGS. 93 (a8) and 143 (b8) described later, at the timing when the flash occurs, among the lamps included in the on-board lamps 9C, the lamps other than the central on-board lamps 9C6 to 9C8 Luminance data is specified so that the lamp lights up with high brightness.

As shown in FIG. 78 (b), in the grandchild table U13, the brightness data is defined for the on-board lamp 9C from T13 to T13-4 at intervals of 60 msec. In particular, as shown in FIGS. 95 and 145, which will be described later, among the lamps included in the on-board lamps 9C, the lamps other than the central on-board lamps 9C6 to 9C8 are lit with high brightness while the reach line is generated. Luminance data is specified as such.

As shown in FIG. 78 (d), in the grandchild table L14, the luminance data is defined for the on-board lamp 9C for 100 msec (T14-1), but the value is “0”. As a result, as shown in FIGS. 96 (a18) and 146 (b18), which will be described later, the on-board lamp 9C is also turned off when the reach line disappears.

(Grandchild table for attacker lamp in reach line brightness data table)
FIG. 79 is a diagram for explaining an example of a grandchild table for an attacker lamp in the reach line luminance data table. Each of the attacker lamp 9E and the electric chew lamp 9H is an LED having a plurality of colors (in this example, three colors of red (R), green (G), and blue (B)), and the data is "0". The brightness is represented by "F". Further, the V attacker lamp 9F is a single color (white in this example) LED, and the brightness is represented by "0" to "F" as data. “0” is data corresponding to turning off, and “1” to “F” are data corresponding to turning on. Of "1" to "F", "1" to "7" are data corresponding to low-luminance lighting, and "8" to "F" are data corresponding to high-luminance lighting, respectively. When extinguishing is included as a concept of low brightness, "0" is included in the data corresponding to low brightness.

As shown in FIG. 79 (a), in the grandchild table A11, luminance data is defined for each lamp from T11 to T11-2 at intervals of 30 msec. In particular, as shown in FIGS. 93 (a8) and 143 (b8) described later, at the timing when the flash occurs, the attacker lamp 9E, the electric chew lamp 9H, and the V attacker lamp 9F are lit up with high brightness. The data is specified.

As shown in FIG. 79 (b), in the grandchild table A13, the brightness data is defined for each lamp from T13 to T13-4 at intervals of 60 msec. In particular, as shown in FIGS. 95 and 145, which will be described later, the brightness data is defined so that the attacker lamp 9E, the electric chew lamp 9H, and the V attacker lamp 9F are lit with high brightness while the reach line is generated. There is.

As shown in FIG. 79 (d), in the grandchild table A14, the luminance data is defined for each lamp over 100 msec (T14-1), but the value is “0”. As a result, as shown in FIGS. 96 (a18) and 146 (b18) described later, the attacker lamp 9E, the electric chew lamp 9H, and the V attacker lamp 9F are also turned off when the reach line disappears.

(Parent table in background notice brightness data table)
FIG. 80 is a diagram for explaining an example of the parent table in the background warning luminance data table. As shown in FIG. 80, in the parent table in the background notice brightness data table, the frame lamp (frame right lamp 9R, frame left lamp 9L), accessory lamp 9A, board left lamp 9B, board lamp 9C, and attacker lamp 9E. For each lamp included in the game effect lamp 9, each effect time of the background notice effect is defined.

Unlike the group notice effect, the background notice effect is an effect that announces that the display result of the variable display by the special figure or the decorative pattern will be the display result that the jackpot symbol stops, and is a specific character (for example, jam). Chan) is displayed with a specific background (for example, the background of the starry sky).

In the parent table in the background notice brightness data table, each lamp in the game effect lamp 9 is controlled for 5500 msec so as to match the background notice effect.

(Child table in background notice brightness data table)
FIG. 81 is a diagram for explaining an example of a child table in the background warning luminance data table. As shown in FIG. 81, in the child table in the background advance notice brightness data table, the time of the background notice effect is subdivided for each lamp in the game effect lamp 9, and the grandchild table (brightness data table) referred to in each time zone is used. Also called) is specified.

For example, in the first 2000 msec of the period in which the background notice effect is executed, the frame lamp is W21, the accessory lamp 9A is Y21, the board left lamp 9B is L21, the board lamp 9C is U21, and the attacker lamp 9E. A grandchild table of A21 is provided respectively.

During the period during which the background notice effect is executed, during 100 msec, the frame lamp is W22, the accessory lamp 9A is Y22, the board left lamp 9B is L22, the board lamp 9C is U22, and the attacker lamp 9E is A22. Each grandchild table is provided.

In the final 600,000 msec of the period in which the background notice effect is executed, the frame lamp is W23, the accessory lamp 9A is Y23, the board left lamp 9B is L23, the board lamp 9C is U23, and the attacker lamp 9E is A23. Each grandchild table is provided.

As shown in FIG. 81, regarding the brightness data table referred to in the background notice effect, the frame left lamp 9L, the frame right lamp 9R, and the accessory lamp 9A are used in any of the first 200 msec, the middle 100 msec, and the last 600,000 msec. , A board left lamp 9B, a board lamp 9C, and an attacker lamp are provided with six types of brightness data tables.

As described above, in the background advance notice effect, the brightness data table is provided for the same number of lamps as the group advance notice effect.

(Grandchild table for frame lamp in background notice brightness data table)
FIG. 82 is a diagram for explaining an example of a grandchild table for a frame lamp in the background warning brightness data table. Each lamp included in the frame lamp is an LED having a plurality of colors (in this example, three colors of red (R), green (G), and blue (B)), and the data are "0" to "F". The brightness is represented by a hexadecimal number. “0” is data corresponding to turning off, and “1” to “F” are data corresponding to turning on. Of "1" to "F", "1" to "7" are data corresponding to low-luminance lighting, and "8" to "F" are data corresponding to high-luminance lighting, respectively. When extinguishing is included as a concept of low brightness, "0" is included in the data corresponding to low brightness.

As shown in FIG. 82 (a), in the grandchild table W21, only the luminance data of the frame left lamp 9L is defined, and the luminance data of the frame right lamp 9R is omitted, but the luminance data of the frame right lamp 9R is Data common to the luminance data of the frame left lamp 9L is used. For example, the brightness data of each of the frame right lamps 9R2 to 9R12 is common to the respective brightness data of the frame left lamps 9L2 to 9L12. In W21, luminance data is defined for each lamp from T21 to T21-4 at intervals of 50 msec.

As shown in FIG. 82 (b), in the grandchild table W22, only the luminance data of the frame left lamp 9L is defined, and the luminance data of the frame right lamp 9R is omitted, but the luminance data of the frame right lamp 9R is Data common to the luminance data of the frame left lamp 9L is used. For example, the brightness data of each of the frame right lamps 9R2 to 9R12 is common to the respective brightness data of the frame left lamps 9L2 to 9L12. In W22, luminance data is defined for each lamp from T22-1 to T22-2 at intervals of 20 msec.

As shown in FIG. 82 (c), in the grandchild table W23, only the luminance data of the frame left lamp 9L is defined, and the luminance data of the frame right lamp 9R is omitted, but the luminance data of the frame right lamp 9R is Data common to the luminance data of the frame left lamp 9L is used. For example, the brightness data of each of the frame right lamps 9R2 to 9R12 is common to the respective brightness data of the frame left lamps 9L2 to 9L12. In W23, luminance data is defined for each lamp from T23 to T23-6 while repeating 240 msec and 230 msec.

(Grandchild table for accessory lamp in background notice brightness data table)
FIG. 83 is a diagram for explaining an example of a grandchild table for accessory lamps in the background warning brightness data table. Each of the accessory lamps 9A1 to 9A4 is a monochromatic (red in this example) LED, and the brightness is represented by "0" to "F" as data. “0” is data corresponding to turning off, and “1” to “F” are data corresponding to turning on. Of "1" to "F", "1" to "7" are data corresponding to low-luminance lighting, and "8" to "F" are data corresponding to high-luminance lighting, respectively. When extinguishing is included as a concept of low brightness, "0" is included in the data corresponding to low brightness.

As shown in FIG. 83A, in the grandchild table Y21, luminance data is defined for the accessory lamp 9A from T21 to T21-4 at intervals of 50 msec.

As shown in FIG. 83 (b), in the grandchild table Y22, luminance data is defined for the accessory lamp 9A from T22-1 to T22-2 at intervals of 20 msec.

As shown in FIG. 83 (c), in the grandchild Tave Y23, the brightness data is defined for the accessory lamp 9A from T23 to T23-6 while repeating 240 msec and 230 msec.

(Grandchild table for the left lamp on the board in the background notice brightness data table)
FIG. 84 is a diagram for explaining an example of a grandchild table for the left lamp of the panel in the background warning brightness data table. Each of the panel left lamps 9B1 to 9B5 is a single color (white in this example) LED, and the brightness is represented by "0" to "F" as data. “0” is data corresponding to turning off, and “1” to “F” are data corresponding to turning on. Of "1" to "F", "1" to "7" are data corresponding to low-luminance lighting, and "8" to "F" are data corresponding to high-luminance lighting, respectively. When extinguishing is included as a concept of low brightness, "0" is included in the data corresponding to low brightness.

As shown in FIG. 84 (a), in the grandchild table L21, the brightness data is defined for the left lamp 9B on the panel from T21 to T21-4 at intervals of 50 msec.

As shown in FIG. 84 (b), in the grandchild table L22, the brightness data is defined for the left lamp 9B on the panel from T22-1 to T22-2 at intervals of 20 msec.

As shown in FIG. 84 (c), in the grandchild table L23, the brightness data is defined for the left panel lamp 9B from T23 to T23-6 while repeating 240 msec and 230 msec.

(Grandchild table for on-board lamp in background notice brightness data table)
FIG. 85 is a diagram for explaining an example of a grandchild table for a board lamp in the background warning brightness data table. Each of the on-board lamps 9C1 to 9C5 and 9C9 to 9C13 is an LED having a plurality of colors (in this example, three colors of red (R), green (G), and blue (B)), and the data is as follows. The brightness is represented by "0" to "F". Further, each of the on-board lamps 9C6 to 9C8 is a single color (white in this example) LED, and the brightness is represented by "0" to "F" as data. “0” is data corresponding to turning off, and “1” to “F” are data corresponding to turning on. Of "1" to "F", "1" to "7" are data corresponding to low-luminance lighting, and "8" to "F" are data corresponding to high-luminance lighting, respectively. When extinguishing is included as a concept of low brightness, "0" is included in the data corresponding to low brightness.

As shown in FIG. 85 (a), in the grandchild table U21, the brightness data is defined for the on-board lamp 9C from T21 to T21-4 at intervals of 50 msec.

As shown in FIG. 85 (b), in the grandchild table U22, brightness data is defined for the on-board lamp 9C over T22-1 to T22-2 at intervals of 20 msec.

As shown in FIG. 85 (c), in the grandchild table U23, the brightness data is defined for the on-board lamp 9C over T23-1 to T23-6 while repeating at 240 msec and 230 msec.

(Grandchild table for attacker lamp in background notice brightness data table)
FIG. 86 is a diagram for explaining an example of a grandchild table for an attacker lamp in the background warning brightness data table. Each of the attacker lamp 9E and the electric chew lamp 9H is an LED having a plurality of colors (in this example, three colors of red (R), green (G), and blue (B)), and the data is "0". The brightness is represented by "F". Further, the V attacker lamp 9F is a single color (white in this example) LED, and the brightness is represented by "0" to "F" as data. “0” is data corresponding to turning off, and “1” to “F” are data corresponding to turning on. Of "1" to "F", "1" to "7" are data corresponding to low-luminance lighting, and "8" to "F" are data corresponding to high-luminance lighting, respectively. When extinguishing is included as a concept of low brightness, "0" is included in the data corresponding to low brightness.

As shown in FIG. 86 (a), in the grandchild table A21, the brightness of the attacker lamp 9E, the electric chew lamp 9H, and the V attacker lamp 9F is increased over T21-1 to T21-2 at intervals of 50 msec. The data is specified.

As shown in FIG. 86 (b), in the grandchild table A22, the brightness of the attacker lamp 9E, the electric chew lamp 9H, and the V attacker lamp 9F is increased over T22-1 to T22-2 at intervals of 20 msec. The data is specified.

As shown in FIG. 86 (c), in the grandson table A23, each lamp of the attacker lamp 9E, the electric chew lamp 9H, and the V attacker lamp 9F is repeated at 240 msec and 230 msec from T23 to T23-6. Luminance data is specified for.

(Brightness data table when all lights are on)
FIG. 87 is a diagram for explaining an example of the brightness data table at the time of full lighting. As shown in FIGS. 87 (a) to 87 (h), in the brightness data table at full lighting, the frame lamp, the accessory lamp 9A, the board left lamp 9B, the board lamp 9C, the attacker lamp 9E, the V attacker lamp 9F, High-brightness brightness data (the maximum value "F" in this example) is specified for each game effect lamp 9 such as the electric chew lamp 9H, the V lamp 9G, the stick controller lamp 9J, and the trigger button lamp 9K. There is.

(Brightness data table during PUSH production)
FIG. 88 is a diagram for explaining an example of the brightness data table at the time of PUSH effect. The PUSH effect is an effect that encourages an operation of pressing the push button 31B, as shown in FIG. 97 (a19) described later.

FIG. 88A shows the luminance data table S41 for the stick controller lamp 9J. In S41, luminance data is defined for the stick controller lamp 9J over T41-1 to T41-4 at intervals of 20 msec. The lighting color of the stick controller lamp 9J during the PUSH effect is the same color as the lighting color at which the frame lamp or the like is lit in the group notice effect (red in this example).

FIG. 88B shows the luminance data table T41 for the trigger button lamp 9K. In T41, luminance data is defined for the trigger button lamp 9K over T51-1 to T512 at intervals of 150 msec. The lighting color of the trigger button lamp 9K during the PUSH effect is the same color as the lighting color at which the frame lamp or the like is lit in the group notice effect (red in this example).

(Child table in the group notice brightness data table related to the modified example)
FIG. 89 is a diagram for explaining an example of a child table in the group warning luminance data table according to the modified example. As shown in FIG. 89, in the child table in the group notice brightness data table according to the modification, the time of the group notice effect is subdivided for each lamp in the game effect lamp 9, and the grandchild table referred to in each time zone. (Also called brightness data table) is specified.

For example, in the period (2000 msec) until the middle of the first display period in the period in which the group notice effect is executed, W101 is used for the frame lamp, Y101 is used for the accessory lamp 9A, L101 is used for the left side lamp 9B, and the on-board lamp is used. A grandchild table of U101 for 9C and A101 for attacker lamp 9E is provided. These grandchild tables correspond to the first luminance data table according to the modified example.

Among the periods in which the group notice effect is executed, during the remaining period of the first display period, the second display period, and the middle of the third display period (2790 msec), W102 is used for the frame lamp and Y102 is used for the accessory lamp 9A. , L102 for the left board lamp 9B, U102 for the on-board lamp 9C, and A102 for the attacker lamp 9E, respectively. These grandchild tables correspond to the second luminance data table according to the modified example.

In the remaining period (150 msec) of the third display period of the period in which the group notice effect is executed, W103 is used for the frame lamp, Y103 is used for the accessory lamp 9A, L103 is used for the left side lamp 9B, and U103 is used for the onboard lamp 9C. , And a grandchild table of A103 for the attacker lamp 9E, respectively. These grandchild tables correspond to the third luminance data table according to the modified example.

As described above, in the group notice brightness data table according to the modification, the control of the game effect lamp 9 is started at the timing related to the start of the first display period in the first brightness data table, and during the first display period. The control of the game effect lamp 9 ends, and in the second brightness data table, the control of the game effect lamp 9 starts during the first display period, and the control of the game effect lamp 9 continues even during the second display period. Then, the control of the game effect lamp 9 ends during the third display period, and the control of the game effect lamp 9 starts during the third display period in the third brightness data table.

(Grandchild table for frame lamp in group notice brightness data table related to modified example)
FIG. 90 is a diagram for explaining an example of a grandchild table for a frame lamp in the group warning luminance data table according to the modified example. Each lamp included in the frame lamp is an LED having a plurality of colors (in this example, three colors of red (R), green (G), and blue (B)), and the data are "0" to "F". The brightness is represented by a hexadecimal number. “0” is data corresponding to turning off, and “1” to “F” are data corresponding to turning on. Of "1" to "F", "1" to "7" are data corresponding to low-luminance lighting, and "8" to "F" are data corresponding to high-luminance lighting, respectively. When extinguishing is included as a concept of low brightness, "0" is included in the data corresponding to low brightness.

As shown in FIG. 90 (a), in the grandchild table W101, RGB data is defined for each lamp from T101-1 to T101-10 at equal intervals of 20 msec, and the last time T101-11. In, data for 10 minutes (600,000 msec) for troubleshooting is specified.

As shown in FIG. 90 (b), in the grandchild table W102, RGB data is defined for each lamp from T102-1 to T102-10 at non-equal intervals of 50 to 80 msec. In W102, one frame lamp is lit with high brightness, and other frame lamps adjacent to the one frame lamp are also lit with high brightness, including brightness data, and sparsely (randomly) lit with high brightness. Luminance data is specified so that For example, in W102, high-luminance data (for example, “A”) is sparsely defined so as to be lit with high brightness over a plurality of locations. As a result, in the group notice effect, the frame lamps are sparsely lit with high brightness according to the state in which the characters progress in a group in the group notice effect. Further, W102 is designed to light more frame lamps with higher brightness than W101.

As shown in FIG. 90 (c), in the grandchild table W103, RGB data is defined for the frame left lamp and the frame right lamp over T103-1 to T103-6 at 14 msec intervals. After that, for the frame left lamp, RGB data is specified over T103-7 to T103-38 at a short interval of 2 msec, and for the frame right lamp, RGB data is continuously specified over T103-7 to T103-38 at a long interval of 14 msec. RGB data is specified.

Further, in W103, from T103-2 to T103-30, the lamps that were lit with high brightness from the vicinity of the frame right lamps 9R5 to 9R8 are gradually turned off or turned off with low brightness. Or increase the number of lamps that light up at low brightness. Further, for T103-7 to T103-38, in the case of the frame right lamps 9R2 to 9R12, the brightness data is specified at 14 msec intervals, whereas the frame left lamp 9L5 located in the direction in which the character advances in the group notice. For ~ 9L12, the brightness data is defined so that the brightness is changed from high brightness to off or low brightness at short intervals of 2 msec. As a result, the position where the frame lamp is turned off or turned on with low brightness is changed from the right side to the left side of the pachinko gaming machine 1 in accordance with the effect that the character disappears to the left edge of the screen in the group notice.

Further, in W103, the brightness data is defined so that all the lamps included in the frame lamp are turned off or turned on at low brightness at the time of transition to T103-30. Further, in W103, similarly to W101, luminance data for defect countermeasures is defined in the last 10 minutes (600,000 ms) (T103-39) of the third display period. In this 10 minutes, the brightness data is defined so that the frame lamp is turned off or turned on at low brightness so that there is no discomfort in the lighting mode of the frame lamp when the next production is started.

[Direction mode of pachinko gaming machine 1]
Next, the production mode of the pachinko gaming machine 1 during the game will be described with reference to FIGS. 91 to 176. In the present embodiment, an effect mode in which any of the fluctuation patterns of the main fluctuation numbers 9, 12, 15, 20, 23, and 26 in which the pseudo fluctuation is performed twice is selected will be described. Further, in the figure, how each lamp included in the game effect lamp 9 lights up or blinks is shown by hatching.

(Direction mode in stage A)
The effect mode in the stage A will be described with reference to FIGS. 91 to 113.

As shown in FIG. 91 (a1), when the variable display is started based on one hold storage, the decorative symbol is variably displayed in the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R on the screen of the image display device 5, and the decorative symbol is variably displayed. The fourth symbol 5J is variably displayed, and the small symbol 5M is variably displayed. On the screen, a background image including an image of a character or a landscape is displayed as a background during variable display. In the present embodiment, an image in which Maid A (Yumemu-chan) is flying is displayed as a character appearing in Stage A. During the variable display, the game effect lamp 9 lights up in a mode corresponding to the variable display, and the effect sound is output from the speakers 8L and 8R in a mode corresponding to the variable display.

As shown in FIG. 91 (a2), when the pseudo-continuous effect is performed and the character "x2" indicating that the second variable display is performed is displayed, as shown in FIG. 91 (a3). The second variable display is performed.

As shown in FIG. 92 (a4), when the pseudo-continuous effect is further performed and the character "x3" indicating that the third variable display is performed is displayed, as shown in FIG. 92 (a5). The third variable display is performed. After that, as shown in FIG. 92 (a6), when "3" is stopped in the left decorative symbol display area 5L and "3" is stopped in the right decorative symbol display area 5R, the variable display mode reaches. It becomes an aspect.

As shown in FIG. 93 (a7), a decorative symbol for a reach line effect is displayed to notify that the variable display mode has become the reach mode. As shown in FIG. 93 (a8), the reach line effect starts. At this time, a flash of light appears from the central portion of the screen of the image display device 5. During the reach line effect, each lamp included in the game effect lamp 9 is turned on in a manner corresponding to the reach line effect based on the luminance data tables shown in FIGS. 73 to 79. In the state shown in FIG. 93 (a8), all the lamps included in the frame lamp are lit with high brightness. During the reach line effect, the effect sound corresponding to the reach line effect is output from the speakers 8L and 8R.

As shown in FIG. 93 (a9), the decorative pattern in the center of the screen starts to rotate in the left-right direction, and the flash of light becomes large.

As shown in FIG. 94 (a10), the decorative pattern in the center of the screen continues to rotate in the left-right direction, the flash of light becomes large, and the reach line appears in the center of the screen. The reach line is a streak (light ray) of light connecting between the left and right decorative patterns constituting the reach mode, and is given a predetermined color such as blue or red. By displaying the reach line, it is possible to suggest to the player that the variable display mode has become the reach mode or the reach mode.

As shown in FIG. 94 (a11), the decorative pattern in the center of the screen continues to rotate in the left-right direction, the flash of light increases, and the reach line in the center of the screen begins to extend in the left-right direction (outside) of the screen. As shown in FIG. 94 (a12), the decorative pattern in the center of the screen returns to the original position, and the reach line in the center of the screen further extends in the left-right direction (outside) of the screen. As shown in FIG. 94, during the reach line effect, the frame left lamps 9L6, 9L7, 9R6, 9R7 located on the left and right sides of the screen are lit with high brightness.

As shown in FIG. 95 (a13), the decorative pattern in the center of the screen is gradually enlarged, and the reach line in the center of the screen extends in the left-right direction (outside) of the screen. As shown in FIG. 95 (a14), the decorative pattern in the center of the screen is further enlarged, and the reach line in the center of the screen is further extended in the left-right direction (outside) of the screen. As shown in FIG. 95 (a15), the decorative pattern in the center of the screen is further enlarged, and the reach line in the center of the screen is further extended in the left-right direction (outside) of the screen. As shown in FIG. 95, during the reach line, the frame left lamps 9L6, 9L7, 9R6, 9R7 located on the left and right sides of the screen are lit with high brightness.

As shown in FIG. 96 (a16), the decorative pattern in the center of the screen is gradually reduced in stages, and the reach line in the center of the screen begins to shrink in the left-right direction (inside) of the screen. As shown in FIG. 96 (b17), the decorative pattern in the center of the screen is further reduced, and the reach line in the center of the screen is further reduced in the left-right direction (inside) of the screen to stop at a fixed position. At this time, the frame left lamps 9L6, 9L7, 9R6, 9R7 located on the left and right sides of the screen are lit with high brightness. After that, as shown in FIG. 96 (a18), the reach line in the center of the screen disappears. At this time, the game effect lamp 9 is also turned off.

After the reach line effect is completed as shown in FIG. 96 (a18), when the 6-person notice is executed, the effect shifts to the effect shown in FIG. 97 (a19), and when the background notice is executed, FIG. 106 The effect shifts to the effect shown in FIG. 107 (a101), and when the lamp advance notice is executed, the effect shifts to the effect shown in FIG. 107 (a111).

As described above, the 6-person group notice is a production that suggests that the display result of the variable display of the special symbol or the decorative symbol becomes a predetermined jackpot symbol, and 6 characters dressed as maids are grouped. It is a production that progresses as. The background notice is an effect that suggests that the display result of the variable display of the special figure or the decorative figure becomes a predetermined jackpot pattern, and a specific character (for example, a character such as a protagonist, a rare character, etc.) is specified. This is an effect that is displayed together with the background (for example, the background of the starry sky). The lamp notice is an effect that suggests that the display result of the variable display of the special drawing or the decorative drawing becomes a predetermined jackpot symbol, and is a predetermined lamp included in the game effect lamp 9 (for example, the accessory lamp 9A). Is a production that lights up and blinks. In the lamp notice, any one of the lamps included in the game effect lamp 9 or a plurality of lamps may be lit or blinking, or a lamp provided other than the game effect lamp 9 may be lit or blinked. It may blink.

In stage A, a group notice (for example, a 6-person group notice or a boingo group notice) is executed after the reach line production of the pre-variation. For example, when the 6-person group notice is executed after the reach line effect, the PUSH effect is executed as shown in FIG. 97 (a19). When the PUSH effect is executed, an image showing the push button 31B and a meter image showing the time limit during which the pressing operation can be performed are displayed in the center of the screen of the image display device 5, and a character image of "PUSH !!" is displayed. Will be done. Further, during the PUSH effect, each lamp included in the game effect lamp 9 is turned on in a manner corresponding to the PUSH effect based on the luminance data table shown in FIG. 88. For example, during the PUSH effect, the stick controller lamp 9J and the trigger button lamp 9K are lit or blinking. During the PUSH effect, a sound effect may be output from the speakers 8L and 8R to urge the player to press the push button 31B. As described above, in the PUSH effect, the player is urged to press the push button 31B by displaying an image, lighting or blinking a lamp, or by sound.

As shown in FIG. 97 (a20), when the push button 31B is pressed during the PUSH effect, the image showing the push button 31B displayed in the center of the screen of the image display device 5, the meter image, and the “PUSH! An effect occurs that erases the character image of "!". Further, when the push button 31B is pressed, the PUSH sound is output from the speakers 8L and 8R in a manner corresponding to the button pressing. By outputting the PUSH sound, the player can recognize that the push button 31B can be effectively pressed during the PUSH effect. The output of the PUSH sound from the speakers 8L and 8R is completed by the time the group notice effect (in this example, the 6-person group notice) starts. Further, when the push button 31B is pressed, the game effect lamp 9 lights up or blinks in a manner corresponding to the button pressing. In this example, all the frame lamps are lit with high brightness.

As shown in FIG. 97 (a21), the screen display of the image display device 5 once returns to the normal background image display, and the game effect lamp 9 lights up or blinks in a manner corresponding to the background.

As shown in FIG. 98 (a22), the notice of the 6-person group starts, but the game effect lamp 9 is temporarily turned off before the character appears. As a result, the player can be made to pay attention to the fact that the group notice effect will be executed from now on.

As shown in FIG. 98 (a23), the main character, Maid A (Yumemu-chan), appears as the first (first) character in the first display period. The state shown in FIG. 98 (a23) corresponds to the state shown in FIG. 61 (a), and while the entire maid A (Yumemu-chan), who is the main character, has not yet been displayed, the maid A It represents the first situation in which a part (a part of the face in this example) is displayed.

During the execution of the 6-person group notice, each lamp included in the game effect lamp 9 is turned on in a manner corresponding to the group notice effect based on the luminance data tables shown in FIGS. 66 to 72. For example, in the first display period shown in FIGS. 98 to 100, the frame right lamps 9R5 to 9R8 located near the place where the character appears in the group notice starts to light with high brightness, and then in the direction in which the character advances. At the same time, the part of the lamp that lights up with high brightness moves. In addition, the meeting where the group notice production (6 people group notice, Baku Chu notice, Boingo notice described later) was executed, images other than the image related to the group notice production (for example, the background image and the image related to the SP reach first half notice production, etc. ) Is designed to decrease in brightness. The brightness of the other images, which is decreasing during the group notice production, gradually returns to the original brightness in the third display period. On the other hand, for the player, the fourth symbol 5J and the small symbol 5M indicating the first reserved memory number and the second reserved memory number, the first reserved storage display area 5D, the second reserved storage display area 5U, the active display area 5A, and the like. The display of information on games that are of high importance regarding the outcome and advantage of the game is given a high priority so that the brightness is not lowered even if the group notice effect is executed.

During the group notice production, the production sound corresponding to the group notice production is output from the speakers 8L and 8R. Regarding the volume of the effect sound corresponding to the group notice effect, as shown in FIG. 63, the output of the effect sound corresponding to the group notice effect is started at the timing related to the start of the first display period, and the first display period is started. The volume of the effect sound is raised to a specific volume during the display period, the volume of the effect sound is maintained at the specific volume during the second display period, and the volume of the effect sound is decreased during the third display period. When the group notice effect starts, a start sound suggesting the start of the group notice effect is output from the speakers 8L and 8R in addition to the effect sound corresponding to the group notice effect, but the second character appears. By then, the output of the start sound will stop.

As shown in FIG. 98 (a24), a second character appears shortly after the first character appears. The state shown in FIG. 98 (a24) corresponds to the state shown in FIG. 61 (b), and while the entire maid A initially displayed has not yet been displayed, a part of the maid A is partially displayed. While the entire maid B (Jam-chan) that was displayed more than the first situation and was displayed second was not yet displayed, a part of the maid B (a part of the face in this example) was displayed. It represents the second situation.

As shown in FIG. 99 (a25), characters appear one after another, and an animation of running through from the left side to the right side of the screen is displayed. As shown in FIG. 99 (a26), an animation is displayed in which the second appearing character skips the first appearing character. As shown in FIG. 99 (a27), characters appear one after another, and an animation of running through from the left side to the right side of the screen is displayed.

As shown in FIG. 100 (a28), the character continues to advance, and eventually the second appearing character running at the top (top) reaches the left edge of the screen. As shown in FIG. 100 (a29), the second appearing character running at the top (top) begins to disappear from the left edge of the screen. As shown in FIG. 100 (a30), the second appearing character running at the top disappears first from the left edge of the screen. As a result, the first display period ends.

As shown in FIG. 101 (a31), in the second display period, characters appear one after another, and an animation of running through from the left side to the right side of the screen is displayed. In the second display period shown in FIGS. 101 and 102, the frame lamps are sparsely lit with high brightness in accordance with the state in which the characters progress in a group in the group notice effect. As a result, the frame lamp lights up or blinks according to the animation display in which the characters form a group and run through. Further, the effect sound corresponding to the group notice output from the speakers 8L and 8R includes, for example, footsteps in accordance with the animation display in which the character runs through. After that, as shown in FIGS. 101 (a32) to 102 (a36), characters appear one after another, and an animation of running through from the left side to the right side of the screen is displayed.

As shown in FIG. 103 (a37), in the third display period, the last character appears, and an animation of running through from the left side to the right side of the screen together with other characters is displayed. No new characters will appear in the third display period. In the third display period, as shown in FIGS. 103 and 104, the frame lamp is also turned off or lowered from the right side to the left side of the pachinko gaming machine 1 in accordance with the effect that the character disappears to the left edge of the screen in the group notice. The position where the light is turned on by the brightness will be changed. As shown in FIG. 103 (a37), when the third display period is entered, all of the game effect lamps 9 are once turned on with high brightness.

As shown in FIG. 103 (a38), the frame lamp starts to go out as the character disappears to the left edge of the screen. In the example shown in FIG. 103 (a38), since the character is not displayed in the right half area of the screen, a part of the frame right lamp 9R is turned off. As shown in FIG. 103 (a39), the number of frame right lamps 9R that are turned off increases as the character disappears toward the left edge of the screen.

As shown in FIGS. 104 (a40) and 104 (a41), the number of game effect lamps 9 that are turned off increases as the character gradually disappears. As shown in FIG. 104 (a42), the group notice effect ends when the last character disappears.

Here, with reference to FIG. 105, a comparative example of the 6-person group notice and the 6-person group notice according to the present embodiment are compared. In the comparative example shown in FIG. 105 (a201), as in the present embodiment shown in FIG. 98 (a23), the entire maid A (Yumemu-chan), who is the main character, is not yet displayed, but the maid A is concerned. This is the first situation in which a part of (a part of the face in this example) is displayed.

After that, in the present embodiment shown in FIG. 98 (a24), the entire maid A displayed first is not yet displayed, while a part of the maid A is displayed more than in the first situation, and 2 While the entire maid B (Jam-chan) displayed second is not yet displayed, a part of the maid B (part of the face in this example) is displayed in the second situation. In the comparative example shown in FIG. 105 (a202), the maid A continues to run without the appearance of the second maid B, and the entire maid A is displayed. Then, in the comparative example shown in FIG. 105 (a203), the second maid B finally appears after the first maid A runs on the left side of the center of the screen. In such a comparative example, only one character appears, and it does not look like a group notice production.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 98 to 104, an animation in which a plurality of characters appear one after another without a gap and run through is displayed, so that the plurality of characters proceed as a group. By doing so, it is possible to create a powerful production. Further, since the number of characters overtaking other characters is smaller than the number of other characters overtaken by the overtaking character, it is possible to prevent the group advance notice effect from becoming too complicated. The number of characters overtaking other characters may be larger than the number of other characters overtaken by the overtaking character. In this case, it is possible to show the player a lively group notice effect.

When the background notice is executed after the reach line effect, the PUSH effect is executed as shown in FIG. 106 (a101). When the PUSH effect is executed, an image showing the push button 31B and a meter image showing the time limit during which the pressing operation can be performed are displayed in the center of the screen of the image display device 5, and a character image of "PUSH !!" is displayed. Will be done. Further, during the PUSH effect, each lamp included in the game effect lamp 9 is turned on in a manner corresponding to the PUSH effect based on the luminance data table shown in FIG. 88.

As shown in FIG. 106 (a102), when the push button 31B is pressed during the PUSH effect, the image showing the push button 31B displayed in the center of the screen of the image display device 5, the meter image, and the “PUSH! The text image of "!" Disappears. Further, when the push button 31B is pressed, the PUSH sound is output from the speakers 8L and 8R in a manner corresponding to the button pressing. When the push button 31B is pressed, the game effect lamp 9 lights up or blinks in a manner corresponding to the button pressing. In this example, all the frame lamps are lit with high brightness.

After that, as shown in FIG. 106 (a103), as a background notice effect, a specific character (maid B (Jam-chan) in this example) is displayed together with a specific background (background of the starry sky in this example). It is displayed on the screen of 5. Further, during the effect of the background notice, each lamp included in the game effect lamp 9 is turned on in a manner corresponding to the effect of the background notice based on the luminance data table shown in FIG. 72. The effect sound is also output from the speakers 8L and 8R in a manner corresponding to the effect of the background notice.

When the lamp advance notice is executed after the reach line effect, the PUSH effect is executed as shown in FIG. 107 (a111). When the PUSH effect is executed, an image showing the push button 31B and a meter image showing the time limit during which the pressing operation can be performed are displayed in the center of the screen of the image display device 5, and a character image of "PUSH !!" is displayed. Will be done. Further, during the PUSH effect, each lamp included in the game effect lamp 9 is turned on in a manner corresponding to the PUSH effect based on the luminance data table shown in FIG. 88.

As shown in FIG. 107 (a112), when the push button 31B is pressed during the PUSH effect, the image showing the push button 31B displayed in the center of the screen of the image display device 5, the meter image, and the “PUSH! The text image of "!" Disappears. Further, when the push button 31B is pressed, the PUSH sound is output from the speakers 8L and 8R in a manner corresponding to the button pressing. When the push button 31B is pressed, the game effect lamp 9 lights up or blinks in a manner corresponding to the button pressing. In this example, all the frame lamps are lit with high brightness.

After that, as shown in FIG. 107 (a113), the lamp advance notice is executed, and a predetermined lamp (for example, the accessory lamp 9A) included in the game effect lamp 9 lights up or blinks. The effect sound is also output from the speakers 8L and 8R in a manner corresponding to the effect of the lamp notice.

After the third display period of the group notice has ended as shown in FIG. 104 (a42), or after the background notice shown in FIG. 106 (a103) and the lamp notice shown in FIG. 107 (a113) have ended, FIGS. 108 to 108 to As shown in FIG. 112, the symbol feed effect is executed. In the decorative symbol in the reach mode, the symbol feed effect determines whether or not the decorative symbol being variably displayed (in the present embodiment, the decorative symbol in the middle decorative symbol display area 5C) is stopped, and the decorative symbol to be stopped. It is a production that encourages the player whether or not the design is a decorative design that constitutes the jackpot design. During the symbol feed effect, each lamp included in the game effect lamp 9 is turned on in a manner corresponding to the symbol feed effect based on the predetermined luminance data table. The effect sound is also output from the speakers 8L and 8R in a manner corresponding to the pattern feed effect.

As shown in FIG. 108 (a43), when the symbol feed effect is started, the decorative symbol in the variable display located in the central decorative symbol display area 5C is displayed in a large size, and a predetermined first speed (for example, a slower speed) is displayed. ) To start variable display. At this time, the symbol feed effect is started from the same decorative symbol as the decorative symbol located in the left and right decorative symbol display areas 5L and 5R (that is, the decorative symbol constituting the jackpot), which is the reach mode. Is a lower position away from the decorative pattern in the reach mode.

After that, as shown in FIGS. 108 (a44) to 109 (a48), the decorative symbol in the middle continues to be variably displayed at a predetermined first speed (for example, a slower speed). After that, as shown in FIGS. 110 (a49) to 111 (a54), the speed of the variable display of the decorative symbol increases as the decorative symbol in the middle is variably displayed, and the speed of the variable display of the decorative symbol increases, as shown in FIGS. 112 (a55) to (a57). As shown, finally, the decorative symbol in the middle is variably displayed at a predetermined second speed (for example, a speed higher than the first speed). As shown in FIG. 112 (a57), when the decorative symbol in the center is variably displayed over two laps, the symbol feed effect ends.

After the symbol feed effect is completed, as shown in FIGS. 113 (a58) and 113 (a59), the image including the character image and the decorative symbol of "3" which has become the reach mode by the effect effect called whiteout. The color gradually becomes white, and finally the character image and the image including the decorative pattern of "3" in the reach mode are completely invisible. After that, as shown in FIG. 113 (a59), when the transparency of the entire screen on the front side, which has become white due to whiteout, is gradually increased, the effect image for fluctuation after being switched on the back side is displayed on the screen. Appears on.

(Direction mode in the first half of SP reach)
The production mode in the first half of the SP reach will be described with reference to FIGS. 114 to 122.

As shown in FIGS. 114 (a61) and 114 (a62), after shifting to the post-variation, the animation of the character is displayed until the title image of the SP reach is displayed. The character may be a high-priority character such as a hero, or may be a character appearing in SP reach. As shown in FIG. 114 (a63), the title of SP reach is displayed. In the present embodiment, as the SP reach effect, a maid character such as Yumemu-chan catches the Baku Chu, so the title "Catch the Baku Chu!" Is displayed. During the production of the first half of the SP reach, each lamp included in the game effect lamp 9 is turned on in a manner corresponding to the first half of the SP reach based on the predetermined luminance data table. The production sound is also output from the speakers 8L and 8R in a manner corresponding to the first half of the SP reach.

As shown in FIG. 115 (c1), when the production of the first half of the SP reach is executed, an image in which the maid A (Yumemu-chan) stands up is displayed. After that, as shown in FIG. 115 (c2), an image in which the opponent's character (enemy character), Baku Chu, is surprised is displayed. After that, as shown in FIGS. 115 (c3) to 116 (c5), an animation is displayed in which the maid A chases the escaping explosive chew.

As shown in FIG. 116 (c6), after the animation that the maid A jumps on the explosion chew is displayed, when the maid A is lost (in the case of the fluctuation pattern of the main fluctuation number 9), the production shifts to the production shown in FIG. 117 (c11). However, at the time of a big hit (in the case of the fluctuation pattern of the main fluctuation number 20), the production shifts to the effect shown in FIG. When shifting to the final reach (in the case of the fluctuation patterns of the main fluctuation numbers 15 and 26), the transition to the effect shown in FIG. 122 (c31) is performed.

When the loss is confirmed in the first half of the SP reach, the effect shown in FIG. 116 (c6) is followed by the effect shown in FIG. 117 (c11). In the production shown in FIG. 117 (c11), an image in which the maid A is depressed without catching the explosive chew is displayed, and the decorative symbol located in the central decorative symbol display area 5C is a lost symbol "4". "Stops. After that, as shown in FIG. 117 (c12), the color of the character image and the image including the decorative patterns of "3", "4", and "3" in the lost mode are changed by the effect called blackout. As shown in FIG. 117 (c13), the image gradually becomes black, and finally the character image and the image including the decorative patterns of "3", "4", and "3" which are in the lost aspect are completely invisible. ..

After that, as shown in FIGS. 118 (c14) and 118 (c15), when the transparency of the entire screen on the front side blackened by blackout is gradually increased, it is used for the normal background that has been switched on the back side. The production image appears and becomes visible. Then, as shown in FIG. 118 (c16), the variable display of the decorative symbol is completely stopped, and the variable display of the small symbol 5M is also completely stopped, so that the loss is confirmed.

When the big hit is confirmed in the first half of the SP reach, the effect shown in FIG. 116 (c6) is followed by the effect shown in FIG. 119 (c21). In the production shown in FIG. 119 (c21), an image in which the maid A catches the explosion chew and gives a peace sign is displayed, and a big hit symbol is displayed as a decorative symbol located in the central decorative symbol display area 5C. 3 ”stops.

After that, the fanfare production is executed. In the fanfare production, as shown in FIG. 119 (c22), the decorative patterns aligned with "3", "3", and "3" gradually expand gradually, as shown in FIG. 119 (c23). In addition, the decorative pattern is displayed so as to protrude from the screen. After that, as shown in FIGS. 120 (c24) and 120 (c25), an animation in which the decorative pattern moves is displayed. Then, as shown in FIG. 120 (c26), the variable display of the decorative symbol is completely stopped, and the variable display of the small symbol 5M is also completely stopped, and the big hit is confirmed.

After that, as shown in FIGS. 121 (c27) to (c29), the face image of the main character, Maid A (Yumemu-chan), is displayed in a large size, and an animation in which the characters "FEVER!" Flow is displayed.

When shifting to the latter half of the SP reach or the final reach, the effect shown in FIG. 116 (c6) is followed by the effect shown in FIG. 122 (c31). In the production shown in FIG. 122 (c31), an image in which the maid A is depressed without catching the explosive chew is displayed, and the decorative symbol located in the central decorative symbol display area 5C is a lost symbol "4". "Stops. After that, as shown in FIG. 122 (c32), the color of the character image and the image including the decorative patterns of “3”, “4”, and “3” which are in the lost mode is gradually blackened by the blackout. Up to this point, the production is the same as when the SP reach is lost in the first half of the SP reach shown in FIGS. 117 (c11) and 117 (c12). However, as shown in FIG. 122 (c33), when shifting to the latter half of the SP reach or the final reach, the effect of dropping the movable body 32, which did not occur when the loss occurs in the first half of the SP reach, is executed.

Then, when the effect of dropping the movable body 32 is executed and then the process shifts to the latter half of the SP reach (in the case of the variation patterns of the main variation numbers 12 and 23), the effect shifts to the effect shown in FIG. 123 (c41), and the final effect is achieved. In the case of shifting to reach (in the case of fluctuation patterns of main fluctuation numbers 15 and 26), the shift is made to the effect shown in FIG. 130 (c71). In this way, the fluctuation pattern that becomes a big hit includes a fluctuation pattern that shifts to the latter half of the SP reach or the final reach, once pretending that the loss is confirmed in the first half of the SP reach. As a result, from the player's point of view, once the loss is confirmed in the first half of the SP reach, the player will shift to the second half of the SP reach or the final reach by relief, and the interest of the game can be improved.

(Direction mode in the latter half of SP reach)
The production mode in the latter half of the SP reach will be described with reference to FIGS. 123 to 129.

When shifting to the latter half of the SP reach, the effect shown in FIG. 122 (c33) is followed by the effect shown in FIG. 123 (c41). In the effect shown in FIG. 123 (c41), the character image, the background image, and the like are completely invisible.

After that, as shown in FIG. 123 (c42), when the transparency of the entire screen on the front side blackened by blackout is gradually increased, the effect image of the latter half of SP reach that has been switched on the back side appears. You will be able to see it. During the production of the latter half of the SP reach, each lamp included in the game effect lamp 9 is turned on in a manner corresponding to the latter half of the SP reach based on the predetermined luminance data table. The production sound is also output from the speakers 8L and 8R in a manner corresponding to the latter half of the SP reach.

As shown in Fig. 123 (c42), when the production of the latter half of the SP reach is executed, Maid A (Yumemu-chan) and Maid B (Jam-chan) stand up and declare war on Baku Chu. The image is displayed. After that, as shown in FIGS. 123 (c43) to 124 (c45), an animation is displayed in which the maid A and the maid B chase after the escaping explosive chew.

As shown in FIG. 123 (c46), after the animation in which maid A and maid B jump on the explosion chew is displayed, the time of loss (in the case of the fluctuation pattern of the main fluctuation number 12) is shown in FIG. 125 (c51). When shifting to the production and at the time of a big hit (in the case of the fluctuation pattern of the main fluctuation numbers 23), shifting to the production shown in FIG. 127 (c61) and shifting to the final reach (in the case of the fluctuation patterns of the main fluctuation numbers 15 and 26). Shifts to the effect shown in FIG. 130 (c71).

When the loss is confirmed in the latter half of the SP reach, the effect shown in FIG. 124 (c46) is followed by the effect shown in FIG. 127 (c51). In the production shown in FIG. 127 (c51), an image in which maid A and maid B are depressed without being caught by the explosive chew is displayed, and a lost symbol is displayed as a decorative symbol located in the central decorative symbol display area 5C. A certain "4" stops. After that, as shown in FIG. 125 (c52), the color of the character image and the image including the decorative patterns of "3", "4", and "3" which became the lost mode gradually became black due to the blackout. As shown in FIG. 125 (c53), the character image and the image including the decorative patterns of "3", "4", and "3" which are finally lost are completely invisible.

After that, as shown in FIGS. 126 (c54) and 126 (c55), when the transparency of the entire screen on the front side blackened by blackout is gradually increased, it is used for the normal background that has been switched on the back side. The production image appears and becomes visible. Then, as shown in FIG. 126 (c56), the variable display of the decorative symbol is completely stopped, and the variable display of the small symbol 5M is also completely stopped, so that the loss is confirmed.

When the big hit is confirmed in the latter half of the SP reach, the effect shown in FIG. 124 (c46) is followed by the effect shown in FIG. 127 (c61). In the production shown in FIG. 127 (c61), an image of maid A and maid B catching the explosion chew and issuing a peace sign is displayed, and a big hit symbol is displayed as a decorative symbol located in the central decorative symbol display area 5C. "3" stops.

After that, the fanfare production is executed. In the fanfare production, as shown in FIG. 127 (c62), the decorative patterns aligned with "3", "3", and "3" gradually expand gradually, as shown in FIG. 127 (c63). In addition, the decorative pattern is displayed so as to protrude from the screen. After that, as shown in FIGS. 128 (c64) and 128 (c65), an animation in which the decorative pattern moves is displayed. Then, as shown in FIG. 128 (c66), the variable display of the decorative symbol is completely stopped, and the variable display of the small symbol 5M is also completely stopped, and the big hit is confirmed.

After that, as shown in FIGS. 129 (c67) to (c69), the face image of the main character, Maid A (Yumemu-chan), is displayed in a large size, and an animation in which the characters "FEVER!" Flow is displayed.

(Direction mode in the final reach)
The production mode in the final reach will be described with reference to FIGS. 130 to 140.

When shifting to the final reach, the effect shown in FIG. 124 (c46) is followed by the effect shown in FIG. 130 (c71). When shifting to the final reach, the entire screen suddenly turns black as shown in FIG. 130 (c71), and a cross-shaped light effect is displayed in the center of the screen as shown in FIG. 130 (c72). Will be done. After that, as shown in FIG. 130 (c73), the effect of notifying the start of the final reach is executed, the face image of the main character Maid A (Yumemu-chan) is displayed on the entire screen, and "Go! Character image is displayed. The effect display of the light as shown in FIG. 130 (c72) is a combination of the blackout effect shown in FIG. 130 (c71) and the effect of displaying the face image of the main character shown in FIG. 130 (c73). It is intentionally inserted in between. As a result, the player can easily understand that the final reach will be achieved by the effect shown in FIG. 130 (c72).

After that, the production during the final reach is executed. During the production of the latter half of the final reach, each lamp included in the game effect lamp 9 is turned on in a manner corresponding to the latter half of the final reach based on the predetermined luminance data table. The production sound is also output from the speakers 8L and 8R in a manner corresponding to the latter half of the final reach.

As shown in FIG. 131 (c74), an image in which the maid A gives a peace sign is displayed. After that, as shown in FIGS. 131 (c75) to 131 (c78), an image of one character is displayed at each of a plurality of timings, and an image of the entire sentence is displayed as shown in FIG. 131 (c79). By doing so, the theme of the production performed in the final reach is shown. In this example, it is shown as "all set".

After that, as shown in FIGS. 133 (c80) to 134 (c85), an animation in which the characters appearing in the final reach effect are introduced is displayed at each of a plurality of timings. For example, in this example, maid F, maid E, maid D, maid C, maid B, maid A, etc. appear in order from the supporting characters, and the main character has a high priority near the final stage (or the latter half). A character appears. In addition, characters with high priority such as the main character may appear in order. That is, it is preferable that a high-priority character such as a hero appears at the beginning (or the first half) or near the final (or the second half) so as to stand out more than a low-priority character such as a supporting character.

After that, as shown in Fig. 135 (c86), when the final reach production is executed, an image is displayed in which the six characters who appeared in the 6-person group notice are standing up and declaring war on Baku Chu. Will be done. After that, as shown in FIGS. 135 (c87) to 136 (c89), an animation is displayed in which six characters chase after the fleeing Baku Chu.

As shown in FIG. 136 (c90), after an animation in which six characters drive the explosive chew is displayed, a trigger effect is executed as shown in FIG. 136 (c91). When the trigger effect is executed, an image showing the stick controller 31A and a meter image showing the time limit during which the stick controller 31A can be operated are displayed in the center of the screen of the image display device 5, and the characters "Close !!" are displayed. The image is displayed.

After the operation of pulling the stick controller 31A is performed during the trigger effect shown in FIG. 136 (c91), when the stick controller 31A is lost (in the case of the fluctuation pattern of the main fluctuation number 15), the effect shifts to the effect shown in FIG. (In the case of the fluctuation pattern of the main fluctuation number 26) shifts to the effect shown in FIG. 138 (c111).

When the loss is confirmed in the final reach, the operation of pulling the stick controller 31A is performed during the trigger effect shown in FIG. 136 (c91), and then the process shifts to the effect shown in FIG. 137 (c101). In the effect shown in FIG. 137 (c101), an image in which six characters are depressed without being caught by the explosive chew is displayed, and a lost symbol is displayed as a decorative symbol located in the central decorative symbol display area 5C. "4" stops. After that, as shown in FIG. 137 (c102), the color of the character image and the image including the decorative patterns of "3", "4", and "3" which became the lost mode gradually became black due to the blackout. As shown in FIG. 137 (c103), the character image and the image including the decorative patterns of "3", "4", and "3" which are finally lost are completely invisible.

After that, although not shown, if the transparency of the entire screen on the front side, which has become black due to blackout, is gradually increased, the effect image for the normal background that has been switched on the back side will appear and appear. Become. Then, the variable display of the decorative symbol is completely stopped, and the variable display of the small symbol 5M is also completely stopped, so that the loss is confirmed.

When the big hit is confirmed in the final reach, the effect shown in FIG. 136 (c91) is followed by the effect shown in FIG. 138 (c111). In the production shown in FIG. 138 (c111), an image of six characters catching the Baku Chu is displayed, and a jackpot symbol "3" is displayed as a decorative symbol located in the central decorative symbol display area 5C. Stop.

After that, the fanfare production is executed. In the fanfare production, as shown in FIG. 138 (c112), the decorative patterns aligned with "3", "3", and "3" gradually expand gradually, as shown in FIG. 138 (c113). In addition, the decorative pattern is displayed so as to protrude from the screen. After that, as shown in FIGS. 139 (c114) and 139 (c115), an animation in which the decorative pattern moves is displayed. Then, as shown in FIG. 139 (c116), the variable display of the decorative symbol is completely stopped, and the variable display of the small symbol 5M is also completely stopped, and the big hit is confirmed.

After that, as shown in FIGS. 140 (c117) to (c119), the face image of the main character, Maid A (Yumemu-chan), is displayed in a large size, and an animation in which the characters "FEVER!" Flow is displayed.

(Direction mode in stage B)
The effect mode in the stage B will be described with reference to FIGS. 141 to 161.

As shown in FIG. 141 (b1), when the variable display is started based on one hold storage, the decorative symbol is variably displayed in the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R on the screen of the image display device 5, and the decorative symbol is variably displayed. The fourth symbol 5J is variably displayed, and the small symbol 5M is variably displayed. On the screen, a background image including an image of a character or a landscape is displayed as a background during variable display. In the present embodiment, an image of Baku Chu is displayed as a character appearing in stage B. During the variable display, the game effect lamp 9 lights up in a mode corresponding to the variable display, and the effect sound is output from the speakers 8L and 8R in a mode corresponding to the variable display.

As shown in FIG. 141 (b2), when the pseudo-continuous effect is performed and the character “x2” indicating that the second variable display is performed is displayed, as shown in FIG. 141 (b3). The second variable display is performed.

As shown in FIG. 141 (b4), when the pseudo-continuous effect is further performed and the character “x3” indicating that the third variable display is performed is displayed, as shown in FIG. 142 (b5). The third variable display is performed. After that, as shown in FIG. 142 (b6), when "3" is stopped in the left decorative symbol display area 5L and "3" is stopped in the right decorative symbol display area 5R, the variable display mode reaches. It becomes an aspect.

As shown in FIG. 143 (b7), a decorative symbol for a reach line effect is displayed to notify that the variable display mode has become the reach mode. As shown in FIG. 143 (b8), the reach line effect starts. At this time, a flash of light appears from the central portion of the screen of the image display device 5. During the reach line effect, each lamp included in the game effect lamp 9 is turned on in a manner corresponding to the reach line effect based on the luminance data tables shown in FIGS. 73 to 79. The luminance data table shown in FIGS. 73 to 79 is the same as the luminance data table used in the reach line effect of the stage A. In the state shown in FIG. 143 (b8), all the lamps included in the frame lamp are lit with high brightness. During the reach line effect, the effect sound corresponding to the reach line effect is output from the speakers 8L and 8R.

As shown in FIG. 143 (b9), the decorative pattern in the center of the screen starts to rotate in the left-right direction, and the flash of light becomes large.

As shown in FIG. 144 (b10), the decorative pattern in the center of the screen continues to rotate in the left-right direction, the flash of light becomes large, and the reach line appears in the center of the screen. The reach line is a streak (light ray) of light connecting between the left and right decorative patterns constituting the reach mode, and is given a predetermined color such as blue or red. By displaying the reach line, it is possible to suggest to the player that the variable display mode has become the reach mode or the reach mode. The reach line appearing in the stage B may be the same as the reach line appearing in the stage A, or may be different in color, shape, size, or the like.

As shown in FIG. 144 (b11), the decorative pattern in the center of the screen continues to rotate in the left-right direction, the flash of light increases, and the reach line in the center of the screen begins to extend in the left-right direction (outside) of the screen. As shown in FIG. 144 (b12), the decorative pattern in the center of the screen returns to the original position, and the reach line in the center of the screen further extends in the left-right direction (outside) of the screen. As shown in FIG. 144, during the reach line effect, the frame left lamps 9L6, 9L7, 9R6, 9R7 located on the left and right sides of the screen are lit with high brightness.

As shown in FIG. 145 (b13), the decorative pattern in the center of the screen is gradually enlarged, and the reach line in the center of the screen extends in the left-right direction (outside) of the screen. As shown in FIG. 145 (b14), the decorative pattern in the center of the screen is further enlarged, and the reach line in the center of the screen is further extended in the left-right direction (outside) of the screen. As shown in FIG. 145 (b15), the decorative pattern in the center of the screen is further enlarged, and the reach line in the center of the screen is further extended in the left-right direction (outside) of the screen. As shown in FIG. 145, during the reach line, the frame left lamps 9L6, 9L7, 9R6, 9R7 located on the left and right sides of the screen are lit with high brightness.

As shown in FIG. 146 (b16), the decorative pattern in the center of the screen is gradually reduced in stages, and the reach line in the center of the screen begins to shrink in the left-right direction (inside) of the screen. As shown in FIG. 146 (b17), the decorative pattern in the center of the screen is further reduced, and the reach line in the center of the screen is further reduced in the left-right direction (inside) of the screen to stop at a fixed position. At this time, the frame left lamps 9L6, 9L7, 9R6, 9R7 located on the left and right sides of the screen are lit with high brightness. After that, as shown in FIG. 146 (b18), the reach line in the center of the screen disappears. At this time, the game effect lamp 9 is also turned off.

After the reach line effect is completed as shown in FIG. 146 (b18), the symbol feed effect is executed as shown in FIGS. 147 to 151. During the symbol feed effect, each lamp included in the game effect lamp 9 is turned on in a manner corresponding to the symbol feed effect based on the predetermined luminance data table. The effect sound is also output from the speakers 8L and 8R in a manner corresponding to the pattern feed effect.

As shown in FIG. 147 (b19), when the symbol feed effect is started, the decorative symbol in the variable display located in the central decorative symbol display area 5C is displayed in a large size, and a predetermined first speed (for example, a slower speed) is displayed. ) To start variable display. At this time, the symbol feed effect is started from the same decorative symbol as the decorative symbol located in the left and right decorative symbol display areas 5L and 5R (that is, the decorative symbol constituting the jackpot), which is the reach mode. Is a lower position away from the decorative pattern in the reach mode.

After that, as shown in FIGS. 147 (b20) to 148 (b24), the decorative symbol in the middle continues to be variably displayed at a predetermined first speed (for example, a slower speed). After that, as shown in FIGS. 149 (b25) to 150 (b30), the speed of the variable display of the decorative symbol increases as the decorative symbol in the middle is variably displayed, and the speed of the variable display of the decorative symbol increases, as shown in FIGS. 151 (b31) to (b33). As shown, finally, the decorative symbol in the center is variably displayed at a predetermined second speed (for example, a speed higher than the first speed). As shown in FIG. 151 (b33), when the decorative symbol in the center is variably displayed over two laps, the symbol feed effect ends.

After the symbol feed effect is completed, as shown in FIGS. 152 (b34) and 152 (b35), the color of the character image and the image including the decorative symbol of "3" in the reach mode is gradually whitened by the whiteout. Eventually, the character image and the image including the decorative pattern of "3" in the reach mode are completely invisible. After that, as shown in FIG. 152 (b36), when the transparency of the entire screen on the front side, which has become white due to whiteout, is gradually increased, the effect image for fluctuation after being switched on the back side is displayed on the screen. Appears on.

As shown in FIGS. 153 (b37) and 153 (b38), after shifting to the post-variation, the animation of the character is displayed until the title image of the SP reach is displayed. The character may be a high-priority character such as a hero, or may be a character appearing in SP reach. As shown in FIG. 153 (b39), the title of SP reach (“Catch Baku Chu!”) Is displayed. During the production of the first half of the SP reach, each lamp included in the game effect lamp 9 is turned on in a manner corresponding to the first half of the SP reach based on the predetermined luminance data table. The production sound is also output from the speakers 8L and 8R in a manner corresponding to the first half of the SP reach.

In stage B, a group notice (for example, a Baku Chu notice or a Boingo group notice) is executed during the period when the title of the first half of the SP reach of the post-variation is displayed. For example, when the Baku Chu Mondai notice is executed during the period when the title of the first half of the SP reach is displayed, the PUSH effect is executed as shown in FIG. 154 (b40). When the PUSH effect is executed, an image showing the push button 31B and a meter image showing the time limit during which the pressing operation can be performed are displayed in the center of the screen of the image display device 5, and a character image of "PUSH !!" is displayed. Will be done. Further, during the PUSH effect, each lamp included in the game effect lamp 9 is turned on in a manner corresponding to the PUSH effect based on the luminance data table shown in FIG. 88. For example, during the PUSH effect, the stick controller lamp 9J and the trigger button lamp 9K are lit or blinking. During the PUSH effect, a sound effect may be output from the speakers 8L and 8R to urge the player to press the push button 31B. As described above, in the PUSH effect, the player is urged to press the push button 31B by displaying an image, lighting or blinking a lamp, or by sound.

As shown in FIG. 154 (b41), when the push button 31B is pressed during the PUSH effect, the image showing the push button 31B displayed in the center of the screen of the image display device 5, the meter image, and the “PUSH! The text image of "!" Disappears. Further, when the push button 31B is pressed, the PUSH sound is output from the speakers 8L and 8R in a manner corresponding to the button pressing. By outputting the PUSH sound, the player can recognize that the push button 31B can be effectively pressed during the PUSH effect. The output of the PUSH sound from the speakers 8L and 8R is completed by the time the group notice effect (in this example, the explosion chew group notice) starts. Further, when the push button 31B is pressed, the game effect lamp 9 lights up or blinks in a manner corresponding to the button pressing. In this example, all the frame lamps are lit with high brightness.

As shown in FIG. 154 (b42), the screen display of the image display device 5 once returns to the normal background image display, and the game effect lamp 9 lights up or blinks in a manner corresponding to the background.

As shown in FIG. 155 (b43), the Baku Chu Mondai notice starts, but the game effect lamp 9 is temporarily turned off before the character appears. As a result, the player can be made to pay attention to the fact that the group notice effect will be executed from now on.

As shown in FIG. 155 (b44), the first (first) character appears in the first display period. In the state shown in FIG. 155 (b44), while the entire character displayed first (first) is not yet displayed, a part of the character displayed first (in this example, a part of the face). ) Is displayed.

During the execution of the Baku Chu Mondai notice, each lamp included in the game effect lamp 9 is turned on in a manner corresponding to the group notice effect based on the luminance data tables shown in FIGS. 66 to 72. For example, in the first display period shown in FIGS. 155 to 157, the frame right lamps 9R5 to 9R8 located near the place where the character appears in the group notice starts to light with high brightness, and then in the direction in which the character advances. At the same time, the part of the lamp that lights up with high brightness moves.

During the group notice production, the production sound corresponding to the group notice production is output from the speakers 8L and 8R. Regarding the volume of the effect sound corresponding to the group notice effect, as shown in FIG. 63, the output of the effect sound corresponding to the group notice effect is started at the timing related to the start of the first display period, and the first display period is started. The volume of the effect sound is raised to a specific volume during the display period, the volume of the effect sound is maintained at the specific volume during the second display period, and the volume of the effect sound is decreased during the third display period. When the group notice effect starts, a start sound suggesting the start of the group notice effect is output from the speakers 8L and 8R in addition to the effect sound corresponding to the group notice effect, but the second character appears. By then, the output of the start sound will stop.

As shown in FIG. 155 (b45), a second character appears shortly after the first character appears. In the state shown in FIG. 155 (b45), while the entire character displayed first is not yet displayed, a part of the character displayed first is displayed more than in the first situation and is second. It represents the second situation in which the entire character displayed in is not yet displayed, while a part of the second displayed character (a part of the face in this example) is displayed.

As shown in FIGS. 156 (b46) to (b48), characters appear one after another, and an animation of running through from the left side to the right side of the screen is displayed. The display area on the screen used in the group notice production is larger than the display area of "Catch Baku Chu!" In the SP first half title notice production.

As shown in FIG. 157 (b49), the character continues to advance, and eventually the first displayed character running at the top reaches the left edge of the screen. As shown in FIG. 157 (b50), the first displayed character running at the top (top) begins to disappear from the left edge of the screen. As shown in FIG. 157 (b51), the first displayed character running at the top disappears first from the left edge of the screen. As a result, the first display period ends.

As shown in FIG. 158 (b52), in the second display period, characters appear one after another, and an animation of running through from the left side to the right side of the screen is displayed. In the second display period shown in FIGS. 158 and 159, the frame lamps are sparsely lit with high brightness in accordance with the appearance of the characters traveling in a group in the group notice effect. As a result, the frame lamp lights up or blinks according to the animation display in which the characters form a group and run through. Further, the effect sound corresponding to the group notice output from the speakers 8L and 8R includes, for example, footsteps in accordance with the animation display in which the character runs through. After that, as shown in FIGS. 158 (b52) to 159 (b57), characters appear one after another, and an animation of running through from the left side to the right side of the screen is displayed.

As the characters run from the left side to the right side of the screen as a group, the characters cover the entire screen, making it difficult or impossible for the player to see the title display of "Catch the Baku Chu!". ..

As shown in FIG. 160 (b58), in the third display period, the last character appears, and an animation of running through from the left side to the right side of the screen together with other characters is displayed. No new characters will appear in the third display period. In the third display period, as shown in FIGS. 160 and 161, the frame lamp is also turned off or lowered from the right side to the left side of the pachinko gaming machine 1 in accordance with the effect that the character disappears to the left edge of the screen in the group notice. The position where the light is turned on by the brightness will be changed. As shown in FIG. 160 (b58), when the third display period is entered, all of the game effect lamps 9 are once lit with high brightness.

As shown in FIG. 160 (b59), the frame lamp starts to turn off as the character disappears to the left edge of the screen. In the example shown in FIG. 160 (b59), since the character is not displayed in the right half area of the screen, a part of the frame right lamp 9R is turned off. As shown in FIG. 160 (b60), the number of frame right lamps 9R that are turned off increases as the character disappears toward the left edge of the screen.

As shown in FIG. 160, as the character disappears to the left edge of the screen, the title display of "Catch the Baku Chu!" Reappears step by step. At this time, if the winner is in the SP first half title notice lottery, the SP first half title notice is given by changing the display mode (for example, color, pattern, shape, etc.) of the title display of "Catch Baku Chu!". .. For example, as shown in FIG. 153 (b39), before the Baku Chu group notice is executed, the characters "Catch the Baku Chu!" In the title display in the first half of the SP reach are white, but FIG. 159 (b56). After that, when the character image in the group notice is displayed on the layer on the front side of the layer on which the title is displayed, the title display becomes difficult to see or disappears. While the entire screen is covered by the character image in the group notice, the characters "Catch the Baku Chu!" In the title display change to red, and as shown in FIGS. 160 (b59) and (b60), the characters in the group notice As it disappears to the left edge of the screen, the red title display gradually appears and becomes visible.

As shown in FIGS. 161 (b61) and 161 (b62), the number of game effect lamps 9 that are turned off increases as the character gradually disappears. As shown in FIG. 161 (b63), the group notice effect ends when the last character disappears. After that, the process shifts to the production of the first half of the SP reach shown in FIG. 115 (c1).

(Boingo group notice)
The production mode of the Boingo group notice will be described with reference to FIGS. 162 to 171.

In the above-mentioned 6-person group notice and Baku Chu group notice, a plurality of characters proceed as a group from the right edge to the left edge of the screen. As described above, the 6-person group notice and the Baku Chu group notice were the effects of the character advancing in the X-axis direction in the XY plane shown in FIG. 54. On the other hand, in the Boingo group notice, the character (Boingo) can also move in the Z-axis direction of the screen. That is, the Boingo group notice is a 3D effect in which the character progresses in the three-dimensional space of XYZ.

FIGS. 162 to 167 are diagrams for explaining an effect mode when the Boingo group notice is executed in the stage A. Even when the Boingo group is executed in the stage B, it is the same as the effect mode shown in FIGS. 162 to 167. Although not shown, the Boingo group notice effect also has a first display period, a second display period, and a third display period, as in the case of the 6-person group notice effect and the Baku Chu group notice effect.

As shown in FIG. 162 (d1), the boingo group notice starts, but the game effect lamp 9 is temporarily turned off before the character appears. As a result, the player can be made to pay attention to the fact that the group notice effect will be executed from now on.

During the execution of the Boingo group notice, for example, each lamp included in the game effect lamp 9 is turned on in a manner corresponding to the group notice effect based on the luminance data tables shown in FIGS. 66 to 72. For example, the frame right lamps 9R5 to 9R8 located near the place where the character appears in the group notice starts to light up with high brightness, and then the part of the lamp that lights up with high brightness moves according to the direction in which the character advances. In addition, the frame lamps are sparsely lit with high brightness according to the state in which the characters progress in a group in the group notice effect. As a result, the frame lamp lights up or blinks according to the animation display in which the characters form a group and run through. Further, the effect sound corresponding to the group notice output from the speakers 8L and 8R includes, for example, footsteps in accordance with the animation display in which the character runs through.

As shown in FIG. 162 (d2), a pre-stage image by a light effect is displayed as a pre-stage effect before the character (Boingo) appears at a specific position on the screen. The specific position is a group appearance point at which the character group appears. After that, as shown in FIG. 162 (d3), the first character appears from a specific position that is difficult to see due to the previous image due to the light effect.

After that, as shown in FIGS. 163 (d4) and 163 (d5), the second and third characters appear, and an animation is displayed in which each character gradually progresses toward the screen. Will be done. As shown in FIG. 163 (d6), as the first displayed character (first character) is enlarged and displayed, the specific position where the character appears becomes difficult or invisible by the first character.

After that, as shown in FIGS. 164 (d7) to (d9), the characters form a group and proceed from the depth side to the front side of the screen, so that the entire screen is covered by the characters. As shown in FIGS. 165 (d10) to (d12), the last character appears and progresses from the depth side to the front side of the screen.

After that, as shown in FIGS. 166 (d13) and 166 (d14), as the last character progresses from the depth side to the front side of the screen, it covers most of the screen. Then, as shown in FIG. 166 (d15), the last character is enlarged and displayed from one end to the other end of the screen over a range, and the entire screen is covered by the last character.

After that, as shown in FIGS. 167 (d16) and 167 (d17), the original background image is displayed as the last character disappears from the screen, and as shown in 153 (d18), when the last character disappears. The group notice production ends.

FIG. 168 is a diagram for explaining the details of the Boingo group notice. 168 (A) to (F) correspond to FIGS. 162 (d3) to 163 (d6), 164 (d8), and (d9), respectively.

As shown in FIG. 168 (A), the first character appears from the group appearance point, and as shown in FIGS. 168 (B) to (F), characters appear one after another from the group appearance point. Here, as the first displayed character (first character) is enlarged and displayed, the specific position where the character appears becomes difficult or invisible to be visually recognized by the first character. Therefore, as shown in FIGS. 168 (E) and 168 (F), even if the succeeding character image is placed at the position hidden by the first character, it cannot be visually recognized. May be good.

Here, with reference to FIGS. 169 and 170, a comparative example of the Boingo group notice and the Boingo group notice according to the present embodiment are compared. In the comparative example shown in FIG. 169, the character (boingo) appears at a specific position (group appearance point) on the screen, but the previous image due to the light effect as shown in FIG. 162 (d2) is not displayed. Therefore, in order to eliminate the discomfort that the character suddenly appears large, it is necessary to create an animation so that the character is displayed small and gradually enlarged as shown in FIGS. 169 and 170. ..

Therefore, in the comparative example, the animation display as shown in FIGS. 169 (d101) to 170 (d105) is displayed until the character can be displayed in the size shown in FIG. 162 (d3) as shown in FIG. 170 (d106). You have to go through it, which takes extra production time, and you have to create an image for animation. On the other hand, in the case of the picture form of the present embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 162 (d2) and 162 (d3), the pre-stage image by the light effect is displayed as the pre-stage effect before the character appears. By displaying the first character from a specific position that is difficult to see due to the display of the previous image by the effect, the character can be displayed from the beginning with a certain size (the size shown in FIG. 162 (d3) and FIG. 170 (d106)). It can be displayed.

(Modified example of Boingo group notice)
FIG. 171 is a diagram for explaining an effect mode when the Boingo group notice according to the modified example is executed. The example shown in FIG. 171 may be replaced with the example shown in FIG. 167. For example, as shown in FIGS. 171 (d101) to 171 (d103), the title image of the first half of the SP may be displayed as the last displayed character disappears. That is, as shown in FIG. 162 (d1), while the entire screen is covered by the character image in the group preview in the layer on the front side of the layer on which the normal background image is displayed, it is shown in FIG. 171 (d103). As described above, the normal background image may be switched to the title image in the first half of the SP. In this way, the group notice effect may be executed during the execution of the advance notice effect such as the SP first half title notice effect.

Further, the title image of the first half of the SP in the Boingo group notice may give a big hit notice by changing the display mode as shown in FIG. 161. Further, instead of covering the entire screen by enlarging the last character, the background image used for the group notice effect may be switched to the next effect by an animation in which the background image is wound like a scroll.

(Dog herd notice)
A mode of producing the dog herd notice will be described with reference to FIGS. 172 to 174.

In the present embodiment, the 6-person group notice, the explosion chew notice, and the boingo group notice are illustrated as the group notice effect, but the pachinko gaming machine 1 is referred to as a dog group notice as shown in FIGS. 172 to 174. It may be the one that executes the group notice effect.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 172 (e1), the first character is displayed, and then a plurality of dog characters appear one after another as shown in FIG. 172 (e2), and FIG. 172 (e3). The screen area may be covered with a group of characters as shown in.

After that, as shown in FIGS. 173 (e4) to (e6), the title image of the first half of the SP is displayed as the last displayed character disappears. That is, as shown in FIG. 172 (e3), while the entire screen is covered by the character image in the group notice effect in the layer on the front side of the layer on which the normal background image is displayed, it is shown in FIG. 173 (e6). As described above, the normal background image is switched to the title image in the first half of the SP. Then, on the screen after the plurality of characters located at the end have passed, the title image of the first half of the SP corresponding to the subsequent production of the first half of the SP reach is displayed.

Further, the title image of the first half of the SP in the dog group notice may give a big hit notice by changing the display mode as shown in FIG. 161.

As shown in FIG. 174, comparing the 6-person notice and the dog group notice, the distance between the first displayed character and the last displayed character in the dog group notice (the length between them on the X-axis). S) X2 is shorter than the distance (length between the two on the X-axis) X1 between the first displayed character and the last displayed character in the 6-person group notice. Further, since the execution time is the same or substantially the same for both, the speed V2 at which the character advances in the dog group notice is slower than the speed V1 at which the character advances in the six-person group notice. Further, the density D2 of the plurality of characters in the dog group notice is larger than the density D1 of the plurality of characters in the six-person group notice. In addition, the dog group notice production has a higher expectation (reliability) of a big hit than the 6-person group notice production, and the dog group notice production has a lower appearance rate (execution probability) than the 6-person group notice production.

(Execution of group notice production during reach line production)
With reference to FIGS. 175 and 176, an effect mode when the group notice effect is executed during the reach line will be described.

As shown in FIG. 175 (f1), in the state where the reach line effect is executed, the group notice effect is executed as shown in FIGS. 175 (f2) to (f4), and then FIGS. 176 (f5) and (f6). ), The symbol feed effect may be executed.

[Main configurations and effects]
The technical effects obtained by various configurations of the pachinko gaming machine 1 are individually listed below.

(1-1) With a gaming machine (for example, pachinko gaming machine 1) that can control an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous to the player based on the display result of the variable display becoming a specific display result. There,
Group effect execution means (for example, group advance notice execution process shown in FIG. 51, 6 shown in FIGS. 98 to 104) for executing a group effect (for example, group notice effect) for displaying an image in which a plurality of characters progress as a group. People group notice production) and
A process of executing a blessing effect executing means (for example, a fanfare effect by the effect control CPU 120) for executing a blessing effect (for example, a fanfare effect) that displays an image congratulating that the display result of the variable display has become the specific display result. ) And,
The display period of the image in the group effect includes the first display period, the second display period, and the third display period (for example, the period shown in FIG. 63).
The first display period is a period from the start of the display of the first character in the group effect until the new display of the character is performed and the display of any of the characters ends first (for example, the figure). 98 (a23) to the period shown in FIG. 100 (a30)),
The second display period is a period longer than the first display period, and is a period in which a new display of the character is performed and the display of the displayed character is terminated (for example, FIG. 101 (a31) to the period shown in FIG. 102 (a36)),
The third display period is a period in which the display of the displayed character continues without displaying a new character (for example, FIGS. 103 (a37) to 104 (a42)). Period shown),
The blessing effect can be executed after the group effect (for example, the fanfare effect shown in FIGS. 119 to 121 is executed after the six-person group notice effect shown in FIGS. 98 to 104 is executed).
When it is suggested that the display result of the variable display is a lost display result different from the specific display result (for example, in the case of the fluctuation pattern of the variation number 9), the variable display is started after the variable display is started. In the first predetermined period (for example, the period of T1 + T2 shown in FIG. 64) until it is suggested that the display is the result of the loss display, the first display period starts in the latter half of the first predetermined period. (For example, the example shown in FIGS. 64 and 65),
When it is suggested that the display result of the variable display is the specific display result (for example, in the case of the fluctuation pattern of the variation numbers 20, 23, 26), the variable display is displayed after the variable display starts. In the second predetermined period (for example, T3 + T4 period, T5 + T6 period, T7 + T8 period) until it is suggested that the specific display result is obtained, the first display period is the first half of the second predetermined period. Starts (for example, the example shown in FIGS. 64 and 65).

As a result, in the group notice effect, the second display period in which the characters appear one after another and progress is longer than the first display period from the first start of the character display to the first end of the character display. By designing it to be long, it is possible to provide a suitable group notice effect. In addition, the feeling of exhilaration may fade with the passage of time until the result of the variable display is finalized, but in the case of a variable pattern in which the result of the variable display is a lost display result, it is in the latter half of the time of the variable display. By executing the group notice effect, it is possible to maintain the feeling of exhilaration or evoke it again. On the other hand, in the case of a variable pattern in which the result of the variable display is a hit display result, the fanfare effect, which is a blessing effect, is executed. After that, even if the feeling of exhilaration fades with the passage of time, the feeling of exhilaration can be maintained or evoked again by the blessing effect.

The "specific display result" is a display result that can be controlled to an advantageous state based on the display result of the variable display becoming the specific display result. That is, the specific display result is a display result for controlling the gaming state to an advantageous state even if it is derived. In the present embodiment, when the combination of the lighting modes in the special figure 1 variable display unit 21 of the special figure LED substrate 20 becomes the combination of the lighting modes corresponding to the big hit, the big hit occurs, and the lighting corresponding to the big hit occurs. The combination of modes is the specific display result. Further, when the combination of the lighting modes in the special figure 2 variable display unit 22 of the special figure LED substrate 20 becomes the combination of the lighting modes corresponding to the big hit, the big hit occurs, and the combination of the lighting modes corresponding to the big hit is specified. It becomes the display result. Further, the decorative symbol that is variably displayed in the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of the image display device 5 is a specific special symbol (for example, a big hit such as "3,3,3" or "7,7,7". A big hit occurs when the game is stopped as a combination of symbols), and the display of the specific special symbol is the specific display result.

The "missing display result" is a display result different from the specific display result, and is a display result that is not controlled to an advantageous state based on the fact that the variable display display result is the lost display result. That is, the loss display result is a display result in which the gaming state is not controlled to the advantageous state even if it is derived. In the present embodiment, when the combination of the lighting modes in the special figure 1 variable display unit 21 of the special figure LED board 20 becomes the combination of the lighting modes corresponding to the loss, the result of the game becomes a loss, and the loss occurs. The combination of the corresponding lighting modes results in a lost display result. Further, when the combination of the lighting modes in the special figure 2 variable display unit 22 of the special figure LED board 20 becomes the combination of the lighting modes corresponding to the loss, the result of the game becomes a loss, and the lighting mode corresponding to the loss. The combination will be the lost display result. Further, the decorative symbol variably displayed in the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of the image display device 5 becomes a specific predetermined symbol (for example, a combination of lost symbols such as "3, 2, 3") and stops. Sometimes the result of the game is lost, and the display of the predetermined symbol is the lost display result.

The "advantageous state" is a state that is advantageous to the player, and is a gaming state in which the value-adding rate for games (for example, the payout rate of the game ball) is 1 or more or more than 1 by being controlled. In the present embodiment, as an advantageous state, a big hit gaming state that is controlled when each of the normal big hits 1 and 2 and the probability variation big hits 1 to 9 occurs is exemplified. The advantageous state may be a small hit game state that is controlled when a small hit occurs, or may be a probability variation state or a time saving state.

The "new character display" may be the same type of character as the character first displayed in the group notice effect, or may be a different type of character from the character first displayed in the group notice effect. good.

The "blessing effect" is an effect of displaying an image congratulating that the display result of the variable display has become a specific display result, and is controlled to an advantageous state based on the display result of the variable display having become a specific display result. It is also a production that displays an image that congratulates you. "Blessing" includes suggesting or notifying the player that the display result of the variable display has become a specific display result or is controlled to an advantageous state. In addition, "blessing" improves the player's expectation for the advantageous state by suggesting or notifying that the display result of the variable display has become a specific display result or is controlled to the advantageous state. Including letting you do it. For example, in the blessing effect, the combination of lighting modes in the special figure 1 variable display unit 21 of the special figure LED board 20 is a combination of lighting modes corresponding to a big hit, and the special figure 2 variable display unit of the special figure LED board 20. The combination of lighting modes in 22 is a combination of lighting modes corresponding to a big hit, or the decorative symbol variably displayed in the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, 5R of the image display device 5 is a specific special symbol ( It includes displaying an image that suggests or notifies the player that the jackpot symbol has been reached or that the player is controlled to the jackpot gaming state.

"The blessing effect can be executed after the group effect" means that the group notice effect is executed in the variable display based on the hold memory of 1, and then the blessing is performed in the variable display based on the hold memory of 1. Including that the production is executed. In addition, "the blessing effect can be executed after the group effect" indicates that the display result of the variable display based on the hold memory of 1 becomes a specific display result of the variable display based on the hold memory of 1. When a group notice effect is executed as a look-ahead effect that suggests or gives a notice before the display result is started, the group notice effect is executed, and then the variable display based on the hold memory of the 1 is started and the 1 Includes the execution of a blessing effect within a variable display based on the hold memory of.

The "first predetermined period" is a period from the start of the variable display to the suggestion that the display result of the variable display is a lost display result, and in the present embodiment, FIGS. 64 and 65. It is exemplified by the period of T1 + T2 shown in. "It is suggested that the display result of the variable display is the loss display result" means that the combination of the lighting modes in the special figure 1 variable display unit 21 of the special figure LED board 20 is the combination of the lighting modes corresponding to the loss. , The combination of the lighting modes in the special figure 2 variable display unit 22 of the special figure LED board 20 is the combination of the lighting modes corresponding to the big hit, and the combination of the lighting modes corresponding to the loss is the combination of the lighting modes corresponding to the loss. This includes stopping the decorative symbol that is variably displayed in 5L, 5C, and 5R as a specific predetermined symbol (missing symbol combination). Further, when the movable body 32 does not operate at a specific timing when the display result of the variable display becomes a lost display result, while the movable body 32 operates at a specific timing when the display result of the variable display becomes a hit display result. , "It is suggested that the display result of the variable display is the loss display result" suggests to the player that the display result of the variable display becomes the loss display result because the movable body 32 does not operate at a specific timing. Including notifying. It should be noted that the specific timing is the timing at which the movable body 32 operates at the time of a big hit when the player operates the operating means by performing an effect of urging the player to operate the operating means such as the PUSH effect described above. You may.

The "second predetermined period" is a period from the start of the variable display to the suggestion that the display result of the variable display is a specific display result, and in the present embodiment, FIGS. 64 and 65. It is exemplified by the period of T3 + T4, the period of T5 + T6, and the period of T7 + T8 shown in. "It is suggested that the display result of the variable display is a specific display result" means that the combination of the lighting modes in the special figure 1 variable display unit 21 of the special figure LED board 20 is the combination of the lighting modes corresponding to the big hit. , The combination of lighting modes in the special drawing 2 variable display unit 22 of the special drawing LED board 20 is a combination of lighting modes corresponding to a big hit, and variable display is performed in the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of the image display device 5. Includes that the decorative symbol that is being displayed becomes a specific special symbol (big hit symbol combination) and stops. Further, when the movable body 32 does not operate at a specific timing when the display result of the variable display becomes a lost display result, while the movable body 32 operates at a specific timing when the display result of the variable display becomes a hit display result. , "It is suggested that the display result of the variable display is the specific display result" suggests to the player that the display result of the variable display becomes the specific display result by the operation of the movable body 32 at the specific timing. Including notifying. It should be noted that the specific timing is the timing at which the movable body 32 operates at the time of a big hit when the player operates the operating means by performing an effect of urging the player to operate the operating means such as the PUSH effect described above. You may.

(1-2) The second display period is a period longer than each of the first display period and the third display period, and the third display period is a longer period than the first display period. (For example, each display period shown in FIG. 63).

From this, the group notice effect can be made powerful by setting the second display period in which the characters appear one after another in the group notice effect as the longest period. Furthermore, by setting the first display period from the first appearance of the character to the first departure of the character as the shortest period, it is possible to prevent the group notice effect that is suddenly executed from becoming full of. Can be done.

(1-3) The character displayed first in the first display period is a character having a high priority in the content of the gaming machine (for example, Yume-chan, who is the main character).

As a result, the character that first appears in the group notice production is a character with a high priority like the main character, which is familiar to the player, but after that, a character that appears less frequently than the main character in other productions. By appearing in the group notice production, it is possible to surprise the player about the group notice production and make the player feel that it is a rare production, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

The "high-priority character" includes the main character appearing in the content used in the pachinko game machine 1 and the character with the highest priority among the characters other than the main character, and is executed by the pachinko game machine 1 more than other characters. Includes characters that appear frequently (number of times) in the production to be performed.

(1-4) When it is suggested that the display result of the variable display is the specific display result (for example, in the case of the fluctuation pattern of the fluctuation numbers 20, 23, 26), the character is displayed in the group effect. Is first started at a timing close to half of the second predetermined period in the first half of the second predetermined period (for example, the example shown in FIGS. 64 and 65).

As a result, in the case of a variable pattern in which the result of the variable display is a hit display result, even if the group notice effect is executed in the first half of the variable display time, the group notice effect is executed in the vicinity of the latter half even in the first half. So, the afterglow of the group notice production can be extended to the later side as much as possible.

(1-5) As for the pattern suggesting that the display result of the variable display is the specific display result (for example, the fluctuation pattern of the fluctuation numbers 20, 23, 26), the display result of the variable display is the loss display result. After pretending to be, the variable display result includes a relief pattern (for example, a variation pattern of variation numbers 23 and 26) that becomes the specific display result.
Also in the relief pattern, in the second predetermined period from the start of the variable display to the suggestion that the variable display is the specific display result, the first half of the second predetermined period is the first. 1 The display period begins (for example, the example shown in FIGS. 64 and 65).

As a result, even in the case of a relief pattern in which the display result of the variable display is a hit display result after the display result of the variable display is pretended to be a lost display result, the fanfare effect, which is a blessing effect, is executed. , The group notice effect is executed in the first half of the variable display time to give an uplifting feeling, and even if the uplifting feeling fades with the passage of time, the blessing effect keeps the uplifting feeling or evokes it again. Can be done.

(1-6) A pattern suggesting that the display result of the variable display is the loss display result (for example, the fluctuation pattern of the main fluctuation numbers 9, 12, 15) and the display result of the variable display are the specific display results. With the pattern suggested to be (for example, the fluctuation pattern of the main fluctuation numbers 20, 23, 26), until it is suggested that the display result of the variable display is the loss display result or the specific display result. A common display is made (eg, the example shown in FIGS. 91-140).

As a result, for example, the variation pattern of the variation number 9 and the variation pattern of the variation number 20 are executed in common until the display result is finalized, and the variation pattern of the variation number 12 and the variation pattern of the variation number 23 are displayed. The common effect is executed until the display result is confirmed, and the common effect is executed until the display result is confirmed between the variation pattern of the variation number 15 and the variation pattern of the variation number 26. Therefore, the common effect is executed. It is possible to draw the player's attention to the fact that the group notice effect is executed while the player is in the process.

It should be noted that the pattern suggesting that the display result of the variable display is the loss display result (for example, the fluctuation pattern of the main fluctuation numbers 9, 12 and 15) and the display result of the variable display are the specific display results. (For example, the fluctuation patterns of the main fluctuation numbers 20, 23, and 26) are displayed differently from each other until it is suggested that the display result of the variable display is the lost display result or the specific display result. May be done.

As a result, the player can be made to pay attention to the fact that the group notice effect is executed while the effects different from each other are being executed.

(1-7) A notice effect for notifying that the execution period of the group effect and the display result of the variable display, which is different from the group notice, will be the specific display result (for example, SP first half title notice effect). May overlap with the execution period of
The advance notice production ends after the third display period ends,
The display in the group effect has a larger display area than the display in the advance notice effect (for example, the example shown in FIGS. 155 to 161).

As a result, even if the group advance notice effect is executed while the advance notice effect such as the SP first half title advance notice effect is being executed, the SP first half title advance notice effect can be shown to the player.

(1-8) While the advance notice effect is being executed, the group effect is executed (for example, the example shown in FIGS. 155 to 161).

As a result, when the advance notice effect such as the SP first half title advance notice effect is being executed, the player can pay attention to the execution of the group advance notice effect. It should be noted that the advance notice effect such as the SP first half title advance notice effect and the group advance notice effect do not start to be executed at the same time.

(1-9) When the group effect is executed, there is a higher probability that the display result of the variable display will be the specific display result than when the notice effect is executed (for example, as shown in FIG. 34). , The group notice is more reliable than the SP first half title notice).

As a result, other notice effects with a lower expectation of a big hit than the group notice effect are not displayed on the front layer having a higher priority than the group notice effect, so that the big hit is suitable for the player. Can be suggested. As described above, in the present embodiment, the production having a high expectation of a big hit is not covered with the production having a low expectation on the front side.

(1-12) While the group effect is being executed, the brightness is reduced in both the background display and the display in the advance notice effect, while the display of information related to the game (for example, the first reserved memory number and the second reserved memory). The brightness does not decrease in the fourth symbol 5J and the small symbol 5M indicating the numbers, and the first reserved storage display area 5D, the second reserved storage display area 5U, and the active display area 5A).

As a result, when the group notice effect is executed, the brightness of the image related to the background display and other notice effects (for example, the image related to the SP first half title notice effect having a lower expectation than the group notice effect) is lowered, while the game is played. It is important for the player as much as possible because the display of information about the game, which is highly important for the player regarding the victory or defeat of the game and the advantage, is given a high priority and the brightness is not lowered even if the group notice effect is executed. Information can be shown.

(2-1) With a gaming machine (for example, pachinko gaming machine 1) that can control an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous to the player based on the display result of the variable display becoming a specific display result. There,
A group effect execution means (for example, a group advance notice execution process shown in FIG. 51, 6 shown in FIGS. 98 to 104) for executing a group effect (for example, a group advance notice effect) for displaying an image in which a plurality of characters progress as a group. With crowd notice production)
The display period of the image in the group effect includes the first display period, the second display period, and the third display period (for example, the period shown in FIG. 63).
The first display period is a period from the start of the display of the first character in the group effect until the new display of the character is performed and the display of any of the characters ends first (for example, the figure). 98 (a23) to the period shown in FIG. 100 (a30)),
The second display period is a period longer than the first display period, and is a period in which a new display of the character is performed and the display of the displayed character is terminated (for example, FIG. 101 (a31) to the period shown in FIG. 102 (a36)),
The third display period is a period in which the display of the displayed character continues without displaying a new character (for example, FIGS. 103 (a37) to 104 (a42)). Period shown),
In the first display period, from the first situation in which a part of the first displayed character is displayed, a part of the first displayed character is displayed more than in the first situation and second. In the second situation where a part of the displayed character is displayed (for example, the example shown in FIGS. 61 and 98).

As a result, in the group notice effect, the second display period in which the characters appear one after another and progress is longer than the first display period from the first start of the character display to the first end of the character display. By designing it to be long, it is possible to provide a suitable group notice effect. In addition, since there is no situation in which only one person is displayed in the group notice production, it is possible to prevent the question of whether or not it is a group notice production and the misunderstanding that only one person will appear. can.

In the "first situation in which a part of the first displayed character is displayed", as shown in FIG. 61 (a), the entire first displayed character on the screen of the image display device 5 is still present. While it is not displayed, a part of the character is displayed at the edge of the screen of the image display device 5, or as shown in FIG. 98 (a), the game machine frame 3 displays an image. In the display area visible to the player while covering the screen of the device 5, the entire character initially displayed has not yet been displayed, while the character is at the edge of the display area visible to the player. Includes situations where part of is displayed. That is, the second situation includes a situation in which the first appearing character is completely invisible, but a part of the first appearing character is visible.

“The second situation in which a part of the first displayed character is displayed more than the first situation and a part of the second displayed character is displayed” is shown in FIG. 61 (b). As described above, on the screen of the image display device 5, the entire character displayed first is not yet displayed, while a part of the character is displayed at the edge of the screen of the image display device 5 as compared with the first situation. And while the entire second displayed character has not yet been displayed, a part of the character is displayed at the edge of the screen of the image display device 5, or FIG. 98 (b). As shown in the above, in the display area visible to the player when the game machine frame 3 covers the screen of the image display device 5, the entire character initially displayed has not yet been displayed. At the edge of the display area visible to the player, a part of the character is displayed more than in the first situation, and the entire character displayed second is not yet displayed, while the character is visible to the player. Includes a situation where a part of the character is displayed at the edge of the display area. That is, the second situation includes a situation in which a second character appears after the first appearing character before the first appearing character is completely visible.

(2-2) In the group effect, the first displayed character and the second displayed character have different Y-axis position coordinates along the vertical direction on the screen.

As a result, since the first character and the second character do not overlap on the Y-axis, it is possible to prevent the misunderstanding that only one character appears.

(2-3) Motion blur processing is performed on the display of characters in the group effect (for example, the example shown in FIG. 59).

This has the effect of making each character appear to be a plurality of characters, so that it is possible to prevent the misunderstanding that only one character appears.

(2-4) The sound suggesting the start of the group notice effect is output during the display of the character displayed first in the group effect, but by the time the display of the character displayed second is started. Finish (for example, the example shown in FIG. 98).

As a result, a sound suggesting the start of the group notice effect is output and the first character appears, so that the player can be notified that the group notice effect has been executed, while the second character By the end of the start sound by the time it appears, it is possible to preferably provide a group notice effect.

The start sound may be output before the first character appears, or may be output at the same time as the first character appears, but it ends by the time the second character appears. ..

(2-5) The plurality of characters displayed in the group effect include a character in which the whole body is displayed in the display area of the screen and a character in which a part of the whole body is not contained in the display area of the screen. Part includes a character that fits in the display area of the screen and is displayed (for example, the example shown in FIG. 57).

As a result, more characters can appear in the group notice effect in the display area where the area is limited.

(2-6) The plurality of characters displayed in the group effect include a first character (for example, maid A) and a second character (for example, maid B) whose type is different from that of the first character. ,
In each of the first display period, the second display period, and the third display period, the first character in which the whole body is displayed in the display area of the screen and a part of the whole body are in the display area of the screen. The other part of the whole body is displayed in a mixed manner with the first character that is displayed in the display area of the screen without being fitted (for example, the example shown in FIG. 57).

This makes it possible to give the illusion that more types of characters are appearing in the group notice effect in the display area where the area is limited.

(2-7) A part of the screen is covered with a shield (for example, a gaming machine frame 3), and the character displayed first in the group effect is displayed at the position where the shield is covered. Is started, and then the display of the second displayed character is started.
Even when the screen is visually recognized with the shield covered, the first situation changes to the second situation during the first display period (for example, the example shown in FIG. 61).

As a result, even in the display area of the screen actually viewed by the player, there is no situation in which only one person is displayed in the group notice production, so there is a question as to whether or not it is a group notice production, and only one person appears. It is possible to prevent the misunderstanding that it may be.

(2-8) When the gaming machine is visually recognized from the side toward the screen and the shield, it is possible to visually recognize the edge of the screen (for example, the example shown in FIG. 61).

As a result, even when the player visually recognizes the pachinko gaming machine 1 from the side and visually recognizes the edge of the screen, there is no situation in which only one person is displayed in the group notice effect, so that the group notice effect is produced. It is possible to prevent the question of whether or not it is, and the misunderstanding that only one person will appear.

(2-9) At the design stage, a display relating to the group effect is created with a mask covering the area corresponding to the position of the shield on a screen of a predetermined size, and further, the predetermined size of the screen (for example, for example). A display relating to the group effect is created up to the area corresponding to the large size so that it can be applied to a size larger than 19 inches (for example, 20 inches).

As a result, even when the design of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is suddenly changed so as to use a size larger than a predetermined size, the created group notice effect data can be applied.

(2-10) The plurality of characters displayed in the group effect are a low-importance character (for example, maids C to F) having a low importance in the content of the gaming machine, and the low-importance character. Including high-importance characters (for example, maids A and B) that are highly important in the contents of the gaming machine,
The high-severity character has a lower proportion than the low-severity character in that the face does not fit in the display area of the screen and the part other than the face of the whole body fits in the display area of the screen and is displayed (for example, the figure). Example shown in 57).

As a result, a character with high importance such as the main character can easily recognize the face in the group notice production as compared with a character with low importance such as a supporting character, so that the interest of the game can be improved.

(3-1) With a gaming machine (for example, pachinko gaming machine 1) that can control an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous to the player based on the display result of the variable display becoming a specific display result. There,
An effect execution means (for example, an effect control CPU 120 that executes a group notice execution process shown in FIG. 51) for executing an effect is provided.
The effect executed by the effect executing means includes a group effect (for example, a group notice effect shown in FIGS. 98 to 104) for displaying an image in which a plurality of characters progress as a group.
The display period of the image in the group effect includes the first display period, the second display period, and the third display period (for example, the period shown in FIG. 63).
The first display period is a period from the start of the display of the first character in the group effect until the new display of the character is performed and the display of any of the characters ends first (for example, the figure). 98 (a23) to the period shown in FIG. 100 (a30)),
The second display period is a period longer than the first display period, and is a period in which a new display of the character is performed and the display of the displayed character is terminated (for example, FIG. 101 (a31) to the period shown in FIG. 102 (a36)),
The third display period is a period in which the display of the displayed character continues without displaying a new character (for example, FIGS. 103 (a37) to 104 (a42)). Period shown),
The group effect is an effect in which the number of displayed characters is the largest among the effects that can be executed by the effect executing means.

As a result, in the group notice effect, the second display period in which the characters appear one after another and progress is longer than the first display period from the first start of the character display to the first end of the character display. By designing it to be long, it is possible to provide a suitable group notice effect. In addition, in the group notice production, since the largest number of characters appear in all the productions, the player can be made aware that the variable display that can be expected to be a big hit is performed.

"The group effect is an effect in which the number of characters displayed is the largest among the effects that can be executed by the effect execution means" is 1 among all the effects executed in the pachinko gaming machine 1. The effect with the largest number of characters displayed on the screen includes the group notice effect. Further, "the group effect is an effect in which the number of displayed characters is the largest among the effects that can be executed by the effect execution means" is a decoration among all the effects executed in the pachinko gaming machine 1. Among the effects executed during the period when the variable display based on the hold memory of 1 is performed, such as the effect at the time of variable display of the symbol, the effect at the time of reach, the effect of pseudo-continuous effect, and the effect at the time of big hit occurrence, 1 The effect with the largest number of characters displayed on the screen includes the group notice effect. Further, "the group effect is an effect in which the number of displayed characters is the largest among the effects that can be executed by the effect executing means" is executed during the jackpot game state and the subsequent probabilistic state and time saving state. Among the effects, the effect having the largest number of characters displayed on one screen includes the group notice effect. In the above-mentioned example, the group notice effect does not have to be the effect with the largest number of displayed character types.

Further, "the group effect is an effect having the largest number of displayed characters among the effects that can be executed by the effect executing means" is described in all the effects executed by the pachinko gaming machine 1. This includes that the effect having the largest total number of characters displayed on all the screens during the effect is the group notice effect. Further, "the group effect is an effect in which the number of displayed characters is the largest among the effects that can be executed by the effect execution means" is a decoration among all the effects executed in the pachinko gaming machine 1. Among the effects executed during the period when the variable display based on the hold memory of 1 is performed, such as the effect at the time of variable display of the symbol, the effect at the time of reach, the effect at the time of pseudo continuous effect, and the effect at the time of big hit occurrence, the effect is concerned. The effect in which the total number of characters displayed on all the screens is the largest is the group notice effect. Further, "the group effect is an effect in which the number of displayed characters is the largest among the effects that can be executed by the effect executing means" is executed during the jackpot game state and the subsequent probabilistic state and time saving state. Among the effects, the effect in which the total number of characters displayed on all the screens during the effect is the largest is the group notice effect. In the above-mentioned example, the group notice effect does not have to be the effect with the largest number of displayed character types.

(3-2) An effect in which the number of characters displayed is smaller than that of the group effect, and a specific effect in which a plurality of characters are displayed (for example, an effect of the latter half of the SP reach or an effect of the final reach) is executed.

As a result, various effects can be executed, and among them, the largest number of characters can appear in the group notice effect.

It should be noted that the specific effect may be an effect in which the number of displayed character types is larger than that of the group notice effect.

(3-3) The number of characters displayed in the second display period of the group effect is larger than the number of characters displayed in the specific effect.

As a result, it is possible to show the player a powerful effect in the second display period, which is the longest period among the group notice effects.

The number of character types displayed in the second display period of the group notice effect may be larger than the number of character types displayed in the specific effect.

(4-1) With a gaming machine (for example, pachinko gaming machine 1) that can control an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous to the player based on the display result of the variable display becoming a specific display result. There,
A group effect execution means (for example, a group advance notice execution process shown in FIG. 51, 6 shown in FIGS. 98 to 104) for executing a group effect (for example, a group advance notice effect) for displaying an image in which a plurality of characters progress as a group. With crowd notice production)
The display period of the image in the group effect includes the first display period, the second display period, and the third display period (for example, the period shown in FIG. 63).
The first display period is a period from the start of the display of the first character in the group effect until the new display of the character is performed and the display of any of the characters ends first (for example, the figure). 98 (a23) to the period shown in FIG. 100 (a30)),
The second display period is a period longer than the first display period, and is a period in which a new display of the character is performed and the display of the displayed character is terminated (for example, FIG. 101 (a31) to the period shown in FIG. 102 (a36)),
The third display period is a period in which the display of the displayed character continues without displaying a new character (for example, FIGS. 103 (a37) to 104 (a42)). Period shown),
In the group production,
An auxiliary display is made to show that the character is in progress,
When the display of the first character and the display of the second character overlap, the display of the first character has priority over the display of the second character, while the auxiliary display corresponding to the first character is used. When the display of the second character overlaps, the display of the second character has priority over the auxiliary display corresponding to the first character (for example, the example shown in FIG. 58).

As a result, in the group notice effect, the second display period in which the characters appear one after another and progress is longer than the first display period from the first start of the character display to the first end of the character display. By designing it to be long, it is possible to provide a suitable group notice effect. In addition, while it is possible to show the player a more dynamic group notice effect by displaying the auxiliary display on the character, the auxiliary display does not hinder the visibility of other characters, so that more characters can be displayed. It can be clearly shown to the player.

The "auxiliary display" may be any display indicating that the character is progressing, and for example, an image display emphasizing that the character is progressing as shown in FIG. 58 (as shown in FIG. 58). For example, it may be an image display of sand smoke (an image display of sand smoke), an image display showing traces of passage of a character (for example, an image display of a character's footprint), or an image display attached to the character itself (for example). , An image display representing the aura of the character). The "auxiliary display" may be an image display performed in the vicinity of the character in relation to the progress of the character.

(4-2) The layer displayed on the screen is different between the display of the character in the group effect and the auxiliary display in the group effect (for example, as shown in FIG. 56, the image of sand smoke is layer 1, the character. The image of is placed in the layers after layer 2).

As a result, the character image and the auxiliary display can be preferably shown to the player in the group notice effect.

(4-3) The plurality of characters displayed in the group effect include a plurality of characters of the same type (for example, character C of layers 9 and 10).
The moving image data corresponding to the group effect includes the first character data (for example, the moving image data of the character C of the layer 9) and the second character data (for example, the character C of the layer 10) corresponding to each of a plurality of characters of the same type. Video data), including
The first character data and the second character data have different parameter values related to the movement speed of the character, while the animation parameter values related to the movement of the character are the same.

As a result, even when the movement speed of the character is changed, the work process related to the design of the group notice effect can be reduced by sharing the animation parameter values related to the movement of the character.

(4-4) In the group effect, a plurality of characters are not arranged at the same timing and the same speed at the coordinates arranged on the screen (for example, the example shown in FIG. 56).

As a result, since the plurality of characters do not operate in the same position at the same position, the group notice effect can be preferably shown to the player.

(5-1) With a gaming machine (for example, pachinko gaming machine 1) that can control an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous to the player based on the display result of the variable display becoming a specific display result. There,
A group effect execution means (for example, a group advance notice execution process shown in FIG. 51, 6 shown in FIGS. 98 to 104) for executing a group effect (for example, a group advance notice effect) for displaying an image in which a plurality of characters progress as a group. With crowd notice production)
The display period of the image in the group effect includes the first display period, the second display period, and the third display period (for example, the period shown in FIG. 63).
The first display period is a period from the start of the display of the first character in the group effect until the new display of the character is performed and the display of any of the characters ends first (for example, the figure). 98 (a23) to the period shown in FIG. 100 (a30)),
The second display period is a period longer than the first display period, and is a period in which a new display of the character is performed and the display of the displayed character is terminated (for example, FIG. 101 (a31) to the period shown in FIG. 102 (a36)),
The third display period is a period in which the display of the displayed character continues without displaying a new character (for example, FIGS. 103 (a37) to 104 (a42)). Period shown),
In the first display period, the display of the newly displayed character (for example, the second displayed character) ends before the display of the first displayed character ends (for example, FIG. 99, FIG. Example shown in 100).

The "newly displayed character" may be the character that appeared second in the group notice effect as shown in FIGS. 98 to 100, or the character that appeared third or later in the group notice effect. You may. Considering that the group notice effect is an effect in which a plurality of characters proceed as a group, the character that appears second in the group notice effect is the first displayed character as the "newly displayed character". It is preferable that the character that appears immediately after the second character overtakes the character that is displayed first, because it gives a sense of dynamism and presence.

As a result, in the group notice effect, the second display period in which the characters appear one after another and progress is longer than the first display period from the first start of the character display to the first end of the character display. By designing it to be long, it is possible to provide a suitable group notice effect. In addition, since the character that appears second is overtaken by the character that appears first and disappears at the top as it is, it is possible to show the player a lively group notice effect.

(5-2) The plurality of characters displayed in the group effect include a character that overtakes another character.
The number of overtaken characters is either greater or less than the number of other characters overtaken by the overtaken character.

As a result, the group notice effect can be prevented from becoming too complicated, and the group notice effect with a lively feeling can be shown to the player. Can be shown to.

(5-3) When the overtaking character overtakes the other character and the display of the overtaking character overlaps with the display of the other character, the outline of the overtaking character is more than the outline of the other character. Is also displayed thickly (for example, the example shown in FIG. 60).

As a result, it is possible to show the player how the character overtakes another character in an easy-to-understand manner.

(6-1) With a gaming machine (for example, pachinko gaming machine 1) that can control an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous to the player based on the display result of the variable display becoming a specific display result. There,
Group effect execution means (for example, group advance notice execution process shown in FIG. 51, 6 shown in FIGS. 98 to 104) for executing a group effect (for example, group notice effect) for displaying an image in which a plurality of characters progress as a group. People group notice production) and
Execution of the suggestion effect (for example, the PUSH effect) for displaying the suggestion image (for example, the image showing the push button 31B, the meter image, and the character image of "PUSH !!") suggesting the execution of the group effect. Means (for example, a process of executing a PUSH effect by the effect control CPU 120) are provided.
The display period of the image in the group effect includes the first display period, the second display period, and the third display period (for example, the period shown in FIG. 63).
The first display period is a period from the start of the display of the first character in the group effect until the new display of the character is performed and the display of any of the characters ends first (for example, the figure). 98 (a23) to the period shown in FIG. 100 (a30)),
The second display period is a period longer than the first display period, and is a period in which a new display of the character is performed and the display of the displayed character is terminated (for example, FIG. 101 (a31) to the period shown in FIG. 102 (a36)),
The third display period is a period in which the display of the displayed character continues without displaying a new character (for example, FIGS. 103 (a37) to 104 (a42)). Period shown),
The display of the suggestion image ends by the start of the first display period in the group effect (for example, the example shown in FIG. 97).

The "suggestion image" may be any image as long as it suggests the execution of the group notice effect, or may be an image that prompts the player to operate the operation means as shown in FIG. 97. , It may be an effect image such as a light or a pattern that is executed before suggesting the execution of the group notice effect, or it may be a clock image in the timer effect that measures the time until the group notice effect is executed. Alternatively, it may be a character image (for example, a character image of "group") suggesting the execution of the group notice effect. In the timer effect, the time until the group notice effect is executed by the clock image is timed, and when the timed time reaches a predetermined time, a character image suggesting the execution of the group notice effect (character of "group"). The image) may be displayed.

As a result, in the group notice effect, the second display period in which the characters appear one after another and progress is longer than the first display period from the first start of the character display to the first end of the character display. By designing it to be long, it is possible to provide a suitable group notice effect. In addition, it is possible to make it easier for the player to pay attention to the appearance of the character first.

(6-2) After the display of the effect related to the suggested image (for example, the effect indicating that the push button 31B has been pressed) is finished, the display of the character is first started in the first display period (for example,). Example shown in FIG. 97).

This makes it easier for the player to pay attention to the appearance of the character first.

(6-3) The suggestion image includes an image prompting the player to operate the operating means (for example, an image showing the push button 31B, a meter image, and a character image of "PUSH !!").
The output of the sound (for example, PUSH sound) when the operating means is operated during the display of the suggested image ends by the time the character display first starts in the first display period (for example, FIG. 97). Example shown in).

This makes it easier for the player to pay attention to the appearance of the character first.

(6-4) When the operating means is operated while the suggestion image is being displayed, any one of a plurality of effects (for example, 6-person group notice, background notice, lamp notice) including the group effect is executed. (For example, the example shown in FIGS. 97, 106, 107).

As a result, a plurality of effects are executed with the operation by the player as a turning point, so that the interest of the game can be improved.

(7-1) With a gaming machine (for example, pachinko gaming machine 1) that can control an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous to the player based on the display result of the variable display becoming a specific display result. There,
A group effect executing means (for example, a group advance notice execution process shown in FIG. 51, 6 shown in FIGS. 98 to 104) for executing a group effect (for example, a group advance notice effect) for displaying an image in which a plurality of characters progress as a group. It is equipped with a crowd notice production and the dog group notice production shown in FIGS. 172 to 174).
The display period of the image in the group effect includes the first display period, the second display period, and the third display period (for example, the period shown in FIG. 63).
The first display period is a period from the start of the display of the first character in the group effect until the new display of the character is performed and the display of any of the characters ends first (for example, the figure). 98 (a23) to the period shown in FIG. 100 (a30)),
The second display period is a period longer than the first display period, and is a period in which a new display of the character is performed and the display of the displayed character is terminated (for example, FIG. 101 (a31) to the period shown in FIG. 102 (a36)),
The third display period is a period in which the display of the displayed character continues without displaying a new character (for example, FIGS. 103 (a37) to 104 (a42)). Period shown),
The group production includes a first group production (for example, a 6-person group notice production) and a second group production (for example, a dog group notice production).
The plurality of characters displayed in the first group effect each proceed at the same or substantially the same first speed (for example, speed V1).
The plurality of characters displayed in the second group effect each proceed at the same or substantially the same second speed (for example, speed V2).
The first speed is faster than the second speed,
The first group effect is configured so that the linear distance from the first displayed character to the last displayed character is longer than that of the second group effect (for example, the example shown in FIG. 174). ..

As shown in FIG. 174, the "straight line distance from the first displayed character to the last displayed character" is displayed first in the group notice effect such as the 6-person group notice effect and the dog group notice effect. This is the linear distance (X-axis distance) from the end of the character to the end of the character displayed last. This linear distance is set to time T if the time from the display of the first character to the display of the last character from the edge of the screen of the image display device 5 is T and the speed of each character is V. It can be calculated by multiplying the velocity V (T × V).

As a result, in the group notice effect, the second display period in which the characters appear one after another and progress is longer than the first display period from the first start of the character display to the first end of the character display. By designing it to be long, it is possible to provide a suitable group notice effect. In addition, it is possible to preferably show the player two types of group notice effects.

(7-2) The execution time of the first group effect (for example, X1 / V1) is the same as or substantially the same as the execution time of the second group effect (for example, X2 / V2) (for example, in FIG. 174). Example shown).

As a result, it is possible to execute two types of group notice effects using the same or substantially the same time.

(7-3) When the second group effect is executed, there is a higher probability that the display result of the variable display will be the specific display result than when the first group effect is executed.
The execution probability of the second group effect is lower than the execution probability of the first group effect.

As a result, for the dog group notice production, which has a lower execution probability than the 6-person notice and has a high expectation, the speed of the character is made slower than the 6-person notice, so that, for example, the player shoots the character of the dog group notice effect. You can increase the chances of doing it.

(7-4) The degree of density of the plurality of characters displayed in the second group effect (for example, density D2) is the degree of concentration of the plurality of characters displayed in the first group effect (for example, density). Greater than degree D1).

As a result, the characters are arranged at an appropriate density in consideration of the speed and the moving distance of the characters in the group notice effect, so that it is possible to provide a group notice effect suitable for the player.

(7-5) In the second group effect, a plurality of characters located at the end are arranged from the lower part to the upper part of the screen.
On the screen after the plurality of characters located at the end have passed, the display corresponding to the subsequent effect is performed (for example, the example shown in FIG. 173).

As a result, it is possible to switch to an image for the next production and show it to the player in the wake of the group notice production, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

(8-1) With a gaming machine (for example, pachinko gaming machine 1) that can control an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous to the player based on the display result of the variable display becoming a specific display result. There,
A group effect execution means (for example, a group advance notice execution process shown in FIG. 51, a boingo shown in FIGS. 162 to 171) for executing a group effect (for example, a group advance notice effect) for displaying an image in which a plurality of characters progress as a group. With group notice production)
The display period of the image in the group effect includes the first display period, the second display period, and the third display period (for example, the period shown in FIG. 63).
The first display period is a period from the start of the display of the first character in the group effect until the new display of the character is performed and the display of any of the characters is first completed.
The second display period is a period longer than the first display period, and is a period during which a new display of the character is performed and the display of the displayed character ends.
The third display period is a period in which the display of the displayed character continues without a new display of the character.
In the first display period, the display of the character is started from a specific position so that the character advances from the back side to the front side on the screen.
At a timing related to the first start of the display of the character at the specific position, the pre-stage display (for example, the display of the pre-stage image by a light effect) that makes the display of the character at the specific position difficult to see is performed (for example). , Example shown in FIG. 162).

The "previous stage display" may be any display as long as it makes the display of the character difficult to see, and is a display that hides a specific position where the character appears (for example, a display of an effect image such as light or a pattern). Etc.). "Difficult to see" means a state in which the player cannot completely see the specific position, a state in which the player can see the specific position but the recognition is difficult, and a state in which the player can see the specific position but the character can see from the specific position. This includes a state in which the appearance cannot be visually recognized, and a state in which the player can visually recognize the specific position and the appearance of the character from the specific position can be visually recognized, but the visual recognition is difficult.

The "timing related to the first start of character display at a specific position" is the same timing as the first start of character display at a specific position, or the timing of first start of character display at a specific position. A timing within a predetermined period before and after (this predetermined period is a period during which the player thinks that the display of the character first starts at a specific position) is included.

As a result, in the group notice effect, the second display period in which the characters appear one after another and progress is longer than the first display period from the first start of the character display to the first end of the character display. By designing it to be long, it is possible to provide a suitable group notice effect. In addition, since the first character is displayed from a specific position that is difficult to see due to the display of the previous image, it is possible to display the character from the beginning with a certain size, and suddenly a large character is displayed. Does not cause the player.

(8-2) In the first display period, the character is enlarged and displayed so as to progress from the depth direction to the front direction on the screen.
The enlarged display makes it difficult to visually display the character at the specific position (example shown in FIG. 168).

As a result, it is possible to give a visual effect as if a plurality of characters appear one after another from a certain depth position.

(8-3) The character displayed last in the group effect is enlarged and displayed over a range extending from at least one end of the screen to the other end facing the one end (example shown in FIG. 166). ..

As a result, it is possible to suitably switch to the effect after the group notice effect by utilizing the image display of the last character.

(8-4) The background display displayed in the third display period is switched to the background display corresponding to the subsequent effect in conjunction with the movement of the character displayed last in the group effect (for example, FIG. 166). , Example shown in FIG. 167).

As a result, it is possible to suitably switch to the effect after the group notice effect by utilizing the image display of the last character.

(8-5) The character displayed last in the group effect is enlarged and displayed over a range extending from at least one end of the screen to the other end facing the one end.
On the back side of the character displayed last, other characters in the group effect are not displayed (for example, the example shown in FIG. 168).

As a result, even if a succeeding character image is placed in a position hidden by the first character, it cannot be visually recognized. Therefore, it is not necessary to place the succeeding character image, and a plurality of characters appear one after another from a position having a depth. It is possible to give a visual effect as if it appears.

(9-1) A gaming machine (for example, pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to the player based on the display result of the variable display becoming a specific display result.
Group effect execution means (for example, group advance notice execution process shown in FIG. 51, 6 shown in FIGS. 98 to 104) for executing a group effect (for example, group notice effect) for displaying an image in which a plurality of characters progress as a group. People group notice production) and
A sound output means (for example, speakers 8L, 8R) for outputting sound is provided.
The display period of the image in the group effect includes the first display period, the second display period, and the third display period (for example, the period shown in FIG. 63).
The first display period is a period from the start of the display of the first character in the group effect until the new display of the character is performed and the display of any of the characters ends first (for example, the figure). 98 (a23) to the period shown in FIG. 100 (a30)),
The second display period is a period longer than the first display period, and is a period in which a new display of the character is performed and the display of the displayed character is terminated (for example, FIG. 101 (a31) to the period shown in FIG. 102 (a36)),
The third display period is a period in which the display of the displayed character continues without displaying a new character (for example, FIGS. 103 (a37) to 104 (a42)). Period shown),
The sound output means starts the output of the effect sound corresponding to the group effect at a timing related to the start of the first display period, and the volume of the effect sound is set to the volume in the subsequent first display period. A specific volume higher than the predetermined volume is set, the volume of the effect sound is set to the specific volume even in the second display period, and the volume of the effect sound is set to a volume lower than the specific volume in the third display period. The production sound is output.

As a result, in the group notice effect, the second display period in which the characters appear one after another and progress is longer than the first display period from the first start of the character display to the first end of the character display. By designing it to be long, it is possible to provide a suitable group notice effect. In addition, by raising the volume to a specific volume during the first display period and maintaining the sound output at a specific volume even during the second display period, it is possible to excite the group notice production at a specific volume even before the second display period. It can improve the interest of the game.

The volume may be controlled so that the sound output means raises or lowers the volume, or the volume control of the sound output means is constant, but raising or lowering the volume is specified in the sound data referred to by the sound output means. This may increase or decrease the volume.

(9-2) The fade-in time from when the effect sound is output in the first display period until the volume of the effect sound rises to a specific volume starts to decrease in the volume of the effect sound in the third display period. It is shorter than the fade-out time from when the volume of the effect sound disappears (for example, the example shown in FIG. 63).

As a result, since the fade-in is performed in a short time and the fade-out is performed in a longer time than the fade-in, the sound of the group notice effect can be suitably output.

(10-1) A gaming machine (for example, pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to the player based on the display result of the variable display becoming a specific display result.
Group effect execution means (for example, group advance notice execution process shown in FIG. 51, 6 shown in FIGS. 98 to 104) for executing a group effect (for example, group notice effect) for displaying an image in which a plurality of characters progress as a group. People group notice production) and
It is equipped with a plurality of lighting means (for example, a game effect lamp 9 such as a frame lamp).
The display period of the image in the group effect includes the first display period, the second display period, and the third display period (for example, the period shown in FIG. 63).
The first display period is a period from the start of the display of the first character in the group effect until the new display of the character is performed and the display of any of the characters ends first (for example, the figure). 98 (a23) to the period shown in FIG. 100 (a30)),
The second display period is a period longer than the first display period, and is a period in which a new display of the character is performed and the display of the displayed character is terminated (for example, FIG. 101 (a31) to the period shown in FIG. 102 (a36)),
The third display period is a period in which the display of the displayed character continues without displaying a new character (for example, FIGS. 103 (a37) to 104 (a42)). Period shown),
The brightness data table composed of a plurality of brightness data for lighting each of the plurality of lighting means is a first brightness data table corresponding to the first display period (for example, a frame lamp shown in FIG. 68A). The grandchild table W1), the second brightness data table corresponding to the second display period (for example, the grandchild table W2 for the frame lamp shown in FIG. 68B), and the third brightness corresponding to the third display period. Including a data table (for example, a grandchild table W3 for a frame lamp shown in FIG. 68 (c)).
Each of the first brightness data table and the second brightness data table is a first brightness data in which data for lighting the lighting means with low brightness and data for lighting the lighting means with high brightness are combined. The combination of the data for lighting the lighting means with low brightness and the data for lighting the lighting means with high brightness is composed of the second brightness data different from the first brightness data (for example, FIG. Example of grandchild table for frame lamp shown in 68),
The second brightness data table is set to light more of the lighting means with higher brightness than the first brightness data table (for example, the frame lamp grandchild table W2 is a frame lamp grandchild table W1). High brightness (“0” to “F”) data is stored in more lamps).

As a result, in the group notice effect, the second display period in which the characters appear one after another and progress is longer than the first display period from the first start of the character display to the first end of the character display. By designing it to be long, it is possible to provide a suitable group notice effect. Further, a brightness data table corresponding to each display period is provided, and the second brightness data table is designed to light the lamp with higher brightness than the first brightness data table, so that the first display period In, weak footsteps when multiple characters appear can be expressed, and in the second display period, strong footsteps when multiple characters appear one after another can be expressed, and a more suitable group notice effect can be expressed to the player. Can be provided.

"Data for lighting the lighting means with low brightness" and "data for lighting the lighting means with high brightness" are a plurality of lighting units included in each lighting means (for example, RGB in the frame left lamp 9L1 and a panel). It is lighting data (lighting element) for each time in WWW in the upper lamp 9C. For example, in the example shown in FIG. 68A, the data (100) of the frame left lamp 9L1 (RGB) in T1-1. be. As the RGB data, the data corresponding to the extinguishing is "000", the data corresponding to the low-luminance lighting is "100", and the data corresponding to the high-luminance lighting is "F00".

The "brightness data" is lighting data for each time in each lighting means (for example, frame lamp, on-board lamp 9C), and is "data for lighting the lighting means with low brightness" or "high brightness of the lighting means". It is a collection of "data for lighting in" for each time. For example, in the example shown in FIG. 68A, it is the data of the frame left lamp 9L and the frame right lamp 9R in T1-1.

The luminance data table is a collection of "luminance data" in a predetermined period (for example, the lighting time specified by the parent table and the child table). For example, in the example shown in FIG. 68 (a), T1-1 to T1- It is the data of the frame left lamp 9L and the frame right lamp 9R in No. 11.

(10-2) The first luminance data table has a longer luminance data switching interval than the second luminance data table (for example, as shown in FIG. 67, the frame lamp grandchild table W1 is switched at 100 msec intervals. , The grandchild table W2 for the frame lamp is switched at intervals of 50 to 80 msec).

Thereby, in the second display period, it can be expressed that the character is running faster than in the first display period. Therefore, it is possible to provide a suitable group notice effect.

(10-3) In the first luminance data table, the luminance data switching intervals are evenly spaced, while in the second luminance data table, the luminance data switching intervals are not evenly spaced (for example, shown in FIG. 67). As described above, the frame lamp grandchild table W1 is switched at 100 msec intervals, and the frame lamp grandchild table W2 is switched at 50-80 msec intervals).

Thereby, in the second display period, it can be expressed that a plurality of characters are running out of step with each other as compared with the first display period. Therefore, it is possible to provide a suitable group notice effect.

(11-1) The first luminance data table includes luminance data for moving a lighting portion in the direction in which the character advances in the group effect (for example, as shown in FIG. 67, the frame lamp grandchild table W1 is a group. Lights up with high brightness according to the direction of travel of the notice),
The second luminance data table includes luminance data that does not move the lighting portion in the direction in which the character advances in the group effect (for example, as shown in FIG. 67, the frame lamp grandchild table W2 is high over a plurality of locations. Lights up with brightness).

As a result, it is possible to express how characters appear in the first display period and a plurality of characters appear one after another in the second display period. Therefore, it is possible to provide a suitable group notice effect.

(11-2) In the first brightness data table, the lighting means located in the vicinity of the character is lit with high brightness according to the progress position of the character first displayed in the group effect, and the character illuminates the lighting means. It includes brightness data for turning off the lighting means or lighting the lighting means located in the vicinity of a non-reachable portion with low brightness (for example, an example of the grandchild table W1 for a frame lamp shown in FIG. 68A).

As a result, the lamp lights up with high brightness as the character running at the beginning displayed first progresses, and the lamp turns off or lights up with low brightness at the place where it has not reached yet, so the lamp is turned on. It can be used to express how the leading character progresses. Therefore, it is possible to provide a suitable group notice effect.

(11-3) The first brightness data table turns on the lighting means with high brightness, and then turns off the lighting means or lights with low brightness as the character first displayed in the group effect progresses. It includes luminance data (for example, an example of a grandchild table W1 for a frame lamp shown in FIG. 68A).

As a result, the lamp lights up with high brightness as the character running at the beginning displayed first progresses, and the lamp turns off or lights up with low brightness in places that have not yet reached or have already passed. , It is possible to express how the leading character progresses by using the lighting of the lamp. Therefore, it is possible to provide a suitable group notice effect.

(11-4) The first luminance data table includes luminance data for lighting the lighting means with high luminance and then lighting the lighting means located in the direction in which the character advances in the group effect with high luminance. (For example, an example of the grandchild table W1 for the frame lamp shown in FIG. 68A),
The second brightness data table includes brightness data that lights the lighting means with high brightness and then does not light the lighting means located in the direction in which the character advances in the group effect with high brightness (for example, FIG. 68). Example of grandchild table W2 for frame lamp shown in (b)).

As a result, in the first display period, the lamp lights up with high brightness as the character running at the beginning displayed first progresses, and the lamps turn off at places that have not yet reached or have already passed. Alternatively, since it is lit with low brightness, it is possible to express how the leading character progresses by using the lighting of the lamp. Further, in the second display period, it is possible to express how a plurality of characters progress one after another. Therefore, it is possible to provide a suitable group notice effect.

(11-5) The first luminance data table includes luminance data for lighting the lighting means with high brightness and extinguishing the lighting means adjacent to the lighting means (for example, the frame shown in FIG. 68A). Example of grandchild table W1 for lamp),
The second brightness data table includes brightness data for lighting the lighting means with high brightness and lighting the lighting means adjacent to the lighting means (for example, the grandchild table W2 for a frame lamp shown in FIG. 68B). Example).

As a result, in the first display period, the lamp lights up with high brightness as the character running at the beginning displayed first progresses, and the lamps turn off at places that have not yet reached or have already passed. Alternatively, since it is lit with low brightness, it is possible to express how the leading character progresses by using the lighting of the lamp. Further, in the second display period, it is possible to express how a plurality of characters progress one after another. Therefore, it is possible to provide a suitable group notice effect.

(12-1) The third luminance data table includes luminance data for increasing the number of the lighting means to be turned off according to the progress of the character in the group production (for example, as shown in FIG. 67, a grandchild for a frame lamp). The table W3 is turned off or turned on with low brightness according to the traveling direction of the group notice).

As a result, in the third display period, the lamp is turned off or turned on with low brightness as the character progresses, so that it is possible to express how the character progresses by using the turning off or on of the lamp. Therefore, it is possible to provide a suitable group notice effect.

(12-3) In the third luminance data table, the switching interval of the luminance data in the lighting means arranged in the frame of the gaming machine located in the direction in which the character advances in the group effect is the character in the group effect. It is shorter than the switching interval of the luminance data in the lighting means arranged in the frame of the game machine located in the direction opposite to the traveling direction (for example, as shown in FIG. 67, the switching interval of the frame left lamp 9L is 10 msec. The switching interval of the frame right lamp 9R is 80 msec).

Thereby, in the third display period, it is possible to express how the character progresses from the right side to the left side of the pachinko gaming machine 1 and disappears. Therefore, it is possible to provide a suitable group notice effect.

(13-1) In the first luminance data table, the control of the lighting means starts at a timing related to the start of the first display period, and the control of the lighting means ends during the first display period.
In the second brightness data table, the control of the lighting means is started during the first display period, the control of the lighting means is continued even during the second display period, and the lighting is performed during the third display period. The control of the means is finished,
The third brightness data table starts controlling the lighting means during the third display period (for example, an example of the group warning brightness data table shown in FIG. 89).

As a result, the lamp lights up from the middle of the first display period with high brightness as in the second display period. Therefore, the state in which the character progresses before the second display period is excitedly expressed by the lighting of the lamp. Can be done. Therefore, it is possible to provide a suitable group notice effect.

(13-2) In the second luminance data table, the control period of the lighting means is set longer than that of the first luminance data table and the third luminance data table.
The first luminance data table is set to have a longer control period of the lighting means than the third luminance data table (for example, an example of the group advance luminance data table shown in FIG. 89).

As a result, it is possible to express the appearance of a plurality of characters one after another in the first display period with an appropriate length. Therefore, it is possible to provide a suitable group notice effect.

(14-1) The luminance data first defined in the first luminance data table is the luminance data for turning off or lighting the plurality of lighting means used in the group effect with low luminance (for example, FIG. 67). As shown, in the frame lamp grandchild table W1, the first luminance data is turned off or turned on at low luminance for all the lamps).

This is more preferable because the lamp lights up when the group notice effect is executed after a break is made without mixing with the lighting of the lamp that was performed before the group notice effect was executed. A group notice production can be provided.

(14-2) The luminance data first defined in each of the second luminance data table and the third luminance data table is the luminance that does not turn off or light the plurality of the lighting means used in the group production with low luminance. This is data (for example, as shown in FIG. 67, in the frame lamp grandchild tables W2 and W3, the lamp lights up with high luminance for the first luminance data).

As a result, when the characters are progressing one after another after the group notice effect is executed, the player emphasizes the flow of the effect and performs the group notice effect without separating by turning off all the lamps and turning on the low brightness. Can be shown to. Therefore, it is possible to provide a suitable group notice effect.

(14-3) The last defined luminance data in the third luminance data table is the luminance data for turning off or lighting the plurality of lighting means used in the group effect with low luminance (for example, FIG. 67). As shown, in the frame lamp grandchild table W3, the last luminance data is turned off or turned on at low luminance for all the lamps).

As a result, when the group notice effect is finished, the player can be made to recognize that the group notice effect is finished by turning off all the lamps or turning them on with low brightness. Therefore, it is possible to provide a suitable group notice effect.

(15-1) The first luminance data table is designed not to repeat the luminance data of the same control content, while the second luminance data table is designed to repeat the luminance data of the same control content. (For example, as shown in FIG. 67, the luminance data is not specified so that the same luminance data is repeatedly used in the frame lamp grandchild table W1, and the same luminance data is repeatedly used in the frame lamp grandchild table W2. Luminance data is specified as such).

As a result, the data capacity of the luminance data in the second display period set for a long time can be reduced. Therefore, it is possible to provide a suitable group notice effect.

(15-2) The third luminance data table is designed so as not to repeat the luminance data of the same control content (for example, as shown in FIG. 67, the same luminance data is used in the frame lamp grandchild table W3. Luminance data is not specified for repeated use).

As a result, with respect to the luminance data in the third display period, which is set not longer than the second display period, the degree of freedom in design is increased by defining the luminance data as it is. Therefore, it is possible to provide a suitable group notice effect.

(16-1) The first luminance data table is designed not to repeat the luminance data of the same control content, while the second luminance data table is designed to repeat the luminance data of the same control content. (For example, as shown in FIG. 67, the luminance data is not specified so that the same luminance data is repeatedly used in the frame lamp grandchild table W1, and the same luminance data is repeatedly used in the frame lamp grandchild table W2. Luminance data is specified),
In the first brightness data table, the brightness data for defect countermeasures is specified last, while in the second brightness data table, the brightness data for defect countermeasures is not specified last (for example,). As shown in FIG. 67, the frame lamp grandchild table W1 defines the 10-minute data for defect countermeasures, and the frame lamp grandchild table W2 does not specify the 10-minute data for defect countermeasures).

As a result, the data capacity of the luminance data in the second display period set for a long time can be reduced. On the other hand, for the luminance data in the first display period, the luminance data is specified as it is, but instead, the 10-minute data for defect countermeasures is specified, so that the defect countermeasures are taken during the 10 minutes. be able to. Therefore, it is possible to provide a suitable group notice effect.

(16-2) The luminance data for troubleshooting is the luminance data in which the longest time is defined among the luminance data constituting the first luminance data table, and is from the beginning of the first luminance data table. It is the luminance data for preventing the lighting means from being controlled (for example, as shown in FIG. 67, the frame lamp grandchild table W1 defines the 10-minute data for defect countermeasures).

As a result, it is possible to prevent the lighting control of the lamp from the beginning of the first luminance data table by the 10-minute data for defect countermeasures, so that a suitable group notice effect can be provided.

(16-3) The luminance data for the defect countermeasure is the luminance data for regularly lighting the adjacent lighting means in order (for example, as shown in FIG. 68 (a), for the defect countermeasure for 10 minutes. The brightness data of is the brightness data in which adjacent frame lamps are regularly turned on in order so that the lighting location is deviated from the previous state).

As a result, even if a problem occurs, the adjacent frame lamps are regularly lit in order so that the lighting location deviates from the previous state, so that it is possible to prevent the appearance from being deteriorated, which is preferable. A group notice production can be provided.

(17-1) The lighting means includes a single-color lighting means (for example, on-board lamps 9C6 to 9C8) that lights in a single color, and a multi-color lighting means (for example, on-board lamps 9C1 to 9C5, 9C9) that lights in a plurality of colors. Including ~ 9C13)
The luminance data for lighting the monochromatic lighting means with a specific high brightness includes a specific value (for example, “6”) as a value corresponding to the specific high brightness lighting.
The luminance data for lighting the plurality of color lighting means with the specific high brightness includes a value larger than the specific value (for example, “8” to “F”) as a value corresponding to the specific high brightness lighting.

As a result, it is possible to adjust the variation in light between the lamps lit with high brightness by making the value corresponding to the lighting with high brightness appropriate according to the type of light emitting means, and it is possible to produce a suitable group notice. Can be provided.

(17-2) The single-color lighting means includes a first-color lighting means that lights in the first color (for example, on-board lamps 9C6 to 9C8) and a second-color lighting means that lights in the second color (for example, the left side of the board). Including lamps 9B1-9B5)
Regardless of the luminance data for lighting any of the first color lighting means and the second color lighting means at the specific high brightness, the specific value (for example, "for example," 6 ") is included.

As a result, it is possible to adjust the variation in light even between the lamps that are lit in the same single color, and it is possible to provide a suitable group notice effect.

(18-1) Both the first luminance data table and the second luminance data table include different luminance data for each of the lighting means provided on the left and right sides of the gaming machine (for example, FIG. 68). Grandchild table for frame lamp shown in),
The luminance data table used in the advance notice effect, which is different from the group effect and foretells that the display result of the variable display will be the specific display result, is the lighting means provided on the left and right sides of the game machine. Each contains common luminance data (eg, grandchild table for frame lamps shown in FIG. 75).

As a result, in the group notice effect, by individually controlling the lighting of the frame left lamp 9L and the frame right lamp 9R, a more detailed lighting mode can be realized, and a suitable group notice effect can be provided. can.

(19-1) The group effect interrupts during execution of a notice effect (for example, a reach line effect) that is different from the group effect and foretells that the display result of the variable display will be the specific display result. May be executed in
Even when the group effect is interrupted and executed, the lighting means continues to light according to the luminance data table corresponding to the advance notice effect (for example, the example shown in FIGS. 175 and 176).
The lighting means used in the group effect is the same as the lighting means used in the notice effect, or includes the lighting means used in the notice effect and the lighting means not used in the notice effect. (For example, as shown in FIG. 74, in the reach line effect, there is a period in which the on-board lamp and the attacker lamp, which are always used in the group notice effect, are not used).

As a result, even when the group notice effect is executed by interrupting another notice effect, since the common lamp is lit, the effect by lighting can be realized without discomfort, and a suitable group notice effect is provided. be able to. For example, when the group notice effect is executed by interrupting another notice effect, the lighting of the lamp in the group notice effect and the lighting of the lamp in the other notice effect are mixed, but the lamps that are lit by both are assumed. If they are different from each other, many lamps will be lit in a complicated manner, which may make the player look unattractive and give the player a sense of discomfort. In this respect, if the lighting of the lamps in the group notice effect and the lighting of the lamps in the other notice effects are made common, it is possible to prevent a large number of lamps from being complicatedly turned on.

(19-2) The advance notice effect is terminated during the execution of the group effect, and a predetermined effect (for example, a symbol feed effect) different from the advance notice effect is executed (for example, FIGS. 175 and 176). Example),
The lighting means used in the group effect is the same as the lighting means used in the predetermined effect, or includes the lighting means used in the predetermined effect and the lighting means not used in the predetermined effect. (For example, the example shown in FIGS. 175 and 176).

As a result, even if the group is switched to another effect during the group notice effect, the common lamp is lit, so that the effect of lighting can be realized without discomfort, and a suitable group notice effect can be provided. ..

(19-3) The group production is executed with a predetermined execution probability of less than 100% (for example, the group notice lottery shown in FIG. 34).

As a result, whether or not the group notice effect is executed by lottery regardless of other effects can be determined, so that the processing burden related to the execution of the group notice effect can be reduced, and a suitable group notice effect can be provided. ..

(20-1) The lighting means includes a specific lighting means (for example, V lamp 9G) located at a position related to the direction in which the character travels in the group effect.
The specific lighting means can be lit when it is controlled to the advantageous state, and does not light when it is not controlled to the advantageous state (for example, the V lamp 9G is a round in a jackpot gaming state in which a V prize can be generated. Lights up to notify you that you are inside or that a V prize has occurred),
The first luminance data table and the second luminance data table do not include luminance data for lighting the specific lighting means (for example, an example of the luminance data table shown in FIG. 67).

As a result, the lamp at the position related to the direction in which the character advances in the group notice effect is turned on during the group notice effect, which causes the player to misunderstand whether the lamp is controlled to an advantageous state such as a big hit. It is possible to prevent it from being stored. Therefore, it is possible to provide a suitable group notice effect.

(20-2) The lighting means includes specific lighting means (for example, stick controller lamp 9J, trigger button lamp 9K) located at a position related to the direction in which the character travels in the group effect.
The specific lighting means indicates to the player that the operation of the operating means is effective by lighting (for example, the stick controller lamp 9J lights and triggers to prompt the operation of pulling the stick controller 31A. The button lamp 9K lights up to prompt the operation of pressing the push button 31B),
The first luminance data table and the second luminance data table do not include luminance data for lighting the specific lighting means (for example, an example of the luminance data table shown in FIG. 67).

As a result, the lamp at the position related to the direction in which the character advances in the group notice effect is turned on during the group notice effect, which makes the player misunderstand whether the operation of the operating means is being promoted. Can be prevented. Therefore, it is possible to provide a suitable group notice effect.

[Modification example]
A modified example of the pachinko gaming machine 1 described above will be described.

(About the display period of the group notice production)
In the present embodiment, the third display period is longer than the first display period, but the first display period may be longer than the third display period.

As a result, by making the character that first appeared in the first display period appear longer, it is possible to make it easier to pay attention to the fact that the group notice effect suggesting a big hit has been executed.

(About the execution timing of the group notice production)
In the present embodiment, in the case of a variable pattern in which the variable display result is a lost display result, the group notice effect is executed in the latter half of the variable display time with a probability of 100%, but this is not limited to this. No. For example, in the case of a variable pattern in which the result of the variable display is a lost display result, even if the group notice effect is executed with a higher probability in the latter half of the variable display time than in the first half of the variable display time. good.

Further, in the present embodiment, in the case of a fluctuation pattern in which the result of the variable display is the hit display result, the group notice effect is executed in the first half of the variable display time with a probability of 100%. Not limited to. For example, in the case of a variable pattern in which the result of the variable display is a hit display result, even if the group notice effect is executed with a higher probability in the first half of the variable display time than in the latter half of the variable display time. good.

(About the characters that appear in the group notice production)
In the present embodiment, the main character, Maid A (Yumemu-chan), appears as the first (first) character in the first display period, but the character that appears most often in the second display period is the main character, Maid A. (Yumemu-chan) may be.

As a result, the character of the main character can be frequently shown to the player in the longest second display period, and the interest of the game can be improved.

Further, the character displayed first in the first display period may be a premier character.

As a result, the premier character can be shown to the player first in the first first display period, and the group notice effect can be made to have an impact. If the character displayed first in the first display period is a premier character, the jackpot may be fixed. Further, in this case, the lighting pattern of each lamp such as the frame lamp may be a pattern including rainbow (seven colors).

The premier character may be the character with the lowest appearance rate among all the states and effects, or may be a character that does not appear except for the group notice effect. In addition, the premier character may be a character that suggests that the expectation of a big hit is higher by appearing than other characters.

(About lighting control in group notice production)
In the present embodiment, the luminance data is defined as shown in the frame lamp grandchild table shown in FIG. 68, but the luminance data may be defined as follows. That is, it includes the first specific brightness data that combines the data for lighting the lighting means with low brightness and the data for lighting the lighting means with high brightness, and the data for lighting the lighting means with low brightness. There is a second specific brightness data that does not include data for lighting the lighting means with high brightness, the first specific lighting data is not used in the first brightness data table, and the second brightness data table is the second. Specific lighting data may be used.

In this way, since the data to be lit with high brightness is not specified in the first display period, it is possible to express how a plurality of characters are approaching by illuminating the lamp with low brightness. Since the data that lights up with high brightness is defined in the display period, it is possible to express how a plurality of characters are progressing one after another.

Further, the third luminance data table may include luminance data for turning off all the lighting means that were lit in the second luminance data table.

In this way, it is possible to express how the character progresses and disappears in the third display period by turning off the lamp.

Further, the lighting means includes a specific lighting means at a position related to the direction in which the character travels in the group effect.
A specific member capable of transmitting light is arranged on the front side of the specific lighting means.
When the specific lighting means is lit, the color visually recognized through the specific member becomes a specific color.
The first luminance data table and the second luminance data table include luminance data for lighting the lighting means in a color different from the specific color.
The first luminance data table and the second luminance data table may not include the luminance data for lighting the specific lighting means.

In this way, the lamp at the position related to the direction in which the character advances in the group notice effect is turned on during the group notice effect, and the lamp is lit through the transparent specific member located on the front side of the lamp. It is possible to prevent the color to be visually recognized from interfering with the color of the group notice effect by becoming a specific color that is not used in the group notice effect. Therefore, it is possible to provide a suitable group notice effect.

(About the video data of the group notice production)
In the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 56, moving image data in which the character to be operated and the operation content (operation pattern) of the character are associated with each other in advance is created at the design stage, and the moving image data Was stored in the RAM 122 or the ROM 121. Then, in the pachinko gaming machine 1, the effect control CPU 120 reproduces the moving image data stored in the RAM 122 or the ROM 121 when the execution timing of the group notice effect is reached, based on the variation pattern command received from the CPU 103. It was. However, the moving image of the group notice effect may be reproduced by a method different from the above.

For example, the data of the character to be operated and the data indicating the operation content (operation pattern) may be stored in the RAM 122 or the ROM 121 as separate data. Then, in the pachinko gaming machine 1, the effect control CPU 120 obtains character data and operation patterns stored in the RAM 122 or ROM 121 when the execution timing of the group notice effect is reached, based on the variation pattern command received from the CPU 103. It is also possible to select each of the indicated data, create moving image data by combining both, and reproduce the created moving image data.

More specifically, in the RAM 122 or the ROM 121, a plurality of data in which each of the character A, the character B, and the character C runs or walks is stored in the storage area 1, and an arbitrary plurality of data whose characters are not determined are not determined. It suffices to store the moving image data showing a plurality of operation patterns related to the group advance notice effect in the storage area 2, and the effect control CPU 120 stores the character from the storage area 1 when the execution timing of the group advance notice effect is reached. The moving image data related to the group notice effect may be extracted from the storage area 2 and combined to create one group notice effect moving image data, and the created moving image data may be reproduced.

(When the group notice production and other notice production overlap)
In the present embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 160 and 173, when the execution period of the group notice effect and the execution period of the other notice effect overlap, the display area of the image in the group notice effect is in the other notice effect. An image larger than the display area of the image, and the display of the image in the group notice effect has priority over the display of the image in the other notice effect (for example, the layer of the image display in the group notice effect is the image in the other notice effect. It was on the front side of the display layer). However, it is not limited to this. For example, when the execution period of the group notice effect and the execution period of another notice effect overlap, the display area of the image in the other notice effect is larger than the display area of the image in the group notice effect, and the image in the other notice effect. May be prioritized over the display of the image in the group notice effect (for example, the layer of the image display in the other notice effect is on the front side of the layer of the image display in the group notice effect). Alternatively, when the execution period of the group notice effect and the execution period of another notice effect overlap, the display area of the image in the group notice effect is larger than the display area of the image in the other notice effect, and the image in the other notice effect. May be prioritized over the display of the image in the group notice effect (for example, the layer of the image display in the other notice effect is on the front side of the layer of the image display in the group notice effect). Further, when the execution period of the group notice effect and the execution period of another notice effect overlap, the display area of the image in the other notice effect is larger than the display area of the image in the group notice effect, and the image in the group notice effect is displayed. The display may take precedence over the display of the image in the other advance notice effect (for example, the layer of the image display in the group advance notice effect is on the front side of the layer of the image display in the other advance notice effect). When the display area of the image in the other advance notice effect is larger than the display area of the image in the group advance notice effect, for example, the advance notice image that the player pays attention to, such as an image suggesting a big hit, depends on the image in the group advance notice effect. Although hidden, images located around the preview image (for example, an image showing a flame, an aura, etc. surrounding the preview image) include those that can be visually recognized without being hidden by the image in the group preview effect.

(Example of time saving control that does not go through hit)
Next, an example of executing the time saving control that does not go through the hit (big hit, small hit, etc.) as the time saving state will be described.
(Example of time saving control using time saving symbol)

(A1) In each of the above-mentioned feature parts and modified examples, the transition to the time saving state (high base state) always shifts via the big hit state or the small hit state in which the special variable winning ball device 7A operates. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, when a time-saving symbol is derived and displayed as a special symbol, the time-saving state (high base) without operating the special variable winning ball device 7A. It may be made to shift to the state). That is, as the time saving state, the time saving control that does not go through a hit (big hit, small hit, etc.) may be executed.

(A2) As the above-mentioned time-saving symbols, these time-saving symbols may be a part of the lost symbol or a part of the small hit symbol.

(A3) Further, when performing a lottery process related to the derivation display of the time-saving symbol, the lottery may be executed by using a dedicated random number for the time-saving symbol lottery in these lottery processes, or the lottery random number of the lost symbol. Or, a lottery random number of a big hit symbol, a lottery random number of a small hit symbol, a random number for determining a big hit lottery, a lottery random number of a fall lottery, or other random numbers for performing a lottery may be used for the lottery.

(A4) Further, these time-saving symbols may be a plurality of types of symbols, and may be used in combination with other symbols such as a small hit symbol or a combination of symbols displayed as a lost symbol. In this case, it may be determined whether or not the time saving state is changed depending on the small hit symbol used together. However, if a time-saving symbol is won, the presence or absence of a transition to the time-saving state will not be drawn by lottery, and the number of time-savings will not be drawn.

(A5) Further, in the case of drawing a time-saving symbol and the set value can be changed, the lottery probability of the time-saving symbol does not change according to the set value, that is, the time-saving symbol is used for all the set values. Although the lottery probabilities of the above are the same, the lottery probabilities of these time-saving symbols may be different between the first special figure and the second special figure.

(A6) Regarding the timing of random number acquisition when drawing a lottery for time-saving symbols, the start port (first start) regardless of whether a dedicated random number is used or another random number is used. It may be at the time of winning a prize (the winning opening, the second starting winning opening).

(A7) Regarding the winning when the time-saving symbol is drawn, when using a dedicated random number (time-saving lottery random number), the lottery result by the dedicated random number (time-saving lottery random number) is used as the winning value, and the time-saving symbol is drawn. When a small hit symbol random number is used, a specific small hit symbol random number can be used as the winning value, and when a random number for the fall lottery judgment value is used for the lottery of the time saving symbol, the random number for the fall lottery judgment value can be used as the winning value. , A lottery using a structure, for example, a time saving area may be provided inside the special variable winning ball device 7A, and the time saving symbol may be won when the game ball passes through the time saving area.

(A8) In the case where the lottery of the time saving symbol is performed using the structure, when the small hit symbol is used together with the time saving symbol, the variable display number (time saving number) of the time saving state is determined by the presence or absence of passing through the time saving area. Make sure it doesn't change.

(A9) Regarding the winning when the time-saving symbol lottery is performed, when the lost symbol random number is used for the time-saving symbol lottery, the specific lost symbol random number value is used as the winning value, and the jackpot symbol random number is used for the time-saving symbol lottery. In that case, a specific jackpot symbol random number value can be used as the winning value. However, when these random values are used as winning values, the performance other than the jackpot probability differs depending on the setting, so that the set value can be changed only if it cannot be changed.

(A10) Further, the determination timing of the lottery result of the time-saving symbol may be executed at the timing after the jackpot determination. In addition, the lottery of the time saving symbol is not executed in the time saving state (high base) or the high probability time regardless of the random number value used for the lottery, and is executed only in the low probability low base state. .. However, if the time saving symbol is derived and displayed in the state where the time saving state has already been set, even if the number of time saving times is reset or the lottery is not performed, it may be determined for each gaming machine.

(A11) Further, regarding the number of time reductions when the time reduction symbol is derived and displayed, it is possible to have a plurality of predetermined number of time reductions according to the winning value (symbol) and the game state. In addition, it is possible to make the conditions for granting the time reduction different for each time saving symbol.

(A12) Further, when the number of time reductions differs depending on the time reduction symbol, the time reduction symbol distribution lottery can be changed between the special figure 1 and the special figure 2.

(A13) Further, even when the same time saving symbol is derived and displayed, the number of time saving times given may be different depending on the game state at that time. However, it is necessary that the game state is predetermined.

(A14) Further, the lottery result of "0 times of time saving" can be included as the lottery result of the time saving symbol in the low probability low base state.

(A15) In addition, the derivation lottery for the time-saving end symbol (time-saving end lottery) is executed, and the number of time reductions is set to the number of times until the time-saving end symbol is derived and displayed after the time reduction starts, or until the jackpot symbol is derived and displayed. good. That is, in principle, the number of time reductions may not be set and may be unlimited.

(A16) Further, the number of time reductions and the granting condition may be different between the time reduction state controlled by the time reduction symbol and the time reduction state controlled by the occurrence of a big hit.

(A17) Further, when the time-saving symbol is derived and displayed, the timing of being controlled to the time-saving state is the time when the symbol confirmation time of the time-saving symbol has elapsed. However, in the case where the small hit symbol random number is used for the lottery of the time saving symbol, when the small hit is won and the time saving state is entered, the end time of the small hit operation is controlled to the time saving state.

(A18) Further, in the case of a lottery using the structure, the timing controlled to the time saving state is the timing at the end of the operation of the structure in the gaming state (for example, the small hit state) in which the structure is operated.

(A19) Further, in the case of a gaming machine (so-called specified number of probability change machines (ST machines)) that is controlled to a high probability low base state over a predetermined variable display number after a big hit, a high probability at the time of opening the game hall. It is a low-base state, and the high-probability low-base state may be controlled to a time-saving state after the variable display of a predetermined number of times is executed and ended.

(A20) Further, when the time saving limiter function is installed and the time saving symbol is derived and displayed, the number of times of the time saving limiter is updated.

(A21) Further, the symbol confirmation time of the time-saving symbol may be set to a time different from the symbol confirmation time of other symbols.

(Other examples of time saving control using time saving symbols)
As another time saving control using the time saving symbol, the control described below may be executed.

(B1) Game control is performed to shift from the normal state to the time saving state (special state) based on the variable display result (special display result) of the time saving symbol being displayed in the special symbol in the normal state, and the special symbol is performed in the time saving state. Based on the variable display result of the time saving symbol being displayed in, the game control for further shifting from the time saving state to the same time saving state is not performed (even if the time saving symbol is displayed, the time saving state is overwritten (time saving state). (I do not control the switching of the game state). Then, different effects may be produced when the variable display result of the time-saving symbol is displayed in the special symbol in the normal state and when the variable display result of the time-saving symbol is displayed in the special symbol in the time-saving state (decorative symbol). In the normal state, a special symbol is displayed as a time-saving symbol, and in the time-saving state, a general lost symbol is displayed, etc.). As a result, it is possible to perform suitable control according to the state when the variable display result of the time-saving symbol is displayed (for example, the effect is improved by executing the effect according to the presence or absence of the transition of the state).

(B2) In the gaming machine that controls (B1), when the display result of the special symbol is the time-saving symbol, the special symbol displays the common time-saving symbol in the normal state and the time-saving state, and the decorative symbol is in the normal state. It is also possible to display different symbols in the time-saving state as the display result (for example, the decorative symbol displays a special symbol corresponding to the time-saving symbol in the normal state, but simply displays a lost symbol in the time-saving state, and the time is shortened. Do not display the symbol corresponding to the symbol). As a result, the display result of the decorative pattern in the time-saving state does not give the player a feeling of loss, and it is possible to suppress a decrease in the interest of the game.

(B3) In the gaming machine that controls (B1), in the normal state, an effect suggesting whether or not the display result of the decorative symbol becomes a special symbol (time saving symbol) is executed, but in the time saving state, the decorative symbol is executed. It is also possible not to execute the effect suggesting whether or not the display result of is a special symbol (time saving symbol). As a result, it is possible to suppress a decrease in the interest of the game without causing the player to feel that the decorative pattern is displayed as a result of the effect in the time-saving state.

(B4) In the gaming machine that controls (B1), the fixed display time of the decorative symbol (the time for displaying the fixed surface result and then maintaining the display state) differs between the normal state and the time saving state. You may control it. As a result, it is possible to suppress a decrease in the interest of the game without causing the player to feel that the decorative pattern is produced in a time-saving state.

(B5) After performing the first variable display by the first special symbol and after performing the second variable display by the second special symbol, it is possible to control to an advantageous state which is advantageous for the player, and it is a normal state. In, game control is performed to shift from the normal state to the time saving state (special state) based on the variable display result (special display result) of the time saving symbol being displayed in the special symbol, and the time saving symbol is changed by the special symbol in the time saving state. Based on the display result, the game is not controlled to shift from the time saving state to the same time saving state (even if the time saving symbol is displayed, the time saving state is overwritten (so that the time saving state occurs again). N) The switching control of the gaming state may not be performed). Then, the second variable display has a higher ratio of displaying the variable display result of the time saving symbol than the first variable display, and the information related to the variable display is stored as the hold storage information, and the hold storage is performed when the time saving state ends. It is possible to execute different effects depending on whether or not the information is stored (when shifting to time saving control, it is possible to specify that the time saving continuous display is performed, and when shifting to time saving control, the time saving control is not executed. (Display effect, etc.), right-handed game is played in response to right-handed notification (notification to instruct right-handed) during the time-saving state, and variable display based on the hold storage information stored when the time-saving state ends is displayed. Until all is done. Left-handed notification (notification instructing left-handed) may not be given. As a result, it is possible to perform suitable control according to the state when the variable display result of the time-saving symbol is displayed (for example, the effect is improved by executing the effect according to the presence or absence of the transition of the state).

(B6) After performing the first variable display by the first special symbol and after performing the second variable display by the second special symbol, it is possible to control to an advantageous state which is advantageous for the player, and it is a normal state. In, game control is performed to shift from the normal state to the time saving state (special state) based on the variable display result (special display result) of the time saving symbol being displayed in the special symbol, and the time saving symbol is changed by the special symbol in the time saving state. Based on the display result, the game is not controlled to shift from the time saving state to the same time saving state (even if the time saving symbol is displayed, the time saving state is overwritten (so that the time saving state occurs again). N) The switching control of the gaming state may not be performed). Then, the second variable display has a higher ratio of displaying the variable display result of the time saving symbol than the first variable display, and the information related to the variable display is stored as the hold storage information, and the hold storage is performed when the time saving state ends. It is possible to execute different effects depending on whether or not the information is stored (when shifting to time saving control, it is possible to specify that the time saving continuous display is performed, and when shifting to time saving control, the time saving control is not executed. During the time saving state, the right-handed game is played in response to the right-handed notification, and until all the variable display based on the remaining hold storage information stored when the time-saving state ends is completed. Left-handed notification (notification instructing left-handed) may not be given. As a result, it is possible to perform suitable control according to the state when the variable display result of the time-saving symbol is displayed (for example, the effect is improved by executing the effect according to the presence or absence of the transition of the state).

(B7) Left-handed notification is executed in the variable display (first variable display) that is executed after the variable display (second variable display) based on the remaining hold storage information stored when the time saving state ends is completed. You may. As a result, since the instruction of how to hit is given appropriately, the game can proceed smoothly, and the interest of the game can be improved.

(B8) When the display result of the time saving symbol is displayed in the variable display (second variable display) based on the remaining hold storage information stored when the time saving state ends, and the variable display based on the remaining hold storage information The notification mode of the right-handed notification to be executed according to the hit (small hit, big hit) in the variable display (first variable display) in the normal state other than when it is executed It may be different. As a result, it is possible to suppress a decrease in the interest of the game without causing the player to feel a loss due to the display result of the decorative pattern due to the effect of the notification mode of the right-handed notification.

(B9) In the remaining hold storage information stored when the time saving state ends, a common effect is obtained when there is holding storage information in which the display result of the time saving symbol is displayed and when there is no holding storage information. It is possible to execute different effects after executing (For example, when there is hold memory information in which the display result of the time saving symbol is displayed in the fourth hold memory information out of the four remaining hold memories, the third hold memory A common effect that suggests whether or not to return to the time saving state is executed until the variable display based on the information, and a time saving state return effect different from the common effect is executed in the variable display based on the fourth reserved memory information. It may be possible). As a result, it is possible to suppress a decrease in the interest of the game without causing the player to feel a loss due to the display result of the decorative pattern due to the effect of the notification mode of the right-handed notification.

(B10) The effect at the time of transition to the time saving state based on the display result of the variable display (second variable display) stored based on the remaining holding storage information stored when the time saving state ends, and the variable display based on the remaining holding storage information The notification mode of the right-handed notification to be executed differs depending on the effect at the time of transition to the time saving state based on the display result of the variable display (first variable display) in the normal state other than when it is executed. You may do so. As a result, the production changes according to the game state, so that the game entertainment can be improved.

(B11) Confirmation display time of display result in variable display (second variable display) based on remaining hold storage information stored when the time saving state ends (the display state is maintained after the confirmed surface result is displayed. The fixed display time of the display result in the variable display (first variable display) in the normal state other than when the variable display based on the remaining hold storage information is executed may be common. Thereby, the increase of the control data can be suppressed.

(B12) During the period when the variable display (second variable display) based on the remaining hold storage information stored when the time saving state ends is executed, the right-handed notification is not executed and the variable display is based on the remaining hold storage information. When the display result of the time saving symbol is displayed in the display, the right-handed notification may be executed during the initial period when the next variable display is started. As a result, since the instruction of how to hit is given appropriately, the game can proceed smoothly, and the interest of the game can be improved.

(B13) Based on the fact that the variable display result (special display result) of the time saving symbol is displayed in the special symbol in the normal state, the game control for shifting from the normal state to the time saving state (special state) is performed, and the variable display result is small. It is possible to execute a common specific effect (reach effect, notice effect) depending on whether it is a hit symbol (specific display result) such as a hit symbol or a big hit symbol or a time-saving symbol (special display result). The ratio of the time saving symbol (special display result) may be different depending on which common specific effect is executed among the common specific effects provided. Then, when the display result of the time saving symbol is displayed in the variable display, the right-handed notification may be executed during the initial period of the start of the next variable display. As a result, it is possible to suitably control the effect according to the game state when the time saving symbol (special display result) is displayed.

(B14) After executing the common specific effect, the display result may be a hit symbol (specific display result) or a time-saving symbol (special display result). As a result, the variation of the effect result of the variable display is enriched, and the fun of the game can be improved.

(B15) The CPU 103 for game control has a common variation pattern depending on whether it is a hit symbol (specific display result), a time-saving symbol (special display result), or a lost symbol (predetermined display result). Is selectable, and even when the effect control CPU 120 receives a command for specifying the same fluctuation pattern from the game control CPU 103, different effects are produced in the variable display according to the type of the symbol specification command for specifying the display result. May be made feasible. As a result, the variation of the variable display effect is enriched, and the fun of the game can be improved.

(B16) After executing the common specific effect, it is possible to execute a special effect that can be executed when a time saving symbol (special display result) is obtained. As a result, the interest of the game can be improved by the special effect after the execution of the common specific effect.

(B17) Depending on the type of the common specific effect, a special effect that can be executed when the time saving symbol (special display result) is obtained may or may not be executed (for example, a plurality of types). Of the super reach productions in the above, when performing the production with the highest expectation, the special production is not executed, etc.). As a result, it is possible to improve the interest of the game because the expected feeling of hitting is maintained without executing the effect of inciting only the time saving state excessively.

(B18) Depending on the type of the common specific effect, the degree of expectation (ratio) of the time saving symbol (special display result) when the special effect is executed may be different. As a result, it is possible to improve the interest of the game because the expected feeling of hitting is maintained without executing the effect of inciting only the time saving state excessively.

(B18) Depending on the type of the common specific effect, the degree of expectation (ratio) of the time saving symbol (special display result) when the special effect is executed may be different. As a result, it is possible to improve the interest of the game because the expected feeling of hitting is maintained without executing the effect of inciting only the time saving state excessively.

(B19) A predetermined effect different from the common specific effect (for example, an active display in which the display mode can be changed depending on the degree of expectation for a hit (a display moved from the display position of the hold display to another display position, and is currently being executed). The expectation (ratio) that becomes the time saving symbol (special display result) is made different according to the production mode of the production) that displays the effect that can suggest the expectation of the hit corresponding to the variable display of. May be good. As a result, it is possible to improve the interest of the game because the expected feeling of hitting is maintained without executing the effect of inciting only the time saving state excessively.

(B20) In a special effect that can be executed when a time-saving symbol (special display result) is obtained, a winning symbol (specification) is executed after an effect (such as a time-saving suggestion effect) that suggests a time-saving symbol (special display result) is executed. It may be possible to execute an effect of notifying the display result) (such as a special jackpot whose game value is higher than that of the time saving state). As a result, it is possible to improve the interest of the game because the expected feeling of hitting is maintained without executing the effect of inciting only the time saving state excessively.

(B21) The CPU 103 for game control can be controlled to a time saving state (special state) in which the number of time saving times (time saving duration) is different according to the types of time saving symbols (special display results) provided in a plurality of types (for example, the first The 1st time reduction symbol: 50 times of time reduction, the 2nd time reduction symbol: 100 times of time reduction, etc.), the effect control CPU 120 is given when the time reduction symbol is stopped depending on the type of effect executed (for example, the type of reach effect). You may execute effects with different number of time reductions (duration). As a result, depending on the type of production, the player's attention can be focused on the subsequent time reduction, and the game interest can be improved.

(B22) Based on the fact that the variable display result (special display result) of the time saving symbol is displayed in the special state in the normal state, the game is controlled to shift from the normal state to the time saving state (special state), and the progress of the game is controlled. A command is transmitted from the game control CPU 103 (game control means), and the effect control CPU 120 (effect control means) that receives the command can execute the effect based on the command. Then, the transmitted command includes a special command that can specify the transition (control) from the normal state to the time saving state (special state), and the effect control CPU 120 executes a plurality of types of commands including the special command. When it is received, based on the look-ahead of the hold storage information, it is specified that the variable display that can shift to the time saving state (special state) is executed. Execution may be restricted (do not execute at all, make it executable in rare cases, etc.). As a result, the effect control can be suitably executed according to the game state when the time saving symbol (special display result) is displayed.

(B23) Based on the look-ahead of the hold storage information, the look-ahead for the hold storage information generated after the hold storage information specified to execute the variable display capable of shifting (controlling) to the jackpot game state (specific game state) is executed. The execution of the advance notice effect may be restricted. Then, as the look-ahead notice effect during the execution restriction of such a look-ahead notice effect, the effect of a common mode may be executed. As a result, it is possible to suppress a decline in the interest of the game by limiting the execution of the effect control that does not correspond to the actual game state as the game state shifts.

(B24) The variable display based on the hold storage information for the look-ahead target is a variable display in which the time saving symbol (special display result) is displayed, and a variable display in which the time saving symbol (special display result) is displayed and is not displayed. In both the display and the case, the execution of the look-ahead notice effect for the hold storage information generated after the hold storage information may be restricted. As a result, it is possible to suppress a decline in the interest of the game by limiting the execution of the effect control that does not correspond to the actual game state as the game state shifts.

(B25) The look-ahead notice effect during the execution restriction of the look-ahead notice effect does not execute an effect having a higher expectation than a specific expectation (for example, hold when the expectation of the color of the hold display is blue <green <red). Do not change the display color to red, etc.). As a result, it is possible to suppress a decline in the interest of the game by limiting the execution of the effect control that does not correspond to the actual game state as the game state shifts.

(B26) The look-ahead notice effect during the execution restriction of the look-ahead notice effect does not execute a specific type of effect (for example, when the expectation of the color of the hold display is blue <green <red, the color of the hold display is changed to red. Do not change, etc.). As a result, it is possible to suppress a decline in the interest of the game by limiting the execution of the effect control that does not correspond to the actual game state as the game state shifts.

(Example of time reduction control using the variable display number that resulted in a predetermined display result such as the loss variable display number)
Next, an example of time saving control using a variable display number (the number of times of continuation of the variable display that has become a loss) that has become a predetermined display result (a loss display result, a small hit display result that does not become a big hit, etc.) in a normal state will be described. As shown below, in the time saving state (special state), the number of times the variable display that has become the predetermined display result (loss display result, small hit display result that does not become a big hit, etc.) has reached the special number (for example, 1000 times). May be feasible on condition of. As the predetermined result, the time saving state (special state) may be executed on condition that the number of continuations of the variable display resulting in the lost display result reaches the special number of times.

(C1) A game based on the fact that the variable display result becomes a specific display result after the first variable display by the first special symbol and the second variable display by the second special symbol. It is possible to control to an advantageous state that is advantageous to the person, and the numerical information of the number of executions of the variable display that has become a predetermined display result (loss display result, small hit display result that does not become a big hit, etc.) in the normal state is updated, and the numerical information is concerned. When a special condition is satisfied in which the number of executions (continuation) of the variable display resulting in the predetermined display result reaches the special number (for example, 1000 times), the normal state is changed to the time saving state (special state). You may control the game to be transferred. Then, the numerical information may be updated both when the predetermined display result is obtained in the first variable display and when the predetermined display result is obtained in the second variable display. As a result, the numerical information of the number of times that the predetermined display result is obtained is continuously updated regardless of whether the first variable display or the second variable display can be executed, so that the player can be easily rescued due to the time saving state. , It is possible to increase the player's motivation to play. Therefore, it is possible to suitably realize the relief of the player due to the time saving state.

(C2) The special condition is satisfied when it is determined that a predetermined display result different from the specific display result is continuously displayed a special number of times (for example, 1000 times) based on the numerical information. You may do it. As a result, when the display results that are disadvantageous to the player are continuous, the player can be rescued by shifting to the time saving state (special state), so that the deterioration of the game interest can be suppressed.

(C3) The numerical information may be updated when the variable display is executed even in a state different from the normal state (probability change state, time saving state). As a result, the player can be suitably relieved when the display results that are disadvantageous to the player are continuous.

(C4) The numerical information may be initialized when a predetermined initialization condition is satisfied. Such an initialization condition may be satisfied by being controlled to the advantageous state. As a result, it is possible to suppress relief when it is no longer necessary to rescue the player, such as when the player is in an advantageous state, and it is possible to prevent the gambling from being increased more than necessary.

(C5) When a special display result (time saving symbol) different from the specific display result is displayed as a variable display result in the normal state, control to shift to the time saving state (special state) can be executed, and the predetermined condition May be established when the special display result is displayed. As a result, it is possible to prevent the player from being rescued when it is no longer necessary to rescue the player, such as when the player is in a time-saving state (special state) that is advantageous to the player, and to prevent the gambling from being increased more than necessary. Can be done.

(C6) The predetermined condition may be satisfied when the variable display is executed a special number of times. As a result, it is possible to control the time saving state (special state) until the next advantageous state occurs, so that the degree of relief for the player can be increased.

(C7) Various data including the numerical information can be backed up and stored when a power failure occurs due to a power failure or the like, and the backup is stored when a specific condition such as an initialization operation at power-on is satisfied. The data can be initialized, and the numerical information may be initialized when the specific condition is satisfied. As a result, the numerical information backed up at the time of power failure is initialized at the time of data initialization and does not remain, so that it is suppressed from being disadvantageous to the amusement park side.

(C8) Based on the fact that the numerical information has reached the special number of times (for example, 1000 times or more), it is possible to control the time saving state (special state) for a period of the special number of times or more (for example, 1000 times or more). In the time saving state (special state), it is possible to control the time saving state (special state) again based on the numerical information becoming the special number of times, and the first time saving state (special state) and A different effect may be executed in the second time saving state (special state). As a result, in a game that is in an extremely disadvantageous state such as being controlled by the second time saving state (special state), the second time saving state shortens the variable display time as compared with the first time saving state. For example, it is possible to change the appearance of the production, and it is possible to prevent the deterioration of the game entertainment. It should be noted that the same effect may be executed in the first time saving state (special state) and the second time saving state (special state) without executing such an effect. This makes it possible to prevent the player from being aware that the player is in an extremely disadvantageous state, such as being controlled by the second time saving state (special state), and suppresses a decline in the interest in the game. be able to.

(C9) When the value of the special figure process flag is the first numerical value (0 to 2), the first process related to the variable display is executed, and the value of the special figure process flag is a second numerical value (4 or later) different from the first numerical value. ), The second process related to the advantageous state (big hit game state) is executed, and when the value of the special figure process flag is a third numerical value (3) different from the first numerical value and the second numerical value, the special condition is satisfied. The third process for controlling the time saving state (special state) based on the above is executed. Also. It is possible to hit the game ball into the first path (left side game area) and the second path (right side game area). In the normal state, the game ball is hit into the first path, and in the time saving state (special state), the second path. A game is played by hitting a game ball into the path. Then, during the execution of the third process, although it is not controlled to the time saving state (special state), it is notified that the second path should be fired (for example, right-handed notification by a right-handed lamp or the like). It may be. Further, during the execution of the third process, a notification effect of shifting to the time saving state (special state) may be produced. As a result, even if a new function is installed in the gaming machine and the specifications are complicated, it is possible to perform appropriate control. For example, by turning on the right-handed lamp by the CPU 103 for game control, it is possible to perform an effect of notifying the firing direction early (before the actual start of the time saving fluctuation) when actually shifting to the time saving state (special state). It becomes.

(C10) When the specific display result is displayed in the variable display in which the special condition is satisfied, the second process may be executed after the execution of the first process, and the third process may not be executed. .. As a result, the control to the advantageous state is prioritized over the control to the time saving state (special state) based on the establishment of the special condition. The decrease can be suppressed.

(C11) The numerical information is updated when the variable display is started, and the numerical information becomes a specific value based on the updated numerical information becoming a specific value corresponding to the special number of times. After the variable display ends (start of next fluctuation, waiting for customers), the time is controlled to a shorter time state (special state), and when the updated numerical information reaches a specific value corresponding to the special number of times, special information (special number of times reached). When changing the flag) from the first numerical value to the second numerical value (flag set) and controlling to the time saving state (special state), the special information is changed from the second numerical value to the first numerical value (flag reset). You may. As a result, it is possible to preferably execute the control of shifting to the time saving state (special state) by managing the special information.

(C12) The CPU 103 for game control selects and determines a variation pattern of the variable display, and selects and determines a variation pattern of a symbol determination time that differs depending on whether the special information is the first information or the second information. You may do so. As a result, the effect can be suitably executed when the variable display of the special number of times is executed.

(C13) When the value of the special figure process flag is the first numerical value (0 to 2), the first process related to the variable display is executed, and the value of the special figure process flag is a second numerical value (4 or later) different from the first numerical value. ), The second process related to the advantageous state (big hit game state) is executed, and when the value of the special figure process flag is the third numerical value (3) different from the first numerical value and the second numerical value, the special condition is satisfied. The third process for controlling the time saving state (special state) is executed. Also. A command is transmitted from the game control CPU 103 (game control means) that controls the progress of the game, and the effect control CPU 120 (effect control means) that receives the command can execute the effect based on the command. Then, it may be possible to transmit specific information (background designation, fluctuation pattern) according to the case where the value of the special figure process flag is the second numerical value and the third numerical value in the special state. .. As a result, even if a new function is installed in the gaming machine and the specifications are complicated, it is possible to perform appropriate control. For example, since different gaming states can be suitably identified, game control becomes easy. Then, if the command is different according to the game state identified at that time, the effect control CPU 120 (effect control means) can execute suitable effect control according to the game state.

(C14) In the time saving state (special state), when the special condition is satisfied, the value of the special figure process flag is changed to the first numerical value, the second numerical value, and the fourth numerical value different from the third numerical value. By doing so, the time saving state (special state) may be controlled again. As a result, even if a new function is installed in the gaming machine and the specifications are complicated, it is possible to perform appropriate control.

(C15) In the time saving state (special state), the case where the time saving state (special state) is controlled based on the display of the specific display result (hit symbol) and the case where the special condition (variable display number of times) is displayed. It is possible to execute different effects depending on whether the condition) is satisfied and the time is controlled to the time saving state (special state) (for example, the time saving state is set when the variable display number is equal to or more than the special number of times). In some cases, the fluctuation time is shorter than when the time is shortened after the jackpot game state ends). As a result, it is possible to perform the production of a time-saving state (special state) according to the game situation, and it is possible to improve the game entertainment.

(C16) In the time saving state (special state), the case where the time saving state (special state) is controlled based on the display of the specific display result (hit symbol) and the case where the special condition (variable display number of times) is displayed. The same effect may be executed when the condition) is satisfied and the time is controlled to the time saving state (special state) (for example, the time saving state is set when the variable display number is equal to or more than the special number of times). The fluctuation time is the same when the time is shortened and when the time is shortened after the big hit is completed). As a result, since new production data and the like are not required, the development cost is not increased, and the game entertainment can be improved by not confusing the player.

(C17) In the time saving state (special state), the case where the time saving state (special state) is controlled based on the display of the special display result (time saving symbol) and the case where the special condition (variable display number of times) is displayed. It is possible to execute different effects depending on whether the condition) is satisfied and the time is controlled to the time saving state (special state) (for example, the time saving state is set when the variable display number is equal to or more than the special number of times). In some cases, the fluctuation time is shorter than when the time is shortened after the big hit is completed). As a result, it is possible to perform the production of a time-saving state (special state) according to the game situation, and it is possible to improve the game entertainment.

(C18) In the time saving state (special state), the case where the time saving state (special state) is controlled based on the display of the special display result (time saving symbol) and the case where the special condition (variable display number of times) is displayed. The same effect may be executed when the condition) is satisfied and the time is controlled to the time saving state (special state) (for example, the time saving state is set when the variable display number is equal to or more than the special number of times). In such a case, the fluctuation time is shorter than when the time is shortened after the big hit is completed). As a result, since new production data and the like are not required, the development cost is not increased, and the game entertainment can be improved by not confusing the player.

(C19) Various data including the numerical information can be backed up and stored when a power failure occurs due to a power failure or the like, and the game control CPU 103 receives predetermined information (based on the backed up and stored data when the power is turned on. It is possible to transmit a ram clear command at the time of cold start and a command for notifying the number of fluctuations displayed until the end of the time saving state at the time of hot start) to the effect control CPU 120, and the effect control CPU 120 receives the predetermined information. A suggestion effect regarding the number of times the variable display was executed in a predetermined period after the power was turned on (so-called morning output is different, the background image is different, and an effect that suggests whether the variable display is far or near within 100 rotation fluctuations is executed. (Easy, etc.) may be made feasible. It is possible to give the player a motivation to play the game in the morning, so that the operating rate of the game machine increases and the processing load does not increase.

(C20) The game control CPU 103 can transmit specific information (a command capable of specifying information related to the time saving state) to the effect control CPU 120 in connection with the execution of the variable display, and the effect control CPU 120 is capable of transmitting the effect control CPU 120. It may be possible to execute a special effect (such as an effect of suggesting the end of the number of time-saving states) related to being controlled to a special state based on the establishment of a special condition based on the specific information. Then, as the specific information, the first specific information (first background designation, dedicated countdown effect) capable of specifying that the difference between the number of times the variable display is executed and the special number of times is equal to or less than a predetermined value (for example, 127) is specified. Information) and second specific information (such as a command that counts down every 100 rotations) that can specify that the difference between the number of times the variable display is executed and the special number of times is larger than a predetermined value (for example, 127). May be good. As a result, it is possible to reduce the risk of unknowingly causing a loss by periodically suggesting the function to the player, and it is possible to preferably realize the command processing.

(C21) The effect control CPU 120 is put into a time saving state (special state) when the special condition is satisfied based on the execution of the variable display of the first predetermined number of times (for example, 300 times) less than the special number of times. It is possible to execute a suggestion effect (for time saving state suggestion effect control) suggesting that it is controlled, and a second predetermined number of times (for example, a second predetermined number of times) less than the first predetermined number of times is executed before the variable display of the special number of times is executed. The suggestion effect can be executed every time the variable display (such as 100 times) is executed. As a result, it is possible to reduce the risk of unknowingly causing a loss by regularly suggesting the function to the player.

(C22) Various data including the numerical information can be backed up and stored when a power failure occurs due to a power failure or the like, and the game control CPU 103 is used when a specific condition such as an initialization operation at power-on is satisfied. The backup-stored data can be initialized, and the effect control CPU 120 has the special condition (variable) after the backup-stored data is initialized and before the specific display result is displayed. The special display result (hit symbol) is displayed after the specific display result (winning symbol) is displayed when the time saving state (special state) is controlled based on the establishment of the display count condition) and after the backup-stored data is initialized. Different effects (such as different effects when shifting to the time saving state) are executed when the time is controlled to the special state based on the satisfaction of the condition and when the time saving state (special state) is controlled. As a result, even if a new function is installed in the gaming machine and the specifications are complicated, it is possible to perform appropriate control. In addition, the player can grasp whether or not the backup-stored data has been initialized depending on the difference in the production. Therefore, for example, in the case of a gaming machine in which the jackpot probability setting can be changed, the setting is changed. Since it is possible to grasp the possibility that the setting has been made, the number of elements for guessing the setting can be increased and the game interest can be improved.

(C23) Various data including the numerical information can be backed up and stored when a power failure occurs due to a power failure or the like, and the game control CPU 103 is used when a specific condition such as an initialization operation at power-on is satisfied. The backup-stored data can be initialized, and the effect control CPU 120 has the special condition (variable) after the backup-stored data is initialized and before the specific display result is displayed. The special display result (hit symbol) is displayed after the specific display result (winning symbol) is displayed when the time saving state (special state) is controlled based on the establishment of the display count condition) and after the backup-stored data is initialized. When it is controlled to a special state based on the satisfaction of a condition, and after being controlled to a time saving state (special state), different effects are executed (for example, the effect after shifting to the time saving state is different). As a result, even if a new function is installed in the gaming machine and the specifications are complicated, it is possible to perform appropriate control. In addition, the player can grasp whether or not the backup-stored data has been initialized depending on the difference in the production. Therefore, for example, in the case of a gaming machine in which the jackpot probability setting can be changed, the setting is changed. Since it is possible to grasp the possibility that the setting has been made, the number of elements for guessing the setting can be increased and the game interest can be improved.

(D1) The execution ratio of the group notice effect may be different depending on whether the result of the variable display is the result of deriving the reduced working hours symbol, the case where a big hit occurs, or the case where the result is lost.

The present invention is not limited to the pachinko gaming machine 1 described above, and various modifications and applications are possible without departing from the gist of the present invention. Each configuration related to the features of the pachinko gaming machine 1 may be appropriately combined with a part or all of each configuration related to other feature portions. The feature portions thus combined or the individual feature portions that are not combined may be appropriately combined with a part or all of each configuration related to the other feature portions.

The above-mentioned pachinko gaming machine 1 is a pay-out type gaming machine that pays out a predetermined number of gaming media as a prize based on the occurrence of a prize, but is an enclosed type that encloses the gaming medium and gives a score based on the occurrence of the winning. It may be a gaming machine.

Only one type of symbol (for example, a symbol indicating "-") is displayed during the variable display of the special symbol, and the variable display may be performed by repeating the display and extinguishing of the symbol. Further, even if the symbol is displayed during the variable display, the symbol may not be displayed when the variable display is stopped (the symbol indicating "-" may not be displayed as the display result).

In the above description, the pachinko gaming machine 1 is shown as a gaming machine, but a medal is inserted and a predetermined number of bets is set, and a plurality of types of symbols are rotated according to the operation of the operation lever by the player, and the player determines the pachinko gaming machine 1. When a symbol is stopped in response to an operation of the stop button, if the combination of stop symbols becomes a specific combination of symbols, a slot machine capable of executing a game in which a predetermined number of medals are paid out to the player (for example, a big bonus, The present invention can also be applied to a slot machine equipped with one or more of regular bonus, RT, AT, ART, and CZ (hereinafter, bonus, etc.).

In this specification, one of the expressions for comparison of various ratios such as the execution ratio of the production (expressions such as "high", "low", and "differentiate") is "0%". It may be included. For example, one may have a percentage of "0%" and the other may have a percentage of "100%" or less than "100%".

It should be considered that the embodiments disclosed this time are exemplary in all respects and not restrictive. The scope of the present invention is shown by the scope of claims rather than the above description, and it is intended to include all modifications within the meaning and scope equivalent to the scope of claims.

1 Pachinko game machine, 2 game board, 3 game machine frame, 5 image display device, 5C, 5L, 5R decorative pattern display area, 6A winning ball device, 6B variable winning ball device, 8L, 8R speaker, 9 game effect lamp 10, General winning opening, 11 Main board, 12 Production control board, 13 Voice control board, 14 Lamp control board, 15 Relay board, 20 Special figure LED board, 21 Gate switch, 22A 1st start port switch, 22B 2nd start Mouth switch, 23 count switch, 24 V winning switch, 30 hitting operation handle, 31A stick controller, 31B push button, 32 movable body, 35A controller sensor unit, 35B push sensor, 41 passing gate, 50 4th symbol unit, 81, 82,83 solenoid, 100 game control microcomputer, 101,121 ROM, 102,122 RAM, 104,124 random number circuit, 106 RTC, 110 switch circuit, 111 output circuit, 123 display control unit.

Claims (1)

It is a gaming machine that can perform variable display and control to an advantageous state that is advantageous to the player when a specific display result is displayed as the variable display result.
A game control means that controls the progress of the game,
It is provided with an effect executing means capable of executing an effect based on the information from the game control means.
The game control means
The deciding means for determining the advantageous state and
A determination means for determining that the advantageous state is obtained before the determination of the determination means,
A state control means that can control a special state in which variable display is easier to execute than the normal state,
Includes an information transmitting means capable of transmitting a plurality of types of information including determination result information capable of identifying that the determination means is controlled to the advantageous state when the determination means is determined to be in the advantageous state to the effect executing means. ,
When a special display result different from the specific display result is displayed as the variable display result in the normal state, the state control means controls from the normal state to the special state based on the special display result.
The determination means can determine that the special state is reached before the state control means controls the special state.
The information transmitting means can transmit special information that can be specified to be controlled to the special state when the determining means determines that the special state is set.
The effect executing means is
When the determination result information is received, the look-ahead effect can be executed based on the determination result information.
When the determination result information is received after receiving the special information, the execution of the look-ahead effect based on the determination result information is restricted.
The effect executing means does not execute the specific type of the look-ahead effect during the limitation of the look-ahead effect.
Moreover,
It is equipped with a group effect execution means for executing a group effect that displays an image in which a plurality of characters progress as a group.
The image display period in the group effect includes a first display period, a second display period, and a third display period.
The first display period is a period from the start of the display of the first character in the group effect until the new display of the character is performed and the display of any of the characters is first completed.
The second display period is a period longer than the first display period, and is a period during which a new display of the character is performed and the display of the displayed character ends.
The third display period is a period in which the display of the displayed character continues without a new display of the character.
In the first display period, from the first situation in which a part of the first displayed character is displayed, a part of the first displayed character is displayed more than in the first situation and second. A gaming machine in which a part of the displayed character is displayed in the second situation.

Images